Manual Caesar II 2019

CAESAR II
User's Guide
Version 2019 (11.0)
October 2018
Copyright
Copyright © 1985-2018 Hexagon AB and/or its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved.
This computer program, including software, icons, graphic symbols, documentation, file formats, and audio-visual displays; may be
used only as pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Hexagon AB
and/or third parties which is protected by patent, trademark, copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be
provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Hexagon AB.
-2017 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved.
Portions of the user interface copyright © 2012-2017 Telerik AD.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with
subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the
United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS
252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Hexagon PPM
305 Intergraph Way
Madison, AL 35758
Documentation
Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form, User's Guides, Installation Guides, Reference Guides,
Administrator's Guides, Customization Guides, Programmer's Guides, Configuration Guides and Help Guides delivered with a
particular software product.
Other Documentation
Other Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form and delivered with software or on Intergraph Smart Support,
SharePoint, or box.net, any documentation related to work processes, workflows, and best practices that is provided by Intergraph
as guidance for using a software product.
Terms of Use
a. Use of a software product and Documentation is subject to the Software License Agreement ("SLA") delivered with the software
product unless the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the Licensee has
a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and
govern the use of this software product and Documentation. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license
agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the Documentation as
defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for Licensee's internal, non-commercial
use. The Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.
b. For use of Documentation or Other Documentation where end user does not receive a SLA or does not have a valid license
agreement with Intergraph, Intergraph grants the Licensee a non-exclusive license to use the Documentation or Other
-commercial use. Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a
-commercial use. The Other Documentation
may not be printed for resale or redistribution. This license contained in this subsection b) may be terminated at any time and
for any reason by Intergraph Corporation by giving written notice to Licensee.
Disclaimer of Warranties
Except for any express warranties as may be stated in the SLA or separate license or separate terms and conditions, Intergraph
Corporation disclaims any and all express or implied warranties including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed
a modification or amendment of such disclaimer. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its
publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
CAESAR II User's Guide 2

The software, Documentation and Other Documentation discussed in this document are furnished under a license and may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.
Limitation of Damages
IN NO EVENT WILL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF USE OR PRODUCTION, LOSS OF
REVENUE OR PROFIT, LOSS OF DATA, OR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, EVEN IF INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN PAID BY LICENSEE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AT THE TIME THE CLAIM IS
MADE. EXCEPT WHERE PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO CLAIM, REGARDLESS OF FORM, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE BROUGHT BY LICENSEE MORE THAN TWO (2)
YEARS AFTER THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO THE CAUSE OF ACTION HAS OCCURRED.
IF UNDER THE LAW RULED APPLICABLE ANY PART OF THIS SECTION IS INVALID, THEN INTERGRAPH LIMITS ITS
LIABILITY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY SAID LAW.
Export Controls
-off-the-shelf software products, customized software and/or third-party software, including any
s, is subject to
the export control laws and regulations of the United States of America. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. To the extent
prohibited by United States or other applicable laws, Intergraph Corporation software products, customized software, Technical Data,
and/or third-party software, or any derivatives thereof, obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors must not
be exported or re-exported, directly or indirectly (including via remote access) under the following circumstances:
a. To Cuba, Iran, North Korea, the Crimean region of Ukraine, or Syria, or any national of these countries or territories.
b. To any person or entity listed on any United States government denial list, including, but not limited to, the United States
Department of Commerce Denied Persons, Entities, and Unverified Lists, the United States Department of Treasury Specially
Designated Nationals List, and the United States Department of State Debarred List
(https://build.export.gov/main/ecr/eg_main_023148).
c. To any entity when Customer knows, or has reason to know, the end use of the software product, customized software,
Technical Data and/or third-party software obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors is related to the
design, development, production, or use of missiles, chemical, biological, or nuclear weapons, or other un-safeguarded or
sensitive nuclear uses.
d. To any entity when Customer knows, or has reason to know, that an illegal reshipment will take place.
Any questions regarding export/re-export of relevant Intergraph Corporation software product, customized software, Technical Data
and/or third-party software obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors, should be addressed to PP
Export Compliance Department, 305 Intergraph Way, Madison, Alabama 35758 USA or at exportcompliance@intergraph.com.
Customer shall hold harmless and indemnify PPM and Hexagon Group Company for any causes of action, claims, costs, expenses
and/or damages resulting to PPM or Hexagon Group Company from a breach by Customer.
Trademarks
Intergraph®, the Intergraph logo®, Intergraph Smart®, SmartPlant®, SmartMarine, SmartSketch®, SmartPlant Cloud®, PDS®,
FrameWorks®, I-Route, I-Export, ISOGEN®, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager®, SupportModeler®, SAPPHIRE®, TANK, PV Elite®,
CADWorx®, CADWorx DraftPro®, GTSTRUDL®, and CAESAR II® are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation
or its affiliates, parents, subsidiaries. Hexagon and the Hexagon logo are registered trademarks of Hexagon AB or its subsidiaries.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their
respective owners.

Contents
What's New in CAESAR II ......................................................................................................................... 18
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 21
About the CAESAR II Documentation .................................................................................................. 22
Software Support/User Assistance ....................................................................................................... 22
Software Revision Procedures.............................................................................................................. 23
Updates and License Types ................................................................................................................. 25
Getting Started ........................................................................................................................................... 26

Starting CAESAR II ............................................................................................................................... 26
Understanding Jobs .............................................................................................................................. 27
Basic Operation..................................................................................................................................... 28
Create a new job ............................................................................................................................ 28
Generate piping input ..................................................................................................................... 29
Check for errors in the model ......................................................................................................... 32
Build load cases ............................................................................................................................. 33
Run a static analysis....................................................................................................................... 34
Review static output ....................................................................................................................... 34
Main Window......................................................................................................................................... 34
File Menu ........................................................................................................................................ 35
Input Menu ...................................................................................................................................... 37
Analysis Menu ................................................................................................................................ 38
Output Menu ................................................................................................................................... 41
Language Menu .............................................................................................................................. 42
Tools Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 43
Diagnostics Menu ........................................................................................................................... 45
ESL Menu ....................................................................................................................................... 48
View Menu ...................................................................................................................................... 49
FEA Tools Menu ............................................................................................................................. 49
Help Menu ...................................................................................................................................... 50
Quick Access Toolbar..................................................................................................................... 53
ASCII Text File Rules ............................................................................................................................ 53
Configuration Editor .................................................................................................................................. 55

Computational Control .......................................................................................................................... 57
Convergence Tolerances ............................................................................................................... 57
Input Spreadsheet Defaults ............................................................................................................ 59
Miscellaneous ................................................................................................................................. 61
Database Definitions ............................................................................................................................. 63
Databases ...................................................................................................................................... 64
ODBC Settings ............................................................................................................................... 69
FRP Pipe Properties ............................................................................................................................. 69
Material Properties ......................................................................................................................... 70
Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 72

Contents
Geometry Directives ............................................................................................................................. 73

Bends.............................................................................................................................................. 74
Input Items ...................................................................................................................................... 75
Graphic Settings.................................................................................................................................... 76
Advanced Options .......................................................................................................................... 78
Background Colors ......................................................................................................................... 78
CADWorx Options .......................................................................................................................... 79
Component Colors .......................................................................................................................... 80
Marker Options ............................................................................................................................... 83
Miscellaneous Options ................................................................................................................... 84
Output Colors ................................................................................................................................. 88
Text Options ................................................................................................................................... 89
Visual Options ................................................................................................................................ 90
Miscellaneous Options .......................................................................................................................... 93
Input Items ...................................................................................................................................... 94
Output Items ................................................................................................................................... 95
System Level Items ........................................................................................................................ 96
SIFs and Stresses ................................................................................................................................. 98
Advanced Settings .......................................................................................................................... 99
Code-Specific Settings ................................................................................................................. 100
General Settings ........................................................................................................................... 103
Legacy Settings ............................................................................................................................ 108
Set/Change Password ........................................................................................................................ 110
New Password .............................................................................................................................. 111
Access Protected Data ................................................................................................................. 111
Change Password ........................................................................................................................ 111
Remove Password ....................................................................................................................... 111
Piping Input Reference ........................................................................................................................... 112

Classic Piping Input Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 113
Navigating the Classic Piping Input Dialog Box using the Function Keys .................................... 114
Help Screens and Units ................................................................................................................ 114
Node Numbers ............................................................................................................................. 114
Deltas............................................................................................................................................ 116
Pipe Sizes ..................................................................................................................................... 120
Operating Conditions .................................................................................................................... 124
Component Information ................................................................................................................ 127
Boundary Conditions .................................................................................................................... 161
Loading Conditions ....................................................................................................................... 212
Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 217
Elastic Properties .......................................................................................................................... 246
Densities ....................................................................................................................................... 248
Line Number ................................................................................................................................. 251
Element Name .............................................................................................................................. 252
Available Commands .......................................................................................................................... 252
File Menu ...................................................................................................................................... 252
Edit Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 259
Model Menu .................................................................................................................................. 270
Environment Menu ....................................................................................................................... 319
Global Menu ................................................................................................................................. 362

Contents
Options Menu ............................................................................................................................... 369

View Menu .................................................................................................................................... 385
Tools Menu ................................................................................................................................... 406
3D Modeler .......................................................................................................................................... 414
Building Models Quickly ............................................................................................................... 418
Configuring 3D Graphics .............................................................................................................. 422
Changing the Model Display ........................................................................................................ 424
Highlighting Graphics ................................................................................................................... 425
Manipulating the Toolbar .............................................................................................................. 427
Displaying Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, and Wind/Wave Loads ............................... 428
Saving an Image for Later Presentation ....................................................................................... 429
Walking Through the Model ......................................................................................................... 430
Moving Elements .......................................................................................................................... 431
S3D/SPR Model View ......................................................................................................................... 431
Load an S3D/SPR Model ............................................................................................................. 432
Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model ......................................................................................................... 436
Dim S3D/SPR Model .................................................................................................................... 436
S3D/SPR Visibility Options ........................................................................................................... 436
Structural Steel Modeler ......................................................................................................................... 438

Structural Steel Model Basics ............................................................................................................. 438
Structural Steel Graphics .................................................................................................................... 443
CAESAR II Structural Input ................................................................................................................. 444
Create a model using the Structural Steel Wizard ....................................................................... 445
Structural Steel Input Examples .......................................................................................................... 447
Structural Steel Example #1 ......................................................................................................... 448
Insert Menu ......................................................................................................................................... 474
Before Current Element ................................................................................................................ 474
After the Current Element ............................................................................................................. 474
At End of Model ............................................................................................................................ 474
Commands Menu ................................................................................................................................ 474
Node ............................................................................................................................................. 474
NFill............................................................................................................................................... 475
NGen ............................................................................................................................................ 476
Fix ................................................................................................................................................. 478
Elem.............................................................................................................................................. 481
EFill ............................................................................................................................................... 482
EGen............................................................................................................................................. 484
EDim ............................................................................................................................................. 488
Angle............................................................................................................................................. 490
Unif ............................................................................................................................................... 491
Orient ............................................................................................................................................ 493
Load .............................................................................................................................................. 495
Wind.............................................................................................................................................. 496
GLoads ......................................................................................................................................... 498
MatId ............................................................................................................................................. 498
SecId............................................................................................................................................. 500
Free End Connections - FREE ..................................................................................................... 502

Contents
Beams........................................................................................................................................... 505
Braces........................................................................................................................................... 507
Columns ....................................................................................................................................... 510
Default .......................................................................................................................................... 513
Comment ...................................................................................................................................... 513
Vertical .......................................................................................................................................... 514
Unit ............................................................................................................................................... 515
List Options ................................................................................................................................... 515
Structural Databases .......................................................................................................................... 516
AISC 1977 Database .................................................................................................................... 516
AISC 1989 Database .................................................................................................................... 523
Australian 1990 Database ............................................................................................................ 529
German 1991 Database ............................................................................................................... 531
South African 1992 Database ...................................................................................................... 533
Korean 1990 Database................................................................................................................. 534
UK 1993 Database ....................................................................................................................... 535
Underground Pipe Modeler .................................................................................................................... 536

From Node .......................................................................................................................................... 538
To Node .............................................................................................................................................. 538
Soil Model No. ..................................................................................................................................... 538
From/To End Mesh ............................................................................................................................. 539
User-Defined Lateral "K" ..................................................................................................................... 539
Ultimate Lateral Load .......................................................................................................................... 540
User-Defined Axial Stif ........................................................................................................................ 540
Ultimate Axial Load ............................................................................................................................. 540
User-Defined Upward Stif ................................................................................................................... 540
Ultimate Upward Load ........................................................................................................................ 541
User-Defined Downward Stif ............................................................................................................... 541
Ultimate Downward Load .................................................................................................................... 541
Soil Models.......................................................................................................................................... 542
CAESAR II Basic Model ............................................................................................................... 542
American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model ......................................................................................... 544
Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box ..................................................................................................... 548
Model an underground piping system ................................................................................................. 555
Buried Pipe Example .......................................................................................................................... 556
Static Analysis ......................................................................................................................................... 563

Static Analysis Overview ..................................................................................................................... 563
Error Checking .............................................................................................................................. 564
What is a Load Case? .................................................................................................................. 565
Working with Load Cases ................................................................................................................... 570
Editing Multiple Load Cases ......................................................................................................... 571
Building Static Load Cases .......................................................................................................... 571
Understanding Alternate Sustained (SUS) and Occasional (OCC) Load Cases ......................... 581
Providing Wind Data ..................................................................................................................... 582
Providing Wave Data .................................................................................................................... 584
Running the Static Analysis .......................................................................................................... 584
Controlling Results ....................................................................................................................... 586

Contents
Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box ................................................................................... 586

Load Cases Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) .............................................. 587
Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) ............................................... 600
Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) .............................................. 619
Static Output Processor ......................................................................................................................... 623

Work with Reports ............................................................................................................................... 624
Filter Reports ................................................................................................................................ 625
Filters Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................... 627
Print or Save Reports to File Notes .............................................................................................. 631
Standard Reports ................................................................................................................................ 632
Displacements Report .................................................................................................................. 634
Restraints Report .......................................................................................................................... 634
Restraint Report - In Local Element Coordinates ......................................................................... 635
Restraint Summary ....................................................................................................................... 637
Nozzle Check Report .................................................................................................................... 637
Flange Reports ............................................................................................................................. 638
Global Element Forces ................................................................................................................. 639
Global Element Forces Extended ................................................................................................. 640
Local Element Forces ................................................................................................................... 641
Stresses ........................................................................................................................................ 642
Stresses Extended ....................................................................................................................... 643
Stress Summary ........................................................................................................................... 644
Code Compliance Report ............................................................................................................. 645
Cumulative Usage Report ............................................................................................................ 646
Bend KHK2 Evaluation Report ..................................................................................................... 647
General Computed Results ................................................................................................................. 647
Load Case Report ........................................................................................................................ 648
Hanger Table and Hanger Table with Text .................................................................................. 648
Input Echo .................................................................................................................................... 649
Miscellaneous Data ...................................................................................................................... 650
Warnings ...................................................................................................................................... 651
Output Viewer Wizard ......................................................................................................................... 651
Report Template Editor ....................................................................................................................... 652
Available Commands .......................................................................................................................... 654
View Menu .................................................................................................................................... 655
Options Menu ............................................................................................................................... 660
Plot Options Menu ........................................................................................................................ 669
Plot View Menu ............................................................................................................................. 686
Element Viewer Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 688
Dynamic Analysis .................................................................................................................................... 690

Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems...................................................................................................... 690
Random ........................................................................................................................................ 692
Harmonic ...................................................................................................................................... 692
Impulse ......................................................................................................................................... 694
Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis ......................................................................................... 696
Dynamic Analysis Workflow ................................................................................................................ 698
The Dynamic Analysis Window........................................................................................................... 699

Contents
Modal Analysis ............................................................................................................................. 700

Harmonic Analysis ........................................................................................................................ 701
Earthquake Response Spectrum Analysis ................................................................................... 701
Relief Loads and Water Hammer/Slug Flow Spectra Analysis .................................................... 701
Time History Analysis ................................................................................................................... 702
Excitation Frequencies Tab ................................................................................................................ 702
Starting Frequency ....................................................................................................................... 703
Ending Frequency ........................................................................................................................ 703
Increment ...................................................................................................................................... 703
Load Cycles .................................................................................................................................. 704
Harmonic Forces Tab ......................................................................................................................... 704
Force............................................................................................................................................. 706
Direction ....................................................................................................................................... 706
Phase............................................................................................................................................ 706
Start Node .................................................................................................................................... 706
Stop Node ..................................................................................................................................... 707
Increment ...................................................................................................................................... 707
Harmonic Displacements Tab ............................................................................................................. 708
Displacement ................................................................................................................................ 709
Direction ....................................................................................................................................... 709
Phase............................................................................................................................................ 709
Start Node .................................................................................................................................... 710
Stop Node ..................................................................................................................................... 710
Increment ...................................................................................................................................... 710
Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab .............................................................................................. 711
Name ............................................................................................................................................ 712
Range Type .................................................................................................................................. 713
Ordinate Type ............................................................................................................................... 714
Range Interpol .............................................................................................................................. 714
Ordinate Interpol ........................................................................................................................... 714
Examples ...................................................................................................................................... 714
Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab ............................................................................................ 716
Spectrum/Time History Profile ...................................................................................................... 718
Factor............................................................................................................................................ 718
Dir. ................................................................................................................................................ 718
Start Node .................................................................................................................................... 720
Stop Node ..................................................................................................................................... 720
Increment ...................................................................................................................................... 720
Anchor Movement ........................................................................................................................ 720
Force Set # ................................................................................................................................... 721
Force Sets Tab ............................................................................................................................. 721
Examples ...................................................................................................................................... 726
Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab ...................................................................................................... 731
Load Case .................................................................................................................................... 732
Factor............................................................................................................................................ 732
Examples ...................................................................................................................................... 732
Lumped Masses Tab .......................................................................................................................... 736
Mass ............................................................................................................................................. 736
Direction ....................................................................................................................................... 736
Start Node .................................................................................................................................... 737
Stop Node ..................................................................................................................................... 737

Contents
Increments .................................................................................................................................... 737

Snubbers Tab...................................................................................................................................... 738
Stiffness ........................................................................................................................................ 738
Direction ....................................................................................................................................... 738
Node ............................................................................................................................................. 738
CNode........................................................................................................................................... 738
Control Parameters Tab ...................................................................................................................... 739
Analysis Type (Harmonic/Spectrum/Modes/Range/TimeHist) ..................................................... 741
Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint Status .......................................................................... 751
Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated ............................................................................................ 753
Frequency Cutoff (HZ) .................................................................................................................. 755
Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) ....................................................... 756
Load Duration (DSRSS) (sec) ...................................................................................................... 757
Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical) .............................................................................................. 758
ZPA (Reg. Guide 1.60/UBC - g's) <or> # Time History Output Cases......................................... 759
Re-use Last Eigensolution (Frequencies and Mode Shapes) ...................................................... 762
Spatial or Modal Combination First .............................................................................................. 762
Spatial Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) ................................................................................... 763
Modal Combination Method (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) ................................................... 763
Include Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Components (Y/N) .................................................... 766
Include Missing Mass Components .............................................................................................. 767
Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Comb. Method (SRSS/ABS) .................................................. 769
Missing Mass Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) ........................................................................ 769
Directional Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) ............................................................................. 769
Mass Model (LUMPED/CONSISTENT) ....................................................................................... 770
Sturm Sequence Check on Computed Eigenvalues .................................................................... 770
Advanced Tab ..................................................................................................................................... 771
Estimated Number of Significant Figures in Eigenvalues ............................................................ 771
Jacobi Sweep Tolerance .............................................................................................................. 772
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance ........................................................................................... 772
Subspace Size (0-Not Used) ........................................................................................................ 772
No. to Converge Before Shift Allowed (0 - Not Used) .................................................................. 773
No. of Iterations Per Shift (0 - Pgm computed) ............................................................................ 773
% of Iterations Per Shift Before Orthogonalization ....................................................................... 774
Force Orthogonalization After Convergence (Y/N) ...................................................................... 774
Use Out-of-Core Eigensolver (Y/N) .............................................................................................. 774
Frequency Array Spaces .............................................................................................................. 774
Directive Builder .................................................................................................................................. 775
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data ................................................................................................................... 776
Range ........................................................................................................................................... 777
Ordinate ........................................................................................................................................ 777
DLF/Spectrum Generator .................................................................................................................... 777
Spectrum Name............................................................................................................................ 777
Spectrum Type ............................................................................................................................. 777
Generate Spectrum ...................................................................................................................... 786
Relief Load Synthesis ......................................................................................................................... 787
Relief Load Synthesis for Gases Greater Than 15 psig ............................................................... 787
Relief Load Synthesis for Liquids ................................................................................................. 791
Example Output - Gas Relief Load Synthesis .............................................................................. 793
Example Output - Liquid Relief Load Synthesis ........................................................................... 796
Analysis Results .................................................................................................................................. 798

Contents
Modal ............................................................................................................................................ 798

Harmonic ...................................................................................................................................... 799
Spectrum ...................................................................................................................................... 800
Time History ................................................................................................................................. 800
Dynamic Output Processing .................................................................................................................. 801

Dynamic Output Window .................................................................................................................... 801
Open a Job ................................................................................................................................... 803
Enter a Report Title ...................................................................................................................... 804
View Load Cases.......................................................................................................................... 805
Send Reports to Microsoft Word .................................................................................................. 805
View Reports ................................................................................................................................ 805
Dynamic Output Animation Window ................................................................................................... 817
Save Animation to File.................................................................................................................. 818
Animation of Static Results -Displacements................................................................................. 818
Animation of Dynamic Results Modal/Spectrum ........................................................................ 818
Animation of Dynamic Results Harmonic .................................................................................. 819
Animation of Dynamic Results Time History ............................................................................. 819
Relief Load Synthesis Results ............................................................................................................ 821
Generate Stress Isometrics .................................................................................................................... 822

Add input feature information .............................................................................................................. 823
Add output feature information ............................................................................................................ 823
Add custom annotations for nodal features ........................................................................................ 824
Add custom annotations for elemental features ................................................................................. 825
Set project information ........................................................................................................................ 825
Configure annotation preferences....................................................................................................... 826
Configure isometric drawing split points ............................................................................................. 826
Create a drawing using the default style ............................................................................................. 828
Create a drawing using an existing style ............................................................................................ 828
Create a drawing using a new style .................................................................................................... 829
Create and save an annotation template ............................................................................................ 830
Apply a template ................................................................................................................................. 831
Stress Isometric Tutorials ................................................................................................................... 832
Tutorial A - Create a stress isometric drawing using the default drawing style............................ 833
Tutorial B - Add annotations for Input and Output features.......................................................... 836
Tutorial C - Add custom annotations and configure annotations preferences ............................. 838
Tutorial D - Create and apply a stress ISO template ................................................................... 841
Equipment Component and Compliance .............................................................................................. 844

Intersection Stress Intensification Factors .......................................................................................... 845
Intersection Type .......................................................................................................................... 848
Piping Code ID ............................................................................................................................. 848
Header Pipe Outside Diameter .................................................................................................... 849
Header Pipe Wall Thickness ........................................................................................................ 849
Branch Pipe Outside Diameter ..................................................................................................... 849
Branch Pipe Wall Thickness ......................................................................................................... 849
Branch Largest Diameter at Intersection ...................................................................................... 850
Pad Thickness .............................................................................................................................. 850

Contents
Intersection Crotch Radius ........................................................................................................... 851

Intersection Crotch Thickness ...................................................................................................... 851
Extrusion Crotch Radius ............................................................................................................... 851
Weld Type .................................................................................................................................... 851
Ferritic Material ............................................................................................................................. 852
Design Temperature ..................................................................................................................... 852
Bend Stress Intensification Factors .................................................................................................... 852
Bend Tab ...................................................................................................................................... 853
Trunnion Tab ................................................................................................................................ 857
WRC 107 (537)/297/PD5500 Vessel/Nozzle Stresses ....................................................................... 858
WRC Bulletin 107(537) ................................................................................................................. 861
WRC Bulletin 297 ......................................................................................................................... 883
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations .................................................................................................. 899
Flange Tab ................................................................................................................................... 900
Bolts and Gasket Tab ................................................................................................................... 904
Material Data Tab ......................................................................................................................... 914
Loads Tab ..................................................................................................................................... 916
Flange Rating ............................................................................................................................... 917
Flange Dimension Lookup ............................................................................................................ 919
Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations (B31G) ............................................................................. 920
Data Tab ....................................................................................................................................... 922
Measurements Tab....................................................................................................................... 924
Expansion Joint Rating ....................................................................................................................... 925
Geometry ...................................................................................................................................... 928
Displacements and Rotations ....................................................................................................... 929
Allowables .................................................................................................................................... 930
Structural Steel Checks - AISC ........................................................................................................... 930
Global Input .................................................................................................................................. 932
Local Member Data Tab ............................................................................................................... 935
Equipment Manager ............................................................................................................................ 938
Analyze custom piping load cases on equipment ........................................................................ 942
Analyze load cases imported from a model on equipment .......................................................... 943
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) ........................................................................................................ 944
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) ............................................................................................. 948
API 560 (Heaters) ......................................................................................................................... 951
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) .................................................................................................... 953
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) ........................................................................................ 957
Load Cases - Input Tab ................................................................................................................ 960
Load Case Sets - Input Tab ......................................................................................................... 963
Output Tab .................................................................................................................................... 965
HEI Standard ....................................................................................................................................... 965
HEI Nozzle .................................................................................................................................... 967
Technical Discussions ............................................................................................................................ 969

Rigid Element Application ................................................................................................................... 969
Rigid Weight ................................................................................................................................. 970
Fluid Weight in Rigid Elements .................................................................................................... 970
Insulation Weight on Rigid Elements ............................................................................................ 970
In-Line Flange Evaluation ................................................................................................................... 971
Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method ........................................................................................... 971

Contents
ASME NC-3658.3 Calculation Method for B16.5 Flanged Joints with High
Strength Bolting ............................................................................................................................ 971
Cold Spring ......................................................................................................................................... 972
Expansion Joints ................................................................................................................................. 975
Effective ID ................................................................................................................................... 977
Hanger Sizing Algorithm ..................................................................................................................... 977
Spring Design Requirements ....................................................................................................... 978
Pre-Selection Load Case 1
Weight Case ................................................................................................................................. 978
Pre-Selection Load Case 2 Setting Hanger Deflection through the Operating
Case ............................................................................................................................................. 979
Post-Selection Load Case (Optional) Setting the Actual Installed (Cold) Load ........................ 979
Create Spring Load Cases ........................................................................................................... 980
Constant Effort Support ................................................................................................................ 981
Including the Spring Hanger Stiffness in the Design Algorithm.................................................... 981
Other Notes on Hanger Sizing ..................................................................................................... 981
Class 1 Branch Flexibilities ................................................................................................................. 982
Modeling Friction Effects ..................................................................................................................... 984
Nonlinear Code Compliance ............................................................................................................... 986
Sustained Stresses and Nonlinear Restraints .................................................................................... 986
Notes on Occasional Load Cases ................................................................................................ 988
Static Seismic Inertial Loads ............................................................................................................... 989
Wind Loads ......................................................................................................................................... 990
Elevation ....................................................................................................................................... 992
ASCE 7 Wind and Seismic Load Combinations ................................................................................. 992
Using KHK to Analyze Seismic Conditions ......................................................................................... 993
Underground Pipe Loads .................................................................................................................... 997
Hydrodynamic (Wave and Current) Loading ...................................................................................... 999
Ocean Wave Particulars ............................................................................................................. 1000
Applicable Wave Theory Determination ..................................................................................... 1001
Pseudo-Static Hydrodynamic Loading ....................................................................................... 1001
Airy Wave Theory Implementation ............................................................................................. 1003
STOKES 5th Order Wave Theory Implementation .................................................................... 1003
Stream Function Wave Theory Implementation ......................................................................... 1003
Ocean Currents .......................................................................................................................... 1004
Technical Notes on CAESAR II Hydrodynamic Loading ............................................................ 1005
Input: Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters in CAESAR II ...................................................... 1008
Current Data ............................................................................................................................... 1009
Wave Data .................................................................................................................................. 1009
Seawater Data ............................................................................................................................ 1011
Piping Element Data ................................................................................................................... 1011
References ................................................................................................................................. 1012
Creep Loading................................................................................................................................... 1012
Evaluating Vessel Stresses .............................................................................................................. 1014
ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Comprehensive Analysis (pre-2007) .................. 1015
Elastic Analyses of Shells near Nozzles Using WRC 107 ......................................................... 1016
Description of Alternate Simplified ASME Section VIII Division 2 Elastic Nozzle
Analysis pre-2007 ....................................................................................................................... 1017
ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Simplified Analysis pre-2007 ............................... 1018
Inclusion of Missing Mass Correction ............................................................................................... 1019
Maximum Stress Versus Extracted Loads ................................................................................. 1023

Contents
Fatigue Analysis Using CAESAR II................................................................................................... 1024

Fatigue Basics ............................................................................................................................ 1024
Fatigue Analysis of Piping Systems ........................................................................................... 1025
Static Analysis Fatigue Example ................................................................................................ 1026
Fatigue Capabilities in Dynamic Analysis ................................................................................... 1033
Creating a .fat File ...................................................................................................................... 1034
Calculation of Fatigue Stresses .................................................................................................. 1035
Pipe Stress Analysis of FRP Piping .................................................................................................. 1037
Underlying Theory ...................................................................................................................... 1037
FRP Analysis Using CAESAR II ................................................................................................. 1051
Code Compliance Considerations .................................................................................................... 1057
General Comments on Configuration Settings' Effect on Piping Code Calculations ................. 1057
Code-Specific Notes ................................................................................................................... 1062
Local Coordinates ............................................................................................................................. 1098
Other Global Coordinate Systems.............................................................................................. 1100
The Right Hand Rule .................................................................................................................. 1100
Pipe Stress Analysis Coordinate Systems ................................................................................. 1102
Defining a Model ......................................................................................................................... 1104
Using Local Coordinates ............................................................................................................ 1106
CAESAR II Local Coordinate Definitions.................................................................................... 1106
Applications Using Global and Local Coordinates ..................................................................... 1109
Restraint Data in Local Element Coordinates ............................................................................ 1115
Transforming from Global to Local ............................................................................................. 1115
Frequently Asked Questions ...................................................................................................... 1116
Miscellaneous Processors ................................................................................................................... 1118

Material Database ............................................................................................................................. 1118
Add a new material to the database ........................................................................................... 1120
Delete a material from the database .......................................................................................... 1121
Edit a material in the database ................................................................................................... 1121
Material Number ......................................................................................................................... 1122
Material Name ............................................................................................................................ 1122
Applicable Piping Code .............................................................................................................. 1123
Composition/Type ....................................................................................................................... 1123
Material Density .......................................................................................................................... 1124
Minimum Temperature Curve (A-D) ........................................................................................... 1124
Eff, Cf, z ...................................................................................................................................... 1124
Cold Elastic Modulus .................................................................................................................. 1124
Poisson's Ratio ........................................................................................................................... 1125
FAC............................................................................................................................................. 1125
Laminate Type ............................................................................................................................ 1125
Eh / Ea ........................................................................................................................................ 1125
Temperature ............................................................................................................................... 1126
Exp. Coeff. .................................................................................................................................. 1126
Allowable Stress ......................................................................................................................... 1126
Elastic Modulus .......................................................................................................................... 1126
Yield Stress ................................................................................................................................ 1126
Ult Tensile Stress ....................................................................................................................... 1127
Weld Strength Reduction Factor (W) ......................................................................................... 1127
Temperature Dependent Stress Value ....................................................................................... 1127

Contents
Material Selection Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 1128

Database Status (Consistency Check) Dialog Box .................................................................... 1128
Accounting ........................................................................................................................................ 1128
Activating the Accounting System .............................................................................................. 1130
Units File Operations ........................................................................................................................ 1134
Create/Review Units ................................................................................................................... 1134
Change Model Units ................................................................................................................... 1138
Batch Stream Processing ................................................................................................................. 1139
Define Jobs to Run ..................................................................................................................... 1139
Analyze Specified Jobs .............................................................................................................. 1140
CAESAR II Error Processing ............................................................................................................ 1140
External Interfaces ................................................................................................................................ 1142

CAESAR II Neutral File ..................................................................................................................... 1143
Basic Element Data .................................................................................................................... 1144
Auxiliary Element Data ............................................................................................................... 1146
Miscellaneous Data Group #1 .................................................................................................... 1155
Units Conversion Data................................................................................................................ 1161
Nodal Coordinate Data ............................................................................................................... 1163
Version and Job Title Information ............................................................................................... 1164
Control Information ..................................................................................................................... 1164
Neutral File Generator ................................................................................................................ 1165
CAESAR II Data Matrix ..................................................................................................................... 1166
BOSfluids .......................................................................................................................................... 1167
AFT IMPULSE................................................................................................................................... 1167
How to Use the AFT IMPULSE Interface ................................................................................... 1167
Filename ..................................................................................................................................... 1168
Component List .......................................................................................................................... 1168
Maximum Points on Each DLF Curve ........................................................................................ 1169
Frequency Cut-Off ...................................................................................................................... 1169
PIPENET ........................................................................................................................................... 1169
Technical Discussion of the PIPENET Interface ........................................................................ 1169
How to Use the CAESAR II / PIPENET Interface ...................................................................... 1170
Filename ..................................................................................................................................... 1170
Component List .......................................................................................................................... 1171
LIQT .................................................................................................................................................. 1171
Technical Discussion of LIQT Interface...................................................................................... 1172
How to Use the LIQT Interface ................................................................................................... 1172
Example 1 ................................................................................................................................... 1173
Example 2 ................................................................................................................................... 1174
Filename ..................................................................................................................................... 1176
Component List .......................................................................................................................... 1177
Pipeplus ............................................................................................................................................ 1177
How to Use the Pipeplus Interface ............................................................................................. 1177
FlowMaster ........................................................................................................................................ 1181
How to Use the Flowmaster Interface ........................................................................................ 1182

Contents
Filename ..................................................................................................................................... 1182

Component List .......................................................................................................................... 1183
Intergraph Smart 3D PCF ........................................................................................................... 1183
Intergraph CADWorx Plant ............................................................................................................... 1184
Intergraph PDS ................................................................................................................................. 1184
File Name ................................................................................................................................... 1185
Browse ........................................................................................................................................ 1186
Minimum Anchor Node ............................................................................................................... 1186
Maximum Anchor Node .............................................................................................................. 1186
Start Node .................................................................................................................................. 1186
Increment .................................................................................................................................... 1186
Filter Out Elements Whose Diameter is Less Than ................................................................... 1186
Remove HA Elements ................................................................................................................ 1186
Force Consistent Bend Materials ............................................................................................... 1187
Include Additional Bend Nodes .................................................................................................. 1187
Enable Advanced Element Sort ................................................................................................. 1187
Model TEES as 3 Elements ....................................................................................................... 1187
Initialize Global Coordinates ....................................................................................................... 1187
Condenses Flanges/Valves ........................................................................................................ 1187
Model Rotation ........................................................................................................................... 1187
Neutral File Weight Units ............................................................................................................ 1188
Neutral File Insulation Units ....................................................................................................... 1188
Data Modification and Details ..................................................................................................... 1188
Example Neutral File from PDS ................................................................................................. 1189
Intergraph Data After Element Sort ............................................................................................ 1196
Intergraph Data After TEE/Cross Modifications ......................................................................... 1197
Intergraph Data After Valve Modifications .................................................................................. 1198
Intergraph Data After Bend Modifications .................................................................................. 1201
CADPIPE .......................................................................................................................................... 1207
CADPIPE Example Transfer ...................................................................................................... 1210
General Notes ............................................................................................................................ 1213
Error Code Statements ............................................................................................................... 1214
CADPIPE LOG File Discussion .................................................................................................. 1214
Section 1 - Entity Information ..................................................................................................... 1215
Section 2-Segment Information .................................................................................................. 1216
Section 3-Final CAESAR II Data ................................................................................................ 1217
Checking the CADPIPE/CAESAR II Data Transfer .................................................................... 1218
Import PCF ........................................................................................................................................ 1219
PCF Interface Custom Mapping Attributes ................................................................................. 1219
How to Use the PCF Interface .................................................................................................... 1234
Data Export to ODBC Compliant Databases .................................................................................... 1241
DSN Setup .................................................................................................................................. 1242
Controlling the Data Export ........................................................................................................ 1244
CAESAR II Operational (Job) Data ....................................................................................................... 1246
Update History ....................................................................................................................................... 1249

CAESAR II Initial Capabilities (12/84) ............................................................................................... 1250

Contents
CAESAR II Version 1.1S Features (2/86) ......................................................................................... 1250

CAESAR II Version 2.0A Features (10/86) ....................................................................................... 1251
CAESAR II Version 2.1C Features (6/87) ......................................................................................... 1252
CAESAR II Version 2.2B Features (9/88) ......................................................................................... 1252
CAESAR II Version 3.0 Features (4/90) ........................................................................................... 1253
CAESAR II Version 3.1 Features (11/90) ......................................................................................... 1254
Flange Leakage and Stress Calculations ................................................................................... 1255
WRC 297 Local Stress Calculations .......................................................................................... 1255
Stress Intensification Factor Scratchpad .................................................................................... 1255
Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................................. 1255
CAESAR II Version 3.16 Features (12/91) ....................................................................................... 1256
CAESAR II Version 3.20 Features (10/93) ....................................................................................... 1259
CAESAR II Version 3.21 Changes and Enhancements (7/94) ......................................................... 1260
CAESAR II Version 3.22 Changes & Enhancements (4/95) ............................................................ 1262
CAESAR II Version 3.23 Changes (3/96) ......................................................................................... 1263
CAESAR II Version 3.24 Changes & Enhancements (3/97) ............................................................ 1264
CAESAR II Version 4.50 Changes and Enhancements (11/03) ....................................................... 1269
CAESAR II Version 5.10 Changes and Enhancements ( 9/07) ........................................................ 1270
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................. 1283
Index ....................................................................................................................................................... 1287

What's New in CAESAR II
The latest CAESAR II release delivers a number of significant new and extended capabilities in
response to current market requirements, as well as direct feedback from the growing CAESAR
II user community. The following changes have been made to CAESAR II:
CAESAR II 2019, Version 11.00
Added support for ASCE 7-2016 wind and seismic loads. (CR-TX-23218)
Added support for China GB 50009-2012 wind code. (CR-TX-23229)
Updated the Errors and Warnings grid to perform more like Microsoft Excel. The grid
supports selection and copy of grid rows between the grid and Excel. (DI-TX-22923)
For the Seismic Wizard, changed the default value for the ASCE 7 Response Factor R
from 12 to 3.5 to comply with ASME B31. (CR-TX-23265)
Updated CODETI code stress equations in the Quick Reference Guide. (TR-TX-25335)
Updated the Material Database Editor grid to support copy, cut, paste, and delete of cells
and rows within the grid and between the grid and Excel. (DI-TX-22915)
Updated B31.4 and B31.8 codes to function similarly for non-default configuration settings
and combination load cases (DI-TX-24014)
Added the CAESAR II Determines option to Allowable Stress Indicator for the B31.8
code, similar to the existing implementation for B31.4. CAESAR II Determines specifies
that the software selects the stress equations based on the calculated axial load in the
piping system. (CR-TX-20558)
Added node name and node number formatting options to Options > Node Numbers. You
can now display names and numbers with the same formatting available for Options >
Node Name in the Static Output Processor. (CR-TX-16576)
Updated and renamed the Global Coordinates and Global commands to View/Edit
Disconnects. The new Disconnected Segments dialog box displays a grid view of nodes
and coordinates for all disconnected elements, and you can edit the values. (CR-TX-5232)
Updated the Coordinates and Elements lists to support the new View/Edit Disconnects
command. The start (From) node displays in the Node column of the Coordinates list.
Right-click > View/Edit Disconnects displays on the Coordinates list. Disconnected
element rows highlight in green in both lists. (CR-TX-24843)

Extended the range for node numbers. A node number previously had a maximum value of
32,000. It now has a maximum value of 8,000,000. (CR-TX-1271)
Improved the efficiency of processing disconnected segments to function with the extended
node number range. (CR-TX-24998)
Improved the behavior of node names. A node name now displays on all elements sharing
the same node. (CR-TX-17148)
Added import of a properly formatted Excel .xlsx file into the Static Analysis - Load Case
Editor. The software also provides an example template file, LCE_Template.xltx, in the
C:\\ProgramData\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\11.00\System\templates folder.
(CR-TX-15419)
Added export of an Excel .xlsx file from the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
(CR-TX-25081)
Expanded the redesigned Equipment Manager to include API 617, API 560, API 661, and
NEMA SM23 equipment modules into the single Equipment Manager window. (API 610
equipment was moved into the Equipment Manager in the previous release.) Changes
include updates to calculations and updates to reports to meet Equipment Manager
standards. (CR-TX-3328, CR-TX-18354, CR-TX-18356, CR-TX-23231)
Added several usability improvements. Node Number is now optional. Most recently used
files are now available. Status and warnings for the equipment input display before analysis
and in the status pane and in the output report after analysis completes. (CR-TX-24168)
For static analysis, clarified the usage of the wind load reduction factor for ASCE 7. You
must explicitly apply this factor to the wind load component in a wind load case.
(CR-TX-23265)
For dynamic analysis, corrected the determination of the pressure stiffening effect on bends
by excluding hydro pressure. (CR-TX-18264)
Added the option to create .pdf files when you create .dwg files using Create Isometric
Drawings. The software also saves .dwg drawing files and .pdf files in the same folder as
the piping model. (CR-TX-16394)
Updated Generate Stress Isometrics to Personal ISOGEN 2016 (10.0.0.1) and to
I-Configure 2016 (06.00.00.11). (CR-TX-5279)
Improved the creation of isometric drawings for models containing dummy legs.
(CR-TX-22366)
Updated the Underground Pipe Modeler grid to support copy and paste of rows within the
grid and between the grid and Excel. (CR-TX-5255)

Added shortcut keys that are used consistently throughout the software. (DI-TX-24231)
Added access to the Data Export Wizard from the Static Output Processor.
(CR-TX-16573)
Added a Maximize/Restore button to report windows for static reports. The software also
saves the most recent window size and uses it when you open the next report window.
(CR-TX-1206)
Improved Import PCF to allow you to import a large number of files. (CR-TX-23420)
Updated thermal coefficient of expansion topics to specify the length and temperature units
of the model. (CR-TX-17740)
Added more details and equations to the CAESAR II Determines option of Allowable
Stress Indicator for finding the pipe restrained/unrestrained status in the B31.4 code.
(CR-TX-22370)
Clarified usage of the Free Measure option of Distance. The option should only be used in
2D views. (CR-TX-22845)
Added a shortcut key overview to the Quick Reference Guide. (DI-TX-24231)
Added information on editing ASCII text files. (CR-TX-24528, CR-TX-22747)

SECTION 1
Introduction
CAESAR II® is a PC-based pipe stress analysis software package that is developed, marketed
and sold by Intergraph CAS. This software is an engineering tool used in the mechanical design
and analysis of piping systems. Use CAESAR II to create a model of the piping system
represented by simple 3D beam elements and to define the loading conditions imposed on the
system.
With this input, CAESAR II produces results in the form of displacements, loads, and stresses
throughout the system. Additionally, CAESAR II compares these results to limits specified by
recognized codes and standards.
CAESAR II is most often used for the mechanical design of new piping systems. Loads,
displacements, and stresses can be estimated through analysis of the piping model in CAESAR
II. CAESAR II incorporates many of the limitations placed on these systems and their attached
equipment. These limits are typically specified by engineering bodies (such as the ASME B31
committees, ASME Section VIII, and the Welding Research Council) or by manufacturers of
piping-related equipment (API, NEMA, or EJMA).
Hot piping systems present a unique problem to the mechanical engineer. These irregular
structures experience great thermal strain that must be absorbed by the piping, supports, and
attached equipment. These structures must be stiff enough to support their own weight but
flexible enough to accept thermal growth.
CAESAR II is not limited to thermal analysis of piping systems. CAESAR II also has the
capability of modeling and analyzing the full range of static and dynamic loads which can be
imposed on the system. Because of this, CAESAR II is not only a tool for new design. It is also
valuable in troubleshooting or redesigning existing systems. You can determine the cause of
failure or evaluate the severity of unanticipated operating conditions such as fluid to piping
interaction or mechanical vibration caused by rotating equipment.
Our staff of experienced pipe stress engineers are involved in day-to-day software development,
software support, and training. This approach has produced software that most closely fits the
-forward through
dialog boxes. CAESAR II provides the widest range of modeling and analysis capabilities
without becoming too complicated for simple system analysis. You can tailor your CAESAR II
installation through default settings and customized databases. Comprehensive input graphics
confirm the model construction before the analysis is made. The software's interactive output
processor presents results on the monitor for quick review or sends complete reports to a file or
printer. CAESAR II uses standard analysis guidelines and provides the latest recognized
opinions for these analyses.
CAESAR II also offers seamless interaction with Intergraph® CADWorx® Plant, which is an
AutoCAD®-based design and drafting system for creating orthographic, isometric, and 3D piping
drawings. The two-way-link automatically generates stress analysis models of piping layouts or
creates spectacular stress isometrics in minutes from CAESAR II models.

Introduction
CAESAR II is a field-proven engineering analysis application. It is a widely recognized product

with a large customer base and an excellent support and development record.
In This Section
About the CAESAR II Documentation ........................................... 22
Software Support/User Assistance ................................................ 22
Software Revision Procedures ...................................................... 23
Updates and License Types .......................................................... 25
About the CAESAR II Documentation

The supporting software documentation is organized in the following manuals:
CAESAR II User's Guide - Describes the basic operation and flow of the commands found in
CAESAR II. This manual gives an overview of the software capabilities and introduces model
creation, analysis, and output review. It explains the function of, input for, and output from each
module of the software. This manual also explains much of the theory behind CAESAR II
calculations. It is intended as a general road map for the software.
CAESAR II Application Guide - Provides examples of how to use CAESAR II. These examples
illustrate methods of modeling individual piping components as well as complete piping systems.
This document contains tutorials on system modeling and analysis. The CAESAR II Application
Guide is a reference providing quick "how to" information on specific subjects.
CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide - Provides version and technical change details in addition
to installation and commonly used information. This document also lists the currently
implemented piping codes (with publication and revision dates) and related stress and allowable
equations.
You can view and print any of the manuals by clicking Help > Online Documentation on the
CAESAR II Main menu.
Software Support/User Assistance

Intergraph CAS understands that CAESAR II is a complex analysis tool. While the
documentation is intended to explain piping analysis, system modeling, and results
interpretation, you may have additional questions.
ed to produce efficient, economical, and expeditious designs.
To that end, we have a staff of helpful professionals ready to address any CAESAR II and piping
issues raised by you. CAESAR II support is available by telephone, e-mail, fax, and the Internet.
We provide this service at no additional charge to you for questions focused on the current
version of the software.
Formal training in CAESAR II and pipe stress analysis is also available from Intergraph CAS.
We schedule regular training classes in Houston and provide in-house and open attendance
training around the world. These courses focus on the expertise available for modeling, analysis,
and design.
To aid internet users when contacting technical support, Intergraph CAS has added an option
that generates an e-mail template with the basic computer and CAESAR II version details. This
information is typically what is needed to resolve technical support issues. To use this option,
click Help > Email CAESAR II Support.

Introduction
This command starts the default e-mail client and populates an e-mail with the default
information.
The e-mail is addressed to Technical Support and contains all the information relevant to your
CAESAR II installation. Type the problem description at the Type Message Here prompt and
attach any necessary files.
You can contact Intergraph CAS Technical Support or Sales:
ICAS Dealer Support (http://www.coade.com/Support/Dealers.shtml ) or ICAS General
Support (http://support.intergraph.com/Default.asp)
Technical Support E-mail: ppmcrm@Intergraph.com
Phone: 1-800-766-7701 (CAESAR II Direct), 280-890-4566 (General)
Fax: 281-890-3301
Sales E-mail: sales.cas.ppm@hexagon.com
Knowledge-based Articles/Tutorials (US and Canada only):
https://smartsupport.intergraph.com (https://smartsupport.intergraph.com)
Software Revision Procedures

CAESAR II is updated continually to reflect engineering code addenda, operational
enhancements, your requests, operating system modifications, and corrections. New versions
are planned and targeted for a specific release date. However, there may be corrections
necessary to the current version before the next version can be released. When this occurs, a
correction to the current version is made. This correction is referred to as a service pack update.
When a service pack update to the software becomes available, all users who have registered
the software are sent an email announcement. Therefore, it is imperative that you register the
software following installation.
A software update is intended for a specific version of the software. As the CAESAR II team
releases new versions of the software, new features require additional inputs and options and
the software includes additional information in the software data files. In addition, file formats
change, databases grow, and so on. Applying a software update on a different version of the
software, without specific consent from Intergraph CAS support, puts your software integrity at
risk.
You can download software updates from our customer support website, Intergraph Smart
Support. Navigate to find updates in subfolders by the program name. Each update file includes
a description, the file size, and the creation date.
Each service pack update of the software includes a file named BUILD.TXT, which is an ASCII
text file that you can view with any text editor or send to a printer. This file contains a description

Introduction
of all corrections and enhancements made to the software because the original release of this
specific version. When necessary, additional usage instructions are included in this file.
Service packs distributed for Windows-based applications use a Windows installation procedure
with a standard SETUP.EXE to actually install the update. This procedure ensures that you
register the necessary files with the system and that the uninstall utility works.
When a service pack update is ready to be released, Help > About CAESAR II is revised to
reflect the service pack number. To see which software modules have been modified, you can
run an Intergraph CAS Program Scanner utility from Diagnostics > Build Version. This utility
scans each of the .EXE modules in the program folder and lists the size, memory requirements,
and build number for each file.
The following shows example results from running the utility.
When the CAESAR II team releases a new version of the software, save any previous
distribution disks sent from Intergraph CAS. Additionally, archive any previous service pack
updates. This allows you full usage of the older version at a later time, if it becomes necessary.
To reinstall an older version of the software, first install the software from Intergraph CAS. Then,
install the latest service pack update. Each update includes the modifications made in all prior
service pack updates.

Introduction
Updates and License Types

You can identify CAESAR II update sets by their version number. The current release is Version
2019 (11.0). Intergraph CAS schedules and distributes these updates periodically, depending on
their scope and necessity. The type of CAESAR II license that you have determines whether
you receive these updates. There are three types of CAESAR II licenses:
Full Run - Provides unlimited access to CAESAR II. Updates, maintenance, and support are
available on an annual basis.
Lease - Provides unlimited access to CAESAR II with updates, maintenance, and support
provided as long as the lease is in effect.
Limited Run - Provides 50 static or dynamic analyses of piping system models over an
unlimited period of time, but does not include software updates. Your license is upgraded, if
necessary, whenever you purchase a new set of 50 runs.
Intergraph CAS only ships the current version of CAESAR II, no matter which type of license
you purchase. Updates will be delivered on request to lease users and to full run users who
have a current support/maintenance contract.

SECTION 2
Getting Started
This section explains the CAESAR II basic operation, and steps you through a quick static
piping analysis.
The main steps required to perform a static analysis are:
1. Starting CAESAR II (on page 26)
2. Create a new job (on page 28)
3. Generate piping input (on page 29)
4. Check for errors in the model (on page 32)
5. Build load cases (on page 33)
6. Run a static analysis (on page 34)
7. Review static output (on page 34)
A complete tutorial is provided in the CAESAR II Applications Guide.
In This Section
Starting CAESAR II ........................................................................ 26
Understanding Jobs ....................................................................... 27
Basic Operation ............................................................................. 28
Main Window ................................................................................. 34
ASCII Text File Rules .................................................................... 53
Starting CAESAR II
1. Click Start > All Programs > Intergraph CAS > CAESAR II > CAESAR II. You may
also have a CAESAR II icon on your desktop that you can use to start CAESAR II.

Getting Started
The main CAESAR II window displays.
This window contains the main menu and toolbar from which you select jobs and analysis
types, start analysis, and review output.
2. Click File > Set Default Data Directory.
The Default Data Directory Specification dialog box displays.
3. Define the folder to save your jobs and other CAESAR II data files. The default folder is
C:\ProgramData\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\version\Examples.
4. From the Language menu, select your language for the interface.
5. In Windows Explorer, go to C:\ProgramData\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\version\System.
6. Using a text editor, open and specify your company name on the first line.
This will place your company name is the header of CAESAR II calculations.
Understanding Jobs
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. All subsequent input,
analysis, or output reviews reference the job specified. You create a new job by selecting File >
New or by clicking New on the main toolbar. You open an existing job by selecting File >
Open or by clicking Open on the main toolbar.
After you have created or opened a job, the job name displays in the title bar of the main
CAESAR II window. Use the commands on the Input, Analysis, and Output menus to define,
analyze, and review your data.

Getting Started
Basic Operation
To help you get familiar with CAESAR II, we will step through a basic piping analysis.
Topics
Create a new job ............................................................................ 28
Generate piping input .................................................................... 29
Check for errors in the model ........................................................ 32
Build load cases ............................................................................. 33
Run a static analysis ...................................................................... 34
Review static output ....................................................................... 34
Create a new job

1. Click Start > All Programs > Intergraph ICAS > CAESAR II > CAESAR II .
The CAESAR II main window displays.
2. Click File > New.
The New Job Name Specification dialog box displays.
3. In the Enter the name for the NEW job file box, type MyFirstPipingModel.
4. Select the Piping Input option.
5. In the Enter the data directory box, type C:\temp\CAESAR II.
You can put your job file in another folder if you want, just remember where and
substitute that folder for C:\temp\CAESAR II when needed.
6. Click OK.
The job is created and the job name displays in the main window title bar.
Next, the Review Current Units dialog box displays.

7. Review the units listed in the dialog box, and then click OK.
The Piping Input window displays.

Getting Started
You can use Input > Piping to activate the Piping Input window.
Generate piping input

Model input generation consists of describing the piping elements and any external influences
(boundary conditions or loads) acting on those elements. Two node numbers identify each pipe
element end. Every pipe element also requires the specification of geometric, cross sectional,
and material data. One method of data entry is the Piping Spreadsheet.
You define a piping element on its own spreadsheet. Some data, when defined on a piping
element, is automatically duplicated by CAESAR II to subsequent piping spreadsheets. This
means that for many elements you only have to confirm the node numbers and type the
delta-dimensions, and then CAESAR II automatically duplicates from the previous element the
other data such as pipe diameter, operating temperatures, material type, and so forth. You can
always type specific data to override the duplicated data in the piping spreadsheet for an
element.
The menus, toolbars, and accelerators offer a number of additional commands to type auxiliary
processors or use special modelers or databases. The commands and general input instructions
of the piping spreadsheet are discussed in detail in Piping Input Reference (on page 112).
1. In the DX box, type 10-0 (which is 10 ft).
2. In the Diameter box, type 8 (8-in. nominal).
CAESAR II automatically converts this value to the actual diameter.
3. In the Wt/Sch box, type S (standard schedule pipe wall).
CAESAR II automatically converts this to wall thickness.
4. In the Temp 1 box, type 600 (degrees Fahrenheit).
5. In the Pressure 1 box, type 150 (psig).
6. Double-click the Bend check box.

Getting Started
The Bends tab displays. This adds a long radius bend at the end of the element, and adds
intermediate nodes 18 and 19 at the near weld and mid-points of the bend, respectively
(node 20 physically represents the far weld point of the bend).
7. Double-click the Restraint check box.

The Restraint tab displays.
8. In the first Node box, type 10, and then select ANC from the first Type drop list.
9. Select A106 B from the Material drop list.

This selection fills in the material parameters such as density and modulus elasticity.
10. Double-click the Allowable Stress check box.

Getting Started
The Allowable Stresses tab displays.

11. Select the B31.3 code from the Code drop list.
Allowable stresses for the given material, temperature, and code display automatically.
12. In the Fluid Den 1 box, type 0.85SG (0.85 specific gravity).
The software automatically converts this value to density.
13. After you finish defining the first element, you need to move to the next element. You can do
this by pressing Alt-C, by clicking Continue , or by selecting Edit > Continue from the
menu.
Node numbers are automatically generated in the From and To boxes and data is carried
forward from the previous element.
14. In the DY box, type 10-0 (10 feet).
15. Double-click the Restraint check box.
16. In the first Node box, type 30, and then select ANC from the first Type drop list.
The two-element model (a well-defined configuration anchored at each end) is complete.

Getting Started
The piping input preprocessor has an interactive graphics and a list view function to make model
editing and verification easier. You can verify your model using the Graphics or List utilities,
although a combination of both modes is recommended. By default, the graphics screen
displays to the right of the input spreadsheet. You can click the small pin in the upper-left corner
to collapse the input spreadsheet to provide maximum graphic space.
Check for errors in the model

When you are finished modeling, you must run File > Error Check before you can run an
analysis.
The two main functions of this error check are to verify your input data by checking each
individual piping element for consistency and to build the execution data files used by the
analysis and review processes.
Errors that will prevent the analysis from running (such as a corrosion allowance greater than
the wall thickness) are flagged as fatal errors and display in red text. Unusual items (such as a
change of direction without a bend or intersection) are flagged as warnings and display in green
text. Other informational messages that may show intermediate calculations or general notes
display in blue text. All messages display in the Errors and Warnings tab next to the model
graphics.
When you double-click an error or warning message, CAESAR II displays the spreadsheet of
the associated element and highlights the element in the graphic display. You can sort error

Getting Started
messages by clicking the column titles. Use File > Print to print the entire error report or
selected sections. Use the options arrow on the Error Check icon to display only fatal errors or
all errors.
If there is a fatal error, you must return to the input module to make corrections. Click the
Classic Piping Input tab or double-click the row number for the error message.
If the error check process completes without fatal errors, a center of gravity report displays, the
analysis data files are generated, and the solution phase can commence. If fatal errors do exist,
the analysis data files are not generated and the solution phase cannot begin. You must make
corrections and rerun the Error Checker until successful before analysis is permitted.
Build load cases

After the analysis data files have been created by the error checker, you can run a static
analysis. The first step of a static analysis is to define the load cases. For new jobs (there are no
previous solution files available), the static analysis module recommends load cases to you
based on the load types encountered in the input file. These recommended load cases are
usually sufficient to satisfy the piping code requirements for the Sustained and Expansion load
cases. If the recommended load cases are not satisfactory, you should modify them.
1. From the Piping Input window, select Edit > Edit Static Load Cases .
The Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box displays.
2. You can build loads two ways:
Combine the load components defined in the input (weight, displacements,
temperatures, and so forth) into load cases (basic cases), or
Combine pre-existing load cases into new load cases (combination cases).
3. Build the basic cases by selecting one or more load components in the Loads Defined in
Input list and then dragging and dropping them to the Load Cases list to the right. You can
also type on any of the individual load case lines. Stress types (indicating which code
equations should be used to calculate and check the stresses) are selected from the Stress
Type list.
Combination cases, if needed, must follow the basic cases. You can build combination
cases by selecting one or more load components and dragging and dropping the basic load
cases from either the Load Defined in Input primitives or from the other previous load
cases (by dragging the load case number) to combine cases (or create new load cases)
later in the list.
You can have a maximum of 999 static load cases. For more information, see Static
Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box (on page 586).

Getting Started
Run a static analysis

After the load cases are defined, you can run the analysis.
1. Select File > Batch Run to run the actual finite element solution.
The analysis creates the element stiffness matrices and load vectors and solves for
displacements, forces and moments, reactions, and stresses. The analysis also performs
the design and selection of spring hangers and iterative stiffness matrix modifications for
nonlinear restraints. Finally, the Static Output Processor window displays.
Review static output

When the analysis is finished, you can review the results using the Static Output Processor
window.
1. On the main CAESAR II window, select Output > Static.
The Static Output Processor window displays.
2. In the Load Case Analyzed list, select one or more load cases for which to review results.
3. In the Standard Reports list, select one or more reports to review.
4. Click --> Add.
5. Select where you want to view the results: the screen, Microsoft Word or Excel, the printer,
or an ASCII file.
6. Click Finish to view the reports.
7. Click Options > Graphical Output to review the analytic results in graphics mode, which
can produce displaced shapes, stress distributions, and restraint actions.
The actual study of the results depends on the purpose of each load case and the reason for the
analysis. Usually the review checks that the system stresses are below their allowables,
restraint loads are acceptable, and displacements are not excessive. Additional post processing
(such as equipment, nozzle, and structural steel checks) might be required depending on the
model and type of analysis.
After you finish reviewing the output, return to the main window by exiting the output review
module.
Main Window
After starting CAESAR II, the software opens the main window consisting of:
1. Quick Access toolbar
2. Ribbon
3. Menu
4. News channel, containing release, event, and training information

Getting Started
5. Status bar
You can keep this window as small as possible to conserve screen space.
Topics
File Menu ....................................................................................... 35
Input Menu ..................................................................................... 37
Analysis Menu ............................................................................... 38
Output Menu .................................................................................. 41
Language Menu ............................................................................. 42
Tools Menu .................................................................................... 43
Diagnostics Menu .......................................................................... 45
ESL Menu ...................................................................................... 48
View Menu ..................................................................................... 49
FEA Tools Menu ............................................................................ 49
Help Menu...................................................................................... 50
Quick Access Toolbar .................................................................... 53
File Menu
Provides commands to create and save piping and structural jobs.
Topics
Set Default Data Directory ............................................................. 36
New ................................................................................................ 36
Open .............................................................................................. 36

Getting Started
Main window ribbon: File > Specify the default data directory for future work
Main window menu: File > Set Default Data Directory
Sets the default data (project) directory without selecting a specific job file. Some CAESAR II
options do not require that a job be selected but must know in which directory to work. All
CAESAR II generated data files are written to this directory. The command displays the Default
Data Directory Specification dialog box.
Click Examples to set the default data directory to the examples directory delivered with
CAESAR II.
The data directory specification is very important because any configuration, units, or
other data files found in that directory are considered to be local to that job.
Main window ribbon: Home > New

Main window ribbon: File > New
Main window menu: File > New
Starts a new piping or structural job.
Main window ribbon: Home > Open

Main window ribbon: File > Open
Main window menu: File > Open
Opens an existing piping or structural job. Use the Open dialog box to browse to and select the
job file to open. Click System to jump to the CAESAR II system folder. Click Example to jump to
the CAESAR II delivered example jobs folder.
You can also roll-back to a previous revision of a piping input job using the Open dialog box.
CAESAR II saves the last 25 revisions, deleting the oldest revision when necessary.

Getting Started
1. Click File > Open.

2. Browse to and then select the piping input job to roll-back.
3. In the Previous Revisions list in the bottom-right corner of the Open dialog box, select the
revision to rollback to.
4. Click Open.
The software asks you to confirm restoring the selected backup.
5. Click Yes to restore the previous revision.
Input Menu
The Input menu is used to select the modules to define the job input parameters. Piping and
Underground are available for piping jobs. Structural Steel is available for structural jobs.
Main window ribbon: Home > Input > Piping Input
Main window menu: Input > Piping

Defines piping job parameters. For more information, see Piping Input Reference (on page
112).
Main window ribbon: Home > Input > Underground Pipe Modeler
Main window menu: Input > Underground
Converts an existing piping model to buried pipe. For more information, see Underground

Getting Started
Pipe Modeler (on page 536).
Main window ribbon: Home > Input > Structural Input

Main window menu: Input > Structural Steel
Defines structural steel for the job. For more information, see Structural Steel Modeler (on
page 438).
Analysis Menu
The Analysis menu displays the available calculations in CAESAR II.
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Piping > Static Analysis
Main window menu: Analysis > Statics

Performs static analysis of pipe or structure. The command is available after error checking
the input files. For more information, see Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box (on
page 586).
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Piping > Dynamic Analysis
Main window menu: Analysis > Dynamics

Performs dynamic analysis of pipe or structure. The command is avail\-able after error
checking the input files. For more information, see Dynamic Analysis (on page 690).
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > SIFs @ Intersections

Main window menu: Analysis > SIFs @ Intersections
Displays scratch pads used to calculate stress intensification factors at tee intersections. For
more information, see Intersection Stress Intensification Factors (on page 845)
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > SIFs @ Bends

Main window menu: Analysis > SIFs @ Bends
Displays scratch pads used to calculate stress intensification factors at bends. For more
information, see Bend Stress Intensification Factors (on page 852).

Getting Started
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > WRC 107(537)/297/PD5500

Main window menu: Analysis > WRC 107(537)/297/PD5500
Calculates stresses in vessels due to attached piping. For more information, see WRC
Bulletin 107(537) (on page 861).
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > Flanges

Main window menu: Analysis > Flanges
Performs flange stress and leakage calculations. For more information, see Flange
Leakage/Stress Calculations (on page 899).
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > B31.G

Main window menu: Analysis > B31.G
Estimates pipeline remaining life. For more information, see Pipeline Remaining Strength
Calculations (B31G) (on page 920).
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > Expansion Joint Rating
Main window menu: Analysis > Expansion Joint Rating
Evaluates expansion joints using EJMA equations. For more information, see Expansion
Joint Rating (on page 925).
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > AISC

Main window menu: Analysis > AISC
Performs AISC code check on structural steel elements. For more information, see
Structural Steel Checks - AISC (on page 930).
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Equipment > NEMA SM23

Main window menu: Analysis > 1 - NEMA SM23
Evaluates piping loads on steam turbine nozzles. For more information, see NEMA SM23
(Steam Turbines) (on page 953).

Getting Started
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Equipment > API 610

Main window menu: Analysis > 2 - API 610
Evaluates piping loads on centrifugal pumps. For more information, see API 610 (Centrifugal
Pumps) (on page 944).

Evaluates piping loads on compressors. For more information, see API 617 (Centrifugal
Compressors) (on page 948).

Evaluates piping loads on air-cooled heat exchangers. For more information, see API 661
(Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) (on page 957).
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Equipment > HEI Standard

Main window menu: Analysis > 5 - HEI Standard
Evaluates piping loads on feedwater heaters. For more information, see HEI Standard (on
page 965).

Evaluates piping loads on fired heaters. For more information, see API 560 (Heaters) (on
page 951).

Getting Started
Output Menu
The Output menu lists all available output of piping or structural calculations that can be
selected for review.
Main window ribbon: Output > Reports > Static
Main window menu: Analysis > Static

Displays the results of a static analysis. For more information, see Static Output Processor
(on page 623).
Main window ribbon: Output > Reports > Harmonic

Main window menu: Analysis > Harmonic
Displays harmonic loading results. For more information, see Dynamic Output Window (on
page 801).
Main window ribbon: Output > Reports > Spectrum/Modal

Main window menu: Analysis > Spectrum/Modal
Displays natural frequency/mode shape calculations or uniform/force spectrum loading
results. For more information, see Dynamic Output Window (on page 801).
Main window ribbon: Output > Reports > Time History

Main window menu: Analysis > Time History
Displays time history load simulation results. For more information, see Dynamic Output
Window (on page 801).
Main window ribbon: Output > Animations > Mode Shapes

Main window menu: Analysis > Animation > Mode Shapes
Displays animated graphic simulations of natural frequency/mode shape calculations or
uniform/force spectrum loading results. For more information, see Dynamic Output
Animation Window (on page 817).

Getting Started
Main window ribbon: Output > Animations > Harmonic

Main window menu: Analysis > Animation > Harmonic
Displays animated graphic simulations of harmonic loading results. For more information,
see Dynamic Output Animation Window (on page 817).
Main window ribbon: Output > Animations > Time History

Main window menu: Analysis > Animation > Time History
Displays animated graphic simulations of time history load simulation results. For more
information, see Dynamic Output Animation Window (on page 817).
Main window ribbon: Output > Animations > Static

Main window menu: Analysis > Animation > Static
Displays animated graphic simulations of static analysis results. For more information, see
Animation of Static Results -Displacements (on page 818).
Language Menu
CAESAR II supports multiple languages.
Main window menu: Language > English (United States)

Identifies that the current language is English, which is the default language.
Main window menu: Language > Japanese

Changes portions of the CAESAR II user interface text and the user documentation to
Japanese.
Main window menu: Language > Chinese (PRC)

Changes portions of the CAESAR II user interface text and the user documentation to
Chinese.
Many of the CAESAR II modules are available in English, Japanese, and Chinese,
such as the main window, the Classic Piping Input dialog box, the Static Load Case Editor,
and the Static Output Processor. Additionally, significant portions of the documentation,
including the various guides and F1 Help information, are translated.

Getting Started
Tools Menu
The Tools menu activates various CAESAR II supporting utilities.
Main window ribbon: Home > Setup > Configure
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Configure

Main window menu: Tools > Configure/Setup
The CAESAR.cfg configuration file contains directives that dictate how CAESAR II will
operate on a particular computer and how it will perform a particular analysis. Each time that
you open the software, it searches for this configuration file in the current data folder. If the
configuration file is not found in the current data folder, the software then searches the
CAESAR II system folder. If the configuration file is not found in either location, a fatal error
is generated and CAESAR II exits. For more information, see Configuration Editor (on page
55).
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Materials

Main window menu: Tools > Materials
Edits or adds to the CAESAR II Material Database. For more information, see Material
Database (on page 1118).
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Accounting

Main window menu: Tools > Accounting
Activates or customizes job accounting or generates accounting reports. For more
information, see Accounting (on page 1128).
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Change Model Units
Main window menu: Tools > Change Model Units

Converts an existing input file to a new set of units. For more information, see Change
Model Units (on page 1138).
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Calculator

Getting Started
Main window menu: Tools > Calculator

Launches an on-screen calculator.
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Create/Review Units
Main window menu: Tools > Create/Review Units

Creates custom sets of units or lets you review the units configuration. For more information,
see Create/Review Units (on page 1134).
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Multi-job Analysis
Main window menu: Tools > Multi-job Analysis

Enables the user to run a stream of jobs without operator intervention. For more information,
see Batch Stream Processing (on page 1139).
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Open System Folder
Main window menu: Tools > Open System Folder
Opens the CAESAR II System folder.
Main window ribbon: Interfaces

Main window menu: Tools > External Interfaces
Displays the interfaces to and from third party software (both CAD and analytical). For more
information, see External Interfaces (on page 1142).
Main window ribbon: Home > Reports > Generate Stress Isometrics
Main window ribbon: Output > Isogen > Generate Stress Isometrics
Main window menu: Tools > ISOGEN Isometrics

Starts CAESAR II Isometrics. For more information, see Generate Stress Isometrics (on
page 822).

Getting Started
Main window ribbon: Output > Isogen > I-Configure
Main window menu: Tools > I-Configure

Starts Alias I-Configure.
Main window menu: Tools > Reset Layouts to Default

Restores all CAESAR II window layouts to the default positions. In addition, all toolbar
customizations are reset to the default state and your video driver is to OpenGL.
Diagnostics Menu
Activates utilities to help troubleshoot problem installations.
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Diagnostics > CRC Check

Main window menu: Diagnostics > CRC Check
Verifies that software files are not corrupted. For more information, see CRC Check (on
page 47).
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Diagnostics > Build Version

Main window menu: Diagnostics > Build Version
Determines the build version of CAESAR II files. For more information, see Build Version
(on page 47).
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Diagnostics > Error Review

Main window menu: Diagnostics > Error Review
Allows you to look up errors for more information. For more information, see Error Review
(on page 47).
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Diagnostics > QA Test
Main window menu: Diagnostics > QA Test

Runs the QATEST software, which compares output file information between a new version
of the software and the previously verified version. For more information, see QA Test (on

Getting Started
page 48).

Getting Started
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Diagnostics > CRC Check

Main window menu: Diagnostics > CRC Check
Assesses whether the version of CAESAR II you are running matches the originally installed
files. Run the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) to identify if any files are corrupted. When you
click CRC Check in Utilities > Diagnostics, the software opens the CRCCHK File Verification
dialog box and begins scanning all CAESAR II files. When the scan completes, the CRC Status
column indicates if there were any files that did not match the originally installed software files,
and the File Name column shows the file path. In addition, the scan results show how many files
were read and how many errors the software detected.
The following issues can contribute to a CRC Check failure.
The distribution DVD is corrupted. Contact CAESAR II support for a new DVD.
The wrong files were installed (for example a service pack was installed for the wrong
version of the software).
A virus has infected the file. Use virus-detecting software to correct this issue.
You received a new file from Intergraph CAS. The CRC value is expected to be different in
this circumstance, and it is not a problem.
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Diagnostics > Build Version

Main window menu: Diagnostics > Build Version
Scans all EXE, DLL, and COM files for the ID Version information. Intergraph CAS defines ID
Version information for all of the previously mentioned files to indicate version and build details
for the file. The software displays additional information about the file, such as the name, file
size, build number, operating system, and date and time of the file. For more specifics on the ID
Version file information, click Details at the bottom of the dialog box.
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Diagnostics > Error Review

Main window menu: Diagnostics > Error Review
Provides a search dialog for error codes. When you select Error Review, the software opens
the Additional Error Information dialog box. Type the error number returned by the software
during analysis, and click OK. The software displays additional details about the error message
and any resolution steps. For general information on error handling in the CAESAR II software,
see CAESAR II Error Processing (on page 1140).

Getting Started
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Diagnostics > QA Test
Main window menu: Diagnostics > QA Test

Compares output file information between a new version of the software and the previously
verified version. You can use the QATEST software to verify the output generated by a specific
version of CAESAR II. For more information on the fields compared, click QA Test and then
click the CAESAR II icon in the upper-left corner of the dialog box, and select QATEST
Information.
ESL Menu
The ESL menu accesses utilities that interact with the External Software Lock (ESL).
These commands are not available if you are using SmartPlant License Manager.
Main window ribbon: Utilities > ESL (Licensing) > View ESL
Main window menu: ESL > View ESL
Displays data stored on the ESL, including the serial number and date limit.
Main window ribbon: Utilities > ESL (Licensing) > Access Codes
Main window menu: ESL > Access Codes
Allows runs to be added or other ESL changes, to be made either through Fax or E-mail (in
conjunction with option below).
Main window ribbon: Utilities > ESL (Licensing) > Authorization Codes
Main window menu: ESL > Authorization Codes
Main window ribbon: Utilities > ESL (Licensing) > Check ESL
Main window menu: ESL >Check ESL
Verifies the location and version of the ESL.

Getting Started
Main window ribbon: Utilities > ESL (Licensing) > Install ESL Driver
Main window menu: ESL >Install ESL Driver
Installs the ESL drivers.
Main window ribbon: Utilities > ESL (Licensing) > Admin Control Center
Main window menu: ESL >Admin Control Center
Opens the ESL administrator control center.
View Menu
The View menu is used to enable and customize the status bar and all toolbars.
Main window menu: View > Status Bar

Displays or hides the status bar at the bottom of the window.
FEA Tools Menu

The FEA Tools menu lets you access and use third-party tools from Paulin Research Group
(PRG) for better modeling and evaluation.
If you have not purchased and installed FEATools or NozzlePRO, the software opens
the ICAS website with information about these products.
Main window ribbon: Home > FEA Tools > FEA Translation
Main window menu: FEA Tools > Translator

Opens the CAESAR II job in the CAESAR II FEA Translator. The translator in this tool lets
you incorporate finite element analysis into your pipe stress analysis. Calculate and apply
more relevant FEA-based SIFs and flexibilities (k factors) for branch connections.
Main window ribbon: Home > FEA Tools > Results Comparisons
Main window menu: FEA Tools > Comparison

Opens the CAESAR II job in the CAESAR II Comparison Tool. This utility compares output
results from multiple jobs, including values for displacements, forces and moments, restraint
forces, and restraint moments. Use the comparison tool to compare results CAESAR II jobs.

Getting Started
Main window ribbon: Home > FEA Tools > Criticality Evaluation
Main window menu: FEA Tools > Criticality Index

Opens the CAESAR II job in the Piping System Criticality Evaluator, which analyzes system
data, such as number of pressure cycles, system D/T ratio, operating temperatures or
pressures, thermal conditions, and so forth, and alerts you to areas of risk on the model.
Main window ribbon: Home > FEA Tools > NozzlePRO
Main window menu: FEA Tools > NozzlePRO

Opens the CAESAR II job in NozzlePRO, which is a single-component analysis tool for
piping and pressure vessels. Analyze individual nozzles, clips, lugs, saddles or other branch
connections.
For more information on using FEATools or NozzlePRO software to perform finite element
analysis, see the FEATools User Manual.
Help Menu
The Help menu displays the available CAESAR II documentation.
CAESAR II is context-sensitive, which means you can access on-screen help by
clicking ? or pressing F1 when the cursor is in any input field. The help displays a definition for
the field and the required units, if applicable.
Main window ribbon: Help > Tip of the Day

Main window menu: Help > Tip of the Day
Displays the Tip of the Day window.
Main window ribbon: Help > What's New

Main window menu: Help > What's New
Displays the What's New in CAESAR II file. The file lists changes to the software release.
Main window menu: Help > Online Documentation

Displays CAESAR II documentation. For more information, see Online Documentation (on
page 52).

Getting Started
Main window ribbon: Help > Online Help

Main window menu: Help > Online Help
Opens Intergraph CAS live technical support, including the option for desktop streaming to
Intergraph CAS support.
Main window ribbon: Help > Online Registration
Main window menu: Help > Online Registration

Allows you to register with Intergraph CAS by using the Intergraph CAS web site.
Main window ribbon: Help > Email support

Main window menu: Help > Email support
Opens an email to Intergraph CAS technical support in your default email client.
Main window ribbon: Help > Check for Updates

Main window menu: Help > Check for Updates
Enables you to verify whether the most current version of CAESAR II is installed.
Main window menu: Help > Information

Provides phone, email, and address contacts for Intergraph CAS technical support, and
provides internet links for Intergraph CAS downloads and information.
Main window ribbon: Help > About
Main window menu: Help > About

Displays CAESAR II version and copyright information.

Getting Started
The following documentation is available.
Main window ribbon: Help > User's Guide

Main window menu: Help > Online Documentation > User's Guide
Displays the CAESAR II User's Guide in .pdf format.
Main window ribbon: Help > Quick Reference Guide

Main window menu: Help > Online Documentation > Quick Reference Guide
Displays the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide in .pdf format.
Main window ribbon: Help > Applications Guide

Main window menu: Help > Online Documentation > Applications Guide
Displays the CAESAR II Applications Guide in .pdf format.
Main window ribbon: Help > Isogen Help

Main window menu: Help > Online Documentation > Isogen Help
Displays the CAESAR II Applications Guide in .chm format.
Main window ribbon: Help > Combined Document Search

Main window menu: Help > Online Documentation > Combined Document Search
Displays the Search dialog box, allowing you to search across multiple documents.
Main window ribbon: Help > Build.txt File

Main window menu: Help > Online Documentation > Build.txt File
Displays build information for the software.

Getting Started
Main window ribbon: Help > QA Certificate

Main window menu: Help > Online Documentation > QA Certificate
Displays the quality assurance certificate for the software.
Quick Access Toolbar

Provides access to frequently-used commands on the main window. You can customize the
toolbar by right-clicking a command icon on the ribbon or the toolbar.
Add to Quick Access Toolbar
Adds a command on the ribbon to the Quick Access toolbar. This option is only available
when you right-click a command icon on the ribbon.
Remove from Quick Access Toolbar
Removes a command on the Quick Access toolbar. This option is only available when you
right-click a command icon on the toolbar.
Show Quick Access Toolbar Below the Ribbon
Moves the Quick Access toolbar from above the ribbon to below the ribbon.
Show Quick Access Toolbar Above the Ribbon
Moves the Quick Access toolbar from below the ribbon to above the ribbon.
Minimize the Ribbon
Hides the ribbon. The Quick Access toolbar still displays.
ASCII Text File Rules

You can use text files in multiple locations in CAESAR II for importing data. You must follow
ASCII text standards to create an ASCII-compliant file that the software can successfully read.
Do not use special characters.
Do not use TAB because it is a special character. Instead, use SPACE multiple times.
Use a decimal point with all numeric values. Numeric values are real, floating-point values.
Use exponential notation when necessary.
Neatly arrange columns of data using spaces. This is not required for ASCII text, but makes
the data readable. The software ignores the extra spaces during import.
To add comments, start a line with *.
CAESAR II supports importing the following text files:
Piping component (.pcf). For more information, see Import PCF (on page 1219).
Displacements (.disp). For more information, see Import/Export Displacements from File (on
page 407).

Getting Started
Fatigue analysis (.fat). For more information, see Fatigue Analysis of Piping Systems (on
page 1025) and Creating a .fat File (on page 1034).
Spectrum data. For more information, see Enter/Edit Spectrum Data (on page 776).
CADWorx valve and flange database (.vhd). For more information, see Valve Flange
Database (on page 274).
Structural steel (.str). For more information, see Structural Steel Modeler (on page 438) and
Structural Steel Example #2 (on page 458).
Fiberglass reinforced pipe property data. For more information, see FRP Property Data File
(on page 71).
CAESAR II Neutral File (on page 1143) (.cii).
CAESAR II Data Matrix (on page 1166).
Piping external interface (.frc). For more information, see AFT IMPULSE (on page 1167),
PIPENET (on page 1169), LIQT (on page 1171), and FlowMaster (on page 1181).
Pipeplus external interface (.pnf). For more information, see Pipeplus (on page 1177).
Print format (.inp). For more information, see Print (see "Structural Steel Modeler" on page
438).

SECTION 3
Configuration Editor
Main window ribbon: Home > Setup > Configure
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Configure

Main window menu: Tools > Configure/Setup
Specifies configuration options for CAESAR II and saves the options to the CAESAR.cfg file.
Displays the Configuration Editor dialog box.
The CAESAR.cfg configuration file contains instructions that dictate how the software operates
on your computer and how it performs a particular analysis. Each time that you open the
software, it searches for this configuration file in the current data directory and uses it to perform
the analysis.
If the configuration file is not found in the current data directory, the software then
searches the installation folder. If the configuration file is not found in either location, a fatal error
is generated and CAESAR II exits.
The CAESAR.cfg file may vary from computer to computer, and many of the
configuration spreadsheet values modify the analysis. To produce identical results between
computers, use the same configuration file. Make a copy of the setup file to be archived with
input and output data so that identical reruns can be made. The units file, if it is modified, must
also be identical if the same results are to be produced.
1. To display the CAESAR.cfg file, click Tools > Configure/Setup .

The CAESAR II Configuration Editor window displays. The attributes for Computational
Control display.
In the left-hand pane, the configuration spreadsheets categories display.
In the right-hand pane, the configuration spreadsheet values for that category display.
The Data Directory displays the path where the current configuration file is stored.
2. Click the title in the Categories pane to navigate to the appropriate configuration
spreadsheets.
3. Click the X in the right-hand corner to exit.
1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup to display the CAESAR.cfg file.

Control display.
2. Click Save and Exit located in the top-left corner of the Configuration Editor window.

1. To display the CAESAR.cfg file, click Tools > Configure/Setup .

Control display.
2. Click the description to change a value for a configuration attribute,
A drop-down menu which contains the possible values for the attribute displays.
3. Select a new value.
The new value displays in bold text.
4. Continue changing values until you are finished.
5. Click Save and Exit located in the top-left corner of the Configuration Editor window.
Click Alt D to reset an individual field value in the current configuration file to its default
value.
Click Reset All -> Set Current Defaults to reset all the values for the current configuration
file to the default values.
1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup to display the CAESAR.cfg file.
Control display.
2. Click the Reset All drop-down menu.
The various default file options display.
3. Select a default file.
The values in left-hand pane change to the default values. Values change to normal text
from bold text.
4. Save the changes.
The following sections explain each of the CAESAR II configuration file Category options.
In This Section
Computational Control ................................................................... 57
Database Definitions ...................................................................... 63
FRP Pipe Properties ...................................................................... 69
Geometry Directives ...................................................................... 73
Graphic Settings ............................................................................ 76
Miscellaneous Options ................................................................... 93
SIFs and Stresses ......................................................................... 98
Set/Change Password ................................................................... 110

Computational Control
The Computational Control category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Convergence Tolerances (on page 57)
Input Spreadsheet Defaults (on page 59)
Miscellaneous (on page 61)
Figure 1: Computation Control Configuration Settings
Convergence Tolerances
Topics
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance ............................................ 58
Friction Angle Variation .................................................................. 58
Friction Normal Force Variation ..................................................... 58
Friction Slide Multiplier ................................................................... 58
Friction Stiffness ............................................................................ 59
Rod Increment (Degrees) .............................................................. 59
Rod Tolerance (Degrees) .............................................................. 59

Defines the value used by the software to check the ratio of off-diagonal to on-diagonal
coefficients in the row. The default value is 1.0 e+10. If this ratio is greater than the
decomposition singularity tolerance, then a numerical error may occur. This problem does not
have to be associated with a system singularity. This condition can exist when very small, and/or
long pipes are connected to very short, and/or large pipes. These solutions have several general
characteristics:
When computer precision errors of this type occur, they are very local in nature. They
typically affect only a single element or very small part of the model and are readily
noticeable upon inspection.
The 1E10 limit can be increased to 1E11 or 1E12 and still provide a reasonable check on
solution accuracy. Any solution computed after increasing the limit should always be
checked closely for reasonableness. At 1E11 or 1E12, the number of significant figures in
the local solution is reduced to two or three.
Although the 1E10 limit can be increased to 1E20 or 1E30 to get the job to run, it is
important to remember that the possibility for a locally errant solution exists when stiffness
ratios are allowed to get this high. Solutions should be carefully checked.
Specifies the friction sliding angle variation. The default value is 15-degrees.
This parameter had more significance in software versions prior to 2.1. It is currently
only used in the first iteration when a restraint goes from the non-sliding to sliding state. All
subsequent iterations compensate for the angle variation automatically.
Defines the amount of variation in the normal force that is permitted before an adjustment is
made in the sliding friction force. The default value is 0.15, or 15 percent. Normally, you should
not adjust this value.
Specifies the internal friction sliding force multiplier.

You should never adjust this value unless you are instructed to do so by
Intergraph CAS Support.

Specifies the friction restraint stiffness.

The default value for the friction restraint stiffness is 1.0E+06 lb/in.
If the structural load normal to a friction restraint is less than the restraint load multiplied by the
coefficient of friction, the pipe will not move at this support this restraint node is "non-sliding."
To model the non-sliding state, stiffnesses are inserted in the two directions perpendicular to the
restraint's line of action to oppose any sliding motion.
Nonlinear convergence problems may be alleviated by reducing the friction restraint stiffness.
Lower friction stiffness will more readily distribute friction loads throughout the system and allow
nonlinear convergence. However, this lower stiffness affects the accuracy of the results. Lower
stiffness values permit more "non-sliding" movement, but given the indeterminate nature of the
friction problem in general, this error may not be crucial.
Specifies the maximum amount of angular change that any one support can experience
between iterations. For difficult-to-converge problems, values of 0.1 have proven effective.
When small values are used, you should be prepared for a large number of iterations. The total
number of iterations can be estimated from the following:
Estimate number of Iterations = 1.5(x)/(r)/(Rod Increment)
Where:
x = maximum horizontal displacement at any one rod
r = rod length at that support
Specifies the angular plus-or-minus permitted convergence error. Unless the change from
iteration n to iteration n+1 is less than this value, the rod will not converge. The default value is
1.0 degree.
For systems subject to large horizontal displacements, values of 5.0 degrees for
convergence tolerances have been used successfully.
Input Spreadsheet Defaults

Topics
Alpha Tolerance ............................................................................. 60
Coefficient of Friction (Mu) ............................................................. 60
Default Rotational Restraint Stiffness ............................................ 60
Default Translational Restraint Stiffness ....................................... 60
Hanger Default Restraint Stiffness ................................................ 60
Minimum Wall Mill Tolerance (%) .................................................. 60
New Job Ambient Temperature ..................................................... 61
New Job Bourdon Pressure ........................................................... 61

Indicates the breakpoint at which the software decides that the entry in the Temp fields on the
input spreadsheet is a thermal strain (linear thermal expansion) or a temperature. The default
value is 0.05. Any entry in the Temp fields whose absolute magnitude is less than 0.05 is taken
to be a thermal strain in terms of inches per inch or mm per mm (unitless).
Specifies the value that the software applies by default as the coefficient of friction to all
translational restraints. If you type 0, which is the default value, the software does not apply any
friction.
Defines the value used for non-specified rotational restraint stiffnesses. By default, this value is
assumed to be (1.0E12 in-lb/deg).
Defines the value used for non-specified translational restraint stiffnesses. By default, this value
is assumed to be (1.0E12 lb./in).
Defines the value used for computing the hanger restrained weight loads. Where hangers are
adjacent to other supports or are themselves very close, such as where there are two hangers
on either side of a trunnion support, the CAESAR II hanger design algorithm may generate
poorly distributed hot hanger loads in the vicinity of the close hangers. Using a more flexible
support for computing the hanger restrained weight loads often allows the design algorithm to
is (1.0E12 lb/in).
Specifies the default percentage of wall thickness allowed for mill and other mechanical
tolerances.
For most piping codes, this value is only used during the minimum wall thickness
computation. Mill tolerance is usually not considered in the flexibility analysis.
The default value is 12.5, corresponding to a 12.5% tolerance. To eliminate mill tolerance
consideration, set Minimum Wall Mill Tolerance (%) to 0.0.

Represents the installed, or zero expansion, strain state. The default ambient temperature for all
elements in the system is 70ºF/21ºC.
This value is only used to initialize the ambient temperature input field for new jobs.
Changing this configuration value will not affect existing jobs. To change the ambient
temperature for an existing job, use the Ambient Temperature (on page 333) field in the Piping
Input Special Execution Parameters dialog box.
Specifies the type of Bourdon pressure effect used. The Bourdon effect causes straight pipe to
elongate and bends to open up translationally along a line connecting the curvature end points.
If the Bourdon effect is disabled, there will be no global displacements due to pressure.
None - Disables the Bourdon effect. There will be no global displacements due to pressure.
Trans Only - Includes only translation effects (Bourdon Pressure Option #1).
Trans + Rot - Includes translational and rotational effects on bends. This option may apply
for bends that are formed or rolled from straight pipe, where the bend-cross section will be
slightly oval due to the bending process. (Bourdon Pressure Option #2)
For straight pipe, Bourdon Pressure Option #1 is the same as Bourdon Pressure Option #2.
For elbows, Bourdon Pressure Option #1 should apply for forged and welded fittings where
the bend cross-section can be considered essentially circular.
The Bourdon effect (Trans only) is always considered when FRP pipe is used, regardless
of the actual setting of the Bourdon flag.
Miscellaneous
Topics
Bend Axial Shape .......................................................................... 62
Ignore Spring Hanger Stiffness...................................................... 62
Include Insulation in Hydrotest....................................................... 62
Include Spring Stiffness in Hanger OPE Travel Cases ................. 62
Incore Numerical Check ................................................................ 62
Missing Mass ZPA ......................................................................... 62
Use Pressure Stiffening on Bends ................................................. 63
WRC-107 Interpolation Method ..................................................... 63
WRC-107(537) Version ................................................................. 63

Controls whether the displacement mode is ignored. For bends 45-degrees or smaller, a major
contributor to deformation can be the axial displacement of the short-arched pipe. With the axial
shape function disabled, this displacement mode is ignored and the bend will be stiffer.
Indicates whether the software uses the stiffness of spring hangers in the analysis. The default
setting is False, meaning that the software does not ignore the stiffness of spring hangers.
Setting this option to True is consistent with hand computation methods of spring hanger
design, which ignores the effects of the springs.
Intergraph CAS recommends that you never change this value.
Controls whether the weight of any insulation and cladding will be considered in the hydrotest
case. To ignore the insulation and cladding in the hydrotest case, select False (the default
setting). To include the weight of insulation and cladding in the hydrotest case, select True.
Controls how the software handles spring hangers. If you select True, the software places the
designed spring stiffness into the Hanger Operating Travel Case and iterates until the system
balances. This iteration scheme therefore considers the effect of the spring hanger stiffness on
the thermal growth of the system (vertical travel of the spring). If this option is used, it is very
important that the hanger load in the cold case (in the physical system) be adjusted to match the
reported hanger cold load.
If you select False, spring hangers are designed the traditional way.
Enables the incore solution module to test the solution stability for the current model and
loadings. This option, if selected, adds the solution of an extra load case to the analysis.
Indicates which spectrum value CAESAR II uses. If you select Extracted (the default setting),
the software will use the spectrum value at the last "extracted" mode. Changing this value to
Spectrum instructs CAESAR II to use the last spectrum value as the ZPA for the missing mass
computations.

Controls whether CAESAR II includes pressure stiffening effects in those codes that do not
explicitly require its use. In these cases, pressure stiffening effects will apply to all bends,
elbows, and both miter types. In all cases, the pressure used is the maximum of all pressures
defined for the element.
Pressure stiffening effects are defined in Appendix D of B31.1 and B31.3.
When set to Default, the software considers the pressure stiffening of bends according to the
active piping code.
Specifies the interpolation method used by the software. The curves in WRC Bulletin 107 cover
typical applications of nozzles in vessels or piping; however, should any of the interpolation
parameters, such as U, Beta, and so forth, fall outside the limits of the available curves, then
CAESAR II uses the last curve value in the appropriate WRC table.
Sets the version of the WRC-107(537) bulletin used in the computations. Valid options are:
Aug'65 - August 1965
Mar'79 - March 1979
March '79 1B1/2B1 - March 1979 with the 1B1-1 and 2B-1 off axis curves. This is the
default setting.
In 2010, WRC Bulletin 537 was released. According to the foreword of WRC Bulletin
537, "WRC 537 provides exactly the same content in a more useful and clear format. It is not an
update or a revision of 107." CAESAR II uses the graphs from Bulletin 107. Bulletin 537 simply
provides equations in place of the curves found in Bulletin 107.
Database Definitions
The Database Definitions category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Databases (on page 64)

ODBC Settings (on page 69)
Databases
Topics
Alternate CAESAR II Distributed Data Path .................................. 64
Default Spring Hanger Table ......................................................... 65
Expansion Joints ............................................................................ 66
Load Case Template ..................................................................... 66
Piping Size Specification ............................................................... 67
Structural Database ....................................................................... 67
Units File Name ............................................................................. 67
User Material Database Filename ................................................. 67
Valve/Flange Files Location ........................................................... 68
Valves and Flanges ....................................................................... 68
Specifies which system folder CAESAR II users to run the software. Select a folder in the list.
Because the software writes the configuration file (CAESAR.cfg) to the local data folder, you can
configure different data folders to reference different system folders. All of the system folders
contain formatting files, units files, text files, and other user-configurable data files. Some of
these formatting files are language or code-specific. Therefore, you may want to switch between
system folders depending on the current job.
You can create multiple system folders in the same location to provide different options for
different projects. System folder names must use the following naming convention:
SYSTEM.xxx, where .xxx, is a three-character suffix identifying the folder. You can create as
many system folders as needed below the CAESAR II installation program folder, as long as
you follow the required naming convention. CAESAR II uses the system folder you indicate in
the configuration settings.
For example, you could set up system folders specified for each of the piping codes
configurations you need, such as:

System.STM (Stoomwezen code system configuration)

System.ANC (ASME NC code system configuration)
System.313 (ASME B31.3 code system configuration)
You could also set up system folders that are customized specific projects.
Browse and locate any system folders named using the SYSTEM.xxx format from the Alternate
CAESAR II Distributed Data Path configuration setting. Then, you can select one and save the
configuration.
You can create system folders that reside in other locations, such as somewhere on your
network. This allows you to share the settings from the System folder with others. However, you
must copy the System folder and other necessary program folders to the secondary location.
You must also copy the LIB_I, LIB_M, and Spec folders (found in the Program folder
along with the System folder) to each new system folder location. You can leave the Backup,
Examples, and Temp folders in the original program folder location, as shown in the example
below.
The file name requirements mentioned in the previous section apply for system folders on a
network or in a secondary location as well. In addition, you can set up network system files that
apply at a project level.
There must be a primary system folder, named System, in which the software can place
accounting, version, and diagnostic files that it creates during execution. The location of the
primary system folder is dependent on the specific edition of the Windows operating system, as
follows:
Windows 7 and later
"C:\ProgramData\INTERGRAPH CAS\CAESAR II\x.xx\System"
The x.xx in each of the above sample path represents the CAESAR II version number.
Defines the value of the default spring hanger table, which is referenced during the spring
hanger design stage of the solution. The software includes tables from more than 35 different
vendors.

Specifies which expansion joint database the software should reference during subsequent input
sessions. Available databases provided include Pathway, Senior Flexonics, IWK, Piping
Technology, and China.
Specifies which load case template is active. The software uses the active template file to
recommend load cases.
Because the software writes the CAESAR.cfg file to the local data folder, you can configure
different data directories to reference different template files.
Different piping codes have different requirements for load cases. If you use multiple piping
codes in your job, CAESAR II refers to the piping code defined on the last element in the
model to determine which load cases to recommend as per the code standards.
The load case template file name is limited to 15 characters (including the extension).
Select this option, applicable only to B31.3 and B31.3 Chapter IX, to include alternate
Sustained (SUS) load cases to consider all support configurations for each corresponding
Operating (OPE) condition as required by the codes. This option also includes the additional
Expansion (EXP) stress range load cases for better coverage of multiple operating
conditions.
Select this option if you do not need additional EXP stress range load cases and do not use
the alternate SUS/OCC load cases for B31.3 and B31.3 Chapter IX.
Select this option to include additional EXP stress range load cases for better coverage of
multiple operating conditions and do not use the alternate SUS/OCC load cases for B31.3
and B31.3 Chapter IX.
Select this option to include alternate SUS load cases to consider all support configurations
for each corresponding OPE condition as required by B31.3 and B31.3 Chapter IX. This
option is applicable to all piping codes (except for IGE/TD/12), and not limited to B31.3
piping code. This option also includes the additional EXP stress range load cases for better
coverage of multiple operating conditions.

Specifies the piping specification standard. Select one of the following standards: ANSI
(American National Standard), JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard), or DIN (German Standard).
By default, the software uses the ANSI pipe size and schedule tables in the input processor.
Specifies which database file is used to acquire the structural steel shape labels and cross
section properties. Select one of the following: AISC 1977, AISC 1989, German 1991, South
African 1991, Korean 1990, Australian 1990, United Kingdom, or China.
Specifies which of the available units files is active. The active units file is used for new job
creation and all output generation.
Because the CAESAR.cfg file is written to the local data directory, you can configure
different data directories to reference different units files.
The software first searches for units files in the local data directory, followed by the active
System directory.
Specifies which user material database (UMD) file the software will access. By default, when
you add to or modify the supplied material database, the changes are saved to a file named
umat1.umd, which is located in the \System folder.
Versions of CAESAR II prior to 5.30 used the name umat1.bin. This file can be
copied, then renamed, if necessary, to umat1.umd.
In some cases, it may be necessary to manipulate several UMD files. This can occur if UMD
files are acquired from different sources. Because a specific file name can only be used once, it
will be necessary to rename any additional UMD files. As long as the file suffix is UMD, and the
file resides in the \System folder, the various CAESAR II modules will be able to access them.
Material database files are accessed as described below:
Piping Input and Analysis
The software reads the CAESAR II supplied material database (cmat.bin).
The software reads the specified user material database (UMD) and uses the updated
materials in the UMD file instead of those in the CAESAR II supplied database.
The Material Database Editor
The software reads the CAESAR II supplied material database (cmat.bin).
The software reads the specified user material database (UMD) and uses updated materials
in the UMD file instead of those in the CAESAR II supplied database.
CAESAR II saves any changes or additions to the specified user material database (UMD).

1. Open the Configuration Editor and click Database Definitions.

2. In User Material Database Filename, type in a new name.
The UMD suffix should not be changed.

The file name plus the period plus the UMD suffix should not exceed 15 characters.
Do not use spaces (blanks) in the file name.
3. Before exiting the Configuration Editor, click Save and Exit to save the modified
configuration.
4. When you open the Piping Input or the Material Database Editor, the software creates the
new UMD file.
Defines where CAESAR II looks for the valve/flange data file. The possible settings for this
configuration setting include:
CAESARII Directory
Directs the software to look for the valve/flange data files in the CAESAR II folders below
%allusersprofile%.
Specs in CII, Data in CW
Directs the software to look for the specification files in the CAESAR II folders below
%allusersprofile%, but to look for the actual data files in the CADWorx folders.
CADWorx Directory
Directs the software to look for the valve/flange data files in the CADWorx folders.
Specifies which valve/flange database CAESAR II references during subsequent input sessions.
The available databases include:
CADWORX.VHD
Reference the CADWorx Plant database.
CRANE.VHD
Reference the Crane database.
GENERIC.VHD
Reference a generic database.
NOFLANGE.VHD
Reference a database (generic) without attached flanges.

ODBC Settings
Topics
Append Reruns to Existing Data.................................................... 69
Enable Data Export to ODBC-Compliant Databases .................... 69
ODBC Compliant Database Name ................................................ 69
Controls how the software handles data from multiple runs.

False
Overwrite data from previous runs in the ODBC database. This is the default setting.
True
Add new data to the database, thus storing multiple runs of the same job in the database.
Turns on or off the capability to create ODBC-compliant databases for static output.
Type the name of the ODBC project database. All jobs run in this data folder will write their
output to the database specified here.
FRP Pipe Properties

The FRP Properties category provides access to the following groups of configuration settings:
Material Properties (on page 70)
Settings (on page 72)

Material Properties
Topics
Axial Modulus of Elasticity ............................................................. 70
Axial Strain: Hoop Stress (Ea/Eh*Vh/a) ......................................... 70
FRP Alpha (xE-06) ......................................................................... 70
FRP Density ................................................................................... 71
FRP Laminate Type ....................................................................... 71
FRP Property Data File .................................................................. 71
Ratio Shear Modulus: Elastic Modulus .......................................... 72
Displays the axial elastic modulus of fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe. This is the default value
used to set the data in the input processor. When necessary, you may override this value.
Displays the product of the ratio of the axial to the hoop elastic modulus and Poisson's ratio,
which relates the strain in the axial direction to a stress in the hoop direction.
Ea
Elastic modulus in the axial direction.
Eh
Elastic modulus in the hoop direction.
Vh/a
Poisson's ratio relating the strain in the axial direction due to a stress in the hoop direction.
Specifies the thermal expansion coefficient for the fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe used
(multiplied by 1,000,000). For example, if the value is 8.5E-6 in/in/deg, then type 8.5. The
exponent (E-6) is implied.
If a single expansion coefficient is too limiting for your application, the actual thermal
strain may always be calculated at temperature in inches per inch (or mm per mm) and entered
directly into the Temperature field on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.

Displays the weight of the pipe material on a per unit volume basis. This field is used to set the
default weight density of FRP materials in the piping input module.
Specifies the default laminate type as defined in the BS 7159 code for the fiberglass reinforced
plastic pipe. Valid laminate types are:
CSM and Woven Roving
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and external
surface tissue reinforced layer.
CSM and Multi-filament
Chopped strand mat and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external surface
tissue reinforced layer.
CSM
All chopped strand mat construction with internal and external surface tissue reinforced
layer.
The software uses this entry to calculate the flexibility and stress intensity factors of bends;
therefore, this default entry may be overridden using the Type field on the bend auxiliary
dialog boxes.
Select the file from which the software will read the standard FRP material properties. After the
file is selected, the software will give you the option of reading in from that file.
You may create FRP material files as ASCII text files with the .frp extension; these files should
be stored in the CAESAR\System sub-folder. The format of the files must adhere to the format
shown in the following sample file:
The data lines must exactly follow the order shown. The four data lines defining the UKOOA
envelope are intended for future use and may be omitted.
For information on editing ASCII text, see ASCII Text File Rules (on page 53).

Type the ratio of the shear modulus to the modulus of elasticity (in the axial direction) of the
fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe used. For example, if the material modulus of elasticity (axial)
is 3.2E6 psi, and the shear modulus is 8.0E5 psi, the ratio of these two, 0.25, should be entered.
Settings
Topics
BS 7159 Pressure Stiffening.......................................................... 72
Exclude F2 from UKOOA Bending Stress ..................................... 72
Use FRP Flexibilities ...................................................................... 73
Use FRP SIF .................................................................................. 73
Displays the method used to calculate the effect of pressure stiffening on the bend SIFs. The BS
7159 code explicitly requires that the effect of pressure stiffening on the bend SIFs be calculated
using the design strain (this is based upon the assumption that the FRP piping is fully
pressurized to its design limit). This is the default method for CAESAR II.
When the piping is pressurized to a value much lower than its design pressure, it may be more
accurate to calculate pressure stiffening based on the actual pressure stress, rather than its
design strain.
This alternative method is a deviation from the explicit instructions of the BS 7159
code.
Modifies the UKOOA requirements for axial bending stress. Some sources, such as Shell's DEP
31.40.10.19-Gen. (December 1998) and ISO/DIS 14692 suggest that, when using the UKOOA
code, the axial bending stress should not be multiplied by the Part Factor f2 (the System Factor
of Safety) prior to combination with the longitudinal pressure stress.
True
Modify the UKOOA requirements for axial bending stress.
False
Use the UKOOA exactly as written.

Controls the fitting flexibility factor used by the software.

True
Set the fitting flexibility factor to 1.0 when FRP pipe is selected (Material #20). This is the
default setting.
False
Apply the standard "code" flexibility factor equations to all FRP fittings.
If the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes are in effect, the software uses code flexibility
factors, regardless of the setting of this configuration setting.
Controls the SIF used by the software.

True
Set the fitting SIF to 2.3 when FRP pipe is selected (Material #20). This is the default
setting.
False
Apply the standard "code" SIF equations to all FRP fittings. Optionally, you can manually
type an alternative value.
If the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes are in effect, the software always uses code SIFs,
regardless of the setting of this configuration setting.
Geometry Directives
The Geometry Directives category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Bends (on page 74)
Input Items (on page 75)

Bends
Topics
Bend Length Attachment Percent .................................................. 74
Maximum Allowable Bend Angle ................................................... 74
Minimum Allowable Bend Angle .................................................... 74
Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend.................................................. 75
Controls the amount of accuracy included in the system dimensions around bends. The default
attachment is 1.0 percent.
Whenever the element leaving the tangent intersection of a bend is within (n)% of the bend
radius on either side of the weldline, CAESAR II inserts an element from the bend weldline to
the To node of the element leaving the bend. The inserted element has a length equal to exactly
(n)% of the bend radius. You can use Bend Length Attachment Percent to adjust this
percentage to reduce the error due to the inserted element; however, the length tolerance for
elements leaving the bend will also be reduced.
Specifies the maximum angle CAESAR II will accept for a bend. The default value is
95-degrees.
Very large angles, short radius bends can cause numerical problems during solution. When you
have a reasonable radius and a large angle, problems rarely arise. However, if the large angle
bend plots well when compared to the surrounding elements, then the bend can probably be
used without difficulty. Well-proportioned bends up to 135-degrees have been tested without a
problem.
Specifies the minimum angle CAESAR II will accept for a bend angle. The default value is 5.0
degrees.
Very small angles, short radius bends can cause numerical problems during solution. When you
have a reasonable radius and a small angle, problems rarely arise. However, if the small angle
bend is grossly small compared to the surrounding elements, then a different modeling
approach is recommended so that the bend is not used.

Controls the CAESAR II error checking tolerance for the "closeness" of points on the bend
curvature. The default value is 5.0-degrees.
Nodes on a bend curvature that are too close together can cause numerical problems during
solution. Where the radius of the bend is large, such as in a cross-country pipeline, it is not
uncommon to find nodes on a bend curvature closer than 5-degrees.
Input Items
Topics
Auto Node Number Increment ....................................................... 75
Connect Geometry Through CNodes ............................................ 75
Horizontal Thermal Bowing Tolerance .......................................... 76
Loop Closure Tolerance ................................................................ 76
New Job Z-Axis Vertical................................................................. 76
Sets the value for the Automatic Node Numbering routine. The software uses any non-zero,
positive value that you type to automatically assume the To node value on the piping input
spreadsheets. The new To node number is determined as:
"To Node" = "From Node" + Auto Node Number Increment
If this value is set to 0.0, automatic node numbering is disabled.
Controls whether each restraint, nozzle, or hanger exists at the same point in space as its
connecting node.
Restraints, flexible nozzles, and spring hangers may be defined with connecting nodes. By
default, CAESAR II ignores the position of the restraint node and the connecting node. They
may be at the same point, or they may be hundreds of feet apart. In many cases, enabling this
option will cause "plot-wise" disconnected parts of the system to be re-connected and to appear
as-expected in both input and output plots.

Specifies the maximum slope of a straight pipe element for which thermal bowing effects will be
considered.
Thermal bowing is usually associated with fluid carrying horizontal pipes in which the fluid does
not fill the cross section. In these cases, there is a temperature differential across the cross
section. You can use Horizontal Thermal Bowing Tolerance to define the interpretation of
"horizontal." By default, the software uses a value of 0.0001 as the horizontal threshold value. If
thermal b
formula:
PITCH = | DY | / ( DX2 + DY2 + DZ2 )1/2
Sets the loop closure tolerance that CAESAR II uses for error checking. You can set this value
interactively for each job analyzed, or you can type the loop closure tolerance using this option
and override the software default value of 1.0 in without distraction.
Controls in which plane the Z-axis lies. By default, CAESAR II assumes the Y-axis is vertical
with the X- and Z-axes in the horizontal plane.
False
Place the Z-axis in the horizontal plane. This is the default setting.
True
Make the Z-axis vertical. The X- and Y-axes will be in the horizontal plane.
This setting applies only to jobs created after this setting is changed.
Graphic Settings
The Graphics Settings category provides access to configuration settings that used to set the
different plot option colors, font characteristics, and the view options.
Advanced Options
Contains options that should only be used by graphics experts. For more information, see
Advanced Options (on page 78).
Background Colors
Contains options that define the color of the plot window. For more information, see
Background Colors (on page 78).
CADWorx Options
Contains options that define the color and behavior for CADWorx drawings imported into
CAESAR II models. For more information, see CADWorx Options (on page 79).
Component Colors

Contains options that define the color for various components in the plot. For more
information, see Component Colors (on page 80).
Marker Options
Contains options that set the node marker color and size. For more information, see Marker
Options (on page 83).
Miscellaneous Options
Contains options that determine how graphics are displayed either by default or when using
the Reset Plot option. For more information, see Miscellaneous Options (on page 84).
Output Colors
Contains options that set the colors used when plotting code stress in output. For more
information, see Output Colors (on page 88).
Text Options
Contains options for defining font, font style, font size, and color. Scripts are supported. For
more information, see Text Options (on page 89).
Visual Options
Contains options that control general plotting visibility. For more information, see Visual
Options (on page 90).
To change a color, click it once and then click the ellipses button that appears to the
right. Select a color in the dialog box that appears, and then click OK. To save the color settings,
click Save and Exit before closing the Configuration Editor.

Advanced Options
Topics
Backplane Culling .......................................................................... 78
Culling Maximum Extent ................................................................ 78
Use Culling Frustrum ..................................................................... 78
This setting should only be used by graphics experts. If you are experiencing difficulties with
your graphics, contact Intergraph CAS Support for assistance.
Background Colors
Topics
Bottom ............................................................................................ 78
Top ................................................................................................. 78
Use Uniform Background Color ..................................................... 79
Sets the color for the bottom of the plot window.
Sets the color for the top of the plot window.

Controls the background color. Set this option to True if you want the plot background to be one
uniform color instead of blending between the top and bottom colors.
CADWorx Options
Topics
Color - Ambient .............................................................................. 79
Color - Face ................................................................................... 79
Color - Line .................................................................................... 79
Color - Specular ............................................................................. 79
Color - Transmission ...................................................................... 80
Gloss Value.................................................................................... 80
Show Lines .................................................................................... 80
Show Model ................................................................................... 80
Use AutoCAD Colors ..................................................................... 80
Use Keyboard for Walkthrough...................................................... 80
Sets the color of the ambient properties on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II
model.
Sets the color of the face of the CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II model.
Sets the color of the piping lines on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II model.
Sets the color of the specular properties on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II
model.

Sets the color of the transmission lines on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II
model.
Sets the level of the gloss value on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II model.
Indicates to show or hide the piping lines on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II
model.
Indicates to show or hide the CADWorx drawing (model) that was imported into a CAESAR II
model.
Indicates to use the color settings from AutoCAD on a CADWorx drawing imported into a
CAESAR II model.
Indicates to use the keyboard, not the mouse, to perform a walkthrough on a CADWorx drawing
imported into a CAESAR II model.
Component Colors
You can also change component colors on the Plot Settings dialog box. For more
information, see Display Options Toolbar (on page 388).

Topics
Anchor CNode ............................................................................... 81
Anchors .......................................................................................... 81
Displacements ............................................................................... 81
Flange ............................................................................................ 82
Forces/Moments 1 ......................................................................... 82
Forces/Moments 2 ......................................................................... 82
Hanger CNode ............................................................................... 82
Hangers ......................................................................................... 82
Nozzles .......................................................................................... 82
Nozzle Limit Color 1 ....................................................................... 82
Nozzle Limit Color 2 ....................................................................... 83
Pipes .............................................................................................. 83
Restraint CNode ............................................................................ 83
Restraints ....................................................................................... 83
Rigids ............................................................................................. 83
Selection ........................................................................................ 83
SIFs/Tees....................................................................................... 83
Steel ............................................................................................... 83
Sets the color of Cnode anchors when displayed in the graphics.
Sets the color of anchors when displayed in the graphics.
Sets the color of all displacement arrows displayed in the graphics.

For more information about displacement arrows, see Displacements (on page 371).
Sets the color of expansion joints when displayed in the graphics.

Sets the color of all flanges when displayed in the graphics.
Sets the first color of the stripe pattern of force and moment vector arrows displayed in the
graphics. The arrows show the force and moment direction.
Set the second color of the force and moment arrows in the Forces/Moments 2 (on page 82)
configuration setting.
For more information about force and moment arrows, see Forces (on page 375).
Sets the second color of the stripe pattern of force and moment vector arrows displayed in the
graphics. The arrows show the force and moment direction.
Set the first color of the force and moment arrows in the Forces/Moments 1 (on page 82)
configuration setting.
For more information about force and moment arrows, see Forces (on page 375).
Sets the color of Cnode hangers when displayed in the graphics.
Sets the color of the spring hangers (and spring cans) when displayed in the graphics.
Sets the color of all nozzles when displayed in the graphics.
Sets the first color of the nozzle limit reference vector arrow when displayed in the graphics.
This arrow shows the element orientation when defining the local coordinate system for an
equipment check. Set the second color of the nozzle limit reference vector arrow in the Nozzle
Limit Color 2 (on page 83) configuration setting.

Sets the second color of the nozzle limit reference vector arrow when displayed in the graphics.
This arrow shows the element orientation when defining the local coordinate system for an
equipment check. Set the first color of the nozzle limit reference vector arrow in the Nozzle Limit
Color 1 (on page 82) configuration setting.
Sets the color of all pipe elements when displayed in the graphics.
Sets the color of the restraint Cnode when displayed in the graphics.
Sets the color of all restraints (except for anchors and hangers) when displayed in the graphics.
Sets the color of all rigid elements when displayed in the graphics.
Sets the color of the selected element when displayed in the graphics.
Sets the color of all tees when displayed in the graphics.
Sets the color of all structural steel elements in both the structural steel plot and the piping plot
when structural steel is included.
Marker Options
Topics
Marker Color .................................................................................. 84
Marker Size .................................................................................... 84

Sets the color of the node markers shown in the graphics.
Sets the size of the node markers shown in the graphics.
These options determine how graphics display by default or how they display when you use the
Reset Plot option while in the graphics.
Topics
Default Operator ............................................................................ 84
Default Projection Mode ................................................................ 84
Default Render Mode ..................................................................... 85
Default View ................................................................................... 85
Disable Graphic Tooltip Bubble ..................................................... 85
Force Black and White Printing ..................................................... 86
Idle Processing Count .................................................................... 86
Optimal Frame Rate ...................................................................... 86
Restore Previous Anchor Size ....................................................... 86
Restore Previous Hanger Size ...................................................... 86
Restore Previous Operator ............................................................ 87
Restore Previous Projection Mode ................................................ 87
Restore Previous Render Mode .................................................... 87
Restore Previous Restraint Size .................................................... 87
Restore Previous View .................................................................. 88
Video Driver ................................................................................... 88
Controls the initial display of graphics. Available options are Zoom to Window, Annotate,
Orbit, Pan, Restore Previous, Select, and Zoom with Mouse. The default setting is Zoom to
Window.
Specifies the projection of graphics in the software. You can select Orthographic, Perspective,
or Stretched. The default projection setting is Orthographic.

Specifies the render mode. Available options are Phong Shading, Centerline, Flat, Gouraud
Shading, Silhouette, Triangulated, and Wireframe, either with or without hidden lines. The
default render mode setting is Phong Shading.
Centerline and Silhouette are the fastest render modes and less memory intensive
for your computer graphics card.
Specifies the graphical view. Available options are SE Isometric, SW Isometric, NW Isometric,
NE Isometric, Top, Bottom, Front, Back, Left, Right, and Restore Previous. The default
view setting is SE Isometric.
Enables or disables the tooltip bubble that displays information about the element that you
mouse over in the graphics view.
True
Tooltip bubble does not display.
False
Tooltip bubble displays.

Controls printing output of graphics. If set to True, graphics are printed using only black and
white.
Controls the number of objects the software is allowed to draw during a single idle cycle.
CAESAR II draws the model whenever your machine becomes idle, that is, whenever any
interaction between you and the computer ceases. For example, there may three or four idle
messages between keystrokes. On slower machines, it may increase performance to lower this
value, and vice versa.
Determines how many times per second the software will re-draw the piping display when it is
being manipulated, such as when you are zooming, panning, or rotating the display. If you
experience graphics problems such as sluggishness during operations or large boxes being
drawn instead of the piping system display, lower this number.
Returns the anchor size to its previous setting.

True
Restore the anchor size to its previous setting.
False
Use the default setting.
Returns the hanger size to its previous setting.

True
Restore the hanger size to its previous setting.
False

Returns the operator to its previous setting.

True
Restore the operator to its previous setting.
False
Returns the projection mode to its previous state. Projection mode is either isometric or
orthographic.
True
Restore the projection mode to its previous setting.
False
Returns the render mode to its previous state.

Four render modes are available in CAESAR II: solids, wireframes, silhouette, and
centerline.
True
Restore the render mode to its previous setting.
False
Returns the restraint size to its previous setting.

True
Restore the restraint size to its previous setting.
False

Returns the standard view to its previous setting.

The standard views are Front, Back, Top, Bottom, Left, Right, SW Isometric, SE
Isometric, NW Isometric and NE Isometric.
True
Restore the standard view to its previous setting.
False
Determines the video driver the software uses for graphics display. Select a specific video driver
or leave the default option, CAESAR II Determines, which means the software intelligently
selects the optimal 3D driver supported by your operating environment.
In Windows operating systems, the software gives preference to DirectX options,
followed by OpenGL options.
Output Colors
Topics
Actual Stress Settings .................................................................... 88
Displaced Shape ............................................................................ 89
Percent Stress Settings ................................................................. 89
Assigns a color to a specific level of stress. When plotting code stress in output, the software will
color the elements in terms of actual stress. The levels are currently set as follows:
Level Actual Stress
Level 1 <10,000 psi
Level 2 10,000 to 15,000 psi
Level 3 15,000 to 20,000 psi
Level 4 20,000 to 25,000 psi
Level 5 25,000 to 30,000 psi
Level 6 > 30,000 psi

When plotting code stress in output, the software can also color elements in terms of
percent of code allowable. For more information, see Percent Stress Settings (on page 89).
Sets the color of the Displaced Shape option when displayed in output graphics.
Assigns a color to a specific level of stress. When plotting code stress in output, the software will
color the elements in terms of the percent of code allowable. The levels are currently set as
follows:
Percent (of Code Allowable)

Level
Stress
Level 1 < 20%
Level 2 20 to 40%
Level 3 40 to 60%
Level 4 60 to 80%
Level 5 80 to 100%
Level 6 >100%
When plotting code stress in output, the software can also color elements in terms of
actual stress. For more information, see Actual Stress Settings (on page 88).
Text Options
You can use these options to select font, font style, and font size and color. Scripts
are supported. The different plot texts are node numbers and names, annotation, and legends.
Topics
Annotation Text .............................................................................. 90
Legend Text ................................................................................... 90
Node Text ...................................................................................... 90
Output Text .................................................................................... 90
Rendered Mode Text Always Visible ............................................. 90
Silhouette Mode Text Always Visible ............................................. 90

Defines the font, font size, and color of annotation text.
Sets the text color and font style settings of all legends, such as displacements, temperatures,
and so forth, when displayed in the graphics.
Determines the color and font style settings of node numbers and node names when displayed
in the graphics.
Defines the font, font size, and color of output text.
Controls the display of rendered text. By default, the software will not draw text that is occluded
by anything else, including other text. For example, if a pipe is in front of text, the text will not be
drawn. If some text overlaps other text, the text that is further back will be hidden. To override
this behavior so that all text is shown, set RenderedModeTextAlwaysVisible to True.
Controls the display of silhouette text.
Visual Options
These options control general plotting visibility.
Topics
Always Use System Colors............................................................ 91
Always Use System Fonts ............................................................. 91
Axis Mode ...................................................................................... 91
Fixed Size Restraint Size ............................................................... 92
Hide Overlapping Text ................................................................... 92
North Direction ............................................................................... 92
Restraint Helix is a Line ................................................................. 92
Shadow Mode ................................................................................ 92
Show Bounding Box ...................................................................... 92
Smooth Transitions ........................................................................ 93
Use Fixed Size Restraints ............................................................. 93
Visibility % ...................................................................................... 93

Stores the colors the software uses to display the model in the registry.
Stores the fonts that the software uses to display the model in the registry.
Specifies display of the axes in the plot. By default, the axes display in the lower left corner of
the plot. Select one of the following:
On
Displays planes with the coordinate system axes. This option specifies Options > Axis
> Axis Planes as the default in the software.
Simple
Displays the coordinate system axes. This option specifies Options > Axis > Axis as
the default in the software.
Off
Turns off axis display. This option specifies Options > Axis > Off as the default in the
software.
For more information, see Axis (on page 377).

Controls the restraint size. By default, the software draws restraints relative to the size of the
pipe to which they are attached. For example, the symbol is larger on a 12-inch pipe than on a
2-inch pipe. You can override this behavior so that the software uses the same size restraint
everywhere by setting Use Fixed Size Restraints (on page 93) to True and defining a Fixed
Size Restraint Size value.
Hides node text that is overwritten by other text. This makes reading the plot easier, but
eliminates some node text.
Specifies display of a north arrow with the axes. Select True or False. The North arrow indicates
the North orientation of the plant.
The north arrow does not display when you set Axis Mode (on page 91) to Off.
Controls how the software draws a restraint helix.

By default, a restraint with a variable retention is drawn with a small spring to indicate that it is
not fixed. If this property is set to True (the default setting), the software draws the spring as a
line; otherwise, the software draws the spring as a coiled cylinder.
If drawing the restraint helix as a line degrades plot performance, set Restraint Helix
is a Line to False.
Defines the shadow mode. Select Hard, Soft, or None. The default setting is None.
Controls whether a bounding box appears around the model when it is being manipulated--for
example, rotated or panned-- with the mouse.
True
Display a bounding box.
False
Suppress the display of a bounding box.

Specifies whether graphics have a smooth transition when the view is changed.
True
Enable smooth transition.
False
Change the view instantly. This option reduces the video card memory requirements.
Controls the size of the restraint. When it is set to True, this property draws restraints based on
the value defined by the property Fixed Size Restraint Size (on page 92).
Determines the percentage of incident light that passes through an element volume when using
the Translucent Objects or Hidden Lines option in the graphics. Setting this to zero makes all
elements completely opaque while a setting of 100% renders all elements transparent. The
default setting is 50%.
The Miscellaneous Options category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Input Items (on page 94)
Output Items (on page 95)
System Level Items (on page 96)

Input Items
Topics
Autosave Time Interval .................................................................. 94
Disable "File Open" Graphic Thumbnail ........................................ 94
Disable Undo/Redo Ability ............................................................. 94
Dynamic Example Input Text ......................................................... 94
Enable Autosave ............................................................................ 95
Prompted Autosave ....................................................................... 95
Sets the time interval used to perform the auto-save function. Type a value in minutes.
Controls whether the graphic thumbnail plot in the Open dialog box (accessed by clicking File >
Open in the software) is displayed. The graphics thumbnail plots a small image of the model as
a single line drawing. On some slower, memory limited processors, or when scanning very large
models, this thumbnail graphic may take a few seconds to plot the model.
True
Turn on the display of thumbnail graphics.
False
Turn off the display of thumbnail graphics.
Controls the Undo/Redo feature of the input module. On some installations, it may be useful to
disable the Undo/Redo feature of the input module. With Undo/Redo enabled, CAESAR II can
process a job approximately one-half the size of that which can be processed when Undo/Redo
is disabled (for similar memory settings). Likewise, with Undo/Redo enabled, the input module
speed may be reduced.
Controls how much example text is placed in new dynamic input files. By default, the software
places example text and spectrum definitions in the input stream of new dynamic input files.
After you are familiar with the input, this example text may be unnecessary. Select from the
following options to vary how much of this example text is incorporated in the input:
Max
Place all of the examples and spectrum definitions in the input stream of new dynamic input
files.
None
Eliminate all the example text and all the built-in spectrum definitions. This setting is
intended for experienced users.

Spec
Eliminate all of the example text, but leaves the predefined spectrum definition. This means
that the built-in spectrum definitions (El Centro, and so forth) will still be defined and
available for use.
Controls whether CAESAR II will automatically save the piping input at specified intervals.
True
Turn on Autosave.
False
Turn off Autosave.
Controls whether the software prompts you at the specified time interval to save the input. You
must also set Enable Autosave to True.
True
Prompt before performing the autosave
False
Perform the autosave without prompting.
Output Items
Topics
Displacement Reports Sorted by Nodes ....................................... 95
Output Reports by Load Case ....................................................... 96
Output Table of Contents ............................................................... 96
Time History Animation .................................................................. 96
Turns on and off nodal sort. By default, the software sorts the nodes in ascending order during
the force/stress computations. This produces a displacement output report in which the nodes
are ordered in increasing magnitude. Select False to turn off this nodal sort. The resulting
displacement reports will be produced in the order the nodes were entered during model
building.

Controls how output reports are sorted. By default, the software generates output reports sorted
by load case. Select False to turn off this option, which causes output reports to be sorted by
type. For reports by type, all displacement reports will be generated, then all restraint reports,
then all force reports, and so on.
Controls the generation of a table of contents, which is normally produced after a static or a
dynamic output session.
True
Generate a table of contents upon exit. This is the default setting.
False
Suppress generation of a table of contents.
Controls the creation of the file used to animate the time history displacement of the piping
system. By default, this setting is turned on, which instructs CAESAR II to generate a file of
displacements, <jobname>.XYT, for every time step. This file is used in subsequent interactive
animation sessions by the user. The size of this file is dependent on the size of the model and
the number of time steps analyzed. Consequently, it may be advantageous from a disk usage
point of view not to create this file.
True
Generate the displacement file. This is the default setting.
False
Suppress generation of the displacement file.
System Level Items

Topics
Compress CAESAR II Files ........................................................... 97
Memory Allocated (Mb) .................................................................. 97
User ID ........................................................................................... 97

Controls the compression of CAESAR II files.

True
Compress all of the CAESAR II job files into an archive named <jobname>.c2, when the job
is not active. After the software creates the archive, it deletes the component files (_a, _j,
_p, _7, _s, and so forth).
False
Leave the component files in the data directory and do not create the c2 archive.
Only one job file exists in the data directory.

The job and all related data are easily archived.
The job and all related data can be transmitted in its entirety.
The archive makes it difficult to get to the component files.

The archive is big, because it contains all component files. Therefore, saving or transmitting
takes more resources than manipulating a single component file.
For larger jobs, the compression/decompression activity slows down file access.
Modifies the Windows registry to increase the amount of RAM available to CAESAR II. Setting
this option to a number greater than the available RAM will cause Windows to use Virtual
Memory (hard disk space to be used as RAM). Because doing this may slow the software, it is
usually recommended only for very large piping models.
Creates a control file for a specific computer. Type a three-character user ID for each user, or
more exactly, each workstation.
When multiple workstations attempt to access CAESAR II data in the same directory
simultaneously, the control file in the data directory becomes corrupted, which may cause
abnormal software execution. In situations where there may be more than one concurrent user
running CAESAR II in a given data directory, you can use this option to create a separate
control file for each computer, thus allowing simultaneous access of the CAESAR II data within
the same folder.
This user ID is not a password and is specific to the computer requiring access and
not to the user.

SIFs and Stresses

The SIFs and Stresses category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Advanced Settings (on page 99)
Code-Specific Settings (on page 100)
General Settings (on page 103)
Legacy Settings (on page 108)

Advanced Settings
Topics
Class 1 Branch Flexibility............................................................... 99
Use Schneider ............................................................................... 99
Use WRC 329 ................................................................................ 99
Activates the Class 1 flexibility calculations. By default, this setting is False.

The appearance of this parameter in the configuration file will completely change the modeling
of intersections in the analysis. For intersections not satisfying the reduced branch rules that d/D
0.5 and that D/T 100, the branch will start at the surface of the header pipe. A perfectly rigid
junction between the center\-line of the header and surface will be formed automatically by
CAESAR II using the element offset calculations. SIFs act at the surface point for the branch.
When the reduced branch rules are satisfied, the local flexibility of the header is also inserted at
this surface point. Intersections not satisfying the reduced intersection rules will be stiffer and
carry more loads, while intersections satisfying the reduced intersection rules will be more
flexible and will carry less load. All changes to the model are completely transparent to the user.
In systems where the intersection flexibility is a major component of the overall system stiffness,
you are urged to run the analysis both with and without the Class 1 Branch Flexibility active to
determine the effect of this modeling on the analysis.
Activates the Schneider reduced intersection assumptions. By default, this setting is False.
It was because of observations by Schneider that much of the work on WRC 329 was started.
Schneider pointed out that the code SIFs could be in error when the d/D ratio at the intersection
was less than 1.0 and greater than 0.5. In this d/D range, the SIFs could be in error by a factor
as high as 2.0. Using the Schneider option in CAESAR II results in a multiplication of the out of
plane branch stress intensification by a number between 1 and 2 when the d/D ratio for the
inter\-section is between 0.5 and 1.0. For B31.1 and other codes that do not differentiate
between in and out-of-plane SIFs, the multiplication will be used for the single stress
intensification given.
Activates the WRC329 guidelines for all intersections, not just for reduced intersections. By
default, this setting is False.
The recommendations made by Rodabaugh in section 5.0 of WRC329 will be followed exactly in
making the stress calculations for intersections. Every attempt has been made to improve the
this document, WRC330 and WRC329 are used synonymously (330 was the draft version of
329). When finally published, the official WRC designation was 329.

Code-Specific Settings
Topics
B31.1 Reduced Z Fix ..................................................................... 100
B31.1/B31.3 Verified Welding and Contour Tees .......................... 100
EN-13480/CODETI Use In-Plane/Out-Plane SIF .......................... 101
Ignore B31.1/B31.3 Wc Factor ...................................................... 101
No RFT/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs ........................................... 101
Occasional Load Factor ................................................................. 101
Pressure Variation in EXP Case .................................................... 102
Reduced Intersection ..................................................................... 102
Makes the correction to the reduced branch stress calculation that existed in the 1980 through
1989 versions of B31.1. This error was corrected in the 1989 version of B31.1.
True
Turn on the correction. This is the default setting.
False
Turn off the correction.
Controls the assumption that the geometry of B31.3 welding and contour insert tees
(sweepolets) meets the dimensional requirements of the code and can be classified as B16.9
tees.
True
Assume that the fitting geometry meets the requirements of Note 11, introduced in the A01
addendum, and a flexibility characteristic of 4.4*T/r will be used.
False
Use a flexibility characteristic of 3.1*T/r, as per the A01 addendum. This is the default
setting.
In order to match runs made with CAESAR II prior to Version 4.40, set this option to
True. Prior to Version 4.40, CAESAR II always used a flexibility characteristic of 4.4*T/r.

Controls the use of in-plane and out-of-plane SIFs. The EN-13480 piping code (and other
European piping codes) defaults to the use of a single SIF, applied to the SRSS of all three
bending moments. Optionally, you can utilize distinct in-plane and out-of-plane SIF values for
in-plane and out-of-plane moments.
To use distinct in-plane and out-of-plane SIFs, select True.
Controls the application of the circumferential weld strength reduction factor, which is now an
option in B31.1 and B31.3.
True
Suppress the application of a weld strength reduction factor.
False
Apply the weld strength reduction factor at all bends, tees, and reducers for temperatures
greater than the starting creep temperature, as defined in the code.
Controls whether welding tees and reinforced tees are included in the SIFs for reduced fittings.
Part of the discussion centers around just what should be considered a reduced fitting. The
CAESAR II default (False) is to assume that welding tees and reinforced fabricated tees are
covered by the reduced fitting expressions, even though the reduced fitting expressions do not
explicitly cover these intersection types. If you want to leave welding tees and rein\-forced tees
out of this definition, set this option to True.
Specifies the occasional load factor. The default value of 0.0 tells CAESAR II to use the value
that the active piping code recommends. B31.1 states that the calculated stress may exceed the
maximum allowable stress from Appendix A, (Sh), by 15% if the event duration occurs less than
10% of any 24-hour operating period, and by 20% if the event duration occurs less than 1% of
any 24 hour operating period. The default for B31.1 applications is 15%. If 20% is more suitable
for the system being analyzed, then this option can be used to enter the 20%.
B31.3 states, "The sum of the longitudinal stresses due to pressure, weight, and other sustained
loadings (S1) and of the stresses produced by occasional loads such as wind or earthquake
may be as much as 1.33 times the allowable stress given in Appendix A. Where the allowable
stress value exceeds 2/3 of yield strength at temperature, the allowable stress value must be
reduced as specified in Note 3 in 302.3.2." The default for B31.3 applications is 33%. If this is
too high for the material and temperature specified, then a smaller occasional load factor could
be input.
This configuration option is used to send new job files. After the static load cases
have been defined, changing this directive will have no effect for static analysis. For existing
static load case definitions, change the occasional load multiplier on the Load Cases tab in the
Static Analysis - Load Case Editor. Dynamic analyses will always reference this configuration
option.

Controls whether any pressure variation between the referenced load cases will be considered
in the resulting expansion case. When set to Default, the software considers the pressure
variation according to the active piping code.
If you select Default or Yes, then pressure variation is considered for B31.1 and CAN Z662
codes.
If you select Yes, then pressure variation is considered for B31.3, B31.3 Chapter IX, B31.4,
B31.4 Chapter XI, B31.5, B31.9, ASME NC & ND, B31.1 (1967), Stoomwezen, RCC MC & MD,
CODETI, Norwegian TBK-6, EN 13480, GPTC, HPGSL, and JPI codes.
This option only affects stresses. It does not affect forces and moments.
Defines the code rules for reduced intersection. Select one of the following options:
B31.1 (Pre 1980)
Use the pre-1980 B31.1 code rules used for reduced intersection. These rules did not define
a separate branch SIF for the reduced branch end. The branch stress intensification factor
will be the same as the header stress intensification factor regardless of the
branch-to-header diameter ratio.
B31.1 (Post 1980)
Use the post-1980 B31.1 code rules for reduced intersections. The reduced intersection SIF
equations in B31.1 from 1980 through 1989 generated unnecessarily high SIFs because of
a mistake made in the implementation. (This is according to WRC329.) For this reason,
many analysts opted for the pre-1980 B31.1 SIF calculation. CAESAR II corrects this
mistake by automatically setting B31.1 Reduced Z Fix to True (the default setting). You can
vary the status of this flag in the CAESAR II configuration file to generate any interpretation
of B31.1 that you want. The default for a new job is for B31.1(Post 1980) and for B31.1
Reduced Z Fix to be set to True.
The No RFT/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs (on page 101) option also affects the
SIF calculations at reduced intersections.
WRC 329
Use the recommendations of WRC329 for reduced intersections. A reduced intersection is
any intersection where the d/D ratio is less than 0.975. The WRC329 recommendations
result in more conservative stress calculations in some instances and less conservative
stress calculations in others. In all cases, the WRC329 values should be more accurate and
more in-line with the respective codes intent.
ASME Sect. III
Use the 1985 ASME Section III NC and ND rules for reduced intersections.
Schneider
Activate the Schneider reduced intersection stress intensification factor multiplication. Has
the same effect as Use Schneider (on page 99).

General Settings
Topics
Add F/A in Stresses ....................................................................... 103
Add Torsion in SL Stress ............................................................... 103
All Cases Corroded ........................................................................ 104
Allow User's SIF at Bend ............................................................... 104
Base Hoop Stress On (ID/OD/Mean/Lamé) .................................. 104
Default Piping Code ....................................................................... 105
New Job Liberal Expansion Stress Allowable ............................... 105
Use PD/4t....................................................................................... 105
Yield Stress Criterion ..................................................................... 106
Specifies whether the axial stress term is included in the code stress computation.
If you select Default in this configuration setting, the software uses whatever the currently active
piping code recommends. Only the process piping codes (except for B31.3), or codes where the
sustained stress equation is not explicitly given, have the F/A stresses included in the sustained
and occasional stress equations. The power piping codes (such as B31.1) do not include the
F/A stresses because the equations given explicitly in the code do not include them. To force
CAESAR II to include the axial stress term in those codes that do not include it already by
default, select Yes.
The F/A stresses discussed here are not due to longitudinal pressure. These are the F/A
stresses due to structural loads in the piping system itself.
Controls how the software handles the torsion term in those codes that do not include it already
by default.
If you select Default in this configuration setting, the software uses whatever the currently active
piping code recommends. The power piping codes (such as B31.1) include torsion in the
sustained and occasional stresses by explicitly including it in the stress equation (B31.1). The
process piping codes (except for B31.3) do not include torsion in the sustained and occasional
stresses by implicitly calling for longitudinal stresses only. To force CAESAR II to include the
torsion term in those codes that do not include it already by default, select Yes.
In a sustained stress analysis of a very hot piping system subject to creep, it is
recommended that you include torsion in the sustained stress calculation using this parameter in
the setup file.
For more information, see Code Compliance Considerations (on page 1057).

Controls whether CAESAR II uses corroded section modulus in stress calculations.

The B31.3 piping code reduces the section modulus for sustained or occasional stress
calculations by the reduction in wall thickness due to corrosion. Using All Cases Corroded
causes the software to use the corroded section modulus for the calculation of all stress types.
This method is conservative, and probably more realistic because corrosion can significantly
affect fatigue life or expansion.
When you clear All Cases Corroded, the software follows the piping code recommendations.
That is, depending on the active piping code, some load cases consider corrosion and some do
not.
For more information, see Code Compliance Considerations (on page 1057).
Controls the stress intensification factor for bends. Previously this was not permitted, and the
code-
True. The user-defined SIF acts over the entire bend curvature and must be specified at the To
end of the bend element. The default setting is False.
Indicates how the value of hoop stress should be calculated. The default is to use the ID of the
pipe. Most piping codes consider the effects of pressure in the longitudinal component of the
CODE stress. Usually, the value of the hoop stress has no bearing on the CODE stress, so
changing this directive does not affect the acceptability of the piping system.
If necessary, you may change the way CAESAR II computes the hoop stress value. Available
options are:
ID
Compute hoop stress according to Pd/2t, where d is the internal diameter of the pipe.
OD
Compute hoop stress according to Pd/2t, where d is the outer diameter of the pipe.
Mean
Compute hoop stress according to Pd/2t, where d is the average or mean diameter of the
pipe.
Lamé
Compute maximum hoop stress according to Lamé's solution: s = P(Ro2+Ri2)/(Ro2-Ri2).
When the piping code specifies hoop stress evaluation, the software uses the code's
hoop stress calculation and ignores Base Hoop Stress On. For example, offshore or
transportation piping codes, such as B31.4, B31.8, and DNV, specify hoop stress evaluation.

Specifies the piping code that you design to most often. This code will be used as the default if
no code is specified in the problem input. The default piping code is B31.3, the chemical plant
and petroleum refinery code. Valid entries are:
B31.1 ASME-NC (Class 2) Stoomwezen DNV
B31.3 ASME-ND (Class 3) RCC-M C EN 13480
B31.3 Chapter IX Navy 505 RCC-M D GPTC/Z380
B31.4 CAN Z662 CODETI PD 8010-1
B31.4 Chapter IX CAN Z662 Chapter 11 Norwegian TBK-6 PD 8010-2
B31.4 Chapter XI BS 806 FDBR ISO 14692
B31.5 Swedish 1 BS 7159 HPGSL
B31.8 Swedish 2 UKOOA JPI
B31.8 Chapter VIII B31.1-1967 IGE/TD/12
B31.9
Instructs the software to default new jobs to use the liberal expansion stress allowable. This
allowable adds the difference between the hot allowable stress and the sustained stress to the
allowable expansion stress range if it is allowed by the particular code in use. To instruct the
software to default new jobs to not use this allowable, select False.
Instructs the software to use the simplified form of the longitudinal stress term when computing
sustained stresses. Some codes permit this simplified form with thin-walled pipe thicknesses.
This option is used most often when you are comparing CAESAR II results to older pipe stress
software results. In most cases, you should use the more comprehensive default calculation.
The software ignores Use PD/4t for the offshore codes B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.8
Chapter VIII, Canadian Z662 Chapter 11, and Det Norske Veritas (DNV).

Specifies the method the software uses to calculate maximum stress. CAESAR II can calculate
this maximum stress (which is not a code stress) according to either the von Mises Theory or
the Maximum Shear Theory.
Code stress refers to a stress calculated by an equation provided by the code. For
more information on code-defined stresses, see the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide.
The Stresses Extended output report produced by CAESAR II contains a value representative of
the maximum stress state through the cross section, calculated according to the indicated yield
criteria theory.
Configuration
Failure Theory Calculated Stress
Setting
Max3D Shear Maximum Shear Stress Maximum Stress Intensity
Maximum Energy of
von Mises Octahedral Shearing Stress
Distortion
CAESAR II computes the selected stress at four points along the axis normal to the plane of
bending (outside top, inside top, inside bottom, outside bottom), and includes the maximum
value in the stresses report. The equations used for each of these yield criteria are listed below.
If von Mises Theory is used, the software computes the octahedral shearing stress, which differs
from the von Mises stress by a constant factor.
For codes B31.4, B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.4 Chapter XI, B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII, and
DNV, this setting controls which equation the software uses to compute the equivalent stress.
For these codes, the software uses the equations shown in the piping code to determine the
yield stress criterion in the Stresses Extended output report.
CAESAR II reports the largest stress using four calculation points through the pipe cross
section, as show in the following figure.
The four points are established by a line perpendicular to the bending moment acting on the
pipe (shown in red). Points 1 and 4 are on the outside surface of the pipe, where radial stress is
zero. Point 1 is in bending tension and Point 4 is in bending compression. Points 2 and 3 are on
the inside surface of the pipe where radial stress is compressive (negative) pressure.

Longitudinal stress (Sl), hoop stress (Sh), radial stress (Sr) and shear stress (St) are calculated
at each position using the appropriate formulas.
Radial
Shear
Stress
Position Longitudinal Stress (Sl) Hoop Stress (Sh) Stress (St)
(Sr)
The table formulas assume that this is a B31.3-style stress equation with Lamé hoop
stress.
These stresses are translated into the principal stresses S1, S2, and S3. The following shows a
graphical representation of a typical calculation of the four position points.
Determine the principal stress using the longitudinal stress (Sl), the hoop stress (Sh), and the
shear stress (St) which sets the red line. The principal stress refers to the points where the red
circle crosses the normal stress axis (shear stress equals zero). Place the radial stress (Sr)
(which has a shear stress of zero) on the same axis. The largest intersection point is S1 and the
smallest is S3.

Use the S1, S2, and S3 values in the equation above to determine the octahedral shearing
stress at each position. CAESAR II reports the largest of these four values.
S.I. = S1-S3
When you configure CAESAR II to report 3D maximum shear stress intensity, the software
reports the largest intensity (S1-S3).
Legacy Settings
Topics
B31.3 Implement Appendix P ........................................................ 108
B31.3 Use SL Formulation Para 320 (2010) ................................. 108
Include Axial Force in Expansion Stress ....................................... 109
SIF Multiplier for Sustained Stress Index ...................................... 109
Controls the implementation of the alternate rules in B31.3 Appendix P. This option produces a
code compliance operating load case, with allowable stress values.
Controls what formula CAESAR II uses for computing longitudinal stress for sustained loads
(SL) for the B31.3 code. The 2010 Edition of B31.3 code introduced a specific formula for
computing SL. This code formula was previously optional and referred to as B31.3 Code Case
178.
The software defaults to automatically computing sustained loads using this formula. You can
change the B31.3 Use SL Formulation Para 320 (2010) configuration setting in the
Configuration Editor > SIFs and Stresses to False if you do not want CAESAR II to use this
formula, for example in the case of pre-2010 Edition jobs.
CAESAR II sets this configuration setting to True by default, which means the software
overrides the directives for F/A and torsion and uses this formula to calculate sustained case
stresses.

Enables the software to include calculated axial force in the expansion stress (SE). Choose one
of the following settings:
No
Exclude axial forces from the (Expansion) Displacement Stress Range value. (This is Se in
Eq. (17) of B31.3.)
|Sa| + Se
Include the absolute value of the axial force to the (Expansion) Displacement Stress Range,
and report the sum as the (Expansion) Displacement Stress Range, Se. This selection is
more conservative than (|Sa| + Sb)2.
(|Sa| + Sb)2
Include the absolute value for the axial force to the bending term in the (Expansion)
Displacement Stress Range equation (Se, Eq (17) in B31.3). This selection is less
conservative than |Sa| + Se. This option more closely follows theory.
Default
Follow the recommended setting for the axial force in expansion stress based on the piping
code you specified for the job. (For example, the B31.3 piping code recommends to use the
(|Sa| + Sb)2 equation for axial force. So, when you set this configuration setting to Default, if
the job uses the B31.3 piping code, the software uses the (|Sa| + Sb)2 option for calculating
axial force in the expansion stress.)
Modifies the stress index for sustained loads and occasional loads. The default setting is
0.0000, which indicates that the software uses whatever the currently active piping code
recommends for the SIF/Index multiplier. For example, if this configuration setting is set to 0.000
and you select B31.3 or B31.3 Chapter IX, the code defines the SIF multiplier as 0.7500.
With the release of CAESAR II 2014 and the implementation of B31.3 2012, the internal
interpretation of this existing configuration setting was changed. B31.3 2012 defines the SIF
multiplier value as 0.75. Other codes similar to B31.3 do not address this value. The default
value of this configuration setting was changed to 0.0000. This change enables CAESAR II to
internally set the multiplier to 0.7500 for B31.3 and to 1.0000 for other similar codes. The
following table summarizes these settings.
Option Configuration Sustained Moment Multiplier (I)

SIF Multiplier Setting
B31.3, B31.3 Ch IX, Codes similar to B31.3

B31.4, (such as: JPI, B31.5)
& B31.4 Ch XI Codes
Option 1 0.0000 I = 0.75i I = i (similar to Option 4)

(default)

Option Configuration Sustained Moment Multiplier (I)

SIF Multiplier Setting
Option 2 0.0001 I = 1.0 I = 1.0
Option 3 0.7500 I = 0.75i I = 0.75i
Option 4 1.0000 I=i I=i
This change does not affect all piping codes.

The following interpretations apply to B31.3 code prior to the 2010 Edition, so they are only
applicable if you need to analyze older jobs to the older code addenda:
B31.3 Interpretation 1-34 (February 23, 1981) File: 1470-1 states that for sustained and
occasional loads, you can use an SIF of 0.75i, but not less than 1.0. To comply with this
interpretation (1-34), type 0.7500.
B31.3 Interpretation 6-03 (December 14, 1987) File B31-87-022 permits you to ignore the
stress intensification for sustained and occasional loads. To comply with this interpretation
(6-03), type 0.0001.
Set/Change Password
You can set password protection for the configuration file using the Security command. By
setting a password on the primary configuration file, a corporate standard can be enforced
throughout the network. Subsequent use of the configuration module in other data folders will
allow only modification of display or other environment directives that do not affect calculated
results.
1. Set up your configuration file and click Save and Exit in the top-left corner of the
Configuration Editor window to save the configuration settings.
2. From the Home tab, select File > Set Default Data Directory.
3. Browse and select the CAESAR II System subfolder in the Default Data Directory
Specification dialog box
Locate the System subfolder in the root folder based on your platform.
Windows 7/8/8.1: \Program Data\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\Version Number\System
Windows XP: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR
II\Version Number\System
Click Configure or Tools > Configure/Setup to open the Configuration Editor dialog box, and
then click on the Security drop-down arrow.

1. Select one of the following options, depending upon your current configuration:
New Password (on page 111)
Access Protected Data (on page 111)
Change Password (on page 111)
Remove Password (on page 111)
New Password
Type a password. After entering a password, you have the ability to change configuration
settings from the program folder, or alter or remove the password.
Initially, New Password is the only option available.

When typing a new password, you are prompted for the new password a second time to
ensure the password was typed as expected the first time.
Access Protected Data

Allows you to modify protected options. This option is accessible only after a password exists.
The use of this option is not necessary if there is no previously specified password. If
no password has been set, you can modify all configuration settings.
Change Password
Allows you to change your current password. You must first type the correct existing password.
The current password may be changed at any time by anyone who has authorization to do so.
After a password has been set, the software disables all computation controls, stress options,
and any other configuration options, which could affect the CAESAR II computations.
Remove Password
Deletes the current password. Anyone with authorization can remove the current password by
entering the correct existing password for this option. After a password is removed, all options
that appear in the Configuration Editor can be modified from any folder where you have
read/write access rights.

SECTION 4
Piping Input Reference
Main window ribbon: Home > Input > Piping Input
Main window menu: Input > Piping

Shortcut key:
ALT+2 - Opens Auxiliary Data as a separate dialog box
Specifies piping parameters in the CAESAR II Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This dialog box describes the piping on an element-by-element basis. It consists of menus and
toolbars which perform a number of supporting operations, and data fields that contain
information about each piping element. A graphic representation of the model displays
automatically. This model updates as you add new elements.
In This Section
Classic Piping Input Dialog Box ..................................................... 113
Available Commands ..................................................................... 252
3D Modeler .................................................................................... 414
S3D/SPR Model View .................................................................... 431

Classic Piping Input Dialog Box

Groups piping data into blocks of related data on the left side of Classic Piping Input. Double
click >> in the upper right corner of any group to display additional input dialog boxes.
The right side of the piping input includes the Auxiliary Data panel with tabs which relate to
items selected by double-clicking check boxes on the left side. You can also access these tabs
by selecting a command in the Aux Tools Toolbar (on page 396).

Navigating the Classic Piping Input Dialog Box using the

Function Keys
Function keys help you to quickly type data without using the mouse to move to various input
boxes. By default, when you place the cursor inside a box on the Classic Piping Input dialog
box, pressing a function key on the keyboard moves the cursor to the beginning of a block of
input data according to the list below.
Function Key Destination
F2 From Node
F3 DX
F4 Diameter
F5 Temp 1
F6 Material
F7 Elastic Modulus (c)
F8 Refractory Thickness
F9 Line number
Help Screens and Units

Press the question mark key ? or the F1 function key while the cursor is in any of the input data
cells to display interactive help text for that item. Hover the cursor over a box to display a tool tip
indicating the current units.
Node Numbers
Shortcut keys:
F2 - Jumps to Node Numbers
ALT+1 - Opens Edit Node Numbers dialog box
Indicates the node numbers for the selected element on Classic Piping Input.
Each element is identified by its end node number. Because each input screen represents a
piping element, you must specify the element end points, called the From node and the To
node. The software uses these points as locations at which you can type or extract information.
You must specify a From and To node for all elements.

You can set the Auto Node Number Increment configuration setting in Tools >
Configure/Setup on the main menu and CAESAR II generates the From and To node values
automatically (to a value other than zero) based on the increment you specify.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Node Numbers dialog box.
For information on controlling the display of node numbers, see Node Numbers (on
page 378).
Specifies the node number for the starting end of the element. Node numbers must be numeric,
ranging from 1 to 32000. Typically, the From node number is automatically generated by
CAESAR II from the preceding element. You can change the node numbers but be careful not to
use the same node number more than once in a model.
Specifies the node number for the end of the element. Node numbers must be numeric, ranging
from 1 to 32000. You can change the node numbers but be careful not to use the same node
number more than once in a model.
Assigns non-numeric names to the node points of an element.

Double-click the Name check box to display the Node Names tab in the Auxiliary Data panel.
You can assign names of up to 10 characters for the From and To nodes.
The software maintains consistency of node names between elements which share a node. For
example, if you provide a name for a To node, the same name displays for the same node when
it is the From node for another element.

Node Numbers controls how node number and node names display in the
graphic view. For more information, see Node Numbers (on page 378).
Deltas
Shortcut keys:
F3 - Jumps to Deltas
ALT+2 - Opens Edit Deltas dialog box
Indicates the length of the selected element on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Type element lengths as delta dimensions according to the X, Y, and Z rectangular coordinate
system established for the piping system. The Y-axis represents the vertical axis in CAESAR II.
CAESAR II treats each element as a vector. The vector length is equal to the element length.
The vector direction points from the From node to the To node.
The delta dimensions DX (on page 117), DY (on page 117), and DZ (on page 117), are the
measurements along the X, Y, and Z-axes between the From node and the To node. In most
cases you only need to use one of the three options, because the piping usually runs along the
global axes. Where the piping element is skewed, you must make two or three entries. You must
define at least one option for all elements except zero-length expansion joints.
When you are using feet and inches for compound length and length units, valid
entries include formats such as: 3-6, 3 ft. -6 in, and 3-6-3/16.
You can use offsets to modify the stiffness of the current element by adjusting its length and the
orientation of its neutral axis in 3-D space.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Deltas dialog box.

Specifies the X-axis component of the element length.

To see the global coordinates of all nodes in the model, open the Coordinates list.
For more information, see List (on page 266) and X Coordinate, Y Coordinate, Z Coordinate (on
page 268).
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]-[length]-[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch - fraction or
meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. You can use simple forms of
addition, multiplication, and division, as well as exponential format.
Optionally, use a tic mark ( ' ) instead of the first dash ( - ), to indicate feet in this field.
For more information on element length, see Deltas (on page 116).
Specifies the Y-axis component of the element length.

page 268).
Specifies the Z-axis component of the element length.

page 268).

Indicates whether the software corrects modeled dimensions of an element back to its actual
dimensions. Double-click the Offsets check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box to
select or clear this option.
Specify the distances from the position of the From node in 3-D space to the actual From end of
the element.
Specify the distances from the position of the To node in 3-D space to the actual To end of the
element.
If you leave any offset direction distances blank, the software defaults them to zero.
generated for the offset portion of the element. The following figure shows a common usage for
the offset element.

Specifies the distance between the To node and the From node.
6 six ^01
6-0 six ^20, zero ^01
6- six ^20, zero ^01 (abbreviated)
6.3- six point three ^20 (abbreviated)
6-10 six ^20, ten ^01
6-10-1/4 six ^20, ten and one quarter ^01
6-10-1/4+3-7 six ^20, ten and one quarter ^01 plus 3 ^20, seven ^01
6.3*12 six point three, times twelve
337.6/3 337.6 divided by 3
Specifies the X, Y, and Z components or element direction cosines.

For an element aligned with the X-axis,
Cos X ..... 1.0
Cos Y ..... <Blank>
Cos Z ..... <Blank>
For an element aligned with the Y-axis,
Cos X ..... <Blank>
Cos Y ..... 1.0
Cos Z ..... <Blank>
For an element aligned with the Z-axis,
Cos X ..... <Blank>
Cos Y ..... <Blank>
Cos Z ..... 1.0

Pipe Sizes
Shortcut keys:
F4- Jumps to Pipe Sizes
ALT+3 - Opens Edit Pipe Sizes dialog box
Indicates the pipe dimensions for the selected element on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Type the dimensions for the element.
Mill tolerance is used only for the IGE/TD/12 piping code. Seam weld is used only for the
IGE/TD/12 piping code. These options carry forward from one element to the next during the
design session so you only need to type values for those elements at which a change occurs.
You can specify nominal pipe sizes and schedules. CAESAR II converts these values to actual
outside diameter and wall thickness. Outside diameter and wall thickness are required data
inputs.
Nominal diameters, thicknesses, and schedule numbers are a function of the pipe
size specification. Click Tools > Configure/Setup on the main menu or click CAESAR II
Configuration on the CAESAR II Tools toolbar to select ANSI, JIS, or DIN as the piping
size specification.

Double-click >> to display the Edit Pipe Sizes dialog box.
Specifies the pipe diameter. Normally, you should type the nominal diameter and CAESAR II
converts it to the actual outer diameter necessary for the analysis. There are two ways to
prevent this conversion:
Use a modified UNITS file with the Nominal Pipe Schedules turned off,
Specify diameters whose values are off slightly from a nominal size (in English units the
tolerance on diameter is 0.063 in.).
Use F1 to obtain additional information and the current units for this input box. Available nominal
diameters are determined by the active pipe size specification, set by the configuration software.
The following are the available nominal diameters.
ANSI Nominal Pipe ODs, in inches (file ap.bin)
½ ¾ 1 1 ½ 2 2 ½ 3 3 ½ 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 42
JIS Nominal Pipe ODs, in millimeters (file jp.bin)
15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 90 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650
DIN Nominal Pipe ODs, in millimeters (file dp.bin)
15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200

Specifies the thickness of the pipe. Normal input consists of a schedule indicator (such as S,
XS, or 40), which is converted to the proper wall thickness by CAESAR II. If actual thickness is
entered, CAESAR II accepts it as entered. Available schedule indicators are determined by the
active piping specification, set by the configuration software.
ANSI B36.10 Steel Nominal Wall Thickness Designation
S - Standard
XS - Extra Strong
XXS - Double Extra Strong
ANSI B36.10 Steel Pipe Numbers
10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
ANSI B36.19 Stainless Steel Schedules
5S 10S 40S 80S
JIS Pipe Schedules
1990 Steel Schedules: 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
1990 Stainless Steel Schedules: 5S 10S 40S
DIN Pipe Schedules
None
Only the s (standard) schedule applies to wall thickness calculations for DIN.
Indicates whether the piping element is seam welded

B31.1 / B31.3
If the B31.1 or B31.3 piping codes are active, select the Seam-welded check box to activate
the Wl box. Wl (the weld strength reduction factor) is used by the software to determine the
minimum wall thickness of the element.
IGE/TD/12
If the IGE/TD/12 piping code is active, select the Seam welded check box when straight
pipes are seam welded. This option affects the stress intensification factor calculations for
that pipe section due to seam welded fabrication.

Specifies the WI factor.
Specifies the positive mill tolerance. This option is only enabled when IGE/TD/12 is active. It is
used when the Base Stress/Flexibility On option of the Special Execution Options is set to
Plus Mill Tolerance. In that case, piping stiffness and section modulus is based on the nominal
wall thickness increased by this percentage. You can change this value on an
element-by-element basis.
If the B31.3 piping code is activated, this box specifies the weld strength reduction factor (W l), to
be used in the minimum wall calculation for straight pipe.
Displays the negative mill tolerance. This value is read from the configuration file and used in
minimum wall thickness calculations. Also, for IGE/TD/12, this value is used when the Base
Stress/Flexibility On option of the Special Execution Options is set to Plus Mill Tolerance.
In that case, piping stiffness and section modulus is based on the nominal wall thickness,
decreased by this percentage. You can change this value on an element-by-element basis.
Specifies the corrosion allowance used to calculate a reduced section modulus. There is a
configuration option available to consider all stress cases as corroded. For more information,
see All Cases Corroded (on page 104).
Displays the pipe density value. The appropriate pipe density is filled in automatically when you
provide a proper material number. You can override this value at any time. The software then
duplicates the value through the rest of the input.
Displays the fluid density. Specify the fluid density when the internal fluid the piping system
transports significantly affects the weight loads. When the specific gravity of the fluid is known,
you can type that instead of the density. For example, you could type 0.85SG. Specific gravities
are converted to the appropriate densities immediately on input. To type specific gravity, follow
the numeric value with the letters SG (no spaces). The software automatically converts this
value to density.
In the default ENGLISH units system, densities are typed in pounds per cubic inch.

Indicates whether to propagate the property changes. Clear this check box to indicate that
properties apply to the current element only.
Operating Conditions
Shortcut keys:
F5 - Jumps to Operating Conditions
ALT+4 - Opens Edit Operating Conditions dialog box
Indicates the temperatures and pressures for the selected element on the Classic Piping Input
dialog box.
You can specify up to nine temperatures and ten pressures (one extra for the hydrostatic test
pressure) for each piping element. The temperatures are actual temperatures, not changes from
the ambient temperature. CAESAR II uses these temperatures to obtain the thermal strain and
allowable stresses for the element from the Material Database. As an alternative, you can
directly specify the thermal strains. For more information, see Alpha Tolerance (on page 60).
Thermal strains have absolute values on the order of 0.002, and are unitless. Pressures are
typed as gauge values and cannot be negative. Each temperature and each pressure that you
typed creates a loading for you to use when building load cases. Both thermal and pressure
data carries forward from one element to the next until changed. Typing a value in the Hydro
pressure box causes CAESAR II to build a hydro case in the set of recommended load cases.
CAESAR II uses an ambient temperature of 70°F, unless changed using the Special
Execution Parameters option. For more information, see Ambient Temperature (on page 333).
Double-click >> to display the Edit Operating Conditions dialog box.

Specifies operating temperatures. There are nine temperature boxes to allow up to nine different
operating cases. The error checker validates temperature values to ensure that they are within
the code allowed ranges. You can exceed the ranges by typing the expansion coefficient in the
temperature box in units of length/length. When you are using material 21 (user-defined
material), type a thermal expansion coefficient instead of a temperature.
Values, whose absolute values are less than the Alpha Tolerance, in the temperature box are
taken to be thermal expansion coefficients. The Alpha Tolerance is a configuration file
parameter and is taken to be 0.05 by default. For example, if you wanted to type the thermal
expansion coefficient equivalent to 11.37in./100ft., the calculation would be:
11.37in./100ft. * 1 ft./ 12in. = .009475 in./in.
Type this into the appropriate Temperature box.
A cut short does no more than reduce the length of a pipe element to zero. For
example; if you wanted 8.5 cm of cold spring you could put in an 8.5 cm long element and then
thermally shrink its length to zero. This allows the cold spring to be manipulated as an individual
thermal case rather than as a concentrated force.
Access to operating conditions 4 through 9 is granted through the Extended Operating
Conditions dialog box, accessible by clicking the >> button in the upper right corner of the
frame surrounding the standard Temperature and Pressure input boxes. You can keep this
dialog box open or closed for your convenience.
CAESAR II automatically suggests load cases according to IGE/TD/12 Appendix 7. Use the
following conventions for the specification of the operating conditions.

T1 Maximum Temperature
T2 Minimum Temperature
T3 Minimum Summer Temperature
T4 Maximum Winter Temperature
T5 Maximum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
T6 Minimum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
P1 Maximum Incidental Pressure
P2 Maximum Operating Pressure
P3 Compressor Operation
P4 Demand Pressure
HP Hydrotest Pressure
Displays the corresponding thermal strain values when you type operating temperatures in the
temperature fields. This is a read-only property.
When the thermal expansion coefficients are not available in the material database, you can
type thermal strain in the Temperature field if the absolute values are less than the Alpha
Tolerance in the configuration. The Alpha Tolerance is 0.05 by default. For more information,
see Alpha Tolerance (on page 60). You can type up to nine thermal strain values in units of
length/length in the temperature field on the Extended Operating Conditions dialog box.
CAESAR II displays these values in the Thermal Strain fields.
Specifies operating pressures. There are 10 pressure boxes, which allow up to nine operating
and one hydrotest pressure cases. When you type multiple pressures, be careful with the setup
of the analysis load cases. Review the recommended load cases provided by the software
carefully before proceeding.
Specify operating pressures 4 through 9 through the Extended Operating Conditions dialog
box, accessed by clicking the >> button in the upper right corner of the standard Temperature
and Pressure input boxes. You can work with this dialog box open and move the box around for
your convenience.
Type a value in the HydroPress box to signal CAESAR II to recommend a hydrotest load case.
Type the design gage pressure (that is, the difference between the internal and external
pressures).
The software disables the Bourdon effect (pressure elongation) by default because it
assumes the job to be non-conservative. If you want to enable the Bourdon effect, you can
do so by using the Special Execution options. For more information, see New Job Bourdon
Pressure (on page 61).
The Bourdon effect is always considered in the analysis of fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe
(Material ID=20).

CAESAR II automatically suggests load cases according to IGE/TD/12 Appendix 7. You must
use the following conventions for the specification of the operating conditions.
T1 Maximum Temperature
T2 Minimum Temperature
T3 Minimum Summer Temperature
T4 Maximum Winter Temperature
T5 Maximum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
T6 Minimum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
P1 Maximum Incidental Pressure
P2 Maximum Operating Pressure
P3 Compressor Operation
P4 Demand Pressure
HP Hydrotest Pressure
Component Information
Specifies details for special components (such as bends, rigid elements, expansion joints, and
tees), which require additional information. Select or clear these options by double-clicking the
applicable component check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Double-click Bend if the active element ends in a bend, elbow or mitered joint. This displays
the auxiliary panel on the right side of the screen. CAESAR II usually assigns three nodes to
a bend to define the near, mid, and far nodes on the bend. For more information, see Bend
(on page 128).
Double-click Rigid if the active element is much stiffer than the connecting pipe, such as a
flange or valve. This displays the auxiliary panel to collect the component weight. For more
information, see Rigid (on page 133).
For rigid elements, CAESAR II follows these rules:
When the rigid element weight is defined as a value other than zero, CAESAR II
computes any extra weight due to insulation and contained fluid. The software then
adds that value to the defined weight value.
The weight of fluid added to a non-zero weight rigid element is equal to the same
weight that would be computed for an equivalent straight pipe. The weight of
insulation added is equal to the same weight that would be computed for an
equivalent straight pipe multiplied by 1.75.

If the weight of a rigid element is zero or blank, CAESAR II assumes that the
element is an artificial construction element rather than an actual piping element. In
this case, the software does not calculate an insulation or fluid weight for that
element.
The stiffness of the rigid element is relative to the diameter wall thickness. Make
sure that the diameter on a rigid element indicates the rigid stiffness to generate.
Double-click Expansion Joint if the active element is an expansion joint. This displays the
auxiliary panel used to collect stiffness parameters and effective diameter. For more
information, see Expansion Joints (on page 134).
Expansion joints can be modeled as zero-length (with all stiffnesses acting at a single point)
or as finite-length (with the stiffnesses acting over a continuous element). In the single-point
case, you must type all stiffness. In the continuous element case, you must omit either the
lateral or angular stiffness.
Double-click SIF & Tees if the active element has special stress intensification factors
(SIFs). CAESAR II automatically calculates these factors for each component. For more
information, see SIFs & Tees (on page 138).
Bends, rigids, and expansion joints are mutually exclusive. For more information,
see Rigid (on page 133) and Expansion Joints (on page 134).
Indicates that the element is entering a bend. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the
Bend check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.

You can place Intermediate node points at specified angles along the bend, or at the bend
mid-point (M).
Displays the bend radius. CAESAR II assumes a long radius by default. You can override this
value. Alternatively, select a value from the list.
Long
Indicates a long radius bend. The radius is equal to 1.5 times the nominal diameter.
Short
Indicates a short radius bend. The radius is equal to the nominal pipe diameter.
3D
Indicates a 3D bend. The radius is equal to 3 times the nominal diameter.
5D
Specifies the bend type. For most codes, this refers to the number of attached flanges and can
be selected from the list. If there are no flanges on the bend, leave Type blank. A bend should
be considered flanged if there is any heavy or rigid body within two diameters of the bend that
significantly restricts the bends ability to ovalize.
When using the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes with Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe, this
entry refers to the material laminate type and may be 1, 2, or 3. These laminate types are
All chopped strand mat (CSM) constructing with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.

Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external
The laminate type affects the calculation of flexibility factors and stress intensification factors for
the BS 7159 and UKOOA Codes only.
For ISO 14692, only type 3 filament-wound laminate is considered.
Displays the angle to a point on the bend curvature. You can place additional nodes at any point
on the bend curvature provided the added nodes are not within five degrees of each other. You
can change the 5º node-spacing limit by using the configuration. For more information, see
Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend (on page 75).
The element To node is always physically located at the far end of the bend. By
default, CAESAR II places a node at the midpoint of the bend (designated by the letter M in this
box) as well as at the zero degree position (start) of the bend, if possible.
Displays the node number associated with the extra point on the bend. CAESAR II places
unique node numbers in these boxes whenever you initiate a bend. New, unique node numbers
must be assigned to the points whenever you add points on the bend curvature. If numbering by
fives and the To node number for the bend element is 35, a logical choice for the node number
for an added node at 30 degrees on the bend would be 34. You can treat the added nodes on
the bend like any other nodes in the piping system. Nodes on the bend curvature may be
restrained, displaced, or placed at the intersection of more than two pipes. Nodes on a bend
curvature are most commonly used as an intersection for a dummy leg or for the location of a
restraint. All nodes defined in this manner are plotted at the tangent intersection point for the
bend.
Displays the number of cuts in the bend if it is mitered. When you type a number, CAESAR II
checks if the mitered bend input is closely or widely spaced. If the bend is determined to be
widely spaced, and the number of miter cuts is greater than one, the bend should be broken
The number of cuts and the radius of the bend are all that is required to calculate the SIFs and
flexibilities for the bend as defined in the B31 codes. The bend radius and the bend miter
spacing are related by the following equations:
Closely Spaced Miters
q = Bend Angle / (2 n) where n = number of miter cuts

Widely Spaced Miters
R = r2 (1.0 + cot q) / 2.0
r2 = (ri + ro) / 2.0

Specifies the thickness of the bend if that thickness is different than the thickness of the
matching pipe. If the thickness is greater than the matching pipe wall thickness, then the inside
diameter of the bend is smaller than the inside diameter of the matching pipe. CAESAR II
calculates section modulus for stress computations based on the properties of the matching pipe
as defined by the codes.
The pipe thickness is used twice when calculating SIFs and flexibility factors; once as Tn, and
once when determining the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe in the equation for the
flexibility characteristic (h):
h = (Tn)(R) / (r2)
Tn = Thickness of bend or fitting
R = Bend radius
r = Mean cross-sectional radius of matching pipe
= (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter of matching pipe
WT = Wall Thickness of matching pipe
Most codes use the actual thickness of the fitting (this entry) for Tn, and the wall thickness of the
matching pipe for the calculation of the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe (the WT value).
More specifically, the individual codes use the two wall thicknesses as follows:
Code For Tn: For Mean Radius Calculation:
B31.1 Fitting Fitting
B31.3 Fitting Matching Pipe
B31.8 Ch VIII Fitting Matching Pipe
SECT III NC Fitting Matching Pipe
SECT III ND Fitting Matching Pipe
Z662 Matching Pipe Matching Pipe
NAVY 505 Fitting Fitting
B31.1 (1967) Fitting Fitting

SWEDISH Fitting Matching Pipe
BS 806 N/A N/A
STOOMWEZEN N/A N/A
RCC-M C/D Matching Matching Pipe

Pipe
CODETI Fitting Fitting
NORWEGIAN Fitting Fitting
FDBR Fitting Fitting
BS 7159 Fitting Fitting
UKOOA Fitting Fitting
IGE/TD/12 Fitting Fitting
EN-13480 Fitting Matching Pipe
GPTC/Z380 Fitting Matching Pipe
The bend fitting thickness (FTG) is always used as the pipe thickness in the stiffness matrix
calculations. However, the thickness of the matching pipe (WT) is always used in the bend
stress calculations.
Specifies the bend flexibility factor. CAESAR II calculates the factor according to the current
piping code. You can type a value to override this calculation.
Indicates that the bend is seam welded.

B31.3
If the B31.3 piping code is active, the Seam Welded check box is used to activate the Wl
box for bends. The Wl box is the weld strength reduction factor used to determine the
minimum wall thickness of the bend element.
B31.3 Chapter IX
Not used.
IGE/TD/12
Used by IGE/TD/12 to calculate the stress intensification factors due to seam welded elbow

fabrication as opposed to extruded elbow fabrication. This option is only available when
IGE/TD/12 is active.
B31.1 / B31.3
Defines the weld strength reduction factor (W l) for bend elements. This value is used in the
minimum wall thickness calculations.
ISO 14692
Replaces this box with EPTp/(EbTb) where Ep and Eb are the axial modulus of the attached
pipe and the bend respectively, Tp and Tb are the average wall thickness of the attached
pipe and the bend respectively. If these values are omitted, the software uses a default
value of 1.0. This value affects the calculation of the flexibility factor for bends.
Indicates that you are supplying rigid element data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
the Rigid check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Type a value for Rigid Weight. This value should always be zero or positive and should not
include the weight of any insulation or fluid. If you type no weight, then CAESAR II models the
element as a weightless construction element.
Rigid weights are defined automatically if you use the Valve and Flange database.
CAESAR II automatically includes 1.0 times the fluid weight of equivalent straight pipe and 1.75
times the insulation weight of equivalent straight pipe.
Rigid elements with zero weight are considered to be modeling constructs and do not have fluid
or insulation weight added.
The rigid element stiffness is proportional to the matching pipe. For example, a 13 in. long 12 in.
diameter rigid element is stiffer than a 13 in. long 2 in. diameter rigid element. This fact should
be observed when modeling rigid elements that are part of a small pipe/large vessel, or small
pipe/heavy equipment model. The stiffness properties are computed using 10 times the
thickness of the rigid element. For additional details, see Technical Discussions (on page 969).
Type the rigid element in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes.
See Valve Flange Database (on page 274) for automatic input for these types of components.

Indicates that you are supplying expansion joint data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking Expansion Joint on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary panel tab controls options for expansion joint stiffness parameters and effective
diameter. For a non-zero length expansion joint, you must omit either the transverse or the
bending stiffness.
Setting the effective diameter to zero deactivates the pressure thrust load. Use this
method in conjunction with setting a large axial stiffness to simulate the effect of axial tie-rods.
Specifies zeroes in the DX, DY, and DZ fields (or leave the fields blank) for hinged and gimbal
joints. Use 1.0 to define completely flexible stiffness and 1.0E12 to define completely rigid
stiffness. You must type all stiffnesses.
Specifies the expansion joint vector in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes. Because the transverse
stiffness is directly related to the bending stiffness for finite length expansion joints, type only
one of these stiffnesses. CAESAR II calculates the other stiffness automatically based on
flexible length, effective ID, and the other stiffness. In general, type the transverse stiffness and
leave the bending stiffness blank.
Specifies the expansion joint parameters.

If the element length is zero, then you should define all of the stiffnesses. If the element length is
not zero, then you should leave blank either the Bending Stif or the Trans Stif box. CAESAR II
automatically calculates the stiffness that you did not type. You can type all stiffnesses for
rubber expansion joints
If the torsional stiffness value is not specified, CAESAR II uses a default value of 0.10000E+06.
Bending STIFFNESSES from EJMA (and from most expansion joint manufacturers) that are
used in a finite length expansion joint model should be multiplied by four before being used in
any piping software. Bending STIFFNESSES from EJMA (and from most expansion joint
manufacturers) that are used in a ZERO length expansion joint model should be used without
modification.
Use 1.0 for bellows stiffnesses that are completely flexible.
Use 1.0E12 for rigid bellows stiffnesses.
Zero length expansion joints can be used in many modeling applications, such as defining struts
or hinged ends. The orientation of zero length expansion joints is taken from the element that
precedes the expansion joint if the To node of the preceding element is equal to the From node

on the expansion joint element. If the preceding element does not go into the expansion joint,
then the orientation is taken from the element that follows the expansion joint if it properly leaves
the joint.
Specifies the effective inside diameter for pressure thrust from the manufacturer's catalog. For
all load cases, including pressure, CAESAR II calculates the pressure thrust force tending to
blow the bellows apart. If left blank, or zero, then no axial thrust force due to pressure is
calculated. Many manufacturers give the effective area of the expansion joint: Aeff. The Effective
ID is calculated from the effective area by:
Effective ID = (4Aeff / )1/2
Indicates that you are supplying reducer data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Reducer on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Specifies the Diameter 2, Thickness 2, and Alpha values at the To node of the reducer. The
diameter and wall thickness at the From node of the reducer element are taken from the current
piping element data.

CAESAR II constructs a concentric reducer element made of ten pipe cylinders, each of a
successively larger or smaller diameter and wall thickness over the element length. CAESAR II
calculates SIFs according to the current piping code (for more information, see Code
Compliance Considerations (on page 1057)) and applies these internally to the Code Stress
Calculations. These SIFs are dependent on the slope of the reducer transition (among other
code-specific considerations), Alpha. If Alpha is left blank, then the software calculates this
value based on the change in pipe diameter over 60% of the element length. If specified,
Diameter 2 and Thickness 2 are carried forward when the next pipe element is created as
Diameter and Wt/Sch. If not specified, Diameter 2 and Thickness 2 are assumed to be equal
to Diameter and Wt/Sch on the following element dialog box.
If there is no value for Alpha is specified on the dialog box, CAESAR II reports the alpha value
in the Errors and Warnings dialog box.
Specifies the diameter at the To of the reducer element. The value carries forward as the
diameter of the following element. Nominal values are converted to actual values if that feature
is active. If left blank, CAESAR II uses the diameter from the following element as Diameter 2.
Specifies the wall thickness at the To node of the reducer element. The value carries forward as
the wall thickness of the following element. Nominal values are converted to actual values if that
feature is active. If this option is left blank, CAESAR II uses the thickness from the following
element as Thickness 2.

Specifies the slope, in degrees, of the reducer transition. If left blank, CAESAR II assumes the
slope equal to the arc tangent 1/2(the change in diameters) / (length of sloped portion of
reducer).
TD/12. This entry is a required input for IGE/TD/12.
Because all reducers are different, the actual length of sloped portion of reducer is unknown
unless you define it. Because of this, if Alpha is not specified, CAESAR II makes an assumption
that the length of sloped portion of reducer is equal to 60% of the total reducer length. If you
leave the Alpha value blank, then CAESAR II defaults to arc tangent 1/2(the change in
diameters) / (0.60 x element length).
Specifies the transition radius for the large end of the reducer as shown in Appendix 4, Table 8
of IGE/TD/12 Code. This option is enabled only when IGE/TD/12 is active.
Specifies the transition radius for the small end of the reducer as shown in Appendix 4, Table 8
of IGE/TD/12. This option is enabled only when IGE/TD/12 is active.

Indicates that you are supplying SIF and tee data. Select or clear by double-clicking the SIFs &
Tees check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary panel tab controls options for stress intensification factors (SIFs), or fitting types,
for up to two nodes per element. If you select components from the list, CAESAR II
automatically calculates the SIF values according to the applicable code unless you override this
behavior. Certain fittings and certain codes require additional data. Boxes display as appropriate
for the selected fitting.
There are two basic component types:

Three element intersection components
Two element joint components
A fully defined intersection model requires that three pipes frame into the intersection node and
that two of them are co-linear. Partial intersection assumptions are made for junctions where
you have coded one or two pipes into the intersection node, but these models are not
recommended. Two element joint components can be formed equally well with one or two
elements framing into the node.
You only need to type the intersection or joint type and properties on one of the elements going
to the junction. CAESAR II duplicates the intersection characteristics for all other pipes framing
into the intersection.

Fully review the warning messages coming from CAESAR II during error checking.
These messages detail any assumptions made during the assembly and calculation of the
intersection SIFs.
The available intersections and joint types, along with the other parameters that can affect the
stress intensification factors for the respective component, are shown in the table that follows.
1 REINFORCED FABRICATED TEE PAD THK FTG RO CROTCH
2 UNREINFORCED FABRICATED TEE FTG RO CROTCH
3 WELDING TEE FTG RO CROTCH
4 SWEEPOLET CROTCH
5 WELDOLET CROTCH
6 EXTRUDED WELDING TEE FTG RO CROTCH
7 GIRTH BUTT WELD WELD D OR ID
8 SOCKET WELD (NO UNDERCUT) FILLET
9 SOCKET WELD (AS WELDED) FILLET
10 TAPERED TRANSITION WELD D
11 THREADED JOINT
12 DOUBLE WELDED SLIP-ON
13 LAP JOINT FLANGE (B16.9)
14 BONNEY FORGE SWEEPOLET
15 BONNEY FORGE LATROLET WELD ID
16 BONNEY FORGE INSERT WELDOLET
17 FULL ENCIRCLEMENT TEE FTG RO WELD ID
*This list does not include input items effecting SIF calculations for ISO 14692. For more
information on ISO 14692, see Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations For ISO 14692
(on page 147).

Specifies the node number where the stress intensification exists. CAESAR II displays the To
node of the current element by default. You can type any node in the system, but it is most often
at a pipe intersection or joint.
If the node is at an intersection, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for all pipes going to the intersection
if the intersection Type is specified. You only need to type the intersection type once. CAESAR
II finds all other pipes framing into the intersection and applies the appropriate SIFs.
If the node is at a two-pipe joint, such as a butt weld, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for the two
pipes going to the joint node if the joint Type is specified. You only need to specify the joint type
once. CAESAR II finds the other pipe completing the joint and applies the appropriate SIFs.
If the node is not at an intersection or a joint then, leave the Type box blank and type user
defined SIFs in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes. Entries in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes only apply to
the element on which they are defined.
User defined stress intensification factors must be greater than or equal to one.
CAESAR II calculates and displays code-defined SIFs in the Intersection SIF scratchpad.
Access this scratchpad from the Classic Piping Input dialog box by clicking Environment >
Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes or Intersection SIF scratchpad on the Input Tools
toolbar. You can modify parameters used in the scratchpad so that you can observe the effects
of different geometries and thicknesses. Most changes made in the scratchpad can be
automatically transferred back into the model.
If the node is on any part of the bend curvature then the following applies:
You cannot override code calculated SIFs for bends by default. A configuration option exists
to override this default. For more information, see Allow User's SIF at Bend (on page 104). If
you set Allow User's SIF at Bend to True, then you can specify SIFs for bend To nodes.
The SIFs specified in this way apply for the entire bend curvature.
CAESAR II applies user-defined SIFs to straight pipe going to points on a bend curvature
regardless of any parameter in the setup file. This option is commonly used to intensify
injector tie-ins at bends, or dummy legs, or other bend attachment-type of supports.
Specifies the type of tee or joint.

For non-FRP piping codes, there are six types of tees and ten types of joints. These
elements correspond to 1 to 6 and 7 to 16 in the table Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF
Calculations (Except for ISO 14692)* (on page 139).
For BS 7159 and UKOOA, there are two types of tees: Moulded and Fabricated. Moulded
tee corresponds to either the Welding (3) or Extruded (6) welding tee Type. Fabricated tee
corresponds to a tee Type of Reinforced (1).
For IGE/TD/12, there are 11 types of tees and joints. For specialized diagrams of tee type
with this code, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page 157).
For ISO 14692, there are three types of tee and joints: Tee (1), Qualified Tee (3), and Joint
(2). Select 1 - Tee for the software to use the method specified in the ISO 14692 code for
non-qualified tees. Select 2 - Joint for CAESAR II to use the calculations specified in the
code for joints and fittings. Select 3 - Qualified Tee for the software to use the
code-specified calculation for qualified service stress for tees (including the pressure stress
multiplier, mpst).

ASME NC and ND piping codes do not include equations for SIFs with a tee Type of
Sweepolet (4), Weldolet (5), or Extruded (6). When you specify one of these tee types,
CAESAR II uses B31.1 equations.
Indicates the in-plane stress intensification factors (SIFs) for a bend or an intersection.
Specify this value for any point in the piping system by selecting the SIFs & Tees check box on
the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Type the node number to which the stress applies. Then,
specify the In-Plane SIF (ii) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the In-Plane SIF (ii) and Out-Plane SIF (io) boxes,
CAESAR II performs code-related calculations.
For more information on stress intensification factors (SIFs) in CAESAR II, see Stress
Intensification Factors Details (see "Stress Intensification Factors and Stress Indices Details" on
page 148).
Indicates the in-plane sustained stress index (Ii) value.

the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Type the node number to which the stress index applies.
Then, specify the In-Plane (Ii) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the In-Plane Index (Ii) box, CAESAR II sets the value
to the greater value of either 0.75 multiplied by the In-Plane SIF value (ii) or 1.0.
page 148).
Indicates the out-of-plane stress intensification factors (SIFs) for a bend or intersection.
the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Type the node number to which the stress applies. Then,
specify the Out-Plane SIF (io) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the In-Plane SIF (ii) and Out-Plane SIF (io) boxes,
CAESAR II performs code-related calculations.
page 148).

Indicates the out-of-plane sustained stress index (Io) value.

Then, specify the Out-Plane Index (io) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Out-Plane Index (Io) box, CAESAR II sets the
value to the greater value of either 0.75 multiplied by the Out-Plane SIF value (io) or 1.0.
page 148).
Indicates the torsional SIF (it) value for a bend or an intersection.

Then, specify the Torsion SIF (it) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Torsion SIF (it) box, CAESAR II sets the value to
1.0 by default.
page 148).
Indicates the sustained torsional moment index (It). You can use this index value (along with the
torsional moment due to sustained loads) to determine the amount of stress that is due to
sustained torsional moment.
Then, specify the Torsion Index (It) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Torsion Index (It) box, CAESAR II sets the value
to 1.0 by default.
page 148).

Indicates the longitudinal (axial) SIF (ia) value on a bend or at an intersection.

the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Type the node number to which the SIF applies. Then,
specify the Axial SIF (ia) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
The B31.3 code indicates that, in the absence of more applicable data, the Axial SIF
(ia) value is 1 for elbows, pipe bends, and miter bends. The ia value is the same as the
Out-Plane SIF (io) value for all other components.
page 148).
Indicates the sustained longitudinal (axial) force index (Ia). You can use this index value (along
with the longitudinal force due to sustained loads and the dimensions of a cross-sectional area
of the pipe) to determine the amount of stress that is due to sustained longitudinal force.
Then, specify the Axial Index (Ia) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Axial Index (Ia) box, CAESAR II sets the value to
1.0 by default.
page 148).
Indicates the pressure SIF (ip) value for a bend or an intersection.

the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Type the node number to which the stress pressure
applies. Then, specify the Pressure SIF (ip) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Pressure SIF (ip) box, CAESAR II sets the value
to 1.0 by default.
page 148).

Indicates the sustained pressure index (Ip).

Then, specify the Pressure Index (ip) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Pressure Index (Ip) box, CAESAR II sets the
value to 1.0 by default.
page 148).
Specifies the thickness of the reinforcing pad for reinforced fabricated or full encirclement tees
(intersection type #1 and #17, respectively). The pad thickness is only valid for these
intersection types. If the thickness of a type #1 or type #17 intersection is left blank or the value
entered is zero, the software uses the SIFs for an unreinforced fabricated tee.
In most piping codes, the beneficial effect of the pad thickness is limited to 1.5 times the nominal
thickness of the header. This factor does not apply in BS 806 or Z184, and is 2.5 in the Swedish
piping code.
Specifies the fitting outside radius for branch connections. This option is used for reduced
branch connections in the ASME and B31.1 piping codes, Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets, and
for WRC 329 intersection SIF calculations. Configuration options exist to invoke the WRC 329
calculations and to limit the application of the reduced branch connection rules to unreinforced
fabricated tees, sweepolets, weldolets, and extruded welding tees. If omitted, Ftg Ro defaults to
the outside radius of the branch pipe.
Specifies the crotch radius of the formed lip on an extruded welding tee, intersection type 6. This
is also the intersection weld crotch radius for WRC329 calculations. Specifying this value can
result in a 50% reduction in the stress intensification at the WRC 329 intersection. If you attempt
to reduce the stress riser at a fabricated intersection by guaranteeing that there is a smooth
transition radius from the header to the branch pipe, then you may reduce the resulting stress
intensification by a factor of 2.0.

Specifies the average circumferential weld mismatch measured at the inside diameter of the
pipe. This value is used for Butt Welds and Tapered transitions. This is the average; not the
maximum mismatch. You must verify that any maximum mismatch requirements are satisfied for
your particular code.
Specifies the fillet leg length. This option is used only in conjunction with a socket weld
component. This value is the length of the shorter leg for an unequal leg fillet weld. If a fillet
leg is given, both socket weld types result in the same SIF. See appendix D of the B31
piping codes for further clarification.
Specifies the weld identifier value. Choose from the following options:
0 or BLANK - As Welded
1 - Finished/Ground Flush
This box is only applicable for:
IGE/TD/12
Bonney Forge Sweepolets
Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets
Butt Welds in the Swedish Piping Codes or the IGE/TD/12 code
If you specify a value of 1 - Finished/Ground Flush, then the software considers the weld to be
ground flush on the inside and out and it calculates the SIF as 1.0.
For more information on how input parameters are used to compute SIFs for girth butt welds,
see WELD (D) (on page 145).
Specifies values that depend upon the code that you are using.
ASME Class 2 and ASME Class 3
Defines the primary stress index used for the given node on the current element.
Unless you otherwise over ride this value, the following values are applied for ASME Class 2
and Class 3 piping:
Straight Pipe: B1 = 0.5 B2 = 1.0
Curved Pipe: B1 = -0.1 + 0.4h; but not <0 or >0.5

B2 = 1.30/h**2/3 but not <1.0; h = tR/ rm**2
Intersections: B1 = 0.5

Butt Welded Tees: B2b = 0.4(R/T)**2/3 but not < 1.0

B2r = 0.5(R/T)**2/3 but not < 1.0
Branch Connections: (r < 0.5R)

B2b = 0.50 C2b but not < 1.0
B2r = 0.75 C2r but not < 1.0
C2b = 3(R/T)**2/3 (r/R)**1/2 (t/T)(r/FTG ro) but not < 1.5
C2r = 1.15(r/t)**1/4 but not < 1.5
B31.1 / B31.3
Defines the weld strength reduction factor (W c) used to reduce the allowable stress for the
sustained load case.
B31.3 Chapter IX
Not used.
BS-7159 and UKOOA
Defines the pressure stress multiplier (m) if it is different than the code requirements. For
straight pipe, m = 1.0; for bends and tees, m is defined in Figures 7.1 and 7.12 of the BS
7159 Code.
IGE/TD/12
Override the cyclic pressure stress intensification factor Ip(Cyc) if it is different than the code
calculations (calculated according to Table 9, Figure 5, and Figure 7 of the code).
Specifies the primary stress index for the given node on the current element. This entry is only
applicable for ASME Class 2 and 3 piping.
If omitted, B1 and B2 are defaulted as follows:
Straight Pipe: B1=0.5 B2=1.0
Curved Pipe: B1=-0.1+0.4h; but not <0 or >0.5

B2=1.30/h2/3; but not <1.0; h=tR/rm 2
Intersections: B1=0.5
Butt-Welded Tees: B2b=0.4(R/T)2/3 but not <1.0

B2r=0.5(R/T)2/3 but not <1.0

Branch Connections: (r<0.5R)

B2b=0.50 C2b but not <1.0
B2r=0.75 C2r but not <1.0
C2b=3(R/T)2/3 (r/R)1/2 (t/T)(r/FTG ro) but not <1.5
C2r=1.15(r/t)1/4 but not <1.5
You can use the SIF(IN) and SIF(OUT) boxes to override the CAESAR II calculated values for
any intersection. Override values only apply for the single element on which they are defined.
SIFs can be calculated for partial intersections and dummy legs.
When IGE/TD/12 is active, the SIF/TEE dialog box changes its appearance to
accommodate specialized SIF parameters. Refer to the supplementary IGE/TD/12
documentation for further information.
B31.1
Indicates that the tee meets the dimensional criteria of Figure D1 as well as Notes 10a, 10c,
10d, 10e, and 10f. This allows the software to use the branch equation when determining
the SIF value for the tee. Note that this option relies on the setting of the Configuration
Options Reduced Intersection and No RFT / WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs.
B31.8
Indicates that the software should use B31.8 Notes 6, 9, or 10, as applicable, when
determining the SIF value for the tee.
ASME NC and ND
Indicates that the tee meets the dimensional criteria of Figure 3673.2(b)-2 as well as Notes
10 and 11. This allows the software to use the branch equation when determining the SIF
value for the tee. Note that this option relies on the setting of the Configuration Options
Reduced Intersection and No RFT / WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs.
Indicates that the material for this tee is ferrous, which enables the software to compute the Y
value based on the highest temperature value specified.
When you select SIF & Tees on the Classic Piping Input dialog box, the Auxiliary panel for
SIFs/Tees becomes active. The Type box indicates what type of tee or joint to use for the piping
code specified. The software uses this input in the same way for most piping codes. However,
there are only a few tee and joint types for ISO 14692.
1 Tee
2 Joint
3 Qualified Tee

Specifying a tee, a qualified tee, or a joint in the Type box allows CAESAR II to perform the
correct allowable stress calculations.
Select 1 - Tee for the software to use the method specified in the ISO 14692 code for
non-qualified tees.
Select 2 - Joint for CAESAR II to use the calculations specified in the code for joints and
fittings.
Select 3 - Qualified Tee for the software to use the code-specified calculation for qualified
service stress for tees (including the pressure stress multiplier, m pst).
SIFs for non-intersection points are normally taken to be 1.0 unless the piping element is a
bend. If the SIF should be greater than (1.0), then you can type the non-unity SIF in the
Intersection Auxiliary box without specifying the intersection type. A user-defined SIF only acts
at the node on the current element.
CAESAR II calculates SIFs automatically for bends and defined intersections as specified by the
applicable piping code. You can type a user-defined SIF for any point in the piping system by
activating the SIFs & Tees check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Type the node
number where the stress is to be intensified in the first available Node box. Type the in-plane
and out-plane stress intensification factors in the In-Plane SIF (ii) and the Out-Plane SIF (io)
boxes. Specify any axial and torsion index values on the elements on the Axial Index (Ia) and
Torsion Index (It) boxes.
You cannot specify SIFs for bend elements unless the Allow User's SIF at Bend
option is set to True in the configuration file. For more information, see Allow User's SIF at Bend
(on page 104). Code defined SIFs always apply.
CAESAR II does not allow user-defined stress intensification factors to be less than 1.0.
The node to be intensified must be the To or the From node on the current element.
Stresses are only intensified at the element end going to the specified node. For example, if two
pipes frame into node 10, one going from 5 to 10, and the other from 10 to 15 and a stress
intensification factor of 2.0 for node 10 is defined on the element from 5 to 10, then the 10 end of
the element from 5 to 10 has a stress intensification of 2.0 and the 10 end of the element from
10 to 15 has a stress intensification of 1.0.
You can use user-defined stress intensification factors to override code calculated values for
nodes at intersections. For example, let node 40 be an intersection defined by an unreinforced
fabricated tee. The header pipes framing into the intersection go from 35 to 40 and from 40 to
45. The branch pipe framing into the intersection goes from 175 to 40. The code-calculated
values for the stress intensification factors in the header pipes are:
SIF (ii) = 4.50
SIF (io) = 3.75
and in the branch pipe are
SIF (ii) = 6.70
SIF (io) = 5.58

Also assume that finite element analysis of the intersection showed the header stress
intensification factors to be 2.3 and 1.87 respectively and the branch stress intensification
factors to be equal to the code recommended value, which is 6.70 and 5.58. To properly
override the code-calculated stress intensification factors for the header pipes, two pipe
elements must be modified:
35 to 40 Node 40
Type:
SIF (ii): 2.3
SIF (io): 1.87
40 to 15 Node 40
Type:
SIF (ii): 2.3
SIF (io): 1.87
The stress intensification for the branch pipes can be calculated according to the code, so part
of the branch pipe data might appear:
175 to 40 NODE 40
Type: 2 - Unreinforced
SIF (ii):
SIF (io):
If either of the SIF boxes for the header elements going to 40 were left blank, the
code-calculated value would be used in its place. This is only true where code-calculated values
exist along with user-specified values.
If the element from 110 to 115 needs the stress intensification factors for each of its ends is 2.0,
then a part of that element data might appear:
110 to 115 Node 110

Type:
SIF (ii): 2.0
SIF (io):
Node: 115
Type:
SIF (ii): 2.0
SIF (io):
Leaving the out-of-plane stress intensification factor blank implies that it is equal to the in-plane
stress intensification factor. There are no code-calculated values to override these user-input
values.

If you do not specify Torsion SIF (it), Axial SIF (ia), and Pressure SIF (ip), CAESAR II
calculates the values as 1.
The ASME B31.3 code update also introduced using the stress indices in sustained stress
equations.
If you do not specify the In-Plane Index (Ii), then CAESAR II uses the greater value of either
0.75 multiplied by the In-Plane SIF value (ii) or 1.0.
If you do not specify the Out-Plane Index (Io), then CAESAR II uses the greater value of either
of 0.75 multiplied by the Out-Plane SIF (io) or 1.
If you do not specify the Torsion Index (It), Axial Index (Ia), and Pressure Index (Ip),
CAESAR II sets these values to 1.
Currently, the software does not use the Pressure SIF (ip) or Pressure Index (Ip) in
the calculation.
You are not permitted to override code-calculated stress intensification factors for bend
elements unless the Allow User's SIF at Bend option is set to True in the configuration file.
Additionally, bend stress intensification factors supersede any code-calculated intersection
stress intensification factors for the same node. This characteristic allows you to apply
code-calculated intersection stress intensification factors to dummy legs without disturbing the
normal bend stress intensification factors. The node on the dummy leg, which is also on the
bend curvature, is defined as an intersection on the Intersection SIF Scratchpad. The
intersection stress intensification factors are calculated and can be applied to the dummy leg
end that connects to the bend. Bend stress intensification factors are unchanged.
Stress intensification factors can be calculated for intersections having one, two, or three pipes
framing into it. Where two pipes form a partial intersection, CAESAR II assumes that the larger
pipe is the header and the smaller the branch.
Where one pipe forms a partial intersection, CAESAR II assumes that the intersection is full
sized.
CAESAR II does not calculate stress intensification factors for intersections having more than
three pipes framing into it (for example, a cross, and for non-90-degree branches, such as
lateral intersections).
View the stress intensification factors calculated by CAESAR II interactively from the Classic
Piping Input dialog box by clicking Environment > Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes or
Intersection SIF scratchpad on the Input Tools toolbar.
View the stress intensification factors at bends from the Classic Piping Input dialog box by
clicking Environment > Review SIFs at Bends or Bend SIF scratchpad on the Input
Tools toolbar.

The SIF scratchpads display after you type in the node number to review when prompted. The
node must be a valid bend node when reviewing SIFs at bends.
You can interactively change any of the data and recalculate the SIFs. This allows you to see
the effect of changing geometries and properties on code stress intensification factors.
CAESAR II allows you to transfer data from the scratchpad back to the actual model.

IGE\TD\12 requires different information than the other codes used in CAESAR II. When
IGE\TD\12 is active, the SIFs/Tees Auxiliary field changes to accommodate specialized SIF
parameters. For more information regarding the specialized parameters refer to the text and
figures at the end of this section.

regardless of any parameter in the setup file. This option is commonly used to intensify
injector tie-ins at bends, or dummy legs, or other bend attachment-type of supports.
Specifies the type of tees or joints.
Specifies the following terms for each component type:

Forged Tee to BS 1640
Specifies the Do value. For more information on Do, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
157).
Weldolet
Specifies the r3 value. For more information on r3, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
157).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
157).
Weldoflange
157).

Specifies the T value. For more information on T, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page 157).
Weldolet
Specifies the theta value. For more information on theta, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 157).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Weldoflange

page 157).

Fabricated Tee with Pad
Specifies the Te value. For more information on Te, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
157).
Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
157).
Weldolet
157).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
157).
Full Encirclement Tee
157).
Long Weldneck Flange
157).
Weldoflange
157).

Fabricated Tee
Specifies the rp value. For more information on rp, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
157).
Specifies the do value. For more information on do, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
157).
Weldolet
157).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
157).


157).
Weldoflange
157).

Fabricated Tee
157).
Specifies the rc value. For more information on rc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
157).
Sweepolet
Specifies the rc value. For more information on rc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page 157).
Weldolet
157).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
157).
157).
Weldoflange
157).

Fabricated Tee
157).
Specifies the Tc value. For more information on Tc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
157).
Sweepolet

157).
Weldolet
157).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Lh value. For more information on Lh, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
157).
157).
Weldoflange
157).

Fabricated Tee
Specifies the L1 value. For more information on L1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
157).
Weldolet
157).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Lb value. For more information on Lb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
157).
157).
Weldoflange
157).

Use the figures below to identify the specialized parameters.

Forged Tee
Weldolet

Drawn/Extruded Tee
Weldoflange

Sweepolet

Fabricated Tee
IGE/TD/12

Overrides the stress concentration factors calculated according to the IGE/TD/12 Code
equations. Any values typed here apply only to the element on which they have been specified
except when entered on a bend node. In that case, they apply throughout the bend.
For branches of tees, any bending SCFs specified here must include the "w" term.
Overrides the fatigue class calculated according to the IGE/TD/12 Code equations. Any values
selected here apply only to the element on which they have been specified except when entered
on a bend node. In that case, they apply throughout the bend.
Boundary Conditions
Indicates you are supplying information on items which restrain (or impose movement on) the
pipe, such as restraints, hangers, flexible nozzles, or displacements. Select or clear these
options by double-clicking the applicable check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Though not required, it is recommended that you define such information on the dialog box
which has that point as the From node or To node. This is of benefit if the data must be located
for modification. The auxiliary panel tabs allow you to specify up to four restraints (devices which
in some way modify the free motion of the system), one hanger, one nozzle, or two sets of nodal
displacements per element. If needed, you can define additional conditions for any node on
other elements.
Aux Tools toolbar: Restraints

Related commands:
Right-click menu: Restraint > Delete Restraint
Right-click menu: Restraint > Edit Restraint
Indicates that you are specifying restraint data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the
Restraints check box on the Classic Piping Input.
The Restraints tab of the auxiliary panel controls data for up to six restraints for each element.
Node number and restraint types are required. All other information is optional. If you omit the
stiffness, the software defaults the support to a rigid component. Enter a support tag name in the

Tag field. You can also import support tag and a Support GUID using keywords in the PCF
restraint mapping file. CAESAR II adds the support tag after you import the PCF file.
You can specify as many as six restraints for an element. If you need to specify more than six
restraints on one element, you can place the additional restraints on any other element.
Specify skewed restraints by typing direction cosines with the type, such as X (1,0,1) for a
restraint running at 45 degrees in the X-Z plane.
Do not use restraints in the following situations:
Imposed Displacements - Specify displacements for the point using the
Displacements auxiliary panel in Piping Input.
Flexible Nozzles - Use the Nozzles Flex check box to open the Nozzles auxiliary
panel to input the vessel or tank characteristics required by WRC 297, PD 5500, or API
650 to calculate local nozzle flexibilities. You can also specify custom nozzle flexibilities
using the Custom Nozzle Type option. After the software calculates the nozzle
stiffnesses, CAESAR II automatically inserts the necessary restraints and flexibilities
into the piping model.
Hangers program-designed or pre-defined spring hangers - Use the Hangers check
box to open the Hanger auxiliary panel in Piping Input.
For information on controlling the display of restraints, see Restraints (on page 370).
Specifies the node number where the restraint is to act. The node number does not have to
be on the current element.
Specifies the connecting node. Restraints with connecting nodes (CNodes) can be used to tie
one node in the piping system to any other node in the system. If left blank, then the software
ties the restraint node by the restraint stiffness to a fixed point in space. If the CNode is
specified, then the software ties the restraint node by the restraint stiffness to the connecting
node.
In all cases, CNodes associate nodal degrees of freedom. Additionally, you can use CNodes to
geometrically connect different parts of a model graphically. CAESAR II controls this option
through the Connect Geometry through CNodes (on page 75) configuration setting.

Specifies the restraint type. You can select a restraint from the list in the Restraints auxiliary
panel in Piping Input. For more information, see the Restraints section of the CAESAR II
Applications Guide.
Restraint Type Description Example
ANC Anchor
Modifiers:
Stiffness
Gap
Mu
The anchor is at the center

of the pipe for a rigid stanchion.
Otherwise, the anchor is at the base of
the stanchion.
X, Y, or Z Translational Double Acting X support

Modifiers:
Stiffness
Gap
Mu
+X, -X, +Y, -Y, +Z, -Z Translational Directional +Y support with slide plates
Modifiers: Allows movement in the positive Y
direction and restrains movement in
Stiffness the negative Y direction.
Gap
Mu
The plus or minus
sign (+/-) on the restraint
specifies the direction of free
movement.

RX, RY, or RZ Rotational Double Acting 1) RZ, X, and Y

Modifiers:
Stiffness
Gap
2) RX, RY, X, and Y. Hinged-end rod

free to rotate about the Z-axis.
Restrains all except RZ.
+RX, -RX, +RY, -RY, Rotational Directional +RZ, X, and Y

+RZ, -RZ
Modifiers:
Stiffness
Gap
The plus or minus
sign (+/-) on the restraint
specifies the direction of free
movement.
GUIDE Guide, Double Acting Guide (or X) and Y

Modifiers:
Stiffness
Gap
Mu
GUIDE only restricts
the horizontal plane and does

not contain a vertical This can also be X instead
component or a pipe axial of GUIDE.
component.

LIM Double Acting Limit Stop LIM with gap (or X with gap) and +Y
Modifiers: Gap between support and each limit
stop
Stiffness
Gap
Mu
A limit stop is axial
to the pipe, but may not align
with a global axis when
elements are non-orthogonal.
For more information, see Gap (on

page 172).
This can also be X with gap
instead of LIM with gap.
+LIM, -LIM Directional Limit Stop +LIM with gap in the direction of the
From node to the To node
Modifiers:
(also +Y)
Stiffness
Gap between support and the limit
Gap stop
Mu
A limit stop is axial
to the pipe, but may not align
with a global axis when
elements are non-orthogonal.
For more information, see Gap (on

page 172).
This can also be +X with
gap instead of +LIM with gap.

XROD, YROD, ZROD Large Rotation Rod YROD or +YROD

Modifiers:
+XROD, +YROD,
Stiffness
+ZROD,
Length
Fi
All rods are
directional. If there is no sign it
is assumed to be positive.
This can also be +YROD

instead of YROD.
-XROD, -YROD, Large Directional Rotation Rod -YROD

-ZROD
Modifiers:
Stiffness
Length
Fi
X2, Y2, Z2 Translational Double Acting X2 soil stiffness with a load limit
Bilinear
Modifiers:
K1
K2
Fy
For more information, see Stif (on

page 173), K2 (on page 172), and Mu
(on page 173).
+X2, -X2, +Y2, -Y2, Translational Directional The directional restraint allows
+Z2, -Z2 Bilinear movement in the specified direction.
Modifiers:
K1
K2
Fy

RX2, RY2, RZ2 Rotational Double Acting RX2, RY2

Bilinear
Modifiers:
K1
K2
Fy
+RX2, -RX2, +RY2, Rotational Directional Bilinear The directional restraint allows rotation
-RY2, +RZ2, -RZ2 in the specified direction about the
Modifiers:
specified axis.
K1
K2
Fy
XSPR, YSPR, ZSPR Bottom Out Spring YSPR

Modifiers:
Stiffness
x
F
XSNB, YSNB, ZSNB Translational Double Acting YSNB

Snubber
Modifier:
Stiffness

+XSNB, -XSNB, Directional Snubber The directional restraint allows

+YSNB, -YSNB, movement in the specified direction.
+ZSNB, -ZSNB
Specifies an anchor restraint. This type of restraint is defined for all degrees of freedom at the
node.
Specifies restraints which can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you type a sign, it defines the
direction of allowed free displacement along the specified degree-of-freedom. For example, a +Y
restraint is a restraint against movement in the minus -Y direction. It is free to move in the plus Y
direction.
Specifies translational skewed restraints. These values can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you
type a direction vector such as vecx, vecy, or vecz, CAESAR II converts the direction vector into
the corresponding cosines.

Specifies rotational restraints which can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you type a sign, it defines
the direction of allowed free displacement along the specified degree-of-freedom.
Specifies a transverse restraint that can be skewed.
Specifies limit stops. These are axial restraints that can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you type a
sign, it defines the direction of allowed free displacement along the element longitudinal axis.

Specifies translational, large rotation, rod, or hanger-type restraints. These values can be
preceded by a (+) or (-) sign to indicate the orientation of the pivot point about which the rod
swings. A (+) is assumed. In the case of a YROD, this implies that the pivot point is above the
pipe. The rod or hanger length is also required.
Specifies translational skewed, large rotation rod, or hanger type restraints.
Specifies bilinear restraints. These are restraints that have two different stiffnesses associated
with them. The stiffness is dependent upon the loading on the restraint. Bilinear restraints can
be preceded by a (+) or a (-).
Specifies rotational skewed restraints.
Specifies spring supports. These values can be preceded by a (+) or a (-).

A bottom out spring requires additional input. The additional input includes the spring rate,
allowed travel, and initial load. If the allowed travel in the direction of support is exceeded, the
spring bottoms-out.
Specifies snubbers, which are restraints that engage only during quick movements such as
those induced by a shock. They only act on the piping system in the occasional load case.
Snubbers can be preceded by a (+) or a (-).
Because CAESAR II cannot perform load stepping, static analysis with snubbers requires a
preliminary manual analysis to determine thermal movements. Here is the procedure.
1. Analyze a hot operating case without your occasional loads.
2. Take the displacements from this analysis at the snubbers and put them back into the input.
3. At the location where the snubbers are defined, define a CNODE and put these
displacements on the CNODE.
4. For your real analysis, apply these displacements to all load cases. Because they are on the
far side of the snubber, they won't affect anything unless the load case is called OCC, which
activates the snubber stiffness.
So:
When you run your standard OPE case (W+T1+P1+D1), the snubber node displaces as
before. There are no restraints because the load case is OPE, not OCC.
When you run the operating + occasional case (W+T1+P1+D1+WIND1), the snubber node
displaces along with its CNODE. There is a difference in these two displacements due to the
WIND1 load and the snubber stiffness, because the case is now set as OCC.

Specifies the yield stiffness of a bilinear restraint. When the load on the restraint exceeds Fy, the
stiffness on the restraint changes from K1 to K2. CAESAR II treats K2 values of zero as rigid.
Type a value of 1.0 for very small stiffnesses.
Specifies the following values:

TYPE = X Y Z GUI LIM RX RY RZ
GAP
Specifies the distance along the restraint line of action that the restrained node can travel
before resistance to movement begins. The gap value must be positive. The gap is given in
degrees for rotational restraints. If the translational restraint is not preceded by a sign, then
the restraint is double acting and the gap exists for both positive and negative
displacements along the line of action. For example, if a 0.25 in. gap is specified at a +Y
restraint, then the restrained node can move freely 0.25 in. in the minus Y direction before
restraint occurs. The gap specification does not affect the amount of free displacement that
can occur along the positive Y direction in this example.
You can type two restraints having the same line of action but with different signs at the
same node when you define windows of allowed movement. Be careful to remember to form
the window with signs on restraints rather than with signs on gaps. A gap is a measure of
length in CAESAR II. A gap is always positive.
Examples:
TYPE GUI GAP 1/4 ... One quarter in. gap on either side of the guided restraint.
TYPE +Y GAP 3.0 ... Three in. gap below the support that must be closed before the +Y
support begins acting.
TYPE RX GAP 5.0 ... Five degree gap about the X axis about which the pipe may rotate
freely before rotational restraint occurs.
TYPE = XROD YROD ZROD
Len
Specifies the swinging length of the rod or hanger. This is the distance along the restraint
line of action from the restrained node to the pivot point. The restraint swings about the pivot
point. If a CNODE is defined then the restraint swings about the CNODE. Len is a required
entry.
TYPE = X2 Y2 Z2 RX2 RY2 RZ2
K2
Specifies the yield stiffness of a bilinear restraint. When the load on the restraint exceeds
Fy, the stiffness on the restraint changes from K1 to K2. Type a negative value to model
shallow trench or groove-type pipeline supports. CAESAR II treats K2 values of zero as
rigid. Type 1.0 for very small stiffnesses.
TYPE = XSPR YSPR ZSPR
"x"
Specifies the distance traveled along the spring axis before bottom-out occurs. In the case

of a typical YSPR, this is the movement in the negative Y direction before the spring
bottoms out.
TYPE = XSNB YSNB ZSNB
Specifies stiffness associated with any support, guide, limit stop, rod, or spring that can be
defined as a restraint. If you leave this option blank then the defined restraint is considered rigid.
The default rigid restraint stiffness is 1.0E12.
K1 is the initial stiffness of a bilinear restraint (for example, X2). If the restraint is not rigid, then
you can type any positive stiffness.
Avoid stiffnesses greatly in excess of 1.0E15. If a stiffness value is specified for an anchor, the
stiffness applies for all six degrees of freedom at the anchored node.
Specifies the following values:

TYPE = X Y Z GUI LIM
MU - Specifies the static friction coefficient. Friction provides resistance to movement along
the direction normal to the restraint line of action. The magnitude of the friction force is equal
to MU * Fn, where Fn is the normal force on the restraint. You can automatically assign a
friction coefficient to every new translational restraint by assigning a value to the Coefficient
of Friction box in the configuration. For more information, see Coefficient of Friction (Mu)
(on page 60).
TYPE = XROD YROD ZROD
Fi - Specifies the initial spring load. Leave this box blank for a rigid YROD. If you use YROD
to model a spring hanger, type the hanger stiffness into the STIF box. Type the initial cold
load on the hanger.
TYPE = X2 Y2 Z2 RX2 RY2 RZ2
Fy - Specifies the yield load. If the load on the support is less than Fy then the initial
stiffness K1 is used. If the load on the support is greater than Fy then the second stiffness
K2 is used.
TYPE = XSPR YSPR ZSPR
F - Specifies the initial spring cold load. This input is required and is almost always positive.
TYPE = XSNB YSNB ZSNB
na - Not Applicable. This box is not used when the restraint TYPE is snubber.

Specifies the restraint identifier or name. Type to manually create a new name. You can import
and export tags through a .pcf file (see "PCF Restraint Mapping" on page 345) or a neutral file.
The tag:
Displays in piping input, model graphics, and Isogen.
Exports to applicable output reports and MDB files.
Duplicates with the restraint or hanger when you duplicate the element.
Displays the software-assigned GUID for the restraint.

GUID is a display-only value in the Restraints list input. For more information, see
List (on page 266).
Indicates that you are supplying hanger data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Hangers on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary panel controls options for hanger installations. You can fully define the hanger
data, or the hanger can be designed by CAESAR II. In this case, two special load cases are run
and the results are used as design parameters to select the springs from the user-specified
catalog.
CAESAR II provides catalogs for more than 35 spring hanger vendors.
The Hangers tab in the Piping Input auxiliary panel lets you specify details on a
hanger-by-hanger basis in the piping input. To specify values for all hangers in a model, see
Hanger Design Control Data (on page 287).
Any changes you type in the Hangers tab override the global values you specify in the
Hanger Design Control Data dialog box.
For information on controlling the display of hangers, see Hangers (on page 374).

Specifies the node number to which the hanger is connected.
Specifies the connecting node number. This value is used only when the other end of the
hanger is to be connected to another point in the system, such as another pipe node.
There are two sections on the Hanger tab in the Piping Input auxiliary panel.
Design Data
Specifies the hanger data if you need CAESAR II to design the hanger for you.
Predefined Hanger Data
Specifies the hanger data if you know the hanger information.
Specifies the active hanger table.

The following spring tables are currently included in CAESAR II:
1. Anvil 2. Bergen Power
3. Power Piping 4. NPS Industries
5. Lisega 6. Fronek
7. Piping Technology 8. Capitol
9. Piping Services 10. Basic Engineers
11. Inoflex 12. E. Myatt & Co.
13. Sinopec 14. BHEL
15. CASTIM 2000 (formerly Flexider) 16. Carpenter & Paterson
17. Pipe Supports Ltd. 18. Witzenmann
19. Sarathi 20. Myricks
21. China Power 22. Pipe Supports USA
23. Quality Pipe Supports 24. PiHASA
25. Binder 26. Gradior

27. NHK 28. PSSI GmbH
29. Seonghwa 30. Mitsubishi
31. Yamashita 32. Sanwa Tekki
33. Techno Industry 34. Hesterberg
35. Spring Supports Mfg. Co. 36. Senior
37. Unison 38. Wookwang
Additional design options are invoked if you use the following check boxes.
Extended Range
Cold Load
Hot load centered (if possible)
You can globally set the hanger data for a model from the Hanger Design Control Data (on
page 287), accessed by clicking Hanger design criteria in the piping input. Specify the default
hanger table that appears in this dialog by specifying the Default Spring Hanger Table
configuration setting in Configuration Editor > Database Definitions. For examples of
incorporating spring hanger designs into your models, see the Hangers section in the CAESAR
II Application Guide.
Extended Load Range Springs
CAESAR II includes the maximum load range to permit the selection of less expensive
variable support hangers in place of constant effort supports when the spring loads are just
outside the manufacturers recommended range. Extended load ranges are the most
extreme ranges on the spring load table. Some manufacturers build double-spring supports
to accommodate this range. Others adjust the top or bottom travel limits to accommodate
either end of the extended table. Make sure that the manufacturer can supply the spring
before you use the maximum ranges. Use of the extended range often eliminates the need
to go to a constant effort support.
Lisega springs do not support an extended range. If you select Extended Range
for a hanger with Lisega springs, CAESAR II returns the standard Lisega spring table and
ranges.
Cold Load Spring Hanger Design
Cold load spring hanger design is a method of designing the springs in which the hot (or
operating) load is supported in the cold (or installed) position of the piping. This method of
spring design offers several advantages over the more usual hot load design:
Hanger stops are easier to remove.
There is no excessive movement from the neutral position when the system is cold or
when the stops are removed.
Spring loads can be adjusted before the system is brought up to temperature.
Some feel that the cold load approach yields a much more dependable design.
Operating loads on connected equipment are lower in some system configurations. A
hot vertical riser anchored at the bottom turning horizontally into a nozzle connection is

a typical configuration resulting in this load-reduction. The spring to be designed is at

the elbow adjacent to the nozzle. Operating loads are lower because the difference
between the hot and cold loads counters the moment produced by the vertical thermal
expansion from the anchor.
The disadvantages to cold load design are:
In some systems, the loads on rotating equipment may be increased by a value
proportional to the spring rate times the travel in the hot condition.
Most installations are done on a hot load design basis.
Middle of the Table Hanger Design (Hot Load Centered)
Many designers prefer that the hot load be centered as closely as possible to the middle of
the spring table. This provides as much variability as possible in both directions before the
spring bottoms out when the system is hot. This design was necessary prior to effective
computer modeling of piping systems, when the weights at hangers were approximated by
chart methods or calculated by hand. Activating this option does not guarantee that spring
hot loads are at the middle of the spring table, but CAESAR II makes every effort to move
the hot load to this position. The CAESAR II design algorithm goes to a higher size spring if
the design load is closer to the middle of the larger spring's range, but never switches spring
types. This option, when it is effective, can only result in a one-size larger spring. CAESAR II
attempts to move the hot load to the next higher spring when it is within 10% of the
maximum travel range for the spring. If the new spring is not satisfactory, then CAESAR II
uses the old one.
Specifies the hanger identifier or name. Type to manually create a new name. You can import
and export tags through a .pcf file (see "PCF Restraint Mapping" on page 345) or a neutral file.
The tag:
Duplicates with the restraint or hanger when you duplicate the element.
Specifies the amount of room above or below the pipe where you can install the hanger or
can. If the value is negative, then CAESAR II assumes that a can is to be installed. If the
value is positive, then CAESAR II assumes that a hanger is to be in installed. Hangers or
cans are selected for a particular location only if they can be installed in the space allotted.
The precise definition of available space varies with the manufacturer. Drawings and tables
for each manufacturer are shown at the end of this section.

This is the available vertical clearance for the hanger or can:
Leave the box blank or set to zero if the Available Space is not an important design criteria.
When the available space is the governing factor in a hanger design, several smaller springs
are typically chosen in place of one large spring.
Specifies the limit on the allowed variation between the hot and cold hanger loads. If this value
is not specified, the only limit on load variation is that inherent in the spring table. This is
approximately 100% when the hot load is smaller than the cold load and 50% when the hot load
is larger than the cold load. Hot loads are smaller than cold loads whenever the operating
displacement in the Y direction is positive. The default value for the load variation is 25%.
The Allowable Load Variation value is the percentage variation from the hot load:
or as may be more familiar:

The Allowable Load Variation value is typed as a percentage. For example, type twenty five
percent as 25.0.
Specifies the minimum amount of travel for hanger design. This is a cost saving feature that
replaces unnecessary springs with rigid rods.
The hanger design algorithm operates by first running a restrained weight case. The load to be
supported by the hanger in the operating condition is determined from this case. After the
hanger design load is known, the software runs an operating case with the hot hanger load
installed. This analysis determines the travel at the hanger location. If this determined hanger
travel is less than the Rigid Support Displacement Criteria, then a rigid Y-support is selected
instead of a spring for the location.
The software does not apply the criteria if you leave the Rigid Support Displacement Criteria
box blank or zero.
A typical value is 0.1 in.
You should insert a single directional restraint instead of a rigid rod in some
cases. Rigid rods are double-acting restraints. In some cases, these can develop large hold
down forces that do not really exist because the support has lifted off, or because the rigid rod
has bowed slightly. When this condition develops, you should rerun the hanger design inserting
single directional restraints where rigid rods were put in by CAESAR II.
Do not replace hangers with rigid rods in very stiff parts of the piping system. These parts are
usually associated with rotating equipment or vessel nozzles that need to be protected.
Specifies the maximum amount of travel for hanger design. CAESAR II selects a constant effort
support if the design operating travel exceeds this limit, even though a variable support from the
manufacturer table would have been satisfactory in every other respect.
You can design a constant effort hanger by specifying a very small number for the Maximum
Allowed Travel Limit. A value of 0.001 typically forces CAESAR II to select a constant effort
support for a particular location.
Specifies the number of hangers at a location.

Type a positive number to indicate the exact number of hangers at that location.
Leave the box blank to indicate that CAESAR II place as many hangers as necessary to make
the installation work.
Type a negative number to indicate the maximum number of hangers that you accept. For
example, if you want to use as few springs as possible, yet are willing to use as many as five
springs if necessary, type -5.

Indicates that hanger design allows short range springs.

CAESAR II gives you the option of excluding short range springs from consideration from the
selection algorithms. Short range springs are considered specialty items in some instances and
are not used unless their shorter length is required for clearance reasons. Clear this check box
in this case.
If this option is not selected, CAESAR II selects a mid-range spring over a short-range spring,
assuming that they are more standard, readily available, and in general cheaper than their
short-range counterparts.
If the default should be that short-range springs are used wherever possible, then check the box
on the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box.
Overrides the operating load that CAESAR II is calculating.

This value is normally specified when you think that loads on a piece of equipment are
reduced if a hanger in the vicinity of the equipment is artificially caused to carry a
proportionately larger part of the total load. This operating load is the hot load that the
hanger is designed to support after it undergoes any travel due to the thermal expansion of
the piping. CAESAR II's calculated hanger operating loads may be read from the hanger
table printed in the output processor. The column is titled HOT LOAD. The value also
appears in this table. Type the total operating load that you want to use at the location. For
example, if there are two hangers specified at the location and each should carry 500 lb.,
then the operating load specified should be 1,000 lb.
Specifies any additional weight that must be supported by the hanger that exists between
the hanger and the pipe. This weight could affect the hanger design if the magnitude of this
weight is great enough.
Specifies the load case for hanger design. You can base the spring selection algorithm on
one or more operating conditions. A two-pump installation where only one pump operates at
a time is a good application for multiple load case hanger design.
There are currently thirteen different multiple load case design algorithms available:
Design spring per operating case #1.
Design spring per operating case #2.
Design spring per operating case #3, #4, #5, #6, #7, #8, and #9.
Design spring for maximum operating load.
Design spring for maximum travel.
Design spring for average load and average travel.
Design spring for maximum load and maximum travel.

You can specify the Multiple Load Case Design option at the global level on the Hanger
Design Control Data dialog box. The globally specified option applies for all hanger design
locations unless overridden on a specific hanger design dialog box.
Type the number of operating thermal cases to consider when sizing springs for this system
on the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box. This value defaults to 1.0. Also type the
Multiple Load Case Design option to be the default value unless the design option is to be
specified individually for each hanger to be designed in the system.
This example illustrates the different hanger designs that can result from the use of different
multiple load case design options.

Multiple Load Case Design Option for Hanger Design
Hanger A
Multiple Load Case Design Hanger Travel Design Hanger Load

Design Option
1 0.752 in 730.0 lb
2 0.029 in 560.0 lb
10 0.752 in 730.0 lb
11 0.752 in 730.0 lb
12 0.3905 in 645.0 lb
13 0.752 in 730.0 lb
Hanger B

Design Option
1 0.032 in 592.0 lb
2 0.733 in 587.0 lb

Hanger B

Design Option
10 0.032 in 592.0 lb
11 0.733 in 587.0 lb
12 0.3825 in 589.5 lb
13 0.733 in 592.0 lb
Specifies the node number for the equipment where the restraint is freed. You can also
specify the corresponding free code to tell CAESAR II which of the restraint or anchor
directions to free. For nozzles that are further removed from the hanger usually only the Y
direction should be freed. Anchors or restraints simulating equipment connections that are in
the immediate vicinity of the hanger are usually freed during the hanger design restrained
weight run so that loads normally going to the equipment nozzle are carried by the hanger.
Hangers are commonly used around equipment nozzles to support the weight of the pipe as
it thermally expands away from the nozzle. The hanger can usually be designed to take
almost the full weight of the pipe between the anchor and the hanger if the anchor is freed
when making the restrained weight calculation. The pipe going to the anchor is treated just
like a free end, but only for the hanger weight calculation only.
The Free Restraint at Node box works in conjunction with the Free Code box. If the Free
Code is not specified for an anchor, then the software assumes that the anchor is
completely free for the restrained weight run.
The restrained Weight hanger design pass is the first analysis step in the hanger design. It
is run automatically by CAESAR II. The following steps comprise the restrained weight run:
1. Putting rigid Y restraints at each hanger location.
2. Removing anchors and restraints that are to be freed.
3. Running the weight analysis to find the hot hanger loads.
Nonlinear restraints are not freed during hanger design.

Specifies the directions in which the anchor or restraint is released. When an anchor or
restraint should be released for the restrained weight run, type the node number for that
anchor in the Free Restraint at Node box and specify the free code describing the
directions to be released in the Free Code box on the same hanger dialog box. The
available free codes are as follows:
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y direction only.
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y and X directions only.
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y and Z directions only.
Free all translational degrees of freedom for the anchor or restraint. (X,Y, and Z)
Free all translational and rotational degrees of freedom for the anchor or restraint.
(X, Y, Z, RX, RY, and RZ)
The last option usually results in the highest adjacent hanger loads, but you should only use
that option when the horizontal distance between the hanger and the anchor is within about
4 pipe diameters.
Specifies predefined hanger data. When you use the Predefined Hanger Data section on
the hanger dialog box and there is more than one hanger at the location, use the No. of
Hangers at Location box in the Design Data section to specify the number of hangers.
Then, type the spring rate and pre-load applicable to a single hanger. There is no reason to
try to compute the equivalent spring rates or theoretical loads.
Pre-defined hanger data can be specified in one of two ways:
Specify all information for the hanger.
Specify only the spring rate for the hanger.
If you specify all of the information, and the restraint configuration for the node is completely
defined, then it is not included in the hanger design algorithm.
For a position to be completely pre-defined, one of the following conditions must apply:
Spring rate and theoretical cold load
Constant effort support load

Specifies the spring rate.
Specifies the cold load for the hanger. If you type both the spring rate and the cold load, the
hanger location is completely predefined and CAESAR II does not perform analysis level
design for the hanger.
If only the spring rate is given, CAESAR II assumes that you want to rerate the spring at the
given location. The software reads the old spring rate from the existing hanger and inputs it
directly to CAESAR II. Leave the Theoretical Cold Load box blank for the rerate. If more
than a single spring exists at the location, then type the total number of springs in the No. of
Hangers at Location box in the Design Data section. CAESAR II assumes that the load is
distributed evenly among multiple springs at the same point.
CAESAR II goes through its normal hanger design procedure to calculate the load and
travel for all proposed hanger locations including the location with springs to be reset. The
stiffness of the reset springs is not used for this redesign. After CAESAR II sizes the springs,
it makes a comparison with the user-defined spring rates. If the selected spring rate is within
5% of your existing spring rate, CAESAR II lists the spring's figure number and size in the
output report. If the selected spring rate is more than 5% of your value, no manufacturer's
data is listed. In either case, CAESAR II uses the spring rate that you typed in all following
analyses. It is up to you to confirm that the new hot and cold loads are within the existing
spring's working range.
The primary use of the rerate capability is to find new installed loads for old springs. Springs
might be rerated after the shutdown of a unit that has been operating continuously for a long
period, or after mechanical or process changes are made to a piping system.
Specifies the support load for the constant effort hanger.
Displays the software-assigned GUID for the hanger.

GUID is a display-only value in the Hangers list input. For more information, see List
(on page 266).

Indicates that you are supplying nozzle data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Nozzle Flex on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
The Nozzles tab in the Piping Input auxiliary panel controls options for flexible nozzle
connections. When you type values in this dialog box tab, CAESAR II automatically calculates
the flexibilities and adds them to the active element. CAESAR II calculates nozzle loads
according to your specified criteria. You can select WRC 297, API 650, PD 5500, or Custom in
the Nozzle Type box.
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to WRC 297.

Current nozzle flexibility calculations are in accordance with the Welding Research Council
Bulletin No. 297, issued August 1984 for cylinder-to-cylinder intersections.

After error checking, CAESAR II displays all useful WRC curve data on the Errors and
Warnings dialog box. You can use these values to define the illustrated nozzles in the WRC
297 bulletin. It is sometimes helpful to know just how close a particular nozzle is to one of the
several asymptotic limits, or to a curve boundary.
You can see the WRC 297 computed data only during the error checking process.
Specifies the node number located at the nozzle intersection with the vessel shell. There should
only be a single piping element connected to this node. There should be no restraints acting on
the node.
For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, the nozzle element must be perpendicular to the vessel
shell. If you want to model hillside nozzles and latrolets, the first (and possibly very short) nozzle
element that comes from the vessel must be perpendicular to the vessel to keep the local
stiffness properly oriented. The second, longer nozzle element can then go off on the true
centerline of the nozzle.
For Custom, you can directly define a lateral nozzle, a hillside nozzle, or a nozzle on the vessel
head (where the nozzle and vessel centerlines may be at varying angles to each other).
When you type a nozzle node number, CAESAR II scans the current input data for the node and
fills the corresponding values in the Nozzle Outer Diameter and Nozzle Wall Thickness
boxes.

A valid nozzle node has the following properties:

Only a single element connects to the nozzle node.
The nozzle node is unrestrained and does not have displacements specified for any of its
degrees of freedom.
The software automatically includes nozzle flexibilities in the piping system analysis through
software-generated restraints. CAESAR II establishes six restraints for each flexible nozzle
input.
If you define a vessel node number, then the vessel node acts like a connecting node for each
of the six restraints. Vessel nodes are subject to the same restrictions shown above for nozzle
nodes.
You should not put a restraint or an element between the nozzle node and any
specified vessel node. CAESAR II creates the required connectivity from the nozzle flexibility
data and any additional stiffnesses between these two nodes erroneously add to the nozzle
stiffnesses.
Specifies the node number on the vessel surface at the point where the nozzle intersects the
vessel shell. This is optional. If you do not specify this value, then the nozzle node is connected
by the stiffnesses to a point fixed rigidly in space. If you specify this value, then the nozzle node
is connected by the stiffnesses to the vessel node. Specify the vessel nodes when you want to
model through the vessel from the nozzle connection to the skirt or foundation.
A vessel can be any type of vessel, tank, heat exchanger, vessel head (not just the
shell), or any other equipment.
Specifies the direction vector or direction cosines which defines the center-line of the vessel. For
example, a vertical vessel in a Y-up coordinate system, these entries would read:
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX - <blank>
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VY - 1.0
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VZ - <blank>
For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, if the centerlines of the nozzle and vessel are
collinear, the software flags this as an error. Only nozzles that are perpendicular to the shell
are allowed.
PD 5500 allows nozzles on cylinders or spheres.

Fax - Axial (Nozzle) (radial stiffness)

Mi - In-plane Bending (longitudinal stiffness)
Mo - Out-of-Plane Bending (circumferential stiffness)
Mt - Torsional (Nozzle) (torsional stiffness)
D - Direction cosine of shell

D - Direction cosine of head
Represents a nozzle on any type of

head.
For Custom, you can directly define a lateral nozzle, a hillside nozzle, or a nozzle on the
vessel head (where the nozzle and vessel centerlines may be at varying angles to each
other). Hence for the custom option you are not limited to radial nozzles.
Specifies the outside diameter of the nozzle.

CAESAR II fills this field automatically using the corresponding pipe diameter. You can override
this value because it does not have to be equal to the diameter of the pipe used to model the
nozzle.
For Custom, this field is not used by the software. It is for information only, and
provides a way to document the basis for stiffness calculations performed by another method.

Specifies the wall thickness of the nozzle.

CAESAR II fills this field automatically using the corresponding pipe wall thickness. You can
override this value because it does not have to be equal to the wall thickness of the pipe
element used to model the nozzle.
Specifies the distance along the vessel center-line from the center of the nozzle opening in the
vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel that significantly stiffens the vessel's
cross-section against local deformation normal to the shell surface.
Specifies the distance along the vessel center line from the center of the nozzle opening in the
vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel in the opposite direction from the
previous one. This entry is ignored for spherical vessels.
Specifies the outside diameter of the vessel.

Specifies the wall thickness of the vessel at the point where the nozzle connects to the vessel.
Do not include the thickness of any reinforcing pad.
Specifies the thickness of any reinforcing pad at the nozzle.

For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, this thickness is added to the vessel wall thickness
before the software performs nozzle stiffness calculations.

Specifies the estimated temperature of the vessel or nozzle junction.

For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, you must also type a valid vessel material number in the
corresponding field. The software uses the estimated temperature to calculate the hot
modulus-of-elasticity.
For Custom, this field is not used by the software. It is for information only, and provides a way
to document the basis for stiffness calculations performed by another method.
Specifies the vessel material number.

For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, this is an optional field. You must pair the vessel material
number with a valid vessel temperature. The allowed vessel material number can be any valid
material number from the material database. This value corresponds to the pipe materials used
in the dialog box. If the vessel temperature and the vessel material number are left blank or
zero, then the software uses an elastic modulus of 29.0E6 psi.
For Custom, this field is not used by the software and is for information only.
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to API 650.

CAESAR II can also calculate nozzle flexibilities according to Appendix P of API 650, "Design of
Carbon Steel Atmospheric Oil Storage Tanks."
the node.
boxes.
degrees of freedom.
input.

nodes.
stiffnesses.
Specifies the node number on the tank surface at the point where the nozzle intersects the tank
shell.
This is optional. If you do not specify one, then the nozzle node is connected by the stiffnesses
to a point fixed rigidly in space. If you type this value, then the nozzle node is connected by the
stiffnesses to the tank node.
Specify the tank node when you want to model through the tank from the nozzle connection to
the foundation.
are allowed.




head.

nozzle.
Specifies the wall thickness of the nozzle. CAESAR II fills this field automatically using the
corresponding pipe wall thickness. You can override this value because it does not have to be
equal to the wall thickness of the pipe element used to model the nozzle.
Specifies the height of the nozzle from the centerline of the nozzle to the base of the tank.
Specifies the location of the reinforcing. Select Shell or Nozzle.

Specifies the outside diameter of the storage tank. API 650 Addendum 1 does not recommend
these computations for diameters less than 120 feet.
Specifies the wall thickness of the storage tank at the point where the nozzle connects to the
tank. Do not include the thickness of any reinforcing pad.
Specifies the hot modulus-of-elasticity for the tank. If this value is left blank, the software
assumes a value of 0.2950E+08.
Specifies the coefficient of thermal expansion of the plate material of the tank. Values are listed
in engineering handbooks or the appropriate section of the API 650, App P. If this value is left
blank, the software assumes a value of zero.
Specifies the change in temperature from ambient to the maximum that the tank normally
experiences. For example, if the maximum summertime temperature is 107F, then the
temperature change would be 107 70 = 37, where 70 is the default ambient temperature
defined in configuration and environment. You would type 37 in this box. If this value is left
blank, the software assumes a value of zero.
Specifies the liquid level of the fluid in the storage tank. This value must be greater than the
nozzle height.
Specifies the specific gravity of the stored liquid. This value is unitless.
Specifies the displacement vector to assign to the calculated displacements. If you select one
among D1 to D9, the calculated displacements become the boundary conditions of the current
job, and CAESAR II can use them for the stress analysis. If you have already specified
displacements on the Classic Piping Input dialog box, CAESAR II uses the calculated
displacements to replace the original displacements. If you select None, CAESAR II does not
use the calculated displacements for the stress analysis.

Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to PD 5500.

CAESAR II can also calculate nozzle flexibilities according to Appendix G of the PD 5500
Specification for Unfired Fusion Welded Pressure Vessels.
the node.
boxes.
degrees of freedom.
input.
nodes.
stiffnesses.

If the centerlines of the nozzle and vessel are collinear, CAESAR II flags this as an
error.

nozzle.
Specifies the distance along the vessel center-line from the center of the nozzle opening in the
vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel that significantly stiffens the vessel's
cross-section against local deformation normal to the shell surface.
Specifies the distance along the vessel center line from the center of the nozzle opening in the
vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel in the opposite direction from the
previous one. This entry is ignored for spherical vessels.

Specifies the type of vessel. Select Cylinder or Sphere.


Specifies the estimated temperature of the vessel or nozzle junction.

For WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500, you must also type a valid vessel material number in the
corresponding field. The software uses the estimated temperature to calculate the hot
modulus-of-elasticity.
For Custom, this field is not used by the software. It is for information only, and provides a way
to document the basis for stiffness calculations performed by another method.


Allows you to define flexibility values that you calculate using another method. You can also
define informational properties that are included in reports.
the node.
boxes.
degrees of freedom.
input.
nodes.
stiffnesses.

are allowed.



head.

Specifies the radial stiffness in the direction axial to the nozzle, as calculated using another
method.



head.
If you do not define a stiffness value, the software uses the default rigid stiffness.
Specifies the longitudinal stiffness at the nozzle and along the run of the pipe, as calculated
using another method.



For a nozzle in the center of the head, in-plane

and out-of-plane stiffness are the same due to
symmetry.
Represents a nozzle on any type of head. For a hillside (off-center) nozzle, you should
apply stiffness in the proper direction.
Specifies the circumferential stiffness at the nozzle and across the pipe cross-section, as
calculated using another method.
Mo - Out-of-Plane Bending (circumferential

stiffness)

Mo - Out-of-Plane Bending (circumferential

stiffness)
For a nozzle in the center of the head, in-plane

and out-of-plane stiffness are the same due to
symmetry.
Represents a nozzle on any type of head.
For a hillside (off-center) nozzle, you should
apply stiffness in the proper direction.
Specifies the torsional stiffness on the nozzle, as calculated using another method.


Represents a nozzle on any type of head.


nozzle.
Specifies the wall thickness of the nozzle.

CAESAR II fills this field automatically using the corresponding pipe wall thickness. You can
override this value because it does not have to be equal to the wall thickness of the pipe
element used to model the nozzle.




Defines displacement data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking Displacements on the
Classic Piping Input dialog box.
The Displacements tab controls imposed displacements for up to two nodes for each element.
Type a value to specify the displacement allowed in a direction. Specify 0.0 to fully restrain the
node in a direction. Specify no value to allow free movement of the node in a direction.
Free
Indicates that the direction is undefined and free for all nine possible vectors. Free is the
default value for all degrees of freedoms at each node before you define any values.
After you define a value for a direction on one vector, Free changes to Fixed for
the same direction on the remaining vectors.
Fixed
If a displacement value is entered for any direction on a vector, indicates an undefined and
fixed displacement for the remaining vectors.
Fix DOFs
When you define a value for any direction, sets the remaining Free fields of the vector to the
fixed value of 0.00.
Specifying no value for directions for all nine vectors models the node as free to move in all
directions.
Specifying 0.00 for all directions is the same as defining an ANC (on page 168) anchor
restraint.

1. Define directions on one vector. 2. Click Fix DOFs.
For information on controlling the display of displacements, see Displacements (on

page 371).
Specifies the node number where the displacement is defined. Do not place a restraint at this
node.

Specifies displacements for up to nine vectors, each corresponding to an operating temperature.

For each vector, you can define the six degrees of freedom in the global X, Y and Z directions.
Type a value to specify the displacement allowed in a direction. Specify 0.0 to fully restrain the
node in a direction. Specify no value to allow free movement of the node in a direction.
Free
Indicates that the direction is undefined and free for all nine possible vectors. Free is the
default value for all degrees of freedoms at each node before you define any values.
After you define a value for a direction on one vector, Free changes to Fixed for
the same direction on the remaining vectors.
Fixed
If a displacement value is entered for any direction on a vector, indicates an undefined and
fixed displacement for the remaining vectors.
Fix DOFs
When you define a value for any direction, sets the remaining Free fields of the vector to the
fixed value of 0.00.
If an imposed displacement is specified for a specific degree-of-freedom, then that

degree-of-freedom is considered restrained for all load cases whether or not they contain
that displacement set.
You can import displacements into the CAESAR II model from a file. For more information,
see Import/Export Displacements from File (on page 407).
Indicates that you are supplying flange data to evaluate an in-line flange. Select or clear this
option by double-clicking the Flange check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
You can read the values for the Flange Class/Grade and Gasket Diameter, G boxes from a file
if you select ASME - 2003 from the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. The G values are
located in the ASME-2003.G text file in the system folder under the application data folder.
Flange evaluation is based on a specific load case temperature. To evaluate the flanges in a
model, specify the operating temperature at which the software evaluates the flanges in the
Flange Analysis Temperature box on the Load Cases tab of the Static Analysis - Load
Case Editor.
Flange evaluation can be performed for individual load cases and for ABS and MAX load
combination cases. For more information, see Combination Method (on page 595).

Specifies whether the flange is on the From end, the To end, or both ends of the element.
Specifies whether to evaluate the flanges using the Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method or
the ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3 method.
Peq
Evaluate the flanges using the Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method.
Peq = 16M/( )G3 + 4F/( )G2 + PD Pressure Rating
Where:
Peq = equivalent pressure (for checking against flange rating)
M = bending moment on flange
G = diameter of effective gasket reaction
F = axial force on flange
PD = design pressure
NC-3658.3
Evaluate the flanges using the ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3 method.
S = 36,000 * Mfs / (CAb * 3125) Min(Sy, 36000) non-occasional load case
S = 36,000 * Mfd / (CAb * 3125) 2.0 * Min(Sy, 36000) occasional load case
Where (note that the constants 36,000 and 3125 should be 248.22 and 21.6 in standard SI
units):
S = flange stress
Mfs = bending or torsional moment (whichever is greater) acting on the flange,
developed during a non-occasional load case
Mfd = bending or torsional moment (whichever is greater) acting on the flange,
developed during an occasional load case
Sy = yield strength of flange material at design temperature; (where Sy, given in psi,
shall not be taken as greater than 36,000 psi)
C = bolt circle diameter
Ab = total cross-sectional area of bolts
PD = design pressure

Displays the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. Click this button to read
Temperature-Pressure Rating data from a file (ASME and DIN flanges are shipped with
CAESAR II).
As an alternative to reading from a file, you can type the data directly into the table.
You can create your own data files by following the format described in the CAESAR II
documentation.
Values for both Flange Class/Grade and Gasket Diameter, G can be read from a file if you
select ASME 2003 from the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. The G values are in the
text file ASME-2003.G located in the system folder of your application data directory.
Displays the flange class and material grade. Typically, flanges are identified by pressure class
and material grade, but you can type anything in this box. If the flange Temperature-Pressure
Rating data is read in from a file, then CAESAR II automatically builds a flange name made up
of the File Name, the Pressure Class, and the Material Class.
Displays the gasket diameter. Values for Gasket Diameter, G can be read from a file if you
select ASME 2003 from the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. The G values are in the
text file ASME-2003.G located in the system folder of your application data directory. This box
does double duty depending on which analysis technique is active.
Peq Method
Specify the diameter at the location of the gasket load reaction. From ASME Section VIII,
Division 1, Appendix 2, (except as noted in sketch (1) of Fig 2-4), G is defined as (see Table
2-5.2):
when b0 is less than or equal to 1/4, G equals the mean diameter of the gasket contact
face
when b0 is greater than 1/4, G equals the outside diameter of the gasket contact face,
less 2b.
When using the Peq method with the Stoomwezen Piping Code, use the bolt
circle diameter instead of the gasket load reaction diameter (see chapter D0701 of the Code
RToD). The results of this Peq Method are considered by Stoomwezen to be conservative.
NC-3658 Method
Specify the bolt circle diameter. This value is the diameter of the circle that passes through
the bolt centers.
Flange evaluation is based on a specific load case temperature. To evaluate the
flanges in a model, specify the operating temperature at which the software evaluates the
flanges in the Flange Analysis Temperature box on the Load Cases tab of the Static
Analysis - Load Case Editor.

Specifies temperature and pressure values. Use this table to define the flange
Temperature-Pressure rating as a function of temperature for a particular material grade. You
can type up to 24 temperature-pressure pairs. These values must be typed in ascending
temperature order.
Specifies the total cross-sectional area of the bolts at the root of thread or the section of least
diameter under stress.
Specifies the flange yield stress at the cold (ambient) temperature and at each of the operating
temperatures, for use in calculating the flange allowable stress.
Indicates that you are supplying equipment data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
the Nozzle Lmt Check check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Equipment nozzle evaluation is one of the most important tasks in analyzing a piping system.
The various nozzle loads, when subjected to the operating criteria of the piping system, must be
less than their associated allowable loads. Verification of the nozzle loads is a time-consuming
task, which cannot be performed until the pipe stress requirements are met.
CAESAR II enables you to define overall nozzle limits. This permits CAESAR II to perform a first
pass screening. Actual detailed nozzle evaluation can then be focused on those nozzles that fail
this initial screening.

To illustrate this procedure, consider the limits defined for a nozzle displayed below:
The data above specifies the nozzle limits and how the resulting loads (from the analysis) are
compared to the limits. After the analysis has been performed and the results are available, you
can select the specific load case the nozzle must be evaluated against as well as the Nozzle
Check report. For more information on the Nozzle Check report see the Equipment Report.
Nozzle Limit Check is a first pass at qualifying the equipment nozzles. This is a
simple check based on the limits defined on this dialog box. This screening is not a substitute for
the more rigorous checks of the actual equipment standards.
Specifies the node number representing the equipment nozzle to be checked. The node should
have a restraint or a displacement in the CAESAR II model, because this node represents an
equipment nozzle.

Specifies the method used to compare the actual nozzle loads to the defined limits. Available
choices are:
Absolute
Each load is compared directly to the corresponding limit. That is, FX to FX_allowable, FY to
FY_allowable, and so on.
|Fa| |Fal|
|Fb| Fbl|
|Fc| |Fcl|
|Ma| |Mal|
|Mb| |Mbl|
|Mc| |Mcl|
SRSS
The square root sum of the squares (SRSS) of each load divided by the corresponding
allowable is compared to 1.0.
Forces
and
Moments
Unity Check
The sum of the three forces and three moments, each divided by their respective allowables
is compared to 1.0.
and

Specifies the three components or direction cosines of the reference vector. The reference
vector is used with the current element orientation to define the local coordinate system ABC for
this equipment check. See Axis B, in the Forces - Moments (on page 212) fields. The vector
must be perpendicular to the current pipe element. This vector need not be unity.
Examples:
( 0, 1, 0 ) - the reference vector is in the global "Y" direction
( 1, 0, 0 ) - the reference vector is in the global "X" direction
( 0.7071, 0, 0.7071 ) - the reference vector is skewed 45 degrees in the global X-Z plane.
For the Equipment Limits Check, the angle between the pipe element and the
equipment reference vector should be 90. If you are trying to model an API-610 end nozzle on a
horizontal pump, set the reference vector to the CAESAR II global vertical axis.
Displays the Open dialog box. Select an equipment file (some files are shipped with CAESAR II)
from which to read force and moment data. If the file contains multiple nozzle types, select a
nozzle type in the Select a Nozzle Type dialog box to complete the data import into the Forces
- Moments fields. Alternatively, you can enter the data directly into the fields.
Specifies the three components of the force and the three components of the moment for the
load limits. The load limits are based on the local coordinate system ABC, where: axis A is
defined by the current element (From to To is positive), axis B is defined by the reference
vector, and axis C is the cross product of A and B (the right-hand rule). For more information on
the use of these limits (Fal, Fbl, Fcl, Mal, Mbl, Mcl), see Comparison Method (on page 211).
A - Pipe/nozzle axis
B - Major equipment axis (the longitudinal direction of a vessel, or the pump shaft direction.)
C - Other perpendicular direction.
Loading Conditions
Indicates that you are defining loads acting on the pipe. Select or clear these options by
double-clicking the applicable check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
These loads may be individual forces or moments acting at discrete points, distributed uniform
loads (which can be specified on force per unit length, or gravitational body forces), or wind
loadings (wind loadings are entered by specifying a wind shape factor the loads themselves
are specified when building the load cases. The uniform load and the wind shape factor check
boxes are unchecked on subsequent input screens. This does not mean that the loads were

removed from these elements; instead, this implies that the loads do not change on subsequent
screens.
You can specify uniform loads in g-values by setting a parameter in the Special
Execution Options. For more information, see Configuration Editor (on page 55).
Indicates that you are supplying force and moment data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking the Forces/Moments check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary database tab controls imposed forces or moments for up to two nodes per
element. You can use up to nine force vectors.
For information on controlling the display of forces and moments, see Forces (on
page 375).
Specifies the node number where the forces and moments act.
Specifies the three components of the force and the three components of the moment for a
vector. You can type as many as nine vectors. The components of the force and the moment
are along the global X, Y, and Z directions.

Indicates that you are supplying uniform load data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
the Uniform Loads check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary database tab controls up to three uniform load vectors. These uniform loads are
applied to the entire current element, as well as all subsequent elements in the model, until
explicitly changed or zeroed out.
The uniform load data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until you
change it.
Assuming uniform loading in F/L, a snow load of 8.0 pounds per foot (assuming units of pounds
per inch in a Y-up coordinate system) could be specified as follows:
Vector 1 Vector 2 Vector 3
Y -8/12
or may be specified:
Vector 1 Vector 2 Vector 3
Y -.6667
the piping system in the horizontal X direction. Your entries of X = 0.0, Y = -1.0, Z = 0.0
represent a 1.0g load in the minus Y direction, and is exactly equal to the pipe weight load in
Y-up coordinate system.

You can activ check box

using the Environment > Special Execution Parameters command on the Classic Piping
Input dialog box.
Specifies the three components of the uniform load for a vector. You can type as many as three
vectors. The components of the uniform load are along the global X, Y, and Z directions. The
uniform load is either in terms of force per unit length or in terms of a magnifier of gravitational
loading (G).
Indicates the unit of the uniform load.
Indicates that you are supplying environmental load data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking the Wind/Wave check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary panel tab indicates whether this portion of the pipe is exposed to wind or wave
loading. The pipe cannot be exposed to both.
Selecting Wind exposes the pipe to wind loading; selecting Wave exposes the pipe to wave,
current, and buoyancy loadings; selecting Off turns off both types of loading.
This dialog box tab is also used to specify the Wind Shape Factor when Wind is specified. The
dialog box tab is used to specify various wave coefficients when Wave is specified. The
software automatically computes the wave coefficients if you leave these boxes blank.
Entries on this auxiliary panel tab apply to all subsequent piping, until changed on a later
element.
Specific wind and wave load cases are built using the Static Load Case Editor.
Indicates that you are supplying wind load data. Wind load data is distributive and applies to the
current and all following elements until you change it.

Specifies the coefficient as defined in ASCE 7 in Figure 6-21 for chimneys, tanks, and similar
structure. A value of 0.5 to 0.65 is typically used for cylindrical sections. Activating the wind
option activates the Wind Load Input tab, which is accessed from the Load Case Editor during
static analysis.
Refer to the respective wind code standard for the applicable wind shape factor,
specific to that code.
Indicates that you are supplying wave load data.
Wave load data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until you change
it.

Specifies the drag coefficient as recommended by API RP2A. Typical values range from 0.6 to
1.20. Type 0.0 to calculate the drag coefficient based on particle velocities.
Specifies the added mass coefficient. This coefficient accounts for the added mass of fluid
entrained into the pipe. Typical values range from 0.5 to 1.0. Type 0.0 to calculate the added
mass coefficient based on particle velocities.
Specifies the lift coefficient. This coefficient accounts for wave lift which is the force
perpendicular to both the element axis and the particle velocity vector. Type a value of 0.0 to
calculate the added lift coefficient based on particle velocities.
Specifies the thickness of any marine growth adhering to the external pipe wall. The software
increases the pipe diameter experiencing wave loading by twice this value.
Specifies the density used if you are including the weight of the marine growth in the pipe
weight. If you leave this box blank, the software ignores the weight of the marine growth.
Indicates that you do not want wind or wave loads on the current element and all following
elements until you change it.
Materials
Shortcut keys:
F6 - Jumps to Materials
ALT+5 - Opens Edit Materials dialog box
density, and (in most cases) expansion coefficient. The software provides a database containing
the parameters for many common piping materials. This information is retrieved by picking a
material from the list, by typing the material number, or by typing the entire material name and
then picking it from the match list.
The coefficient of expansion does not appear on the dialog box, but you can review it during
error checking.
These material properties carry forward from one element to the next during the design session
so you only need to type values for those elements in which a change occurs.

Double-click >> to display the Edit Materials dialog box.
Displays the material name. Materials are specified either by name or number. All available
material names and their CAESAR II material numbers are displayed in the list. Because this list
is quite long, typing a partial material name (such as A106) allows you to select from matching
materials.
Materials 1-17 define generic materials without code allowable stresses.
Material 18 defines the cold spring element for cut short.
Material 19 defines the cold spring element for cut long.
Material 20 defines Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe.
Material 21 represents user-defined material.
Materials 101 and greater define materials specific to the active piping code associated with
a pipe element.
When you select a material from the database, the physical properties as well as the allowable
stresses are obtained and placed in the dialog box.
If you change the temperature or piping code later, these allowable stress values are
automatically updated.
For user-defined material, type the corresponding properties.

Indicates that you are supplying allowable stress data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking Allowable Stress on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. When selected, the
Allowable Stresses tab displays in the auxiliary panel tab. Allowable stresses are automatically
updated for material, temperature and code if available in the material database.
Properties on the Allowable Stresses tab change with the selected piping code.
Allowable stress data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements
until you change it.
Click Fatigue Curves (on page 239) to specify material fatigue curve data.

Specifies the piping code. CAESAR II uses B31.3 by default. You can change this default setting
in the configuration. The following table lists the piping codes. You can find their current
publication dates in the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide.
B31.1 HPGSL
B31.3 JPI
B31.3, Chapter IX Swedish Power Piping Code (Method 1)
B31.4 Swedish Power Piping Code (Method 2)
B31.4, Chapter IX B31.1 - 1967
B31.4, Chapter XI Stoomwezen
B31.5 RCC-M C
B31.8 RCC-M D
B31.8, Chapter VIII CODETI
B31.9 GPTC/Z380
Norwegian TBK-6 FDBR
ASME Sect III NC (Class 2) BS 7159
ASME Sect III ND (Class 3) UKOOA
Navy 505 IGE/TD/12
CAN/CSA Z662 DNV
CAN/CSA Z662, Chapter 11 ISO 14692
BS 806 PD 8010-1
EN-13480 PD 8010-2
The following topics discuss each of the input data cells. For more information about code
compliance considerations, see Technical Discussions (on page 969).
Specifies the cold stress value. Typically, this is the cold allowable stress for the specific
material taken directly from the governing piping code. CAESAR II fills this box automatically
after you select the material and piping code. The value of SC is usually divided by the
longitudinal weld efficiency (Eff) before being used. See the notes that follow for the specific
piping code.
B31.1
Allowable stress tables in Appendix A include the longitudinal weld joint efficiencies where
applicable. Do not use these efficiencies for flexibility stress calculations. If the joint
efficiency (Eff) is given on this dialog box, then CAESAR II divides the SC by the joint
efficiency before using it in the allowable stress equations.
B31.3, B31.3 Chapter IX

Values from tables in Appendix A do not include the joint efficiency. The Eff value should be
zero, blank, or one. The 1980 version of B31.3 included the longitudinal weld joint
efficiencies as part of the tables in Appendix A. If you are using this version of the code,
then you should type a value for Eff in the appropriate box on this dialog box.
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.4 Chapter XI
Not used. The only stress value in B31.4 is the yield stress taken from Table 1 in the
appendix. For more information, see Sy (on page 230).
B31.5
Values from tables in Appendix A do not include the joint efficiency. The value of Eff should
be zero, blank, or one.
B31.8
Su, the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength.
B31.8 Chapter VIII
Not used. The only stress value in B31.8 is the yield stress taken from Appendix D. For
more information, see Sy (on page 230).
B31.9
SC is taken directly from I-1. If you define a value for Eff, the software only uses it in the
minimum wall thickness check.
ASME NC and ND
SC is taken directly from Appendix I. If you define a value for Eff, the software ignores it.
Navy 505
There is no mention of joint efficiency in the 505 specification; however, it is implied in
Footnote 1 of Table TIIA. If a joint efficiency is given, then CAESAR II divides SC by the joint
efficiency before using it in the allowable stress equations. Eff should be zero, blank, or one.
CAN Z662
Not used. The only stress value in Z184 is the yield stress specified in the standards or
specification under which the pipe was purchased. For more information, see Sy (on page
230).
BS 806
0.2% of the proof stress at room temperature from Appendix E. Eff is not used in BS 806. If
you define a value for Eff, the software ignores it.
Swedish Method 1
Not used. Method 1 only uses the yield or creep rupture stress at temperature (SHn and Fn
respectively on this dialog box). Eff is used, but is the circumferential weld joint efficiency
and has a different meaning.
Swedish Method 2
SC is the allowable stress at room temperature from Appendix 2. Eff is not used. If you
define a value for Eff, the software ignores it.
B31.1 (1967)
SC is the allowable stress at room temperature from the tables in Appendix A. These tables

include the longitudinal weld joint efficiencies where applicable. Do not use these
efficiencies for flexibility stress calculations. If you define a value for Eff, then CAESAR II
divides the SC by the joint efficiency before using it in the allowable stress equations.
Stoomwezen (1989)
SC is the yield stress at room temperature. This value is referred to as Re in the code.
RCC-M C, D
SC is taken from the Appendix. Eff is not used. If you define a value for Eff, the software
ignores it.
CODETI
This is famb from the code. Eff is not used. If you define a value for Eff, the software
ignores it.
Norwegian
This is f1 from the code. Eff is not used for longitudinal joint efficiency.
BS 7159
Not used. Design stress is typed in the SH boxes.
UKOO
Not used. Design stress (in the hoop direction) is typed in the SH boxes.
IGE/TD/1
Not used.
DN
Not used.
EN-13480
SC is the basic allowable stress at minimum metal temperature as defined in Section 12.1.3.
GPTC/Z380
Not used.
PD 8010-1
Not used.
PD 8010-2
Not used.
ISO 14692
SC is used in a different way. See reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL
Not used.
JPI
Not used.

Specifies the hot stresses. Typically, these are the hot allowable stress for the specific material
taken directly from the governing piping code. CAESAR II fills the boxes automatically after you
select the material and piping code. There are nine boxes corresponding to the nine operating
temperatures. You must type a value for each defined temperature case. The value of SH is
usually divided by the longitudinal weld efficiency (Eff) before being used. See the
recommendations that follow for the specific piping code.
B31.1
Allowable stress from Appendix A. For more information, see SC (on page 220).
Not used.
B31.5
B31.8
Temperature derating factor, T, according to Table 841.116A.
B31.8, Chapter VIII
Temperature derating factor, T (according to Table 841.116A).
B31.9
Allowable stress from Table I-1. For more information, see SC (on page 220).
ASME NC and ND
Allowable stress from Appendix I.
Navy 505
Allowable stress from Table XIIA. For more information, see SC (on page 220).
CAN Z662
Not used.
BS 806
0.2% of the proof stress at design temperature Appendix E. Eff is not used.
Swedish Method 1
Yield stress at temperature from Appendix 1.
Swedish Method 2
Allowable stress at temperature from Appendix 2.
B31.1 (1967)
Stoomwezen

Yield stress at design temperature. This value is referred to as Re (vm) in the code.
RCC-M C, D
Taken from the Appendix.
CODETI
f from the code.
Norwegian
f2 from the code.
FDBR
Hot allowable defined in Section 3.2.
BS 7159
Design stress sd d d *
Elamx). Specify design stress in the circumferential (hoop) direction by typing the ratio of the
circumferential design stress to the axial design stress in the Eff box. Because design strain
should be the same for both directions, the value in the Eff box is also the ratio of
Elamf(hoop) to Elamx (longitudinal).
UKOOA
Allowable design stress in the hoop direction defined in the code as f1 * LTHS. The three
hot allowable stress boxes correspond to the three possible temperature cases.
DNV
Yield stress is used here instead of hot allowable stress.
IGE/TD/12
Yield stress is used here instead of a hot allowable stress.
EN-13480
Allowable stress at maximum metal temperature.
GPTC/Z380
Temperature reduction factor T according to Par. 192.115.
PD-8010 (Part 1 & Part 2)
Not used.
ISO 14692
SH is used in a different way. See the reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL
Not used.
JPI
Not used.

Specifies the yield point or 0.2% endurance strength at the design temperature. This option only
displays when you select JPL or HPGSL in the Codes list.
This is Syt, the specified minimum yield or stated proof stress of the pipe material at maximum
temperature.
If you do not type a value, the software takes the value from the Material Database if
that value is available and applicable.
Specifies the ultimate tensile strength at the design temperature.

If you do not type a value, the software takes the value from the Material
Database if that value is available and applicable.
Specifies the stress range reduction factor for most piping codes.
B31.1
Stress range reduction factor is obtained from equation 1c. Consult the applicable piping
code for methods of combining cycle life data where several thermal states exist and where
the number of thermal cycles is high. The software assumes a value of one if you do not
type a value.
B31.3
Stress range reduction factor is obtained from equation 1c corresponding to Fig 302.3.5. If
certain criteria are met, then the stress range reduction factor is allowed to exceed 1.0. The
number of cycles can be specified in this box for B31.3. This allows CAESAR II to compute
the cyclic reduction factor according to equation 1c.
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter XI
Stress range reduction factor is obtained from the equation given in Section 403.3.2. The
number of cycles can also be specified in this box for B31.4 which allows CAESAR II to
compute the cyclic reduction factor according to the equation. The fatigue factor cannot
exceed 1.2.
B31.4 Chapter IX
Not used.
B31.8
Stress range reduction factor is obtained from the equation given in Section 833.8(b). The
number of cycles can be specified in this box for B31.8 which allows CAESAR II to compute
the cyclic reduction factor according to this equation.
B31.8 CHAPTER VIII
Not used.
B31.9
References B31.1 for detailed stress analysis. For more information, see Paragraph

919.4.1.b.
CODETI
Called U in the code.
NORWEGIAN
Called fr in the code. This value can be as high as 2.34.
DNV
Material ultimate tensile strength at temperature.
CAN Z662
F1 = L - The location factor from Table 4.2
F2 - T - The temperature derating factor from Table 4.4
For F1 = L:
Application CLASS 1 CLASS 2 CLASS 3 CLASS 4
Gas (non-sour)
General & Cased crossings 1.000 0.900 0.700 0.550
Roads 0.750 0.625 0.625 0.500
Railways 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.500
Stations 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.500
Other 0.750 0.750 0.625 0.500
Gas (sour service)
Roads 0.750 0.625 0.625 0.500
Railways 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.500
Stations 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.500
Other 0.750 0.750 0.625 0.500
HVP
Roads 0.800 0.800 0.800 0.800
Railways 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625

Stations 0.800 0.800 0.800 0.800
Other 0.800 0.800 0.800 0.800
LVP
Uncased railway crossings 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625
All others 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
Class 1 - Location areas containing ten or fewer dwelling units intended for human
occupancy
Class 2 - Location areas containing 11 to 46 dwelling units intended for human occupancy
OR
Buildings with more than 20 persons
Outside areas with more than 20 persons
Industrial installations
Class 3 - Location areas with more than 46 dwelling units intended for human occupancy
OR institutions where rapid evacuation may be difficult
Class 4 - Location areas where buildings intended for human occupancy have 4 or more
stories.
For F2 = T:
Temperature Derating Factor T
up to 120 (C) 1.00
150 0.97
180 0.93
200 0.91
230 0.87
F3 through F9 are not used.

CAN Z662 Chapter 11
F1 - Not used.
F2 = T - Temperature derating factor obtained from Table 4.4
F3 = - FA design factor for Condition A from Table 11.1, column A
F4 = - FB design factor for Condition B from Table 11.1, column B
F5 through F9 are not used.
BS 806
Mean stress to failure in design life at design temperature. F1, F2, ... F9. This value

corresponds to the nine possible thermal states.

FDBR
Identical to B31.1, unless you type the expansion coefficients directly instead of
temperatures. In that case, the software cannot determine Ehot. In this case, type a value of
1.0 in the FAC box and use these boxes to specify the product of f * Ehot / Ecold for each
temperature case.
SWEDISH METHOD 1
Creep rupture stress at temperature. F1, F2 ... F9. This value corresponds to the nine
possible thermal states.
STOOMWEZEN
Creep related material properties as follows:
F1 = Rrg - Average creep stress to produce 1% permanent set after 100,000 hours at
temperature (vm).
F2 = Rmg - Average creep tensile stress to produce rupture after 100,000 hours at
temperature (vm).
F3 = Rmmin - Minimum creep tensile stress to produce rupture after 100,000 hours at
temperature (vm).
BS 7159
Fatigue factor Kn. This value is used inversely compared to other codes so that its value is
greater than 1.0. Kn is calculated as follows:
Kn = 1 + 0.25(As/sn) (log10(n) - 3)
Where:
As = stress range during fatigue cycle
n = Maximum stress during fatigue cycle
n = number of stress cycles during design life
UKOOA
Ratio r from the material UKOOA idealized allowable stress envelope. This ratio is defined
as sa(0:1)/sa(2:1) as shown on the figure below. One value should be given for each of the
operating temperature cases.
IGE/TD/12
UTS value.
EN-13480
Stress range reduction factor taken from Table 12.1.3-1 (which matches the B31.1 table
above), or computed from equation 12.1.3-4. You can specify the number of cycles in this
box for EN-13480. This allows CAESAR II to compute the cyclic reduction factor according
to equation 12.1.3-4.
GPTC/Z380
Not used.
PD-8010 (Part 1 & Part 2)
Not used.

ISO 14692
F is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL
Stress range reduction factor at design temperature.
JPI
Stress range reduction factor at design temperature.
Specifies the longitudinal weld joint efficiency. The field changes according to the current piping
code.
B31.1, B31.1-1967, B31.5
Allowable stress tables include longitudinal weld joint efficiencies where applicable. If Eff is
specified, then values for SC and SH are divided by Eff before they are used in the flexibility
calculations. Eff is ignored in the minimum wall calculation.
B31.3, B31.4, B31.4 Chapter XI, B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII, B31.9, NAVY 505, Z662 (J), BS
806 (e), CODETI (z), FDBR (vl), GPTC/Z380
Allowable stress or yield stress tables do not include longitudinal weld joint efficiencies. Eff
is ignored for the flexibility calculations. SH is multiplied by Eff when calculating the
minimum wall thickness.
B31.4 Chapter IX, ASME NC, ASME ND, RCCM-C, RCCM-D
Ignored for both flexibility and minimum wall thickness calculations. The box is disabled for
these codes.
Swedish Method 1, Swedish Method 2, Norwegian TBK 5-6
Circumferential joint factor z and is used in the calculation of the code stresses rather than
in the calculation of the allowables. This applies to both flexibility or minimum wall thickness.
Stoomwezen
Cyclic reduction factor referred to as Cf in the code. CAESAR II does not consider weld joint
efficiency for this code.
BS 7159
Ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of elasticity Eh/Ea. The software uses a
default value of 1.0, as though the material is isotropic if you leave this box blank.
UKOOA
Replace this box with f2. This is the system design factor. The value is typically 0.67.
IGE/TD/12
Replace this box with Dfac. This is the system design factor (f) as described in Table 2 of
the IFE/TD/12 code. The value must be 0.3, 0.5, and 0.67.
DNV
Replaces this box with usage factor Ns (pressure yielding) from Tables C1 or C2. The value
must be between 0.77 and 0.96.

EN-13480
Ignored for the flexibility calculations. SH is multiplied by Eff when calculating the minimum
wall thickness.
PD-8010 Part 1
Weld joint factor used in determining the allowable hoop stress. See Section 6.4.3.1 for
details.
PD-8010 Part 2
Not used.
ISO 14692
Eff is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL
Longitudinal weld joint efficiency.
JPI
Longitudinal weld joint efficiency.
Specifies the yield stress. CAESAR II fills the box automatically after you select the material and
piping code. The field changes according to the current piping code, and is generally used for
the transmission and non-US piping codes.
B31.1
Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
Specified minimum yield stress. Used for the allowable stress determination.
B31.5
Used to satisfy the requirements of Paragraph 523.2.2.f.4. This paragraph addresses
ferrous materials in piping systems between -20F and -150F. The value typed here should
be the quantity (40% of the allowable) as detailed in the Code. When Sy is defined, the OPE
case is considered a stress case. This value is the allowable reported in the output report.
The computed operating stress includes all longitudinal components and ignore torsion.
B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII
Specified minimum yield stress.
B31.9
ASME Sect III Class 2 and 3
Basic material yield strength at design temperature for use in Eqn. 9 for consideration of
Level A and B service limits. Level C and Level D service limits must be satisfied in separate

runs by adjusting the value for the occasional factor in the CAESAR II configuration file. If
the occasional factor is set to 1.2, the allowable stress is the minimum of 1.2 x 1.5 S H or 1.5
SY. If the factor is 1.5, the allowable is the minimum of 1.5 x 1.5 SH or 1.8 SY. If the factor is
2.0, the allowable is the minimum of 2.0 x 1.5 SH or 2.0 SY. To satisfy the code, replace SH
with SM for the latter two.
Navy 505
Not used.
CAN Z662
Minimum yield strength taken from the standards or specifications under which the pipe was
purchased or according to clause 4.3.3.
BS 806
Sustained stress limit. The lower of 0.8 X 0.2% Proof stress value or the creep rupture
design stress value defined in Appendix A under cold, or any other, operating condition. See
17.2(c)
Swedish Method 1
Not used. Type the yield stress at temperature in the respective SHn boxes for the up to
nine possible thermal states.
Swedish Method 2
Ultimate tensile strength at room temperature.
B31.1 (1967)
Not used.
Stoomwezen (1989)
Tensile strength at room temperature. This value is referred to as Rm in the code.
RCC-M C, D - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
CODETI
Norwegian
Allowable stress at 7000 load cycles, RS, from Code Table 10.2. If you do not type a value,
then this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
FDBR
BS 7159
Not used.
UKOOA
Not used.
IGE/TD/12 - Minimum yield stress (SMYS).
DnV
Not used. This value is calculated as Sy = min(Sy1, ..., Sy9).

EN-13480
GPTC/Z380
Minimum yield stress.
PD-8010 Part 1
PD-8010 Part 2
ISO-14692
Sy is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL
Not used.
JPI
Not used.
Specifies the specified minimum yield or stated proof stress of the pipe material at room
temperature. This is also referred to as SMYS or SY.
Specifies the minimum yield point or 0.2% endurance strength at room temperature.
Material shakedown factor described in Table 4 of the IGE/TD/12 code. Typical values are:
Carbon Steel: 1.8
Austenitic Steel: 2.0
Specifies the ultimate tensile strength of the pipe material corresponding to the specified
ambient temperature.

Specifies the minimum tensile strength at room temperature.
Specifies the system design factor (f) as described in Table 2 of the IGE/TD/12 code. Its value
must be 0.3, 0.5, and 0.67.
Specifies the multiplication factor. The field changes according to the current piping code, and is
generally used for the transmission and non-US piping codes.
B31.1
Not used.
B31.3
Not used
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter XI
Not used.
B31.4 Chapter IX
Used only when you select Custom for Design Factor (on page 239). Define a Hoop
Stress Factor value in the range of 0.5 and 0.72.
B31.5
Not used.
B31.8
Not used.
B31.8 Chapter VIII
F1, Hoop stress design factor, according to Table A842.22 of B31.8. Appropriate values are
0.72 for pipelines or 0.50 for platform piping and risers.
B31.9
Not used.
ASME Sect III, Class 2 and 3
Not used.
B31.1 (1967)
Not used.
Navy 505
Not used

CAN Z662
Indicates whether the pipe is restrained, such as long or buried, or unrestrained.
The equation for pipe under complete axial restraint is:
Stress = (Fac) x abs[ E (T2-T1) + (1- ) Shoop ] + (SE + SL)(1-Fac)
Where:
E = elastic modulus
= thermal expansion coefficient per degree
T2 = operating temperature
T1 = ambient temperature
= Poisson's ratio
Shoop = hoop stress in the pipe.
SE = expansion stress due to bending
SL = sustained stress due to pressure.
Fac should be 1.0, 0.0, or 0.001. This value should be one for pipe under complete axial
restraint. This value should be one when the pipe is fully restrained, such as buried for a
long distance. The default value for Fac is 0.0. When Fac is 0.001, this indicates to
CAESAR II that the pipe is buried but that the soil supports have been modeled. This
causes the hoop stress component, rather than the longitudinal stress, to be added to the
operating stresses if the axial stress is compressive.
BS806
Not used.
Swedish Power Code, Method 1
Sigma(tn) multiplier. This value is usually 1.5. This value should be 1.35 for prestressed
(cold sprung) piping. The default value is 1.5.
Swedish Power Code, Method 2
Not used.
Stoomwezen
Constant whose value is either 0.44 or 0.5. For more information, see Stoomwezen Section
5.2.
RCC-M C, D
Not used.
CODETI
Not used.
Norwegian
Material ultimate tensile strength at room temperature, RM. If this value is not specified, this
factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
FDBR
Overrides the ratio of Ehot/Ecold which is automatically determined by CAESAR II.
The modulus ratio is used to compute the expansion case allowable stress based on the
material and temperature. Normally, you can leave this box blank. However, if necessary,
you can type a value greater than zero and less than one to override the ratio calculated by

the software.
To use FBDR, type the hot modulus in the Elastic Modulus box of the dialog box. CAESAR
II looks up the cold modulus and computes this necessary ratio. Using the hot modulus in
the flexibility analysis is a deviation of FBDR from every other piping code in CAESAR II.
If you type expansion coefficients directly instead of temperatures, then the software cannot
determine Ecold. In this case, type a value of 1.0 in this cell and use the cyclic reduction
factor boxes to specify the product of (f * Ehot /Ecold) for each temperature case.
BS 7159
Mean temperature change multiplier k as defined in Section 7.2.1 of the code. This should
be 0.85 for liquids, 0.8 for gases, and 1.0 for ambient temperature changes. If left blank, this
value defaults to 1.0.
UKOOA
Mean temperature change multiplier k as defined for the BS 7159. If left blank, this value
defaults to 1.0.
IGE/TD/12
Material shakedown factor Ksd described in Table 4 of the IGE/TD/12 code. Typical values
are 1.8 for carbon steel and 2.0 for austenitic steel.
HPGSL
Not used.
JPI
Not used.
DNV
Usage factor Nu (pressure bursting) from Tables C1or C2. Values must be between 0.64
and 0.84.
EN-13480
Not used.
GPTC/Z380
Construction design factor from Table 192.111.
PD-8010 Part 1
Same usage as CAN Z662.
PD-8010 Part 2
Not used.
ISO 14692
Fac is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.

Specifies the pressure variance. The field changes according to the current piping code.
ASME and RCC-M C, D
Variance in the pressure between operating and peak to be used as the component in
equation 9 above that found from B1 * P * Do / 2tn. Do not type the peak pressure for Pvar.
Type the difference between the operating pressure and the peak pressure.
Swedish Power Code, Methods 1 & 2
Beta for the Seff calculation. If not given, this value defaults to 10%. Type ten percent as
10.0. Values must be between 0.1 and 25.0. Values specified outside of this range are
automatically adjusted to the outer limit of the allowed range. The definition for beta, as
given in the Swedish piping code in section 5.6.2.1, is the "maximum allowable minus the
tolerance as a percentage of the nominal wall thickness".
Stoomwezen
Cm coefficient in the code whose value is usually 1.0.
Norwegian
Difference between design pressure P (in equation 10.7) and peak pressure Pmaks (in
equation 10.8).
The table that follows defines when each of these parameters is valid input for the piping
code (V) or not required (N).
DNV
Usage factor N for equivalent stress check from Table C4. Values must be between 0.77
and 1.00.
PD-8010 Part 1
Design factor as discussed in Section 6.4.1.2. Typical limits on this value are 0.3 and 0.72,
depending on categories and class locations. This design factor determines the allowable
hoop stress. This value has no units for PD-8010 Part 1.
PD-8010 Part 2
Design factor as discussed in Section 6.4.1 Table 2. Type the value of fd for the hoop stress
evaluation. This value should be either 0.6 (riser/land fall) or 0.72 (seabed/tie-in). CAESAR
II determines the appropriate fd values for the equivalent stress from Table 2. This value
has no units for PD-8010 Part 2.
This value is taken from the Material Database, if available and applicable,
unless you type a value.
ISO 14692
Pvar is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.

Indicates whether to allow a maximum cyclic reduction factor. The 2004 edition of B31.3 permits
the cyclic reduction factor (f) to exceed 1.0 under certain conditions. To allow "f" to exceed 1.0,
up to the limit of 1.2, click On. To prohibit "f" from exceeding 1.0, click Off.
This option is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until you change
it.
This option is not used for B31.3 Chapter IX.
Indicates whether the software reduces the Operating Range Allowable value by 15%. Appendix
P in the 2010 Edition of B31.3 requires a reduction of the Operating Range Allowable value by
15% for materials with ratio of Sy/St > 0.8. The software selects this check box by default for the
B31.3 code. When selected, CAESAR II performs this reduction, when applicable.
You must set the B31.3 Implement Appendix P (on page 108) configuration setting to True
for CAESAR II to display this check box on the Allowable Stresses tab of the Classic
Piping Input dialog box. You can find this configuration setting in the SIFs and Stresses >
B31.3 Code-Specific Settings section of the Configuration Editor.
This option is not used for B31.3 Chapter IX.
The B31.4 and B31.8 codes recognize restrained and unrestrained conditions.
Restrained and unrestrained options define the stress equations used but do not
affect the forces, moments, and displacements calculated for the pipe element. For example, if
you select Restrained Pipeline when the pipe element is not restrained, the software uses
restrained stress equations even though they do not represent the tur state of the pipe element.
We recommend that you use the CAESAR II Determines option, which allows the software to
make stress equation selections based on the actual operating conditions.
For B31.4, select an indicator to define the stress equations and allowable values used by the
software:
Restrained Pipeline
Specifies fully restrained pipe, which is locked in position. The pipe is fully restrained beyond
the virtual anchoring at bearing points (such as elbows and tees). Axial stress is defined
without the use of bending moment.
Unrestrained Pipeline
Specifies all piping that is not fully restrained. Unrestrained pipe is free to displace laterally
and to strain axially. Stress calculation is dominated by bending moment.
CAESAR II Determines
Specifies that the software selects the stress equations based on the calculated axial load in
the piping system. The software applies the fully restrained stress calculation when the axial

pipe load is within 2.5% of the limiting load, meaning the pipe is held in place by the restraint
of the soil. The software applies the unrestrained stress calculations when the axial load is
different from the limiting load by more than 2.5%.
The limiting load is the force needed to fully restrain the pipe's axial growth. The axial
growth is due to the thermal expansion and the pressure expansion calculated when a
Bourdon Pressure option is selected in the Configuration Editor or in Special Execution
Parameters.
For information on the code equations used, see B31.4 and B31.4 Chapter XI (on page
1066).
You typically use this option with the Underground Pipe Modeler or when
modeling soil/pipe interaction using restraints. For more information, see Underground Pipe
Modeler (on page 536).
Inland Riser/Platform
Specifies riser and platform piping on inland navigable waters and instructs the software to
select different sets of allowable values as defined in the Table 403.3.1-1.
For B31.4 Ch XI and B31.8, select one of the following indicators:
Restrained Pipeline
Specifies fully restrained pipe, which is locked in position. The pipe is fully restrained beyond
the virtual anchoring at bearing points (such as elbows and tees). Axial stress is defined
without the use of bending moment.
Specifies all piping that is not fully restrained. Unrestrained pipe is free to displace laterally
and to strain axially. Stress calculation is dominated by bending moment.
Specifies that the software selects the stress equations based on the calculated axial load in
the piping system. The software applies the fully restrained stress calculation when the axial
pipe load is within 2.5% of the limiting load, meaning the pipe is held in place by the restraint
of the soil. The software applies the unrestrained stress calculations when the axial load is
different from the limiting load by more than 2.5%.
The limiting load is the force needed to fully restrain the pipe's axial growth. The axial
growth is due to the thermal expansion and the pressure expansion calculated when a
Bourdon Pressure option is selected in the Configuration Editor or in Special Execution
Parameters.
For information on the code equations used, see B31.4 and B31.4 Chapter XI (on page
1066).
You typically use this option with the Underground Pipe Modeler or when
modeling soil/pipe interaction using restraints. For more information, see Underground Pipe
Modeler (on page 536).
Design Factor displays on the Allowables tab of List (on page 266).

Specifies the design factor and hoop stress value for B31.4 Ch IX, Table A402.3.5-1. Select one
of the following options:
Design Factor Hoop Stress

Factor (F1)
Offshore Pipeline 0.72
Offshore Riser/Platform 0.6
Custom Defines a custom

value in the Hoop
Stress Factor
box.
Design Factor displays on the Allowables tab of List (on page 266).
[Displays the Material Fatigue Data dialog box, where you specify cycle and stress values.
Use material fatigue curve data to evaluate fatigue load cases and cumulative use scenarios.
The software considers fatigue curves to be specified using a logarithmic interpolation.
IGE/TD/12 provides the opportunity to type up to five fatigue curves, representing fatigue
classes D, E, F, G, and W. Fatigue evaluations are explicitly specified by IGE/TD/12. CAESAR II
offers them as extensions to other codes.
Cycles / Stress
Defines cycles and stresses in pairs. You must type the values in ascending order by cycles.
Type stress values as the allowable stress range rather than allowable stress amplitude.
You can type up to eight cycle-stress pairs.
Read from File
Displays the Open dialog box where you can select a .fat file containing cycle and stress
data. The software provides some .fat files.
Cycle and stress values carry forward (in cycle/stress pairs) to succeeding elements until
you manually change a value. When you change a cycle or stress value, the software
retains the values of the cycle/stress pair even if the values later change in a preceding
element.
The software always replaces a blank field with 0.
Static fatigue cases are evaluated against the full range of the fatigue curve, while dynamic
fatigue cases are assumed to represent amplitudes, and are therefore evaluated against
half of the range of the fatigue curve.

Specifies the material composition of the pipe.

Aluminum
Aluminum alloy or alloy steel containing 9% nickel. For use at temperatures lower than room
temperature.
Austenite
Austenite stainless steel and high nickel contained allows. For use at temperatures higher
than room temperature.
Others
Any material other than aluminum or austenite.
Unspecified
This is the default option.
IGE/TD/12 Section A5.6 requires that the allowable fatigue stress (as specified in the fatigue
curves) be adjusted by the ratio of the material modulus-of-elasticity divided by 209 103 N/mm2.
This divisor can be adjusted if necessary by changing the entry in the Modulus Correction box.
Activates allowable stress data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the Allowable
Stress check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. When you select material 20 for FRP
(Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic) and piping code ISO 14692, the Allowable Stress tab in the
Piping Input auxiliary panel changes.
Specifies the long-term axial stress at 0:1 stress ratio. Typically, the axial stress (hoop stress is
0 at this point) is lower than the axial stress al(2:1) (hoop stress is double the axial stress at this
point). The ratio of these stresses, called bi-axial stress ratio, can range between 0.5 and 0.75
for plain pipe depending on the winding angle and specific pipe type.

Specifies the long-term axial stress at 1:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14962, hoop stress has
the same value as that for axial stresses at a 1:1 stress ratio, that is hl(1:1)=al(1:1). However,
CAESAR II allows you to type different values for al(1:1) and hl(1:1) for a generalized failure
profile. In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning message in the Error Checker.
If you leave both the al(1:1) and hl(1:1) boxes blank, CAESAR II assumes that a simplified
envelope is used for plain pipe.
Specifies the long-term hoop stress at 1:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14692, hoop stress has
the same value as that for axial stresses at a 1:1 stress ratio. That is, hl(1:1) = al(1:1). However,
CAESAR II allows a different value for al(1:1) and hl(1:1) for a generalized failure profile. In this
case, CAESAR II displays a warning message displays in the Error Checker.
If you specify al(1:1) and leave hl(1:1) blank, CAESAR II assumes that hl(1:1) is equal to al(1:1),
and displays a warning message in the Error Checker. For more information, see al(1:1) (on
page 241).
Specifies the long-term axial stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14962, hoop stress is
twice the axial stress at a 2:1 ratio, that is hl(2:1) = 2 * al(2:1). This is a natural condition when a
pressurized pipe is enclosed at both ends. However CAESAR II allows you to type different
values for hl(2:1) al(2:1). In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning message in the Error
Checker.
Specifies the long-term hoop stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14692, hoop stress is
twice the axial stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. That is, hl(2:1)= 2* al(2:1). However, CAESAR II allows
hl(2:1) to have a different value than twice of al(2:1). In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning
message in the Error Checker.
If you specify al(2:1) and leave hl(2:1) blank, CAESAR II assumes that hl(2:1) is equal to twice
al(2:1), and displays a warning message in the error checker. For more information, see al(2:1)
(on page 241).
Specifies the qualified stress for joints, bends, and tees. A qualified stress, Qs, provided by the
manufacturer is defined as:
Pq is the qualified pressure;

D is the average diameter of the pipe;
tr is the average reinforced wall thickness of the pipe.

The qualified stress, qs, for fittings is calculated as:
CAESAR II does not require qualified stress Qs for plain pipe. Qs for pipe = hl(2:1), and
hl(2:1) is required input for plain pipe.
You must enter qualified stress Qs for joints, bends and tees even if these fitting are not in
the piping model. You can type positive values (1000.0 for Qs and 1.0 for r, for example) to
pass the Error Checker.
Specifies the bi-axial stress ratio for bends, tees, and joints. The bi-axial stress r is defined as:
where:
sh(2:1) is the short-term hoop strength, under 2:1 stress conditions;
sa(0:1) is the short-term axial strength, under axial loading only.
In the absence of data from the manufacturer, use the default values:
Short-term
Fitting Component Strength Bi-axial
Stress Ratio (r)*
Filament-wound unidirectional 90°

0.45
and ± °
Bends 1.0
Filament-wound and hand-lay 1
1.9
100% hand-lay
Tees Filament-wound and hand-lay 1 1.0
Other Hand
CSM/WR 1, 9 1.9
laminated
Spigot/Socket Adhesive or
1.0
Mechanical Connection
0.45
Joints Threaded
1.0
Flange
2.0
Laminated
You can use a higher factor for r if justified by testing according to 6.2.6
ISO 14692-2-2002.

CAESAR II assumes that the bi-axial stress ratio r is 1.0 for tees according to ISO 14692.
CAESAR II displays a warning message in the Error Checker if the bi-axial stress ratio r is
greater than 20 for bends or joints. You can ignore the warning message.
If a piping system has no joints or bends, the corresponding bi-axial stress ratio r should not be
required. However, you must type a positive value (such as 1.0) for r to get rid of error
messages.
Specifies the ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of elasticity. If you leave this box
blank, CAESAR II uses a default value of 2.0.
Indicates that the bend is hand-layed. If this box is selected, the software assumes smooth
bends. This affects the calculations of both the flexibility factor and the SIFs for the bend.
Specifies the partial factor for temperature. Because each operating temperature needs an A 1
factor, you may need to specify up to 9 factors if all 9 operating temperatures are defined in a
model. If you leave the boxes blank, CAESAR II uses the default value of 1.0.
The following passage is from ISO14692-3:2002(E) section 7.4.2 Design Temperature.
The effect of temperature on reduction of mechanical properties shall be accounted for by the
partial factor A1, which is determined according to Annex D in ISO 14692-2:2002.
The maximum operating temperature of the piping system shall not exceed the temperature
used to calculate the partial factor A1 of the GRP components. If the operating temperature is
less than or equal to 65°C, then A1 is generally equal to 1.0
The effect of low temperatures on material properties and system performance shall be
considered. For service temperatures below 0°C, the principal should consider the need for
additional testing, depending on the resin system. Both qualification as well as additional
mechanical tests should be considered.
Glass Reinforced Plastic GRP materials do not undergo ductile/brittle transition within
the temperature range of this part of ISO 14692. Because of this, there is no significant abrupt
change in mechanical properties at low temperatures. A concern is that at temperatures lower
than 35°C, internal residual stresses could become large enough to reduce the safe operating
envelope of the piping system.

Specifies the partial factor for chemical resistance. If you leave the box blank, CAESAR II uses
the default value of 1.0.
The following passage is from ISO 14692-3:2002(E) section 7.4.3 Chemical Degradation.
The effect of chemical degradation of all system components from either the transported
medium or the external environment shall be considered on both the pressure and temperature
ratings. System components shall include adhesive and elastomeric seals/locking rings, if used,
as well as the basic glass fiber and resin materials.
The effect of chemical degradation shall be accounted for by the partial factor A 2 for chemical
resistance, which is determined according to Annex D in ISO 14692-2:2002. If the normal
service fluid is water, then A2 = 1. Reference shall be made to manufacturers' data if available.
In general, the aqueous fluids specified in the qualification procedures of ISO 14692-2:2002
are among the more aggressive environments likely to be encountered. However, strong
acids, alkalis, hypochlorite, glycol, aromatics and alcohol can also reduce the properties of
Glass Reinforced Plastic (GRP) piping components; the effect depends on the chemical
concentration, temperature and resin type.
The information from the manufacturers' tables is based on experience and laboratory tests
at atmospheric pressure, on published literature, raw material suppliers' data, and so on.
Chemical concentrations, wall stresses, reinforcement type and resin have not always been
taken into account. Therefore, the tables only give an indication of the suitability of the
piping components to transport the listed chemicals. In addition, the mixing of chemicals
may cause severe situations.
Specifies the partial factor for cyclic service. If you leave the box blank, CAESAR II uses the
default value of 1.0.
The following passage is from ISO 14692-3:2002(E) section 7.4.4 Fatigue and Cyclic Loading.
Cyclic loading is not necessarily limited to pressure loads. Thermal and other cyclic loads shall
therefore be considered when assessing cyclic severity.
If the predicted number of pressure or other loading cycle is less than 7000 over the design life,
the service shall be considered static. If required, the limited cyclic capability of the pipe system
components can be demonstrated according to 6.4.5 of ISO 14692-2:2002.
If the predicted number of pressure or other loading cycles exceeds 7000 over the design life,
then the designer shall determine the design cyclic severity, R c, of the piping system. Rc is
defined as:
where Fmin and Fmax are the minimum and maximum loads (or stresses) of the load (or stress)
cycle.
The partial factor, A3, for cyclic service is given by:

where N is the total number of cycles during service life.

This equation is intended for cyclic internal pressure loading only, but may be applied with
caution to axial loads provided they remain tensile, that is, it is not applicable for reversible
loading.
Specifies the system design factor. This value is multiplied by the occasional load factor (k) to
generate the value of the part factor for loading (f 2). If you leave this box blank, CAESAR II uses
the default value of 0.67.
The purpose of the system design factor is to define an acceptable margin of safety between the
strength of the material and the operating stresses for the three load cases. These load cases
are occasional, sustained including thermal loads, and sustained excluding thermal loads. The
following table shows the relationship between the system design factor, the occasional load
factor, and f2, along with their default values.
Load System Design Occasional Part Factor For

Loading Type Duration Factor (SDF) Load Factor Loading (f2)
Occasional Short-term 0.67 1.33 0.89
Sustained Including
Long-term 0.67 1.24 0.83
Thermal Loads
Sustained
Excluding Thermal Long-term 0.67 1.00 0.67
Loads
The part factor for loading f2 is equal to System Design Factor times the Occ Load
Factor.
Specifies the thermal factor. This factor is defined in Section 8.4 of ISO-14692-3:2002(E). In the
absence of further information, the thermal factor k should be taken as 0.85 for liquids and 0.8
for gasses. If you leave this box blank, CAESAR II uses a default value of 1.0.

Elastic Properties
Shortcut keys:
F7 - Jumps to Elastic Properties
ALT+6 - Opens Edit Elastic Properties dialog box
software automatically fills in the properties from the materials database. If you want to change
any material property extracted from the material database, change the value in the
corresponding box. You must manually define the properties for Material type 21 (user
specified).
Material properties in the database can be changed permanently using the CAESAR
II Material Database editor. For more information, see Material Database (on page 1118).
Double-click >> to display the Edit Elastic Properties dialog box.

The CAESAR II FRP pipe element models an orthotropic material whose properties can be
defined by:
Ea - Axial Modulus-of-elasticity
Eh - Hoop Modulus-of-elasticity
h/a - Poisson's ratio of the strain in the axial direction resulting from a stress in the hoop
direction.
G - Shear Modulus (Not related to the Elastic Modulus and Poisson's ratio in the
conventional manner.)
FRP pipe is specified by setting the Material box to 20. The material name displays and FRP
properties from the configuration file display on the dialog box.
Some of the material parameters are renamed when the FRP material is selected: Elastic
Modulus changes to Elastic Modulus/axial and Poisson's Ratio changes to "Ea/Eh* h/a". The
latter entry requires the value of the following expression: (E a* h/a) / Eh. This expression is
equal to a/h, Poisson's ratio of the strain in the hoop direction resulting from a stress in the axial
direction. The shear modulus G is defined by typing the ratio of G/Ea (shear modulus to axial
modulus) on the special execution parameters screen. You can type only one ratio for each job.
The decrease in flexural stiffness at bends and intersections due to changes in the circular
cross-section is typically negligible because the hoop modulus is usually considerably higher
than the axial modulus for FRP pipe. Because of this, a default flexibility factor of 1 is used for
these components. Similarly, because the fatigue tests performed by Markl on steel pipe are
likely to have no bearing on FRP design, an SIF of 2.3 is applied for all fittings. CAESAR II uses
these recommendations for all FRP fittings unless you specifically override the defaults. You can
override the defaults on a point-by-point basis or by forcing all calculations to adhere to the
requirements of the governing code through a CAESAR II configuration parameter. Note that if
the BS 7159, UKOOA, or ISO 14692 code is in effect, all SIFs and flexibility factors are
calculated according to that code regardless of the configuration parameter settings.

Densities
Shortcut keys:
F8 - Jumps to Densities
ALT+7 - Opens Edit Densities dialog box
Specifies the densities of the piping material, insulation, and fluid contents in this block from the
The piping material density is a required entry and is usually extracted from the Material
Database. You can also type Fluid density in terms of specific gravity, if convenient, by following
the input immediately with the letters: SG, for example, 0.85SG (there can be no spaces
between the number and the SG).
If an insulation thickness is specified (in the pipe section properties block) but no
insulation density is specified, CAESAR II defaults to the density of calcium silicate.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Densities dialog box.
Specifies the thickness of refractory to apply to the piping. Refractory is applied to the inside of
the pipe. It is included in the dead weight of the system and reduces the internal pipe area
affecting the fluid weight in the system.

Displays the density of the refractory lining. If you select a value from the list, the numeric value
replaces the material name when the box is registered.
Refractory densities are much higher than insulation densities and could lead to
under sized restraints.
Densities for some typical refractory materials display below:
MATERIAL DENSITY (lb./cu.in. )
A.P. GREEN GREENCAST 94 0.09433
A.P. GREEN KRUZITE 0.08391

CASTABLE
A.P. GREEN MC-30 0.08391
A.P. GREEN MC-22 0.07234
A.P. GREEN KAST-SET 0.06655
A.P. GREEN KAST-O-LITE 25 0.05208
A.P. GREEN VSL-35AST 94 0.02257
B & W KAOCRETE B 0.05787
B & W KAOCRETE 32-C 0.08333
B & W KAO-TAB 95 0.09549
B & W KAOLITE 2200 0.03241
B & W KAOLITE 2200-HS 0.04745
B & W KAOLITE 2500-LI. 0.03472

Specifies the thickness of the insulation to be applied to the piping. Insulation applied to the
outside of the pipe is included in the dead weight of the system and in the projected pipe area
used for wind load computations.
Even if you specify the unit weight of the insulation or cladding, the thickness values
are still required so that the software can determine the correct projected area.
Specifies the thickness of the cladding to be applied to the piping. Cladding is applied to the
outside of the insulation. It is included in the dead weight of the system and in the projected pipe
area used for wind load computations.
Even if you specify the unit weight of cladding plus insulation, the thickness values
are still required so that the software can determine the correct projected area.
Displays the density of the insulation on a per unit volume basis. If you select a value from the
list, the numeric value replaces the material name when the box is registered.
If you leave this box blank, then the software assumes that the insulation is CALCIUM SILICATE
having a density of 0.006655.
Verify that this assumed value is appropriate for the current application. Sample density values
for insulation materials are:
MATERIAL DENSITY
AMOSITE ASBESTOS .009259
CALCIUM SILICATE .006655
CAREYTEMP .005787
FIBERGLASS (OWEN/CORNING) .004051
FOAM-GLASS/CELLULAR .004630
GLASS
HIGH TEMP .01389
KAYLO 10 (TM) .007234
MINERAL WOOL .004919
PERLITE / CELO-TEMP 1500 .007523
POLY URETHANE .001273

STYRO FOAM .001042
SUPER X .01447
Displays the thickness of the cladding to apply to the piping. Cladding is applied to the outside of
the insulation and is included in the dead weight of the system. Cladding is also included in the
projected pipe area used for wind load computations.
Displays an alternative to specifying the insulation and cladding thickness and density. This is
an optional combined uniform load (weight per unit length).
If you are applying wind loads, then you must type the insulation and cladding
thickness to obtain the correct projected area for wind load computation.
Line Number
Shortcut key: F9
Specifies the line number or name for a pipeline/pipe run containing one or more pipe elements.
Line numbers carry forward to successive elements. Because of this, you only need to specify
data on the first element of a new line.
To assign a line number or name, do one of the following:
Select the Line Number box, or press F9. Select <new..> to automatically assign a name.
The line number is named Line Number <x>, where <x> is a sequential number.
Type to manually create a new name.
Use the auto-complete feature that populates with the nearest match as you type. For
-300- -150-
and the box automatically fills with the first line number that matches what you have typed.
Press End to change the last character.
You can also select elements on the graphics model and click Create from Selection
in the Line Numbers dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbers (on page 317).

Element Name
Specifies the name or identifier of the selected element. Type to manually create a new name.
You can use Element Name to provide a name more descriptive than from/to node names.
The name:
Duplicates when you duplicate the element.
Available Commands
The following commands are available in the CAESAR II Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Topics
File Menu ....................................................................................... 252
Edit Menu ....................................................................................... 259
Model Menu ................................................................................... 270
Environment Menu ......................................................................... 319
Global Menu .................................................................................. 362
Options Menu ................................................................................ 369
View Menu ..................................................................................... 385
Tools Menu .................................................................................... 406
File Menu
Performs actions associated with opening, closing, and running the job file.
Piping Input menu: File > New

Standard toolbar: New
Shortcut key: CTRL+N
Creates a new CAESAR II job.

Controls parameters for creating a new CAESAR II job.

Enter the name for the new job file
Specifies the job name.
Piping Input
Indicates that the job is a piping job. The software only displays this radio button option
when you create a new file from the CAESAR II main menu.
Structural Input
Indicates that the job is a structural job. The software only displays this radio button option
when you create a new file from the CAESAR II main menu.
Enter the data directory
Specifies the location of the job file. You can type the directory into the field, or click the
browse button to browse to the directory.
Piping Input menu: File > Open

Standard toolbar: Open
Shortcut key: CTRL+O
Opens an existing CAESAR II job.
Controls options for opening existing files.

Look in
Specifies the folder in which the file exists.
Name
Lists the files in the selected folder that match the selected file type. You can sort the list by
clicking the Name, Data modified, or Type column headers.
File Name
Specifies the name of the selected file. This field is automatically filled in if you click a file in
the Name list.
Files of type
Specifies the type of file listed in the Name list.
System
Changes the Look in box to the CAESAR II System folder.
Examples

Changes the Look in box to the CAESAR II Examples folder.
Piping Input menu: File > Open CADWorx Model
Reference CAD Models toolbar: CADWorx Model

Opens an existing CADWorx model.
Piping Input menu: File > Save

Standard toolbar: Save
Shortcut key: CTRL+S
Saves the current CAESAR II job under its current name.
Piping Input menu: File > Save As

Saves the current CAESAR II job under a new name.
Save in
Specifies the folder in which to save the job.
Name
Lists the files in the selected folder that match the selected file type. You can sort the list by
clicking the Name, Data modified, or Type column headers.
File Name
Specifies the name of the selected file. This field is automatically filled in if you click a file in
the Name list.
Save as type
Specifies the type of file listed in the Name list.
Save
Writes the file to the selected folder.

Piping Input menu: File > Save as Graphics Image

Saves the current CAESAR II job as an HTML page, .TIFF, .BMP, or .JPG file.
Piping Input menu: File > Error Check

CAESAR II Tools toolbar: Start Run
Shortcut key: CTRL+E
Sends the model through interactive error checking. This is the first step of analysis. When the
error check is complete, the Errors and Warnings dialog box (on page 564) displays the
results. For more information, see Error Checking (on page 564).
Piping Input menu: File > Archive
Input Tools toolbar: Archive

Assigns a password to the job to prevent inadvertent alteration of the model or to type the
password to unlock the file. Archived input files cannot be altered or saved without this
password; however, they can be opened and reviewed.
Controls options for archiving a CAESAR II job.

Password
Specifies the password for the job. Type a password between 6 and 24 characters in length.
Piping Input menu: File > Batch Run

CAESAR II Tools toolbar: Batch Run
Shortcut key: CTRL+R
Error checks the model without any involvement required by you. This process stops only for
errors, which must be resolved for the analysis to run successfully. When you select Batch Run,
the software uses the existing or default static load cases and performs the static analysis.

Piping Input menu: File > Print Setup

Sets up the printer for the input listing.
Controls parameters for setting up a printer.

Name
Specifies the name of the printer.
Properties
Displays printer properties.
Size
Specifies the size of the paper in the printer.
Source
Specifies the active paper tray
Portrait
Prints the file using a vertical orientation.
Landscape
Prints the file using a horizontal orientation.
Network
Allows you to specify a printer from the network.
Piping Input menu: File > Print Preview

Displays a preview of the printed output.
Piping Input menu: File > Print

Standard toolbar: Print
Shortcut key: CTRL+P
Prints the current file. The software prompts you to select the reports to print, prior to printing.
Any time an input listing is written to a file or to the printer, the format of each of the reports is
obtained from the .inp file. The .inp files are ASCII text files which can be modified to create

reports of differing styles or content. You can modify the Initial.inp to change the page length in
the report, and the starting and stopping column positions. Any text editor (such as Notepad)
can be used to change any of the .inp files. If you change the .inp file, you may receive fatal
errors during report generation if impossible formats, or if invalid commands are requested.
If you prefer a different (more columnar) form of the basic element data, three
additional formatting files have been provided.
ELEMENT0.INP - Intergraph CAS standard element format
ELEMENT1.INP - 1st alternate element format
ELEMENT2.INP - 2nd alternate element format
ELEMENT3.INP - 3rd alternate element format
To use any of these formatting files, change folders to the CAESAR II\System folder. Then,
copy the formatting file that you want to use into Element.inp.
To print an Input Echo from the input dialog box, click File > Print. To write an Input Echo to the
screen for review, click File > Print Preview.
You can print an input listing from the output module as part of the entire output
report.
Controls the options to include in the print job. You can change the report contents by modifying
the input options. All basic element data (geometry), operating conditions, material properties,
boundary conditions, and report formatting are available:

Elements Allowables Units

Material ID Coordinates
Node Names Setup File
Offsets Title
Forces Control Parameters
Uniform Loads
Wind/Wave
SIF's and TEE's
Bends
Rigids
Expansion Joints
Reducers
Flanges
Equipment Check
Restraints
Displacements
Hanger
Flexible Nozzles
Select what you want to print, and then click OK.
Piping Input menu: File > Recent Piping Files

Displays a list of most recently opened piping files.
Piping Input menu: File > Recent Structural Files

Displays a list of most recently opened structural files.

Piping Input menu: File > Exit

Closes the session and the CAESAR II Classic Piping Input dialog box. The software prompts
you to save any unsaved changes.
Edit Menu
Performs actions associated with cutting and pasting, navigating through the elements, and
performing a few small utilities.
Piping Input menu: Edit > Cut

Standard toolbar: Cut
Shortcut key: CTRL+X
Cuts selected elements from the document and pastes them to the Clipboard. The selected
elements replace the previous contents of the Clipboard.
Piping Input menu: Edit > Copy

Standard toolbar: Copy
Shortcut key: CTRL+C
Copies selected elements to the Clipboard. When you use this command, it replaces the
previous contents of the Clipboard with the new contents.
Piping Input menu: Edit > Paste

Standard toolbar: Paste
Shortcut key: CTRL+V
Inserts the Clipboard contents into the file. The command is not available if the Clipboard is
empty.

Piping Input menu: Edit > Continue

Navigation Tools toolbar: Continue
Shortcut key: ALT+C
Moves the dialog box to the next element in the model. The software adds a new element if
there is no next element.
Piping Input menu: Edit > Duplicate Element

Navigation Tools toolbar: Duplicate Element
Duplicates the last element in a model so that you can quickly continue building the model.
Select the last element, and then click Duplicate Element. For more information on duplicating
groups of elements in a model, see Duplicate (on page 363).
If you select an element that is not at the end of the model and click Duplicate
Element, the software continues to the next element in the model without duplicating the
selected element.
Piping Input menu: Edit > Insert Element
Input Tools toolbar: Insert Element

Shortcut key: CTRL+I
Inserts an element.
Controls options for inserting an element.

Before
Inserts a new element prior to the current element. The To node of the new element is then
equal to the From node of the current element.
After
Inserts a new element following the current element. The From node of the new element is
then equal to the To node of the current element.

Piping Input menu: Edit > Delete Element

Input Tools toolbar: Delete Element
Shortcut key: CTRL+D
Deletes the current element.
Piping Input menu: Edit > Find

Plot Tools toolbar: Find Node
Shortcut key: CTRL+F
Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box that allows you to
specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You can enter the node numbers
in either of the two fields, or in both. If you entering only the From node number, the software
searches for the first available element that starts with that node number. If you define only the
To node number, the software searches for an element ending with that node number. When
the software locates the element, it highlights the element and fits it in the view. You can zoom
out to better identify the location of the highlighted element within the model.
Controls parameters for finding elements.

Node Numbers
Specifies the node numbers to search for. Enter a single node number to find the next
element containing that node number (either as a From or To node). Enter two node
numbers to find the next element containing both of those node numbers (in either order).
Zoom to Node if Found
Indicates that the software will display the found node in the active view.
Piping Input menu: Edit > View/Edit Disconnects

Input Tools toolbar: View/Edit Disconnects
Coordinates List input right-click menu: View/Edit Disconnects
Shortcut key: CTRL+G
Specifies the absolute (global) coordinates for the start node of each disconnected pipe system
segment.
This may be required when:
1. You want to show nodal coordinates in absolute, rather than relative, coordinates.
2. Defining global coordinates for discontiguous segments must allow the piping segments to
plot in the correct locations, rather than superimposed at the origin.

3. It is important that the pipe be given the correct elevation if wind loading is present.
page 268).
Defines the global coordinates for the starting (From (on page 115)) node of a disconnected
element.
Node
Specifies the node number for the starting end of the disconnected element. You can
change the node number to another valid node number to reconnect the element. All
following elements move with respect to the new node number.
X Coordinate
Specifies the global X coordinate for the starting node. You can change the coordinate
value. All following elements move with respect to the new coordinate.
Y Coordinate
Specifies the global Y coordinate for the starting node. You can change the coordinate
Z Coordinate
Specifies the global Z coordinate for the starting node. You can change the coordinate
If the node and any coordinate are both changed, and the changed node is valid, then the
software ignores the coordinate change and moves the disconnected element to the new
node.
After closing the Disconnect Segments dialog box, disconnected element rows display in
light green shading on the Coordinates and Elements lists.
Piping Input menu: Edit > Close Loop
Input Tools toolbar: Close Loop

Closes a loop by filling in the delta coordinates between two nodes in the model.

Piping Input menu: Edit > Increment

Input Tools toolbar: Increment node
Specifies the increment between nodes. CAESAR II uses the nodal increment set in
Configure/Setup when generating the From and To nodes for new elements. You can override
this behavior by typing a different value in this dialog box. For more information, see Auto Node
Number Increment (on page 75).
Specifies the parameters for setting an increment between nodes.

Node Increment
Specifies the increment between node numbers.
Piping Input menu: Edit > Distance

Input Tools toolbar: Distance
Shortcut key: CTRL+M
Finds the distance between two specified nodes or between any two points you select on the
model.
Press CTRL + click to select multiple distances along a line of pipe.
What do you want to do?

Measure between two nodes (on page 263)
Measure between the first (origin) node and a selected node on a model (on page 264)
1. Open a CAESAR II file.

2. Click Piping Input in the main menu.
The Classic Piping Input dialog box opens.
3. Click Distance on the Input Tools toolbar.
The Distance dialog box opens.
4. Click Between Element Nodes to measure distance between two specified nodes.
5. Type the starting and ending node numbers and click Calculate.

The software displays the measured distance in the Delta X, Y, Z boxes at the bottom of the
Distance dialog box, on the measure line in the model, and in the status bar at the bottom
of the window.
After you select the method for measuring the distance, you can dock the Distance dialog
box to the side or even minimize the dialog box entirely. Then, as you measure distances,
the results display on the model and also in the status bar at the bottom of the window.
Press ESC to stop the distance measuring functionality on the model (but leave the dialog
box open), or close the Distance dialog box.
1. Open a CAESAR II file.

2. Click Piping Input in the main menu.
The Classic Piping Input dialog box opens.
3. Click Distance on the Input Tools toolbar.
The Distance dialog box opens.
4. Double-click to select the element.
5. Click Origin and To Nodes.
You must have only one element selected on the model to use Origin and To
Nodes.
The software displays the measured distance from the To node of the element selected to
the origin (first) node in the model.
The distance measurement, including the location of the start and end points, displays in the
Results section of the dialog box and at the bottom of the main CAESAR II window. The delta
DX, DY, DZ boxes at the bottom of the Distance dialog box show the differences of change
along the three axes.
After you select the method for measuring the distance, you can dock the Distance dialog
box to the side. Then, as you measure distances, the results display on the model and also
in the status bar at the bottom of the window.
Press ESC to stop the distance measuring functionality on the model (but leave the dialog
box open), or close the Distance dialog box.

Allows measurements for finding distances between nodes or specified points on a model.
Choose a measuring method, and then view results for the measurements in the Distance
dialog, at the bottom of the dialog box, and on the model.
Use the Pan and Zoom functions to move around larger models when measuring the
distance between two nodes.
Press SHIFT to confine the measuring line to the x-, y-, or z-axis directions. When you press
SHIFT, the software selects the axis nearest to the cursor location. As the mouse moves
around the model, the software changes the measuring line direction to the closest axis to
the cursor location.
Press CTRL + click to select multiple distances along a line of pipe.
Between Element Nodes

Directs the software to choose the start and end point of an element on the model by
highlighting snap points. Snap points are markers that indicate element node points. The
software uses snap points to highlight a node when the mouse cursor comes within a certain
proximity range of it. Between Element Nodes is selected by default. Clear this option to
measure without using the snapping functionality.
Clear Between Element Nodes when measuring distance in imported graphics models,
such as from CADWorx or Smart 3D. The software cannot snap to nodes on models
created outside of CAESAR II.
Change the shape, size, and color of snap point markers by right-clicking and selecting
Properties > Display Options. Make changes to the Graphic Edit Options > Symbol
Information settings, and then click Apply in the Plot Settings dialog box.
Origin and To Nodes
Calculates the distance between the origin point using the starting node coordinates (0,0,0),
and a selected point on the model.
To and From Nodes
Calculates the distance between two nodes. Type the node numbers in the boxes and click
Calculate (or press ENTER) for the software to perform the distance calculation. The
distance calculated displays in the Results area of the dialog box. To and From Nodes is
selected by default.
Calculate
Calculates the To and From Nodes measurement specified in the Measure Method.
Free Measure
Calculates the distance between two points anywhere in an orthogonal view of the model
(regardless of the node). Free measure lets you measure randomly on a model to get
general estimates of distance.
You should only use Free Measure when you are in a 2D view, such as a

front, back, top, bottom, left-side, or right-side view. Do not use Free Measure in isometric
views (southeast, southwest, northeast, or northwest) or other non-orthogonal views. For
precise measurements in any view, use the Between Element Nodes option.
Results
Displays the results of the distance calculation.
The software also displays the result on the status bar at the bottom of the window. The
results indicate the start and end point and the length measured in the unit of measure
specified for the current model.
The software displays the difference of change along the three axes in the delta (DX, DY,
DZ) boxes.
Piping Input menu: Edit > List

List Operations toolbar: List input
List input right-click menu: Choose List
Related commands:
Piping Input menu: Edit > List > Show All Lists
Piping Input menu: Edit > List > Close All Lists
Displays the selected input data, such as for Allowables, Bends, and Elements, in a grid. You
can edit, delete, or modify data in the lists. The list dialog boxes display as a row of tabs at the
bottom of the piping input. These tabs specify the list options that you can access.
When you select a tab, a grid of input data displays. You can access all input data through the
various list dialog boxes.
The following shows an example of a list dialog box, the Elements dialog box.
If you edit input data on a list dialog box, the software also updates values in the Classic Piping
Input dialog box. The software indicates values that carry forward on the Classic Piping Input
dialog box by displaying the value in red if there is a change to the data value. In the example
shown above, the PIPE OD value changes from 8.6250 inch to 6.6250 inch on the element
From Node 30 to To Node 50. The software displays the first element in the list with the new

value in red. Elements 2 through 3 inherit the value of element 1 automatically. The value of
PIPE OD does not change until you enter a new value for element 4. All elements below
element 4 inherit that value unless a new value is entered.
The following commands are available when you right-click an editable cell in a list.
Choose List
Opens and closes a list.
Block Operation > Rotate, Delete, Duplicate, Renumber, Invert, and Change Sequence
Performs global editing operations on the block of selected elements of the piping system.
For more information on the block operations, see Block Operations Toolbar (on page 396).
Block Operation > Status
Displays the Block Status dialog box, which shows the piping data in the current job and in
the block.
Block Operation > Hide Duplicate Data
On the Elements list only, hides duplicated (grey) fields and displays only black and red
fields, so that you can more easily review changes.
Find/Replace
Displays the Find/Replace dialog box, where you can search and replace data in the
selected column.
Find what - Defines the value to find in the column.
Replace with - Defines the replacement value.
Match whole word only - Limits the search to cells that exactly match the complete value
in Find what.
Find Next - Proceeds to the next matching cell.
Replace - Replaces the value in a matching cell with the value in Replace with.
Replace All - Replaces all matching cells with the value in Replace with.
Close - Closes the Find/Replace dialog box.
Find/Replace is only available for user-defined data.

Find/Replace is not available for row and column headers and columns containing
check boxes.
When you change a cell value, the value carries forward to all subsequent cells in the
column until you define a new cell value.
After selecting a cell, you can also access Find/Replace by using CTRL+F or Edit >
Find.
View/Edit Disconnects
Displays the Disconnected Segments dialog box, which specifies the absolute coordinates
for each disconnected pipe system segment. For more information, see View/Edit
Disconnects (on page 261). This option is available in the Coordinates list.

Change Properties
Specifies display properties for the current list on the Display Settings dialog box, including
title, grid line, color, and current cell properties. You can specify different properties for each
list.
Reset Default Properties

Resets display properties for the current list to the default software values.
Zoom In
Increases the text, column, and rows sizes of the grid for the current list.
Zoom Out
Decreases the text, column, and rows sizes of the grid for the current list.
Restore 100%
Restores the text, columns, and rows of the grid to the default sizes.
Displays the global X, Y, and Z coordinates of the starting (From (on page 115)) node of an
element. These are read-only values defined in one of the following ways:
The software calculates the global coordinates by cumulatively adding the delta values (DX,
DY, and DZ) from each element. For more information, see Deltas (on page 116).
You can specify global coordinates for the first node of each disconnected pipe system
segment. For more information, see View/Edit Disconnects (on page 261).
This coordinate values display in the Coordinates list.
Piping Input menu: Edit > Next Element

Navigation Tools toolbar: Next Element
Shortcut key:
Skips to the next element.
Piping Input menu: Edit > Prev Element

Navigation Tools toolbar: Previous Element
Shortcut key:
Skips to the previous element.

Piping Input menu: Edit > First Element

Navigation Tools toolbar: First Element
Shortcut key: CTRL+HOME
Skips to the first element.
Piping Input menu: Edit > Last Element

Navigation Tools toolbar: Last Element
Shortcut key: CTRL+END
Skips to the last element.
Piping Input menu: Edit > Undo

Input Tools toolbar: Undo
Shortcut key: CTRL+Z
Reverses or cancels any modeling steps. This can also be accomplished by pressing Ctrl-Z.
You can undo an unlimited number of steps. Undo is limited only by the amount of available
memory.
Making any input change while in the middle of the undo function resets the redo function.
Piping Input menu: Edit > Redo

Input Tools toolbar: Redo
Shortcut key: CTRL+R
Repeats the last step done You can redo an unlimited number of steps. Redo is limited by the
amount of available memory.
Making any input change while in the middle of the redo function resets the undo function.

Piping Input menu: Edit > Edit Static Load Cases
CAESAR II Tools toolbar: Edit Static Load Cases

Displays the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box. For more information, see Static
Analysis (on page 563).
Piping Input menu: Edit > Edit Dynamic Load Cases
CAESAR II Tools toolbar: Dynamic Analysis

Displays the Dynamic Analysis dialog box displaying static load information. For more
information, see Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems (on page 690).
Piping Input menu: Edit > Review Units

Displays the Review Current Units dialog box. This dialog box displays the units used to create
the report file. Changing the units in the configuration does not affect the input. To change the
input units, click Tools > Change Model Units.
Model Menu
Performs actions associated with modeling, as well as specifying associated system-wide
information.
Piping Input menu: Model > Break

Input Tools toolbar: Break
Shortcut key: CTRL+B
Divides an element into two or more individual elements. This command displays the Break at
element <node> - <node> dialog box.

Controls options for breaking an element.

A straight run of pipe between two nodes needs to be broken to insert a restraint, or some
other change in properties.
A long straight run of pipe needs to be broken into multiple, uniform lengths of pipe with
similar support conditions on each length. For example, a long straight run of rack piping, or
a buried run with multiple soil supports at each point in the run.
For the Insert Single Node option, the software provides default values for New Node Number
and Distance at the halfway point between the two existing nodes. You can change these
values.
In the example below, nodes 10 and 20 are 12 feet apart. The software sets the default New
Node Number to 15, and the default Distance to 6 feet.
If there was some other node in the model with a restraint (or imposed displacements), like the
one to be put on the newly generated node 15, then the node identifying that restraint location
could be filled in at the line Get Support From Node and the restraint would be automatically
placed at 15. In this case, the +Y support at node 10 is copied to node 15.
For the Insert Multiple Nodes option, the software defines the Length of each element value
based on the values you specify for Total Number of Break Elements and Node Step.

If you type the node where a +Y restraint has already been defined at the prompt for "support
condition", a +Y restraint is placed at all of the generated nodes, namely 110, 112, ... , 120. The
multiple insert Break is used primarily for three reasons:
Rack piping supports where the total length and node spacing is known and typed directly
when requested at the prompts.
Underground pipe runs where the overall length of the run is known, and the lengths of the
individual elements in the run are known.
To add mass points in order to refine a model for dynamic analysis.
Break does not work when the element is an expansion joint or the delta dimensions
in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes are blank or zero.
Insert Single Node
Indicates that only one node is inserted.
Insert Multiple Nodes
Indicates that more than one node is inserted.
New Node Number

Indicates the node number for the inserted node.
Distance in (in.) from Node <node number>
Specifies the distance from the selected node.
Total Number of Break Elements

Specifies the number of elements to insert.

Node Step
Specifies the increment between node numbers.
Length of each element
Displays the length of each element to insert.
Allow Duplicate Node Numbers
Indicates that duplicate node numbers are allowed.
Get Support From Node
Specifies the node from which to copy support information.
Piping Input menu: Model > Insert Restraints

Right-click menu: Restraint > Insert Restraint
Related commands:
Right-click menu: Restraint > Delete Restraint
Right-click menu: Restraint > Edit Restraint
Divides the selected element into two elements and places a restraint at the break. This
command displays the Insert Restraint dialog box.
Controls options for inserting a restraint.

Selected Element Length
Displays the length of the selected element.
Break and Insert at New Node
Breaks the selected element by the defined parameter, creates a new node, and inserts the
restraint at the node. Type a value for the new node number.
Element Midpoint - Breaks the element at it's midpoint.
Distance in from Node <node number> - Breaks the element at a distance from the
selected node. Select the node and type a value.
Define restraint properties on the Restraints auxiliary tab of the Classic Piping
Input dialog box.
Insert at Existing
Inserts a restraint at one or both nodes for the element.
From Node - Select to insert the restraint at the starting node.
To Node - Select to insert the restraint at the end node.
Define restraint properties on the Restraints auxiliary tab of the Classic Piping

Input dialog box.

Copy Restraint from Node
Copies the properties from the restraint at the specified node when creating the new
restraint.
Properties display in on the Restraints auxiliary tab of the Classic Piping Input
dialog box.
OK
Creates the new restraint.
Cancel
Closes the dialog box without creating a new restraint.
Piping Input menu: Model > Valve
Input Tools toolbar: Valve Flange Database

Shortcut key: CTRL+V
Provides access to the CADWorx valve and flange databases. This command displays the
Valve and Flange Database: <database name> dialog box.
1. Type the node numbers for the rigid element in the From and To boxes on the Classic
Piping Input dialog box.
2. Click Valve/Flange on the toolbar, or click Model > Valve from the menu.
3. Highlight blocks to select the fitting.
4. Select where to insert the new element.
Clicking the Flange Valve Flange check box enables CAESAR II to generate
three RIGID elements whose length and weight are automatically populated with data from
the Valve/Flange database.
5. Click OK to accept the selection.
If the particular selection is valid for the current line size, CAESAR II displays the length of
the element in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes, designates the element as RIGID, and inserts the
weight in the appropriate slot in the Auxiliary box.
The assumed orientation of the rigid is taken from the preceding element. CAESAR II is doing a
table lookup based on line-size and is inserting the selected table values into the dialog box.
Should the line size change at a later time, you must come back and ask CAESAR II to perform
another table look-up for the new size.
Use of the CADWorx Plant database offers several benefits over the use of other databases:

The CADWorx Plant database provides more accurate component lengths and weights
than those typically available in the GENERIC database.
Using the same component data for CAESAR II and CADWorx Plant modeling promotes
the efficiency of the bi-directional interface between them. Total sharing of data files and
specifications between CAESAR II and CADWorx Plant occurs when the CADWorx
installation option is saved in the registry. In that case, you should edit the third line of the
CADWORX.VHD file to name the actual CADWorx specifications. These specifications are
located in the CADWORX\SPEC subfolder. For more information on editing this file, see
below.
You can more easily modify the CADWorx Plant Valve and Flange database, because the
specification files and component data files are ASCII text files. This process, which involves
possibly editing the CADWORX.VHD, specification, and data files, is described below.
The CADWORX.VHD ASCII text file is structured as follows:
The first line must read CADWORX.DAT. It must not be changed.

The second line is editable. It must begin with a zero. The second number on the line
designates the number of specifications to make available. It can be a maximum of 7.
The third line is editable. It lists the available specifications. Each specification name must
consist of 8 characters, padded by blanks on the right. The specification names designate
files with extension .SPC, located in the SPEC subfolder of the CAESAR II or the CADWorx
Plant specification folder (if the CADWORX option is set in the registry).
The fourth line is editable. It designates whether each specification uses English or Metric
nominal pipe sizes. Seven blanks followed by a 1 indicate an English nominal, while seven
blanks followed by a 2 indicate a metric nominal.
The last five lines are not editable.
The specification files are located in the SPEC subfolder of the CAESAR installation folder. They
are designated by the extension .SPC. The specification files correlate pipe size and component
with the appropriate data file. Individual lines in the file list the library subfolder to the LIB_I or
LIB_M folder, depending on whether English or Metric units are in effect), file name (with an
extension equal to the library name), range of nominal pipe sizes for which the specified data file
applies. You can edit any of these items. The last item on the line is the component type
number, and should not be changed. Other items in the file pertain to CADWorx Plant and are
not significant to CAESAR II.
The data files hold the dimensional and weight values. Data files for different types of
components hold different types of data. The data columns are labeled. The only data with
significance to CAESAR II involves the weight and lengths. You can change these values. The
following is a typical component data file for weld neck flanges:

You can find more extensive information on editing these files in the CADWorx Plant User
Manual. For information on editing ASCII text, see ASCII Text File Rules (on page 53).
There are currently four databases provided:

CRANE steel valves and total flange length
GENERIC valves and 2/3 flange length
Corner and Lada valves - no flanges
CADWorx Plant (this is the CAESAR II default)
CAESAR II automatically generates data lengths and weights of rigid elements for flange-valve
-flange combinations when you select the Flange-Valve-Flange check box.
The CRANE database contains all flanged and welded fittings in the CRANE steel valve catalog.
The GENERIC database contains information from a variety of sources. In some cases, such as
weights for control valves, information from different sources was found to vary considerably. In
these cases, the largest reasonable weight was selected for use in the database. In other cases,
only the length of the fitting was available.

The default database, CADWorx Plant, is a subset of the full component database provided
with CADWorx Plant, Intergraph CAS's piping design and drafting software. This database
offers nine different component types (gate, globe, check, control, ball, plug, butterfly valves,
flange pair, and single flange) as well as four different end types (flanged, no-flanged, threaded,
or socket). Selection of flanged-end components or flanges themselves automatically provides
for gaskets.
Selecting flanged ends (FLG) for a valve simply adds the length and weight of two
flanges and gaskets to the valve length and weight. NOFLG selects a valve without including the
two mating flanges.
Rigid Type
Specifies the rigid type for the fitting.
End Type
Specifies the end type for the fitting.

Class
Specifies the class for the fitting.
Whole element
Indicates that the selections apply to the whole element.
From end
Indicates that the selections apply to the From end of the fitting.
To end
Indicates that the selections apply to the To end of the fitting.
Both ends
Indicates that the selections apply to both ends of the fitting.
Flange-Valve-Flange
Automatically generates data lengths and weights of rigid elements for flange-valve-flange
combinations.
Activate Flange Check
Turns on the flange check.
Piping Input menu: Model > Expansion Joint
Input Tools toolbar: Expansion Joint Modeler

Shortcut key: CTRL+J
Creates expansion joints and displays the Expansion Joint Database <data file> and
Expansion Joint Modeler dialog boxes.
The software displays expansion joints in blue.
CAESAR II automatically generates an expansion joint model from catalog data. The catalog
used may be selected in the CAESAR II Configure/Setup routine. You decide where in the
model the expansion joint should go, that is, between which two nodes, and the modeler
assembles the completed joint. Selectable joint styles include Untied, Tied, Hinged, Gimbaled,
Untied-Universal, and Tied Universal expansion joints.
An example selection session is illustrated as follows. Of particular note are the following items:
You can select any of four material types. These material types are used to adjust the
bellows stiffnesses to the actual highest temperature in the model. This typically results in
higher stiffnesses than those shown in the vendor's catalog because the stiffnesses in the
catalog may be based on a higher design temperature.
You can select any combination of end types.
Bellows, liner, cover, rod, and hinge or gimbal assembly weights are looked up from the
stored database and automatically included in the expansion joint model.

For universal joints, the minimum allowed length is stored, but when the available space
exceeds the minimum allowed, you are prompted for the length that you want the expansion
joint assembly to occupy.
The last screen that follows shows the "proposed" model before it is inserted into the
CAESAR II input. This allows you to investigate the characteristics of several joints before
settling on one.
Actual maximum pressure ratings are also a part of the database, and in many cases
exceed the nominal pressure rating shown in the catalog. You can use pressures up to
these actual allowed maximums.
Allowed joint movements are also stored as part of the database and are printed with each
proposed model. These values should be recorded for use in checking the model after a
successful design pass has been completed.
Pressure thrust is included in the modeling considerations for each of the expansion joint
styles, removing this concern.
In the case of "tied" expansion joints, rigid elements are used to model the tie-bars.
Restraints with connecting nodes are used to contain the pressure thrust, and to keep the
ends of the expansion joint parallel.

Indicates whether the expansion joint assembly should be installed at the From end or the To
end of the current element if the length of the current element exceeds the length of the
expansion joint assembly.
Specifies the direction cosines which define the axis of the hinge pin of the expansion joint
assembly. That is, the axis about which the joint can rotate.
For example, if the hinge can rotate about the X-axis, type:1.0 0.0 0.0
Specifies the direction cosines corresponding to a line drawn from the mid-point of one tie rod to
the mid-point of the other. If an expansion joint has only two tie rods permitting rotation about
the plane defined by the tie rods, type the direction cosines which, when crossed with the axis of
the expansion joint assembly, define the plane.
In this example, you would enter VX as1.000, VY as -0.000, and VZ as 0.000.

Specifies the length of the universal joint. Alternatively, select the check box to default the joint
length to the shortest recommended length. The length of a universal joint is variable depending
upon the length of the intermediate spool piece.
Specifies the database to use in the modeler. The current expansion joint vendor provides
multiple databases.
You can change the default expansion joint vendor in Expansion Joints (on page 66).
Type a large value such as 1E10 if the torsional spring rate is unknown. This produces
conservative results. These results are conservative with respect to loads and non-conservative
with respect to displacements. It is very common to rate the bellows allowed torsion by the
amount of rotation that it experiences. Large torsional stiffnesses result in small, seemingly
satisfactory rotations. When results from a piping analysis are communicated back to the
expansion joint manufacturer, it is important to report both the rotation and the stiffness used to
produce that rotation. For more information, see Expansion Joints (on page 975).
It was common practice in the expansion joint industry to design expansion joint bellows and
hardware (restraints) for the system pressure, and pressure thrust only. Generally, no
consideration was given to the system deadweight or thermal forces. This poor practice was
tolerated before the wide-spread use of piping analysis software because:
The deadweight and thermal forces are normally small compared to the pressure and
pressure thrust.
Designers laid out expansion joints so that the thermal forces were very low and therefore
not significant.
The allowable stresses used in hardware designs have a significant safety factor.
The forces and moments generally were not known. Today, when an expansion joint is
modeled, it is recommended that al information relating to the joint be submitted to the
expansion joint manufacturer. This is especially true of the forces and moments resulting from
the operating loads, such as deadweight, thermal forces, and operating deflections. Better
evaluations of the loading conditions on the bellows and hardware simply help the manufacturer
make sure that his design is suited for the intended installation and service.

Click Build to insert the proposed model of the expansion joint assembly into the piping system
model.
The Bellows Catalog Data (at the bottom of the Expansion Joint Modeler dialog box) shows
the bellows stiffness parameters and allowable movements from the vendor catalog. Note the
allowable movements for later evaluation of the expansion joint.
Expansion joints cannot be inserted on an element that is either already rigid or an expansion
joint. Bends, however, can be at either end of the element where you are inserting the
expansion.
You do not have to give a length on the element where you are inserting the expansion joint.
The six types of expansion joint models supported currently by CAESAR II are:
Untied single bellows
Tied single bellows
Hinged single bellows
Gimbaled single bellows
Untied universal bellows
Tied universal bellows
The four possible joint end types are:
Welded-end
Slip-on flange
Weld neck flange
Plate flange
If the length of the element to receive the expansion joint model is given, then the expansion
joint assembly should fit within this length. If it does not, a warning message displays. If a
universal joint has been requested, the length of the receiving element should be at least long
enough to accept the smallest possible universal length, as defined by the minimum spool piece
size from the manufacturers' database. If the element to receive the universal expansion joint
model is zero, you are prompted for the expansion joint length. If the element to receive the
universal expansion joint model had an original length, then the maximum possible space
available for the universal is reported and you are asked for the length. If the element to receive
any expansion joint is longer than the expansion joint to be inserted, you are prompted for the
end of the element where the joint should be inserted. Overall universal lengths should be
limited to about 10 times the pipe diameter before the center spool piece weight begins to
become a problem.
If there is a bend at either the From or the To end of the element to receive the expansion joint,
then you must define the length of the element.
To find extra nodes needed for the expansion joint model, CAESAR II starts with the element
From node and increments by one until a sufficient number of nodes not used elsewhere in the
model are encountered. It is these nodes that are reported in the Proposed-model dialog box.

Angular stiffnesses reported are given in the current set of units. Only the translational stiffness
label is found at the top of the bellows stiffness report. If you are unsure about the rotational
stiffness units, they may be seen either in the help screens or in the UNITS report from the LIST
option.
You are prompted to adjust the stiffness for the expansion joint if the highest operating
temperature is given and not equal to the expansion joint catalog design temperature. This
reduces bellows stiffnesses greater than those published in the catalog.
Bellows, tie-bar, and hinge/gimbal assembly weights are combined together and distributed over
the expansion joint rigid end pieces.
The expansion joint modeler makes every attempt possible to generate nodes in the model that
are unique. Inspect the nodes that are generated closely and make sure that you do not use
them unintentionally in any future model building.
Review the generated CAESAR II models and be sure that everything is consistent with your
intentions.
The following six styles of expansion joints are built automatically by CAESAR II. With each type
is a brief discussion of its use when associated with hot, pressurized equipment protection.
Specifies a single unrestrained expansion joint. This type of joint can absorb movement in all
directions. It also subjects the system to pressure thrust which must be designed for, external to
the expansion joint. This type of joint should almost never be used by the expansion joint novice
needing to protect hot, pressurized equipment. Guide restrictions limiting displacements into the
joint, regular maintenance problems because of all of the support hardware away from the
bellows, and pressure thrust make using and analyzing this type of bellows difficult.
Specifies a tied single expansion joint that is capable only of transverse (lateral) movement.
Pressure thrust is restrained internally by the tie-bars. This is a good, dependable expansion
joint to use for several reasons:
You do not have to design for pressure thrust.
Tie rods provide stability to the overall joint. This makes working with it in the field easier.
There is a single displacement mode (lateral). You can compare this mode directly to the
rated lateral movement in the catalog without the need for the relatively complicated
geometric calculations in the Expansion Joint Rating.
The disadvantages to the single tied expansion joint are:
They are fairly stiff in practice. This joint often does not provide the needed flexibility to
sufficiently reduce the loads on sensitive equipment.
The tie-bar assembly does provide some nonlinear restraining effect on flexibility that is
unaccounted for in the analysis. This may be appreciable when the bellows displacement
becomes large, such as when it is most critical that it perform as predicted.

Specifies a single hinged expansion joint. This type of joint can only angulate about one axis.
Pressure thrust is retained internally by the hinge mechanism. Hinge joints are often used in
pairs to absorb considerable displacement in a single plane while transmitting very little load to
any attached equipment. The piping system must be designed to assure that displacement into
the hinges is planar for all types of thermal and occasional loadings to be experienced by the
system. Where pressure loads to be absorbed by the hinge mechanism are high, considerable
friction forces can be generated that somewhat limits further flexing of the joint. This transmits
larger loads than expected back into the piping system.
Specifies a single gimbal expansion joint. This type of joint can angulate about two axes.
Gimbaled joints restrain both pressure thrust and torsion by the gimbal mechanism. These joints
are often used in pairs to absorb considerable displacement in several directions, while
transmitting very little load to any attached equipment.
Specifies an untied universal expansion joint. This type of unit is similar to a single unrestrained
expansion joint. It can absorb movement in all directions and normally has a much higher
capacity for transverse (lateral) deflection than a single bellows. An untied universal epansion
joint subjects the system to pressure thrust loads which must be designed for external to the
expansion joint. Even when pressure is negligible, these joints can often be difficult to use in
practice unless proper guiding of the thermal displacement protects the joint against unwanted
movement.
Specifies a tied universal expansion joint. This is similar to a tied single joint, except that the tied
universal has much higher transverse (lateral) movement capability. Pressure thrust loads are
restrained internally by the tie-bars. These types of joints are a good option where vertical pipe
runs close to the equipment are available. The tie-bars restrict movement to a single mode
(lateral) and eliminate the worry about pressure thrust design. Longer lengths result in smaller
lateral stiffnesses, but overall length is somewhat restricted by the weight of the center spool. A
good rule of thumb is to restrict the overall length of the assembly to ten times the pipe diameter.
Be careful not to put the assembly into compression, as the tie bar mechanisms are not
designed to take this load and damage to the bellows can result.
These six types of expansion joints are not all of the types available, but they are the most
common. If a joint is needed that is not covered by the above, select the style closest to that
required. Edit the resulting input after the EJ Modeler is complete and processing returns to the

The following expansion joint end-types are available in the CAESAR II modeler.
Indicates standard pipe beveled for welding.
Indicates a slip-on flange.
Indicates a weld neck flange.
Indicates a plate flange in accordance with the manufacturers catalog.

Slip-on, weld neck, and plate flanges may not be available in all diameters and pressure
ratings, such as over 24-in. diameters. Consult the catalog for specific interface dimensions,
codes, and materials. When you select a combination that is not available, you are warned
that there are no database values for his particular geometry and line size.
The following considerations are important when selecting the number of convolutions for a
particular application:
The more convolutions selected, the greater the movement capacity of the bellows. It is a
common practice to perform a quick hand calculation to estimate the required movement and
then select the number of convolutions from the rated movements in the catalog. After an
analysis is performed, the exact evaluation of the bellows performance can be made using the
expansion joint rating module provided with CAESAR II.
Specifies the spring forces. The more convolutions that you select, the lower the resulting
bellows spring forces become. This is particularly critical when the expansion joint is located
near rotating equipment.

The more convolutions selected, the greater the required overall length. If working in a confined
area, the number of convolutions may be restricted by the space.
The pressure rating should be equal to, or larger than the design pressure of the system. In
many instances, larger pressures can be tolerated than the rated pressure shown. In many
small diameter expansion joints, the same bellows is used in 50, 150, and 300 psi-rated joints.
The CAESAR II modeler contains the true minimum pressure limits for all of the bellows in the
database, and checks the maximum pressure in the line (as specified) against the allowed
pressure. This allows you to select a smaller joint with more flexibility for certain applications.
Bellows can be formed from most ductile materials that can be welded by the automatic T.I.G.
butt welding process and yield a homogeneous ductile weld structure. Because the specific
media content varies from system to system, and most media data specified prior to system
operation is approximate with considerable fluctuation possible, it is not feasible to make specific
recommendations concerning bellows materials. The following are the four most common
bellows materials that are supported by CAESAR II:
304SS A240 tp 304 Stainless Steel
316SS A240 tp 316 Stainless Steel
600Inc Inco 600 High Nickel
625Inc Inco 625 High Nickel
Liners
Internal liners smooth the flow through the expansion joint. The smooth flow reduces pressure
drop and also prevents flow-induced vibration of the bellows. Liners are generally recommended
when the flow velocity exceeds 1.3 ft./sec. as a minimum, and are definitely recommended when
the flow velocity exceeds about 25 ft./sec. Consult the manufacturers catalog for additional
information. Heavy gage liners should be used in high velocity or turbulent flow systems. Also,
heavy liners should be used when the media is abrasive.
Covers
External covers protect very thin bellows, (0.010 to 0.090 in.) from mechanical damage. Covers
are also recommended when the line is insulated.

Piping Input menu: Model > Title
Input Tools toolbar: Title

Shortcut key: CTRL+T
Displays the title page of the current job. This is up to 60 lines of text that is stored with the
problem, and may be used for detailing run histories, discussing assumptions, and so on. These
lines may be printed with the output report through the input echo.
Piping Input menu: Model > Hangar Design Control Data
Input Tools toolbar: Hangar design criteria

Shortcut key: CTRL+H
Specifies hanger design criteria for the current model.
Spring hanger design can be globally controlled by typing data into the Hanger Design Control
Data dialog box.
The Hanger Design Control Data dialog box contains five items that also appear on each
individual hanger design in your model. The software populates values you specify in this dialog
box on the individual Hangers tab in the Piping Input auxiliary panel. However, you can override
those values on a hanger-by-hanger basis.
The hanger values you can set globally include:
Short-range springs
Rigid support displacement criteria
Maximum-allowed travel limit
Hanger table
Multiple load-case design option

You can specify the number of temperature cases the software uses in the hanger design in the
Hanger Design Control Data dialog box, and these values are used in the hanger design
algorithm. In addition, you can specify if the software calculates the actual cold loads. For
examples of incorporating spring hanger designs into your models, see the CAESAR II
Application Guide.
Specifies the number of load cases to be considered when designing spring hangers. This value
may be between 1 and 9 and corresponds to the number of thermal load cases to be used in
hanger design. If more than one operating case is to be considered in the hanger design then
you must also select the Multiple Load Case Design Option to use.
Indicates that CAESAR II makes one additional pass after the hanger design is completed and
the hangers are installed, to determine the actual installed loads that should be used when the
hangers are first installed and the load flanges adjusted in the field. This calculation tends to be
important in the following situations:
The stiffness of the piping system is small.
The stiffness of the hanger selected is high.
The hanger travel is large. This is usually more important in smaller diameter piping systems
that are spring supported away from equipment nozzles.
Actual cold loads should be calculated when springs in smaller diameter lines are to be adjusted
in the cold position.

Indicates that hanger design allows short range springs.

CAESAR II gives you the option of excluding short range springs from consideration from the
selection algorithms. Short range springs are considered specialty items in some instances and
are not used unless their shorter length is required for clearance reasons. Clear this check box
in this case.
If this option is not selected, CAESAR II selects a mid-range spring over a short-range spring,
assuming that they are more standard, readily available, and in general cheaper than their
short-range counterparts.
If the default should be that short-range springs are used wherever possible, then check the box
on the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box.
Specifies the limit on the allowed variation between the hot and cold hanger loads. If this value
is not specified, the only limit on load variation is that inherent in the spring table. This is
approximately 100% when the hot load is smaller than the cold load and 50% when the hot load
is larger than the cold load. Hot loads are smaller than cold loads whenever the operating
displacement in the Y direction is positive. The default value for the load variation is 25%.
The Allowable Load Variation value is the percentage variation from the hot load:
or as may be more familiar:
The Allowable Load Variation value is typed as a percentage. For example, type twenty five
percent as 25.0.
Specifies the minimum amount of travel for hanger design. This is a cost saving feature that
replaces unnecessary springs with rigid rods.
The hanger design algorithm operates by first running a restrained weight case. The load to be
supported by the hanger in the operating condition is determined from this case. After the
hanger design load is known, the software runs an operating case with the hot hanger load
installed. This analysis determines the travel at the hanger location. If this determined hanger
travel is less than the Rigid Support Displacement Criteria, then a rigid Y-support is selected
instead of a spring for the location.
The software does not apply the criteria if you leave the Rigid Support Displacement Criteria
box blank or zero.
A typical value is 0.1 in.
You should insert a single directional restraint instead of a rigid rod in some
cases. Rigid rods are double-acting restraints. In some cases, these can develop large hold

down forces that do not really exist because the support has lifted off, or because the rigid rod
has bowed slightly. When this condition develops, you should rerun the hanger design inserting
single directional restraints where rigid rods were put in by CAESAR II.
Do not replace hangers with rigid rods in very stiff parts of the piping system. These parts are
usually associated with rotating equipment or vessel nozzles that need to be protected.
Specifies the maximum amount of travel for hanger design. CAESAR II selects a constant effort
support if the design operating travel exceeds this limit, even though a variable support from the
manufacturer table would have been satisfactory in every other respect.
You can design a constant effort hanger by specifying a very small number for the Maximum
Allowed Travel Limit. A value of 0.001 typically forces CAESAR II to select a constant effort
support for a particular location.
Specifies the active hanger table.

The following spring tables are currently included in CAESAR II:
1. Anvil 2. Bergen Power
3. Power Piping 4. NPS Industries
5. Lisega 6. Fronek
7. Piping Technology 8. Capitol
9. Piping Services 10. Basic Engineers
11. Inoflex 12. E. Myatt & Co.
13. Sinopec 14. BHEL
15. CASTIM 2000 (formerly Flexider) 16. Carpenter & Paterson
17. Pipe Supports Ltd. 18. Witzenmann
19. Sarathi 20. Myricks
21. China Power 22. Pipe Supports USA
23. Quality Pipe Supports 24. PiHASA
25. Binder 26. Gradior
27. NHK 28. PSSI GmbH
29. Seonghwa 30. Mitsubishi

31. Yamashita 32. Sanwa Tekki
33. Techno Industry 34. Hesterberg
35. Spring Supports Mfg. Co. 36. Senior
37. Unison 38. Wookwang
Additional design options are invoked if you use the following check boxes.
Extended Range
Cold Load
Hot load centered (if possible)
You can globally set the hanger data for a model from the Hanger Design Control Data (on
page 287), accessed by clicking Hanger design criteria in the piping input. Specify the default
hanger table that appears in this dialog by specifying the Default Spring Hanger Table
configuration setting in Configuration Editor > Database Definitions. For examples of
incorporating spring hanger designs into your models, see the Hangers section in the CAESAR
II Application Guide.
Extended Load Range Springs
CAESAR II includes the maximum load range to permit the selection of less expensive
variable support hangers in place of constant effort supports when the spring loads are just
outside the manufacturers recommended range. Extended load ranges are the most
extreme ranges on the spring load table. Some manufacturers build double-spring supports
to accommodate this range. Others adjust the top or bottom travel limits to accommodate
either end of the extended table. Make sure that the manufacturer can supply the spring
before you use the maximum ranges. Use of the extended range often eliminates the need
to go to a constant effort support.
Lisega springs do not support an extended range. If you select Extended Range
for a hanger with Lisega springs, CAESAR II returns the standard Lisega spring table and
ranges.
Cold Load Spring Hanger Design
Cold load spring hanger design is a method of designing the springs in which the hot (or
operating) load is supported in the cold (or installed) position of the piping. This method of
spring design offers several advantages over the more usual hot load design:
Hanger stops are easier to remove.
There is no excessive movement from the neutral position when the system is cold or
when the stops are removed.
Spring loads can be adjusted before the system is brought up to temperature.
Some feel that the cold load approach yields a much more dependable design.
Operating loads on connected equipment are lower in some system configurations. A
hot vertical riser anchored at the bottom turning horizontally into a nozzle connection is
a typical configuration resulting in this load-reduction. The spring to be designed is at
the elbow adjacent to the nozzle. Operating loads are lower because the difference
between the hot and cold loads counters the moment produced by the vertical thermal
expansion from the anchor.

The disadvantages to cold load design are:

In some systems, the loads on rotating equipment may be increased by a value
proportional to the spring rate times the travel in the hot condition.
Most installations are done on a hot load design basis.
Middle of the Table Hanger Design (Hot Load Centered)
Many designers prefer that the hot load be centered as closely as possible to the middle of
the spring table. This provides as much variability as possible in both directions before the
spring bottoms out when the system is hot. This design was necessary prior to effective
computer modeling of piping systems, when the weights at hangers were approximated by
chart methods or calculated by hand. Activating this option does not guarantee that spring
hot loads are at the middle of the spring table, but CAESAR II makes every effort to move
the hot load to this position. The CAESAR II design algorithm goes to a higher size spring if
the design load is closer to the middle of the larger spring's range, but never switches spring
types. This option, when it is effective, can only result in a one-size larger spring. CAESAR II
attempts to move the hot load to the next higher spring when it is within 10% of the
maximum travel range for the spring. If the new spring is not satisfactory, then CAESAR II
uses the old one.
Specifies the multiple load case design option. Whenever more than one thermal load case is
used in the hanger sizing algorithm, CAESAR II must know how you want to weigh the results
from the different cases. There are currently 13 different methods that you can use for multiple
load case hanger design selection. These 13 methods are described in greater detail under the
hanger auxiliary data section.
1. Design per Load Case #1
10. Design for the maximum operating load
11. Design for the maximum travel
12. Design for the average load and the average travel
13. Design for the maximum load and the maximum travel

Piping Input menu: Model > Seismic Wizard

Wizards toolbar: Static Seismic Wizard
Selects a seismic code and its associated data.
The wizard computes the applicable g factor and fills in the appropriate data cells. X-component
is set into Vector 1, Y-component is set into Vector 2, and Z-component is set into Vector 3; all
other load components are set to zero.
A warning displays if the current element has uniform loads defined.
Because the wizard sets data in gravitational loading, you must verify other uniform load
definitions for correctness.
Specifies the design code and edition for the current job. You can select ASCE 7-05/IBC 2006,
ASCE 7-10/IBC 2012, ASCE 7-16, CFE Sismo, KHK 1997, NBC 2005, or NBC 2010.
ASCE Static Seismic Wizard (on page 293)
CFE Sismo Static Seismic Wizard (on page 295)
KHK Static Seismic Wizard (on page 297)
NBC Static Seismic Wizard (on page 305)
Computes the static g-factor based on the ASCE 7 (or IBC) methodology. Select your Seismic
Design Code edition.
CAESAR II displays the calculated gravity factor on the Uniform Loads tab.
Specifies the component importance factor from ASCE #7 Section 11.5.1. Type 1.5 for
life-safety components, components containing hazardous material, or components that are
required for continuous operation. Type 1.0 for all others.
Specifies the component response modification factor, from ASCE #7 Table 13.6-1. In
accordance with ASME B31, the software provides 3.5 as the default value for piping with joints
made by welding or brazing. Type a value range as low as 3.0 for other joints and for less
ductile materials.

Specifies the maximum mapped MCE spectral response acceleration at short periods according
to Section 11.4.1, Chapter 22 Seismic Ground Motion and Long-period Transition Maps
provide values for Ss.
Specifies the site class code. Based on the soil properties, the site is classified as Site Class A,
B, C, D, E, or F according to Chapter 20, Site Classification Procedure for Seismic Design. If
you do not know the soil properties in sufficient detail to determine the site class, use Site Class
D.
Specifies the ratio of height in structure at the point of attachment over the average height of the
supporting structure.
Specifies the component amplification factor from Table 13.6-1. Type 2.5 for distribution system,
such as piping. This term reflects the relationship of the piping response to the structure
response.
Specifies the period of time for a longer-period structure when generating an ASCE 7 Spectrum
Type in Dynamic Analysis. TL is determined from maps provided by ASCE, similar to zone
maps, for all 50 states. ASCE 7-2005 and ASCE 7-2010 reference the maps in section 11.4.5.
For further information on the Seismic Wizard see the example below and ASCE 7 Wind and
Seismic Load Combinations (on page 992).
Importance Factor IP = 1
Component Response Modification Factor RP = 3.5, from Table 13.6-1, "Piping in accordance
with ASME B31,"
Mapped MCE Spectral Response Acceleration Ss = 1.552, Mapped MCE Spectral Response
Acceleration at short periods according to Section 11.4.1.
Site Coefficient (Fa) = 1.0 for Site Class D, according to Table 11.4-1.
Maximum Considered Earthquake MCE SMS - The MCE is adjusted for site class effects as
defined in Section 11.4.3,
SMS = Fa SS = 1.552
SDS - Design elastic response acceleration at short period (0.2 sec), from Section 11.4.4.
SDS= 2/3 SMS = 2/3 * 1.552 = 1.0347
The appropriate seismic acceleration is aH
= [ (0.4aPSDS) / ( RP / IP )] ( 1 + 2z/h)
= [(0.4 x 2.5 x 1.0347)/(3.5/1.0)](1 + 2 * 0.5)

= 0.59126
Check limits on aH:
aH <= 1.6 * SDS* IP = 1.6 * 1.0347 * 1.0 = 1.65552
aH >= 0.3 * SDS * IP = 0.3 * 1.0347 * 1.0 = 0.31041
aH = 0.31041
aH = 0.2 SDS= 0.2 * 1.0347 = 0.20694,
Section 13.1.7 states, "The earthquake loads determined in accordance with Section 13.3.1
shall be multiplied by a factor of 0.7."
aH = 0.7 * 0.31041 = 0.2173
av = 0.7 * 0.20694 = 0.1149
Computes the static g-factor based on the Manual De Diseno por Sismo (Seismic Design
Manual) 1993 methodology.
Specifies the seismic zone. Zone D is the zone of highest seismic activity. Zone A is the least
active. For more information, review the Manual De Diseno por Sismo (Seismic Design
Manual). A map with different regions displays on page 1.3.29.
Specifies the structural group as defined in the following table:
Group A High Degree of Safety
Group B Intermediate Degree of Safety
Group C Low Degree of Safety

Specifies the soil type as defined in the following table:
Ground deposits formed exclusively by layers with propagation velocity bo = 700

I Hard Soil
m/s or modulus of rigidity >= 85000 t/m2
Ground deposits with fundamental period of vibration and effective velocity of

II Med. Soil
propagation which meets the condition: c 5 5 c c c
Ground deposits with fundamental period of effective vibration of propagation

III Soft Soil
which meets the conditions: c 5 5 c c c
Specifies the period of first natural mode of the piping system in seconds.
Specifies the increase factor. The Mexican Earthquake Code considers an SRSS type effect on
the structure. This value scales up the earthquake loads in a linear (Scalar) fashion. This value
is traditionally 1.118 and should always be greater or equal to 1.0.
For further information on CFE Sismo, see the example below.

For seismic zone D and soil type I, the following parameters are found in Table 3.1.
a0 = 0.50
C = 0.50
Ta (s) = 0.0
Tb (s) = 0.0
r=½
If T> Tb , then
a = c ( Ta / Tb)r = 0.50 * (0.6 / 1.15) ^ 0.5 = 0.3612
For a structure group of A High Safety, the acceleration is multiplied by 1.5
a = 0.3612 * 1.5 = 0.5417

Computes the static g-factor based on the High Pressure Gas Safety Institute of Japan (KHK)
1997 methodology.
Specifies the earthquake level factor. Select 1 for a level 1 earthquake or 2 for a level 2
earthquake.

Specifies the seismic zone, as defined in the following graphic. Select SA, A, B, or C.
Source: Seismic Design Standard for the High Pressure Gas Facilities, HIgh Pressure Gas
Safety Institute of Japan (KHK). Article 3. MITI Notice No. 515 dated Oct. 26, 1981. Amended
Notice No. 143 dated Mar 25, 1997.
2.).
Zone 2 2
SA 1.0 1.0
(special A)
A 0.8 0.8
B 0.65 0.7

C 0.4 0.7
Specifies the type of soil. Select 1, 2, 3, or 4.

3.).
Soil
Profile Type of Soil Soil Factor
Value 3
1 Before tertiary deposit ground 1.4
2 Diluvial deposit ground 2.0
3 All types other than 1, 2, and 4 2.0
4 The thickness of soil fill or 2.0

alluvial deposit is 25m or more
Specifies the importance class as designated by the type of gas, storage capacity (W), and
distance of the transmission pipe layout (X). Select Ia, I, II, or III.
The importance cl 1.).
Importance
Importance Factor
Class 1
Ia 1.00
I 0.80
II 0.65
III 0.5
1 1 1 shall be 0.33.
The importance class is defined by Article 3, Tables (a), (b), and (c) of Seismic Design
Standard for the High Pressure Gas Facilities, High Pressure Gas Safety Institute of Japan
(KHK). MITI Notice No. 515 dated Oct. 26, 1981. Amended Notice No. 143 dated Mar 25,
1997.

Specifies the damping factor used to determine the modification (or response compensation)
factor.
Source: Seismic Design Standard for the High Pressure Gas Facilities, High Pressure Gas
Safety Institute of Japan (KHK). Article 6, Fig. (c). MITI Notice No. 515 dated Oct. 26, 1981.
Amended Notice No. 143 dated Mar 25, 1997.
Specifies the natural period of the seismic structure in seconds.
Specifies the vertic 6), typically 1.5 for a skirt-supported tower

and 2.0 for other structures.
Specifies the horizontal response magnificat 5), the product of the standard response
magnification factor and the response compensation factor.
The standard response magnification factor is defined in the following graphics.

For SA and A seismic zones:
Safety Institute of Japan (KHK). Article 6, Fig. (a). MITI Notice No. 515 dated Oct. 26, 1981.

For B and C seismic zones:
Safety Institute of Japan (KHK). Article 6, Fig. (b). MITI Notice No. 515 dated Oct. 26, 1981.

For Seismic Level 2:
Safety Institute of Japan (KHK). Fig 7.3-1. MITI Notice No. 515 dated Oct. 26, 1981. Amended
Notice No. 143 dated Mar 25, 1997.
When a plastic response is expected for a strong earthquake, the natural period of
the structure may move to a longer period. As a result, the response in a shorter period takes
the maximum (peak) value for each response spectrum.
The height of the supporting frame (Ht).
Height at the supporting point of the pipe-supporting structure.

1.0.
The seismic wizard computes the g-factors for the three global directions and defines the
uniform load vector on the selected element. The wizard uses the specified height of the
associated support elevation of the element to compute the seismic coefficient distribution factor
(µ). The computed uniform load vector is applied (that is, carried forward) to all subsequent
elements until changed. If the support elevation changes or if the support is a vessel, you may
need to use the wizard multiple times.
Seismic Level = 2
Seismic Zone = SA
Soil Profile = 1
Importance Class = Ia
Damping Factor = 0.030000
Natural Period = 0.200000
6) = 2.000000
8) = 2.000000
Height of Supporting Structure (Ht) = 10.000000
Height at Support Point (H) = 10.000000
Seismic Coefficient Distribution Factor (µ) = 1.200000
Elevation unit label = meters
Earthquake Level Factor = 2.000000

1) = 1.000000
2) = 1.000000
1 2 = 1.000000
3) = 1.400000
9) = 2.000000
Horizontal Seismic Coefficient (Kh) = 0.420000
Vertical Seismic Coefficient (Kv) = 0.210000
Standard Response Magnification Factor = 3.000000
(Damping) Compensation Modification Factor = 1.180000
Horizontal Response Magnification Factor ( ) = 3.540000

Design Modified Horizontal Seismic Coeff (Kmh) = 1.486800

Design Modified Vertical Seismic Coeff (Kmv) = 0.420000
Seismic Coefficient Distribution Factor (µ) = 1.200000
Design Modified Horizontal g-factor = 3.568320
Design Modified Vertical g-factor = 0.840000
Computes the static g-factor based on the NBC 2005 methodology.

Specifies the importance factor as defined in Article 4.1.8.5 as defined in the following table:
Importance Category Importance Factor (IE)
Low 0.8
Normal 1.0
High 1.3
Post-disaster 1.5
Specifies the site classification for the seismic site response from Table 4.1.8.4.A.
Specifies the spectral response acceleration value at 0.2 seconds as defined in Paragraph
4.1.8.4.(1).
Specifies the component elevation ratio. The values hx and hn are the height above the base to
level n or x respectively. The base of the structure is the level at which horizontal earthquake
motions are imparted to the structure.

Specifies the force amplification factor from Table 4.1.8.17.
Specifies the component factor from Table 4.1.8.17.
Specifies the component response modification factor from Table 4.1.8.17.
For further information on the use of the Static Seismic Wizard see the example below.
Importance Factor IE = 1.0 for a "Normal" category by Table 4.1.8.5.
The Site Class is "C" for "Very dense soil and soft rock" by Table 1.1.8.4.A:
Sa (0.2) = 0.55, spectral response acceleration value at 0.2 s, as defined in Sentence
4.1.8.4.(1).
According to Table 4.1.8.4.B.,Fa = 1.0:
Sp = Cp Ar Ax / Rp = 1 * 1 * (1 + 2 * 0.5) / 3 = 0.6667
Cp = 1, Ar = 1 and Rp = 3 according to Table 4.1.8.17.
The maximum value of Sp is 4.0 and minimum value of Sp is 0.7, therefore:
Sp = 0.7
aH= 0.3 * Fa Sa (0.2)IE Sp = 0.3 * 1.0 * 0.55 * 1.0 * 0.7 = 0.1155

Piping Input menu: Model > Optimization Wizard

Wizards toolbar: Optimization Wizard
Assists with expansion loop design.
This wizard allows you to specify the element into which the loop should be incorporated, the
loop type, the item to be optimized - nodal stress or restraint load, and the target value to which
the item should be optimized. The optimization routines run the analysis several times to arrive
at an acceptable loop size such that the code stress or restraint load on the target element is at
the specified limit. Besides offering the opportunity to specify various loop configurations and a
selection of height to width ratios, the wizard also provides an option to allow CAESAR II to
select the most economical (based on length of pipe and number of bends) of those possible.
The Optimization Wizard automatically chooses the most economical loop solution
based on your target input. If there is an issue with the target input or loop sizing, the wizard
prompts you and attempts to insert the most ideal loop possible. However, you can always
revise your target input or loop sizing and re-run the wizard.
To use the optimization wizard, the job must be run at least once so that there is an issue, such
as an overstress, to resolve. These results must be current. The process is illustrated by the
example LOOP-WIZARD.C2, as displayed below.
Reviewing the results of the LOOP-WIZARD job shows that it is suffering an expansion
overstress of 46,741 psi. The allowable value at node 20 is 41,288 psi. This is due to the
expansion of the long run 60-140. A loop should be installed somewhere along that run. The
questions are where, and how big should it be?

Before you start the Loop Optimizer, examine the area of the plant surrounding the piping
system. To do this, import the CADWorx (or AutoCAD) plant model, using the CADWorx Model
command. In this case, import the ...\EXAMPLES\LOOP-WIZARD-PLANT\OVERALL.DWG
model. This model shows that there is a convenient area to place a loop beside element 60-70.

Select element 60-70 and then click Model > Optimization Wizard start the Loop
Optimization Wizard. The Loop Design Wizard dialog box displays.

1. Loop 60-70 is already indicated as the element upon which the loop is installed. You can
change this value by selecting a different value from the list, or by selecting other elements
in the model.
2. Click Stress as the optimization type. Optionally, you can optimize restraint load
components as well.
3. Select EXP from the Load Case list. This fills in the element list showing stresses on the left
side of the dialog box.
4. Type 36,000 in the Stress box to define a target maximum stress. This value refines the
element list, so that it displays only those elements with stress levels higher than the target.
5. Select the Max Stress box to limit the maximum stress in the system to the target value.
6. Select the Loop Type from the available icons. For this example, select the first loop type.
7. Select <none> from the Height to Width Ratio list to allow the loop height to vary to any
size while keeping the width constant. In this case, the terminal run of pipe is set to one
bend radius with the loop width fixed to the remaining length of element 60-70.

At this point, there are two alternatives to indicating where the loop should be placed.
8. Click Draw Cube to generate a transparent cube anchored on the selected element. You
can adjust the size and location of this cube by using the mouse. Use the corner points (Pt1
or Pt2) to adjust the major direction of the loop and the available space. Use the triangle to
adjust the minor axis of the loop and the available space. Drag the cube over the decking
adjacent to element 60-70 to build a cube with a Major dimension of 17ft 11 inches in the X
direction.

9. After the dialog box is complete, Click Design to start the optimization procedure.
The progress of the design scheme displays. After the loop is designed, you are informed of
how much pipe and how many bends were required to create the loop.
10. Click Undo to restart the Loop Wizard using different loop types. You can use this
information to find the most economical implementation.
When the optimizer finishes, the new expansion loop is inserted into the selected element.

11. Run a final analysis to verify all results. There are instances where the optimizer reports an
error. Examples of such situations are: (a) requesting a loop insertion in an element that is
not long enough, or (b) setting an impossible target maximum.
Selecting the special loop type enables CAESAR II to select the best loop to reach the
indicated target. This loop type is indicated on the dialog box by a lightning bolt. The best
characteristic of each loop is based on the relative cost of bends to straight pipe. When you
select the lightning bolt loop type, the Bend Cost Factor box activates. The default value of
100 indicates that a bend costs 100 times as much as the equivalent length of straight pipe.
Adjust this value as necessary.

The Loop Optimization Wizard automates the sizing of expansion loops in a piping system.
Specifies the type of output value to optimize or reduce. You can use the Loop Design Wizard
to improve Stress levels or Restraint load components for any piping loop in a model.
Specifies the load case for which to reduce an output value. Adding a loop may well solve a
problem in a displacement-driven load case (Operating or Expansion) but not in a force-driven
load case (Sustained or Occasional).
After you select the Load Case value, the software displays Stress or Restraint Load output
values for review and selection.
Specifies the target level to which you would like to reduce the output value. Typing a stress
value (or a Load, in conjunction with a Load Component type) acts as a filter, showing only
elements which have stress values exceeding that level. This target value also becomes the
stress or load for which the selected target (Maximum System Stress, Restraint Load
Component, or Node) is optimized.
Design is not activated until you designate both a Target and Optimization Type.
Optimizes the maximum stress level in the system (as opposed to a stress level at a single
node) to the value in the Target Data box.
Specifies either the node at which the stress level is to be optimized (and the element upon
which that node is located) or the node at which a restraint load component is to be optimized
(along with the Load Component Type). Double-click one of the entries in the
Element/Node/Stress list or a Load Component in the Restraint Load to automatically fill in
these entries.

For Stress Optimization:

Specifies the element on which the node for which the stress level is to be optimized is located.
Double-click one of the entries in the Element/Node/Stress list to automatically fill in this entry.
For Restraint Load Optimization:
Specifies the restraint load component which is to be optimized. Double-click one of the Load
Component entries in the Restraint Load list to automatically fill in this entry.
Displays the items which you can double-click to automatically fill in the entries designating the
item (either nodal stress or restraint load component) for which the results should be optimized.
Specifies the element which is replaced by the loop. You can select the element from the list or
from the model. The Loop Optimization Wizard can only be used to substitute loops in place of
single elements.
Specifies the general configuration of the loop.
Type #1
Places the loop at the From end of the original element in the plane of the Major Direction.
Type #2
Places a 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop at the From end of the original element,
first in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the plane of the Minor Direction.
Type #3
Places the loop in the middle of the original element in the plane of the Major Direction.
Type #4
Places 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop in the middle of the original element, first
in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the plane of the Minor Direction.
Type #5
Places the loop at the To end of the original element, in the plane of the Major Direction.

Type #6
Places 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop at the To end of the original element, first
in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the plane of the Minor Direction.
Type # 7
Builds a loop of the same size as the original element.
Type # 8
Builds a 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop of the same size as the original element,
first in the Major Direction and then in the Minor Direction.
Type #9
Causes CAESAR II to try all eight loop types and find the most economically efficient
solution based on total pipe length and number of bends.
Specifies the relative cost of a bend relative to straight pipe. This value is used when CAESAR II
is asked to select the most economic loop design. For example, if a bend (including hardware,
fabrication, and other costs) costs 100 times as much as the same length of straight pipe, then
the appropriate value would be 100.0.
Specifies the loop height to width ratio that should be maintained when building the loop.
Available options are 2.0, 1.0, 0.5, and none.
Select none if the segments of the selected loop configurations still coincide with the original
element run. For example, segment #4 of Loop Type #1, segment #6 of Loop Type #2,
segments #1 and #5 of Loop Type #3, segments #1 and #7 of Loop Type #4, or segment #1 of
Loop Types #5 and #6 have a length equal to exactly the length of a long radius bend.
This entry does not apply in the event that Loop Types #7 or #8 were selected. In this case, the
height to width ratio is not used. The height varies as necessary and the width is held constant
to the length necessary to make up the original element length. This last option is often
preferable in areas where there is limited room for wide loops.
Graphically creates the anticipated area where the loop is installed. This cube may then be
resized or moved to reflect the preferred area for the loop. The Loop Optimization Wizard tries
to design a loop that fits in the allocated space.

Specifies the direction and distance of the primary direction of the loop.
Specifies direction and distance of the secondary direction of a 2-D loop.
Specifies the maximum available space for the loop in the major direction.
Specifies the maximum available space for the loop in the minor direction.
Begins the loop optimization process. If an appropriate loop cannot be designed, you must
change some of the parameters and try again.
Piping Input menu: Model > Line Numbers

Organization Tools toolbar: Line Numbers
Displays the Line Numbers dialog box.
Controls options of the line number or name for a pipeline/pipe run containing one or more pipe
elements. You can set options for line numbers on the Classic Piping Input and the Static
Output Processor.
Create (Create from Selection)

Creates a pipe run from the selected elements. You can select elements from the 3D model
or the Line Numbers dialog box. The line number is given the default name Line Number
<x>, where <x> is a sequential number. This option is only available in Classic Piping
Input.
Remove (Remove Line Number)

Deletes the selected pipe run line numbers. Elements in the pipeline move to the next line
number up in the sequence. This option is only available in Classic Piping Input.
You can also right-click select Remove Line Number.
Reset (Reset Settings)

Returns settings for all line numbers and their elements to their default values. Use the drop
down to select Reset Visibility, Reset Color, or Reset All.
You can also right-click on a line and select Reset Visibility, Reset Color, or

Reset All to only reset the selected line number.
Line number and element rows display in a tree view. Elements are named by their beginning
and ending node numbers. You can create a view using the following methods:
Select a row to change the visibility to 100%. Clear a row to change the visibility to 0%.
When you select or clear a line number, the software also selects or clears all of line
number's elements. You can then select or clear individual elements.
Select or clear Main to change the selection of all line numbers and elements. You can then
select or clear individual line numbers and elements.
Press SHIFT + click to select multiple line numbers or multiple elements.
Previous (Previous View)

Saves the current view and returns to the previous view. If no view is saved, all rows are
selected.
This option is not available in the Static Output Processor.
Invert (Invert Selection)

Reverses the line number selection to clear the selection of previously-selected rows and to
select the rows not previously selected.
<type here to search>
Limits the elements that display in the Line Numbers dialog box to pipe run line numbers or
elements that match the text in this field. Clear this field to display all line numbers and
elements in the tree view. You can search for a name or a node number.
Show/Hide
Turns the display of line numbers and elements on or off. Clear a line number to reduce
visibility to 0% for the line number and its elements. Clear an element to reduce visibility to
0% for only that element.

If node numbers are turned on, node numbers do not display when the element
opacity is 0%. For more information on displaying node numbers, see Node Numbers (on
page 378).
Visibility
Specifies the opacity of line numbers and elements. 100% indicates that the element is
opaque. 0% indicates that the element is invisible. Specify the value of a line number to
change opacity for the line number and its elements. Specify the value of an element to
change opacity for only that element.
If node numbers are turned on, the node number opacity matches the element
opacity. For more information on displaying node numbers, see Node Numbers (on page
378).
Color
Displays the Color dialog box from which you can specify a color for a line number and its
elements.
Name
Displays the name of line number and elements. Click on a line number to change its name.
See Also
Line Number (on page 251)
Environment Menu
Performs actions associated with miscellaneous items.
Piping Input menu: Environment > Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes

Input Tools toolbar: Intersection SIF scratchpad
Displays the Node Selection dialog box.
Controls options for selecting the node.

Enter intersection Node Number to be reviewed
Specifies the number of the node where you want to evaluate the stress intensification
factors.
OK
Displays the Review Intersection SIF's dialog box.
Controls options for reviewing intersection SIFs.

The boxes that display in this dialog box depend upon the piping code you select for
the job. The following list details all possible boxes that the software can display in this dialog

box. The first section shows the most common dialog boxes, but other code-specific inputs
below that.
Node
regardless of any parameter in the setup file. This option is commonly used to intensify injector
tie-ins at bends, or dummy legs, or other bend attachment-type of supports.
Type
Specifies the type of tee or joint.
For non-FRP piping codes, there are six types of tees and ten types of joints. These
elements correspond to 1 to 6 and 7 to 16 in the table Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF
Calculations (Except for ISO 14692)* (on page 139).
For BS 7159 and UKOOA, there are two types of tees: Moulded and Fabricated. Moulded
tee corresponds to either the Welding (3) or Extruded (6) welding tee Type. Fabricated tee
corresponds to a tee Type of Reinforced (1).
For IGE/TD/12, there are 11 types of tees and joints. For specialized diagrams of tee type
with this code, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page 157).
For ISO 14692, there are three types of tee and joints: Tee (1), Qualified Tee (3), and Joint
(2). Select 1 - Tee for the software to use the method specified in the ISO 14692 code for
non-qualified tees. Select 2 - Joint for CAESAR II to use the calculations specified in the
code for joints and fittings. Select 3 - Qualified Tee for the software to use the

code-specified calculation for qualified service stress for tees (including the pressure stress
multiplier, mpst).
ASME NC and ND piping codes do not include equations for SIFs with a tee Type of
Sweepolet (4), Weldolet (5), or Extruded (6). When you specify one of these tee types,
CAESAR II uses B31.1 equations.
Pad Thk
Specifies the thickness of the reinforcing pad for reinforced fabricated or full encirclement tees
(intersection type #1 and #17, respectively). The pad thickness is only valid for these
intersection types. If the thickness of a type #1 or type #17 intersection is left blank or the value
entered is zero, the software uses the SIFs for an unreinforced fabricated tee.
In most piping codes, the beneficial effect of the pad thickness is limited to 1.5 times the nominal
thickness of the header. This factor does not apply in BS 806 or Z184, and is 2.5 in the Swedish
piping code.
Ftg Ro
Specifies the fitting outside radius for branch connections. This option is used for reduced
branch connections in the ASME and B31.1 piping codes, Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets, and
for WRC 329 intersection SIF calculations. Configuration options exist to invoke the WRC 329
calculations and to limit the application of the reduced branch connection rules to unreinforced
fabricated tees, sweepolets, weldolets, and extruded welding tees. If omitted, Ftg Ro defaults to
the outside radius of the branch pipe. Specifies the following terms for each component type:
157).
157).
Weldolet
157).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
157).
157).
157).
Weldoflange
157).
Crotch R

Specifies the crotch radius of the formed lip on an extruded welding tee, intersection type 6.
This is also the intersection weld crotch radius for WRC329 calculations. Specifying this
value can result in a 50% reduction in the stress intensification at the WRC 329 intersection.
If you attempt to reduce the stress riser at a fabricated intersection by guaranteeing that
there is a smooth transition radius from the header to the branch pipe, then you may reduce
the resulting stress intensification by a factor of 2.0.
Weld ID
IGE/TD/12
Weld(d)
Specifies the average circumferential weld mismatch measured at the inside diameter of the
pipe. This value is used for Butt Welds and Tapered transitions. This is the average; not the
maximum mismatch. You must verify that any maximum mismatch requirements are
satisfied for your particular code.
Fillet
Specifies the fillet leg length. This option is used only in conjunction with a socket weld
component. This value is the length of the shorter leg for an unequal leg fillet weld. If a fillet
leg is given, both socket weld types result in the same SIF. See appendix D of the B31
piping codes for further clarification.
Header OD
Specifies the actual outside diameter of the header matching pipe.
Header Thk
Specifies the actual wall thickness of the header matching pipe.
Branch OD
Specifies the actual outside diameter of the matching pipe.
Branch Thk
Specifies the actual wall thickness of the matching pipe.
Header SIF(i)
Displays the SIF in-plane for the header.

Header SIF(o)
Displays the SIF out-of-plane for the header.
Branch SIF(i)
Displays the SIF in-plane for the branch.
Branch SIF(o)
Displays the SIF out-of-plane for the branch.
Flexibility Characteristic
Displays the flexibility characteristic. For more information on how wall thickness is used in
the flexibility characteristic (h) equation, see Wall Thickness of Bend (on page 855).
Branch Section Modulus
Displays the branch section modulus.
Recalculate
Displays the SIFs after you enter a different set of data. If you change the input data,
CAESAR II allows you to transfer the data back to a CAESAR II model.
The following inputs appear only when you select certain piping codes.
Do/r3
157).
Weldolet
157).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
157).
Weldoflange
157).
T/Th/Tb
Weldolet
page 157).

Drawn/Extruded Tee
Weldoflange
page 157).
Te/Tb
157).
157).
Weldolet
157).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
157).
157).
157).
Weldoflange
157).
rp/do
Fabricated Tee
157).
157).
Weldolet
157).

Drawn/Extruded Tee
157).
157).
Weldoflange
157).
r2/rc
Fabricated Tee
157).
157).
Sweepolet
Specifies the rc value. For more information on rc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page 157).
Weldolet
157).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
157).
157).
Weldoflange
157).r1/Tc/Lh
Fabricated Tee
157).
Specifies the Tc value. For more information on Tc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
157).
Sweepolet

157).
Weldolet
157).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Lh value. For more information on Lh, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
157).
157).
Weldoflange
Specifies the r1 value. For more information on r1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page 157).
L1/Lb
Fabricated Tee
157).
Weldolet
157).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Lb value. For more information on Lb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
157).
157).
Weldoflange
157).
Ferric Material for Note 3673.2b-1.3
Indicates that the material for this tee is ferrous, which enables the Y value to be computed
on the highest temperature value specified. This option is available for when you select
ASME NC and ASME ND in the Piping Code ID list.

Piping Input menu: Environment > Review SIFs at Bend Nodes

Input Tools toolbar: Bend SIF scratchpad
Displays the Node Selection dialog box.
Controls options for selecting the node.

Enter bend Node Number to be reviewed
Specifies the node number where you want to evaluate the stress intensification factors.
OK
Displays the Review Bend SIF's dialog box.
Controls options for reviewing bend SIFs.

Node
Displays the node number.
Bend Radius
Displays the bend radius. CAESAR II assumes a long radius by default. You can override this
value. Alternatively, select a value from the list.
Long
Indicates a long radius bend. The radius is equal to 1.5 times the nominal diameter.
Short
Indicates a short radius bend. The radius is equal to the nominal pipe diameter.
3D
5D
Indicates a 5D bend. The radius is equal to 5 times the nominal diameter.Bend Type
Specifies the bend type. For most codes, this refers to the number of attached flanges and can
be selected from the list. If there are no flanges on the bend, leave Type blank. A bend should
be considered flanged if there is any heavy or rigid body within two diameters of the bend that
significantly restricts the bends ability to ovalize.
When using the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes with Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe, this
entry refers to the material laminate type and may be 1, 2, or 3. These laminate types are
All chopped strand mat (CSM) constructing with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.

The laminate type affects the calculation of flexibility factors and stress intensification factors for
the BS 7159 and UKOOA Codes only.
For ISO 14692, only type 3 filament-wound laminate is considered.Bend Angle
Displays the bend angle.
Fitting Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the bend if that thickness is different than the thickness of the
matching pipe. If the thickness is greater than the matching pipe wall thickness, then the inside
diameter of the bend is smaller than the inside diameter of the matching pipe. CAESAR II
calculates section modulus for stress computations based on the properties of the matching pipe
as defined by the codes.
The pipe thickness is used twice when calculating SIFs and flexibility factors; once as Tn, and
once when determining the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe in the equation for the
flexibility characteristic (h):
h = (Tn)(R) / (r2)
R = Bend radius
r = Mean cross-sectional radius of matching pipe
= (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter of matching pipe
WT = Wall Thickness of matching pipe
Most codes use the actual thickness of the fitting (this entry) for Tn, and the wall thickness of the
matching pipe for the calculation of the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe (the WT value).
More specifically, the individual codes use the two wall thicknesses as follows:
B31.1 Fitting Fitting
B31.8 Ch VIII Fitting Matching Pipe
SECT III NC Fitting Matching Pipe
SECT III ND Fitting Matching Pipe

Z662 Matching Pipe Matching Pipe
NAVY 505 Fitting Fitting
B31.1 (1967) Fitting Fitting
SWEDISH Fitting Matching Pipe
BS 806 N/A N/A
STOOMWEZEN N/A N/A
RCC-M C/D Matching Matching Pipe

Pipe
CODETI Fitting Fitting
NORWEGIAN Fitting Fitting
FDBR Fitting Fitting
BS 7159 Fitting Fitting
UKOOA Fitting Fitting
IGE/TD/12 Fitting Fitting
EN-13480 Fitting Matching Pipe
GPTC/Z380 Fitting Matching Pipe
The bend fitting thickness (FTG) is always used as the pipe thickness in the stiffness matrix
calculations. However, the thickness of the matching pipe (WT) is always used in the bend
stress calculations.Number of Miter Cuts
Displays the number of cuts in the bend if it is mitered. When you type a number, CAESAR II
checks if the mitered bend input is closely or widely spaced. If the bend is determined to be
widely spaced, and the number of miter cuts is greater than one, the bend should be broken
The number of cuts and the radius of the bend are all that is required to calculate the SIFs and
flexibilities for the bend as defined in the B31 codes. The bend radius and the bend miter
spacing are related by the following equations:
Closely Spaced Miters
R = S / (2 tan
q = Bend Angle / (2 n) where n = number of miter cuts
Widely Spaced Miters
R = r2 (1.0 + cot q) / 2.0

r2 = (ri + ro) / 2.0

Seam Weld
Indicates that the bend is seam welded.
B31.3
If the B31.3 piping code is active, the Seam Welded check box is used to activate the Wl
box for bends. The Wl box is the weld strength reduction factor used to determine the
minimum wall thickness of the bend element.
B31.3 Chapter IX
Not used.
IGE/TD/12
Used by IGE/TD/12 to calculate the stress intensification factors due to seam welded elbow
fabrication as opposed to extruded elbow fabrication. This option is only available when
IGE/TD/12 is active.Matching Pipe OD
Specifies the outside diameter of the matching pipe. This is used in the average
cross-sectional radius calculation:
r2 = (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter as entered
WT = Wall Thickness of attached pipe
The B31.3 (1993) code defines r2 as the mean radius of matching pipe.
Matching Pipe Thk
Specifies the match pipe wall thickness. You should not subtract any corrosion. All SIF
calculations are made ignoring corrosion. This wall thickness is used in the mean radius (r2)
calculation as defined in the piping codes.
Elastic Modulus
Specifies the elastic modulus among EC, E1 to E9. This value is used for the pressure
stiffening calculations.
Pressure
Specifies the pressures among PMax, P1 to P9, PHydro and none. This value is used for
the pressure stiffening calculations.
Bend In-Plane SIF
Displays the SIF under in-plane bending.
Bend Out-of-Plane SIF
Displays the SIF under out-of-plane bending.
In-Plane Flexibility Factor
Displays the flexibility factor under in-plane bending.
Out-of-Plane Flexibility Factor
Displays the flexibility factor under out-of-plane bending.
Flexibility Characteristic

Displays the pipe factor.

Recalculate
Displays the SIFs after you enter a different set of data. If you change the input data,
CAESAR II allows you to transfer the data back to a CAESAR II model.
Piping Input menu: Environment > Special Execution Parameters
Input Tools toolbar: Special execution options

Displays the Special Execution Parameters dialog box. These parameters remain set for that
particular job.
Indicates whether forces are printed on rigid elements and expansion joints. Forces and
moments are not normally printed for these elements because the forces that act on these
elements can usually be read directly from the forces that act on the adjacent pipe elements.
Select this option to cause forces and moments to be calculated and printed for all rigid
elements and expansion joints in the system.
Indicates whether the software prints alphas and pipe properties. CAESAR II prints the thermal
expansion coefficients along with the pipe, insulation, fluid, and refractory weights in the error
checker. This report can be very useful during error checking to help identify possible problems
in the temperature or weight input specifications. Rigid elements and expansion joints are
treated the same as straight pipe. Rigid weights and insulation cladding factors are not reflected
in this table.
Specifies the Bourdon effects option to use. Choose the option from the drop list to activate the
Bourdon pressure effect. The Bourdon pressure effect causes straight pipes to elongate, or
displace along their axes, and causes curved pipes or bends to elongate along the line that
connects the bends near and far nodes. If the Bourdon effect is not activated, there are no
global displacements due to pressure. The Bourdon effect is always considered when plastic
pipe is used, regardless of the setting of the Activate Bourdon Effects option.
By default, CAESAR II does not include the Bourdon effect in the analysis of steel piping
systems. That is, there are no displacements of the system due to pressure.
As an option, you can include pressure displacement effects. These effects can be appreciable
in long runs of pipe or in high pressure, large diameter bends adjacent to sensitive equipment.
Bourdon effects are almost always important in fiberglass reinforced plastic piping systems. For
this reason, the Bourdon (Translational) is automatically turned on for all FRP pipe runs and
bends.
Two Bourdon options are available:

Use the Translation only option when the elbows in the system are forged or welded
fittings and can reasonably be assumed to have a circular cross section.
Use the Translational & Rotational option when the bends in the system are fabricated by
the hot or cold bending of straight pipe. In these cases, the slight residual ovalization of the
bend cross section, after bending, causes the bend to try to straighten out when
pressurized. Fixed end moments are associated with this opening. These fixed end
moments do not exist when the original shape of the bend cross-section is circular.
Specifies how branch error and coordinate prompts display. You are prompted for two pieces of
information:
The loop closure tolerance.
The global coordinates of the first point of the piping system and each following piece of the
piping system that is not connected to the first.
This data is needed the first time CAESAR II prepares a global geometry calculation. This
calculation is made on three different occasions:
Before preprocessor plots are generated.
Before global coordinate reports are built.
Before error checking is performed.
Alternatively, you can select Edit > Global and specify the global coordinates to avoid any
prompting.
There are several major uses for this flag:
Set the loop closure tolerance.
Define the elevation of the piping system for wind/wave load calculations.
Give the proper east-west or north-south coordinates for dimension checks.
Move parts of the system around in the plotted output for visual checking.
Whenever you create a physical loop in the piping system, there are at least two different sets of
dimensions between the same points. If the two dimensions are not within a certain tolerance of
each other, a fatal error occurs. You can set this tolerance interactively or in the configuration
file. Select Both for the Branch Error and Coordinate Prompts option to cause CAESAR II to
interactively prompt for this tolerance.
Specifies the temperature differential which exists between the top of the pipe and the bottom of
the pipe. This differential is used to compute an elemental load. It is added to each temperature
case for horizontal pipes.
This entry is computed from the equation:
dT = Ttop - Tbottom
For example, consider a horizontal pipe where the temperature on the top is 20 degrees hotter
than the temperature on the bottom. The proper value to type in this box is 20, not -20.

Indicates whether or not to use liberal stress allowable. Conservative formulation of the
allowable expansion stress range for many codes in CAESAR II is calculated from:
f ( 1.25 Sc + .25 Sh )
When select this option, the difference between Sh and Sl, provided Sh > Sl, is added to the
term inside the parenthesis. That is:
SA(Liberal) = f[ 1.25 Sc + .25 Sh + ( Sh - Sl) ]
The liberal expression is only used when there is at least one sustained stress case in the load
set. If there is more than one sustained stress case in a single problem, then the largest of Sl,
considering all of the sustained cases, for any single element end is chosen to subtract from Sh.
Because the sustained stress varies from one pipe to another, the allowable expansion stress
also varies.
By default, CAESAR II uses the liberal stress allowable setting in the configuration file in its
computation of the expansion stress allowable. New models are created using this configuration
setting. If you do not want to use this default setting for calculating the expansion, clear this
check box.
Specifies whether to use a magnifier of gravitational loading for the uniform load. Uniform load
can be defined either in terms of force per unit length or in terms of a magnifier of gravitational
loading. Uniform load in G's is used most often for static earthquake loadings.
Earthquake loads are occasional loadings and as such are not directly addressed by the
CAESAR II recommended load case logic. You must form your own combination cases at
the output processor level that represent the algebraic sum of the stresses due to sustained
and occasional loads. For more information, see Occasional Load Factor (on page 101).
When you select this option, the radio button is activated on the first Uniform Load
tab in the Piping Input auxiliary panel. You can override this option by selecting the in F/L
option.
Specifies the actual ambient temperature. The default ambient temperature for all elements in
the system is 70°F/21°C. If this does not accurately represent the installed, or zero expansion
strain state, then type the actual value in this box. The ambient temperature is used in
conjunction with the specified hot temperature and the interpolated expansion coefficient to
calculate the thermal expansion per inch of pipe length experienced by the element when going
from the ambient temperature to the hot temperature.
A default ambient temperature can be defined in the configuration file. For more information, see
New Job Ambient Temperature (on page 61). The software uses this configuration file value to
set the ambient temperature when you create a new model.

Specifies the thermal expansion coefficient. The coefficient is used in conjunction with the
temperatures on the Classic Piping Input dialog box for each plastic pipe element to calculate
the thermal strain (linear thermal expansion) for the element.
The default thermal expansion coefficient for fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe is 12.0E-6
in./in./deg.F (21.6E-6 mm./mm./deg.C). If you have a more suitable value for this composite,
type that value without the implied exponent of 10-6 (E-6). For example, if the value is 8.5E-6,
then type 8.5.
This method does not provide for any variation in the thermal expansion coefficient as a function
of temperature. This may not be accurate if parts of the system are at different non-ambient
temperatures. In this case, you can always calculate the thermal strain at temperature in units of
length-per-length and then type this value into the Temperature box on the Classic Piping
Input dialog box.
For new models, the default value is obtained from the configuration file.
Specifies the ratio of the shear modulus to the modulus of elasticity in the axial direction of the
fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe. For example, if the material modulus-of-elasticity (axial) is
3.2E6 psi, and the shear modulus is 8.0E5 psi, type 0.25 as the ratio of these two.
For new models, the default value is obtained from the configuration file.
Specifies the default laminate type as defined in the BS 7159 code for the fiberglass reinforced
plastic pipe. Valid laminate types are:
CSM
layer.
The software uses this entry to calculate the flexibility and stress intensity factors of bends;
therefore, this default entry may be overridden using the Type field on the bend auxiliary
dialog boxes.

Indicates that the Z axis is vertical. Traditionally CAESAR II has used a coordinate system
where the Y-axis coincides with the vertical axis. In one alternative coordinate system, the
Z-axis represents the vertical axis (with the X axis chosen arbitrarily, and the Y-axis being
defined according to the right-hand rule. CAESAR II now gives you the ability to model using
either coordinate system. You can also switch between the systems in most cases.
You can specify that CAESAR II start with the Z axis vertical. For more information, see New
Job Z-Axis Vertical (on page 76).
A new piping model determines its axis orientation based on the setting in the Configure/Setup
module. An existing piping model uses the same axis orientation under which it was last saved.
You can change the axis orientation from Y-Axis to Z-Axis vertical by clicking the check box on
the Environment-Special Execution Parameters dialog box.
Clicking this check box causes the model to immediately convert to match the new axis
orientation. That is, Y-values become Z-values or the reverse. There is no change in the model;
only the representation changes.
This allows any piping input file to be immediately translated from one coordinate system into
the other.
When including other piping files in a model, the axis orientation of the included files need not
match that of the piping model. Translation occurs immediately upon inclusion.
When including structural files in a piping model, the axis orientation of the include files need not
match that of the piping model. Translation occurs immediately upon inclusion.
The axis orientation on the Static Load Case Builder (such as wind and wave loads), the Static
Output Processor, The Dynamic Input Module, and the Dynamic Output Processor is dictated by
the orientation of the model input file.
Specifies the plant north direction mapping so that the Intergraph Smart 3D ® PCF model north
direction aligns with the CAESAR II global axis. You can import a model via PCF, and then set
the north direction to map from a model N-S, E-W system used in isometrics to the XYZ
coordinate system used in CAESAR II. The mapping updates the orientation as the model
rotates, and exports the mapping to CAESAR II Access format.
Software such as SmartPlant® Interop Publisher (SPIOP) and CAESAR II ISOGEN can import
the Access data and properly orient the model.
Set North Direction is useful when you do not use the default CAESAR II mapping.
You can map the north arrow to a CAESAR II global axis: -X (the default value for no
rotation), +X, -Z, or +Z.

Orders the set of equations that represent the piping system for both static and dynamic
analyses. The optimizer may be run with a variety of different switch settings. The default
settings were chosen for their combination of ordering efficiency and speed. These settings
should suffice for the majority of piping systems analyzed. For systems having greater than 100
nodes, or that are highly interconnected, the following optimum parameters should be used.
Optimizer Method = Both
Next Node Selection = Decreasing
Final Ordering = Reversed
Collins Ordering = Band
Degree Determination = Connections
User Control = None
If the User Control is set to Allow User Re-looping, CAESAR II lets you interactively try as
many different combinations of switch settings as needed. When the most efficient ordering is
obtained, you can continue on with the analysis. This interactive prompting for optimization
parameters is done in the analysis level processing.
Piping Input menu: Environment > Include Piping Input Files
Import Model toolbar: Include piping files

Includes other piping models in the current piping model. Piping models added may have a node
offset applied and can optionally be rotated about the Y-axis before being added.
File Name
Displays the file to include. Click Browse to browse for the file name. The file need not
reside in the current data directory.
Read Now
Specifies whether or not the file is read immediately. Select Y if the file is to be read
immediately and stored as part of the current input. The file read may be edited as part of
the current job. Select N, if the file is to be read for plotting and fully processed only during
error checking. The file read may not be edited as part of the current job.
RotY
Specifies the angle about the Y axis to rotate the model before including it in the current job.
The rotation applies regardless of the Read Now setting.
You can also rotate the model from the List utility. For more information, see
Rotate (on page 363).
Inc
Specifies the increment to be added to all of the nodes in the model before including it in the

current job. The node increment applies regardless of the Read Now setting.
Piping Input menu: Environment > Include Structural Input Files
Import Model toolbar: Include structural files

Includes existing structural model into the current job. The structural model must have been built
and successfully error checked in the structural steel preprocessor accessed from the CAESAR
II menu. For more information, see Structural Steel Modeler (on page 438).
After a structural model has been built, you can include it into any piping input. You can include
the names of up to 20 different structural models. After this is done, you can plot and analyze
the structural model with the piping model. The structural models need not reside in the current
folder.
Piping systems are usually tied to structural steel models by the use of restraints with
connecting nodes. Make absolutely sure there are no node number conflicts between structure
and pipe models. After you define a restraint with a connecting node between the pipe and
structure, CAESAR II knows where to put the structure in the resulting preprocessor plot. If no
connection between the pipe and the structure is given, the structure is plotted starting from the
origin of the piping system. In this case, the resulting plot may not meet your expectations.
Piping Input menu: Environment > Advanced PCF Import (APCF)
Import Model toolbar: APCF

Displays the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box and imports piping component files
(PCF) into the CAESAR II piping environment. A PCF is a flat text file with the .pcf extension
containing detailed information about the piping system components. The information is
extracted from a CAD system.
The PCF format is a standard drawing exchange format developed by Alias Ltd. You
can obtain details on the format and its capabilities from Alias.
APCF contains all functionality of the Import PCF (on page 1219) external interface with a
more customizable interface that allows you to:
Create a new model or add elements to an existing model.
Control element sequencing.
Define and control node numbering.
Incrementally build and verify the model by creating as many .pcf files as needed.
Selectively update an existing CAESAR II model.
Use the block operations modeling tools to assist modeling changes. For more information,
see Block Operations Toolbar (on page 396).
A CAESAR II model constructed from PCFs uses the units of the current model and
automatically attaches/intersects the piping generated from the PCF to the existing piping, if
appropriate.

You can select all PCFs to convert at the same time or select them in smaller groupings to
convert incrementally. The software only processes selected files. You can drag files to arrange
them in the needed order.
Set the conversion options listed in the lower left-hand pane.

Condense options
Miscellaneous options
CAESAR II element properties
Options apply to all files selected when you click Begin Processing. If you select groups of files
to convert incrementally, you can set different conversion options for each group.
Supports, restraints, and boundary conditions (such as equipment connections) transfer from
the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file. You can change the thermal displacements.
For information on mapping parameters used during the conversion, see PCF Interface Custom
Mapping Attributes (on page 342).
Define the Start Node as 0 when you want numbering for a file to start with the next available
number defined by the value of Increment.

You can also use a Start Node other than 0 or change the value of the node number Increment
for specific files. In the following example, the selected files represent vent branches with
starting nodes defined for each branch.
Before (first group processed):

After (vent branches in second group processed):
Define the default start node and increment values in the Configuration Editor
dialog box. For more information, see Configuration Editor (on page 55).
After you perform multiple conversions, some values, such as delta coordinates, temperatures,
and pressures, may contain values calculated to many decimal places.
The software automatically rounds these entries to the nearest integer when you close the
Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box.
Do not close the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box until all PCFs have been
imported. The software determines connectivity between piping based upon sharing global
coordinates. If element delta coordinates are rounded, then nodal global coordinates may
change enough to fall outside of the connection tolerances.
During the conversion process, status messages display in the message area in the lower right
of the dialog box. Messages are also written to a log file <CAESAR II file name>.LOG.RTF.

Click Save Warnings to save the messages to a different file.
PCFs contain custom attributes in the form of component-attribute<n>. Intergraph Smart 3D can
generate PCFs with ISO_STRESS PCF configuration. This configuration assures that a number
of various data fields are passed in specific PCF data fields.
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 = Design pressure
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE2 = Maximum temperature
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 = Material name
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE4 = Wall thickness (reducing thickness in the case of reducing
components)
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE5 = Insulation thickness
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE6 = Insulation density
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE7 = Corrosion allowance
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE8 = Component weight
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE9 = Fluid density
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10 = Hydro test pressure
The units associated with the values of these attributes are defined by including a descriptive
unit label after the value. For example, the pressure attribute, COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1, can
be specified as COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 15.3 barg. If the unit label chosen (barg) is not
one of the labels recognized by CAESAR II as defined through Tools > Create/Review Units
on the CAESAR II Main menu, then you must include that label in the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT
file in the CAESAR II System folder.
The only PCF SUPPORT attribute that is not ignored is the SUPPORT-DIRECTION
attribute. It must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or SOUTH.
One note on the Material Number setting is that the selected material is applied to a piping
element as the default only if the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 for that element is not
specified or recognized.
You can achieve the best results by preparing customized mapping files before beginning the
conversion process.
You may use default mapping files if the values fit our model. There are a number of mapping
files that define various values. Locate these files in the CAESAR II System folder.
Topics
PCF Unit Mapping ......................................................................... 343
PCF Material Mapping ................................................................... 344
PCF Restraint Mapping ................................................................. 345
PCF Stress Intensification Factor Mapping ................................... 354

The PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file maps the PCF Units name to the conversion factor used to
convert it to the CAESAR II internal units (English).
This file defines three columns:
CAESAR II Unit - Displays the internal unit used by the software
PCF Unit - Displays the user-supplied unit label
Conversion from CAESAR II -> PCF - Displays the conversion factor used to convert the
user-supplied unit to a CAESAR II internal unit
Comments can be added at the end of each line separated from the last column value by
spaces and preceded by the "*" character.
All PCF component attributes can be specified inside the PCF with their associated units. Any
unit specified by the PCF component attributes which is not a standard internal CAESAR II unit
as defined by the Tools > Create/Review Units dialog box on the CAESAR II Main menu needs
to be mapped inside the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file.
CAESAR II divides the user-supplied value by this constant to calculate the value for
the attribute that is displayed by the software according to the units specified in the configuration
options (except that temperature from C° to F° will also add the 32 °).
Locate this file in the CAESAR II System folder.

This is an optional task. You can review the default file and determine if you need to
make changes to fit your model.
1. Open the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
An example of the CAESAR II default file is shown below.
2. Modify any of the units definitions or add another unit definition as needed.
3. Save, and close the file.

The PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file maps PCF material names to a corresponding CAESAR II

material number. Note that the first line is currently reserved to the CAESAR II version number.
The match in this file must be an exact match. If no match is found, then the software searches
the CAESAR II material database to find the "best match" (where the "best match" tries to do an
intelligent match, adjusting for dashes, spaces, "GR", "SA" versus "A", and so forth) for the
material name.
PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 is used by the software to set the material attribute for each
component. If the COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 value is not defined or recognized, the software
applies the default material as specified by the Material Number value in the dialog box.
Any material specified by the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 which is not a standard
CAESAR II material as defined in the Tools > Materials dialog under the
menu must be mapped inside the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file.
This file is located in the CAESAR II System folder.

1. Open the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file in any text viewer, such as Notepad.
The CAESAR II default file looks like this.
2. Modify any of the materials definitions.

3. Save and close the file.

The PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II restraint types corresponding to PCF
support/restraint names.
CAESAR II uses the SUPPORT mapping component to apply supports at the specified
coordinates. If the software is unable to match a SUPPORT with a <SUPPORT_NAME>
keyword in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file, only the SUPPORT-DIRECTION attribute is
interpreted by the software. The SUPPORT-DIRECTION attribute must have a value of UP,
DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or SOUTH.
Support configurations can vary from project-to-project. In order to fine-tune the configuration
CAESAR II uses with an imported model for a given SUPPORT component, you need to map an
attribute to the <SUPPORT_NAME> keyword in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file.
The following example displays a typical SUPPORT component. The attribute definition (VG100)
for the NAME attribute is highlighted and should be used to define CAESAR II support mapping.
Remember that, as your support configuration changes, you can customize this mapping file to
ensure proper import into the software.
Locate the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file in the CAESAR II system folder.

This file defines the CAESAR II function corresponding to PCF support/restraint names.
1. Open the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
2. Modify any of the attribute customization options or restraint definitions.
In the Keyword Mapping Section, define an attribute from your PCF file to associate with the
following CAESAR II keywords:
<SUPPORT_NAME>
<SUPPORT_TAG>
<SUPPORT_GUID>
The CAESAR II keywords located within "<>" are used in the PCF import process. The
<SUPPORT_NAME> keyword is used by CAESAR II to map the supports. The

<SUPPORT_TAG> and <SUPPORT_GUID> keywords are support properties that are imported
into CAESAR II.
In the Support Mapping Section, define the support mapping.

In the following example file, VG100 corresponds functionally to two CAESAR II supports:
+Vertical support (weight support)
Guide, each with friction coefficients equal to 0.3
This file supports a wide range of support functions, plus the key words MU= (for friction) and
GAP= (to define gaps in the restraint).
The syntax for each support type is:
When creating the blank space use the Space Bar. Do not use the Tab key.
<Support Name>
CAESAR II attempts to match the <Support Name> with the attribute definition from your
PCF mapping file. Any attribute definition in the PCF file that contains the <Support Name>
is considered a match (it does not have to be an exact match). For example, if the <Support
Name> is VG1, an attribute definition such as VG100 would be considered a match.
For optimal results, list the <Support Names> in the order from longest name to
shortest name. Otherwise, if you have both VG1 and VG100 as <Support Names>, the
software reads VG1 as a match before VG100 is processed.
<N>
Specifies the number of CAESAR II restraints to be placed in the corresponding Restraint
auxiliary panel in the Piping Input. CAESAR II allows up to six restraints on any element.
<Restraint Function>
Specifies the purpose/type of restraint (GUI, LIM, VHGR, and so forth.), Global Axes (VERT,

NS, EW, and so forth), or Local Axes (a, b, c, and so forth):

ANC, GUI, LIM, VHGR, CHGR
Creates a CAESAR II Anchor, Guide, Axial Restraint, Variable Hanger, or Constant
Hanger, respectively. The variable and constant attributes create to-be-designed
hangers, which may end up as either variable or constant hangers.
VERT, EW, NS
Indicates a translational restraint that corresponds to the compass points of the global
axes (Y, X, Z respectively for the Y-up setting, and Z, X, Y respectively for the Z-up
setting). See the figure below. Create one-way restraints by prefixing the attribute with
"+" or "-".
A, B, C
Indicates a translational restraint that corresponds to the local axes of the support/pipe
installation. The A corresponds to the centerline of the pipe, B corresponds to the
"direction" attributed to the support, and C corresponds to the cross-product of the A
and B axes. As with the global restraints, one-way restraints may be created by
prefixing with + or -. See the figure below.
<MU=>
Optional keyword followed by a value for adding a friction coefficient to the restraint. (This
keyword is not valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR.)
<GAP=>

Optional keyword followed by a value and set of units for adding a gap to the restraint (This
The software also processes equipment nozzles designated by the
END-CONNECTION-EQUIPMENT keyword as imposed thermal displacements in all degrees of
freedom, all with values of 0.0. This creates an initial behavior of an anchor, but allows you to
easily impose actual thermal displacements when known.
The examples below illustrate typical restraint configurations, along with suggested mapping
entries.
Variable Spring Hanger
These represent variable spring hangers, and are mapped onto a single CAESAR II support (=
VHGR). This is interpreted as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.
Constant Effort Spring Hanger

This represents a constant effort spring hanger, and thus is mapped onto a single CAESAR II
support (= CHGR). This is treated as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.

Note that it is identical to the VHGR shown in the figure above.
These hanger rod assemblies only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward
movement. In CAESAR II, they are typically modeled as +Y (or +Z, depending on how the
vertical axis is set).

These sliding supports only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward movement. They
are represented as a single +VERT support. However, because they slide against a base, most
stress analysts prefer to add a friction coefficient (MU=x.xx).
YRIGID 1
VERT MU=0.3
or
YRIGID 1
B MU=0.3
These restraints resist load/movement in both directions (so the "+" of the previous two supports
is eliminated). If the restraint is always installed vertically, then use the first definition (VERT). If
the restraint is installed in any direction (for example, vertically or horizontally), use the second
definition B, indicating that it acts along the installed support direction. This assumes that the
installed direction of the restraint is always defined as the direction from the main steel towards
the pipe. Because sliding is involved, a friction coefficient is included as well.
UGUIDE 1
GUI MU=0.3
or
UGUIDE 1
C MU=0.3

If this restraint is always installed vertically on horizontal lines (as shown in the figure above),
then the support function can always be modeled as a Guide (with sliding friction). If the restraint
may be installed in any direction at all (with restraint direction corresponding to the direction of
the attachment point toward the pipe), then use the second definition (C) as it represents the
direction lateral to the pipe and the restraint.
TEESUPPORT 2
+VERT MU=0.3
GUI MU=0.3
This restraint maps to two functions:
+VERTical
GUIde
Because sliding is involved in both functions, friction coefficients are provided for both.
VERTLATERAL 2
VERT MU=0.3
GUI MU=0.3
or
VERTLATERAL 2
B MU=0.3
C MU=0.3
up/down restraint
side-to-side restraint

If it is always installed vertically, then it is defined as a VERTical and a GUIde. If it is possible

that the restraint may be rotated about the pipe to be installed in any direction, then use the
second definition, which represents restraint along the direction of the support as well as lateral
to the support and pipe.
VERTAXIAL 2
+VERT MU=0.3
LIM MU=0.3
or
VERTAXIAL 2
+VERT MU=0.3
A MU=0.3
+VERT support
An axial restraint. The axial restraint can be defined equally as LIM or A (as A corresponds
to restraint along the direction of the pipe centerline).
SWAYSTRUT 1
B

These represent sway struts, which may be installed in any direction, and provide restraint along
the line of action of the sway strut. Assuming that the restraint direction corresponds to the
direction of the sway strut, then the best way to define these restraints is B (restraint along the
support direction).
ANCHOR 1
ANC
These restraints all restrict movement of the pipe in all six degrees-of-freedom, so they can be
defined as Anchors ("ANC").
PENETRATION 4
+C GAP=aMM
-C GAP=bMM

-VERT GAP=cMM
+VERT GAP=dMM
In the example above, the pipe (and the local A-axis) is running into the page. With B up, +C is
to the right.
Some of these can get quite complex, especially if restraints have different gaps in different
directions. It may require trial and error to determine exactly how the +/- restraint directions
correspond to the support direction passed in the PCF. In some cases, you may want to model
the restraint behavior in CAESAR II rather than in the mapping file.
The PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II SIF data to be applied at the intersection of
tees and olets. The file also provides support for some SIF keywords.
Stress Intensification Factors (SIF) are not assigned a separate PCF
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE or defined in any other way inside PCFs. In order to tune Stress
Intensification Factor settings of imported PCF components, CAESAR II provides the
PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT mapping file.
The file defines five columns:
SKEYS - PCF components use SKEYS to indicate how their subtype is used within the
general component group.
CAESAR II SIF TYPE - Should be set to the SIF type number used by CAESAR II as shown
in the CAESAR II SIF TYPE figure below.
PAD=X.X UNITS - (optional) Should be set to the SIF pad thickness, including the
applicable unit (for example, PAD=10 MM)
Ii=X.XX - (optional) Should be set to the in-plane SIF of the component. This is a multiplier,
and therefore unit-less (for example, Ii=1.23)

Io=X.XX - (optional) Should be set to the out-plane SIF of the component. This is
Applying the above example values to set the TERF SKEY to the associated reinforced type
requires the following mapping entry to be specified inside the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file:
Each PCF component defines an SKEY. For an example, see the SUPPORT component
identifier listed in the figure in PCF Restraint Mapping (on page 345) (SKEY 01HG). In this case,
these are typically four-character words indicating tee type (CROSS, OLET) and end type. The
PCF menu command matches the SKEYS to the entries in this mapping file. If an SKEY is not
found in this file, you should add it.
Locate this file in the CAESAR II system folder.

This step is strongly recommended in order to take advantage of the capabilities of the
PCF menu command.

1. Open the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
2. Modify any of the SIF definitions.

1. Click APCF on the Import Model toolbar or click Environment > Advanced PCF
Import (APCF) on the Piping Input menu.
The Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box displays.
2. Click Choose Files.
The Open dialog box displays.
3. Select one or more PCFs and click Open.
The selected file(s) display in the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box.

Multiple files typically represent different sections of a model or individual pipe

runs.
To remove a PCF, select the file and press Delete.

4. Type the Start Node and Increment value for each of the files.
5. For each file, change any of the conversion options in the lower left-hand pane as needed.
Condense Rigids (on page 359)
Condense Tees (on page 359)
Condense Elbows (on page 359)
Use Pipe Materials Only (on page 359)
Combine PCF Files (on page 360)
Set North Direction (on page 360)
Diameter Limit (on page 360)
Length for Nodal Increment (on page 360)
Material Number (on page 362)
Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness (on page 362)
6. If you opened more than one file and only want to import part of the model, select the files to
import.

You can import the other files after reviewing the first import.
7. To initiate the import, click Begin Processing.
During the conversion process, status messages display in the lower right-hand pane.
After processing completes, the imported model displays in the Classic Piping Input dialog
box and the graphic view.
The software saves status messages to a log file with the name <CAESAR II file
name>.LOG.rtf. The log file is saved in the selected CAESAR II output file folder.
8. View your new CAESAR II input model in the Classic Piping Input graphic view. If needed,
resize the view to see the model.
For example, the software imports the below model from the sample file 1001-P-Input.pcf:
Click Undo on the Input Tools toolbar to remove the imported elements.
9. If you have additional PCFs to import, select the files, change any conversion options as
needed, clear the selection of the previously imported files, and click Begin Processing.
10. Save the model.
11. Close the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box after importing all files.

Indicates the starting node number in the resulting CAESAR II model. By default, the entire
model is renumbered using this value as the starting point. To disable renumbering, you must
set this option and Increment (on page 359) to zero.
Defines the value used as a node number increment. This value is used during the renumbering
of the model. To disable renumbering, you must set this option and Start Node (on page 359) to
zero.
Instructs the software to combine rigids that connect to each other into a single element.
This indicates whether these items should be condensed/merged into adjacent elements. For
example, a valve with adjacent gaskets and flanges would be combined into a single rigid
element.
If activated, then elements are condensed/merged unless there is a valid reason not to (change
of cross section, change of operating conditions, restraint at the location, and so forth).
The default value is TRUE.
When set to TRUE, this directive instructs the software NOT to treat tees as three elements but
instead condense them to a single node. The SIF is applied at the tee node. The use of the
three elements allows pipe properties of the tee to differ from the attached piping.
Controls whether the software treats elbows as two designated elements. When set to TRUE,
this directive instructs the software NOT to treat elbows as two designated elements. Rather, it
is condensed into its adjacent elements for each direction in which the elbow travels.
Instructs the software to apply pipe materials only as defined by the PCF
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 identifiers.
Activating this option replaces the material of various components (elbows, valves, flanges,
reducers, tees, and so forth) with the appropriate piping material, where possible, leading to a
much more homogenous CAESAR II model. Matching components to their corresponding piping
material is done by assembling a matrix of Pipe Spec/diameter combinations, based the
available data transmitted in the PCF. Where an exact match is available, the material
substitution is made. Where piping materials are available for the Pipe Spec but not the
diameter, a match is made to the closest diameter. Where no piping material is available for the
Pipe Spec, the component material is retained. For example, A106 Grade B would be applied
but A234 Grade WPB would be ignored.
If you choose to condense Rigids, Tees, or Elbows, set Use Pipe Materials Only to
TRUE.

Converts and combines PCFs in the dialog box into a single CAESAR II model. You are
prompted for the name of the combined CAESAR II file.
When you merge multiple PCFs into a single CAESAR II model using Combine PCF
Files, line numbers are assigned based on the originating PCF name.
Specifies the plant north direction mapping so that the Intergraph Smart 3D ® PCF model north
direction aligns with the CAESAR II global axis. You can import a model via PCF, and then set
the north direction to map from a model N-S, E-W system used in isometrics to the XYZ
coordinate system used in CAESAR II. The mapping updates the orientation as the model
rotates, and exports the mapping to CAESAR II Access format.
Software such as SmartPlant® Interop Publisher (SPIOP) and CAESAR II ISOGEN can import
the Access data and properly orient the model.
Set North Direction is useful when you do not use the default CAESAR II mapping.
You can map the north arrow to a CAESAR II global axis: -X (the default value for no rotation),
+X, -Z, or +Z.
Use this to exclude the processing of small pipes, such as vents and drains, by specifying the
size (nominal diameter) below which pipes will be ignored. Enter a diameter limit of -1.000 to
include all pipe sizes that you want to import into CAESAR II.
Increases node increments for pipe lengths greater than the specified value. This option allows
you to set the nodal increment for imported PCF files based on pipe length, which means you
can specify a larger buffer of node numbers for longer pipe lengths. This feature is helpful when
creating intermediate nodes and elements to place supports.
Enter a value to activate this option. The software divides the length of each piping element by
the value entered in Length for Nodal Increment (The answer is rounded to the next whole
number). The software multiplies that quotient by the value in the Increment field for the
specified PCF file. The result is the node increment for that element.

For example, if you do not enter a value in Length for Nodal Increment the software numbers
all the nodes according to the value in the Increment column.
If you enter a value in Length for Nodal Increment, the software performs the procedure listed
above to determine the nodal increment for each element. In the following example, if you enter
15 in Length for Nodal Increment and a piping element is 7.875 feet (94.5 inches), the
software divides 94.5 by 15 and gets 6.3. Because the software rounds the quotient to the next
whole number, 6.3 is rounded to 7. So, if the value in the Increment column is 10, the software
multiplies 10 by 7, which results in a nodal increment of 70, as shown below.

Select the CAESAR II material to be assigned to components which do not have the material
attribute explicitly set otherwise.
The default is low carbon steel (material number 1).
Select the default schedule of the pipe to be used in case the wall thickness of the pipe cannot
be determined from the PCF.
Piping Input menu: Environment > Show Informational Messages

Displays informational messages upon the conversion of nominal to actual diameters, schedule
to wall thickness, and specific gravity to density. Click Environment > Show Informational
Messages.
Clear the check box to suppress these messages.
Piping Input menu: Environment > Reset View on Refresh
Reset and Refresh Tools toolbar: Reset View

Controls the way graphics behave when you add or modify elements. When this option is turned
on, CAESAR II resets the plot to the default view each time you refresh.
Piping Input menu: Environment > CAESAR II Configuration

CAESAR II Tools toolbar: CAESAR II Configuration
Opens the configuration file for review and editing. For more information, see Configuration
Editor (on page 55).
Global Menu
Performs actions associated with commands you can perform on a group of elements, such as
the block operations (Rotate, Invert, and so forth).

Piping Input menu: Global > Rotate

Block Operations toolbar: Rotate
Rotates elements defined in the block.
Displays the Block Rotate dialog box. This dialog box rotates the block through some angle
about the X, Y, or Z axis. For more information, see Performing Block Operations (on page 419).
Unskew
Returns skewed geometry to an orthogonal orientation.
Setup
Determines what in the block should be rotated, including restraints, displacements,
force/moments, uniform loads, flexible nozzles, flanges, and element characteristics. The
default is for all items that appear in the block to be rotated with the block.
Degrees
Specifies the degrees of the rotation.
Add Bends
Specifies that the software includes bends in the block rotation.
Piping Input menu: Global >Duplicate

Block Operations toolbar: Duplicate
Duplicates elements in a block.
Displays the Block Duplicate dialog box. You can make identical copies of the block. You can
also make a mirror image by flipping the chosen elements in one of the orthogonal planes.
Mirror imaging is done on the piping delta dimensions only. That is, restraints are copied but not
mirror imaged. A +Y restraint does not become a -Y restraint when mirrored in the XZ plane.

Restraints, displacements, forces/moments, uniform loads, nozzles, flanges, and element

characteristics can be individually included or excluded from the duplication.
After the type of duplication is determined, you must decide the following:
Where in the Elements List to put the duplicated group of elements, either at the end of the
current block, the end of the input file, or after a specific element in the model.
What node increments to add to the nodes in the block so that they define unique pipe
elements. Be sure this increment is large enough to avoid any duplication of node numbers.
For more information, see Performing Block Operations (on page 419).
Piping Input menu: Global > Delete

Block Operations toolbar: Delete
Deletes the selected block of elements.
A confirmation message displays before the delete action is taken.

Piping Input menu: Global > Nodes

Block Operations toolbar: Renumber
Rearranges the node numbers in the block.
You can use this command to clean up part or all of the piping system. It is not unusual to put
the entire model in one block and do a full renumber of all of the nodes.
Make copies of any large jobs before renumbering them. Be particularly careful
when renumbering systems containing large numbers of interconnected restraints with CNodes.
1. Select the block of nodes you want to renumber from the 3D Graphics pane or in the
Elements dialog box.
2. Click Renumber in the Block Operations toolbar.
The Block Renumber dialog box displays.
3. Select whether you want the software to increment or renumber the block nodes.
Select Increment to change all node numbers in the block. The change (+ or -) is
specified as the Node Increment. For example, if you have nodes of 10, 30, 600, 25
and 670 in a block, and you select Increment and specify a Node Increment of 100,
the software changes the node numbering in the block to 110, 130, 700, 125 and 770,
respectively.
Select Renumber to enable the Start Node box and renumber the selected block of
nodes from the Start Node number by the Node Increment that you specify. For
example, if you have nodes of 10, 30, 600, 25, and 670 in a block, and you select
Renumber and specify a Start Node of 100 and a Node Increment of 10, the software
changes the node block numbering to 100, 110, 120, 130, and 140, respectively.
Be aware that the Start Node and Node Increment values may introduce node
numbers used elsewhere in the model.
4. Select Renumber Matching Nodes Outside to renumber the same nodes outside of the
selected block.
CAESAR II renumbers the nodes of the elements that are connected to the selected block,
and the model remains connected in the same way as it was before the renumber. The
boundary nodes include the From and To nodes of the elements connected to the selected
block, plus the nodes of the auxiliary data block that are connected to the selected block.
The software renumbers every node in the selected block on the model.
If you clear Renumber Matching Nodes Outside, the software does not apply the
increment or renumber action to restraints, displacements and branch connections in
the selected block of nodes.
CAESAR II does not typically renumber a CNode in a block, because the CNode is
connected to a node outside the block. The software does not renumber CNodes if they
do not connect to a node in the block and on the piping system.

To avoid any confusion when renumbering nodes, start the renumbering at a node
greater than the largest node in the model. If all of the nodes renumber successfully (that is,
there are not any dangling CNodes), then you can specify a Node Increment with a negative
increment to shift the newly renumbered nodes back into the original range.
Typically, you may graphically select multiple blocks to renumber. However, CAESAR II can
only perform the renumber operation for the first block, with respect to the element list. In this
case, CAESAR II displays a message box with information about the block that is to be
renumbered. You can then continue to renumber the second block and so on until all blocks are
renumbered.
Piping Input menu: Global > Invert

Block Operations toolbar: Invert
Assigns new From Node and To Node values to the selected block of elements. The Invert
command reverses the order of the elements in the selected group as well as the node
numbering while preserving the geometry of the input model.
Contiguous segments (sets of elements) may be selected in either the Elements
dialog box, the 3D Graphics pane, or the Line Numbers dialog box.
The Invert command can be very helpful when you have imported a new piping input model from
an external source, such as a Piping Component File (PCF), and you want to re-assign node
numbers. For example, for an imported run from a termination to a tee, invert it to run from the
tee to the termination.
1. Select the block of elements (nodes) you want to invert, either from the Elements dialog box
or from the 3D Graphics pane or from the Line Numbers dialog box.
If you select a block of elements from the Elements dialog box or from the Line
Numbers dialog box, the corresponding elements are selected (highlighted) in the 3D
Graphics panel.

If you select a block of elements in the 3D Graphics pane or from the Line Numbers
dialog box, the corresponding elements are NOT selected (highlighted) in the Elements
dialog box.
2. Click the Invert icon on the Block Operations tool bar.
Alternatively, right-click in the Elements dialog box to display the menu and click Block
Operation > Invert.
The delta dimensions (DX, DY, DZ) of the elements are reversed. In most cases, the node
sequence (From and To nodes) remains the same, but the order and direction of the
elements are reversed.
Notice that only the node numbers are changed in the 3D Graphics pane.
3. Review the Elements dialog box to verify the new delta dimension assignments.
For example:

Piping Input menu: Global > Change Sequence
Block Operations toolbar: Change Sequence

Changes or rearranges the sequence (order) of elements while preserving the geometry.
Typically, the Elements dialog box displays by the order of elements entered during the input
process. The order in the list is important because when you specify some particular input
values for an element in the list, that value propagates to all the elements in the list following it
UNTIL the value is explicitly changed.
When you import piping model data (in the form of PCFs) from other piping input design
software such as Intergraph Smart3D, CAESAR II imports the elements in one sequence.
However, that sequence may not be what you want. For example, you may want all the
high-pressure elements to be listed together. This reduces the number of unique input fields to
verify and can help you to logically organize the model. You can re-organize elements in a way
so that those with similar carry-forward properties are placed consecutively.
1. Select the block of elements (nodes) whose sequence you want to change, either from the
Elements dialog box, from the 3D Graphics pane, or from Line Numbers dialog box.
2. Click Change Sequence in the Block Operations tool bar.

Alternately, you can right-click in the Elements dialog box, and then click Block Operations
> Change Sequence.

The Change Sequence dialog box displays.
3. Choose where in the list you want to move the selected block.
To move the selected block after a given element, click Follow.
To move the selected block before a given element, click Precede.
The cursor changes to indicate the operation is in progress.
4. From the Elements dialog box, position the cursor in the line where you want the selected
block to be placed. Alternatively, you can select elements in the 3D Graphics pane and then
click on the element where you want to move them.
The selected block of elements displays in the new order.
The 3D graphics model does not change. This command only affects the
Elements dialog box display contents. Remember that this command provides you with the
capability of organizing "like" types of elements together.
To re-store the order of the Elements dialog box to the original list, use
the Undo button.
Options Menu
Performs actions associated with the display of the model.
Piping Input menu: Options > Range
Plot Tools toolbar: Range

Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+U
Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful when you need to
locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large model. This command displays
the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U.
Using the Range command affects the display and operation of other 3D graphics
highlighting options. For example, if part of the model is not visible because of the use of the
Range command, then the Diameters command only highlights the elements that are
visible. Also, if using the Range command hides any nodes containing the predefined

displacements, the Displacements legend grid still displays, but the model may not
highlight correctly.
Find may not work properly for the part of the model that is hidden by the range. The
corresponding message displays in the status bar.
Controls options for manipulating ranges.

Show only
Specifies the items to show.
From
Specifies the node number for the start of the range.
To
Specifies the node number for the end of the range.
At These Elements
All elements that exist in the model are displayed. This list indicates which elements are
included in the range. Clear the check box for elements that you do not want to include.
Add
Adds an item to the At These Elements list.
Reverse Selection
Clears all check boxes that were selected in the At These Elements list and selects all
check boxes that were cleared.
Select All
Selects all the check boxes in the At These Elements list.
Clear All
Clears all of the check boxes in the At These Elements list.
Piping Input menu: Options > Restraints

Plot Tools toolbar: Restraints
Shortcut keys: CTRL+ALT+R
Turns the display of restraints on or off on the current model.
On the toolbar, click the arrow on the icon to indicate the display size of the restraints and
whether or not the software displays restraints with or without connecting nodes (CNodes).
When Restraints is turned on the software displays:

A directional arrow for a restraint.
A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) for rotational restraints,
such as RX, RY, or RZ.
Piping Input menu: Options > Anchors

Plot Tools toolbar: Anchors
Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+A
Turns the display of anchors on or off.
Click the arrow on the icon to indicate what size you want the anchors to display on your model,
as well as whether or not the software displays anchors with or without connecting nodes
(CNodes).
Piping Input menu: Options > Displacements

Plot Tools toolbar: Displacements
Shortcut key: CTRL+SHIFT+D
Turns the display of displacements on or off. This option also controls the display of
displacements on CNode restraints.
When Displacements is turned on, the software displays:

A directional arrow for the resultant linear displacement vector.
A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) for the resultant
rotational displacement vector.
A pair of shorter directional arrows for Fixed linear displacement. (Disp. Value = 0)
A pair of shorter directional arrows with curved arrows for Fixed rotational displacement.
A directional arrow with a sphere at the top for non-fixed displacement which indicates
hidden fixed vectors.

A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) with a sphere at the top
for the resultant rotational non-fixed displacement which indicates hidden fixed vectors.
On the toolbar, you can also specify:

The arrow size - Largest, Larger, Medium, Smaller, or Smallest.
Whether to hide or show fixed displacements - Show Fixed.
The vector to display - Vector1, Vector2, and so on.
Hover the cursor over displacement arrows to see the displacement values for the displayed
vector:

Where a restraint has a CNode with displacement, the displacements are displayed with values
displayed with the Node number:
You can change the default arrow color in the Graphics Settings of the
Configuration Editor or by using Plot Properties . For more information, see Displacements
(Component Color) (see "Displacements" on page 81) and Display Options Toolbar (on page
388).
Piping Input menu: Options > Hangers
Plot Tools toolbar: Hangers

Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+H
Turns the display of hangers on or off.
On the toolbar, click the arrow on the icon to indicate the display size of the hangers and
whether or not the software displays hangers with or without connecting nodes (CNodes).
When Hangers is turned on, the software displays:
A single hanger at the location of the hanger.
Multiple hangers at a single location as separate symbols with leaders to the location.

This is a graphical representation of the number of hangers at the location, not of

the hanger installation.
Piping Input menu: Options > NozzleFlexibility

Plot Tools toolbar: Nozzles
Displays the nozzles for which you want to specify stiffnesses.
Piping Input menu: Options > Flange Check

Plot Tools toolbar: Flanges
Displays the flange nodes that the software evaluates.
Piping Input menu: Options > Nozzle Check

Plot Tools toolbar: Nozzle Limits
Displays the nozzles in which you want to set a check.
Piping Input menu: Options > Forces

Legends toolbar: Forces
Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+F
Turns the display of forces and moments on and off.
When Forces are turned on, the software displays:

A directional arrow for a force.
A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) for a moment.
You can also specify:

You can change the default arrow colors in the Graphics Settings of the
Configuration Editor. For more information, see Forces/Moments 1 (on page 82) and
Forces/Moments 2 (on page 82).
Piping Input menu: Options > Uniform Loads

Legends toolbar: Uniform Loads
Updates the model to show each uniform load in a different color. Use this option to see the
uniform load variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the uniform loads defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
The uniform load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click
Next >> and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node number
where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Because the data propagates throughout the
model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.

Piping Input menu: Options > Wind/Wave

Legends toolbar: Wind/Wave
Updates the model to show each wind or wave load in a different color. Use this option to see
the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key
displays the wind or wave loads defined in the model.
The wind and wave load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data.
Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the loads.
All the elements with wind defined display in red. All the elements with wave data defined
display in green. The legend grid shows the relevant data.
Piping Input menu: Options > Axis
Plot Tools toolbar: Axis

Shortcut key: ALT+SHIFT+P
Turns the display of the coordinate system on or off. You can select the following options (in
Classic Piping Input and Static Output Processor):
Axis Planes
Displays planes with the coordinate system axes.
Axis
Displays the coordinate system axes.
Off
Turns off axis display.
The software sets the default value from the value of Axis Mode (on page 91) in
the Configuration Editor.
North Arrow

Displays a north arrow with the coordinate system. The North arrow indicates the North
orientation of the plant.
The software sets the default value from the value of North Direction (on page
92) in the Configuration Editor.
Piping Input menu: Options > Node Numbers

Piping Input Plot Tools toolbar: Node Numbers
Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+N
Turns the display of node numbers on or off.
When node numbers are turned on, the software always displays the number in front of the pipe:
You can also click and select Node Display Options to control the node number display:
Show All
Displays all node numbers or names.
Anchors
Displays anchor node numbers or names.
Hangers
Displays hanger node numbers or names.
Restraints
Displays restraint node numbers or names.

Show Tags
Displays support tags, hanger tags, and element names.
Number Only
Displays node numbers if they are assigned. Node names do not display.
Name Only
Displays node names if they are assigned. Node numbers do not display.
The following formats display node name and node number:
Number (Name)
Name (Number)
Number - Name
Name - Number
You must select a format in combination with the Show All, Anchors, Hangers, or Restraints
filters.
You can customize node number, node name, and tag display by combining options, such as:
All + Show Tags displays all node numbers, names, and tags.
Anchors + Show Tags displays anchor node numbers, names, and tags.
All + Names Only displays all node names. Node numbers and tags do not display.
Hangers + Names Only displays hanger node names. Node numbers and tags do not
display.
All + Show Tags + Names Only displays all node names. Node numbers and tags do not
display.
In cases where a node contains multiple values, a tag overrides a node name, and a
node name overrides a node number.
Piping Input menu: Options > Length
Plot Tools toolbar: Lengths

Shortcut key: ALT+SHIFT+L
Turns the display of element lengths on or off. Alternatively, press L.

Piping Input menu: Options > Tees

Plot Tools toolbar: Tees
Shortcut key: ALT+SHIFT+T
Displays where you have specified tees or SIFs on the model.
Piping Input menu: Options > Expansion Joints & Rigids
Plot Tools toolbar: Expansion Joints & Rigids

Emphasizes the display of elements such as restraints, anchors, displacements, and expansion
joints by changing pipe element display to lines.
Piping Input menu: Options > Diameters
Legends toolbar: Diameters

Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+D
Updates the model to show each diameter in a different color. Use this option to see the
diameter variations throughout the system or to verify that diameter changes have been made.
Alternatively, press D. A color key displays the diameters defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs and update diameter settings.

Piping Input menu: Options > Wall Thicknesses
Legends toolbar: Wall Thicknesses

Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+W
Updates the model to show each wall thickness in a different color. Use this option to see the
wall thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press W. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Piping Input menu: Options > Corrosion
Legends toolbar: Corrosion

Updates the model to show each corrosion allowance in a different color. Use this option to see
the corrosion variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the corrosion allowances defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
Piping Input menu: Options > Piping Codes

Legends toolbar: Piping Codes
Updates the model to show each piping code in a different color. Use this option to see the
piping code variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Piping Input menu: Options > Material

Legends toolbar: Materials
Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+M
Updates the model to show each material in a different color. Use this option to see the material
variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. Alternatively, press
M. A color key displays the materials defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors
to meet your needs.

Piping Input menu: Options > Pipe Density

Legends toolbar: Pipe Density
Updates the model to show each pipe density in a different color. Use this option to see the pipe
density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key
displays the pipe densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet
your needs.
Piping Input menu: Options > Fluid Density
Legends toolbar: Fluid Density

Updates the model to show each fluid density in a different color. Use this option to see the fluid
displays the fluid densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet
your needs.
Piping Input menu: Options > -Mill Tolerance (%)
Legends toolbar: -Mill Tolerance (%)

Updates the model to show each mill tolerance percentage in a different color. Use this option to
see the mill tolerance variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the mill tolerances defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
The Mill Tolerance legend does not display the positive mill tolerance used with the
IGE/TD/12 code.
Piping Input menu: Options > Refractory Thickness

Updates the model to show each refractory thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the refractory thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change the assigned

Piping Input menu: Options > Refractory Density

Updates the model to show each refractory density in a different color. Use this option to see the
refractory density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the refractory densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
Piping Input menu: Options > Insulation Thickness

Legends toolbar: Insulation
Shortcut key: ALT+SHIFT+I
Updates the model to show each insulation thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the insulation thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. Alternatively, press I. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
Piping Input menu: Options > Insulation Density
Legends toolbar: Insulation Density

Updates the model to show each insulation density in a different color. Use this option to see the
insulation density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the insulation densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
Piping Input menu: Options > Cladding Thickness

Updates the model to show each cladding thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the cladding thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been

Piping Input menu: Options > Cladding Density

Updates the model to show each cladding density in a different color. Use this option to see the
cladding density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the cladding densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
Piping Input menu: Options > Insul/Cladding Unit Wt

Updates the model to show each insulation or cladding unit weight in a different color. Use this
option to see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the insulation or cladding unit weights defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Piping Input menu: Options > Temperatures > T1 ...T9
Static Output Processor menu: Plot Options > Temperatures > T1 ...T9
Legends toolbar: Show Temps

Shortcut keys:
CTRL+1 - Show Temperature 1

Displays the temperature parameters that you have defined. You can define up to nine
temperature parameters.

Piping Input menu: Options > Pressures
Legends toolbar: Show Pressures

Displays the pressure parameters that you have defined.
View Menu
Performs actions associated with viewing the model.
Piping Input menu: View > Toolbars

Displays or hides the toolbars
You can also drag a toolbar to change the location of each toolbar.
To customize toolbar contents, right-click a toolbar, and then select Customize . You can
also customize toolbars by pressing Shift and dragging buttons to new positions.
The Classic Piping Input and the 3D Model include the following toolbars.
Standard Toolbar (on page 386)
Standard Operators Toolbar (on page 386)
Standard Views Toolbar (on page 388)
Display Options Toolbar (on page 388)
Cutting Planes Toolbar (on page 389)
Markups Toolbar (on page 388)
Plot Tools Toolbar (on page 390)
Legends Toolbar (on page 391)
Edit Mode Toolbar (on page 393)
CAESAR II Tools Toolbar (on page 393)
Navigation Tools Toolbar (on page 394)
List Operations Toolbar (on page 394)
Input Tools Toolbar (on page 394)
Block Operations Toolbar (on page 396)
Aux Tools Toolbar (on page 396)
Edit Tools Toolbar (on page 398)
Reference CAD Models Toolbar (on page 398)
Wizards Toolbar (on page 399)

Organization Tools Toolbar (on page 399)

Input Card Toolbar
The Standard toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
3D Model, contains the following functions.
New - Starts a new piping job. You can also click File > New on the main menu. CAESAR II
opens the New Job Name Specification dialog box.
Open - Opens a different piping input job. You are prompted for the file to open.
Save - Saves the selected piping input job. You are prompted for the file name.
Cut - Removes the selected data from its current location and places a copy on the
Clipboard.
Copy - Creates a copy of the selected data and places it on the Clipboard.
Paste - Places a copy of the Clipboard contents in the specified location
Print - Prints the selected piping input job.
The Standard Operators toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog
box or the 3D Model, contains the following functions.
When you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another
operator. (For example, Move Geometry stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)
Zoom to Extents - Fits the entire model in the view.
Zoom to Window - Changes the magnification of the model to fit an area that you specify.
Click one corner of the area and then while holding the mouse button, stretch a box
diagonally to the opposite corner of the area
Zoom to Selection - Fits the selected element in the view.

Orbit - Rotates the model interactively. Rotate the model using the mouse or the arrow keys
on the keyboard. To use the mouse, click the left mouse button on the model to start a
bounding box. Hold the left mouse button and move the mouse to the other end of the
bounding box. Release the mouse button to update the view. If the bounding box is not
visible, check the corresponding box on the User Options tab of the Plot Configuration
dialog box For more information, see Configuring 3D Graphics (on page 422). During
rotation, the model may in centerline mode, or some of the geometry details may disappear
or become distorted. This is to improve the display speed. The actual conversion depends
on the size and complexity of the model. After the rotation is complete, the model returns to
its original state.
Orbit Vertical- Rotates the model on the vertical axis only.
Pan - Pans the model. The cursor changes to a hand. Move the cursor while holding down
the left mouse button. You can also pan the view while another command is active by
holding the center mouse button (or wheel) down while moving the mouse. This provides
the panning effects of riding the elevator up/down or stepping to either side.
Zoom - Increases or decreases the magnification of the model. Move the cursor up or down
holding the left mouse button. Release the mouse button to stop the zoom. Alternatively,
press + and - to zoom in and out. You can change the zoom level of the model while in
another command by rotating the mouse wheel.
Walkthrough - Explores the model with a setup similar to a virtual reality application. This
command produces the effect of walking towards the model. For more information, see
Walking Through the Model (on page 430).
Select Element - Select a single element in the model. Hover over an element in the model
to display information about that element. Press Ctrl when you select to add or remove
elements from the selection.
Select Group - Select a group of elements in the model by dragging a window around
them. You can add elements to the selection by pressing Ctrl while dragging the window.
Remove elements from the selection by pressing Shift while dragging the window.
Shaded View - Displays the model as shaded 3D shapes. Restraints and other element
information items display.
Hidden Line Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame with hidden lines removed.
Restraints and other element information items display.
Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame. Restraints and other element information
items display.
Silhouette - Displays the model as a silhouette, or a two-line plot. Restraints and other
element information items display.
Translucent Objects - Displays the model as translucent 3D shapes. Restraints and other
element information items display. You can select Translucent Objects with any of the
other display options (Shaded View, Hidden Line Wire Frame, Wire Frame, Silhouette,
Center Line View). Select a different type of operator to deactivate Translucent Objects.

Center Line View - Displays model data in single line mode. This often makes the view
clearer. In this mode, restraints and other element information items display. Display the
volume or double line plot by clicking the corresponding button. Press V to switch among
the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line Mode / Center
Line View.
The Standard Views toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box
or the 3D Model, contains the following functions.
Front - Displays the model from the front. Alternatively, press Z.
Back - Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.
Top - Displays the model from the top. Alternatively, press Y.
Bottom - Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Left - Displays the model from the left. Alternatively, press X.
Right - Displays the model from the right. Alternatively, press Shift + X.
Southeast ISO View - Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively,
press F10.
The Display Options toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box
Plot Properties - Opens the Plot Settings dialog box where you can adjust properties for
the current model.
You can also open the Plot Settings dialog box by right-clicking in the graphic
view and selecting Properties > Display Options .
Perspective - Displays the model in perspective mode.
Orthographic - Displays the model in orthographic mode.
The Markups toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the

Freehand Markup - Draws a line in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the line.
Rectangle Markup - Draws a rectangle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the
rectangle.
Circle Markup - Draws a circle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the circle.
Annotate - Adds a brief description to the model. The annotation may be especially useful
in the output processor. The annotation text box is a single line. Annotation is printed and
saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not saved to HTML.
Annotate w/Leader - Adds a brief description to the model. This annotation includes a
leader line. Drag the annotation box to extend the leader. The annotation text box is a single
line. The annotation with a leader stays with the model when you zoom, pan, rotate, or use
any of the highlight options. Annotation is printed and saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not
saved to HTML.
The markup annotation text box is a single line. The color and the font face/size cannot be
changed. The default color is red.
Markup annotations are saved to the .TIF file and spooled to the printer.
The geometry and the text of the markup annotations are temporary. They are not saved
with the model. These graphics and disappear from view with any change such as zoom,
rotate, pan, or reset all.
The color, font face, and size of the annotation text can be changed by clicking Tools >
Configure/Setup on the main menu. For more information, see Configuring 3D Graphics
(on page 422).
When you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another operator.
(For example, Freehand Markup stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)
The Cutting Planes toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or
the 3D Model, contains the following functions.
3D Cutting Plane - Defines the cutting plane for the model. This option is useful when
trying to emphasize a specific element. In many cases, the elements or node numbers are
not defined consecutively. Because of this, it may be easier to cut a portion of the model at
a certain location to see more details.
When the cutting plane displays, use the handles to move and or rotate the planes. If cutting
the plane's handles are not visible, or the display goes blank, use the Zoom command to
expand the view. To disable the cutting plane, select the command again.
This command can be used along any of the three axes.

The Plot Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
Restraints - Turns the display of restraints on or off on the current model. For more
information, see Restraints.
Anchors - Turns the display of anchors on or off on the current model. For more
information, see Anchors (on page 371).
Hangers - Turns the display of hangers on or off on the current model. For more
information, see Hangers (on page 374).
Displacements - Turns the display of displacements on or off on the current model.
Nozzles - Turns the display of nozzle flexibility on or off on the current model.
Flanges - Turns the display of flanges on or off on the current model.
Nozzle Limits - Turns nozzle checking on or off on the current model. You can also specify
the size the nozzle limit that displays on the model by clicking the arrow on the icon and
choosing a size.
Expansion Joints & Rigids - Turns the display of expansion joints or rigid elements on or
off on the current model.
Tees - Turns the display of Tees on or off on the current model.
Compass - Turns the display of the orientation compass on or off on the current model. The
compass indicates the X, Y and Z axis direction of the model.
Node Numbers - Turns the display of node numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N. You
can display node numbers for a specific element such as only restraints or only anchors by
selecting the down arrow from the Node Numbers option on the Plot Tools toolbar in
piping input. Select Names Only from the options to display only the node names on the
model, and not the node numbers.
Lengths - Turns the display of element lengths on or off on the model. Alternatively, press
L.
Range - Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful when
you need to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large model. This
command displays the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U. For more information, see
Range (on page 369).

Find Node - Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box
that allows you to specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You can
enter the node numbers in either of the two fields, or in both. If you entering only the From
node number, the software searches for the first available element that starts with that node
number. If you define only the To node number, the software searches for an element
ending with that node number. When the software locates the element, it highlights the
element and fits it in the view. You can zoom out to better identify the location of the
highlighted element within the model.
The Legends toolbar lets you quickly view legends for areas of the model input. Review the
model specifications for the legend function and make any changes, if necessary. You can
access the toolbar from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D Model. This toolbar
contains the following functions.
Materials- Opens the Materials legend, where you can make changes to the color display
settings for materials on the model.
Piping Codes - Opens the Piping Codes legend, where you can view and make changes to
the color display settings for piping codes on the model.
Insulation - Opens the Insulation legend, where you can view and make changes to the
color display settings for insulation on the model.
Diameter - Opens the Pipe Diameters legend, where you can view pipe diameter
dimensions and make changes to the color display settings for pipes on the model.
Wall Thickness - Opens the Wall Thickness legend, where you can view wall thickness
dimensions and make changes to the color display settings for wall thicknesses on the
model.
-Mill Tolerance (%) - Opens the -Mill Tolerance (%) legend where you can view mill
tolerance percentages and make changes to the color display settings for the mill tolerance
on the model.
Forces - Opens the Forces/Moments legend, where you can view the forces and moments
applied to each node and make changes to the color display settings for forces and
moments on the model. Click the arrow buttons at the top of the legend to scroll through the
various forces and moments.
Uniform Loads - Opens the Uniform Loads legend, where you can view the uniform loads
applied to each node and make changes to the color display settings for uniform loads on
the model. Click the arrow buttons at the top of the legend to scroll through the various
uniform loads.

Wind/Wave - Opens the Wind/Wave Loads legend, where you can view the wind or wave
loads applied to each node and make changes to the color display settings for loads on the
model. Click the arrow buttons at the top of the legend to scroll through the various wind or
wave loads.
Show Temps- Opens the Temperatures legend, where you can view the temperatures of
model elements and make changes to the color display settings for temperatures.
Show Pressures- Opens the Pressures legend, where you can view the pressures on
model elements and make changes to the color display settings for pressures.
Corrosion - Opens the Corrosion legend, where you can view the elements that have
corrosion specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing corrosion.
Pipe Density- Opens the Pipe Density legend, where you can view the elements with pipe
density specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing pipe density.
Fluid Density- Opens the Fluid Density legend, where you can view the elements with fluid
density specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing fluid density.
Insulation Density- Opens the Insulation Density legend, where you can view the elements
with insulation density specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing
insulation density.
Legends allow you to easily review model specifications for a specific legend function and make
changes to your model, if necessary. You can access the Legends toolbar from the Classic
Piping Input dialog box or the 3D Model. Select a legend icon in the Legends toolbar to display
the legend for that function.
Perform the following tasks on a legend using the procedures below.
Editing a legend value
1. Double-click the cell containing the value you wish to edit.
A new Edit row displays containing the value.
2. Select the cell containing the value in the Edit row and edit the field to contain the new
value.
3. Press Enter.
The new value is saved and the Edit row disappears.
Changing the legend color
1. Select the row for the value for whose color you wish to change.
2. Select to display the Colors window.
3. Use the Standard tab to select a predefined color. Select the Custom tab to define a color
using the RGB color model.
4. Select OK.

The Edit Mode toolbar lets you move selected elements on the model. You can access this
toolbar from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D Model. This toolbar contains the
following functions.
Move Geometry - Moves selected elements to a new location in the model.
Move Geometry (X-Axis) - Moves selected elements along the x-axis on the model.
Move Geometry {Y-Axis) - Moves selected elements along the y -axis on the model.
Move Geometry (Z-Axis) - Moves selected elements along the z-axis on the model.
For more information, see Moving Elements (on page 431).
The CAESAR II Tools toolbar contains common functions to the CAESAR II software. You can
access this toolbar from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D Model. This toolbar
contains the following functions.
CAESAR II Configuration - Contains instructions specifying how CAESAR II operates on a

particular computer and how it performs a particular analysis. Each time that you open the
software, it searches for this configuration file in the current data directory and uses it to
perform the analysis. For more information, see Configuration Editor (on page 55).
Start/Run (Error Checker) - Sends the model through interactive error checking. This is the
first step of analysis. When the error check is complete, the Errors and Warnings dialog
box displays the results. For more information, see Error Checking (on page 564).
Batch Run - Error checks the model in a non-interactive way. This process halts only for
fatal errors. It uses the existing or default static load cases and performs the static analysis.
Edit Static Load Cases - Displays the Static Analysis dialog box. For more information on
static analysis, see Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box (on page 586).
View Static Results - Provides an interactive review of static analysis results for the open
job. The Static Output Processor window automatically displays upon completion of a
static analysis. For more information, see Static Output Processor (on page 623).
Dynamic Analysis - Performs dynamic analysis on a piping model. The command is also
available from Analysis > Dynamics. For more information, see Dynamic Analysis
Workflow (on page 698).

The Navigation Tools toolbar contains functions that help you move about the Classic Piping
Input dialog box or the 3D Model. This toolbar contains the following functions.
First Element - Skips to the first element.
Previous Element - Skips to the previous element.
Next Element - Skips to the next element.
Last Element - Skips to the last element.
Continue - Moves the dialog box to the next element in the model. The software adds a
new element if there is no next element.
Duplicate Element - Duplicates the last element in a model so that you can quickly
continue building the model. Select the last element, and then click Duplicate Element. For
more information on duplicating groups of elements in a model, see Duplicate (on page
363).
If you select an element that is not at the end of the model and click Duplicate
Element, the software continues to the next element in the model without duplicating the
selected element.
The List Operations toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box
List Input - Displays the model in a spreadsheet view at the bottom of the Classic Piping
Input dialog box. From this view, you can quickly review and enter input data. Additionally,
you can rotate the 3D model along the various axes and duplicate input values from the List
Input view. For more information, see List (on page 266).
The Input Toolbars toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or
the 3D Model, contains the following functions.
Archive - Assigns a password to the job to prevent inadvertent alteration of the model or to
type the password to unlock the file. Archived input files cannot be altered or saved without
this password; however, they can be opened and reviewed. For more information, see
Archive (on page 255).
Insert - Inserts an element. For more information, see Insert Element (on page 260).

Delete - Deletes the current element. For more information, see Delete Element (on page
261).
Break - Divides an element into two or more individual elements. For more information, see
Break (on page 270).
Global Coordinates - Specifies the absolute (global) coordinates for the start node of each
disconnected pipe system segment. For more information, see View/Edit Disconnects (on
page 261).
Close Loop - Closes a loop by filling in the delta coordinates between two nodes in the
model.
Increment Node - Specifies the increment between nodes. CAESAR II uses the nodal
increment set in Configure/Setup when generating the From and To nodes for new
elements. You can override this behavior by typing a different value in this dialog box. For
more information, see Auto Node Number Increment (on page 75).
Distance - Finds the distance between two specified nodes or between any two points you
select on the model. For more information, see Distance (on page 263).
Valve Flange Database - Provides access to the CADWorx valve and flange databases.
This command displays the Valve and Flange Database: <database name> dialog box.
For more information, see Valve Flange Database (on page 274).
Expansion Joint Modeler - Creates expansion joints and displays the Expansion Joint
Database <data file> and Expansion Joint Modeler dialog boxes. For more information,
see Expansion Joint (on page 278).
Title - Displays the title page of the current job. This is up to 60 lines of text that is stored
with the problem, and may be used for detailing run histories, discussing assumptions, and
so on. These lines may be printed with the output report through the input echo.
Hanger Design Criteria - Specifies hanger design criteria for the current model. For more
information, see Hanger Design Control Data (on page 287).
Intersection SIF Scratchpad - Opens a scratchpad for calculating stress intensification

factors (SIFs) for various intersection configurations under different codes. For more
information, see Intersection Stress Intensification Factors (on page 845).
Bend SIF Scratchpad - Opens a scratchpad for calculating stress intensification factors
(SIFs) for various bend configurations under different codes. You can access this
scratchpad by selecting Analysis > SIFs @ Bends or through the Bend SIF Scratchpad
option on the Classic Piping input or on the 3D model.
Special Execution Options - Displays the Special Execution Parameters dialog box.
These parameters remain set for that particular job.
Undo - Reverses or cancels any modeling steps. This can also be accomplished by
pressing Ctrl-Z. You can undo an unlimited number of steps. Undo is limited only by the
amount of available memory.

Redo - Repeats the last step done You can redo an unlimited number of steps. Redo is
limited by the amount of available memory.
The Block Operations toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box
or the 3D Model, contains the following functions. For more information, see Performing Block
Operations (on page 419).
Rotate- Rotates elements defined in the block. For more information, see Rotate (on page
363).
Duplicate- Duplicates elements in a block. For more information, see Duplicate (on page
363).
Delete - Deletes the selected block of elements.
Renumber - Rearranges the node numbers in the block. For more information, see Nodes
(on page 365).
Invert - Assigns new From Node and To Node values to the selected block of elements.
The Invert command reverses the order of the elements in the selected group as well as the
node numbering while preserving the geometry of the input model.
Contiguous segments (sets of elements) may be selected in either the Elements
dialog box, the 3D Graphics pane, or the Line Numbers dialog box.
For more information, see Invert (on page 366).
Change Sequence - Changes or rearranges the sequence (order) of elements while

preserving the geometry. For more information, see Change Sequence (on page 368).
The Aux Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
3D Model, contains auxiliary data functions most often used in piping input. Use this toolbar to
quickly access the Auxiliary Data dialog box found in the piping input. This toolbar includes the
following functions.
Bend - Puts a bend at the To node of every element that you have selected on
the model. Select an element(s) on the model and click Bend to view the Bends
tab on the Auxiliary Data dialog box of the current piping input job. Click the
down arrow to change the icon function to delete all bends or toggle between the
select and delete functions.

Rigids - Replaces the element(s) that you selected with a rigid. Select an
element(s) on the model and click Rigids to view the Rigids tab on the Auxiliary
Data dialog box of the current piping input job. Click the down arrow to change
the icon function to delete all rigid elements or toggle between the select and
delete functions.
Expansion Joint - Replaces the currently selected element with an expansion

joint. Select an element(s) on the model and click Expansion Joint to view the
Expansion Joints tab on the Auxiliary Data dialog box of the current piping input
job. Click the down arrow to change the icon function to delete all expansion joints
or toggle between the select and delete functions.
Reducer - Select an element(s) on the model and click Reducer to view the
Reducers tab on the Auxiliary Data dialog box of the current piping input job.
Click the down arrow to change the icon function to delete all reducers or toggle
between the select and delete functions (Toggle).
SIFs/Tees - Inserts a SIF or Tee at the end of the selected elements on the
model.
Restraints - Adds a new restraint or deletes an existing restraint to the selected

element on the model. For more information, see Restraints (on page 161).
Hangers - Adds a hanger to each of the selected elements on the model. Click
the down arrow to change the icon function to delete all hangers or toggle
between the select and delete functions.
Nozzles - Adds a nozzle to each of the selected elements on the model.
Displacements - Adds a displacement at each of the selected elements on the

model.
Forces/Moments - Adds a forces and moments at each of the selected elements

on the model.
Wind/Wave - Adds wind or wave details to each of the selected elements on the
model.
Uniform Loads - Adds a uniform load to each of the selected elements on the
model.
Allowables - Adds an allowable stress at each of the selected elements on the

model.
Node Names - Adds a node name to each of the selected elements on the
model.
Offsets - Adds an offset to each of the selected elements on the model.

Flange - Adds a flange to either end or both ends of the selected elements on the
model. Click the down arrow to change the icon function to delete all flanges or
toggle between the select and delete functions.
The Edit Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
3D Model, contains icons that let you access the most commonly used editing windows in piping
input. This toolbar includes the following functions.
Node Number Edit Window- Displays the Edit Node Numbers dialog box. For more
information, see Node Numbers (on page 114).
Mini-Delta Box - Displays the Edit Deltas dialog box. For more information, see Deltas
(on page 116).
Mini-Pipe Size Box - Displays the Edit Pipe Sizes dialog box. For more information, see
Pipe Sizes (on page 120).
Mini-Temps and Pressures Box - Displays the Edit Operating Conditions dialog box.
For more information, see Temperatures (on page 125).
Mini-Material Box - Displays the Edit Materials dialog box. For more information, see
Materials (on page 217).
Mini-Elastic Properties Box - Displays the Edit Elastic Properties dialog box. For more
information, see Material Elastic Properties (see "Elastic Properties" on page 246).
Mini-Densities Box - Displays the Edit Densities dialog box. For more information, see
Densities (on page 248).
Mini-Aux Screens Box - Displays the Auxiliary Data dialog box. For more information,
see Auxiliary Element Data (on page 1146).
The Reference CAD Models toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input
dialog box or the 3D Model, contains icons that let you import CAD-based models into the piping
CADWorx Model - Opens a CADWorx model for use with this model. If you have already
opened a CADWorx model, click the down arrow on the icon to select Load CWx Model.
For more information, see Open CADWorx Model (on page 254).

S3D/SPR Model - Opens the Load an S3D/SPR Model (on page 432) dialog box. If you
have already opened a S3D or SPR model, click the down arrow on the icon to select other
options, including the Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model, Dim S3D/SPR Model, S3D/SPR
Visibility Options. These options only display when you have a S3D/SPR model already
open. For more information, see S3D/SPR Model View (on page 431) and S3D/SPR
Visibility Options (on page 436).
The Wizards toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D
Model, contains icons that let you access the most commonly used wizards in piping input. This
toolbar includes the following functions.
Static Seismic Wizard - Opens the Seismic Wizard, which selects a

particular Seismic Code and its associated data. For more information,
see Seismic Wizard (on page 293).
Optimization Wizard - Opens the Optimization Wizard, which assists

with expansion loop design. For more information, see Optimization
Wizard (on page 307).
The Import Model toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or
the 3D Model, contains functions that let you access various import dialog boxes used in piping
Include Piping Files - Opens the Include Piping Files dialog box, which lets you include
other piping models into the current piping model. For more information, see Include Piping
Input Files (on page 336).
Include Structural Files - Opens the Include Structural Files dialog box, which lets you
include structural models into the current job. For more information, see Including
Structural Input Files (on page 337).
APCF - Opens the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box, which provides an
interactive, customizable way to import Piping Component Files (PCFs) into the CAESAR II
piping environment. For more information, see Advanced PCF Import (APCF) (on page
337).
The Organization Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog
box or the 3D Model, contains functions let you organize or move the elements on a model. This
toolbar includes the following functions.

Move Geometry - Selects or moves nodes or node groups on the model.
Move Geometry (X-Axis) - Restricts mouse movement on the model to the X axis.
Move Geometry (Y-Axis) - Restricts mouse movement on the model to the Y axis.
Move Geometry (Z-Axis) - Restricts mouse movement on the model to the Z axis.
Controls options for customizing the CAESAR II interface.

Click Reset on the Customize dialog box to undo changes.
Controls options for customizing toolbars.

Toolbars
Displays the toolbars. Select the checkbox to display the toolbar. Clear the checkbox to hide
the toolbar. For a description of the available toolbars, see Toolbars (on page 385).
New
Displays the New Toolbar dialog box, where you create a new custom toolbar and specify
the name for the toolbar.
Rename
Displays the Rename Toolbar dialog box, where you change the name for an existing
custom toolbar.
Delete
Deletes the selected toolbar. You can only delete custom toolbars.
Reset
Returns the toolbars to their original configuration.
Controls options for adding commands to toolbars.

Categories

Controls the category of commands available to drag.

Commands
Lists the commands in the selected category. Select a command and drag it to a toolbar.

Controls options for toolbars.

Always show full menus
Specifies whether menus show all commands, or only the most commonly used commands.
Show full menus after a short delay
Indicates whether or not menus expand to show all commands. This option is only available
if Always show full menus is cleared.
Reset menu and toolbar usage data
Returns the Always show full menus and Show full menus after a short delay check
boxes to their default settings.
Large icons
Displays large icons on the toolbars and menus.
Show ScreenTips on toolbars
Displays tooltips when you hover the cursor above toolbar buttons.
Show shortcut keys in ScreenTips
Displays the keyboard shortcut keys as tooltips when you hover the cursor above toolbar
buttons. This option is only available if Show ScreenTips on toolbars is selected.
Menu animations
Specifies how menu animations are applied.
Controls options for assigning keyboard shortcuts to commands.

Category
Specifies the category of commands to modify.
Commands
Lists the commands in the category.
Key assignments
Lists the keyboard shortcuts assigned to the selected command.
Press new shortcut key
Displays the shortcut key.
Description
Displays a description of the selected command.
Assign
Adds the shortcut key from the Press new shortcut key field to the Key assignments list
for the command.
Remove

Deletes the selected entry from the Key assignments list.

Reset All
Returns all keyboard shortcuts to their default settings.
Controls options for customizing menus.

Show Menu
Specifies the active menu.
Reset
Returns the selected menu to the default settings.
Select context menu
Specifies the active context menu.
Reset
Returns the selected context menu to the default settings.
Piping Input menu: View > Reset

Reset and Refresh Tools toolbar: Reset Plot
Resets the view to the default settings. If a list has focus, resets the list to the default size.
Piping Input menu: View > Toggle Graphics Update
Reset and Refresh Tools toolbar: Lock Graphics

Turns graphics updating on or off.
Piping Input menu: View > Front View

Standard Views toolbar: Front
Shortcut Key: ALT+Z
Displays the model from the front.

Piping Input menu: View > Back View

Standard Views toolbar: Back
Shortcut key: ALT+SHIFT+Z
Displays the model from the back.
Piping Input menu: View > Top View

Standard Views toolbar: Top
Shortcut key: ALT+SHIFT+Y
Displays the model from the top.
Piping Input menu: View > Bottom View

Standard Views toolbar: Bottom
Shortcut key: ALT+Y
Displays the model from the bottom.
Piping Input menu: View > Left-side View

Standard Views toolbar: Left
Shortcut key: ALT+X
Displays the model from the left side.
Piping Input menu: View > Right-side View

Standard Views toolbar: Right
Shortcut key: ALT+SHIFT+X
Displays the model from the right side.

Piping Input menu: View > Southeast ISO View
Standard Views toolbar: Southeast Isometric View

Shortcut key: F10
Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively, press F10.
Piping Input menu: View > Southwest ISO View
Standard Views toolbar: Southwest Isometric View

Displays the model isometrically from the southwest.
Piping Input menu: View > Northeast ISO View
Standard Views toolbar: Northeast Isometric View

Displays the model isometrically from the northeast.
Piping Input menu: View > Northwest ISO View
Standard Views toolbar: Northwest Isometric View

Displays the model isometrically from the northwest.
Piping Input menu: View > 4 View

Plot Tools toolbar: 4 View
Displays the model in four windows.
This command automatically places the horizontal and vertical dividers, or splitter bars, and
changes the cursor to a four-way arrow. You can change the position of the splitter bars by
moving the mouse. Click to fix the position.
Drag the splitter bars to change the size of the windows. Drag the splitter bars out of the view to
remove those views. You can drag the splitter located at the top or left scroll bar to add views.
You can manipulate the image in any of these panes individually.

Piping Input menu: View > Review Error Report

Displays the Errors and Warnings dialog box. This option is only available if you have run the
File > Error Check command. For more information, see Error Check (on page 255).
Errors and Warnings Dialog Box (on page 564)
Piping Input menu: View > Review Static Results
Standard Views toolbar: Review Static Results

Displays the results of the static load analysis. This option is only available if you have run the
Edit > Edit Static Load Cases command. For more information, see Edit Static Load Cases.
Tools Menu
Performs actions associated with toolbars, mini-windows, and importing and exporting
displacements.
Piping Input menu: Tools > Reset Toolbar Layout

Sets toolbars to the default layout.
Piping Input menu: Tools > Mini-windows

Displays a list of mini-windows that you can display. Mini-windows provide a quick way to
provide specific types of data.
Node Numbers - Displays the Edit Node Numbers dialog box.
Edit Deltas - Displays the Edit Deltas dialog box.
Pipe Sizes - Displays the Edit Pipe Sizes dialog box.
Temps & Pressures - Displays the Edit Operating Conditions

dialog box.
Materials - Displays the Edit Materials dialog box.
Elastic Properties - Displays the Edit Elastic Properties dialog

box.
Densities - Displays the Edit Densities dialog box.

Auxiliary Data - Displays the Auxiliary Data dialog box.
Classic Input - Displays the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Piping Input menu: Tools > Import/Export Displacements from File

Imports or exports nodal displacements from a file.
The software allows you to import and export displacements to and from a flat .disp text file. This
feature is very useful in situations where you need to define several displacements in a
CAESAR II model. You can import the displacements into a model with a few mouse clicks
instead of manually typing all the displacements in the Classic Piping Input. A displacements file
in the specified format must exist.
This feature works on the From and To nodes, CNodes, and Bend middle nodes in either the
fixed ASCII file format (.disp), or the comma separated value (.csv) format. For information on
editing ASCII text, see ASCII Text File Rules (on page 53). You can easily generate and
Controls parameters for importing and exporting nodal displacements.

Export Displacements To a File
Specifies the file name for the export. Type the full path to the file, or use the browse button
to browse to the file.
Export
Exports the nodal displacements to the specified file.
Import Displacements From a File
Specifies the file name for the import. Type the full path to the file, or use the browse button
to browse to the file.
Import
Imports the specified nodal displacement file.

A displacement file is a flat text file in versions 5.10 and 5.20, which can be created and edited
by any text editor such as Notepad.
In CAESAR II Version 2019 (11.0), a displacement file can be in either fixed format .disp or
comma separated value format .csv.
For both formats, use * to indicate a comment line in the displacement file. You can type
anything on the line following the *.
Displacement files can have as many comment lines as necessary.
The comment line is not counted in line numbering in the file format descriptions.
A fixed format displacement file has the .disp extension and this format:
1. The first line has only one the conversion factor value, which is used to divide the
translational displacements (DX, DY, and DZ) to convert them to the internal unit of inches.
2. The second line is either Y axis up or Z axis up to indicate the CAESAR II Coordinate
System that the following displacement data corresponds to.
3. All the remaining lines are displacement data lines:
a. Each line must have 58 values: Node X, Y, Z and 54 displacements for the nodes (6
degrees of freedom times 9 vectors is 54).
b. The first value is a node number.
c. The following three values, the three coordinates of a node, are ignored.
d. The final 54 values are displacements of the node, in the order: DX1, DY1, DZ1, RX1,
RY1, RZ1... DX9, DY9, DZ9, RX9, RY9, RZ9.
e. The first character space is reserved for the comment "*", each of the 58 values must be
12 characters long so the total length of a displacement data line should be 697
(1+58x12) characters long.
f. The position of each of the 54 displacement values is used to determine its location in a
CAESAR II model. For example, values at position 5, 8, 55 and 58 correspond to DX1,
and RX1, DZ9, and RZ9 of the node in the model.
g. A value must occupy a 12-character field. When a value has fewer than 12 characters,
you must pad either to the left or right of the blanks to make it 12-characters in length. If
there is no displacement value, a 12 character blank field must be reserved for it.

A comma separated value format displacement file has the .csv extension and follows this
format:
1. The first line has only the conversion factor value, which is used to divide the translational
displacements (DX, DY, and DZ) to convert them to the internal unit of inches.
2. The second line is either Y axis up or Z axis up to indicate the CAESAR II Coordinate
System that the following displacement data corresponds to.
3. All the remaining lines are displacement data lines:
a. Each line could have 58 values: Nodes X, Y, Z and the 54 displacements for the node (6
degrees-of-freedom times 9 vectors is 54).
b. The first value is a node number, which is required.
c. The following three values, the three coordinates of the node, are ignored.
d. The final 54 values are displacements of the node, in the order: DX1, DY1, DZ1, RX1,
RY1, RZ1... DX9, DY9, DZ9, RX9, RY9, RZ9. They are optional. You can specify all 54
values, or not a single value, or any number of values in between.
e. Values are separated by commas. The length of a displacement data line is not fixed.
f. Because each value is followed by a comma, a comma counter is used to determine the
placement of the value in a CAESAR II model. For example, values at positions 5, 8, 55
and 58 correspond to DX1, and RX1, DZ9, and RZ9 of the node in the model,
respectively.
g. A value can be any number of characters in length. When there is no displacement
value, you can use a zero length or blank field. For example, if a comma is followed by a
comma, or if a comma is followed by blank spaces and then a comma, it means that its
corresponding location in a CAESAR II model has no displacement value.
Generally, the csv format is recommended for a displacement file because it is relatively easy to
difficult to maintain.
A displacement file from version 5.10 or 5.20 cannot be used directly in CAESAR II
Version 2019 (11.0) because the formats are different.
There are three kinds of warning messages:

1. Node xxx is not in the model - Indicates that a node in the displacement file does not exist in
the CAESAR II model.
2. Node xxx could not find an empty location - Indicates that a node in the displacement file
exists in the CAESAR II model but that the software thinks that all displacement slots in the
model have already been occupied by other nodes. In this case, it is still possible for you to
input displacements for the node through the CAESAR II Classic Piping Input dialog box.
3. Node xxx does not have displacements - Indicates that a node in the displacement file does
not have a displacement value.
where xxx denotes a node number such as 100.

Generally, when a warning message is issued it indicates that an error exists either in the
displacement file or in the corresponding CAESAR II model. Carefully examine the offending
node in the displacement file or in the corresponding model and correct the error.
The Import and Export Summary reports are generated in the import and export operations.
The reports provide information about the nodes in a displacement file just imported into a
CAESAR II Import model:
1. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model before import.
2. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model after import.
3. The number of displacement nodes that have been read in.
4. The number of displacement nodes that are not in the model.
5. The number of displacement nodes that cannot find empty locations in the model.
6. The number of displacement nodes that do not have displacements.
7. The number of displacement nodes that have stored displacements in the model.
8. The number of displacement nodes that are replacing values in the model.
9. The number of displacement nodes that are new in the model.
Similar in operation to the warning messages, the summary report can help you identify potential
problems in a displacement file. However, you should remember the following points:
1. Because every displacement data line in a displacement file has a node number, the total
number of nodes processed is equal to the total number of displacement data lines in the
file.
2. Each displacement data line should have a unique node number. However, if the same
node number appears in many data lines, it would be counted many times. In this case, the
displacement values in the last data line are used in the model, overwriting the previous
values.
3. If no node number appears in a displacement data line, CAESAR II indicates the
corresponding data line number and stops the import process.
4. If there is a node in a displacement file that is not in the model, or cannot find a slot in the
model, or does not have a displacement, the displacement file or the model should be
checked carefully to understand the reasons behind it.
5. If a displacement node exists both in the model and the displacement file, the displacement
values from the file are used to overwrite the ones in the model, and this node is counted as
a replacement node.
6. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model after import should be equal to the
number of displacement nodes existing in the model before import, plus the number of new
displacement nodes.
7. The number of displacement nodes that have stored displacements in the model should be
equal to the number of replacement nodes, plus the number of new displacement nodes.

1. Click Tools > Import/Export Displacements from File.

The Import/Export Displacements dialog box displays.
2. Type the path and name of a displacement file in the Export Displacements To a File box,
or click ... to browse to the file.
3. Click Export to send the nodal displacements to the selected file.
4. Click Done to exit the Import/Export Displacements dialog.
If there are no displacements in a CAESAR II job, an export operation creates a
displacement template file in which all nodes are listed according to the element list.
1. Click Tools > Import/Export Displacements from File.

The Import/Export Displacements dialog box displays.
2. Type the path and name of the displacement file in the Import Displacements From a File
box, or click ... to browse to the file.
The Open dialog box displays.
Two file formats can be used to create a displacement file:
Fixed format with a .disp file extension.
Commas Separated Value format with a .csv file extension.
By default, displacement files display in comma separated values format(.csv).
You can also choose displacement files with the fixed format (.disp) by clicking
Displacement Import File (*.dsp) from the Files of type list.
3. Select the displacement file.

4. Click Open.
5. Click Import.

During the import process, if an erroneous condition is detected for a displacement node a
warning message displays. A summary report is generated after all displacement data is
processed.
For more details about warning messages and the summary report, see Imposed Loads.
6. After reviewing warning messages and a summary report, click Done.
The first two figures show displacement files Notepad for disp and csv formats. The third
and fourth figures show displacement files in Microsoft Excel.
For a detailed description of both file formats, see Displacement File Formats (on page 408).
Notepad (*.disp) format

Notepad (*.csv) format
Excel (*.csv) format
Excel Example (*.csv) format Displacement File Template

If a CAESAR II job has no displacements the displacement export operation creates a

displacement template file.
3D Modeler
When you start CAESAR II and start the piping input processor, the software automatically
displays a graphic representation of the model to the right of the Classic Piping Input dialog
box. To increase the window space available for graphics you can hide the Classic Piping
Input dialog box by clicking . The initial view for a job that has never been plotted displays
according to the configuration defaults. These defaults include:
A rendered view - restraints shown
XYZ compass - isometric view
Tees and nozzles highlighted - orthographic projection
The plotting begins by displaying the model in centerline/single line mode to speed up the
process. Then all the elements are rendered one-by-one. Later, the restraints and other relevant
items are added.
The model is fully operational while it is being drawn. You can apply any available
option to the model at any time. The status bar at the bottom displays the drawing progress in

the form of Drawing element X of Y. When the plot operation is complete, the status message
changes to Ready.
When you hover the cursor over a button, the name of the button and a short description of the
functionality displays in the status bar at the bottom of the view window.
There are several methods of accomplishing nearly every command in the Input Plot utility. You
can access commands by clicking buttons, by selecting menu items, or by using hot keys.
Center Line View - Displays model data in single line mode. This often makes the view
clearer. In this mode, restraints and other element information items display. Display the
volume or double line plot by clicking the corresponding button. Press V to switch among
the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line Mode / Center
Line View.
Shaded View - Displays the model as shaded 3D shapes. Restraints and other element
Silhouette - Displays the model as a silhouette. Restraints and other element information
items display.
Hidden Line Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame with hidden lines removed.
Restraints and other element information items display.

Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame. Restraints and other element
Translucent - Displays the model as translucent 3D shapes. Restraints and other element
Front - Displays the model from the front. Alternatively, press Z.
Back - Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.
Top - Displays the model from the top. Alternatively, press Y.
Bottom - Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Left - Displays the model from the left. Alternatively, press X.
Right - Displays the model from the right. Alternatively, press Shift + X.
Southeast ISO View - Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively,
press F10.
Node Numbers - Turns the display of node numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N. Click
the down arrow to display node numbers for a specific element, such as for only restraints
or only anchors. Select Names Only to display only the node names on the model, and not
the node numbers.
Length - Turns the display of element lengths on or off. Alternatively, press L.
Select Element - Select a single element in the model. Hover over an element in the
model to display information about that element. Press Ctrl when you select to add or
remove elements from the selection.
Select Group - Select a group of elements in the model by dragging a window around
them. You can add elements to the selection by pressing Ctrl while dragging the window.
Remove elements from the selection by pressing Shift while dragging the window.
Perspective - Displays the model in perspective mode.
Orthographic - Displays the model in orthographic mode.
You can turn off the display of node numbers (for restraints, hangers, and anchors)
for a clearer view. The size of boundary condition symbols (such as restraints, anchors, and
hangers) is relative to the pipe size outer diameter. You can change the size of these symbols
clicking the black arrow to the right of the relevant button and selecting a size from the list.
You can adjust the color of the node numbers, lengths, elements, boundary conditions, and so
on by clicking Change Display Options . For more information, see Configuring 3D Graphics
(on page 422).

Reset - Returns the model returns to its default state as defined by the configuration. Any
elements hidden by the Range command are restored.
Zoom - Increases or decreases the magnification of the model. Move the cursor up or
down holding the left mouse button. Release the mouse button to stop the zoom.
Alternatively, press + and - to zoom in and out. You can change the zoom level of the
model while in another command by rotating the mouse wheel.
Zoom to Window - Changes the magnification of the model to fit an area that you
specify. Click one corner of the area and then while holding the mouse button, stretch a
box diagonally to the opposite corner of the area
Zoom to Selection - Fits the selected element in the view.
Zoom to Extents - Fits the entire model in the view.
Orbit - Rotates the model interactively. Rotate the model using the mouse or the arrow
keys on the keyboard. To use the mouse, click the left mouse button on the model to start
a bounding box. Hold the left mouse button and move the mouse to the other end of the
bounding box. Release the mouse button to update the view. If the bounding box is not
visible, check the corresponding box on the User Options tab of the Plot Configuration
dialog box. For more information, see Configuring 3D Graphics (on page 422). During
rotation, the model may in centerline mode, or some of the geometry details may
disappear or become distorted. This is to improve the display speed. The actual
conversion depends on the size and complexity of the model. After the rotation is
complete, the model returns to its original state.
Pan - Pans the model. The cursor changes to a hand. Move the cursor while holding
down the left mouse button. You can also pan the view while another command is active
by holding the center mouse button (or wheel) down while moving the mouse.
Walk Through - Explores the model with a setup similar to a virtual reality application.
This command produces the effect of walking towards the model. For more information,
see Walking Through the Model (on page 430).
Load CADWorx Model - Displays the model in CADWorx.

Building Models Quickly

CAESAR II has several features that help you build models more quickly from the 3D model.
Select one or groups of elements and right-click the model to access context menus so you
can quickly perform some of your most common tasks. See Performing Single-Element
Operations (on page 418) and Performing Block Operations (on page 419) for more
information.
Limit the items you display on the model to simplify the functions you need to use. See
Limiting the Display (on page 421) for more information.
Use legends to update properties across the current model. See Updating Properties from
the 3D Model (on page 422) for more information.
Access the most frequently used commands through a right-click Element context menu, all
without ever leaving your 3D model. These commands include:
Insert, break, or delete elements
Insert, delete, and edit restraints
Look up valve and flange data from the Valve and Flange Database
Insert or delete rigid elements (such as valves and flanges)
To quickly access single element commands from the 3D model
1. Select any element on the model and right-click the element to see the commands available
from the context menu.
You must unlock the 3D model to access the right-click menu. You must also
right-click directly on the element selected to access the Element context menu.
2. Select the element command that you want to perform.
The software completes the action and moves the cursor to the next logical box on the
piping input.

Perform block (global) operations to elements in the model using one of the following methods:
1. Access the Block Operations commands from one of the following options:
a. Click the Block Operations toolbar, or
b. Select more than one element on the model and right-click to see the block operations
available from the context menu.
You must unlock the 3D model to access the right-click element context
menu.
2. Select one of the following options:
Rotate
Duplicate
Delete
Renumber
Invert
Change Sequence
You can also access block operation commands from the Global menu in piping
input.
1. Right-click in the Elements dialog box to display the menu.

2. Click Block Operation.
3. Select one of the sub-menu items to perform the indicated operation.
Rotate
Delete
Duplicate

Nodes
Invert
Change Sequence
Status
You can also access block operation commands from the Global menu in piping
input.
1. Click Select Element on the Standard Operators toolbar and select a single element on
the 3D model.
The selected element highlights.
To select more than one element, press the Shift key while clicking the additional
elements.
The entire group (block) of elements highlights.
Alternatively, you can click Select Group on the Standard Operators toolbar and draw a
box around the items you want to select.
The highlighted elements define the set that any Block Operations command affects. A block
can contain any number of elements, from a single element to every element in the model.
1. Move the cursor to the first element in the group (block) to be operated on and click the row
number for that item on the far left of the dialog box.
The software highlights the row for the element highlights in the Element dialog box and in
the 3D Graphics pane.
2. Move the cursor to the last element in the group (block) to be operated on, press Shift and
click the corresponding row number.
3. Alternatively, you can Select Group in the Standard Operators toolbar and draw a box
around the items you want to select.
The entire group (block) of elements highlights.
The highlighted rows define the elements that any block operations affect. A block may contain
any number of elements from a single element to every element in the model.
1. Display the Line Numbers dialog box.

2. Select the element or block of elements for which you want to perform a block operation.
The corresponding element(s) highlight in the 3D Graphics pane.
The highlighted rows define the elements that any block operations change. A block may
contain any number of elements from a single element to every element in the model.

Sometimes it is necessary to limit the amount of information displayed on the screen. This may
be useful when the model is large, or if it has many similar looking branches.
Find - Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box
that allows you to specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You
can enter the node numbers in either of the two fields, or in both. If you entering only
the From node number, the software searches for the first available element that
starts with that node number. If you define only the To node number, the software
searches for an element ending with that node number. When the software locates
the element, it highlights the element and fits it in the view. You can zoom out to
better identify the location of the highlighted element within the model. For more
information, see Find Node (on page 261).
3D Cutting Plane - Defines the cutting plane for the model. This option is useful when
trying to emphasize a specific element. In many cases, the elements or node numbers
are not defined consecutively. Because of this, it may be easier to cut a portion of the
model at a certain location to see more details.
When the cutting plane displays, use the handles to move and or rotate the planes. If
cutting the plane's handles are not visible, or the display goes blank, use the Zoom
command to expand the view. To disable the cutting plane, select the command
again.
This command can be used along any of the three axes.
Range - Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful
when you need to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large
model. This command displays the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U.
For more information, see Range (on page 369).
Line Numbers - Displays the Line Numbers pane which allows graphical editing of
line numbers. You can do the following from this pane.
Assign a new line number to the block of elements that have been selected on the
3D graphical display.
Remove an existing line number.
Set and reset visibility options to hide and unhide elements.
Assign a color to an individual line number.
To reassign one or more elements from one line number to another existing line
number, simply drag-and-drop (move) the elements between existing Line Numbers in
the Line Numbers pane.
When you click the Line Number name in the Line Number pane, the
corresponding elements are highlighted in the 3D pane and are selected to perform
Block operations.
For more information, see Line Numbers (on page 317).

You can update many of the piping input properties globally from within the Legends dialog box
in the 3D model.
To update a piping input property from the 3D model
1. Select the property you want to update using the Legends toolbar in 3D model.
You can also update many of these properties by right-clicking, selecting Highlights from
the context menu, and then specifying the property that you want to edit.
The Legend dialog box opens with the selected property displayed.
2. Double-click on the property value in the left column to open the Edit box.
3. Type a new value in the Edit box and press ENTER or click anywhere in the dialog box.
The software updates all elements that have the same property value, represented in the
Legend dialog box, on the 3D model, and in the List dialog box.
Currently, the software does not include global update functionality for the
following piping input properties:
Materials
Piping Codes
Forces
Uniform Loads
Wind/Wave Data
Displacements
Pipe Density
Configuring 3D Graphics
The CAESAR II 3D Graphics engine remembers the state of the model between sessions.
When you exit and return, the model displays in the same state in which it was last viewed.
To obtain a more uniform look for the graphics, change the color and font options:
1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup on the main menu to display the CAESAR II Configuration
Editor dialog box.
2. Open the Graphics Settings category.
3. Set the Always Use System Fonts and Always Use System Colors options to True under
the Visual Options section.

These settings are stored in the computer's registry and CAESAR II always displays the
graphics according to these settings.
If the settings are set to False, then the state of each model is maintained individually as an
XML data file (jobname.XML) in the current data folder. After starting another input session,
CAESAR II reads this XML file and restores the 3D graphics to its previous state. This includes
the rotation and zoom level of the model; color settings, data display, and the current graphics
operator.
Option Description
Colors Select any color item in the list, then click to display a Windows color selection
tool. Select the new color. Click Reset All to return all of the settings to CAESAR II
defaults, as defined in configuration.
Fonts Selecting any font item in the list, then click to display the standard Windows
font selection tool. Set the options to meet your requirements and click OK.

Changing the Model Display

You can specify the way the model displays when you open a file. The session can start with a
preset command active (such as Zoom), or start with the last command still active. Similarly, the
graphics can start in a preset view (such as isometric), or in the last rotated zoomed position.
Option Description
Show Bounding Box Determines if rotations using the mouse include an outline box
surrounding the model.
Hide Overlapped Prevents text from appearing on top of other text items.
Text
Restore Previous Determines whether the software remembers your last command
Operator (operator) between sessions or always defaults to a specified
command.
Restore Previous Determines whether the graphics engine remembers the last displayed
View view of the model, or defaults to a specified view.

Default Projection Determines the initial projection style of the model.

Mode
Visibility Alters the degree of transparency when translucent pipe is activated.

Increasing this value makes it easier to see through the pipe elements.
The Visibility option is only effective when viewing the
model in rendered mode.
Markers
Highlighting Graphics
You can review the piping model in the context of certain data such as by diameter, wall
thickness, temperature, or pressure.
You can make changes to some piping input properties from the Legends dialog box. The
software updates all elements that have the same property value in the model. For more
information, see Updating Properties from the 3D Model (on page 422).
Command Description
Diameters Updates the model to show each diameter in a different color. Use this
option to see the diameter variations throughout the system or to verify
that diameter changes have been made. Alternatively, press D. A color
key displays the diameters defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs and update diameter settings.
Wall Thickness Updates the model to show each wall thickness in a different color.
Use this option to see the wall thickness variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. Alternatively, press
W. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
Insulation Updates the model to show each insulation thickness in a different

Thickness color. Use this option to see the insulation thickness variations
throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press I. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in
the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to cladding thickness or refractory
thickness by selecting that option from the list.
Cladding Thickness Updates the model to show each cladding thickness in a different
color. Use this option to see the cladding thickness variations
throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
You can change the display to insulation thickness or refractory

Refractory Thickness Updates the model to show each refractory thickness in a different
color. Use this option to see the refractory thickness variations
throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
You can change the display to insulation thickness or cladding
Material Updates the model to show each material in a different color. Use this
option to see the material variations throughout the system or to verify
that changes have been made. Alternatively, press M. A color key
displays the materials defined in the model. You can change the
Piping Codes Updates the model to show each piping code in a different color. Use
this option to see the piping code variations throughout the system or
to verify that changes have been made.
Corrosion Updates the model to show each corrosion allowance in a different

color. Use this option to see the corrosion variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the corrosion allowances defined in the model. You can change the
Pipe Density Updates the model to show each pipe density in a different color. Use
this option to see the pipe density variations throughout the system or
to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays the pipe
densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
Fluid Density Updates the model to show each fluid density in a different color. Use
this option to see the fluid density variations throughout the system or
to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays the fluid
densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
Insulation Density Updates the model to show each insulation density in a different color.
Use this option to see the insulation density variations throughout the
the insulation densities defined in the model. You can change the
You can change the display to cladding density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or refractory density by selecting that option from the list.

Cladding Density Updates the model to show each cladding density in a different color.
Use this option to see the cladding density variations throughout the
the cladding densities defined in the model. You can change the
You can change the display to insulation density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or refractory density by selecting that option from the list.
Insul/Cladding Unit Wt. Updates the model to show each insulation or cladding unit weight in a
different color. Use this option to see the variations throughout the
the insulation or cladding unit weights defined in the model. You can
You can change the display to insulation density, cladding density, or
refractory density by selecting that option from the list.
Refractory Density Updates the model to show each refractory density in a different color.
Use this option to see the refractory density variations throughout the
the refractory densities defined in the model. You can change the
You can change the display to insulation density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or insulation density by selecting that option from the list.
The Legend dialog box can be resized, docked, or removed from view.
You can still zoom, pan, or rotate the model while in highlight mode. You can also use any
of orthographic projections and single line or volume modes without affecting the model
highlighted state.
Clicking one of the highlight commands a second time cancels the coloring effect.
If you print the model while it is in highlight mode, the color key legend displays in the upper
left corner of the page, even if the actual legend window has been dragged away from the
view.
Manipulating the Toolbar

You can rearrange or remove buttons on toolbars. There are two methods to make these
adjustments.
Right-click the toolbar, and click Customize.
Remove or reposition the button using drag and drop.
To remove buttons from the toolbar, click the down arrow located at the end of each toolbar and
then click Add or Remove Buttons. Turn on the check box to add buttons to the toolbar. Clear
the check box to remove buttons. To rearrange buttons, press ALT and then drag the button to
a different location. To restore the CAESAR II default toolbar configuration, click Reset .
For more information, see Toolbars (on page 385).

Displaying Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, and

Wind/Wave Loads
You can display applied or predefined displacements, forces, uniform loads, or wind and wave
loads in a table. You can scroll the display windows vertically and/or horizontally to view all node
points where data has been defined. To move through the defined displacement or force vectors
1 through 9, click Next >> and Previous <<. The color key assists you in locating the node
points on the model when the model geometry is complex.
The displacements window shows user-specified values as well as free or fixed degrees of
freedom (DOF). In this case, a DOF is free if a displacement value is not specified in any of the
displacement load vectors. If a DOF has a specified displacement in at least one of the load
vectors, then it is fixed in all other load vectors.
Forces - Turns the display of forces and moments on and off.
Uniform Loads - Updates the model to show each uniform load in a different color. Use
this option to see the uniform load variations throughout the system or to verify that
changes have been made. A color key displays the uniform loads defined in the model.
You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
The uniform load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the
data. Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the displacement or force
vectors.
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node
number where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Because the data propagates
throughout the model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.
Wind/Wave - Updates the model to show each wind or wave load in a different color.
Use this option to see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes
have been made. A color key displays the wind or wave loads defined in the model.
The wind and wave load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of
the data. Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the loads.
All the elements with wind defined display in red. All the elements with wave data
defined display in green. The legend grid shows the relevant data.
The legend window can be resized, docked, or removed from view.

You can still zoom, pan, or rotate the model while in highlight mode. You can also use any
of orthographic projections and single line or volume modes without affecting the model
highlighted state.
Clicking one of the highlight commands a second time cancels the coloring effect.
If you print the model while it is in highlight mode, the color key legend displays in the upper
left corner of the page. This is true even if the actual legend window has been dragged away
from the view.
You can display predefined displacements by pressing F3. You can display forces/moment
vectors by pressing F5.

Select Element displays element data. When this command is active, hovering the
cursor over a pipe element displays the element's nodes, delta dimensions, and pipe size
data. Clicking an element highlights the element and updates the information on the dialog
box. Click in the empty space of the graphics view to unhighlight the element. The dialog
box still contains the information from the last element that you selected.
Saving an Image for Later Presentation

Occasionally, it is necessary to add a graphical representation of a model to the CAESAR II
Stress reports. The graphics view can be saved as a graphic by clicking File > Save As
Graphics Image. The model geometry, colors, highlighting, Plot Settings legend, as well as
restraints and most of the other options are transferred to the graphic. The default graphic file
name is the job name with an extension .TIF. This is a standard Windows-supported image file
extension that can be opened for viewing. The image resolution can also be changed in the
Save Image dialog box.
This is a static graphic file.
You also have the option to save the graphics as .HTML file. After saving as .HTML CAESAR II
creates two files in the current data directory using the current job name: *.HTML and *.HSF.
Opening the .HTML file displays the corresponding .HSF file.
This is an interactive file.
The first time a CAESAR II-created .HTML file is opened with an Internet browser, you receive a
message asking you to download a control from Tech Soft 3D. Answer Yes to allow the
download, and the image displays. After the model displays, right-clicking the model shows the
available viewing options such as orbit, pan, zoom, different render modes, and so on. The
image can be printed or copied to the clipboard.
Internet Explorer (IE) version 5.0 and earlier may not display the image properly.
Intergraph CAS recommends IE6 or later.
You can use the Markups toolbar functions to add additional lines or annotations to the image.
The Markups toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
Freehand Markup - Draws a line in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the line.
Rectangle Markup - Draws a rectangle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the
rectangle.
Circle Markup - Draws a circle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the circle.
Annotate - Adds a brief description to the model. The annotation may be especially useful
in the output processor. The annotation text box is a single line. Annotation is printed and
saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not saved to HTML.
Annotate w/Leader - Adds a brief description to the model. This annotation includes a
leader line. Drag the annotation box to extend the leader. The annotation text box is a single
line. The annotation with a leader stays with the model when you zoom, pan, rotate, or use
any of the highlight options. Annotation is printed and saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not
saved to HTML.

The markup annotation text box is a single line. The color and the font face/size cannot be
changed. The default color is red.
Markup annotations are saved to the .TIF file and spooled to the printer.
The geometry and the text of the markup annotations are temporary. They are not saved
with the model. These graphics and disappear from view with any change such as zoom,
rotate, pan, or reset all.
The color, font face, and size of the annotation text can be changed by clicking Tools >
Configure/Setup on the main menu. For more information, see Configuring 3D Graphics
(on page 422).
When you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another operator.
(For example, Freehand Markup stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)
Walking Through the Model

CAESAR II lets you explore the model with a feature similar in operation to a virtual reality
game. It produces the effect of walking towards the model. After you are close to or inside the
model, you can look left, right, up, and down, step to a side, or ride an elevator up and down.
Walk Through is useful in providing a real-time interactive view of the model.
Click Walk Through to display the cursor as a pair of feet.
You can begin walking by clicking and holding the left mouse button. Move forward by moving
the mouse toward the top of the window. Move back by doing the opposite.
You can also pan the view by holding the center mouse button (or wheel) down while moving
the mouse. This provides the panning effects of riding the elevator up/down or stepping to either
side.
Walk Through also provides an additional control that aids in navigation. Clicking the
various hot spots on the control duplicates mouse movements with the added benefit of
providing the ability to move in a perfectly straight line.
In addition, Walk Through also provides you with the added functionality of determining the
walking speed. In general, walking speed is determined by the distance between where you first
click and how far you move the mouse. The keys below which, if held down while walking, effect
walk through's operation:
Shift - Changes the walk mode to run mode, effectively doubling the walk speed.
Ctrl - Changes the walk mode to slow mode, effectively halving the walk speed.
Alt - Enables you to look left or right without changing the walk path. Releasing the key,
automatically returns your viewpoint to looking forward.
To exit from this command, click any other command.

Moving Elements
The Move Geometry commands, located in the Edit Mode toolbar, let you select and move
nodes or elements along a specified axis. Select the node or element, and then press Tab or
click to select the x-, y-, or z-axis option (located next to the Move Geometry option in the
toolbar). The software defaults to the X-Axis.
For example, to move a restraint along a corresponding pipe centerline, select Move Geometry
and specify the direction of the axis for the line. Or, if your model includes an expansion loop,
select Move Geometry to change the length or depth of the loop in the direction of the specified
axis.
After you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another
operator. (For example, Move Geometry stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)
To move elements on the 3D model
1. Click Move Geometry to display marker control points at all nodes and tangent points.
On bends, the marker control points display on the far weld-line.
2. Click and drag the cursor to select the nodes to move.
3. Click any of the selected nodes.
The mouse is in move mode. The mouse movement is clamped to either the x, y, or z axis.
4. To change the axis, press Tab or click one of the Axis commands on the Edit Mode
toolbar.
5. Click to specify the new location.
The model geometry is updates.
6. Alternatively, you can type the magnitude of the movement. If you type a single number, the
movement is applied to the currently selected axis. You can move in multiple directions at
once by typing <x-value>, <y-value>, <z-value>.
S3D/SPR Model View

CAESAR II provides functionality to load Smart 3D (S3D) or SmartPlant Review (SPR)
reference models either partially or in full. You can then rotate and/or filter the loaded S3D/SPR
graphic models to adjust the visibility or isolate specific component classes. This functionality
allows you to interpret the design environment surrounding the piping system and use this
knowledge to readily identify optimal support point and expansion loop locations, judge available
clearances, and so forth. Generally, this functionality provides a more seamless means of
communication across all disciplines involved in the design process when Smart 3D is used as
the overall design platform.
Click S3D/SPR Model in the Reference CAD Models toolbar in the Classic Piping Input
and select one of the following drop-down menu options:
Load S3D/SPR Model
Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model
Dim S3D/SPR Model

S3D/SPR Visibility Options
Load an S3D/SPR Model
1. From the piping input, click S3D/SPR Model .

The software opens the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box.
2. Click Browse and navigate to the location of the VUE or HSF file you want to display and
click Open.
Alternatively, you can type the path name in the field.
3. Select Full Load.
4. Select the degree to rotate the model, if necessary, from the Model Rotation.
The software rotates the model to the angle you specify based on the original
angle of the model when you loaded it.
5. Click Load File to display the graphic file in the CAESAR II 3D Graphics pane.
You can return to the dialog box and select another angle from the Model
Rotation. The software displays the rotation immediately on the 3D graphics pane so that
you can review the rotation before you click Load File.
The bounding box functionality allows you to specify which portion of the graphic model to
import into your CAESAR II model.
You can either define the bounding box to the boundaries of the existing CAESAR II model or
select part of the existing CAESAR II model using the Select Group option on the Standard
Operators toolbar. Then, click Draw Cube at the bottom of the dialog box, and adjust as
needed.
1. From the piping input, click S3D/SPR Model .

The software opens the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box.
2. Click Browse and navigate to the location of the VUE or HSF file you want to display and
click Open.
3. Select Partial Load.
Select Re-Import if you need to refresh or change your visibility settings.
4. Select the degree to rotate the model, if necessary, from the Model Rotation.
The software rotates the model to the angle you specify based on the original
angle of the model when you loaded it.

5. Select the Use Model Bounding-Box option.
Alternatively, select elements in the area of interest by drawing a selection

window around them using the Selection Group option in the Standard Operators toolbar.
Then, select Bounding Box from Selection in the Bounding Box Coordinates.
6. Click Draw Cube at the bottom of the dialog box.
You can then resize or pan the cube in all six dimensions (up, down, left, right, front, back)
until you have enclosed all the parts of the graphic model you want to load into a CAESAR II
model.
As shown in the figure above, the bounding box has six markers:
Anchor Marker - Indicates the starting point of the bounding box (shown in red). You
cannot resize the model using this marker.
The three faces to which the anchor marker is connected are fixed (cannot be moved
via any of the markers). You can move the whole bounding box by panning it.
Top Face Marker - Moves the top face (for example, the face that is perpendicular to
top-view-axis of the model, such as Y_Up, Z_Up).
Base Markers - Allows you to re-size the bounding box by selecting any one of three
markers and dragging the mouse.
Base Marker 1 - Moves the rest of the two faces along with Base Marker 3.
Base Marker 2 - Moves these two faces simultaneously.
Base Marker 3 - Moves the rest of the two faces along with Base Marker 1.
Centroid Marker - Sits at the center of the bounding box volume and moves the whole
bounding box from one position to another.

The values for the X, Y, and Z axes display in the Starting Point boxes,
depending on how you manipulate the size and shape of the cube with the graphics
markers. The Starting Point boxes are view-only boxes that are for informational purposes
only.
7. Click Load File.
The software loads all components that are inside the bounding box into your model. A
component that originates within the bounding box and extends beyond the boundaries of
the bounding box displays in its entirety. A component that lies completely outside of the
bounding box is totally excluded from the view.
In the Reference CAD Models toolbar of piping input, click S3D/SPR Model . The Load
S3D/SPR Model dialog box displays.
You can load a partial or a full VUE or HSF model. From the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box,
you can specify to rotate the model upon import into CAESAR II, if needed. You can also specify
a bounding box area, which indicates a section of the model that you want to load into CAESAR
II.
Select a Smart 3D or SmartPlant Review VUE or a HOOPS Stream File (HSF) file from your
hard drive.
Alternatively, you can type the path name to the location of your graphics file.
Select to load the entire S3D or SPR model from the selected VUE file or HSF.
You can select either Full Load or Partial Load as one of the VUE Loading Options.
Select if you want to load a specified portion of the S3D or SPR model from the selected VUE
file or HSF. This option allows you to use the bounding box to specify the section of the graphic
model to load into your CAESAR II model.
You can select either Full Load or Partial Load as one of the VUE Loading Options.

Select to re-import the VUE file or HSF.
Specifies the north direction of the Smart 3D or SmartPlant Review model. CAESAR II uses this
value in combination with the Set North Direction option in Special Execution Parameters (on
page 331) and Advanced PCF Import (APCF) (on page 337) to properly orient the imported
model. Select -X, +X, -Y, +Y, -Z, or +Z.
Select to use the boundaries of your existing CAESAR II model for the graphic model you are
loading.
Select to define a bounding box for a selected part of the graphic model in which you are
loading.
Displays the values for the X, Y, and Z axes, depending on how you manipulate the size and
shape of the cube with the graphics tools. Starting Point boxes are for informational purposes
only and are not editable.

Specifies the width of the bounding box volume.
Specifies the height of the bounding box volume.
Specifies the depth of the bounding box volume.
Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model

In the Reference CAD Models toolbar, click S3D/SPR Model and select Show 3D Model
from the drop-down list.
This option is available if there is a S3D model to display.
Dim S3D/SPR Model

In the Reference CAD Models toolbar, click S3D/SPR Model and select Dim 3D Model
from the drop-down list.
This option is available if there is a S3D model to display.
S3D/SPR Visibility Options

In the Reference CAD Models toolbar, click S3D/SPR Model and select S3D/SPR
Visibility Options from the drop-down list.
This option is available if there is a S3D/SPR model to display. You can then modify the
graphics to display/hide types of components from the S3D/SPR graphic model.
Allows you to hide details of the S3D/SPR graphic model that are not needed or could be
distracting while you are working with the model in CAESAR II. For example, if you import a
Smart 3D model using the CAESAR II APCF or PCF import functions and want to reference the
S3D/SPR graphic model for context, the piping elements in the CAESAR II model and the
S3D/SPR graphic reference model can overlap and cause confusion. You can turn off the
display of piping elements from the S3D/SPR Visibility Options, which enables you to compare
the changes more easily.
1. Select S3D/SPR Visibility Options from the S3D/SPR Model drop-down list in the
piping input.

The S3D/SPR Visibility Options dialog box displays.
2. Select a Visibility percentage from 0% to 100% for each of the five categories of
components in a S3D or SPR model.
The Visibility percentage indicates the percentage of light allowed to pass through the
object. For example, a low percentage value indicates the graphics elements are nearly
invisible.
3. Check the corresponding check boxes to display the elements for a given category or select
the top check box to display all the categories.
The graphic on the loaded model display based on the specified visibility values.
4. Click the Hide/show icon to hide or display the S3D/SPR model graphic.
5. Click the refresh visibility icon to refresh the S3D/SPR model graphic and display the
revised visibility settings.

SECTION 5
Structural Steel Modeler
Main window ribbon: Home > Input > Structural Input

Main window menu: Input > Structural Steel
Adds structural elements to a model. Using the modeler, you can perform the following
functions:
Open and view structural files.
Enter command and parameter data to build structural models.
In This Section
Structural Steel Model Basics ........................................................ 438
Structural Steel Graphics ............................................................... 443
CAESAR II Structural Input ............................................................ 444
Structural Steel Input Examples ..................................................... 447
Insert Menu .................................................................................... 474
Commands Menu ........................................................................... 474
Structural Databases ...................................................................... 516
Structural Steel Model Basics

Start the Structural Steel Modeler from the CAESAR II main menu by opening a structural file,
and then choosing Input > Structural Steel. The software opens the CAESAR II Structural
Input dialog box.
The Structural Steel Modeler features an interactive interface, the CAESAR II Structural Input
dialog box, where you use keywords to define parameters. If you are not familiar with the
keyword input, refer to Structural Steel Input Examples (on page 447), and use F1 to launch
help.
The following example shows a structural steel model with two sections and multiple elements
defined.
- Fixes node 5, all degrees of freedom.
- Defines properties for section #1 (a 20-inch wide flange of 49 pounds per
foot).

- Defines a vertical element from 5 to 10.
Because many structures have a considerable degree of repeatability, there are various forms,
options, and deviations for these commands to help you generate large structural models. The
method of single element generation is well suited to the needs of most pipers.
Create new lines by selecting a keyword command from the Edit menu or from the toolbar. The
most typically used commands are as follows:
EDim (on page 488)
Defines structural elements.
Fix (on page 478)
Defines structural anchors (ALL) or restraints.
Load (on page 495)
Defines concentrated forces.
Unif (on page 491)
Defines uniform loads.
Secid (on page 500)
Defines cross-section properties.
From the Edit menu, you can complete other frequently used functions, including:
Edit > Undo
Reverse the last action.
Edit > Copy Card
Copies an existing command. You must first select the command to copy.
Edit > Paste Card
Pastes a command in the model at the location specified from the Insert menu.
Edit > Delete Card

Deletes an existing command. You must first select the command to delete.
Certain commands set parameters that the software uses for all future element generations:
Default (on page 513)
Sets the default Section ID and Material ID.
Angle (on page 490)
Sets the default element orientation.
Beams (on page 505), Braces (on page 507), and Columns (on page 510)
Sets the default end connection type.
Before you start working with structural models in CAESAR II, you must specify the database for
upon which the software bases the model.
The full AISC database with more than 900 cross-sectional shapes is available on a
er-member- -sectional shapes.
1. Open the CAESAR II Configuration Editor to select the proper database before starting
the construction of a structural model.
2. Click Database Definitions in the CAESAR II Configuration Editor, and then click
Structural Database. Refer to Structural Databases (on page 516) for information on the
structural databases available in the software.
Click Save to save the configuration settings.

AISC database names should be typed exactly as shown in the AISC handbook with the
exception that fractions should be represented as decimals to four decimal places. Input is
case-sensitive. For example, the angle L6X3-1/2X1/2 would be entered L6X3.5X0.5000.

Member-end connection freedom is a concept used quite frequently in structural

analysis that has no real parallel in piping work. Several of the structural examples contain
free-end connection specifications (such as Column, Beam, and Brace), so you should study
these examples for details.
Structural models may be run alone (singularly), or may be included in piping jobs.
1. Open the structural file.

2. Click Input > Structural Steel.
3. Enter the structural steel model.
4. Click File > Save to exit the model.
5. Click Yes.
The software saves, error checks, and builds the CAESAR II modules automatically, and
then opens the Model Generation Status dialog box.
6. Click OK, and close the CAESAR II Structural Steel dialog box to return to the main menu.
7. Click Analysis > Statics to start CAESAR II at the analysis level.
8. Select the load cases you want to analyze.
CAESAR II recommends the weight only (W) load case. If needed, create additional load
cases to address other input loads or concentrated forces.
9. Click Run Analysis to begin the analysis, and then click OK.
When the analysis finishes, the software opens the Static Output Processor. You can also
click Static Output to view or print output reports.
10. Close the Static Output Processor.
If needed, click Analysis > AISC to open and independently run a Unity Check
(stress evaluation) for the most heavily loaded elements, as defined by the American Institute of
Steel Construction (AISC). Displacements, forces, and moments are available for each
structural element.
Use caution when establishing steel node numbers. Common nodes with piping
have the steel anchored to the corresponding pipe node. Usually, piping is connected to steel
through restraints with connecting nodes (CNodes).
1. Complete steps 1 through 6 from the previous section for running a structural model without
piping.
2. Click File>Open and select to open a piping input file.
3. Edit the piping file to meet your requirements.
4. Click Environment > Include Structural Input Files from the Classic Piping Input dialog
box.
The Include Structural Files dialog box displays.
5. Click Browse to select the structural files to include in the piping job, and then click Open.

You can browse and select up to 10 structural input files.

6. Click OK.
The selected structural models display on the piping input model.
7. Click Batch Run to begin error checking the model. After you resolve and eliminate any
warnings and errors, you can run the entire model successfully.
The software includes the structural elements in the model for the flexibility calculations.
These elements appear as any other piping element, except that CAESAR II does not
calculate stresses for structural elements.
You can use stand-alone AISC Code Check software to verify that forces and
moments on standard structural shapes do not exceed the various allowable stress limits as
defined by the American Institute of Steel Construction.
Structural Steel Graphics

The graphical view of the model in the CAESAR II Structural Input dialog box lets you verify
the model geometry for completeness and accuracy. As you enter and update the element data
on the interactive Card Stack pane on the left, the graphical view on the right instantly displays
any changes.
The Structural Steel Modeler 3D graphics engine shares the same general capabilities as the
graphics model in the Classic Piping Input. The software displays many of the same toolbars
as in the piping input, which let you zoom, orbit, pan, and perform several other actions on the
model. You also have the ability to switch between orthographic and perspective views as well
as alternate between volume to a single line mode.

From the model, you can show or hide the supports and restraints, anchors, the compass, node
numbers, and element lengths. In addition, you can change the size of restraints relative to the
structural elements.
The graphics view displays in the right pane when you define enough information in
the Card Stack pane. For example, if you specify the method as Method 2 - Node/Element
Specifications in the Structural Steel Wizard, and you have only specified the Nodes in the
list of commands, the software does not display anything in the graphical view because there is
not yet a model to show. However, after you define a single element (Elem) between two points
in space, the software displays the corresponding element in the graphical view. When using
Method 1 - Element Definitions (EDIM), which is similar to defining elements in the CAESAR II
Classic Piping Input, the corresponding graphic element displays after you specify the EDim
command parameters.
You can resize or disable the Card Stack pane to allow the graphical view to fill the entire
screen. Additionally, you can dock the Card Stack pane on or off of the main window. After you
dock the pane, you can remove it completely from the view or close it. To show or hide the Card
Stack pane, click .
The CAESAR II Structural Input dialog box has a Change Display Option that lets you
change the default colors for all steel elements and restraints. For more information, see
Configuring 3D Graphics (on page 422).
Loads, such as uniform or wind, are not available in graphics mode in the Structural
Steel Modeler.
You can also flip the coordinate system automatically between displaying the Y-axis up (or Y-up)
to the Z-axis up (or Z-up) in the Structural Steel Modeler. The software modifies all relevant data
match with the new coordinate system. Click Vertical to insert the VERTICAL command
into the command list, and then select Y or Z-from the axis parameter options.
CAESAR II Structural Input

Click Structural Input on the CAESAR II main menu to enter information to build your
structural model. The CAESAR II Structural Input dialog box has two sections. The Card
Stack pane displays model parameters and commands on the left, and the graphical view of the
model displays on the right.

The Card Stack pane is sub-divided into two columns. The first column displays commands and
parameters. Click the arrow to the left of any command to view the parameter data in the second
column of the pane.
To add a command to the model, select the command from either the Commands menu or the
Commands toolbar. For more information, see Commands Menu (on page 474).
Click + to expand command and view the parameters available. Type or select the values in the
second column. Add all the commands to the structural model, and then click Save to
generate the structural model.
Card Stack, List Options, and Errors tabs at the bottom of the Card Stack pane display mode,
keyword and error information for the model. Click Auto Hide to collapse the tabs to the left
side of the window and expand the graphical view. Click Close X to hide the tabs.
The Errors tab does not display when there are no errors in the model.
Use the Input Card Toolbar functions to copy, paste, or delete commands from the structural
model.
Create a model using the Structural Steel Wizard

Define job parameters for a new model using the Structural Steel Wizard.
1. Click File > New.

The New Job Name Specification dialog box appears.
2. In the Enter the name for the NEW job file box, type the name of the structural steel file
you want to create.
You must give files a different name than any piping files, even if you plan
to combine the files for analysis.
3. Select Structural Input.
4. In the Enter the data directory box, type the directory name or browse for a directory.
5. Click OK.
The software displays the Units Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard.
Use the Units Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard to view the units file the software
uses with your new model. For more information, see Unit (on page 515).
The software automatically selects the units based on the units you specified in the
CAESAR II Configuration Editor.
Select Accept defaults and finish to use all structural options previously selected in Tools
> Configure/Setup.
1. Click Next.
The software displays the Vertical Axis Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard.

Use the Vertical Axis Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard to specify which is the
vertical axis for your model.
1. In the Select which axis is vertical for this box, select Y or Z.
2. Click Next.
The software displays the Material Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard.
Use the Material Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard to specify material properties
for the structural steel models.
1. Type values for Density, Yield Strength, Young's (Young's Modulus), Poisson's Ratio,
and Shear Modulus.
2. Optionally, type one or more thermal expansion coefficient values for Expansion
Coefficients.
You can have up to nine Expansion Coefficient values and use a separate
Material ID for each coefficient.
3. Click Add Another Material if you need to define additional material properties.
The software automatically increases the value of the Material ID by one.
4. Click Next.
The software displays the Cross Section Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard.
Use the up and down arrows next to Add Another Material to scroll through all
materials.
Use the Cross Section Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard to specify the
cross-sections in the model.
1. Click Select Section ID.
The Section ID Selection dialog box appears.
The software defaults the Section ID to 1, but you can type a new ID.
2. Expand the hierarchy as needed, select a cross section and click OK.
You can also type a cross section name in the NAME box. For more information,
see Structural Databases (on page 516) for cross section names in the CAESAR II
databases.
3. Optionally, select User Defined? to create a custom cross section. Type values for Area,
Ixx (moment of inertia about the strong axis), Iyy (moment of inertia about the weak axis), J
(torsion) (torsional resistivity constant), BoxH (overall height) and BoxW (overall width).
4. Click Add Another Section if you need to define additional cross-sections.
The value for the Section ID increases by one.

Use the up and down arrows next to Add Another Section to scroll through all
sections.
5. Click Next.
The software displays the Model Definition Method Selection page of the Structural
Steel Wizard.
Use the Model Definition Method Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard to select the
method you need to build your model.
1. Review the method options and select Method 1 - Element Definitions or Method 2 -
Node / Element Specifications.
2. Click Finish.
The Structural Steel Wizard closes and the new job file opens in the Structural Steel
Modeler window.
For more information on actions you can perform from the wizard, see Insert Menu (on page
474) and Commands Menu (on page 474).
Structural Steel Input Examples

This section contains structural steel examples. Follow the input steps in these examples to
learn how to use the Structural Steel Modeler.

Structural Steel Example #1

Determine the stiffness of the structural steel support shown below. Use the estimated rigid
support piping loads from the piping analysis to back-calculate each stiffness.
A U-bolt pins the pipe to the top of the channel at node 20. The piping loads output from the pipe
stress program are:
Fx= -39.0 lbs.
Fy= -1975.0 lbs.
Fz= 1350.0 lbs.
1. Click File > New from the CAESAR II main menu.

2. Enter a job name (for example, SUPP), click the Structural Input option, and browse to
select the data directory. Then, click OK.
The software displays the Units Selection page.

3. Specify the units to use with this job, then click Next.
The software displays the Vertical Axis Selection page.
4. Verify that the vertical axis is set to the Y-axis, and then click Next. Selecting the Y-axis
means that the gravity works in the Y--axis direction on this model.
Be sure this coordinate system matches the piping model.
The software displays the Material Selection page.
5. Click Next in the Material Selection dialog box to use default material properties.

The software displays the Cross Section Selection page.
6. Specify the cross section by typing in the name exactly as it appears (including exact
capitalization and trailing zeros) or by clicking Select Section ID and selecting the name
from the list.
For this example, enter the Section ID 1 name as W16X26.
7. Click Add Another Section to create other cross sections. Enter Section ID 2 as MC8X22.8
and Section ID 3 as L6X4X0.5000. Repeat this until you have three sections specified in this
example, then click Next.
The software displays the Model Definition Method Selection page.
8. Select Method 1 - Element Definitions Method Selection (the default setting) to use the
Element Dimension (EDim) option to define individual elements that span between two node
points. Then, click Finish. This input works similarly to piping input, where elements are
defined by their end points and delta X, Y, Z distances between those end points.
The Method 2 - Node/Element Specifications option uses commands to define an array of
nodes in space and commands to add elements bounded by these nodes.

The software opens the CAESAR II Structural Modeler dialog box, where you can
interactively input data. Click the arrow on each line in the modeler to expand or condense
the information.
1. Click on the Commands toolbar to enter commands and parameters that define the model
input.

2. Click EDim to add the first element to the end of the list, then click the arrow to the left
to expand the data for that group, and enter the column data.
Notice that the first element is at node 5 to node 10 and runs 12 feet in the Y direction and
has a section number of 1 (the default section).
Press TAB to move quickly from one Card Stack box to the next.

3. When you complete the first element, click EDim and repeat the entry process to add
the next four elements.
Use the Input Card Toolbar functions to copy, paste, or delete a card from the
Structural Modeler. Alternatively, you can copy or delete a card element by selecting Edit
> Copy Card or Edit > Delete Card.

After you complete the element entry, the software displays the current model.
Select Reset View to return the model to a default view each time the model
refreshes. When activated, this function appears highlighted. You can use Reset View to
zoom in and out on the model to make changes, and then quickly return to your default
view.

4. Click Fix to add the restraint at the base of the column.
5. Click Loads to enter the loads on this support. You can use a previous CAESAR II
analysis for these loads.
6. Enter the loads at Node 20 [(FX, FY, FZ) = (-39, -1975, 1350)].

The software displays the completed model.
7. Add comments to the model by first setting where CAESAR II inserts comments from the
Insert menu option. You can specify for comments to appear before or after the currently
selected element, or at the end of the model elements list. Click Comment to add
comments to the model.

After you insert a comment, you must click the down arrow to expand the
comment element and add the comment text. The following example shows the completed
model with new comments inserted.
8. Click File > Save to check and save the model. Then, click OK.
CAESAR II checks the input. If the error checker does not find any fatal errors, CAESAR II
writes the execution files and you can use the model in a piping analysis or you can analyze
the model singularly. For the purposes of this example, you will analyze the model by itself.
9. Close the CAESAR II Structural Modeler dialog box and return to the CAESAR II main
menu.
10. With the SUPP file still open as the current model, click Analysis > Statics on the toolbar.
Remember to replace the Weight load in Load Case 1 (L1) with F1 (the applied
loads).
11. Click Run the Analysis.
CAESAR II performs the structural steel analysis, just as a piping analysis.

The output from a structural analysis is comprised of displacements, forces, and moments. The
results from the analysis of the SUPP model show the displacements at Node 20.
These displacements are excessive for a support, which is to be assumed rigid in another
analysis. The translational stiffness for the support can be computed as follows:

maximum allowable loads on the nozzle are as follows:
In this example, create the structural steel input file, SUPP2.str, from a text file. The structural
steel preprocessor converts this file to the CAESAR II model.

Check the piping and structure shown in the following four figures:


1. Using a text editor, type the following input parameters for the model:

After the data is processed, this file does not display the line breaks in Microsoft's
Notepad text editor, but the data remains valid. Use a more robust editor to display the
individual lines.
2. Name and save the file as SUPP2.str.
1. Click File > Open from the CAESAR II main menu.

2. Change File of type to Structural (*.str) and navigate to the file you created,
SUPP2.str. Then, click Open.
3. Click Input > Structural Steel from the CAESAR II main menu.
The software opens the structural model for SUPP2.str.

4. After you have confirmed that the model is correct, click File > Save, and click Yes to save
the model.
5. Select all the check boxes in the Model Generation Status dialog box, and click OK.
CAESAR II checks the input. If the error checker does not find any fatal errors, CAESAR II
writes the execution files and you can use the model in a piping analysis or you can analyze
the model singularly. For the purposes of this example, you will analyze the model with a
piping model.
6. Close the CAESAR II Structural Modeler dialog box and return to the CAESAR II main
menu.
Next, enter the input for the piping system to be analyzed in a new piping job.
2. Change File of type to Piping Input (*.c2) , enter the file name as PIPE2 (for the
purposes of this example).
3. Navigate and select the CAESAR II data folder, and click OK.
The software opens the Review Current Units dialog box.
4. Verify the current units are English, then click OK.
The software opens the piping input for PIPE2.c2.
5. Click the Classic Piping Input tab on the left of the graphical display.
Enter the piping input data using the Input Echo report data shown below. For more information
on how to quickly enter piping input data, see Navigating the Classic Piping Input Dialog Box
using the Function Keys (on page 114).

In this piping input example, there are two weightless, rigid elements at nodes 15 to 115 and 20
to 120 that run out from the pipe centerline to the connecting points of the structure.

The two restraint sets at the end of the data 115 and 120 are pipe nodes and their
CNodes 215 and 240 are structural steel nodes in SUPP2.
1. From the Classic Piping Input dialog box, click Environment > Include Structural Input
Files.
The software opens the Include Structural Files dialog box.
2. Enter the name of the structural steel model to be included (in this example, SUPP2).
You can type the name and click Add, or click Browse to search for the file (which
has the .str or the compressed .c2s extension), select the file, and click OK.
3. If the pipe and structure do not plot properly relative to one-another, then one of the
following situations may have occurred:
a. The connecting nodes were not defined correctly.
b. The Connect Geometry Through CNodes option was not set to True in the
Configuration Editor. For more information, see Connect Geometry Through CNodes
(on page 75) in the Configuration Options.

Refer to the Pipe2 plotted pipe and structure shown below:
4. After the software plots the pipe and structure relative to one another, exit the Generate
piping input (on page 29) dialog box and run the error check.
The error checker includes the pipe and structure together during checking. The execution
files that the software writes also include the structural data.
5. Run the analysis using the default load cases.
The following shows the restraint report for Load Case 1, W+T1 (OPE):

The loads on the anchor at 5 are excessive. The structural steel frame and pipe support
structure as shown are not satisfactory.
In this example, displacement of the structure is small relative to the displacement of the pipe.
The pipe is thermally expanding out away from the boiler nozzle and down, away from the boiler
nozzle.
The pipe is pulling the structure in the positive X direction at the top support and pushing the
structure in the negative X direction at the bottom support. These displacements result in higher
loads on the boiler nozzle. The vertical location of the structural supports should be studied
more closely.
You could add vertical springs at 30 and 35, which might help, along with a repositioning of the
structural supports vertically. For example, the support at node 120 should be moved down so
that its line of action in the X direction more closely coincides with the center line of the pipe
between nodes 25 and 40.


Estimate the X, Y, and Z stiffness of the structure at the point 1000. In general, the stiffness of a
three-dimensional structure, condensed down to the stiffness of a single point, must be
represented by a 6 6 stiffness matrix. Initially, you can estimate only the on-diagonal,
translational stiffnesses.

2. Select Structural Input as the file type, and enter the file name as SUPP3 (for the purposes
of this example).
3. Navigate and select the CAESAR II data folder, and click OK.
The software displays the Units Selection page.
4. Click Next to accept ENGLISH,FIL, the default value for current units.
The software displays the Vertical Axis Selection page.
5. Verify that the vertical axis is set to the y-axis, and then click Next.
The software displays the Material Selection page.
6. Click Next in the Material Selection dialog box to use default material properties.
The software displays the Cross Section Selection page.

7. Specify the two cross sections, Section ID 1 as W12X65 and Section ID 2 as W10X22, and
then click Next.
The software displays the Model Definition Method Selection page.
Select Method 1 - Element Definitions (the default setting) to use the element dimension
(Edim) method of input. Then, click Finish.
The software opens the CAESAR II Structural Input dialog box, where you can
interactively input data. Click the arrow on each line in the modeler to expand or condense
the information.
8. Use the interactive input processor to input the following commands.
You can also import these commands by inputting them in a text editor and then
importing the .str file into the model. For more information, see Structural Steel Example #2
(on page 458).

9. After you enter all of the model data, the SUPP3 structural model appears as follows:
10. When you are satisfied that the model has been entered properly, click File > Save to check
and save the model.
CAESAR II checks the input. If no fatal errors are found, the software writes the CAESAR II
Execution files. The model may now be used in a piping analysis or analyzed by itself. For
the purposes of this example the model will be analyzed by itself.
11. Click OK, and then close the CAESAR II Structural Modeler Input dialog box.
12. Return to the CAESAR II Main menu.
The structural input processor generates a number of lists you can use for documentation and
checking.
1. With the SUPP3 job still open in the CAESAR II Main menu, click Analysis > Statics.
The software displays the Static Analysis dialog box.
2. Replace the Weight (W) load in Load Case 1 (L1) with F1 (the applied loads).
You can type FI directly in the Load Cases box.

From this point, structural steel analysis is performed just like a piping analysis. Output from
a structural analysis is comprised of displacements, forces, and moments.
3. Click Run the Analysis , and then click OK.
The software displays the Static Analysis dialog box.
4. Select the F1 load case in the Load Cases Analyzed box and Displacements and Global
Element Forces in the Standard Reports.
5. Click Add and then Finish to generate the reports.
The Displacements and Global Element Forces reports for the F1 load case displays as
follows.


Notice that the structure is stiffer in the X direction, even though the Z dimension is greater, due
to the orientation of the columns. The Global Element Forces (which displays forces and
moments) report is particularly interesting because all of the beams have pinned ends. Most of
the beams carry no load. This is because the transfer of the load to the beams in this model is
due to rotations at the column ends, and not translations.
By adding cross-braces you can eliminate this problem and cause the beams to pick up more of
the load. The 1000 end node of the elements from 20-1000 and from 40-1000 carries a moment
because it is not a pinned end connection. The 1000 end node is just a point at midspan for the
application of the load.

Insert Menu
Use the Insert menu to specify where to place a command from the Command menu in the
Card Stock pane.
Before Current Element

Places a new card above the selected card in the Card Stack.
After the Current Element

Places a new card below the selected command in the Card Stack.
At End of Model
Places a new card at the end of the model (that is, at the bottom of the Card Stack).
Commands Menu
Use the Commands Menu to add cards in the Card Stack pane. The cards define parameters
used in the structural model.
Node
Node or Commands > Node defines the coordinates of a point in global X, Y, and Z space
and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the NODE command in the
needed position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 474).
3. Click Node .
The NODE card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the NODE card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the NODE properties.
6. Click Save to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

Specifies the node number.
Specifies the global coordinates of the node.
NFill
NFill or Commands > NFill defines evenly spaced nodes between two end points and
places the following card in the Card Stack:
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack.

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the NFILL card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 474).
3. Click Nfill .
The NFILL card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the NFILL card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the NFILL properties.
6. Click Save if you are finished.
Specifies the from node number.

Specifies the to node number.
Specifies the increment in the range.
NGen
NGen or Commands > NGen duplicates patterns of nodes and places the following card in
the Card Stack pane:
The first and last node in the base node pattern must exist before you can use NGen. Other
nodes not previously defined in the base node pattern are evenly spaced by a defined increment
between the first and last node. Subsequent nodal patterns start from the base pattern. DX, DY,
and DZ offsets define nodes duplicated from the base pattern of nodes.

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the NGEN card in the needed
3. Click NGen .
The NGEN card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the NGEN card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the NGEN properties.

Specifies the first node in the base node pattern. You must enter a value for an existing node
before you can use NGen.
Specifies the last node in the base node pattern. You must enter a value for an existing node
before you can use NGen.
Specifies a value for the increment you want to use in the base node pattern between the from
node and the to node. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.
Specifies the last node in the last nodal pattern to be generated. If you do not enter a value,
single pattern duplication occurs.
Specifies a value for the increment that you want to use in the base node pattern to the nodes in
the first generated pattern and then from this pattern to the next generated pattern and so forth.
Specifies the global coordinate offsets to get from the nodes in the base pattern to the nodes in
the first generated pattern, and then from this pattern to the next generated pattern, and so forth.
The nodes from 1100 to 2000 with an increment of 100 are duplicated twice. Each new pattern
is offset by 10 ft. in the Z-direction. The new nodes created are from 2100 to 3000 and also from
3100 to 4000.

Fix
Fix or Commands > Fix defines the restraint boundary conditions at the structural member
end points and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the FIX card in the needed
3. Click Fix .
The FIX card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the FIX card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the FIX properties.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically begins to check the model for errors.
If needed you can enter the stiffness in the field following the fixity indicator. If you omit
the stiffness value, the fixity is considered to be rigid.

Specifies the first node number in the range.

If you are using FIX to define a single node point, you do not need values for to and
by.
Specifies the last node number in the range.

by.

by.
Specifies that all six degrees of freedom (DOF) are Free or Fixed.
This parameter is the equivalent of an anchor.
Specifies the same stiffness value for all six degrees of freedom (DOF).
Specifies the Free or Fixed value in the x direction.
Specifies the value for the translational stiffness in the x direction.

Specifies the Free or Fixed value in the y direction.
Specifies the value for the translational stiffness in the y direction.
Specifies the Free or Fixed value in the z direction.
Specifies the value for the translational stiffness in the z direction.
Specifies the value for the rotation in the x direction.
Specifies the value for the rotational stiffness in the x direction.
Specifies the value for the rotation in the y direction.
Specifies the value for the rotational stiffness in the y direction.
Specifies the value for the rotation in the z direction.

Specifies the value for the rotational stiffness in the z direction.
1. FIX 1 ALL. Fix all degrees of freedom at node #1.

2. FIX 5 X1000 Y1000 Z1000. Fix X, Y and Z degrees of freedom at node #5, and use 1,000
lb./in. springs.
3. FIX 100 TO 110. ALL Fix rigidly all degrees of freedom for the nodes from 100 to 110. The
increment between 100 and 110 defaults to 1. Eleven nodes have their fixities defined here.
4. FIX 105 TO 125 BY 5 X1000,1000,1000 Fix X, Y, and Z degrees of freedom for the nodes:
105, 110, 115, 120, and 125, and use 1,000 lb./in. springs.
5. FIX (1) to (10) ALL Fix all degrees of freedom for the first 10 nodes in the node list.
Elem
Elem or Commands > Elem defines a single element between two nodes and places the
following card in the Card Stack pane:
You can use a section identifier and a material identifier for the element. If you omit the section
and/or material IDs the program uses the current default.

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the ELEM card in the needed
3. Click ELEM .
The ELEM command is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the ELEM card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the ELEM properties.

Specifies the from node number.
Specifies the to node number.
Specifies the Section ID for the element.
Specifies the Material ID for the element.
EFill
EFill generates a consecutive string of elements and places the following card in the Card
Stack pane:
You can use the EFill command at any time. None of the elements generated need to
exist prior to adding the EFill command.

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the EFILL card in the needed
3. Click EFill .
The EFILL card is added to the card stack.
4. Click to expand the EFILL card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the EFILL properties.
6. Click Save to finish adding cards to the Card Stack.
The stack is saved and the Error Checker checks your model for errors

Specifies the from node number on the first element generated.
Specifies the to node number on the first element generated.
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.
Specifies the to node on the last element generated.
Specifies the Section ID for the first element generated.
Specifies the Material ID for the first element generated.
Specifies the increment to use to get from the Section ID for the first element to the Section ID
for the second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 0.
Specifies the increment to get from the Material ID for the first element to the Material ID for the

Elements are generated between each pair of nodes between nodes 1200 and 2000. The
increment between From nodes and To nodes is 100. Nine elements are created in this
example.
Elem was not necessary here. Create all nine elements using EFill and by substituting node
1100 in place of node 1200 in the from field.
EGen
EGen or Commands EGen duplicates patterns of elements and places the following card in
the Card Stack pane:
Existing elements in the base pattern are redefined during generation.

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the EGEN card in the needed
3. Click EGen .
The EGEN card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the EGEN card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the EGEN properties.
The CAESAR II Error Checker checks the model for errors.

Specifies the from node on the first element in the base pattern.
Specifies the to node on the first element in the base pattern.
Specifies the increment to use to get from the from node on the first element in the base pattern
to the from node on the second element in base pattern. If you do not enter a value, the default
is 1.
Specifies the to node on the last element in the base pattern. The software generates multiple
copies from the base pattern of elements.
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element in the base pattern to the
from node on the first element in the first duplicate pattern.
Specifies the increment to get from the to node on the first element in the base pattern to the to
node on the first element in the first duplicate pattern. If you do not enter a value, the value of
genInc is used.
Specifies the to node on the last element in the last pattern to be duplicated from the base
pattern.

Specifies the Section ID to use for the elements in the base pattern. If you do not enter a value,
the value from the Default card is used. For more information, see Default (on page 513).
Specifies the Material ID to use for the elements in the base pattern. If you do not enter a value,
the value from the Default card is used. For more information, see Default (on page 513).
Specifies the Section ID increment to use between patterns. For example, the first pattern of
elements generated from the base pattern of elements has a Section ID of SECID + INCSECID.
If you do not enter a value, the default is 0.
Specifies the Material ID increment to use between patterns. If you do not enter a value, the
default is 0.

Building on the Example (on page 484). The base element pattern from 1100 to 2000 is
reproduced two additional times, from 2100 to 3000 and from 3100 to 4000. Each element has
nodal increments of 100. The increment between the Base Element and the Next Element is
1000 and the last node in the last pattern is 4000. The cross members are created using the
base pattern from 1100 to 2100 and reproducing it in nodal increments of 100 until node 4000 is
reached.

EDim
EDim or Commands > EDim defines elements using the dimensions of the element instead
of references to nodes and places the following card in the Card Stock pane:
Any existing elements encountered are redefined. If you are defining a single element, do not
enter values for inc, incto, and last.

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the EDIM card in the needed
3. Click EDim .
The EDIM card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the EDIM card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the EDIM properties.
Specifies the from node on the first element to be defined.

Specifies the to node on the last element to be defined.
Specifies the to node on the last element to be defined.
Specifies the global coordinate offsets to get from the nodes in the base pattern to the nodes in
the first generated pattern, and then from this pattern to the next generated pattern, and so forth.
Specifies the Section ID for the first element. If you do not enter a value, the current default is
used.
Specifies the Material ID for the first element. If you do not enter a value, the current default is
used.
Specifies the Section ID increment to use to get from the Section ID of the first element to the
Section ID of the second element.

Specifies the Material ID increment to get from the Material ID of the first element to the
Material ID of the second element.
1. EDIM 5 to 10 DY = 12-3 SECID=2. Column 12-3 high from 5 to 10.

2. EDIM 5,10 DY=12-3,2. Same column
3. EDIM 2 TO 3 LAST=8 DX=13-3. Defining beams 13-3 long and elements 2-3, 3-4, 4-5, 5-6,
6-7, and 7-8. INC defaults to 1.
Angle
Angle or Commands > Angle defines the default element strong axis orientation and
places the following card in in the Card Stack pane:

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the ANGLE card in the needed
3. Click Angle .
The ANGLE card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the ANGLE card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the ANGLE properties.
Use Angle with a structural column when the strong axis of the column is not parallel to the
global X-axis. When the strong axis of the column is parallel to the global Z-axis, redefine the
default orientation to ANGLE=90. Define the column elements then use ANGLE again to reset
the default orientation to its original value of ANGLE=0.0.
Orient and Angle both define the angle of rotation in degrees about the element center
line from the standard orientation to the element strong axis. Use Orient to define this angle
for a single element or for a group of elements, and Angle to define the default orientation
to its original value, such as, ANGLE=0.0.
The default orientation angle is 0º.

Use the right-hand rule to find positive angular rotation. Extend the thumb along the element in
the direction of the to node. The fingers of the right hand circle in the direction of a positive
orientation angle.
If the member is vertical, then the default strong axis is along the global-X axis.
If the member is non-vertical then the default strong axis is perpendicular to the center line
of the member and in the horizontal plane of the member.
The strong axis for the WF shape is:
Specifies a value for the default Strong Axis Orientation Angle to use for all subsequent
defined elements.
Unif
Unif or Commands > Unif defines a constant uniform load that acts over the full length of
the member and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
Uniform loads can have special meanings when used in CAESAR II Piping runs.
If you are defining a uniform load that acts on a single element only, do not enter values
for inc, incTo, and last.

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the UNIF command in the needed

3. Click Unif .
The UNIF card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the UNIF card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the UNIF properties.
Specifies the from node on the first element this uniform load is to act on.
Specifies the to node on the first element this uniform load is to act on.
Specifies the to node on the last element this uniform load is to act on.
Specifies the magnitude of the uniform load in the global X, Y, and Z directions. Unless used in
a piping analysis using G loads, use uniform loads in units of force per unit length of member.
When used in a piping analysis with G loads the uniform loads are in units of gravitational
acceleration, for example, uy=-1 would define a uniform load identical to the member weight
load.

1. UNIF 1 TO 2 UY=-2.3 On the element from 1 to 2 a uniform load with a magnitude of 2.3
lbs. per inch acts in the -Y direction.
2. UNIF 1, 2, UY -2, 3 Same
3. UNIF 100 TO 200 INC=2 INCTO=3
4. LAST=500 UX=0.03, -1, 0.03 There are uniform loads acting on elements 100-200,
102-203,...,300-500 with a small horizontal component and a -1 load in the Y. It looks like
you have G load input for the piping problem.
5. UNIF (1) to (30) UY=-2.3 The first thirty elements in the element list have a uniform load of
-2.3 pounds per inch acting in the -Y direction.
Orient
Orient or Commands > Orient defines the element strong axis orientation and places the

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the ORIENT card in the needed
position in the Card Stack. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 474).
3. Click Orient .
The ORIENT card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the ORIENT card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the ORIENT properties.

Specifies the from node on the first element.

You can use node numbers or element indices as values for from.
Specifies the to node on the first element.

You can use node numbers or element indices as values for to.
Specifies the to node on the last element to have its orientation angle defined.
Specifies the rotation in degrees from the default position to the actual position of the member
strong axis.
1. ORIENT 1 TO 2 ANGLE=90. The strong axis for the element from 1 to 2 is 90º away from
the default position.
2. ORIENT 5 TO 10 INC=5 LAST=30 ANGLE=90. The vertical column elements: 5-10, 10-15,
15-20, 20-25, and 25-30 have their strong axes 90º away from the default position. Their
new strong axis is along the Z axis. With their new orientation, the columns are better suited
to take X direction forces.
3. ORIENT 1 TO (20) ANGLE=90. The first twenty elements in the element list have their
strong axes 90º away from the default position.

Load
Load or Commands > Load defines concentrated forces and moments that act at structural
member end points. It places the following card in the Card Stock pane:

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the LOAD card in the needed
3. Click Load .
The LOAD command is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the LOAD card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the LOAD properties.
Specifies the from node on the first element the load is to act on.
If you are defining a load for a single node point, you do not need values for to and
by.
Specifies the to node on the first element the load is to act on.
by.


by.
Specifies the magnitude of concentrated forces in the global X, Y, and Z directions.
Specifies the magnitude of the moments in the global X, Y, and Z directions.
1. LOAD 305 FY-1000. Have a minus 1,000 lb. Y direction load acting at the structural node
#305.
2. LOAD 10 TO 18 BY=1 FX=707, FZ=707. Have skewed loads in the horizontal plane acting
at each of the nodes 10, 11,...,17, 18. You do not have to use by here, the default is 1.
3. LOAD (15) to (25) FY=-383. A load of 383 pounds acts in the -Y direction on the 15th
through the 25th nodes in the Node list.
Wind
Wind or Commands > Wind defines the magnitude of the wind shape factor for the
structural elements and places a card in the Card Stack pane:

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the WIND card in the needed
3. Click Wind .
The Wind card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the WIND card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the WIND properties.


Specifies the from node on the first element the wind load is to act on.
Specifies the to node on the first element the wind load is to act on.
Specifies the to node of the last element the wind load is to act on.
Specifies a value for the magnitude of the wind shape factor. For structural steel members, this
value is usually 2.0. For elements not exposed to the wind, disable wind loading on the structure
by resetting this value to 0. This value populates to all subsequently defined elements. If you do
not enter a value, the default is 2.0.
1. WIND 1 TO 2 SHAPE=2.0. The element from 1 to 2 has a shape factor with a magnitude of
2.0 applied. This value is applied to all the following elements.
2. WIND 1, 2, SHAPE 2.0. Same
3. WIND 100 TO 200 INC=2 INCTO=3
4. LAST=500 SHAPE=1.8 There is a wind shape factor of 1.8 on elements 100-200,
102-203,...,300-500.

GLoads
GLoad or Commands > GLoad processes all specified uniform loads as G loads instead of
force/length loads and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
You cannot use this command with any other parameters.

If structural and piping models are mixed, the GLOADS cards must match. For example,
uniform loads in the piping model must be designed as G loads in the special execution
parameters.

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the GLOADS card in the needed
3. Click GLoad .
The GLOADS card is added to the card stack.
MatId
MatId or Commands > MatId specifies material properties that correspond to a Material ID
number and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
You must have at least one valid material specification in the input file. For more information,
see Material Properties.


2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the MATID card in the needed
3. Click MatId .
The MATID card is added to the Card Stack.
You can use one Matid for a group of elements that has many Section IDs
(Secid).
4. Click to expand the Matid card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the Matid properties.
Use Matid 1 for default A-36 structural steel properties.
Specifies a Material ID number. The default value is 1 (for A-36 steel), and numbered
sequentially for additional materials.
You can change the value assigned by the model input file.
30,000,000 (30x106) psi

for A-36 structural steel.
0.3 for A-36 structural steel.
Specifies a value for the shear modulus. The default value is 11,000,000 (11x106) psi for A-36
structural steel and is typically about one-third the value of Young's Modulus.

Specifies a value for the yield strength. The default value is 36,000 (36x103) psi for A-36
structural steel. This property is currently not used.
Specifies a value for the material density. The default value is 0.283 for A-36 structural steel.
Specifies from one to nine values for the coefficients of thermal expansion.
Enter values for Alpha after entering a value for dens.
SecId
SecId or Commands > SecId assigns member cross-section properties to the Section ID
numbers and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the SECID card in the needed
3. Click SecId .
The SECID card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the SECID card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the SECID properties.

Specifies a user-defined Section ID for this set of cross-section properties. Section IDs usually
start at 1 and increase incrementally by one, but you can assign values in any order.
Specifies an American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) shape name. For a user-defined
shape, type USER. You must enter the AISC names exactly as shown in the AISC handbook
with the exceptions:
Enter fractions as decimals. For example, type LX6X3-1/2X1/2 as L6X3.5X0.5
Omit all leading or trailing zeros.
You can select the section name from the window after clicking the Select Section ID
button.
Specifies a user-defined shape. You must enter values for the additional parameters to define a
user-defined cross-section.
Specifies the cross-section area (in length2 units).
Specifies the strong axis moment of inertia (in length 4 units).
Specifies the weak axis moment of inertia (in length4 units).
Specifies the torsional resistivity constant (in length4 units).

Specifies the height (along the weak axis) of a rectangular box for plotting.
Specifies the width (along the strong axis) of a rectangular box for plotting.
Free End Connections - FREE

Free or Commands > Free defines the free element end connection types and places the
For example, use Free to describe the element ends in a structure that has pinned-only
beam-to-column connections.
You can also use Beams , Braces , and Columns to set the free end connection
defaults for certain types of members. For more information, see Beams (on page 505),
Braces (on page 507), and Columns (on page 510).
After you define each element and set the defaults, the program automatically adds a card
to the Card Stack and adds values to FREE parameters. Use this to help keep track of the
connections and nodes that define the element.

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the FREE card in the needed

3. Click Free .
The Free command is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the FREE card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the FREE properties.
Specifies the from node on the first element that this FREE command is to apply to.
Specifies the to node on the first element that this FREE command is to apply to.
Specifies a value for the to node on the last element this FREE command is to apply to. You
can omit last, inc, and incTo if the FREE command is only to apply to a single element.
The following parameters define the degrees of freedom (DOF) at the element end that is free.
Any combination can be used.
FAXIAL Axial translational DOF
FSHRSTR Strong axis shear translational DOF
FSHRWEAK Weak axis shear translational DOF
FTORS Torsional DOF
FBNDSTR Strong axis bending DOF

FBNDWEAK Weak axis bending DOF
TAXIAL Axial translational DOF
TSHRSTR Strong axis shear translational DOF
TSHRWEAK Weak axis shear translational DOF
TTORS Torsional DOF
TBNDSTR Strong axis bending DOF
TBNDWEAK Weak axis bending DOF
1. A small WF shape has a pinned connection to a large I-beam. The weak axis bending of the
WF shape is not transmitted to the web of the I-beam. If the element defining the WF shape
uses nodes 1040 to 1045 then the FREE card for this element has the following format:
FREE 1040 TO 1045 fbndweak, tbndweak
2. The westward side of a building has a row of beams on the ground floor that are attached
rigidly to columns at the other end. The beams are identified by the pattern of nodes:
610-710, 620-720, 630-730, ..., 690-790. There are eight beams in this group. The 600 end
is pinned. The FREE cards for this group have the following format:
FREE 610 TO 710 INC=10 LAST=790 ftors, fbndstr, fbndweak

Beams
Beams or Commands > Beams defines default end connection types for members identified
by the orientation of their center lines. It places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
A beam is any member whose center line lies completely along either the global X or global Z
axis. After you use Beams to define the element end connections, any element subsequently
defined inherits those end connection conditions.
Use the standard structural element connections Beams , Braces , and
Columns to define default end connection types for members identified by the orientation of
their center line. For more information, see Braces (on page 507), and Columns (on page 510).

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the BEAMS card in the needed
3. Click Beams .
The BEAMS card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the BEAMS card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the BEAMS properties.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Beams, then all degrees of freedom for the
beam are fixed.
Defines the beams end connection type:

Free - Releases end connections.

Fix - Resets released end connections.

If fix is the only parameter defined for Beams, then all degrees of freedom for the
beam are fixed.
The following parameters define the degrees of freedom (DOF) at each element end. Any
combination can be used. By default, each end is fixed in all six degrees of freedom.
FTORS Torsional DOF
TTORS Torsional DOF
1. A group of beams that has both ends pinned must use the Free command. The BEAMS
card for this group has the following format:
Beams FREE
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr

tbndweak
2. Pinned-end beams must be returned to end connection default values. The BEAMS card for
this group has the following format:
Beams FIX
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
Braces
Braces or Commands > Braces defines default end connection types for members
identified by the orientation of their center lines. It places the following card in the Card Stack
pane:
A brace is any member whose center line does not completely lie along any of the global axes.
After you use Braces to define element end connections, any brace element subsequently
defined inherits those end connection conditions.
Columns to define default end connection types for members identified by the orientation of
their center line. For more information, see Beams (on page 505) and Columns (on page 510).

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the BRACES card in the needed
3. Click Braces .
The BRACES command is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click to expand the BRACES card and view the properties.

5. Add values to the BRACES properties.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Braces, then all degrees of freedom for the
brace are fixed.

Defines the braces end connection type:

If fix is the only parameter defined for Braces, then all degrees of freedom for the
brace are fixed.
FTORS Torsional DOF
TTORS Torsional DOF

1. A group of braces that has both ends pinned to adjoining columns must use the Free
command. The BRACES card for this group has the following format:
Braces FREE
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
2. Pinned-end braces must be returned to end connection default values. The BRACES card
for this group has the following format:
Braces FIX
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
If Fix appears on the line following Braces then all end connections for the brace are
fixed.
Columns
Columns or Commands > Columns defines default end connection types for members
identified by the orientation of their center lines. It places the following card in the Card Stack
pane:

A column is any member whose centerline is completely vertical. After you use Columns to
define the element end connections, any element subsequently defined inherits those end
connection freedoms.
Columns to define default end connections types for members identified by the orientation of
their center line. For more information, see Beams (on page 505) and Braces (on page 507).

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the COLUMNS card in the needed
3. Click Columns .
The Columns command is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the COLUMNS card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the COLUMNS properties.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Columns, then all degrees of freedom for the
column are fixed.
Defines the columns end connection type:

If fix is the only parameter defined for Columns, then all degrees of freedom for the column are
fixed.
FTORS Torsional DOF

TTORS Torsional DOF
1. A group of corner columns that are pinned at their to ends must use the Free command.
The COLUMNS card for this group has the following format:
Columns FREE
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
2. Pinned-end columns must be returned to end connection default values. The COLUMNS
card for this group has the following format:
Columns FIX
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
If Fix is all that appears on the line following Columns, then all end connections for
the column are fixed.
As a general rule, an element cannot undergo rigid body motion. Therefore, an element cannot
have both ttors and ftors released at the same time. Additionally, beams typically have moment
releases only at their ends, not at intermediate nodes used to apply loads or connect bracing.

Default
Default or Commands > Default specifies the default values of the Section ID and the
Material ID and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
If you create an element without a Section ID or Material ID, the default values defined here are
used.

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the DEFAULT card in the needed
3. Click Default .
The DEFAULT card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the DEFAULT card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the DEFAULT properties.
Comment
Comment or Commands > Comment adds a comment card to the Card Stack pane:

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the COMMENT card in the
needed position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 474).
3. Click Comment .
The COMMENT card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the COMMENT card.
5. Type the information to add.

Vertical
Vertical or Commands > Vertical specifies the axis orientation of a new or existing model
and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
The axis orientation of the Static Load Case Builder, (for example in wind and wave
loads), the Static Output Processor, the Dynamic Input Module, and the Dynamic
Output Processor is specified only by the orientation in the input file. For more information,
see Select a Vertical Axis (on page 446).
Unlike the piping and equipment files elsewhere in CAESAR II, changing this command
does not change the orientation of the structural input file. It rotates the model into the new
coordinate system.
When you include the structural files in a piping model, the axis orientations of the structural
files do not have to match the orientation of the piping model. The software translates the
orientation.
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane and use the needed command from the
Insert menu to place the VERTICAL card in the needed position. For more information, see
the Insert Menu (on page 474).
2. Click Vertical .
The Vertical command is added to the Card Stack.
3. Select Y or Z as the vertical axis.
In the main CAESAR II window, click Tools > Configure/Setup to determine the axis
orientation of a new structural model based on the selected setting.
Open an existing model and check the last saved axis orientation to visually determine the axis
orientation.

Unit
Unit displays the units file you specified in the Units Selection page of the Structural Steel
Wizard in the Card Stack pane:
You cannot change the units from the Card Stack pane. The structural file uses the units file
specified in the wizard as the unit of measure.
You do not have to choose the same file selected in configuration setup. For more
information, see Select a units file (on page 445).
List Options
List Options displays node and coordinate data, specifies node ranges, and selects reports.
Click ALL to display a copy of each report.
1. Click the List Options tab located at the bottom of the Card Stock.
The List Options pane appears.
2. Select the report you want to see.
The selected report appears in the Report pane.

Structural Databases
The CAESAR II Structural databases contain over 20 different properties for each cross-
section. For the finite element solution, only six of these items are employed:
Area
Strong axis moment of inertia
Weak axis moment of inertia
Torsional resistivity constant
Member section height
Member section depth
There are seven different structural databases included in CAESAR II
AISC 1977
AISC 1989
German 1991
Australian 1990
South African 1992
Korean 1990
UK 1993
AISC 1977 Database
AISC 1977 - W Shapes
W36X300 W36X280 W36X260 W36X245 W36X230 W36X210
W36X194 W36X182 W36X170 W36X160 W36X150 W36X135
W33X241 W33X221 W33X201 W33X152 W33X141 W33X130
W33X118 W30X211 W30X191 W30X173 W30X132 W30X124
W30X116 W30X108 W30X99 W27X178 W27X161 W27X146
W27X114 W27X102 W27X94 W27X84 W24X162 W24X146
W24X131 W24X117 W24X104 W24X94 W24X84 W24X76
W24X68 W24X62 W24X55 W21X147 W21X132 W21X122
W21X111 W21X101 W21X93 W21X83 W21X73 W21X68

AISC 1977 - W Shapes
W21X62 W21X57 W21X50 W21X44 W18X119 W18X106
W18X97 W18X86 W18X76 W18X71 W18X65 W18X60
W18X55 W18X50 W18X46 W18X40 W18X35 W16X100
W16X89 W16X77 W16X67 W16X57 W16X50 W16X45
W16X40 W16X36 W16X31 W16X26 W14X730 W14X665
W14X605 W14X550 W14X500 W14X455 W14X426 W14X398
W14X370 W14X342 W14X311 W14X283 W14X257 W14X233
W14X211 W14X193 W14X176 W14X159 W14X145 W14X132
W14X120 W14X109 W14X99 W14X90 W14X82 W14X74
W14X68 W14X61 W14X53 W14X48 W14X43 W14X38
W14X34 W14X30 W14X26 W14X22 W12X336 W12X305
W12X279 W12X252 W12X230 W12X210 W12X190 W12X170
W12X152 W12X136 W12X120 W12X106 W12X96 W12X87
W12X79 W12X72 W12X65 W12X58 W12X53 W12X50
W12X45 W12X40 W12X35 W12X30 W12X26 W12X22
W12X19 W12X16 W12X14 W10X112 W10X100 W10X88
W10X77 W10X68 W10X60 W10X54 W10X49 W10X45
W10X39 W10X33 W10X30 W10X26 W10X22 W10X19
W10X17 W10X15 W10X12 W8X67 W8X58 W8X48
W8X40 W8X35 W8X31 W8X28 W8X24 W8X21
W8X18 W8X15 W8X13 W8X10 W6X25 W6X20
W6X16 W6X15 W6X12 W6X9 W5X19 W5X16
W4X13

AISC 1977 - M Shapes
M14X18 M12X11.8 M10X9 M8X6.5 M6X20 M6X4.4
M5X18.9 M4X13
AISC 1977 - S Shapes
S24X121 S24X106 S24X100 S24X90 S24X80 S20X96
S20X86 S20X75 S20X66 S18X70 S18X54.7 S15X50
S15X42. S12X50 S12X40.8 S12X35 S12X31.8 S10X35

9
S10X25. S8X23 S8X18.4 S7X20 S7X15.3 S6X17.2

4
S6X12.5 S5X14.7 S5X10 S4X9.5 S4X7.7 S3X7.5
S3X5.7
AISC 1977 - Channels
C15X50 C15X40 C15X33.9 C12X30 C12X25 C12X20.7
C10X30 C10X25 C10X20 C10X15.3 C9X20 C9X15
C9X13.4 C8X18.7 C8X13.7 C8X11.5 C7X14.7 C7X12.2
C7X9.8 C6X13 C6X10.5 C6X8.2 C5X9 C5X6.7
C4X7.25 C4X5.4 C3X6 C3X5 C3X4.1
AISC 1977 - Miscellaneous Channels
MC18X58 MC18X51.9 MC18X45.8 MC18X42.7 MC13X50
MC13X40 MC13X35 MC13X31.8 MC12X50 MC12X45
MC12X40 MC12X35 MC12X37 MC12X32.9 MC12X30.9
MC12X10.6 MC10X41.1 MC10X33.6 MC10X28.5 MC10X28.3

AISC 1977 - Miscellaneous Channels
MC9X25.4 MC9X23.9 MC8X22.8 MC8X21.4 MC8X20
MC6X18 MC6X15.3 MC6X16.3 MC6X15.1 MC6X12
AISC 1977 - WT Shapes
WT18X150
WT18x140 WT18x130 WT18x122.5 WT18X115 WT18X105
WT18X97 WT18X91 WT18x85 WT18x80 WT18x75
WT18X67.5 WT16.5X120.5 WT16.6X110.5 WT16.5x100.5 WT16.5x76
WT16.5x100.5 WT16.5x76 WT16.5X70.5 WT16.5X65 WT16.5X59
WT15X105.5 WT15x95.5 WT15x86.5 WT15x66 WT15x62
WT15X58 WT15X54 WT15X49.5 WT13.5X89 WT13.5X80.5
WT13.5x73 WT13.5x57 WT13.5x51 WT13.5X47 WT13.5X42
WT12X81 WT12X73 WT12x65.5 WT12x58.5 WT12x52
WT12X47 WT12X42 WT12X38 WT12X34 WT12X31
WT12x27.5 WT10.5x73.5 WT10.5x66 WT10.5x61 WT10.5X55.5
WT10.5x50.5 WT10.5x46.5 WT10.5x41.5 WT10.5x36.5 WT10.5X34
WT10.5x31 WT10.5x28.5 WT10.5x25 WT10.5x22 WT9X59.5
WT9x53 WT9x48.5 WT9x43 WT9x38 WT9X35.5
WT9x32.5 WT9x30 WT9x27.5 WT9x25 WT9X23
WT9x20 WT9x17.5 WT8x50 WT8x44.5 WT8X38.5
WT8x33.5 WT8x28.5 WT8x25 WT8x22.5 WT8X20

AISC 1977 - WT Shapes
WT7x302.5 WT7x275 WT7x250 WT7x227.5 WT7X213
WT7x199 WT7x185 WT7x171 WT7x155.5 WT7X141.5
WT7x128.5 WT7x116.5 WT7x105.5 WT7x96.5 WT7X88
WT7x79.5 WT7x72.5 WT7x66 WT7x60 WT7X54.5
WT7x49.5 WT7x45 WT7x41 WT7x37 WT7X34
WT7x30.5 WT7x26.5 WT7x24 WT7x21.5 WT7X19
WT7x17 WT7x15 WT7x13 WT7x11 WT6X168
WT6x152.5 WT6x139.5 WT6x126 WT6x115 WT6X105
WT6x95 WT6x85 WT6x76 WT6x68 WT6X60
WT6x53 WT6x48 WT6x43.5 WT6x39.5 WT6X36
WT6x32.5 WT6x29 WT6x26.5 WT6x25 WT6X22.5
WT6x20 WT6x17.5 WT6x15 WT6x13 WT6X11
WT6x9.5 WT6x8 WT6x7 WT5x56 WT5X50
WT5x24.5 WT5x22.5 WT5x19.5 WT5x16.5 WT5X15
WT5x13 WT5x11 WT5x9.5 WT5x8.5 WT5X7.5
WT4x17.5 WT4x15.5 WT4x14 WT4x12 WT4X10.5
WT4x9 WT4x7.5 WT4x6.5 WT4x5 WT4X12.5
WT2.5x9.5 WT2.5x8 WT2x6.5
AISC 1977 - MT and ST Shapes
MT7X9 MT6X5.9 MT5X4.5 MT4X3.25

AISC 1977 - MT and ST Shapes
MT3X10 MT3X2.2 MT2.5X9.45 MT2X6.5
ST12X60.5 ST12X53 ST12X50 ST12X45
ST12X40 ST10X48 ST10X43 ST10X37.5
ST10X33 ST9X35 ST9X27.35 ST7.5X25
ST7.5X21.45 ST6X25 ST6X20.4 ST6X17.5
ST6X15.9 ST5X17.5 ST5X12.7 ST4X11.5
ST4X9.2 ST3.5X10 ST3.5X7.65 ST3X8.625
ST3X6.25 ST2.5X7.375 ST2.5X5 ST2X4.75
ST2X3.85 ST1.5X3.75 ST1.5X2.85
AISC 1977 - Double Angle - Long Legs Back-to-Back
d8x8x1.1250 d8x8x1.0000 d8x8x0.8750
d8x8x0.7500 d8x8x0.6250 d8x8x0.5000
d6x6x1.0000 d6x6x0.8750 d6x6x0.7500
d6x6x0.6250 d6x6x0.5000 d6x6x0.3750
d5x5x0.8750 d5x5x0.7500 d5x5x0.5000
d5x5x0.3750 d5x5x0.3125 d4x4x0.7500
d4x4x0.6250 d4x4x0.5000 d4x4x0.3750
d4x4x0.3125 d4x4x0.2500 d3.5x3.5x0.3750
d3.5x3.5x0.3125 d3.5x3.5x0.2500 d3x3x0.5000
d3x3x0.3750 d3x3x0.3125 d3x3x0.2500
d3x3x0.1875 d2.5x2.5x0.3750 d2.5x2.5x0.3125
d2.5x2.5x0.2500 d2.5x2.5x0.1875 d2x2x0.3750
d2x2x0.3125 d2x2x0.2500 d2x2x0.1875

AISC 1977 - Double Angle - Long Legs Back-to-Back
d2x2x0.1250 d8x6x1.0000 d8x6x0.7500
d8x6x0.5000 d8x4x1.0000 d8x4x0.7500
d8x4x0.5000 d7x4x0.7500 d7x4x0.5000
d7x4x0.3750 d6x4x0.7500 d6x4x0.6250
d6x4x0.5000 d6x4x0.3750 d6x3.5x0.3750
d6x3.5x0.3125 d5x3.5x0.7500 d5x3.5x0.5000
d5x3.5x0.3750 d5x3.5x0.3125 d5x3x0.5000
d5x3x0.3750 d5x3x0.3125 d5x3x0.2500
d4x3.5x0.5000 d4x3.5x0.3750 d4x3.5x0.3125
d4x3.5x0.2500 d4x3x0.5000 d4x3x0.3750
d4x3x0.3125 d4x3x0.2500 d3.5x3x0.3750
d3.5x3x0.3125 d3.5x3x0.2500 d3.5x2.5x0.3750
d3.5x2.5x0.3125 d3.5x2.5x0.2500 d3x2.5x0.3750
d3x2.5x0.2500 d3x2.5x0.1875 d3x2x0.3750
d3x2x0.3125 d3x2x0.2500 d3x2x0.1875
d2.5x2x0.3750 d2.5x2x0.3750 d2.5x2x0.2500
d2.5x2x0.1875
AISC 1977 - Double Angle - Short Legs Back-to-Back
B8X6X1.0000 B8X6X0.7500
B8X6X0.2500 B8X4X1.0000 B8X4X0.7500
B8X4X0.5000 B7X4X0.7500 B7X4X0.5000
B7X4X0.3750 B6X4X0.7500 B6X4X0.6250
B6X4X0.5000 B6X4X0.3750 B6X3.5X0.3750

AISC 1977 - Double Angle - Short Legs Back-to-Back
B6X3.5X0.3125 B5X3.5X0.7500 B5X3.5X0.5000
B5X3.5X0.3750 B5X3.5X0.3125 B5X3X0.5000
B5X3X0.3750 B5X3XO.3125 B5X3X0.2500
B4X3.5X0.5000 B4X3.5X0.3750 B4X3.5X0.3125
B4X3.5X0.2500 B4X3X0.5000 B4X3X0.3750
B4X3X0.3125 B4X3X0.2500 B3.5X3X0.3750
B3.5X3X0.3125 B3.5X3X0.2500 B3.5X2.5X0.3750
B3.5X2.5X0.3125 B3.5X2.5X0.2500 B3X2.5X0.3750
B3X2.5X0.2500 B3X2.5X0.1875 B3X2X0.3750
B3X2X0.3125 B3X2X0.2500 B3X2X0.1875
B2.5X2X0.3750 B2.5X2X0.3125 B2.5X2X0.2500
B2.5X2X0.1875
AISC 1989 Database

W44X285 W44X248 W44X224 W44X198 W40X328 W40X298
W40X268 W40X244 W40X221 W40X192 W40X655 W40X593
W40X531 W40X480 W40X436 W40X397 W40X362 W40X324
W40X297 W40X277 W40X249 W40X215 W40X199 W40X183
W40X167 W40X149 W36X848 W36X798 W36X720 W36X650
W36X588 W36X527 W36X485 W36X439 W36X393 W36X359
W36X328 W36X300 W36X280 W36X260 W36X245 W36X230
W36X256 W36X232 W36X210 W36X194 W36X182 W36X170
W36X160 W36X150 W36X135 W33X619 W33X567 W33X515

W33X468 W33X424 W33X387 W33X354 W33X318 W33X291
W33X263 W33X241 W33X221 W33X201 W33X169 W33X152
W33X141 W33X130 W33X118 W30X581 W30X526 W30X477
W30X433 W30X391 W30X357 W30X326 W30X292 W30X261
W30X235 W30X211 W30X191 W30X173 W30X148 W30X132
W30X124 W30X116 W30X108 W30X99 W30X90 W27X539
W27X494 W27X448 W27X407 W27X368 W27X336 W27X307
W27X281 W27X258 W27X235 W27X217 W27X194 W27X178
W27X161 W27X146 W27X114 W27X102 W27X94 W27X84
W24X492 W24X450 W24X408 W24X370 W24X335 W24X306
W24X279 W24X250 W24X229 W24X207 W24X192 W24X176
W24X162 W24X146 W24X131 W24X117 W24X104 W24X103
W24X94 W24X84 W24X76 W24X68 W24X62 W24X55
W21X402 W21X364 W21X333 W21X300 W21X275 W21X248
W21X223 W21X201 W21X182 W21X166 W21X147 W21X132
W21X122 W21X111 W21X101 W21X93 W21X83 W21X73
W21X68 W21X62 W21X57 W21X50 W21X44 W18X311
W18X283 W18X258 W18X234 W18X211 W18X192 W18X175
W18X158 W18X143 W18X130 W18X119 W18X106 W18X97
W18X86 W18X76 W18X71 W18X65 W18X60 W18X55
W18X50 W18X46 W18X40 W18X35 W16X100 W16X89
WT18X115 WT18X128 WT18X116
WT18X105 WT18X97 WT18X91
WT18X85 WT18X80 WT18X75

WT18X67.5 WT16.5X177 WT16.5X159
WT16.5X145.5 WT16.5X131.5 WT16.5X120.5
WT16.5X110.5 WT16.5X100.5 WT16.5X84.5
WT16.5X76 WT16.5X70.5 WT16.5X65
WT16.5X59 WT15X117.5 WT15X105.5
WT15X95.5 WT15X86.5 WT15X74
WT15X66 WT15X62 WT15X58
WT15X54 WT15X49.5 WT13.5X108.5
WT13.5X97 WT13.5X89 WT13.5X80.5
WT13.5X73 WT13.5X64.5 WT13.5X57
WT13.5X51 WT13.5X47 WT13.5X42
WT12X88 WT12X81 WT12X73
WT12X65.5 WT12X58.5 WT12X52
WT12X51.5 WT12X47 WT12X42
WT12X38 WT12X34 WT12X31
WT12X27.5 WT10.5X83 WT10.5X73.5
WT10.5X66 WT10.5X61 WT10.5X55.5
WT10.5X50.5 WT10.5X46.5 WT10.5X41.5
WT10.5X36.5 WT10.5X34 WT10.5X31
WT10.5X28.5 WT10.5X25 WT10.5X22
WT9X71.5 WT9X65 WT9X59.5
WT9X53 WT9X48.5 WT9X43
WT9X38 WT9X35.5 WT9X32.5
WT9X30 WT9X27.5 WT9X25
WT9X23 WT9X20 WT9X17.5

WT8X50 WT8X44.5 WT8X38.5
WT8X33.5 WT8X28.5 WT8X25
WT8X22.5 WT8X20 WT8X18
WT8X15.5 WT8X13 WT7X365
WT7X332.5 WT7X302.5 WT7X275
WT7X250 WT7X227.5 WT7X213
WT7X199 WT7X185 WT7X171
WT7X155.
MT7X9 MT6X5.9 MT5X4.5 MT4X3.25 MT3X2.2 MT2.5X9.45
ST12X60.5 ST12X53 ST12X50 ST12X45 ST12X40 ST10X48
ST10X43 ST10X37.5 ST10X33 ST9X35 ST9X27.35 ST7.5X25
ST7.5X21.45 ST6X25 ST6X20.4 ST6X17.5 ST6X15.9 ST5X17.5
ST5X12.7 ST4X11.5 ST4X9.2 ST3.5X10 ST3.5X7.65 ST3X8.625
ST3X6.25 ST2.5X7.375 ST2.5X5 ST2X4.75 ST2X3.85 ST1.5X3.75
ST1.5X2.85



Australian 1990 Database

UB760X244 UB760X220 UB760X197 UB760X173 UB760X148 UB690X140
UC310X283 UC310X240 UC310X198 UC310X158 UC310X137 UC310X118
UC310X97 UC250X89 UC250X73 UC200X60 UC200X52 UC200X46
UC150X37 UC150X30 UC150X23 UC100X15
UBP310X79 UBP250X85 UBP250X63
TFB125X65 TFB100X45
TFC125X65 TFC100X50 TFC75X40
PFC380X100 PFC300X90 PFC250X90 PFC230X75 PFC200X75 PFC180X75
PFC150X75
EL200X200X26 EL200X200X20 EL200X200X18
EL200X200X16 EL200X200X13 EL150X150X19
EL150X150X16 EL150X150X12 EL150X150X10
EL125X125X16 EL125X125X12 EL125X125X10

EL125X125X8 EL100X100X12 EL100X100X10
EL100X100X8 EL100X100X6 EL90X90X10
EL90X90X8 EL90X90X6 EL75X75X10
EL25X25X3
UL150X100X12 UL150X100X10 UL150X90X16
UL150X90X12 UL150X90X10 UL150X90X8
UL125X75X12 UL125X75X10 UL125X75X8
UL125X75X6 UL100X75X10 UL100X75X8
UL100X75X6 UL75X50X8 UL75X50X6
UL75X50X5 UL65X50X8 UL65X50X6
UL65X50X5

German 1991 Database
I80 I100 I120 I140 I160 I180
I200 I220 I240 I260 I280 I300
I320 I340 I360 I380 I400 I425
I450 I475 I500 I550 I600
IPE80 IPE100 IPE120 IPE140 IPE160 IPE180
IPEO180 IPEO200 IPEO220 IPEO240 IPEO270 IPEO300
IPEO330 IPEO360 IPEO400 IPEO450 IPEO500 IPEO550
IPEO600
IPEV400 IPEV450 IPEV500 IPEV550 IPEV600
IPBI-100 IPBI-120 IPBI-140 IPBI-160 IPBI-180 IPBI-200

0
IPB-100 IPB-120 IPB-140 IPB-160 IPB-180 IPB-200

U30X15 U30 U40X20 U40 U50X25 U50
U60 U65 U80 U100 U120 U140
U160 U180 U200 U220 U240 U260
U280 U300 U320 U350 U380 U400
T20 T25 T30 T35 T40 T45
T50 T60 T70 T80 T90 T100
T120 T140

South African 1992 Database

Korean 1990 Database
W594X302 W588X300 W582X300 W612X202 W606X201
W600X200 W596X199 W488X300 W482X300 W506X201
W500X200 W496X199 W440X300 W434X299 W450X200
W446X199 W390X300 W386X299 W404X201 W400X200
W396X199 W350X350 W344X354 W344X348 W340X250
W336X249 W354X176 W350X175 W346X174 W310X310
W310X305 W304X301 W300X305 W300X300 W298X299
W294X302 W298X201 W294X200 W300X150 W298X149
W250X255 W250X250 W248X249 W244X252 W244X175
W250X125 W248X124 W208X202 W200X204 W200X200
W194X150 W200X100 W150X150 W148X100 W150X75
W125X125 W100X100
l250x250x35 l250x250x25 l200x200x25 l200x200x20 l200x200x15
l50x50x4 l45x45x5 l45x45x4 l40x40x5

C300X90 C300X91 C300X92 C300X93 C300X94
C125X65 C100X50 C75X40
m300x150 m250x125 m200x100 m150x75 m125x75
UK 1993 Database

SECTION 6
Underground Pipe Modeler
Main window ribbon: Home > Input > Underground Pipe Modeler
Main window menu: Input > Underground
Opens the Buried Pipe Modeler, which takes an above-ground layout and buries it.
The modeler performs the following functions:

Allows the direct input of soil properties. The modeler contains the equations for buried pipe
stiffnesses. These equations are used to calculate the stiffnesses on a per length of pipe
basis and then generate the restraints that simulate the discrete buried pipe restraint.
Breaks down straight and curved lengths of pipe to locate soil restraints using a zone
concept. Where transverse bearing is a concern near bends, tees, and entry/exit points, soil
restraints are located in close proximity in a mesh spacing.
Breaks down straight and curved pipe so that when axial loads dominate, soil restraints are
spaced far apart.
Allows the direct entry of soil stiffnesses on a pipe-length basis. Input parameters include
axial, transverse, upward, and downward stiffnesses, and ultimate loads. You can specify
stiffnesses separately or in conjunction with the software's automatically generated soil
stiffnesses.
The Buried Pipe Modeler is designed to read a standard CAESAR II input data file that
describes the basic layout of the piping system as if it was not buried. From this input, the
software creates a second input data file that contains the buried pipe model. This second input
file typically contains a much larger number of elements and restraints than the first job. The first
file that serves as the pattern is called the original file. The second file that contains the element
mesh refinement and the buried pipe restraints is called the buried file. CAESAR II names the
buried file by appending the letter B to the name of the original file.
During the process of creating the buried model, the modeler removes any restraints
in the buried section. Any additional restraints in the buried section can be created in the
resulting buried model. The buried file, if it exists, is overwritten by the successful generation of
a buried pipe model. The software calculates displacements and stresses on the buried file.

The Buried Pipe Molder toolbar displays icons for commonly-used commands.
Open
Opens an input data file that will serve as the original file.
Save
Creates an input data file that contains the buried pipe model. By default, the software
appends the filename of the original job with the letter B to create the buried input data file.
Print
Prints the data input from the Buried Pipe Modeler window.
Print Preview
Displays a preview of the printed output.
Cut
Removes the data in the selected row from its current location and places a copy on the
clipboard.
Copy
Creates a copy of the data in the selected row and places it on the clipboard.
Paste
Places a copy of the clipboard contents in the specified location.
For Cut and Copy , you can select multiple rows by using the standard options
CTRL+click, SHIFT+click, SHIFT+ and, SHIFT+ .
You can only cut, copy, and paste an entire row.
Pasting a row pastes row data (such as soil model, end mesh, load, and stiffness values),
but does not change the node numbers.
Soil Models
Opens the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box in which you specify soil properties for the
CAESAR II buried pipe equations used by the software to generate one or more soil
restraint systems. For more information, see Soil Models (on page 542).
Convert
Converts the original file into the buried file by meshing the existing elements and adding
soil restraints.
Find
Searches for the specified text.
File > Change Buried Pipe Job Name.

Modifies the name of the buried pipe file.

From Node
Displays the node number for the starting end of the element
To Node
Displays the node number for the end of the piping element.
Soil Model No.

Defines which of the elements in the model are buried.
If you enter 0, the element is not buried.
If you enter 1, then specify the buried soil stiffnesses per length basis in columns 6 through
13.
If you enter a number greater than 1, the software points to a CAESAR II soil restraint model
generated using the equations outlined in Soil Models (on page 542).
You can specify soil properties, such as buried depth, friction factor, undrained
shear strength, using the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box (on page 548). The software uses
these properties to calculate the buried soil stiffnesses on a stiffness per length basis.
Because the soil properties can change from point-to-point along the pipeline, several
different soil models can be entered for a single job. Each different soil model is given a
unique soil model number starting with 2. Consider the following example:
From Node To Node Soil Model No.
5 10 0
10 15 0
15 20 1
20 25 1
25 30 1
30 35 2
35 40 2
The pipe from nodes 5 through 15 is not buried. From nodes 15 through 30, you will specify
your own stiffnesses (using columns 6 through 13 of the data input area). From nodes 35
through 40, the software will use the property values indicated in the corresponding soil
model number to generate stiffnesses.

From/To End Mesh

Indicates a fine mesh is needed at the From or To element end.
Long, single elements that you enter need to be broken down into smaller elements to properly
distribute the soil forces. The software performs this breakdown automatically. If the particular
end of an element will undergo lateral displacement, it must have a finer mesh than an element
end that only undergoes axial displacements.
Axial displacement ends are at the end of a virtual anchor length.
Element ends undergo lateral displacements wherever there is a bend at the end of the element.
In this case, the software automatically places a fine mesh along the element entering the bend
and along the element leaving the bend. At all other locations, you must tell the software where
the fine meshes must go. These locations include:
1 - Element ends that frame into intersections.
2 - Element ends that enter or exit from the soil.
3 - Element ends where there is any change in direction not defined by a bend.
Follow the rule that too many mesh elements will never hurt the solution, whereas too
few may produce incorrect results. Thus, always check the appropriate box if you are uncertain.
Consider the following example:
CAESAR II places a fine mesh at the 5 end of the element because the pipe enters the soil at 5,
where there are probably some displacements. The software automatically places fine meshes
at element ends where there are bends, so checking the FROM END MESH/TO END MESH
boxes is not needed on the 10-15 element. A fine mesh is also placed at each element end that
frames into the intersection at 20. Finally, a fine mesh is placed at the terminal points 35 and 30.
User-Defined Lateral "K"

Specifies the soil stiffness perpendicular to the pipe axis on a stiffness per length basis. This
stiffness value acts in both directions perpendicular to the pipe. This option is required if Soil
Model No. (on page 538) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option blank.
The smallest allowable non-zero value is 0.5.

Ultimate Lateral Load

Specifies the ultimate lateral load carrying capacity of the soil on a force per length basis. It is at
this point in the loading where the soil behavior becomes perfectly plastic. This option is
required if Soil Model No. (on page 538) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option blank.
User-Defined Axial Stif

Specifies the soil stiffness along the axis of the pipe on a stiffness per length basis. This
stiffness value acts in both directions along the axis of the pipe. This option is required if Soil
Model No. (on page 538) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option blank.
To simulate a rigid, perfectly plastic soil for axial pipeline deformation, enter 1.0E12.
Ultimate Axial Load

Specifies the ultimate axial load carrying capacity of the soil on a force per length basis. It is at
this point in the loading where the soil behavior becomes perfectly plastic. This option is
User-Defined Upward Stif

Specifies the soil stiffness in the upward direction on a stiffness per length basis. The value that
you enter is the stiffness that will resist upward displacement of the pipeline. This option is
required if Soil Model No. (on page 538) is set to 1; otherwise, you can leave this option blank.
If the upward and downward stiffnesses are equal, then you need only enter a value for
one--the stiffness value that is not entered defaults to the stiffness value that is entered.
If both User-Defined Upward Stif and User-Defined Downward Stif (on page 541) are set
to 0 or left blank, a fatal error results.

Ultimate Upward Load

Specifies the ultimate upward load carrying capacity of the soil on a force per length basis. The
value you enter is the maximum resistance of the soil to an upward displacement of the pipeline.
It is at this point in the loading where the soil behavior becomes perfectly plastic. This option is
If the upward and downward ultimate loads are equal, then you need only enter a value for
one. The other load defaults to the entered value.
If both Ultimate Upward Load and Ultimate Downward Load (on page 541) are set to 0 or
left blank, a fatal error results.
User-Defined Downward Stif

Specifies the soil stiffness in the downward direction on a stiffness per length basis. The value
that you enter is the stiffness that will resist downward (-Y) displacement of the pipeline. This
option is required if Soil Model No. (on page 538) is set to 1; otherwise, you can leave this
option blank.
If the upward and downward stiffnesses are equal, then you need only enter a value for one.
The other stiffness defaults to the entered value.
If both User-Defined Upward Stif (on page 540) and User-Defined Downward Stif are set
to 0 or left blank, a fatal error results.
Ultimate Downward Load

Specifies the ultimate downward load carrying capacity of the soil on a force per length basis.
The value you enter is the maximum resistance of the soil to a downward (-Y) displacement of
the pipeline. It is at this point in the loading where the soil behavior becomes perfectly plastic.
This option is required if Soil Model No. (on page 538) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option
blank.
If the upward and downward ultimate loads are equal, then you need only enter a value for
one. The other load defaults to the entered value.
If both Ultimate Upward Load (on page 541) and Ultimate Downward Load are set to 0
or left blank, a fatal error results.

Soil Models
Only use the following procedures for estimating soil distributed stiffnesses
and ultimate loads when you do not have better available data or methods suited.
The soil restraint modeling algorithms used by the software are based on the following:
CAESAR II Basic Model
Pipeline Industry. For more information, see CAESAR II Basic Model (on page 542).
American Lifelines Alliance
"Appendix B: Soil Spring Representation" from the Guidelines for the Design of Buried Steel
Pipe by the American Lifelines Alliance
(http://www.americanlifelinesalliance.org/pdf/Update061305.pdf). For more information, see
American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model (on page 544).
Soil supports are modeled as bi-linear springs having an initial stiffness, an ultimate load, and a
yield stiffness. The yield stiffness is typically set close to zero. After the ultimate load on the soil
is reached, there is no further increase in load even though the displacement may continue. The
axial and transverse ultimate loads must be calculated to analyze buried pipe. Many researchers
differentiate between horizontal, upward, and downward transverse loads, but when the
variance in predicted soil properties and methods are considered, this differentiation is often
unwarranted.
The software allows the explicit entry of these data if it is necessary to your specific
project.
After the axial and lateral ultimate loads are known, the stiffness in each direction can be
determined by dividing the ultimate load by the yield displacement. Researchers have found that
the yield displacement is related to both the buried depth and the pipe diameter. The calculated
ultimate loads and stiffnesses are on a force per unit length of pipe basis.
See also
Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box (on page 548)

The following recommendations apply when you select CAESAR II Basic Model as
the Soil Model Type in the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box. For more information about the
dialog box and the available soil properties, see Basic Soil Modeler dialog box (on page 548).

Either FRICTION COEFFICIENT or UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH may be left blank. With
clays, the friction coefficient is typically left blank and is automatically estimated by CAESAR II
as Su/600 psf. Both sandy soils and clay-like soils can be defined here.
The soil restraint equations use these soil properties to generate restraint ultimate loads and
stiffnesses. Defining a value for TEMPERATURE CHANGE is optional. If entered the thermal
virtual anchor length. These equations are:
Axial Ultimate Load (Fax)
Fax s p f)(D/4) ]
Where:
0.4 for silt

0.5 for sand
0.6 for gravel
0.6 for clay or Su/600
s= Soil density
H = Buried depth to the top of pipe
p= Pipe density
t = Pipe nominal wall thickness
f= Fluid density
D = Pipe diameter
Su = Undrained shear strength (specified for clay-like soils)
Transverse Ultimate Load (Ftr)
Ftr s(H+D)
2 2OCM
If Su is given (that is, the soil is clay), then F tr as calculated above is multiplied by S u/250 psf.
Where:
27-45 for sand

26-35 for silt

0 for clay
OVERBURDEN COMPACTION MULTIPLIER (OCM) is an artificial CAESAR II term that

allows you to take a conservative approach when modeling uncertain soil response.
Because a higher stiffness generally produces conservative results, you may wish to
increase the transverse soil stiffness. CAESAR II uses the OCM to serve this purpose.
You can reduce the OCM from its default of 8 to values ranging from 5 to 7, depending on
the degree of compaction of the backfill. There is no theory which suggests that the OCM
cannot equal 1.0.
For a strict implementation of Peng's Theory as discussed in his articles (April 78 and May
78 issue of Pipeline Industry), use a value of 1.0 for the OCM.
Yield Displacement (yd):
yd = Yield Displacement Factor(H+D)
The Yield Displacement Factor defaults to 0.015(suggested for H = 3D).
Axial Stiffness (Kax) on a per length of pipe basis:
Kax=Fax / yd
Transverse Stiffness (Ktr) on a per length of pipe basis:
Ktr=Ftr / yd
American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model

The following information references "Appendix B: Soil Spring Representation"
in the American Lifelines Alliance document Guidelines for the Design of Buried Steel Pipe
(http://www.americanlifelinesalliance.org/pdf/Update061305.pdf). This document provides
bilinear stiffness of soil for axial, lateral, uplift and bearing. Each stiffness term has a component
associated with sandy soils (subscripted q) and a component associated with clays (subscripted
c). Data can be entered for pure granular soils and pure clays.
Soil stiffness for both clay and sand (cohesive and granular soils, respectively) are defined
through the following user-defined parameters:
c = soil cohesion representative of the soil backfill
H = soil depth to top of pipe (this is converted by C2 to depth to pipe centerline in ALA
calculations)
= effective unit weight of soil
= total dry unit weight of fill
Ko = coefficient of earth pressure at rest (can be calculated based on internal friction angle of
soil)
f = coating-dependent factor relating the internal friction angle of the soil to the friction angle at
the soil-pipe interface

Elastic range of soil is either fixed or a function of D & H with limits based on D.
Yield Displacement Entry Limited by

Factor
Axial Length units
Lateral Multiple of D 0.04(H+D/2)
Upward Multiple of H Minimum
Upward Multiple of D
Downward Multiple of D
Tu = peak friction force at pipe-soil interface maximum axial soil force per unit length that can be
transmitted to pipe)
D = pipe OD

= adhesion factor (for clays only)
c = soil cohesion representative of the soil backfill (undrained shear strength)

H = depth of cover to pipe centerline
= effective unit weight of soil

Ko = coefficient of earth pressure at rest
The ratio of the horizontal effective stress acting on a supporting structure and the vertical
effective stress in the soil at that point. At rest indicates the pipe does not move for this
calculation.
and soil, =f
f = coating-dependent factor relating the internal friction angle of the soil to the friction angle
at the soil-pipe interface
Pipe Coating f
Concrete 1.0
Coal Tar 0.9
Rough Steel 0.8
Smooth Steel 0.7
Fusion Bonded Epoxy 0.6
Polyethylene 0.6
= internal friction angle of soil

t = axial displacement to develop
Tu = 0.1 inch for dense sand, 0.2 inch for loose sand, 0.3 inch for stiff clay, and 0.4 inch for
soft clay
Pu = maximum horizontal soil bearing capacity (maximum lateral soil force per unit length that
can be transmitted to pipe)
Nch = horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for clay (0 for c=0)

Nqh = horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for sand (0 for =0°)
Factor j x a b c d e
Nch 0° H/D 6.752 0.065 -11.063 7.119 --
Nqh 20° H/D 2.399 0.439 -0.03 1.059E-3 -1.754E-5
Nqh 25° H/D 3.332 0.839 -0.090 5.606E-3 -1.319E-4
Nqh 30° H/D 4.565 1.234 -0.089 4.275E-3 -9.159E-5
Nqh 35° H/D 6.816 2.019 -0.146 7.651E-3 -1.683E-4
Nqh 40° H/D* 10.959 1.783 0.045 -5.425E-3 1.153E-4*

*
Nqh 45° H/D* 17.658 3.309 0.048 -6.443E-3 1.299E-4*

*
*CAESAR II limits the height/diameter (H/D) ratio to a maximum of 20 for angles at 40 to 45 degrees. The software
calculates any values specified that result in a ratio that is greater than 20 as equal to 20.
**The American Lifelines Alliance standard lists the horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for sand (N qh) as a negative
value for both 40 and 45 degree angles. This results in negative yield load values. CAESAR II calculates these values as
a positive value, as shown in the previous table.
Nqh can be i
Qu = maximum vertical upward soil bearing capacity (maximum vertical uplift soil force per unit
length that can be transmitted to pipe)
Ncv = vertical upward soil bearing capacity factor for clay (0 for c=0)

Nqv = vertical upward soil bearing capacity factor for sand
= 0.01H to 0.02H for dense to loose sands < 0.1D

= 0.1H to 0.2H for stiff to soft clays < 0.2D
Qd - maximum vertical bearing soil force per unit length that can be transmitted to pipe.
Nc, Nq, N = vertical downward soil bearing capacity factors
= total dry unit weight of fill

qd = vertical displacement to develop Qd
= 0.1D for granular soils
= 0.2D for cohesive soils
Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box

Soil Models specifies options for the soil model method to use and defines basic soil
properties, such as undrained sheer strength, friction angles, and so forth. The modeler uses the
values that you define to compute axial, lateral, upward, and downward stiffnesses, along with
ultimate loads. Each set of soil properties is identified by a unique soil model number, starting
with the number 2. The soil model number is used in the buried element descriptions to tell
CAESAR II in what type of soil the pipe is buried. You can enter up to 15 different soil model
numbers in any one buried pipe job.
Soil model number 1 is reserved for user-defined values.

The soil models you enter do not have to be used in the current job. This provides a
convenient mechanism for soil property range studies.

Select the soil model method on which the software will base its calculations. Three different soil
model methods are available, each with its own set of soil properties.
American Lifelines Alliance (Sand/Gravel)
This is the default model is that is presented for granular soils in "Appendix B" of the
America Lifelines Alliance document Guidelines for the Design of Buried Steel Pipe.
This model was developed jointly by the American Society of Civil Engineers and the
Federal Emergency Management Agency in July 2001 (addenda through February
2005.
American Lifelines Alliance (Clay)
This model is for clay soils and from the same document as American Lifelines Alliance
(Sand/Gravel).
A modified implementation of the method described by L.C. Peng in his two-part article
"Stress Analysis Methods for Underground Pipe Lines", published in Pipe Line Industry
(April/May 1978).
For more information, see Soil Models (on page 542).
Specifies the soil adhesion factor. This option displays only when you select American
Lifelines Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Clay as the Soil Classification.
If no value is defined, the soil adhesion factor is calculated using C - SOIL COHESION OF
BACKFILL based upon the following equation:
Where C is in kips/sq.ft.
Possible values are listed in Figure B.2, "Appendix B: Soil Spring Representation"
from the Guidelines for the Design of Buried Steel Pipe by the American Lifelines Alliance
Specifies the soil cohesion representative of the backfill. This option displays only when you
select American Lifelines Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Clay as the Soil
Classification.
Typical values for cohesive soils are between 2.5 and 20 psi (18 and 140kPa).

Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate lateral restraint load is
developed. This is calculated using as the following equation:
However, the calculated value must be limited to a maximum multiple for the pipe outer diameter
(D). Typical values are between 0.1 and 0.15.
Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate downward restraint load is
development. This value is calculated as a multiple of the pipe outer diameter (D). Typical
values are as follows:
Granular soils - 0.1
Cohesive soils - 0.2
Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate upward restraint load is
developed. This value is calculated as per the following equation:
The maximum multiple of the pipe outer diameter (D), must be entered here. Typical values are
as follows:
Sand - 0.1
Clay - 0.2
Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate upward restraint load is
developed. This value is calculated as per the following equation:
The maximum multiple of the pipe buried depth (H) must be entered here. Typical values are as
follows:
Dense Sand - 0.01
Loose Sand - 0.02
Stiff Clay - 0.1
Soft Clay - 0.2

Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate axial restraint load is
developed. This option displays only when you select American Lifeline Alliance in the Soil
Model Type list.
Typical values are as follows:
Dense Sand - 0.1 in. (2.5 mm.)
Loose Sand - 0.2 in (5.0 mm.)
Stiff Clay - 0.3 in. (7.5 mm.)
Soft Clay - 0.4 in. (10 mm.)
Specifies the dry density of the soil on a per unit volume basis. This option displays only if you
select American Lifeline Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Sand/Gravel as the Soil
Classification.
Typical soil densities are listed below:
Soil Dry Density
4.33E-2 1.200E-3
Clay
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
5.79E-2 1.606E-3
Very Loose Sand <= <=
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.08E-2 1.686E-3
Loose Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.48E-2 1.797E-3
Medium Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.66E-2 1.847E-3
Dense Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.95E-2 1.928E-3
Very Dense Sand >= >=
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.

Specifies the effective density of the soil on a per unit volume basis. This option displays only
when you select American Lifelines Alliance in the Soil Model Type list.
The effective density of the soil may differ from the dry density if the soil is wet, and thus less
buoyant. The effective density of the soil is less than the dry density of the soil. If the water table
may engulf the pipe even for a short time, then it is probably appropriate to enter a wet effective
density. If the soil is expected to remain dry, then enter the dry soil density. The following tables
list some typical soil densities:
Soil Dry Density
4.33E-2 1.200E-3
Clay <=
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
5.79E-2 1.606E-3
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.08E-2 1.686E-3
Loose Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.48E-2 1.797E-3
Medium Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.66E-2 1.847E-3
Dense Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.95E-2 1.928E-3
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
Soil Wet (Buoyant) Density
2.73E-2 7.572E-4
Clay
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
3.62E-2 1.005E-3
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
3.80E-2 1.055E-3
Loose Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
4.05E-2 1.123E-3
Medium Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
4.17E-2 1.155E-3
Dense Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
4.35E-2 1.206E-3
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.

Specifies the coating dependent factor that relates the internal friction angle of the soil to the
friction angle at the soil-pipe interface. This option displays only if you select American Lifeline
Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Sand/Gravel as the Soil Classification.
Typical values for external pipe coatings are:
Concrete - 1.0
Coal Tar - 0.9
Rough Steel - 0.8
Smooth Steel - 0.7
Fusion Bonded Epoxy - 0.6
Polyethylene - 0.6
Specifies the internal friction angle of the soil. Typical values are:
Clay - 0
Silt - 26-25
Sand - 27-45
For the American Lifelines Alliance soil model, this entry must be between 20- and
45-degrees.
For the CAESAR II basic soil model, this entry is used in the soil restraint equations to
generate restraint ultimate loads and stiffnesses.
Specifies the coefficient of friction between pipe and soil. If the undrained shear strength (on
page 555) is entered, the friction coefficient may be left blank. The friction coefficient is
calculated using the following equation:
Typical friction coefficient values are:

Silt - 0.4
Sand - 0.5
Gravel - 0.6
Clay - 0.6 or Su/ 0.4167E + 1
This option displays only when you select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.

Specifies the buried pipe depth to the top of the pipe. This option displays only when you select
American Lifelines Alliance in the Soil Model Type list.
The American Lifetime Alliance method actually defines H as "depth to pipe centerline".
CAESAR II automatically converts this based upon the individual pipe sizes.
Upward soil stiffness calculations are considered to be applicable for H/D ratios of 10
and below.
Specifies the coefficient of earth pressure. This option displays only if you select American
Lifeline Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Sand/Gravel as the Soil Classification.
Typical values are on the order of 1.0. If left blank, K0 defaults to the following:
The internal friction angle of the soil is defined by FRICT. ANGLE (on page 553).
Specifies the factor by which the transverse ultimate load is multiplied. This option displays only
when you select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.
This value is used in the soil restraint equations to generate restraint ultimate loads and
stiffnesses. The default value is 8. This number can be reduced depending on the degree of
compaction of the backfill. Backfill efficiency can be approximated using the proctor number,
defined in most soils text books. Standard practice is to multiple the proctor number by 8 and
use the result as the compaction multiplier.
Specifies the weight of the soil on a per unit volume basis. This value is used in the soil restraint
equations to generate restraint ultimate loads and stiffnesses. This option displays only when
you select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.
Specifies the installed to operating pipe temperature difference.

The thermal expansion coefficient and the temperature change inputs are required if you want
CAESAR II to calculate and display the virtual anchor length.

Specifies the pipe thermal expansion coefficient.

The thermal expansion coefficient and the temperature change inputs are required if you want
CAESAR II to calculate and display the virtual anchor length.
Specifies the undrained shear strength. This option displays only when you select CAESAR II
Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.
You can leave this option blank if Friction Coefficient is defined.
Specifies the value used to calculate the soil restraint stiffness. This value must be greater than
0.0. This option displays only when you select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type
list.
The yield displacement factor is inversely proportional to the soil restraint stiffness. By default,
the yield displacement depth of 1.5% of the buried depth is used, which translates to a yield
displacement factor of 0.015.
Model an underground piping system

The recommended workflow for using the Buried Pipe Modeler is outlined in the steps below.
A buried pipe example problem is provided to illustrate the features of the modeler.
This example should not be considered a guide for recommended underground piping design.
For more information, see Buried Pipe Example (on page 556).
1. Click Underground Pipe Modeler on the CAESAR II toolbar or click Input >
Underground to open the modeler.
2. Click File > Open on the Buried Pipe Modeler main menu and select the original unburied
job.
The original job serves as the basis for the buried pipe model. It must already
exist and need only contain the basic geometry of the piping system. The modeler will
remove any existing restraints in the buried portion.
3. Click Soil Models on the Buried Pipe Modeler toolbar.
4. In the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box, select a Soil Model Type.
The software populates the dialog box with soil data properties specific to the soil model you
select.
5. Enter the necessary soil data and click OK to exit the dialog box.
To enter additional soil models, click Add New Soil Model.
The software saves the soil data in a file with the extension SOI.

6. In columns 1-5 of the buried element data input area, describe the sections of the piping
system that are buried and define any required fine mesh areas and click Save .
User-defined soil data can be entered in columns 6-13.
7. On the Buried Pipe Modeler toolbar, click Convert to convert the original model into
the buried model. This step produces a detailed description of the conversion.
By default, the software appends the name of the job with the letter B. For example, if the
original job is named UndergroundPipe, the software saves the second input file with the
name UndergroundPipe B. If the default name is not appropriate, click File > Change
Buried Pipe Job Name and rename the buried job.
8. Click File > Exit to return the CAESAR II main window. From here, you can use Input >
Piping to review and edit the buried model, add any additional underground restraints (such
as thrust block) to the buried model, and perform the analysis of the buried pipe job.
A buried pipe example problem is provided to illustrate the features of the modeler. This
example should not be considered a guide for recommended underground piping design.
For more information, see Buried Pipe Example (on page 556).
Buried Pipe Example

The following buried pipe example problem is provided to illustrate the features of the
modeler. This example should not be considered a guide for recommended underground piping
design.
Consider the following example:

The following input listing represents the unburied model shown above.
Terminal nodes 100 and 1900 are above ground. Nodes 1250 and 1650 (on the sloped runs)
mark the soil entry and exit points.
Using the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box (on page 548), Soil Model Number 2 properties for a
sandy soil is defined.

Elements 1250-1300 through 1600-1650 are buried using soil model number 2. Zone 1 meshing
is indicated at the entry and exit points.

Clicking Convert on the Buried Pipe Modeler toolbar begins the conversion to a buried
model.

The screen listing can also be printed.

The original unburied model is shown along with the buried model below. Restraints have been
added around the elbows and along the straight runs.
Bi-linear restraints have been added to the buried model. The stiffness used is based upon the
distance between nodes.

The first buried element, 1250-1251, has no density.
You can now analyze the buried job.

SECTION 7
Static Analysis
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Piping > Static Analysis
Main window menu: Analysis > Statics

In the Classic Piping Input dialog box:
Piping Input menu: Edit > Edit Static Load Cases
CAESAR II Tools toolbar: Edit Static Load Cases

Displays the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box.
In This Section
Static Analysis Overview ............................................................... 563
Working with Load Cases .............................................................. 570
Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box .............................. 586
Static Analysis Overview

During static analysis, CAESAR II assesses all of the piping data and processes the information
for meaningful reporting later. The software creates element stiffness matrices and load vectors,
as well as solves for displacements, forces and moments, reactions, and stresses. In addition,
you can design specific load cases for analysis, select and design spring hangers, and evaluate
environmental loads.
You must run error checking prior to performing static analysis. If CAESAR II does not find any
errors, the software displays a center of gravity report and generates the analysis data files, and
can then commence the solution and reporting phase.
If the software finds errors with the piping data, it does not continue analysis. You must make
corrections and rerun the Error Checker until no errors exist before the software can complete
analysis.
After error checking, you can specify the load cases to analyze. CAESAR II recommends an
initial set of load cases that you can accept or modify.

Static Analysis
Error Checking
You must successfully complete the error checking portion of the piping input before you can
perform static analysis. When error checking completes, the software creates the required
analysis data files. Any changes that you make to the model are not reflected in the analysis
unless you rerun the error checking. If the piping input has changed, CAESAR II does not allow
an analysis to take place until you successfully run the error checker.
Error Check
Saves the input and starts the error checking procedure. When the error check completes,
the Errors and Warnings dialog box displays the results. You can access this command
only from the Classic Piping Input or CAESAR II Structural Input dialog boxes. You can
also control the displayed errors and warnings:
Show All
Show Fatal Errors Only - Limits display to fatal errors without displaying warnings and
notes.
Limit Repeating Messages - Stops displaying duplicate messages when the quantity
exceeds the value of Set Message Repeat Limit.
Set Message Repeat Limit - Displays the Set Display Limit dialog box, where you set
the number of duplicate messages to repeat.
Batch Run
Checks the input data, analyzes the system, and presents the results without any additional
actions from you.
The software assumes that the load cases associated with the current job do
not need to change, and that the default account number (if accounting is active) is correct.
These criteria are usually met after the first pass through the analysis.
During error checking, the software reviews the CAESAR II model and alerts you to any possible
errors, inconsistencies, or noteworthy items. These items display in a grid as errors, warnings,
or notes.
Errors and Warnings Dialog Box (on page 564)
Displays the total numbers of errors, warnings, or notes for the current job.
You must resolve all errors for the software to run the analysis.
Warnings and notes are for reference and do not prevent analysis.
Double-click a row of the message, and the software takes you to the element in the piping input
that pertains to the error, warning, or note. Click the tabs at the bottom of the window to
alternate between the Classic Piping Input and the Errors and Warnings dialog boxes.
Double-click the column headers to sort the messages by Message Type, Message Number,
or Element/Node Number. Click File > Print to print the messages.

Static Analysis
You can select and copy one or more rows and then paste into other software, such as
Microsoft Excel. Select a row, press SHIFT and select multiple rows, or press CTRL+A to select
all rows. Click Copy or press CTRL+C to copy.
Error Message
The software reports an error when the analysis cannot continue. Errors can be caused by a
problem in the model, such as a piping element with no defined length. You must correct all
errors before the software allows you to continue the analysis.
Warning Message
The software reports a warning when there is a problem that can be overcome using some
assumptions. An example of this is the wall thickness of an element that is insufficient to
meet the minimum wall thickness for the given pressure (hoop stress). You do not have to
correct warnings to get a successful analysis, but you should carefully review them.
Note Message
The software reports a note to inform you of a fact related to the model. An example of a
note is the number of hangers to be designed by CAESAR II or the Center of Gravity report
generated after analysis. Note messages are just informational, and there is no action
required.
What is a Load Case?

In CAESAR II, a load case is a group of piping system loads that are analyzed together and
occur at the same time. An example of a load case is an operating analysis composed of the
thermal, deadweight, and pressure loads together. Another example is an as-installed analysis
of deadweight loads alone.
A load case can also be composed of the combinations of the results of other load cases. For
example, a load case can be the difference in displacements between the operating and
installed cases.
No matter what the contents of the load case, it always produces a set of reports, which list
restraint loads, displacements and rotations, internal forces, moments, and stresses. Because of
piping code definitions for calculation methods and/or allowable stresses, CAESAR II also tags
load cases with a stress type. For example, the combination mentioned previously might be
tagged as an expansion stress case (EXP).

Static Analysis
The piping system loads that compose the basic non-combination load sets relate to various
input items found on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. The following tables list the individual
load set designations, their names and the input items, which make them available for analysis.
Designation Name Input items which activate this

load case
W Deadweight Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight,

Refractory Weight, Cladding
Weight, Fluid Weight, Rigid Weight
WNC Weight No fluid Contents Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight,

Weight, Rigid Weight
WW Water Weight Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight,

Weight, Water-filled Weight, Rigid
Weight (usually used for Hydro
Test)
T1 Thermal Set 1 Temperature #1
P1 Pressure Set 1 Pressure #1
HP Hydrostatic Test Pressure Hydro Pressure
D1 Displacements Set 1 Displacements (1st Vector)
D2 Displacements Set 2 Displacements (2nd Vector)
D3 Displacements Set 3 Displacements (3rd Vector)
D9 Displacement Set 9 Displacements (9th Vector)
F1 Force Set 1 Forces/Moments (1st Vector)

Static Analysis
F2 Force Set 2 Forces/Moments (2nd Vector)
F3 Force Set 3 Forces/Moments (3rd Vector)
F9 Force Set 9 Forces/Moments (9th Vector)
WIN1 Wind Load 1 Wind Shape Factor
WAV1 Wave Load 1 Wave Load On
U1 Uniform Loads Uniform Loads (1st Vector)
U2 Uniform Loads Uniform Loads (2nd Vector)
U3 Uniform Loads Uniform Loads (3rd Vector)
CS Cold Spring Material # 18 or 19
H Hanger Initial Loads Hanger Design or Prespecified

Hangers
Available piping system loads display on the left side of the Static Analysis dialog
box.
Load cases are comprised of one or more major load types as defined in the input. Major load
cases are load cases that require a solution to the matrix equation [K]{x} = {f}.
For example:
W+T1+P1+F1 (OPE) is a major load case
W+P1+F1 (SUS) is a major load case
Basic load cases can consist of a single load, such as WNC for an as-installed weight analysis.
A basic load can also include several loads added together, such as W+T1+P1+D1+F1 for an
operating analysis. The stress type categories sustained (SUS), expansion (EXP), occasional
(OCC), operating (OPE), and fatigue (FAT) are specified at the end of the load case definition.
The definition of the two examples is: WNC (SUS) and W+T1+P1+D1+H (OPE). Enter each
basic load case in this manner.

Static Analysis
Load components, such as W, T1, D1, WIN1, can be preceded by scale factors such as 2.0,
-0.5, and so forth. Likewise, you can precede references to previous load cases by scale factors
when you build combination cases.
This provides you with several benefits.
If one loading is a multiple of the other (such as Safe Shutdown Earthquake being two times
Operating Basis Earthquake) you only have to type one loading in the Classic Piping Input
dialog box. You can use this loading in a scaled or unscaled form in the Static Analysis -
Load Case Editor dialog box.
If a loading can be directionally reversible, such as wind or earthquake, you only have to
type one loading in the Classic Piping Input dialog box. You can use this loading preceded
by a + or a - to switch the direction.
Load Rating Design Factor (LRDF) methods can be implemented by scaling individual load
components by their risk-dependent factors. For example:
You can select the stress type from the list on each line.
You can combine the results of the basic load cases by using combination load cases. Always
type these combinations after the last of the basic load cases. Designate combinations of basic
load cases by using the prefix L1, L2, and so on.
Algebraic combination load cases are combinations of previously-solved major load cases. For
example:
L1-L2 (EXP) is a combination case which combines the displacements, forces, and stresses
using a combination method that you select.
L4+L6+L8 (OCC) is a combination case which combines the displacements, forces, and
stresses using a combination method that you select.
The + and - signs are unary operators/sign of multiplier. If no value precedes the load
for major load cases or the load case for combination cases, then the multiplier is +1.0 or -1.0. If
a value precedes the load or the load case, then the multiplier is +value or -value.
You must specify the expected number of load cycles for all load cases with stress
type fatigue (FAT).
The following family of load cases provides an example of algebraic combinations.
Load
Case Designation Comments
1 W+T1+P1+H+0.67CS Hot operating. The 0.67scale factor takes credit only for
(OPE) 2/3 of the cold spring.
2 W1+P1+H+0.67CS(OPE) Cold operating with cold spring included.
3 W1+P1+H(SUS) Traditional sustained case.

Static Analysis
Load
Case Designation Comments
4 WIN1(OCC) Wind case. This will be manipulated later to represent

average wind 1X, maximum wind 2X (in the positive and
negative directions).
5 L1-L2(EXP) Traditional cold to hot expansion case. Use L for load,

rather than DS.
6 L1-L2(FAT) Same case evaluated for fatigue at 10,000 cycles.
7 L1+L4(OPE) Hot operating with average wind (in positive direction).
8 L1-L4(OPE) Hot operating with average wind (in negative direction).
9 L1+2L4(OPE) Hot operating with maximum wind (in positive direction).
10 L1-2L4(OPE) Hot operating with maximum wind (in negative direction).
11 L2+L4(OPE) Cold operating with average wind (in positive direction).
12 L2-L4(OPE) Cold operating with average wind (in negative direction).
13 L2+2L4(OPE) Cold operating with maximum wind (in positive direction).
14 L2-2L4(OPE) Cold operating with maximum wind (in negative

direction).
15 L3+L4(OCC) Occasional stress case, sustained plus average wind.
16 L3+2L4(OCC) Occasional stress case, sustained plus maximum wind.
17 L9+L10+L11+L12(OPE) Maximum restraint load case. The combination option

should be MAX.
18
CAESAR II permits the specification of up to 999 load cases for analysis. Copy the
model to a new file to specify the additional load cases if more cases are required.

Static Analysis
Working with Load Cases

From the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box, you can create and edit load cases
for analysis. A load case is a group of piping system load primitives that are analyzed together.
The dialog box features two views that you select from the upper right corner of the dialog box.
List View
The default view for editing load cases, shows all load cases associated with the job. From
this view, you can edit individual load cases, create new load cases by typing in the
primitives, and drag and drop from the Loads Defined in Input or the load case identifier to
build load cases or create combination load cases.
Other List view functionality includes:
Group By functionality
Click a column heading and drag it to the top to sort the list of load cases by that
column.
Filter functionality on columns
Select the column head filter control and choose the filter options for the selected
column.
Static columns
See the load case identifier, definition and name even when you scroll to set additional
load case options.
Column re-ordering
Click and drag to change the order of the List view columns.
Load Case Editor context menu
Right-click any load case and insert a blank new load case above or below it, or delete
the selected load case without having to click outside of the list.
CAESAR II saves the grouping, filtering, and column re-ordering settings for the
current session only.
Group Edit View
A group (or bulk) editing view lets you select multiple load cases and make changes to
options all at once. For more information, see Editing Multiple Load Cases (on page 571).

Static Analysis
Editing Multiple Load Cases

Use the Group Edit view of the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor to update values on
multiple load cases at one time. This view saves you valuable time as you can make global
changes to load cases, rather than having to edit each load case individually.
To perform a group edit of multiple load cases
1. Open a CAESAR II job.
2. Run error checking or the analysis, and then select Static Analysis.
3. Click Group Edit in the upper-right corner of the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
From the Group Edit view of the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor, you can see the
Loads Defined in Input list, the existing load cases already defined for the job, and the
available options that you can globally change.
4. CTRL+click to select random load cases or SHIFT+click to select a group of load cases for
which you want to set options.
CAESAR II deactivates any boxes for options that already have differing values in the load
cases. The software immediately applies all changes made to the active boxes to the
selected load cases.
Building Static Load Cases

The CAESAR II load case editor combines native and combination loads as needed by the
various piping codes that CAESAR II supports.
This section describes which load cases to use in a variety of situations. If you need assistance
in load case definition for a situation not covered here, or if you need further clarification of the
load cases described, please contact ICAS Technical Support by e-mail at
caesarii@intergraph.com.
Standard load cases for B31.1, B31.3,B31.3 Chapter IX, ASME SECT III Class 2 & 3, NAVY
505, B31.4, B31.4 Chapter XI, B31.5, B31.8, B31.9, Canadian Z662, RCC-M C & D,
Stoomwezen, CODETI, Norwegian, FDBR, BS 806 piping codes are as follows:
Standard load cases for situations where you have weight, temperature, and pressure:
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+P1 (SUS)
L3 L1-L2 (EXP)*
* Use the algebraic combination method on the Load Cases tab for the expansion case.
Some of the piping codes perform a code stress check on the operating case and
some do not. For more information, see the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide for the
equations used by the various piping codes to obtain code stress and allowable stress.
The expansion case is a combination case that results from subtracting the sustained case from
the operating case. Because of this, the expansion case represents the change in the piping
system due to the effect of temperature, but in the presence of other loads. This is important
because the restraint status of the operating and sustained cases can be different if there are

Static Analysis
nonlinear restraints (such as +Y, -Z, any restraint with a gap, and so on) or boundary conditions
(such as friction).
Standard load cases for B31.4 Ch IX, B31.8 Ch VIII, and DNV codes:
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+P1 (SUS)
No expansion stress is calculated for these piping codes.

Standard load cases for BS7159 and UKOOA piping codes:
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
No expansion or sustained stress is calculated for these piping codes.
When you initially open the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box, the software
recommends three types of load cases, based on the loads defined in the model: Operating,
Sustained, and Expansion. The software does not recommend Occasional load cases.
Operating load cases represent the loads acting on the pipe during hot operation. These load
cases include primary loadings (weight pressure, and force), secondary loadings (displacements
and thermal expansions). Operating cases are used to find hot displacements for interference
checking, and to find hot restraint and equipment loads. CAESAR II combines weight, pressure
case, and hanger loads with each of the thermal load cases when recommending operating load
cases. For example, the software combines the first displacement set with the first thermal set,
the second displacement set with the second thermal set, and so on. Then, the software
combines any cold spring loads.
Sustained load cases represent the primary force-driven loadings acting on the pipe. This case
is weight and pressure alone. This usually coincides with the cold as-installed load case.
Sustained load cases are used to satisfy the code sustained stress requirements, as well as to
calculate as-installed restraint and equipment loads. Sustained load cases are generally built by
combining weight with each of the pressure and force sets, and then with any hanger loads.
Expansion load cases represent the range between the displacement extremes usually between
the operating and sustained cases. Expansion load cases are used to meet expansion stress
requirements. Generally, when you specify only one temperature and one pressure, the
recommended cases look similar to the following:
Case 1 W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE) Operating
Case 2 W+P1+H (SUS) Sustained load case
Case 3 L1-L2 (EXP) Expansion load case
Review any load recommendations made by CAESAR II.

CAESAR II does not recommend any occasional load cases. Definition of these is
your responsibility.

Static Analysis
If the recommended load cases do not satisfy the analysis requirements, you can delete or
modify them. Conversely, you can reset the load cases at any time to the software
recommended set.
If you have an operating temperature below ambient in addition to one above ambient you
should add another expansion load case as follows:
Case 1 W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE) Operating
Case 2 W+D2+T2 +P1+H (OPE) Operating
In the Classic Piping Input dialog box, click the Uniform Loads auxiliary panel and select the
in G's option. On the first element, type the seismic load in Gs. Enter the X-direction
acceleration in the Vector 1 box, the Y-direction acceleration in the Vector 2 box, and the
Z-direction acceleration in the Vector 3 box. This makes load case generation easier.
Because a seismic event is likely to occur while the piping system is in operation, an operating
case should have all operating loads plus the seismic load. This load case is then used with the
standard operating case to segregate the effect of the seismic load. The seismic load is then
combined with the static sustained load case for code compliance considerations.
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T1+P1+U1 (OPE)
L3 W+T1+P1-U1 (OPE)
L4 W+T1+P1+U2 (OPE)
L5 W+T1+P1-U2 (OPE)
L6 W+T1+P1+U3 (OPE)
L7 W+T1+P1-U3 (OPE)
L8 W+P1 (SUS)
L9 L1-L8 (EXP)

Static Analysis
L10 L2-L1 (OCC)
L11 L3-L1 (OCC)
L12 L4-L1 (OCC)
L13 L5-L1 (OCC)
L14 L6-L1 (OCC)
L15 L7-L1 (OCC)
L16 L8+L10 (OCC)
L17 L8+L11 (OCC)
L18 L8+L12 (OCC)
L19 L8+L13 (OCC)
L20 L8+L14 (OCC)
L21 L8+L15 (OCC)
Load cases 2 through 7 include all the loads and call these operating cases. The subtracted
uniform load vectors reverse the direction of the uniform load applied. Use these load case
results for occasional restraint loads and occasional displacements. Load cases 10 through 15
signify the segregated occasional loads. These are called occasional load cases, but you do not
need a code stress check here because these are only part of the final solution for code
compliance. Because of this, you can select the Suppress option for the Output Status. Also,
these combination load cases all use the Algebraic Combination Method on the Load Cases
tab. Load cases 16 through 21 are all used for code compliance. Add the segregated occasional
results to the sustained case results and use either the Scalar or ABS Absolute Value
Combination Method. Both scalar and absolute will give the same code stress results although
the displacements, forces, and moments could be different. Because you do not use any results
except the stresses for combination cases, it does not matter which combination method you
use.
Sometimes you want to combine the results of vertical g-loads with horizontal g-loads. A factor
is often applied to the vertical g-load component of the combined load. You can accomplish this
when you type the Uniform Load data on the Classic Piping Input dialog box for the vertical
component, or you can do this directly in the load case editor as shown below. Using the
previous example, combine .67 vertical g-load with each horizontal component.
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T1+P1+U1+0.67U2 (OPE)
L3 W+T1+P1-U1+0.67U2 (OPE)

Static Analysis
L4 W+T1+P1+U1-0.67U2 (OPE)
L5 W+T1+P1-U1-0.67U2 (OPE)
L6 W+T1+P1+U3+0.67U2 (OPE)
L7 W+T1+P1-U3+0.67U2 (OPE)
L8 W+T1+P1+U3-0.67U2 (OPE)
L9 W+T1+P1-U3-0.67U2 (OPE)
L10 W+P1 (SUS)
L11 L1-L10 (EXP)
L12 L2-L1 (OCC)
L13 L3-L1 (OCC)
L14 L4-L1 (OCC)
L15 L5-L1 (OCC)
L16 L6-L1 (OCC)
L17 L7-L1 (OCC)
L18 L8-L1 (OCC)
L19 L9-L1 (OCC)
L20 L10+L12 (OCC)
L21 L10+L13 (OCC)
L22 L10+L14 (OCC)
L23 L10+L15 (OCC)
L24 L10+L16 (OCC)
L25 L10+L17 (OCC)
L26 L10+L18 (OCC)
L27 L10+L19 (OCC)

Static Analysis
Sometimes you need to combine the horizontal and vertical components of seismic loading. You
can do this from the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor. Set up the static seismic load cases
as shown in the first example, then combine the segregated horizontal and vertical load cases
together using the SRSS Combination Method. Add these results to the sustained case.
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T1+P1+U1 (OPE)
L3 W+T1+P1-U1 (OPE)
L4 W+T1+P1+U2 (OPE)
L5 W+T1+P1-U2 (OPE)
L6 W+T1+P1+U3 (OPE)
L7 W+T1+P1-U3 (OPE)
L8 W+P1 (SUS)
L9 L1-L8 (EXP)
L10 L2-L1 (OCC) *
L11 L3-L1 (OCC) *
L12 L4-L1 (OCC) *
L13 L5-L1 (OCC) *
L14 L6-L1 (OCC) *
L15 L7-L1 (OCC) *
L16 L10+L12 (OCC) **
L17 L10+L13 (OCC) **
L18 L11+L12 (OCC) **
L19 L11+L13 (OCC) **
L20 L14+L12 (OCC) **
L21 L14+L13 (OCC) **
L22 L15+L12 (OCC) **
L23 L15+L13 (OCC) **

Static Analysis
L24 L8+L16 (OCC) ***
L25 L8+L17 (OCC) ***
L26 L8+L18 (OCC) ***
L27 L8+L19 (OCC) ***
L28 L8+L20 (OCC) ***
L29 L8+L21 (OCC) ***
L30 L8+L22 (OCC) ***
L31 L8+L23 (OCC) ***
* Use the algebraic combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
** Use the SRSS combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
*** Use the ABS or Scalar combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
Change the operating load cases that include seismic loads to OCC for piping codes
that do not perform a sustained code stress check. Use these cases for code compliance. The
combination cases are not needed in such cases.
CAESAR II must analyze two additional load cases to get the data required to select a variable
support, if you want to let the software design spring hangers. The two basic requirements for
sizing hangers are the deadweight carried by the hanger, which is hanger hot load, and the
range of vertical travel to be accommodated.
The first load case, traditionally called restrained weight, consists of only deadweight (W). For
this analysis, CAESAR II includes a rigid restraint in the vertical direction at every location where
a hanger is to be sized. The load on the restraint from this analysis is the deadweight that must
be carried by the support in the hot condition.
For the second load case, the hanger is replaced with an upward force equal to the calculated
hot load, and an operating load case is run. This load case, traditionally called free thermal,
includes the deadweight and thermal effects, the first pressure set if defined, and any
displacements, W+D1+T1+P1. The vertical displacements of the hanger locations, along with
the previously calculated deadweights, are then passed on to the hanger selection routine. After
the hangers are sized, the added forces are removed and replaced with the selected supports
along with their pre-loads cold loads designated by load component, H. Load component H can
appear in the load cases for hanger design if you have predefined any springs. In this case, it
would represent the pre-defined operating loads.
CAESAR II then continues with the load case recommendations as defined above. A typical set
of recommended load cases for a single operating load case spring hanger design is as follows:
Case 1 W Weight for hanger loads

Static Analysis
Case 2 W+D1+T1+P1 Operating for hanger travel
Case 3 W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE) Operating, hangers included
These hanger sizing load Cases 1 and 2 generally supply no information to the output reports
other than the data found in the hanger tables. Cases 3, 4, and 5 match the recommended load
cases for a standard analysis with one thermal and one pressure defined. The displacement
combination numbers in Case 5 have changed to reflect the new order. If multiple temperatures
and pressures existed in the input, they too would appear in this set after the second spring
hanger design load case.
Two other hanger design criteria also affect the recommended load cases. If the actual cold
loads for selected springs are to be calculated, one additional load case, WNC+H, would appear
before Case 3. If the hanger design criteria of the piping system are set so that the proposed
springs must accommodate more than one operating condition, other load cases must appear
before Case 3 above. You must perform an extra hanger design operating load case for each
additional operating load case used to design springs. See Load Cases with Hanger Design (on
page 578) for more information on these options.
When CAESAR II designs spring hangers, two additional load cases are required. The letter H
designates the hanger installation load (pre-load) that is always present in a spring hanger.
L1 W (HGR) *HS = Rigid
L2 W+T1+P1 (HGR) *HS = Ignore
L3 W+T1+P1+H (OPE) *HS = As Designed
L4 W+P1+H (SUS) *HS = As Designed
L5 L3-L4 (EXP) **
*HS is the hanger stiffness specified in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
** Use the algebraic combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
When you use only predefined spring hangers, there is no need for the first two load cases.
However, the letter H is still required in the operating and sustained load cases. Other hanger
load cases are required when you use multiple load case design. In such instances, let
CAESAR II recommend the load cases. You can then add or edit the non-hanger design load
cases as necessary.

Static Analysis
There is often platform movement, or relative movement, between two platforms with
inter-connected piping, in an offshore piping system. This also applies to FSPO and other
shipboard piping systems. Apply the pitch and roll displacements to CNodes on each affected
restraint. Use displacement vectors not already in use to describe thermal displacement
boundary conditions. There is usually a + displacement and a - displacement to describe the
peak pitch and roll conditions. Look at the state of the platform at its peaks to determine the
worst two conditions for relative displacement between piping separated by the largest distance
along the line of wave travel. D3 and D4 describe two peak pitch conditions. D1 is a thermal
displacement.
L1 W+T1+D1+D3+P1 (OPE)
L3 W+P1 (SUS)
L4 L1-L3 (EXP) *
L5 L2-L3 (EXP) *
* Use the algebraic combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
It is likely that you will want to perform a fatigue analysis because of the large number of
displacement cycles common in pitch and roll situations. Select the appropriate fatigue curve on
the first piping input under the Allowable Stress area on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Add the following cases to the previous example. Enter the number of cycles for each pitch
condition for fatigue stress type (FAT).
L6 L1-L3 (FAT) 21000000
L7 L2-L3 (FAT) 21000000
The 21000000 represents 21 million load cycles during the life of the piping system. Use the
number of cycles that you would expect to occur during the life of such a storm for large
displacements, such as those that occur during a 1-year, 30-year, or 100-year event. Multiply
this number by the number storms likely to happen during the lifetime of the piping system.

Static Analysis
Thermal displacements are generally associated with specific operating conditions. D1 is

applied with T1, D2 to T2, and so on. When one temperature is below ambient, and one is
above ambient, you can determine the full expansion stress range.
L1 W+T1+D1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T2+D2+P1 (OPE)
L3 W+P1 (SUS)
L4 L1-L3 (EXP) * effects of D1 and T1
L5 L2-L3 (EXP) * effects of D2 and T2
L6 L1-L2 (EXP) * full expansion stress

range
* Use the algebraic combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box.
Include the thermal displacements in the operating cases as shown for piping codes
with no expansion stress computation.
Use a CNode for settlement on any affected restraints. This CNode must be a node number that
is not used elsewhere in the model. Place the settlement on the CNode using a displacement
vector that is not already used for thermal displacements. This example uses D3 to describe
restraint settlement.
L3 W+P1 (SUS)
L4 W+P2 (SUS)
L5 L1-L3 (EXP) * effects of D1 and T1 and

settlement
L6 L2-L4 (EXP) * effects of D2 and T2 and

settlement
L7 L1-L2 (EXP) * full expansion stress range

between OPE1 and OPE2
Settlement is evaluated as an expansion load because it is strain related with a half-cycle.

Static Analysis
* Include the thermal and settlement displacements in the operating cases as shown for piping
codes with no expansion stress computation.
Understanding Alternate Sustained (SUS) and Occasional

(OCC) Load Cases
CAESAR II includes a designation for static load cases called an alternate load case. The B31.3
2014 code edition merged the requirements of the previous Appendix P into the main body of
the standard. This appendix related to stresses due to sustained loads. Because of this change,
CAESAR II was modified to address these additional sustained conditions using the alternate
support condition.
You can also associate a related alternate Sustained (SUS) or alternate occasional (OCC) load
case that uses the restraint status from the previous Operating (OPE) load case by selecting
Alternate SUS/OCC in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor. CAESAR II uses the stiffness
values from the OPE case to create the alternate SUS or OCC load case. In addition, the
software disables all load case options that are not applicable on the alternate SUS or OCC load
case.
B31.3 does not reference an alternate SUS or an alternate OCC load case. However, CAESAR
II provides both alternate SUS and alternate OCC because SUS and OCC stresses are both
force-based and you may find a need for a similar approach for OCC.
Use this functionality in systems where supports are active in some conditions and inactive in
others (such as pipes lifting off supports). In these situations, the changing distribution of
sustained loads may influence the difference in strains. The software bases the displacement
strain range on the algebraic difference between the calculated positions of the pipe that define
the range. In addition to the displacement strain, each calculated position includes the sustained
loads present in the condition under evaluation.
The load case generates primary stress corresponding to the restraint configuration for the
previous operating (OPE) load case. However, the alternate sustained (SUS) or alternate
occasional (OCC) load case is not a valid structural representation of the system. When using
the alternate SUS or alternate OCC cases, keep the following in mind:
These alternate cases determine the stress and the consideration of this stress state in
determining the expansion stress range.
Do not use the restraint loads from an alternate SUS or alternate OCC load case as it is not
a true structural representation of the system. CAESAR II does not generate restraint
reports for alternate SUS and alternate OCC load cases.
Do not use an alternate SUS or alternate OCC load case when performing dynamic
analysis. Instead, use the corresponding operating case to get the support configuration.
Use one of the two new load case templates (.tpl files) when recommending load cases.
These templates include support for alternate SUS and alternate OCC load cases. for more
information, see Load Case Template (on page 66).
Alternate SUS provides a simple method to meet the requirements of equation (1b) for the
liberal allowable expansion stress range. If you use equation (1a), sustained stress does not
affect the allowable expansion stress range.

Static Analysis
While alternate SUS properly sets the expansion stress allowable limit in equation (1b), alternate
OCC only affects the SUS+OCC load case. You may want to use the following load case stress
types:
L1: OPE (Operating case)
L2: Alternate SUS (Using the L1 operating support configuration)
L3: SUS (Standard sustained case with supports set by sustained loads alone)
L4: OPE (Operating case, or consider including OCC occasional loads)
L5: Alternate OCC (Using the L4 operating support configuration)
L6: EXP (Expansion case, defined as L1-L3)
L7: SUS (Maximum of L2 and L3, to sum with OCC using the Max combination method)
L8: OCC (L7+L5, using the Scalar combination method)
For more information, see Stress Type (on page 591) and Combination Method (on page 595).
For more information on loading conditions and support scenarios that result in the greatest
sustained load (SL) for each operating condition, see Appendix S, Example S302, in the B31.3
code standard.
Providing Wind Data

If you specify the wind shape factor in the Classic Piping Input dialog box, CAESAR II lists
WIN1, WIN2, WIN3 and WIN4 as available loads in Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog
box. Because the software requires additional information to make an analysis, CAESAR II
activates the Wind Loads tab so that you can define the required wind load data.

Static Analysis
You can specify up to four different wind load profiles. Omit any of them to exclude the data from
the analysis. CAESAR II supports thirteen wind codes. For more information, see Wind Loads
Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 600).
You can use the following wind codes to generate wind loads on piping systems. Refer to the
CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide for details on which versions of each code that CAESAR II
supports.
ASCE 7 IS 875
AS/NZS 1170.0 Mexico
Brazil NBR 6123 NBC
BS 6399-2 UBC
China GB 50009 Wind Pressure vs Elevation (user defined)
EN 1991-1-4 Wind Velocity vs Elevation (user defined)
IBC

Static Analysis
Providing Wave Data

If you specify the hydrodynamic coefficients in Classic Piping Input dialog box, CAESAR II lists
WAV1, WAV2, WAV3 and WAV4 as available loads in Static Analysis (Load Case Editor).
Because the software requires additional information to make an analysis, CAESAR II activates
the Wave Loads tab so that you can define the extra wave load data.
You can specify up to four different wave load profiles. Current data and wave data can be
specified and included together. Omit either of them to exclude the data from the analysis.
CAESAR II supports three current models and six wave models. For more information, see
Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 619).
Running the Static Analysis

The static analysis performed by CAESAR II follows the regular finite element solution routine.
The software combines element stiffnesses to form a global system stiffness matrix. Each basic
load case defines a set of loads for the ends of all the elements. These elemental load sets are
combined into system load vectors. Using the relationship of force equals stiffness times
displacement (F=KX), the software can calculate unknown system deflections and rotations. The
known deflections however, may change during the analysis as hanger sizing, nonlinear
supports, and friction all affect both the stiffness matrix and load vectors.
CAESAR II uses the root solution from this equation, the system-wide deflections and rotations,
with the element stiffnesses to determine the global (X, Y, Z) forces and moments at the end of
each element. The software translates these forces and moments into a local coordinate system
for the element from which it calculates the code-defined stresses. Forces and moments on
anchors, restraints, and fixed displacement points are summed to balance all global forces and
moments entering the node. Algebraic combinations of the basic load cases pick up this process
where appropriate at the displacement, force and moment, or stress level.

Static Analysis
After the software completes the setup for the solution, it repeats the calculation of the
displacements and rotations for each of the basic load cases. During this step, the software
displays the Incore Solver dialog box.
This dialog box serves as a monitor of the static analysis. The upper-left portion of the dialog
box reflects the job size by listing the number of equations to be solved and the bandwidth of the
matrix that holds these equations. Multiplying the number of equations by the bandwidth gives a
relative indication of the job size. This area also lists the current load case and the total number
of basic load cases the software has to analyze and solve. The iteration count, as well as the
current case number, shows how much work the software has completed. Load cases with
nonlinear restraints can require several solutions or iterations before the software confirms the
changing assumptions about the restraint configuration, such as resting or lifting off, active or
inactive, and so on.
In the lower-left corner of the Incore Solver dialog box are two bar graphs that indicate where
the program is in an individual solution. These bar graphs illustrate the speed of the solution. By
checking the data in this first box, you have an idea of how much longer to wait for the results.
The right side of the Incore Solver dialog box also provides information regarding the status of
nonlinear restraints and hangers in the job. For example, the software displays messages noting
the number of restraints that have yet to converge or any hangers that appear to be taking no
load here. You can step through nonlinear restraint status on an individual basis by pressing the
F2 through F4 keys.
After the analysis of the system deflections and rotations, the software post-processes the
results to calculate the local forces, moments, and stresses for the basic load cases and all
results for the algebraic combinations (for example L1-L2). CAESAR II stores the total system
results in a file with the suffix _P (for example, TUTOR._P).

Static Analysis
The _A (or input file), the _P (or output file), and the OTL (Output Time Link file) are
all that are required to archive the static analysis. The remaining scratch files can be deleted
without any impact on the completed work.
During this post-processing, the Status frame lists the element for which the forces and stresses
are being calculated. After the software calculates the last stresses of an element, the output
processor dialog box displays. Use this dialog box to review the graphic and tabular results of
the analysis. For more information on interactive processing of output results, see Dynamic
Input and Analysis.
Controlling Results
CAESAR II allows you to specify whether the software retains any or all of the load case results
for review in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor through two options: Output Status (on
page 594) and Output Type (on page 594). This helps ensure that the results you find most
meaningful are the ones the software displays.
Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box

Controls options for static analysis.
After error-checking your model, specify your static load cases using the Edit Static Load
Cases command, which is only available after you have successfully error checked the
piping input file.
The Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box lists many details about the input, including
the following:
Available loads that are defined in the input.
Available stress types.
Current load cases offered for analysis.

Static Analysis
CAESAR II lists recommended load cases if the job is entering static analysis for the first time.
The list displays loads saved during the last session if the job has been run previously.
Save
Saves the load case and environmental data file. For more information, see Save (on page
254).
Analyze load cases

Runs the static analysis.
Load Cases Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 587)
Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 600)
Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 619)
See Also
Working with Load Cases (on page 570)
Building Static Load Cases (on page 571)
Load Cases Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog

Box)
Controls options for editing load cases. You can define up to 999 load cases. Click a row in the
list to edit the load case properties. You must specify all basic (non-combination) load sets
before you can declare any algebraic combinations. This is true for both user-defined and edited
load cases.
Select combination methods and other specifics pertaining to the load case in the grid.
Drag a basic load in the Loads Defined in Input pane to a load definition in the grid to create
an algebraic combination case. CAESAR II prompts you for the combination type when
necessary.
You can change the Stress Type value by clicking in the box and then selecting a different
value from the list. Stress type determines the stress calculation method and the allowable
stress to use.
Add a load case

Inserts a blank line following the selected load case line in the list. If you do not select a row,
the software adds the load case at the end of the list.
You can also:
Right-click > Insert Before to insert a blank line before the selected load case line in the
list.

Static Analysis
Right-click > Insert After to insert a blank line following the selected load case line in
the list.
Delete a load case

Deletes one or more selected load cases from the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
SHIFT-click to select multiple adjacent rows. CTRL-click to select multiple non-adjacent
rows.
When you delete a load case, any dependent load cases (combination load cases affected
by its removal) are either deleted or revised. The software deletes the entire dependent load
case if it only contains two primitives. However, for combination load cases with three or
more primitives, the software modifies the load case to remove only the applicable primitive.
When you delete an operating (OPE) load case, an alternate sustained or occasional load
case based on the operating case (SUS or OCC, with Alternate SUS/OCC selected) is also
deleted.
Review and confirm the load cases that will be deleted or revised in the Load Case Delete
Confirmation window. The Revision column displays the action to be performed for each
load case. After reviewing the load cases, press Delete to complete the process.
You can also right-click > Delete.
Recommend load cases

Replaces the current load cases with the CAESAR II recommended load cases.
Import load cases

Copies the load cases from a file. The units and load types of the copied file must match
those of the current file. You can import .c2 or ._J files.
Import Excel File
Copies the load cases from a Microsoft Excel .xlsx file. The units and load types of the
copied file must match those of the current file. Click the Import load cases flyout to
display this option.

Static Analysis
The fields of the.xlsx file must match the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor fields.
The software provides a template file, SLCE_Template.xltx, in the
C:\\ProgramData\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\<current version>\System\templates
folder.
Export to Microsoft Excel File

Exports the load cases to a Microsoft Excel .xlsx file. You can use the file to import load
cases into another model.
By default, the software saves the .xlsx file in the same folder as the piping
model. You can change the folder.
Group Edit
Edits groups of load cases. For more information, see Editing Multiple Load Cases (on page
571).
To return to the load case grid, click List.
Filter
Provides options to filter load cases. Click for the required column and select the filter
options.
You can copy and paste one or more rows in the grid to create new load cases. Click the line
number in the left-most column of the grid (such as L1) to select a row. SHIFT-click to select
multiple continuous rows. CTRL-click to select multiple non-continuous rows.
Copy
Copies one or more selected rows to the clipboard.
You can also right-click > Copy or press CTRL-C.
Paste > Paste Copied

Pastes one or more copied rows at the selected row, also overwriting the selected and
following rows.
You can also right-click > Paste > Paste Copied or press CTRL-V.
Paste > Insert Copied

Pastes one or more copied rows at the selected row, inserting the copied rows above the
selected rows. When you select multiple rows, the software inserts the copied rows above
the first selected row.
You can also right-click > Paste > Insert Copied or press CTRL-I.
You can copy data from an Excel .xlsx file.

You can reorder the columns in the list, but you cannot copy, change the column order, and
then try to paste in the new order. If you reorder columns, you must copy again in the new
column order, and then paste.

Static Analysis
You can copy non-continuous rows. The software pastes the rows as continuous rows.
If you filter the load cases, you can copy one or more rows, but you cannot paste until you
clear the filter.
When you define a fatigue (FAT) stress type for a load case, you must enter the number of
anticipated Load Cycles for that load case or the software prompts you before analysis.
When you delete load cases, the software automatically renumbers all subsequent load
cases.
Displays the Recommended Load Cases dialog box. CAESAR II suggests the load cases that
you should run to satisfy the basic requirements of the piping codes. You can then choose to run
the load cases as recommended, or you can modify them to meet your requirements. Click Yes
to accept the recommended load cases (which you can later edit), or No to return to the Static
Analysis dialog box.
Displays a list of load cases that CAESAR II recommends to satisfy the expansion and
sustained code compliance requirements. You can choose to run the load cases as presented,
or you can modify the cases to meet your requirements.
Imports load cases from a CAESAR II file.

Make sure the units match between the two jobs files prior to importing. When you
import load cases from another job, you must verify the load case values, wind data, and wave
data to ensure data integrity.
Displays the load types available in the model input. For example, if T2 displays on the list then
the model has defined Operating Temperature 2. If T2 does not display then the model does
not include a second operating temperature.
The load types that can be defined are:
W - Weight including pipe, fluid, and insulation.
WW - Weight including pipe, water filled, and insulation.
WNC - Weight with no contents. Includes pipe and insulation.
T1 - Operating temperature 1.
T2 - T9 - Additional operating temperatures 2 through 9.
P1 - Operating pressure 1.
P2 - P9 - Additional operating pressures 2 through 9.
HP - Hydrostatic pressure.
F1 - Concentrated force vector 1.

Static Analysis
F2 - F9 - Additional force vectors 2 through 9.

D1 - Displacement vector 1.
D2 - D9 - Additional displacement vectors 2 through 9.
U1 - Uniform load vector 1.
U2 - U3 - Additional uniform load vectors 2 through 3.
WIN1 - Wind load vector 1
WIN2 - WIN4 - Additional wind load vectors 2 through 4.
WAV1 - Wave load vector 1.
WAV2 - WAV4 - Additional wave load vectors 2 through 4.
CS - cold spring, material 18 or 19.
H - Hanger initial loads.
Shows the current load cases offered for analysis. You can build load cases by dragging
components from the Loads Defined in Input list and dropping them on the Definition box or
by typing in the values.
Click the Definition box to edit the load case definition. You can only enter the load components
as they are listed in the Loads Defined in Input list. The options you select in the piping input
determine what load case values appear in this list.
For more information, see Building Static Load Cases (on page 571).
Describes the CAESAR II load case. Specify your own names or labels for CAESAR II load case
definitions, which you can use for identification purposes when you review the output. Clear the
box to display the CAESAR II load case definition name.
Load case names cannot exceed 132 characters.
These user-defined load case names appear in the Load Case Report. For more information,
see Controlling Results (on page 586). You can use these names in place of the default load
case definition name anywhere in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box.
Displays the stress types. The stress type applies to the load cases. It defines how the element
stresses and allowables are computed. The available stress types are:
OPE
Operating case. For B31.1 and B31.3 (and similar codes) this case is not a code compliance
case. The software does not report allowable stresses.
SUS
Sustained case.

Static Analysis
EXP
Expansion case.
OCC
Occasional case.
FAT
Fatigue case.
You must also specify the number of Load Cycles (on page 593) for load cases
with a FAT stress type.
HGR
Spring hanger design case. These are load cases that CAESAR II uses internally to design
and select spring hangers. Results are not available for these cases.
HYD
Hydro test case. Select hanger status. For a hydrotest case, the default hanger status is
rigid or locked.
CRP
Creep case. Code standards such as EN-13480 define a creep stress range for operating
conditions, which is defined by the life of the material. In CAESAR II, CRP is a scalar
combination of one SUS case and one EXP case. The software sets Output Type (on page
594) to Stress.
CAESAR II calculates CRP stresses according to EN-13480. If you specify additional load
multipliers, the software applies these as additional scale factors. Other codes also use the
EN-13480 method. For more information, see Creep Loading (on page 1012).
You must manually add a CRP case.

The default combination method is Scalar. You can also set Combination Method (on
page 595) to MAX.
K1P
KHK Level 1 (seismic code) primary longitudinal stress for the HPGSL and JPI piping codes.
The longitudinal stress is due to pressure, weight, and design seismic force.
The software treats this stress type as OCC for other piping codes.
K1SR
KHK Level 1 (seismic code) secondary cyclic stress range for the HPGSL and JPI piping
codes. The cyclic stress range is due to design force and support movement.
The software treats this stress type as EXP for other piping codes.
K2P
KHK Level 2 (seismic code) primary longitudinal stress for the HPGSL and JPI piping codes.
The longitudinal stress is due to internal pressure, weight, seismic force, and response
displacement.
The software treats this stress type as OCC for other piping codes.

Static Analysis
K2SA
KHK Level 2 (seismic code) secondary cyclic stress amplitude for the HPGSL and JPI piping
codes. The cyclic stress amplitude is due to seismic force and response displacement.
K2SR
KHK Level 2 (seismic code) secondary cyclic stress range for the HPGSL and JPI piping
codes. The cyclic stress range is due to seismic force and response displacement.
K2L
KHK Level 2 (seismic code) liquefaction for the HPGSL and JPI piping codes. Liquefaction
is the angular displacement corresponding to a maximum equivalent plastic strain of 5% (in
degrees).
Indicates that the load case is an alternate sustained (SUS) or alternate occasional (OCC) load
case. An alternate SUS/OCC load case is associated with the preceding operating (OPE) load
case.
Due to changes in the B31.3 code for the 2014 edition, the primary stress in each position of the
piping system must be evaluated. An alternate SUS/OCC load case uses the restraint status
from the previous OPE load case to evaluate the stresses induced by primary loads.
When you create a load case that follows an OPE load case and select a Stress Type of SUS
or OCC, the software displays the Alternate SUS/OCC check box, which you can select to
indicate that the case is an alternate SUS or alternate OCC load case.
CAESAR II displays the number of the related OPE load case when you select Alternate
SUS/OCC.
For more information, see Understanding Alternate Sustained (SUS) and Occasional (OCC)
Load Cases (on page 581).
Indicates the anticipated number of applications of this load on the system for load cases using
the Expansion (EXP) or Fatigue (FAT) stress types. The software uses this value to determine
the allowable stress from the fatigue curve for the material or the cyclic reduction factor for an
Expansion case. For static cases, the software calculates stresses at full range. For dynamic
cases, the software calculates stresses at half range, which is the amplitude of the full stress
range.
For load cases with an Expansion (EXP) stress type, you can enter a value of 1 in the Load
Cycles field (for B31.1 jobs) to indicate that the stress range is caused by noncyclic movements.
In this situation, the software replaces the allowable stress range value (Sa) with a special
noncyclic allowable calculation, as per the B31.1 code standard. The software continues to
calculate the displacement stress range (Se) as defined by the applicable piping code.

Static Analysis
Controls the disposition of the load case results. The available options are Keep or Suppress.
Use Keep when the load case is producing results that you want to review. The default for
all new cases (except for HGR load cases) is Keep.
Use Suppress for artificial cases such as the preliminary hanger cases, or intermediate
construction cases. Load cases used for hanger design, that is, the weight load case and
hanger travel cases designated with the stress type HGR, must be designated as
Suppress.
For example, a wind only load case could be designated as Suppress because it was built only
to be used in subsequent combinations and has no value as a standalone load case. For all load
cases created under previous versions of CAESAR II, all load cases except the HGR cases are
converted as Keep.
Designates the type of results available for load cases that have a Keep status. Use this field to
help minimize clutter on the output and to ensure that only meaningful results are retained. The
available options are:
Disp/Force/Stress
Provides displacements, restraint loads, global and local forces, and stresses. This is a
good choice for operating cases where you are designing to a code which does a code
check on operating stresses, because the load case is of interest for interference checking
(displacements) and restraint loads at one operating extreme (forces).
Disp/Force
Provides displacements restraint loads, global and local forces. This is a good choice for
OPE cases where you are designing for those codes which do not do a code check on OPE
stresses.
Disp/Stress
Provides displacements and stresses only.
Force/Stress
Provides restraint loads, global and local forces, and stresses. This is a good choice for the
Sustained (cold) case, because the load case would be of interest for restraint loads at one
operating extreme (forces), and code compliance (stresses). FR combination loads cases
developed under previous versions of CAESAR II are converted with this force/stress type.
Disp
Provides displacements only.
Force
Provides restraint loads, global, and local forces only.
Stress
Provides stresses only. This is a good choice for a sustained plus occasional load case (with
Abs combination method), because this is an artificial construct used for code stress
checking purposes. ST combination load cases developed under previous versions of

Static Analysis
CAESAR II are converted with this stress type.
Specifies the combination method to use for combination cases only. Load cases to combine
are designated as L1, L2, and so on. Select the combination method from the list.
Load case results are multiplied by any associated scale factors before performing
the combination and comparison.
The available methods are:
Algebraic
Indicates a signed algebraic combination of displacement and force level. This method
combines the displacement vectors and the force vectors algebraically and then calculates
the stresses from the combined forces. Displacements are the algebraic combination of the
displacement vectors. Forces are the algebraic combination of the force vectors. Stresses
are not combined. Stresses are calculated from the algebraically combined forces. The
Algebraic method would typically be used to calculate EXP code stresses.
The obsolete CAESAR II combination methods DS and FR used an Algebraic combination
method. Therefore, load cases built in previous versions of CAESAR II using the DS and FR
methods are converted to the Algebraic method. Also, new combination cases automatically
default to this method, unless you change them.
Algebraic combinations can be built only from basic load cases. Basic load cases are
non-combination load cases or other load cases built using the Algebraic combination
method.
Scalar
Indicates a signed combination of displacement, force, and stress level. This method
combines the displacement vectors, force vectors, and stress scalars. Displacements are
the algebraic combination of the displacement vectors. Forces are the algebraic combination
of the force vectors. Stresses are the scalar combination of the stress scalars.
The combination of displacements and forces are the same for ALG and Scalar methods.
The combinations of stress levels are different between ALG and Scalar methods because
the stresses are calculated from the combined forces in the ALG method and summed in the
Scalar method.
For example:
Load Case 1: bending stress = 100 psi, due to X-moment
Load Case 2: bending stress - 100 psi, due to Z-moment
Algebraic (vectorial) sum = square root of (100*100 + 100*100) = 141.4 psi
Scalar sum = 100 + 100 = 200 psi
Scalar is typically used to sum (SUS + OCC) code stresses.
The obsolete CAESAR II combination methods ST used a Scalar combination method.
Therefore, load cases built in previous versions of CAESAR II using the ST method are
converted to the Scalar method.
SRSS
Indicates a combination of the square root of the sum of the squares of quantities, such as
the displacements of the forces or the stresses. Displacements are the square root of the
sum of the squares of the displacements of all cases included in the combination. Forces

Static Analysis
are the square root of the sum of the squares of the forces of all cases included in the
combination. Stresses are the square root of the sum of the squares of the stresses of all
cases included in the combination. This method is typically used to combine seismic
directional components.
ABS
Indicates a combination of the absolute values of quantities, such as the displacements, the
forces, or the stresses. Displacements are the sum of the absolute value of the
displacements of all cases included in the combination. Forces are the sum of the absolute
value of the forces of all cases included in the combination. Stresses are the sum of the
absolute value of the stresses of all cases included in the combination. This method is
typically used to combine SUS cases with OCC cases for occasional stress code check.
For flange checks that use the ABS load case combination method (specified in CAESAR II
piping input), the software uses the following calculated (local) values:
The axial force and torsion, which is the absolute sum of these values from all load
cases included the combination.
The bending moment, which is the sum of resultant bending moments from all load
cases included in the combination.
The flange pressure, which is the maximum pressure defined in the load cases included in
the combination.
MAX
Indicates a combination that reports the maximum displacement, the maximum force, and
the maximum stress value of the cases combined. This method retains the original sign.
Displacements are the displacements having the maximum absolute values of all the load
cases included in the combination. Forces are the forces having the maximum absolute
values of all the load cases included in the combination. Stresses are the stresses having
the maximum absolute values of all the load cases included in the combination. This method
is typically used to report the greatest restraint loads from among a selected set of load
cases.
For flange checks that use the MAX load case combination method (specified in CAESAR II
piping input), the software uses the following calculated (local) values:
The axial force and torsion, which is the maximum magnitude of these values from all
load cases included the combination.
The bending moment, which is the maximum resultant bending moment from all load
cases included in the combination.
The flange pressure, which is the maximum pressure defined in the load cases included in
the combination.
MIN
Indicates a combination that reports the minimum displacement, the minimum force, and the
minimum stress value of the cases combined. This method retains the original sign.
Displacements are the displacements having the minimum absolute values of all the load
cases included in the combination. Forces are the forces having the minimum absolute
values of all the load cases included in the combination. Stresses are the stresses having
the minimum absolute values of all the load cases included in the combination.
SIGNMAX

Static Analysis
Indicates a combination that reports the maximum displacement, the maximum force, and
the maximum stress value of the cases combined. The sign is considered in the
comparison. Displacements are the maximum signed values of all the displacements from
each case included in the combination. Forces are the maximum signed values of all the
forces from each case included in the combination. Stresses are the maximum signed
values of all the stresses from each case included in the combination. This method is
typically used in conjunction with SignMin to report the envelope of restrain loads from
among a selected set of load cases.
SIGNMIN
Indicates a combination that reports the minimum displacement, the minimum force, and the
minimum stress value of the cases combined. The sign is considered in the comparison.
Displacements are the minimum signed values of all the displacements from each case
included in the combination. Forces are the minimum signed values of all the forces from
each case included in the combination. Stresses are the minimum signed values of all the
stresses from each case included in the combination. This method is typically used in
conjunction with SignMax to report the envelope of restraint loads from among a selected
set of load cases.
Indicates whether snubbers are active. Select the check box to indicate that snubbers are
considered to be rigid restraints for the load case. By default, Occasional (OCC) load cases
activate this option while other types of load cases clear this option.
Specifies the hanger stiffness for the load case. The three options are: As Designed, Rigid,
and Ignore.
As Designed
Causes the software to consider the actual spring hanger stiffnesses. Use this option for
most real (non-hanger design) load cases.
Rigid
Causes the software to model the spring hangers as rigid restraints. Use this option for
restrained weight cases and hydrotest cases if the spring hangers are pinned.
Ignore
Causes the software to remove the spring hanger stiffnesses from the model. Use this
option for hanger travel cases, unless you want to include the stiffness of the selected spring
in the operating for hanger travel case and iterate to a solution. In that case, select As
Designed. You must also adjust the hanger load in the cold case (in the physical system) to
match the reported hanger cold load.
User-defined hangers are not made rigid during restrained weight cases.

Static Analysis
Designates use of Cold (EC) or any of the nine (EH1-EH9) hot elastic moduli to determine
results on a per-load-case basis.
EC
Cold elastic modulus.
EH1
Hot elastic modulus corresponding to T1.
EH2 - EH9
Hot elastic modulus corresponding to T2 through T9.
Specifies the pressure used to determine the modifiers for the SIF and k factors on a
per-load-case basis.
Pmax
Maximum of P1 through P9.
None
No pressure stiffening for the elbow.
P1 - P9
Operating pressures 1 through 9.
Phydro
Hydrostatic pressure.
Specifies the elastic modulus is used to determine the modifiers for the SIF and k factors on a
per-load-case basis.
EC
Cold elastic modulus.
EH1 - EH9
Hot elastic modulus corresponding to T1 through T9.

Static Analysis
Designates the use of a hot allowable stress (Sh) to determine the results on a per-load case
basis. Use this option for sustained (SUS) and occasional (OCC) load cases.
Sh_min
Minimum of Sh1 through Sh9.
Sh1 - Sh9
Hot allowable stresses corresponding to T1 through T9.
The SUS Case Sh option applies only to B31.3 2010 Edition codes and later.
Specifies the multiplier of friction factors used in this particular load case. The friction factor (Mu)
used at each restraint is this multiplier times the Mu factor at each restraint. Set this value to
zero to deactivate friction for this load case.
Displays/overrides the Occasional load factor defined in the configuration. The default value
changes according to the piping code and the frequency of occurrence.
ISO-14962
Occasional load factors are defined differently for different load cases (Operating,
Sustained, Occasional, and Hydrotest). The default occasional load factors for these load
cases are:
1.0
Sustained load cases
1.25
Operating load cases
1.33
Occasional and Hydrotest cases
The Occasional load factor and the System design factor from the Allowable Stress dialog
box are multiplied together to generate the Part Factor for Loading (f2) as defined in
ISO-14692. As an example, using a default system design factor of 0.67 with the above default
occasional load factors results in the following default values for the part factor for loading:
Load Case System Design Occasional Load Part Factor for

Type Factor Factor Loading
Sustained (SUS) 0.67 1.00 0.67
Operating (OPE) 0.67 1.24 0.83
Occasional (OCC) 0.67 1.33 0.89

Static Analysis
Hydrotest (HYD) 0.67 1.33 0.89
Specifies the temperature used to determine the flange allowable.

None
No flange analysis.
T1 - T9
Operating temperatures 1 through 9.
Tmax
Maximum of T1 through T9.
TAmb
Ambient temperature.
Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog

Box)
Controls options for wind loads. For more information, see the input descriptions for this tab or
Wind Loads (on page 990).
Specifies the wind case to edit. The first box indicates the active wind case. The second box
displays the total number of defined cases.
Specifies the wind code or one of the user-defined (velocity or pressure) profiles. The software
updates the dialog box depending on the selection you choose. For more information, see the
specific wind code options or Wind Loads (on page 990).
See Also
ASCE 7 Wind Code Options (on page 601)
AS/NZS 1170 Wind Code Options (on page 603)
BS-6399-2 Wind Code Options (on page 605)
Brazil NBR 6123 Wind Code Options (on page 607)
China GB 50009 Wind Code Options (on page 609)
EN Wind Code Options (on page 609)
IBC/UBC Wind Code Options (on page 610)
IS 875 Wind Code Options (on page 612)
Mexico Wind Code Options (on page 614)
NBC Wind Code Options (on page 616)
Wind Pressure/Velocity vs. Elevation (User-Defined) (on page 618)

Static Analysis
Basic Wind Speed Specifies the three-second gust speed at 33 ft. (10 m.) above ground for
Exposure C category as determined according to Section 6.5.6.3.
According to ASCE 7, the following are typical basic wind-speed values:
California and West Coast Areas -124.6 ft./sec. (85 mph)
Rocky Mountains - 132.0 ft./sec (90 mph)
Great Plains - 132.0 ft./sec (90 mph)
Non-Coastal Eastern United States -132.0 ft./sec (90 mph)
Gulf Coast - 190.6 ft./sec (130 mph)
Florida-Carolinas - 190.6 ft./sec (130 mph)
Miami - 212.6 ft./sec (145 mph)
New England Coastal Areas - 176.0 ft./sec (120 mph)
Wind Exposure
Specifies the wind exposure. This value is the exposure category that adequately reflects
the characteristics of ground surface irregularities. The ASCE 7 code standard (found in
ASCE 7 2005, Section 6.5.6.3 and ASCE 7 2010, Section 26.7.3) defines exposure
categories as follows:
B or 2 - Exposure B. Urban, suburban, and wooded areas, prevailing. For upwind distance
requirements, refer to the code standard.
C or 3 - Exposure C. All cases where exposures B and D do not apply.
D or 4 - Exposure D. Flat coastal areas, prevailing. Urban, suburban, wooded, or open
terrain areas with scattered obstructions. For upwind or downwind requirements, refer to the
code standard.
See ASCE 7 2005 (Section 6.5. 6.3) and ASCE 7 2010 (Section 26.7.3) for
any exceptions on wind exposures.
Structural Damping Coeff.
Specifies the structural damping coefficient. This value is the percentage of critical damping
and is used to calculate the gust factor for the wind load calculations.
Structural Classification
Specifies the classification of buildings and structures based on the type of occupancy.
ASCE 7-2005 Table 1-1, classification is as follows:
1 - Category I - Failure represents low hazard.
2 - Category II - All structures except 1, 3, and 4.
3 - Category III - Primary occupancy more than 300 people.
4 - Category IV - Essential facilities (Hospitals, and so forth)
1, 2, 3 and 4 are the options for structural classification categories, and are
equivalent to categories I, II, III and IV defined in ASCE 7.

Static Analysis
Importance Factor
Specifies the importance factor (I). This value is used to calculate the velocity pressure for
wind load calculations. The importance factor depends on the structural classification and
whether or not the region is prone to hurricanes, as shown below.
For ASCE 7 2010, CAESAR II sets the importance factor to 1, as the code standard no
longer addresses this factor.
For ASCE 7 2005, set the importance factor as per the code standard in Table 6-1.
Category Non-Hurricane Hurricane Prone
1-I 0.87 0.77
2-II 1.00 1.00
3-III 1.15 1.15
4-IV 1.15 1.15
1, 2, 3, and 4 are the options for structural classification categories, and are
equivalent to categories I, II, III and IV, defined in ASCE 7.
Structure Natural Frequency
Specifies the natural frequency used to calculate the dynamic wind gust effect factor for
dynamically sensitive structures. (f < 1 Hz.)
If the natural frequency is not defined, CAESAR II uses a gust effect factor 0.85.
Ground (System) Elevation Above Sea Level
Specifies the ground elevation factor used to adjust for air density, determined according to
Section 26.9 of ASCE 7 (2016).
Height of Hill or Escarpment

Specifies the height of hill or escarpment value. This value is the height relative to the
upwind terrain. It is used in calculations of the topographic factor of structures sited on the
upper half of hills and ridges or near the edges of escarpments.
Crest Distance
Specifies the distance upwind of crest to where the difference in ground elevation is half the
height of hill or escarpment.
Distance from Crest to Site
Specifies the distance upwind or downwind from the crest to the building site.
Hill Type
Specifies the hill type. This value is the hill type is defined as follows:
0 - No Hill
1 - 2D Ridge
2 - 2D Escarpment

Static Analysis
3 - 3D Axisymmetric Hill
For more information on using wind reduction factors with ASCE 7, see ASCE 7 Wind
and Seismic Load Combinations (on page 992).
Specifies options for the AS/NZS 1170.2 wind code.

Design Wind Speed
Design Wind Speed Vr. This is the regional wind speed described in section 3.2 of the code.
Wind Region
Wind region. The wind region is determined from the geographic locations for Australia and
New Zealand. The maps of these locations are in Figure 3.1 of the code.
Terrain Category
Value discussed in section 4.2.1 of the code. These categories are defined as:
Category 1 - Exposed open terrain with few or no obstructions and water surfaces at
serviceable wind speeds
Category 2 - Water surfaces, open terrain, grassland with few, well-scattered obstructions
having heights generally from 1.5 m to 10 m.
Category 3 - Terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions 3 m to 5 m high such as
areas of suburban housing
Category 4 - Terrain with numerous large, high (10 m to 30 m high) and closely spaced
obstructions such as large city centers and well-developed industrial complexes
Choose the terrain category with due regard to the permanence of the obstructions
that constitute the surface roughness. In particular, vegetation in tropical cyclonic regions cannot
be relied upon to maintain surface roughness during wind events.
Lee Effect Multiplier (Mlee)
Specifies the Lee Effect Multiplier. The default value is 1.0. Paragraph 4.4.3 discusses the
issue of the lee effect multiplier. In the case of New Zealand, reference is made to the New
Zealand site map. For all other sites, it shall be taken as 1.0.
Hill Shape Factor (Mh)
Specifies the appropriate hill shape factor, which can be obtained from Table 4.4 of the
code. Please refer to paragraph 4.4.2 which gives precise details for the derivation of the hill
shape factor.
Upwind Slope
(H/2Lu) Mh
< 0.05 1.00
0.05 1.8
0.10 1.16

Static Analysis
0.20 1.32
0.30 1.48
>= 0.45 1.71
Wind Direction Multiplier (Md)

Specifies the wind direction multiplier. The default value is 1.0.
The wind direction multiplier is detailed in paragraph 3.4 of the code, specifically Table 3.2.
As the wind multiplier is determined from the cardinal wind directions (N, NE, E, SE, S SW,
W and NW), the value for any direction is specified in the table as 1.0. We recommend this
value be used for all cases.
Convert to Permissible Stress Gust Wind Speed
In the standard AS/NZS 1170.2 Supp 1:2002 Section C3, there is a discussion regarding the
division of the wind speed given in the standard by the square root of 1.5. Checking the box
converts the wind speed given to a permissible stress basis. Doing this lowers the wind
loads on the vessel.
Surface Roughness Height (hr)
This value is used to compute the ratio hr/d which is then used to compute the drag force
coefficient (Cd) for rounded cylindrical shapes per Table E3. For pressure vessels, this
value ranges from 0.003 mm for painted metal surfaces to 15 mm for heavily rusted
surfaces. Light rust has a value of 2.5 mm while galvanized steel has a value of 0.15 mm.
The ratio hr/d is taken to be unitless (mm/mm).
Site Elevation (E)
Specify the height of the site above the mean sea level, E.
Average Spacing of Shielding Buildings
Specifies the average spacing of the shielding buildings. This is discussed in paragraph
4.3.3 of the code.
Average Breadth of Shielding Buildings (bs)
Specifies the average breadth of the buildings that shield the piping.
Average Height of Shielding Buildings (hs)
Specifies the average height of the buildings that shield the piping.
Number of Upwind Bldgs at 45 degs
Specifies the number of upwind buildings within a 45 degree arc. The upwind buildings are
the ones shielding the piping.

Static Analysis
Specifies options for the BS-6399-2 British Wind Code.

Design Wind Speed
Specifies the design value of the wind speed. These vary according to geographical location
and according to company or vendor standards. Here are a few typical wind speeds in miles
per hour. Typical wind speeds are shown in Figure 6 of BS-6399-2. The wind speeds are
only relevant to the United Kingdom. The wind speeds vary typically from 20 m/sec to 31
m/sec (44.7 mph to 69.3 mph).
Type the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are following, because the
wind design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the speed.
Site Elevation - delta s
Enter the site altitude above mean sea level (paragraph 2.2.2.2 of the code). Use this value
plus the Base Elevation to calculate the height of each point in the vessel above mean sea
level. For example, if the vessel is installed on a site that is 100 m (328 ft) above sea level, it
is exposed to a higher wind pressure (P) than if installed on the beach (at mean sea level).
Upwind Building Height (Obstruction Height) - Ho
For buildings in town terrain, type the average height of the building upwind of the piping (as
they tend to shield the piping from the wind). To be conservative, this value can be zero, so
the piping takes the full force of the wind. Ho is used to modify the effective piping wind
height (He) for any piping element. See paragraph 1.7.3.3 of BS-6399-2.
Upwind Building Spacing - X
For buildings in town terrain, type the average spacing of the buildings upwind of the piping
(as they tend to shield the piping from the wind). If the buildings are closer together, they
provide greater protection from the wind. See paragraph 1.7.3.3 of BS-6399-2.
Pipe Location
Specifies the location where the system is installed, either in the country, or in a town. The
BS-6399-2 factors in Table 4 modify the wind velocity. The final wind pressure acting on any
element of the piping is determined by the distance from the coast, whether located in the
country or a town, and the effective height (He). This table derives Sb, which is calculated
by internally.
Distance to Coastline
Specifies the distance the vessel is located from the coast in kilometers. This distance
affects the corrected wind speed (Ve). The BS-6399-2 factors in Table 4 modify the wind
velocity. The final wind pressure acting on any element of the vessel is determined by the
distance from the coast, whether located in the country or a town, and the effective height
(He). This table derives Sb, which is calculated by internally.
Size Effect Factor - Ca
Specifies the size effect factor Ca. This value is normally taken from Figure 4 of BS-6399-2.
This factor generally ranges from 0.53 to a maximum value of 1.0. The size effect factor is a
function of the diagonal dimension a, the effective height, the site in the town or country and
the distance to the sea.
Factor Kb from Table 1 - Kb

Static Analysis
Specifies the 'Building-type factor Kb' taken from Table 1 of BS6399. Choose from one of
five values: 8, 4, 2, 1 or 0.5. CAESAR II sets the default to 2, but any other value may be
chosen. Please note the following limitations of Kb based on the vessel height:
Kb Maximum Vessel Total Height
8 23 m (75.4 ft)
4 75 m (246 ft)
2 240 m (787 ft)
1 300 m (984 ft)
0.5 300 m (984 ft)
Designing towers over 75 meters in height is unlikely and you would need to consider many
other things.
BS 6399 Table 1. Building-type Factor Kb
8 Welded Steel unclad frames
4 Bolted steel and reinforced concrete unclad frames
2 Portal sheds and similar light structures with few internal walls
1 Framed buildings with structural walls around lifts and stairs only (e.g. office
buildings of open plan or with partitioning)
0.5 Framed buildings with structural walls around lifts and stairs with additional
masonry subdivision walls (for example, apartment buildings), building of masonry
construction and timber-framed housing
Annual Probability Factor - Q

Calculates the final probability factor (Sp) associated with the likelihood of high velocity
gusts occurring over certain periods such as 50 years. The default value is Q = 0.02. The
code sets 0.02 as a standard value for a mean recurrence value of 50 years. Annex D of
BS-6399-2 should be consulted for a fuller explanation.
Q Explanation
0.632 NOTE 1: The annual mode, corresponding to the most likely annual
maximum value. (Sp = 0.749)
0.227 NOTE 2: For the serviceability limit, assuming the partial factor for loads for
the ultimate limit is f = 1.4 and for the serviceability limit is f = 1.0, giving Sp
= Sqrt(1 / 1.4) = 0.845. (Sp = 0.845)
0.02 NOTE 3: The standard design value, corresponding to a mean recurrence

interval of 50 years. (Sp = 1.000)

Static Analysis
0.0083 NOTE 4: The design risk for bridges, corresponding to a mean recurrence
interval of 50 years. (Sp = 1.048)
0.00574 NOTE 5: The annual risk corresponding to the standard partial factor for
loads, corresponding to a mean recurrence interval 1754 years. This is
back-calculated assuming the partial factor load for the ultimate limit is ?f =
1.4 and all risk is ascribed to the recurrence of wind. (Sp = Sqrt(1.4))
0.001 NOTE 6: The design risk for nuclear installations, corresponding to a mean
recurrence interval of 10,000 years. (Sp = 1.263)
Seasonal Factor - Ss
BS6399 in paragraph 2.2.2.4 states: "...For permanent buildings and buildings exposed for
continuous periods of more than 6 months a value of 1.0 should be used for Ss..." PV Elite
uses 1.0 as the default value for this reason. Using a value of less than 1.0 is not
recommended, or should only be used with solid research.
Directional Factor - Sd
Taken from Table 3 of BS6399. Because a tower is symmetrical about its central axis, the
default value has been taken as 1.0. It is recommended that this value not be reduced other
than for exceptional circumstances. For other values, please consult Table 3. The values in
that table range between 0.73 and 1.00.
Pipe Surface Type
Specifies the pipe surface condition. The three options are: 1 Smooth, 2 Rough, and 3 Very
Rough.
Total Wind Height
Specifies the total height of the building or structure, which CAESAR II uses in wind force
equations. For piping systems, consider using the maximum height of the piping system.
Refer to the particular wind code standard for more information on this value.
Specifies options for the Brazil NBR 6123 wind code.

Basic Wind Velocity (Vo)
Velocity from a three second gust, exceeded only once in 50 years. It is measured at 10
meters over smooth open ground and depends on the plant location. As a general rule, the
wind may blow in any horizontal direction. This velocity is taken from Figure 1, and item 8
which shows the iso-velocities over Brazil. The referred to Figures and Tables are found in
the Petrobras document BPE-500-P4-19i and the Brazilian Wind Code NBR 6123.
Topographical Factor (S1)
Accounts for the variations and profile of the land. For plain or slightly uneven ground, use a
value of 1. The larger this value is, the greater the final computed wind pressure is. If the
vessel is on a hill top, this value should be computed according to section 5.2 of NBR 6123.
Roughness Category (S2)

Static Analysis
Category Description
1 Plain ground with large dimensions (more than 5 km of extension)
2 Plain (or slightly uneven) ground with few, and separated, obstacles
3 Plain or uneven ground obstructed by obstacles (walls or separated low

buildings)
4 Ground with many grouped obstacles in industrial or urban areas
5 Ground with many grouped and tall obstacles (such as developed

industrial areas)
Using Category I produces a higher wind load than Category II and so forth.
Dimension Class
Class Description
A Greatest dimension is less than or equal to 20 meters
B Greatest dimension is greater than 20m and less than 50 meters
C Greatest dimension is greater than or equal to 50 meters
Statistical Factor (S3)

Accounts for security and the expected life of the equipment. For industrial plants S3 is
generally taken to be 1.0.
Pipe Surface Condition
Vessel surface condition can be classified as smooth or rough. A selection of rough results
in an increased value of the shape coefficient. Using a rough classification generates a
higher wind load on the vessel as there is more drag. The shape coefficient is computed
based on the height to diameter ratio of the vessel.
Frequency
Total Wind Height

Static Analysis
For details on the China GB 5009 wind code parameters used in CAESAR II, refer to the China
GB 5009 wind code standard.
Ref. Wind Velocity [Vb,0]

Specifies the fundamental value of the basic wind velocity of the area where the equipment
is situated. Vb,0 is used along with C Dir and C Season to compute Vb.
Terrain Category
Select the appropriate terrain category from the table below. Category 0 generates the
highest wind loads while category 4 produces the lowest wind loads.
Terrain Category Description
0 Sea or Coastal area exposed to the open sea
1 Lakes or flat and horizontal areas with negligible vegetation and without
obstacles
2 Area with low vegetation such as grass and isolated obstacles (trees,
buildings) with separations of at least 20 obstacle heights
3 Area with regular cover of vegetation or buildings or with isolated obstacles

with separations of maximum 20 obstacle heights (such as villages,
suburban terrain, permanent forest)
4 Area in which at least 15% of the surface is covered with buildings and
their average height exceeds 15 m
Directionality Factor [C Dir]

Value of the directional factor, C Dir, found in the National Annex. The recommended value
is 1.0.
Season Factor [C Season]
Value of the season factor, C Season, found in the National Annex. The recommended
value is 1.0.
Structural Factor [CsCd]
Structural factor used to determine the force on the vessel. This value is defined in Section
of the EN 1991-1-4:2005(E) Wind load specification in Annex D. This value normally ranges
between 0.90 and 1.10. The greater the structural factor value, the higher the element load.
Force Coefficient [Cf]
Force coefficient which accounts for the fact that the vessel is circular in cross section. This
value modifies the area of the vessel that the wind is blowing against. This value is often
specified in the design specifications or can be computed based on the methodology given
in Section 7.9 for circular cylinders. A typical value for Cf would be between 0.7 and 0.8.

Static Analysis
Structure Damping Coefficient

Specifies options for the UBC and IBC wind codes.

Design Wind Speed
Specifies the design value of the wind speed. This varies according to geographical location
and according to company or vendor standards. Typical wind speeds in miles per hour are
85.0, 100.0, 110.0, and 120.0.
Type the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are following
because the wind design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the speed.
Exposure Constant
Specifies the exposure factor, as defined in UBC-91 Section 2312 or the IBC Exposure
Constant:
Exposure B - Terrain with building, forest or surface irregularities 20 feet or more in height
covering at least 20 percent or the area extending one mile or more from the site.
Exposure C - Terrain which is flat and generally open, extending one-half mile or more from
the site in any full quadrant.
Exposure D - The most severe exposure with basic wind speeds of 80 mph or more.
Terrain which is flat and unobstructed facing large bodies of water over one mile or more in
width relative to any quadrant of the building site. This exposure extends inland from the
shoreline 1/4 mile or 0 times the building (vessel) height, whichever is greater.
Most petrochemical sites use a value of 3, exposure C. This value is used to set
the Gust Factor Coefficient (Ce) found in Table 23-G.
Importance Factor (IBC)
This is the Occupancy Importance Factor, IE, as defined in Section 1616.2 and shown in
Table 1604.5. The calculated spectrum accelerations will be multiplied by this value to
generate the shock spectra. Values range from 1.0 to 1.25 based on the function of the
structure.
Importance Factor (UBC)
Specifies the importance factor. The software uses this value directly without modification.
This value is taken from Table 23-L of the UBC standard. Followings are the context of
Table 23-L:
Category Value
I - Essential facilities 1.15
II - Hazardous facilities 1.15
III - Special occupancy structures 1.00
IV - Standard occupancy structures 1.00

Static Analysis
Height of Hill (IBC)
Specifies the height of hill or escarpment value. This value is the height relative to the
upwind terrain. It is used in calculations of the topographic factor of structures sited on the
upper half of hills and ridges or near the edges of escarpments.
Distance to Site (IBC)
Specifies the distance upwind or downwind from the crest to the building site.
Crest Distance
Specifies the distance upwind of crest to where the difference in ground elevation is half the
height of hill or escarpment.
Hill Type
Specifies the hill type. This value is the hill type is defined as follows:
0 - No Hill
1 - 2D Ridge
2 - 2D Escarpment
3 - 3D Axisymmetric Hill
Structure Damping Coeff. (IBC)/Beta (UBC)
Specifies the structural damping coefficient. Type the value of structural damping coefficient
(percentage of critical damping) beta. The default value is 0.01.
This value is used to compute the dynamic gust effect factor G as outlined in the
commentary section 6.6 page 158 of ASCE 95 or section 6.5.8 pages 29-30 of the 98
standard. If your design Code is not ASCE, then the software uses the damping coefficient
in accordance with that particular wind design code.
If your design specification does not call out for a specific value of beta, then leave the value
of 0.01 in this cell. Please note that other values of beta can be specified for the filled case
and the empty case. Again if the specifications do not supply these values for empty and
filled leave these cells blank.
Natural Frequency (IBC)

Static Analysis
Specifies options for the Indian Standard, IS-875 (Part 3), wind code. IS-875 is the standard in
India for design loads (other than earthquake) for buildings and structures.
Basic Wind Speed
Basic wind speed as applicable to 10 m height above mean ground level for different zones
in the country can be directly calculated if the proper value is defined in the Wind Zone
Number box. Alternatively, wind speed can be defined here. Basic wind speed should be
based on peak gust velocity averaged over a short time interval of about 3 seconds and
correspond to mean heights above ground level in an open terrain. This box is optional.
Wind Zone Number
Figure 1 of IS-875 shows different Wind Zones of the country. Various zone numbers and
corresponding Basic Wind Speed values are:
Zone 1 33 m/sec 73.82

miles/hour
Zone 2 39 m/sec 87.25

miles/hour
Zone 3 44 m/sec 98.43

miles/hour
Zone 4 47 m/sec 105.15

miles/hour
Zone 5 50 m/sec 111.86

miles/hour
Zone 6 55 m/sec 123.04

miles/hour
The value typed here must be between 1 and 6. The zone the vessel is in is determined
from a map of India showing the various wind zones.
Optionally, you can define the basic wind speed directly in the Basic Wind Speed box. If
the wind speed is specified, it overrides the value of wind speed and zone based on the
table above.
Risk Factor (K1)
Assuming the mean probable design life as 100 years, the corresponding risk coefficient
values for various wind zones are:
Zone K1
Zone 1 1.05
Zone 2 1.06
Zone 3 1.07

Static Analysis
Zone 4 1.07
Zone 5 1.08
Zone 6 1.08
Terrain Category
Terrain in which specific equipment is assessed as one of the following categories:
Category 1 - Exposed open terrain with few or no obstructions and in which the average
height of any object surrounding the equipment is less than 1.5 m. This category includes
open sea - coasts and flat treeless plains.
Category 2 - Open terrain with well scattered obstructions having height generally between
1.5 to 10 m. This includes airfields, open parklands and undeveloped sparsely built up
outskirts of towns and suburbs. This category is commonly used for design purpose.
Category 3 - Terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions having the size of buildings
and structures up to 10 m in height. This includes well wooded areas, towns, and industrial
areas full or partially developed.
Category 4 - Terrain with numerous tall, closely spaced obstructions. This includes large
city centers, generally with obstructions above 25 m, and well developed industrial
complexes.
Equipment Class
Equipment and structures are classified into following classes depending upon their size.
Class A - Equipment and components having a maximum dimension (greatest horizontal
or vertical dimension) less than 20 m.
Class B - Equipment and components having a maximum dimension (greatest horizontal
or vertical dimension) between 20 and 50 m.
Class C - Equipment and components having a maximum dimension (greatest horizontal or
vertical dimension) greater than 50 m.
Topography Factor
The topography factor ranges between 1.0 and 1.36. This factor takes care of local
topographic features such as hills, valleys, cliffs, ridges and so on, which can significantly
affect wind speed in their vicinity. The effect of topography is to accelerate wind near
summits of hills or crests of cliffs and decelerate the wind in valleys or near the foot of cliffs.
Effect of topography is significant if upwind slope is greater than about 3 degrees. Below 3
degrees, the value of K3 can be taken as 1.0. For slopes above 3 degrees, the value of K3
ranges between 1.0 and 1.36.
Use Gust Response Factor
If this box is checked, the software calculates the gust response factor per IS-875 and uses
it in the appropriate equations. Experience has shown that these gust response factors are
very conservative. Select this box only if the design specifications and the customer or
owner explicitly require you to do so.

Static Analysis
Specifies the options available for the Mexico wind code.

Design Wind Speed
According to Paragraph 4.6.2, Isotach Maps. Regional Velocity (VR), the velocity of the
wind, VR, is the maximum mean velocity likely to occur within a certain recurrence period in
a determined zone or region of the country.
The Isotach maps that are included in this clause with the different periods of return, such
velocities refer to homogenous conditions that correspond to a height of 10 meters over the
surface of the floor in the flat terrain (Category 2 per Table I.1). It does not consider the local
terrain roughness characteristics or the specific topography of the site. Therefore, such
velocity is associated with three-second wind gusts and it takes into account the possibility
that there might be hurricane winds present in the coastal zones.
The regional velocity, VR, is determined by taking into account the geographic location of
the site of the building's uproot and its destination.
In Figures I.1 through I.4, the Isotach regional maps are shown, corresponding to the
periods of recurrence for 200, 50, and 10 years.
The importance of the structures (Paragraph 4.3) dictates the periods of recurrence which
should be considered for the wind design. From this, the groups A, B and C associate
themselves with the periods of return of 200, 50 and 10 years, respectively. The uproot site
is located in the map with the recurrence period which corresponds to the group to which the
building belongs to, in order to obtain the regional velocity. In the Tomo III from Ayudas de
Dise O a table is shown with the main cities in the country and their corresponding regional
velocities for the different periods of return.
Structural Classification
Specifies the structural classification.
Class Description
A Every remote structural element exposed directly to the wind

action. Horizontal or vertical structures that measure less than 20
meters of length.
B Horizontal or vertical structures that measure between 20 and 50

meters of length.
C Horizontal or vertical structures that measure more than 50

meters of length.
Terrain Category
Defined in Table I.1, based on the type of soil and roughness.
Category Description
1 Open terrain, practically smooth, without obstructions.
2 Flat or undulating soil, with few obstructions.

Static Analysis
3 Terrain covered by many obstructions narrowly spaced.
4 Terrain with many big, tall, narrowly spaced obstructions.
Topographic Factor (Ft) (Paragraph 4.5.4)

This factor takes into account the local topographic effect from the place in which the
structure uproots. For example, if the building is found on the hillsides, on top of hills or on
mountains at important heights with respect to the general level of the terrain of its outskirts,
it is probable that wind accelerations generates and the regional velocity should be
increased.
Damping Factor (Zeta)
Typically, this value is 0.01.
Drag Coefficient (Ca)
(Table 1.28), as shown below.
Cross Section Type of Surface H/b
1 7 25 ò 40
Circular Smooth or little rough 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.7

(bVD 6 m2/s) (d'/b ÷ 0.0)
Rough (d'/b ÷ 0.02) 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.2
Very rough (d'/b ÷ 0.08) 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.2
Circular Any 0.7 0.8 1.2 1.2

(bVD 6 m2/s)
Hexagonal or octagonal Any 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.4
Square (wind normal to Any 1.3 1.4 2.0 2.2

a face)
Square (wind on a Any 1.0 1.1 1.5 1.6

corner)
where:
b is the diameter or the horizontal dimension of the structure, including the roughness of
the wall; to determine the product bVD, this diameter is the one that is located at two
thirds of the total height, from the level of the land, in m
d' is the dimension that exceeds from the roughness, such as ribs or "spoilers", in m
VD is the velocity of the wind of design (4.6), in m/s, and it is valued for the two thirds of
the total height
For intermediate values of H/b and d'/b lineal interpolation is permitted.
Strouhal Number (St)

Static Analysis
The Strouhal number is unitless; 0.2 for circular sections and 0.14 for rectangular sections.
Barometric Height (Omega)
Indicates the barometric pressure in mm Hg, as shown below:
Height Barometric Pressure (mm Hg)
0 760
500 720
1000 675
1500 635
2000 600
2500 565
3000 530
3500 495
Ambient Temperature
Indicates the ambient temperature in degrees Celsius.
Frequency
Specifies the fundamental frequency time interval, in Hz.
Reference Wind Pressure or Design Wind Speed

Specifies the NBC Reference Wind Pressure. The reference velocity pressure q is the
appropriate value determined in conformance with Subsection 1.1.3 (based on probability)
or Table C-1.
Design Wind Speed
Specifies the design value of the wind speed. This varies according to geographical location
and according to company or vendor standards. Typical wind speeds in miles per hour are
85.0, 100.0, 110.0, and 120.0.
Type the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are following
because the wind design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the speed.
Importance Factor (Iw)
Specifies the NBC importance factor. This value is the importance factor for wind taken from
the table below. This is table 4.1.7.1 on page 4-17 of Division B of NBC 2005.
Importance Category Importance Factor, Iw
ULS SLS

Static Analysis
Low 0.8 0.75
Normal 1.0 0.75
High 1.15 0.75
Post Disaster 1.25 0.75
Exposure Constant
Based on the profile of mean wind speed, the Exposure Constant varies considerably with
the general roughness of the terrain over which the wind has been blowing before it reaches
the building. These exposures are applicable only under the dynamic (detailed) method,
whereas the terms open and rough were used for the static (simplified) method.
Exposure A - (Open or Standard Exposure) - Indicates open-level terrain with only
scattered buildings, trees, or other obstructions, open water or shorelines. Reference wind
speeds are based on Exposure A.
Exposure B - (Rough Exposure) - Indicates rough terrain, such as large cities with several
and dense high-rise buildings, which persists in the upwind direction for at least 20 times the
building height. Prior to NBC 2010, referred to winds that persist in the upward direction for
1.0 km or 10 times the building height, whichever is larger.
Exposure C - (NBC 2005 only) - Rough terrain, such as large cities with several and dense
high-rise buildings, which persists in the upwind direction for at least 1.0 km or 10 times the
building height, whichever is larger.
Roughness Factor
Specifies the Roughness Factor:
1 - Round, moderately smooth
2 - Round, rough (D'/D = 0.02)
3 - Round, very rough (D'/D = 0.08)
Height of the Windward Face
Specifies the height of a piping section that is exposed to wind blow.
Structural Damping Coefficient
Natural Frequency

Static Analysis
Allows you to indicate your own wind profiles, based on one of two options:
Wind Pressure vs. Elevation
Wind Velocity vs. Elevation
When you select a user-defined wind code (Wind Pressure vs. Elevation or Wind Velocity vs.
Elevation), enter the corresponding pressure or velocity values. Enter a single entry in the table
if a uniform pressure or velocity is to act over the entire piping system. Otherwise, type the
pressure or velocity profile for the applicable wind loading.
The software acquires the pressure/velocity and elevation values from the piping
input. They do not necessarily match the current setting in the configuration file.
Displays the Copy Environmental Loading Data dialog box, which is used to copy the wind
data from any defined wind case to any remaining wind case. This is especially useful for large
wind pressure or Velocity versus Elevation tables.
Copies the wind or wave data from the current wind or wave case to any specified remaining
wind or wave case. Use this feature when there is large wind or wave pressure or with Velocity
versus Elevation tables.
Specifies the direction vector (cosine) which defines the direction of the wind. The magnitude of
the vector is not significant. For example:
Wind in X direction, vector is 1, 0, 0
Wind in Z direction, vector is 0, 0, 1
Wind at 45 degrees, vector is .707, 0, .707
You only need to specify the method and the wind direction if you are using a pressure or
velocity versus elevation table. After clicking User Wind Profile, a dialog box prompts you for
the corresponding pressure or velocity table. You only need to make a single entry in the table if
a uniform pressure or velocity is to act over the entire piping system. Otherwise, type the
pressure or velocity profile for the applicable wind loading.

Static Analysis
Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog

Box)
Controls options for wave loads.
Specifies the wave case to edit. The first box indicates the active wave case. The second box
displays the total number of defined cases.
Displays the Copy Environmental Loading Data dialog box.
Copies the wind or wave data from the current wind or wave case to any specified remaining
wind or wave case. Use this feature when there is large wind or wave pressure or with Velocity
versus Elevation tables.
Specifies the means of modeling the current speed against the depth profile.
Power Law
Current speed decays with depth to the 1/7 power.
Linear Table
Define the depth versus. speed table.
Linear
Current speed decays linearly with depth becoming zero at the sea bottom.
Specifies the current speed at the free surface elevation, excluding the wave. This value is
superseded by the entries in a depth versus speed table.

Static Analysis
Specifies the X- and Z- cosines defining the direction of the current. The current direction may
differ from the direction of any accompanying wave.
Specifies the wave theory by which to model any wave effects. The available theories are:
Stream Function
Dean's stream function theory.
Stream Function, Modified
Dean's stream function theory modified to include a shear current. This shear current is
assumed to vary linearly from the surface speed to the bottom speed. Therefore, this option
only works with the Linear current profile.
STOKE'S 5th
Stoke's 5th order wave theory.
STOKE'S 5th, Modified
Stoke's 5th order wave theory modified to address particle data above the mean sea level.
AIRY
Basic linear wave theory.
AIRY, Modified
Basic linear wave theory modified to address particle data above the mean sea level.
Specifies the order of the stream function when using the stream function wave theory. Typical
values are from 5-21.
Specifies the water depth at this location.

Static Analysis
Specifies the wave height (the crest to trough distance).
Specifies the wave period. That is, the time it takes for successive crests to pass a fixed
reference point.
Specifies the wave kinematics factor. According to Section 2.3.1b of API RP 2A-WSD
"Recommended Practice for Planning, Designing and Constructing Fixed Offshore Platforms --
Working Stress Design", the horizontal wave velocities calculated by the Stream Function or
Stokes 5th wave theories may be multiplied by this factor in order to fit them to the wave
spreading and other irregularities associated with real world wave characteristics.
Typical ranges for this factor are 0.85 to 0.95 for tropical storms and 0.95 to 1.0 for extra-tropical
storms. For particular recommendations for Gulf of Mexico and other U.S. waters, refer to
Sections 2.3.4d.1 and 2.3.4f.1 of API RP 2A-WSD.
Specifies the X- and Z- cosines defining the direction of the wave. The wave direction may differ
from the direction of any accompanying current.
Indicates whether all elements of the model should be simultaneously loaded with the same
phase of the wave (typically the phase of maximum loading) or whether each element
experiences a different loading phase, based upon its location relative to the model origin.
Specifies the wave phase angle to use to calculate the wave loadings at either:
every element
the model origin

Static Analysis
Specifies the elevation of mean sea level, in terms of model elevation. This submerges the
elements of the model to the appropriate level.
Specifies the kinematic viscosity of the fluid. Typical values for seawater are:
Temp (F) v(in-in/sec) Temp (C) v(mm-mm/sec)
60 1.81e-3 15.556 1.171
50 2.10e-3 10.000 1.356
40 2.23e-3 4.444 1.440
30 2.88e-3 -1.111 1.858
Specifies the density of the sea water. A typical value for salt water is 0.037 (lb/cu.in.) or
0.00103 (kg/cu.cm.)
Displays the depth values. When using Linear Table Current Model, type up to 10 depths. A
value of 0.0 indicates the surface. Positive numbers indicate distance downward from the
surface.
Displays the velocity values. When using Linear Table Current Model, type up to the current
speeds corresponding to the specified depths. Current speed typed in this table overrides the
Surface Velocity value.

SECTION 8
Static Output Processor
Main window ribbon: Output > Reports > Static
Main window menu: Analysis > Static

Provides an interactive review of static analysis results for the open job. The Static Output
Processor window automatically displays upon completion of a static analysis. You can also
select Output > Static from the main CAESAR II menu to open the window any time after an
analysis has been completed.
The Static Output Processor window displays analysis results in a tabular form, in a graphical
animated form, or a combination of the two. Use commands in the Static Output Processor
window to:
Interactively review reports for any selected combination of load cases and/or report types.
Print or save to file copies for any combination of load cases and/or report types.
Add title lines to output reports.
Select extended or summarized versions of most standard reports.
Load Cases Analyzed
Lists all of the load cases which have been analyzed for the current job. The cases are
numbered, and labeled with the type (load category) addressed by the case. Load types are:
OPE - operating, not a stress compliance case for B31.1/B31.3 and similar codes.
SUS - sustained, stress compliance for primary loads.
EXP - expansion, stress compliance for secondary loads.
OCC - occasional, stress compliance for occasional loads.
FAT - fatigue, stress compliance for cumulative damage.
HAR - harmonic case for dynamic evaluation of harmonic loads.
HGR - construction case used for spring hanger design - results are not available for
these load cases.
K1P - Primary level 1 seismic longitudinal stress for the HPGSL and JPI codes.
K1SR - Secondary level 1 seismic cyclic stress for the HPGSL and JPI codes.
K2P - Primary level 2 seismic longitudinal stress for the HPGSL and JPI codes.
K2SA - Secondary level 2 seismic cyclic stress amplitude for the HPGSL and JPI codes.
K2SR - Secondary level 2 seismic cyclic stress range for the HPGSL and JPI codes.
K2L - Level 2 seismic liquefaction for the HPGSL and JPI codes
The load case description also includes the individual load components that contributed to
the load case.

The results for a load case can be viewed by selecting the load case. Multiple load cases
can be selected using the <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys in combination with the mouse. Load
cases can be cleared by using the <Ctrl> key in combination with the mouse.
Standard Reports
Lists the available reports associated with those load cases. For more information, see Work
with Reports (on page 624) and Standard Reports (on page 632).
General Computed Results
Lists reports, such as input listings or hanger selection reports, that are not associated with
load cases. For more information, see General Computed Results (on page 647).
Custom Reports
Lists generated or imported custom reports. For more information, see Work with Reports
(on page 624) and Report Template Editor (on page 652).
Output Viewer Wizard
Selects specific reports and reviews their order before sending the output to the selected
device. To close the Output Viewer Wizard, click Less <<. For more information, see
Output Viewer Wizard (on page 651).
Work with Reports

When generated, a report displays in a tabbed Reports Viewer window. You can detach
individual reports from the tabbed view, and position them around the screen. Additionally, you
can dock a report next to other opened reports for a comparison view. Select the tab at the
bottom of the report, and while holding down the mouse, move the report. The outline shadow
shows the new location of the report. Release the mouse button to place the report in the new
location.

When a report is open, you can double-click the column headings to sort the report by
ascending or descending value order. Column order can be re-arranged by dragging columns to
another location. You can also adjust the column size or hide the column altogether. All changes
are for the current report in the current viewing session. To make permanent changes to the
report, use the Report Template Editor (on page 652).
You can print or save individual reports to a text file, to Microsoft Word, or to Microsoft Excel by
selecting Send Report To or Send All To from the right-click menu.
While the report is active, you can adjust the display properties available from the View menu,
change the background color, and turn on horizontal and vertical grid lines. Grid lines can help
in generating better print results.
Click View > Change Page Break to adjust the page configuration for an active report. You can
also scale the report to fit on one page, or adjust it to fit on a specified number of pages by using
the Allow Adjustment of Page Breaks and Show Page Break Lines options.
Filter Reports
One of the most powerful features of the Static Output Processor is the ability to filter your
output reports. Filtering lets you customize output to just the information you want to see.
Select Filters from the Static Output Processor menu to set filters on your output reports.
Certain filters can apply to output reports globally (meaning any kind of report you generate from
the Output Processor) or specific to a report type (such as only to restraint reports).
1 Report-Specific Filters
2 Global Filters
Report-Specific Filters

Apply report-specific filters when you want the software to filter only reports that are related to
the filter setting. For example, if you wanted to generate a report to see all the allowable
stresses in a piping system that are greater than 80 percent, set the Percent box on the
Stresses tab to >80. Then, when you generate any of the stress-related reports in the Output
Processor, the software filters the data to show only those stresses greater than 80 percent.
Global Filters
Apply global filters to node number or line number ranges for the software to filter all reports that
include the node or line numbers specified. For example, if you filter on node numbers from 10
to 100, then for any report you generate in the Output Processor, the software filters and
shows only the data that is applicable to nodes 10 to 100.
Filters do not apply to the summary information that appears at the top of a report.
The software shows the filters applied near the top of the output report, as shown below.
1 Output Reports Show Filters Used
1. Select Filters on the Output Processor menu.

2. Choose any global filter options. Global filters apply to all reports generated in the Output
Processor. For more information on the global filters, see Filter Options Tab (on page 628)
and Filters Dialog Box (on page 627).
a. To apply a global filter based on node numbers, type the From node and To node
numbers.
b. To select other global options for filters, click the Filter Options tab.
3. Choose report-specific filter details on each of the class tabs. Each tab contains related
fields with a drop box and an edit box. Each corresponding edit box displays the value in
which to compare.
Each of the drop boxes has a list of comparison operators:

Operator Description
> Greater than
>= Greater or Equal
< Less than
<= Less or Equal
== Equal
\= Not Equal
4. Click Apply to define the filter.

See Also
Filter Options Tab (on page 628)
Restraints Tab (on page 629)
Forces Tab (on page 630)
Stresses Tab (on page 630)
Line Numbers Tab (on page 630)
Flange Peq Tab (on page 631)
Flange NC-3658.3 Tab (on page 631)
Filters Dialog Box

Allows you to put specifications on report results so that you can see just the information that
you need. Certain filters apply to output reports globally (meaning any kind of report you
generate from the Output Processor) while others apply to a specific report type (such as only
to restraint reports). For more information on filtering, see Filter Reports (on page 625).
See Also
Filter Options Tab (on page 628)
Displacements Tab (on page 629)
Restraints Tab (on page 629)
Forces Tab (on page 630)
Stresses Tab (on page 630)
Line Numbers Tab (on page 630)
Flange Peq Tab (on page 631)
Flange NC-3658.3 Tab (on page 631)

Select filter options that the software applies to all reports generated in the Output Processor.
You set filter options from the Filter Options tab on the Filters dialog box, which you can
access by selecting Filters in the Output Processor menu. You can specify filter settings, such
as setting the signed value or the combination of fields filtered, which the software applies
globally to all reports you generate.
From Node
Enter both a From and To node number and the software filters based on nodes in the
specified range display. In other words, only one of the node pair has to fall within the
specified range. If you enter just a From node number, then the software displays the From
node and all nodes greater than it. The software filters and displays all node pairings that
have at least one node (To or From) in the filter setting for the node range.
To Node
Enter both a From and To node number and the software filters based on nodes in the
specified range display. If you enter just a To node number, then the software displays the
To node and all nodes less than it. The software filters and displays all node pairings that
have at least one node (To or From) in the filter setting for the node range.
Filter Options
Select the appropriate filter option for values: Absolute Value or Signed Value. The
software defaults to filtering by the magnitude, regardless of the sign or direction. You can
filter by a specific direction of load or displacement. This feature is particularly useful when
looking for lifting off the supports in directional restraints (such as +Y).
Combinations (Fields or Classes)
Select the appropriate filter option for field or class combinations. Fields refer to the
particular data inputs (boxes) in each tab class. Classes refers to the major types of output,
for example Displacements, Restraints, Forces, or Stresses. Classes have separate tabs
in the Filters dialog box. For example, DX and RZ are fields in the Displacements class,
FX and MZ are fields in the Restraints class, and Code Stress and Bending Stress are
fields in the Stresses class.
Reset Filter
Select to reset the filter settings for the currently-active tab.
Reset All Filters
Select to reset all the filter settings for all of the filters, including the options and the
report-specific filter classes.

Specifies filter criteria for all reports relating to displacements. Use the operator boxes to specify
comparison operators for the filter values.
For example, to look at any place in the model where the pipe is lifting off of the support, set the
Displacements filter class to a positive value of greater than one inch in the Y-axis direction
(DY) to show which pipes have lifted off of the support vertically by more than an inch.
When you run the Displacements output report, the software shows only those pipes in your
model that have been displaced by more than an inch. You can also set the Filter Options
Classes to AND, and then generate the Restraints Summary Extended report to show all
restraints with a displacement off of the pipe of one inch or more.
For more information on filtering output reports, see Filters Dialog Box (on page 627) and Filter
Reports (on page 625).
The software does not apply report-specific filter criteria to custom reports that use
combination classes.
Specifies filter criteria for all reports relating to restraints. Use the operator boxes to specify
comparison operators for the filter values.
For example, if you set the Restraints filter class to show all restraints with forces greater than
10,000 lbs on the y-axis (FY), then the software shows only restraints that have FY values
greater than 10,0000 lbs on the Restraints, Local Restraints, or Restraints Summary output
reports.
You can also select one of the Include radio buttons to filter and include all restraints in your
results, include all restraints that do not have CNodes (None with CNodes), or include all
restraints with only CNodes (Only with CNodes).
For example, you can select to include None with CNodes, if you want to filter out internal load
on a CNoded restraint. This lets you see the total dead weight of a pipe model.
Select Bi-Linear for buried pipe models that also go above ground. In most cases, you do not
need to select this filter option.

Specifies filter criteria that the software applies to all reports relating to force. Use the operator
boxes to specify comparison operators for the filter values.
For example, if you set the Forces filter class to all forces in the Y-axis direction greater than
10,000 pounds, the software shows only y-axis forces (FY) greater than 10,000 pounds on the
Local Element Forces and Global Element Forces output reports.
For more information on filtering output reports, see Filters Dialog Box and Filter Reports (on
page 625).
combination classes. This filter applies only to internal forces and moments.
Specifies filter criteria for the various stress output reports (Stresses, Stresses Extended, and
Stress Summary). You can set up filter criteria based on Axial, Bending, Torsion, Hoop, Max
3D, Code and Allowable stress factors in combination with the magnitude. In addition, you can
filter stress data on the reports based on SIFs (in- and out-of-plane), and based on a percentage
of stress. Use the operator boxes to specify comparison operators for the filter values.
For example, if you set the Stresses filter class Percent box to >70, the software filters the
stress-related reports to show only elements having greater than a 70 percent stress.
Assigns filter criteria based on line numbers that the software applies globally for all output
reports. If the model has assigned line numbers, you can set up filter criteria based on those
numbers to look at output results for only certain parts of the model.
For example, apply line number ranges for the software to filter reports to only include elements
that belong to a particular line number. For example, if you filter based upon line numbers, then
for any report you generate in the Output Processor, the software filters and shows only the
data that includes information on systems with the specified line numbers. When the software
shows the Line Number box as Unassigned, it means the model did not have any line
numbers assigned and cannot be filtered based on that information.

Specifies filter criteria for flange output reports related to the Kellog Equivalent Pressure Method
(Peq). You can set up filter criteria based on Axial Force, Bending Moment, Gasket Diameter,
PEquivalent, Rating Temperature, Allowable Pressure, and a Ratio factor. Use the operator
boxes to specify comparison operators for the filter values.
For example, if you specify the Flange Peq filter class to filter based on a Ratio of 20 percent,
then the software filters output reports to only show equivalent pressures for flanges that are 20
percent of the maximum rated pressure. This information indicates how close you are to the
edge of the flange.
Specifies filter criteria for flange output reports related to ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection
NC-3658.3 Method (NC-3658.3). You can set up filter criteria for all NC-3658.3 reports based on
Torsion Moment, Bending Moment, Bolt Circle Diameter, Bolt Area, Flange Stress,
Allowable Stress, and a Ratio factor. Use the operator boxes to specify comparison operators
for the filter values.
For example, if you specify for the Flange NC-3658.3 filter class to with a Ratio of 30 percent or
greater, then the software reports on only flanges of the NC method that are 30 percent of the
maximum rated equivalent pressure for the flange.
For more information on filtering output reports, see Filters Dialog Box and Filter Reports (on
page 625).
Print or Save Reports to File Notes

The tabular results brought to the screen may be sent directly to a printer. Different
combinations of load cases and report types may be chosen, each followed by the File-Print
command, to create a single report.
Prints copies of the reports. To print copies of multiple reports as a single report,
use the Output Viewer Wizard to populate the report order tree, click Send To
Printer and then Finish.
Sends reports to a file (in ASCII format) rather than the printer. After selection, a
dialog displays where you select the file name. To change the file name for a new
report, select File-Save As.
Typically, the set of output reports to print out for documentation purposes is:

Load Case Report Purpose
SUSTAINED STRESS Code compliance
EXPANSION STRESS Code compliance
OPERATING DISPLACEMENTS Interference checks
OPERATING RESTRAINTS Hot restraint, equipment loads
SUSTAINED RESTRAINTS As-installed restraint, equipment loads
Load cases used for hanger sizing produce no reports. Also, the hanger table and
hanger table with text reports are printed only once even though more than one active load case
may be highlighted.
To save multiple reports as a single report to a file, use the Output Viewer Wizard.
The signs in all CAESAR II Reports show the forces and moments that act "ON"
something. The Element Force/Moment report shows the forces and moments that act
"ON" each element to keep that element in static equilibrium. The Restraint Force/Moment
report shows the forces and moments that act "ON" each restraint.
When sending reports to MSWord, if a file named "header.doc" exists in the \caesar\system
directory, its contents are read and used as the page header when CAESAR II exports the
report to MSWord. The intent is that "header.doc" contains the company logo, address
details and formatting for tables. The interface uses a style names "report table" which you
can set up in "header.doc".
Standard Reports
For most load cases, except hanger design and fatigue, there are a variety of different report
options that can be selected for review.
Most standard reports have short and long versions, designated by the word
Extended. The extended reports usually have more data items available and may require a
landscape option when printed.
Displacements
Shows the nodal translations and rotations at each of the nodes. These values represent the
solution vector for each load case. For more information, see Displacements Report (on
page 634).
Restraints
Shows the loads imposed on the system supports for each load case. For more information,
see Restraints Report (on page 634).
Restraint Summary
Combines the restraint reports for any number of (user selected) load cases. This provides a
concise summary of the loads on the restraints, across load cases. For more information,
see Restraint Summary (on page 637).

Global Element Forces

Shows the element forces and moments acting on the ends of the element. These forces
and moments are aligned with the global coordinate system, and represent the element
free-body diagram. For more information, see Global Element Forces (on page 639).
Global Element Forces Extended
Shows element forces and moments acting on the ends of the element, including shear
forces, bending moments, and torsional moments. These forces and moments are aligned
with the global coordinate system, and represent the element free-body diagram. For more
information, see Global Element Forces Extended (on page 640).
Local Element Forces
Shows the element forces and moments acting on the ends of the element. These forces
and moments are aligned with the local element coordinate system, and represent the
element free-body diagram. For more information, see Local Element Forces (on page 641).
Stresses
Shows the element stresses acting on the ends of the elements. This report also includes
codes SIFs, code allowables, and the code stress when applicable. For more information,
Stresses (on page 642).
Stresses Extended
Shows the element stresses acting on the ends of the elements. Also reports axial, bending,
torsional, and hoop stresses. The report also includes codes SIFs, code allowables, and the
code stress when applicable. For more information, Stresses Extended (on page 643).
Cumulative Damage
Lists the combined fatigue stresses for all selected fatigue load cases and compares it to the
corresponding allowable for each node of each element. Note that this report is only
available for those jobs that include fatigue cases. For more information, see Cumulative
Usage Report (on page 646).
Bend KHK2 Evaluation
Reports bending on elements due to KHK Level 2 stresses. For more information, see Bend
KHK2 Evaluation Report (on page 647).

Displacements Report
Translations and rotations for each degree of freedom are reported at each node in the model.
Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 625).
Restraints Report
Forces and moments on each restraint in the model are reported. There is a separate report
generated for each load case selected.

Restraint Report - In Local Element Coordinates

It is possible to generate a restraint report where the loads and moments are aligned with the
local element coordinate system. This is particularly useful when addressing skewed nozzles,
where the axial, longitudinal and circumferential results are needed. As an example, consider
the small system shown below:
This system consists of two small horizontal lines anchored at both ends. The last element of
each line is skewed 45 degrees in the X-Z plane. At the end of this skewed line is an axial
restraint, as illustrated in the following figure:
The typical Global Restraint report for this system displays in the following table. At node 140,
this report shows two equal loads in the (global) X and Z directions. These values (24,463) are
the global component loads acting on the skewed restraint. The actual magnitude of the restraint
load, acting in-line with the pipe can be found by performing the SRSS of these component
loads, which yields 34595. This value is the load on the restraint acting axially with the pipe.
Operating Case Restraint Loads Global Coordinate System

NODE FX lb. FY lb. FZ lb. MX ft.lb. MY ft.lb. MZ ft.lb.
100 -24463 -514 66 1340.5 -273.3 -6418.6 Rigid ANC
119 0 0 -24528 0.0 0.0 0.0 Rigid Z
140 24463 0 24463 0.0 0.0 0.0 Flex X
200 -24463 -514 66 1340.5 -273.3 -6418.6 Rigid ANC
219 0 0 -24528 0.0 0.0 0.0 Rigid Z
240 24463 0 24463 0.0 0.0 0.0 Flex X
The process of performing SRSS or sine/cosine operations to obtain restraint loads in the
element coordinate system can be tedious. As an alternative, generate a restraint report where
all of the loads are aligned with the associated element coordinate system. The report for the
same small job displays in the table below.
Operating Case Restraint Loads Local Element Coordinate System
NODE fx lb. fy lb. fz lb. mx ft.lb. my ft.lb. mz ft.lb.
100 -24463 66 514 1340.5 -6418.6 273.3 Rigid ANC
119 0 -24528 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Rigid Z
140 34595 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Flex X
200 -24463 66 514 1340.5 -6418.6 273.3 Rigid ANC
219 -17344 -17344 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Rigid Z
240 34595 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Flex X
In reviewing the relationship between the local versus global restraint loads note the following:
The global FY (vertical) load at node 100 of -514 translates to a local fz load. For details on the
global to local coordinate system relations, see Technical Discussions (on page 969). (These
two values are shown in the tables in bold.)
At node 140, the skewed axial restraint, the first table showing the global coordinate system
loads reports the two equal component loads. The second table showing the local loads, reports
only the resultant axial load at the restraint. (These values are shown in the tables in bold.)

Restraint Summary
Similar to the restraint report, this option provides force and moment data for all valid selected
load cases together on one report.
Nozzle Check Report

The Nozzle Check report defines the appropriate force/moment limits on a specified nozzle.
Data for each load case reported is a result of calculation (and can also be viewed on a Local
Restraints report). The Limits shown in the report are the values from the input. Similarly, the
Comparison method also reflects the input setting. The loads shown are the loads on the
nozzle for the indicated load cases. If any load exceeds its corresponding allowable load, then
the entire line is shown in red (with an asterisk at the far right in the event the report is printed in
black and white.)

The Resultant column reports the resultant forces and moments for the SRSS Comparison
method, and the unity check value for the Unity Check method.
Flange Reports
Flange Reports are available after completing the In-line Flange Evaluation analysis. There
are two methods and two corresponding reports for evaluating flanges under load: Kellogg
Equivalent Pressure Method (Peq) and ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3
Method (NC-3658.3).
The reports display some of the relevant input items along with the calculated corresponding
moments and stresses or equivalent pressure for each node where the flange evaluation was
requested. This is an elemental type report, and the flanges may be defined on either end of the
element. Because of this, some lines in the report with no corresponding output are blank.

Global Element Forces

Reports forces and moments on the piping for each node in the model. The report also displays
element names.

Global Element Forces Extended

Reports forces and moments, including shear forces, bending moments, and torsional moments,
on the piping for each node in the model. The report also displays element names.

Local Element Forces

Reports forces and moments translated into the CAESAR II local coordinate system. The report
also displays element names. For more information, see Local Coordinates (on page 1098) in
the Technical Discussions section of the CAESAR II User's Guide.

Stresses
Reports stress intensification factors and code stresses for each node in the model. The report
displays the code stresses as a percentage when compared to the allowable stress at each
node. Stresses are not computed at nodes on rigid elements or on structural steel elements.
The report also displays element names.

Stresses Extended
Reports stress intensification factors and code stresses for each node in the model. The report
displays the code stresses as a percentage when compared to the allowable stress at each
node. Stresses are not computed at nodes on rigid elements or on structural steel elements.
The report also displays axial stresses, bending stresses, torsional stresses, hoop stresses, and
element names.

Stress Summary
The highest stresses at each node are presented in summary format for all selected load cases.

Code Compliance Report

Stress checks for multiple load cases can be included in a single report using the Code
Compliance report. The report shows the stress calculation for all selected load cases together,
on an element-by-element basis.

Cumulative Usage Report

The Cumulative Usage report is available only when there are one or more fatigue-type load
cases present. After the Cumulative Usage report is generated, regardless of the number of
load cases selected, the report shows the combined impact of simulating selected fatigue
loadings.

Bend KHK2 Evaluation Report

Reports bend behavior due to KHK Level 2 loading conditions. The software generates a
separate report for each selected load case. When theta ( ) bend values exceed the allowable
theta, the check fails, and the failing bends display in red.
Only bends are included in this report.

Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For more
information, see Filter Reports (on page 625).
General Computed Results

General Computed Results lists reports, such as input listings or hanger selection reports,
which are not associated with load cases.
Topics
Load Case Report .......................................................................... 648
Hanger Table and Hanger Table with Text .................................... 648
Input Echo ...................................................................................... 649
Miscellaneous Data ....................................................................... 650
Warnings ........................................................................................ 651

Load Case Report

The Load Case Report documents the Basic Names (as built in the Load Case Builder),
User-Defined Names, Combination Methods, Load Cycles, and Load Cases (Output Status,
Output Type, Snubber Status, Hanger Stiffness Status, and Friction Multiplier) of the static load
cases. This report is available from the General Computed Results column of the Static
Output Processor.
Hanger Table and Hanger Table with Text

The Hanger Table report provides basic information regarding spring hangers either selected by
CAESAR II or by you:
Node number
Number of springs required
Hanger table figure number and size
Hot load
Theoretical installed load (the hanger setting in the field prior to pulling the pins)
Actual installed load (the load on the hanger when the pipe is empty)
Spring rate from the catalog
Horizontal movement determined from the CAESAR II output.
Hanger constant effort force (provided when constant effort supports are selected)

The Hanger Table with Text report displays more descriptive text and includes additional
information:
Variable support spring designed
Maximum and minimum allowed single spring load
Recommended installation clearance as read from the catalogs
Input Echo
Displays the Input Listing Options dialog box and allows you to select which portions of the
input are reported in this output format. All basic element data (geometry), operating conditions,
material properties, boundary conditions, and report formatting are available:

Offsets Title
Uniform Loads
Wind/Wave
SIF's and TEE's
Bends
Rigids
Expansion Joints
Reducers
Flanges
Equipment Check
Restraints
Displacements
Hanger
Flexible Nozzles
Select the options you want to print or view, and then click OK.

Miscellaneous Data
Displays the Miscellaneous Data Options dialog box and allows you to select which portions of
the input are reported in this output format. Select the options you want to print or view, and then
click OK.
The following report options are available:
Bends SIF
SIF and flexibility data for bends
Allowables
Allowable stress summary
Tees SIF
SIF and flexibility data for tees
Reducers
Reducers report
Nozzles
Nozzle flexibility data
Pipe Prop #1
Pipe properties report with weights and minimum calculated wall thickness for each element
Pipe Prop #2
Pipe properties report with weights and minimum calculated wall thickness for each element
C.G.
Center-of-gravity report
B.O.M.
Bill of materials
Wind
Wind input data
Wave
Wave input data
Seismic
Seismic input and calculated g factors (magnifiers of gravitational loading).

Warnings
All warnings reported during the error checking process are summarized here.
Output Viewer Wizard

After clicking More >> in the lower right corner of the Static Output Processor, the Output
Viewer Wizard dialog box displays. The Output Viewer Wizard can be hidden again by clicking
Less <<.
The Output Viewer Wizard consists of the Report Order window and auxiliary operational
buttons. You can add any report to the view by clicking Add. You can delete any report by
clicking Remove. You can arrange the order of the reports by highlighting the report and then
moving it up or down by clicking Move Up or Move Down.
You can send a report to the screen or to a printer by selecting the appropriate radio button in
the upper section of the Output Viewer Wizard dialog box. After clicking Finish, the reports are
automatically sent to the specified device in the order displayed in the Report Order window.
To generate a table of contents, select Generate Table of Contents (TOC).

The Table of Contents does not display if Send to Screen is selected, regardless if
the Generate Table of Contents (TOC) check box was selected or cleared.
Report Template Editor

You can create your own reports or edit existing reports using the Report Template Editor. To
create a new report, select one or more load cases, and then click Add New Custom Report
Template (Options > Custom Reports > New on the menu). You can also customize an
existing report by selecting the load case, a standard or custom report name, and then clicking
Edit an Existing Custom Report Template (Options > Custom Reports > Edit on the
menu).
The Report Template Editor dialog box consists of two sections: the template editor to the left
and the preview grid to the right.
The template editor has a tree-
There are 11 major categories available: Template Name and Template Settings for general
report editing, and several output fields; Displacements, Restraints, Local Restraints, Equipment
Nozzle Checks, Global and Local Forces, Flange Evaluation, Stresses, and Hanger Table Data.
The Template Name category allows you to specify the report name, enter a brief description of
the report, and select the report type. The report name followed by the template description
displays on the preview grid if the Include Report Name option is checked under the Template
Settings category.
There are three report types available:
Individual
Generates output reports, one per selected load case, in a format similar to the standard
Displacements or Restraints reports.

Summary
Generates a single output report for all the specified load cases as a summary, in a
format similar to the standard Restraint Summary report.
Code Compliance
Generates an output stress check report for multiple load cases as a single report,
similar to the standard Code Compliance report.
Actual columns and their order on the reports are controlled solely by you. Data from
various categories can be customized on a single report to suit your needs.
The Template Settings category provides options for the report header and the report body
text, formatting, and alignment. You can also set the font face, size, and color for the header and
the report body. You can include or remove specific header text (such as Report Name, Job
Title or Filters Description) by selecting and clearing the check box next to the corresponding
item. Report Line Spacing changes the spacing between lines of text. The Summary Line
check box (used with Summary-type reports) toggles the appearance of the summary line with
MAX values for each field or column per node. Select the Node Number/Name check box (used
with Summary-type reports) to repeat the Node information on each Loadcase line. If you clear
this option, then the node will appear on the separate line above the data for load cases. These
two options may help with later data manipulations when sending the reports to a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet
Any changes in the editor are immediately reflected in the preview window.
Each of the following categories consists of related output data. For example, the
Displacements category contains three translational (DX, DY, and DZ) and three rotational
(RX, RY, and RZ) fields, Stresses contains Axial, Bending, and Code stresses among other
stress related fields. A number next to the field name indicates the Column Order this field will
be placed in. When nothing or a zero value is specified, this column will not be included in the
current report.
Each field contains the following information:
Field Name Description
Column Number Indicates the order of the fields in the output report.
Precision Indicates the number of decimal places to be displayed.
Sort Order Specifies whether the data in the column is in ascending,

descending, or in no order. This gives you flexibility of reviewing
reports for maximum (or minimum) values.
Font Specifies the text font face, size and color for this field whenever
special formatting is required. Set the generic font settings for the
entire report at the Template Settings > Body category.
Align Values Controls left, right, or center alignment of the values in the
column.

Field Name Description
Field Caption Customize the name of the field as it appears on the report. This
may be useful to customize the display of the output
displacements in the report to reflect the plant
North/South/East/West directions or vertical and horizontal
notations instead of generic X, Y, Z.
Column Width Controls the size of the column in terms of the number of
displayed characters or digits. In addition, resizing the columns in
the Preview Grid adjusts the Column Width value. Type 0 to
close the column and remove it from the report. Type -1 to size
the column to the predefined default size.
Units Based Indicates whether to enable the automatic control of the displayed
Precision number of decimal places to be calculated based on the selected
display units. This value is used together with the Units
Conversion Label value. The Precision value is ignored in this
case. When set to No, the Precision value takes place.
When a category or any particular field is highlighted in the editor, the help text for
this field displays in the Help box at the bottom of the editor window.
The Preview Grid on the right of the Custom Report Template Editor dialog is interactive. You
can drag the columns by their heading to arrange the order of the fields in the reports.
Double-
The dragged column number or sorted order value will automatically be saved in the Column
Number or Sort Order entry of that field in the editor tree. Click the column header once to
highlight that field in the editor tree, extend its contents and scroll it to view.
The Preview Grid is limited to the first 50 lines. The entire report is available after
you select the appropriate load cases and custom report name on the Static Output Processor
dialog box and click View Report.
Any current changes to the custom report template can be saved by clicking Save. The custom
report template can also be saved under a different name by clicking Save As... The Save As...
dialog box prompts you to enter the new template name, a brief description, and the report type.
Click Preview Report to remove the grid lines from the Preview Grid. Click the same button
again to add the grid lines for editing.
Available Commands
The Static Output Processor window menus and toolbars provide commands to review,
create, and modify reports. The 3D/HOOPS Graphics toolbars navigate and display report
information in graphics mode.

Topics
View Menu ..................................................................................... 655
Options Menu ................................................................................ 660
Plot Options Menu ......................................................................... 669
Plot View Menu .............................................................................. 686
Element Viewer Dialog Box ........................................................... 688
View Menu
Activates and disables toolbars.
Topics
Standard Toolbar ........................................................................... 655
Displacements Toolbar .................................................................. 656
Grow Toolbar ................................................................................. 657
Restraints Toolbar ......................................................................... 657
Stresses Toolbar ............................................................................ 657
Reports Navigation Toolbar ........................................................... 658
Custom Reports Toolbar ................................................................ 659
Open
Opens a different job for output review. You are prompted for the file to open.
Save
Saves the selected reports to a text file. You are prompted for the file name. A table of
contents for all currently selected reports is added to the end of the text file.
Load Case Name
Selects either the CAESAR II Default Load Case Names or the User-Defined Load Case
Names for output reports. The selected name also displays in the Load Cases Analyzed
list box in the Static Output Processor window. You enter user-defined load case names in
the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor on the Load Cases tab. For more information, see
Load Cases Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 587).
Node Name
Defines the formatting of the node numbers and names for generated reports. For more
information, see Node Name (on page 668).
Title Lines
Inserts report titles for a group of reports. For more information, see Title Lines (on page
668).
Return to Input
Opens the Piping Input Processor. For more information, see Piping Input Reference (on
page 112).
View Animation

Shows animation of the displacement solution. For more information, see View Animations
(on page 664).
Graphical Output
Superimposes analytical results onto a plot of the system model. For more information, see
Graphical Output (on page 665).
Print
Prints the selected reports. After closing, or exiting, a Table of Contents is printed.
Using Microsoft Word
Send the report directly to Microsoft Word. For more information, see Using Microsoft Word
(on page 661).
Using Microsoft Excel
Sends output reports directly to Excel. For more information, see Using Microsoft Excel (on
page 661).
On Screen
Displays the selected reports in a window on the computer screen. For more information,
see On Screen (on page 660).
Maximum Displacements
Places the actual magnitude of the X, Y, or Z displacements on the currently displayed
model.
The element containing the displaced node is highlighted, and the camera
viewpoint is repositioned preserving the optical distance to the model. This brings the
displaced node to the center of the view.
a. The software starts with the highest value for the given direction. After you press Enter,
the remaining values are placed in a similar manner until all values become zero.
b. Click Maximum Displacements again to clear the view of the displayed values and
highlighting.
Click Show > Displacement > Maximum Displacement >X, Y, or Z to access this
command from the menu. If Show Element Viewer Grid is selected, then the viewer
displays the Displacements report for the selected load case and highlights the column and
row to represent the displacement direction and current node.

Deflected Shape
Overlays the scaled geometry with a different color into the current plot for the selected load
case. Click the down arrow to display an additional menu with the selected feature checked
and the Adjust Deflection Scale option.
Adjust Deflection Scale
Specifies the deflected shape plot scale factor. You may not be able to see the deflected
shape if the value is too small. If you enter a scale value that is too large, the model may be
discontinued. Select Show > Displacement > Scale to access this command from the
menu.
Grow
Displays the expansion of a selected pipe due to the addition of heat.
Output Restraints Symbols

Adds restraint symbols to the plot. Restraints are plotted as arrowheads with the direction of
the arrow indicating the direction of the force exerted by the restraint on the piping
geometry.
Maximum Restraint Loads

Places the actual magnitude of the calculated restraint loads for a selected load case on the
currently displayed geometry. Maximum Restraints Loads displays the load magnitude
value next to the node, highlights the element containing the node, and is brought to the
center of the graphics view. The Zoom to Selection and Show Event Viewer Grid options
are still available. After pressing Enter, any remaining values are placed in a similar
manner.
Overstress
Displays the overstressed point distribution for a particular load case. Nodes with a
calculated code stress to allowable stress ratio of 100% or more display in red. The
remaining nodes or elements display in the color selected for the lowest percent ratio. This
feature is useful to quickly observe the overstressed areas in the model.
Overstressed conditions are only detected for load cases where a code compliance check
was done (such as where there are allowable stresses available).
Overstressed nodes display in red in the Event Viewer dialog box (if it is enabled).
The model is still fully functional. You can zoom, pan, or rotate it.
Maximum Code Stress
Displays the stress magnitudes in descending order.
Maximum Code Stress operation is similar to Maximum Displacements. The

stress value is displayed next to the node, and the element containing the node is
highlighted and moved to the center of the view.
If needed, use the Zoom to Selection and Show Event Viewer Grid options. Press Enter
and the next highest value is placed with corresponding element highlighting.
In addition to the numbers that could be found in a corresponding report, this command
provides a graphical representation and distribution of large, calculated code stresses
throughout the system.
Code Stress Colors by Value
Displays the piping system in a range of colors where the color corresponds to a certain
boundary value of the code stress. Use this feature to see the distribution of the code
stresses in the model for a particular load case.
In addition to the model color highlight in the graphics view, the corresponding color key
legend window is displayed in the top left corner of the graphics view. The legend window
can be resized and moved.
The colors and corresponding stress levels can be set in the Configuration/Environment.
For more information, see Configuration Editor (on page 55).
Code Stress Colors by Percent
Displays the piping system in a range of colors, where the color corresponds to a certain
percentage ratio of code stress to allowable stress. This option is only valid for load cases
where a code compliance check was done such as where there are allowable stresses.
Use Code Stress Colors by Percent to see the distribution of the code stress to allowable
ratios in the model for a particular load case. The legend window with the corresponding
color key also displays in the upper-left corner of the graphics view. The legend window can
be resized and moved.
Clicking the arrow to the right of the button displays an additional menu with two options:
Display and Adjust Settings. Selecting the Display option displays the color distribution.
Selecting the Adjust Settings option displays the Stress Settings dialog box where values
and corresponding colors can be set or adjusted. These settings are related to the particular
job for which they are set, and are saved in the corresponding job_name.XML file in the
current job data directory see Configuring 3D Graphics (on page 422).
Navigation commands in this toolbar become enabled by selecting at least one report.
/ View Previous Report / View Next Report
Navigates through the report tabs.
Go To
Displays the list of currently-opened reports in alphabetical order so that you can quickly and
conveniently display the required report.
Find in Report
Provides search capabilities for a specific node number, maximum values of any of the
report fields, of for any text or number.
Zoom In / Zoom Out

Zooms the view in or out without affecting the actual report font or formatting. The zoom
level can also be controlled from the right-mouse-click context menu. The zoom level is
applied to the current report and is temporal until the report is closed.
Save Current Custom Report Template
Saves the changes to the custom report when the Report Template Editor is opened.
Save Current Custom Report Template with a New Name

Enables keeping the original report and saving the changes to another report when the
Report Template Editor is launched.
Preview Report
Removes the grid lines from the Preview Grid. Clicking the button again adds the grid lines.
Commands in the Custom Reports toolbar enable you to manipulate the generated reports.
Add New Custom Report Template

Creates a new custom report. For more information, see New Custom Report Template (on
page 661).
Edit Existing Custom Report Template
Modifies an existing custom report. For more information, see Edit Custom Report Template
(on page 662).
Delete Custom Report Template

Deletes a custom report. For more information, see Delete Custom Report Template (on
page 663).
Reset Default Custom Report Templates

Replaces the current custom report templates with the default templates. For more
information, see Reset Default Custom Report Templates (on page 663).
Import Custom Report

Imports a custom report template. For more information, see Import Custom Report (on
page 663).
Export Custom Report

Saves any custom generated report to a text file. For more information, see Export Custom
Report (on page 663).

Options Menu
Specifies common settings that are available on all reports such as how node numbers display
and title information.
Topics
On Screen ...................................................................................... 660
Set Report Font ............................................................................. 660
Using Microsoft Word .................................................................... 661
Using Microsoft Excel .................................................................... 661
New Custom Report Template ...................................................... 661
Edit Custom Report Template ....................................................... 662
Delete Custom Report Template ................................................... 663
Reset Default Custom Report Templates ...................................... 663
Import Custom Report ................................................................... 663
Export Custom Report ................................................................... 663
View Animations ............................................................................ 664
Graphical Output ............................................................................ 665
Data Export Wizard ........................................................................ 668
Title Lines....................................................................................... 668
Load Case Name ........................................................................... 668
Node Name .................................................................................... 668
Return to Input ............................................................................... 669
Displays the selected reports on the monitor. This permits the analysis data to be reviewed
interactively in text format. After selecting the combination of one or more active load cases with
any combination of report options, select Options > View Reports > On Screen. Each report is
presented one at a time for inspection. You can scroll through the reports vertically and
horizontally. You can also click On Screen on the toolbar.
Activates the Font dialog box used to define the text font, font style, and font size. You can
select this command from Options > View Reports > Set Report Font on the Static Output
Processor window menus, or by clicking the small down arrow next to On Screen on the
standard toolbar. Some fonts that you can display reports in to the screen may not be available
on your printer. If the font is not available for your printer, the closest matching font on your
printer is used.

Send output reports directly to Microsoft Word, which permits the use of all of Microsoft Word
formatting features (font selection, margin control, and so forth) and printer support from
CAESAR II. Select Options > View Reports > Using Microsoft Word or click on the
toolbar.
Word is available as an output device to the Static Output Processor and the Dynamic
Output windows. You can append multiple reports to form a final report by:
1. Select the required reports.
2. Click View Reports Using Microsoft Word .
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add more reports.
A table of contents, reflecting the cumulatively produced reports, displays on the first page of the
Microsoft Word document.
features and printer support from CAESAR II. Excel is available as an output device to the
Static Output Processor window. You can append multiple reports to form a final report by:
1. Select the required reports.
2. Click View Reports using Microsoft Excel .
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add more reports.
Each report displays in a separate spreadsheet with the corresponding report name. There is no
generated table of contents.
Creates a new custom report using the Report Template Editor dialog box. For more
information, see Report Template Editor (on page 652). You must select at least one load case
from the Load Cases Analyzed list before you can create a new report template.
1. From the Load Cases Analyzed list, select the load case for the custom report template.
2. Click Options > Custom Reports > New .

3. In the Template Name box, enter a name for your custom report.
4. In the Template Description box, enter a description.
5. Using the Report Template Editor dialog box options, create your custom report.

6. Click Save Current Custom Report Template on the Reports Navigation toolbar.
Do not use File > Save or the Save command on the main toolbar.
Your report appears in the Custom Reports list.
Modifies and saves existing custom reports using the Report Template Editor. For more
information, see Report Template Editor (on page 652).
1. Select one or more load cases from the list.
2. From the Custom Reports list, select the report to edit.
3. Select Options > Custom Reports > Edit .
4. Using the Report Template Editor dialog box options, edit your custom report.
5. Click Save Current Custom Report Template on the Reports Navigation toolbar.
Do not use File > Save or the Save command on the main toolbar.
- OR -
Click Save Current Custom Report Template with a New Name to save your edit to a
new custom report leaving the original report unchanged.

Deletes a custom report template. You cannot delete a standard delivered report using this
command.
You cannot undo the deletion of a custom report template.
1. From the Custom Reports list, select the report to delete.
2. Select Options > Custom Reports > Delete .

3. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the report.
Replaces the current report templates, both CAESAR II delivered and custom defined
reports, with the default report templates delivered with CAESAR II. Use this command if you
received a new version or a patch of CAESAR II and want to use the new reports.
Make sure that you export any custom reports that you want to keep before
using this command. This command affects ALL jobs system-wide and cannot be undone. For
more information about exporting custom reports, see Export Custom Report (on page 663).
Imports a custom report template that was exported earlier using Options > Custom
Reports > Export .
The report template file extension is *.C2RPT and can be read from any network location. After
the report template file is imported, it becomes a part of the current configuration. The new
report is appended to the Custom Reports list of the Static Output Processor window. The
default name of the template file corresponds to the custom report name. You can also access
this feature by selecting Options > Custom Reports > Import.
Saves any custom generated report to a text file, which you can then share with others. The
report template file name extension is *.C2RPT and can be saved to any accessible location.
The default file name is the custom report name. Use Options > Custom Reports > Import
to import these saved custom reports.
1. In the Custom Reports list, select the report to export.
2. Select Options > Custom Reports > Export .

3. Select a folder and enter a file name.
4. Click Save.

Static Output Processor menu: Options > View Animation

Standard toolbar: View Animation
Shortcut key:
ALT+M - Motion
Displays the piping system as it moves to the displaced position of the basic load cases. To
animate the static results, select Options > View Animations. The following screen displays:
The Animated Plot menu has several plot selections. Motion and Volume Motion are the
commands to activate the animation. Motion uses centerline representation while Volume
Motion produces 3D graphics. Select the load case from the drop-down list. Animations may be
sped up, slowed down, or stopped using the toolbars.
CAESAR II also enables you to save animated plots as HTML files by selecting File > Save As
Animation. After saving these files, you can view them on any computer outside of CAESAR II.
The corresponding animation graphics file <job_name>.hsf must be transferred along
with the HTML file for proper display.

To support a graphics mode, the Static Output Processor window provides 3D/HOOPS
Graphics toolbars that contain commands to zoom, orbit, and pan, as well as provide the ability
to switch views and modes.
The 3D/HOOPS Graphics toolbar commands include the display of displaced shapes,
highlighting and zooming to maximum displacements, restraint loads, and stresses of the model.
Another advantage provided by 3D/HOOPS graphics is the graphical representation of stresses
by value and by percentage use color.
A variety of CAESAR II Output Plot functions, accessed from the 3D/HOOPS Graphics toolbars
or the Show menu, are broken into submenus:
Displacements
Restraints
Forces/Moments
Stresses
Show Event Viewer Grid

Shows or hides the Event Viewer on the plot. See Element Viewer Dialog Box (on page
688).
Zoom to Selection
Fits the selected element in the view.
Line Numbers
Displays the Line Numbers dialog box, which allows graphical editing of line numbers. You
can do the following from this pane.
Assign a new line number to the block of elements that have been selected on the 3D
graphical display.
Remove an existing line number.
Set and reset visibility options to hide and unhide elements.
Assign a color to an individual line number.
To reassign one or more elements from one line number to another existing line number,
simply drag-and-drop (move) the elements between existing Line Numbers in the Line
Numbers dialog box.
When you click the Line Number name in the Line Number dialog box, the corresponding
elements are highlighted in the 3D pane and are selected to perform block (global)
operations.
For more information, see Line Numbers Dialog Box (on page 666).

Controls options of the line number or name for a pipeline/pipe run containing one or more pipe
elements. You can set options for line numbers on the Classic Piping Input and the Static
Output Processor.
Create (Create from Selection)

Creates a pipe run from the selected elements. You can select elements from the 3D model
or the Line Numbers dialog box. The line number is given the default name Line Number
<x>, where <x> is a sequential number. This option is only available in Classic Piping
Input.
Remove (Remove Line Number)

Deletes the selected pipe run line numbers. Elements in the pipeline move to the next line
number up in the sequence. This option is only available in Classic Piping Input.
You can also right-click select Remove Line Number.
Reset (Reset Settings)

Returns settings for all line numbers and their elements to their default values. Use the drop
down to select Reset Visibility, Reset Color, or Reset All.
You can also right-click on a line and select Reset Visibility, Reset Color, or
Reset All to only reset the selected line number.
Line number and element rows display in a tree view. Elements are named by their beginning
and ending node numbers. You can create a view using the following methods:
Select a row to change the visibility to 100%. Clear a row to change the visibility to 0%.
When you select or clear a line number, the software also selects or clears all of line
number's elements. You can then select or clear individual elements.
Select or clear Main to change the selection of all line numbers and elements. You can then
select or clear individual line numbers and elements.
Press SHIFT + click to select multiple line numbers or multiple elements.

Previous (Previous View)

Saves the current view and returns to the previous view. If no view is saved, all rows are
selected.
Invert (Invert Selection)

Reverses the line number selection to clear the selection of previously-selected rows and to
select the rows not previously selected.
<type here to search>
Limits the elements that display in the Line Numbers dialog box to pipe run line numbers or
elements that match the text in this field. Clear this field to display all line numbers and
elements in the tree view. You can search for a name or a node number.
Show/Hide
Turns the display of line numbers and elements on or off. Clear a line number to reduce
visibility to 0% for the line number and its elements. Clear an element to reduce visibility to
0% for only that element.
If node numbers are turned on, node numbers do not display when the element
opacity is 0%. For more information on displaying node numbers, see Node Numbers (on
page 378).
Visibility
Specifies the opacity of line numbers and elements. 100% indicates that the element is
opaque. 0% indicates that the element is invisible. Specify the value of a line number to
change opacity for the line number and its elements. Specify the value of an element to
change opacity for only that element.
If node numbers are turned on, the node number opacity matches the element
opacity. For more information on displaying node numbers, see Node Numbers (on page
378).
Color

Displays the Color dialog box from which you can specify a color for a line number and its
elements.
Name
Displays the name of line number and elements. Click on a line number to change its name.
Main window Interfaces tab: Generic > Data Export Wizard
Main window menu: Tools > External Interfaces > Data Export Wizard
Static Output Processor menu: Options > Data Export Wizard
Static Output Processor Standard toolbar: Data Export Wizard

Provides export of both the input model and output data. For more information, see Data Export
Wizard.
After finishing an export or canceling the Data Export Wizard, the software returns to the Static
Output Processor.
Inserts report titles for a group of reports. You can enter a two-line title or description for a
report. The title can be assigned once for all load case reports sent to the printer or a disk drive;
or the title can be changed for each individual report before it is moved to the output device.
The title line allows for 28 characters per line.
Selects either the CAESAR II Default Load Case Names or the User-Defined Load Case
Names for output reports. The selected name also displays in the Load Cases Analyzed list
box in the Static Output Processor window. You enter user-defined load case names in the
Static Analysis - Load Case Editor on the Load Cases tab. For more information, see Load
Cases Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 587).
Static Output Processor menu: Options > Node Name

Static Output Processor Standard toolbar: Node Name
Defines the formatting of the node numbers and names for generated reports.
Select the format to use from the Node Name Choice dialog box:
Node Number Only
Number (Name)
Number -- Name
Node Name Only

Name (Number)
Name -- (Number)
Opens the Piping Input Processor. For more information, see Piping Input Reference (on
page 112).
Plot Options Menu

Performs actions associated with the display of the model. You must select Options >
Graphical Output before these commands are available.
Topics
Range ............................................................................................ 670
Restraints ....................................................................................... 671
Anchors .......................................................................................... 671
Displacements ............................................................................... 672
Hangers ......................................................................................... 675
Nozzle Flexibility ............................................................................ 676
Flange Check ................................................................................. 676
Nozzle Check ................................................................................. 676
Forces ............................................................................................ 676
Uniform Loads ............................................................................... 677
Wind/Wave..................................................................................... 678
Axis ................................................................................................ 678
Node Numbers ............................................................................... 679
Length ............................................................................................ 680
Tees ............................................................................................... 681
Expansion Joints & Rigids ............................................................. 681
Diameters....................................................................................... 681
Wall Thickness ............................................................................... 682
Corrosion ....................................................................................... 682
Piping Codes ................................................................................. 682
Materials ........................................................................................ 682
Pipe Density ................................................................................... 683
Fluid Density .................................................................................. 683
Refractory Thickness ..................................................................... 683
Refractory Density ......................................................................... 683
Insulation Thickness ...................................................................... 684
Insulation Density .......................................................................... 684
Cladding Thickness ....................................................................... 684
Cladding Density ............................................................................ 684
Insul/Cladding Unit Wt ................................................................... 685
Temperatures ................................................................................ 685
Pressures ....................................................................................... 685

Piping Input menu: Options > Range
Plot Tools toolbar: Range

Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+U
Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful when you need to
locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large model. This command displays
the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U.
Using the Range command affects the display and operation of other 3D graphics
highlighting options. For example, if part of the model is not visible because of the use of the
Range command, then the Diameters command only highlights the elements that are
visible. Also, if using the Range command hides any nodes containing the predefined
displacements, the Displacements legend grid still displays, but the model may not
highlight correctly.
Find may not work properly for the part of the model that is hidden by the range. The
corresponding message displays in the status bar.
Controls options for manipulating ranges.

Show only
Specifies the items to show.
From
Specifies the node number for the start of the range.
To
Specifies the node number for the end of the range.
At These Elements
All elements that exist in the model are displayed. This list indicates which elements are
included in the range. Clear the check box for elements that you do not want to include.
Add
Adds an item to the At These Elements list.
Reverse Selection
Clears all check boxes that were selected in the At These Elements list and selects all
check boxes that were cleared.
Select All
Selects all the check boxes in the At These Elements list.
Clear All
Clears all of the check boxes in the At These Elements list.

Piping Input menu: Options > Restraints

Plot Tools toolbar: Restraints
Shortcut keys: CTRL+ALT+R
Turns the display of restraints on or off on the current model.
On the toolbar, click the arrow on the icon to indicate the display size of the restraints and
whether or not the software displays restraints with or without connecting nodes (CNodes).
When Restraints is turned on the software displays:
A directional arrow for a restraint.
A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) for rotational restraints,
such as RX, RY, or RZ.
Piping Input menu: Options > Anchors

Plot Tools toolbar: Anchors
Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+A
Turns the display of anchors on or off.
Click the arrow on the icon to indicate what size you want the anchors to display on your model,
as well as whether or not the software displays anchors with or without connecting nodes
(CNodes).

Piping Input menu: Options > Displacements

Plot Tools toolbar: Displacements
Shortcut key: CTRL+SHIFT+D
Turns the display of displacements on or off. This option also controls the display of
displacements on CNode restraints.
When Displacements is turned on, the software displays:
A directional arrow for the resultant linear displacement vector.
A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) for the resultant
rotational displacement vector.
A pair of shorter directional arrows for Fixed linear displacement. (Disp. Value = 0)
A pair of shorter directional arrows with curved arrows for Fixed rotational displacement.

A directional arrow with a sphere at the top for non-fixed displacement which indicates
hidden fixed vectors.
A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) with a sphere at the top
for the resultant rotational non-fixed displacement which indicates hidden fixed vectors.
On the toolbar, you can also specify:

Whether to hide or show fixed displacements - Show Fixed.

Hover the cursor over displacement arrows to see the displacement values for the displayed
vector:
Where a restraint has a CNode with displacement, the displacements are displayed with values
displayed with the Node number:
You can change the default arrow color in the Graphics Settings of the
Configuration Editor or by using Plot Properties . For more information, see Displacements
(Component Color) (see "Displacements" on page 81) and Display Options Toolbar (on page
388).

Piping Input menu: Options > Hangers
Plot Tools toolbar: Hangers

Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+H
Turns the display of hangers on or off.
On the toolbar, click the arrow on the icon to indicate the display size of the hangers and
whether or not the software displays hangers with or without connecting nodes (CNodes).
When Hangers is turned on, the software displays:
A single hanger at the location of the hanger.
Multiple hangers at a single location as separate symbols with leaders to the location.
This is a graphical representation of the number of hangers at the location, not of

the hanger installation.

Piping Input menu: Options > NozzleFlexibility

Plot Tools toolbar: Nozzles
Displays the nozzles for which you want to specify stiffnesses.
Piping Input menu: Options > Flange Check

Plot Tools toolbar: Flanges
Displays the flange nodes that the software evaluates.
Piping Input menu: Options > Nozzle Check

Plot Tools toolbar: Nozzle Limits
Displays the nozzles in which you want to set a check.
Piping Input menu: Options > Forces

Legends toolbar: Forces
Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+F
Turns the display of forces and moments on and off.
When Forces are turned on, the software displays:

A directional arrow for a force.
A directional arrow and curved arrow (following the right-hand rule) for a moment.
You can also specify:

You can change the default arrow colors in the Graphics Settings of the
Configuration Editor. For more information, see Forces/Moments 1 (on page 82) and
Forces/Moments 2 (on page 82).
Piping Input menu: Options > Uniform Loads

Legends toolbar: Uniform Loads
Updates the model to show each uniform load in a different color. Use this option to see the
uniform load variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the uniform loads defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
The uniform load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click
Next >> and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node number
where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Because the data propagates throughout the
model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.

Piping Input menu: Options > Wind/Wave

Legends toolbar: Wind/Wave
Updates the model to show each wind or wave load in a different color. Use this option to see
the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key
displays the wind or wave loads defined in the model.
The wind and wave load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data.
Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the loads.
All the elements with wind defined display in red. All the elements with wave data defined
display in green. The legend grid shows the relevant data.
Piping Input menu: Options > Axis
Plot Tools toolbar: Axis

Shortcut key: ALT+SHIFT+P
Turns the display of the coordinate system on or off. You can select the following options (in
Classic Piping Input and Static Output Processor):
Axis Planes
Displays planes with the coordinate system axes.
Axis
Displays the coordinate system axes.
Off
Turns off axis display.
The software sets the default value from the value of Axis Mode (on page 91) in
the Configuration Editor.
North Arrow

Displays a north arrow with the coordinate system. The North arrow indicates the North
orientation of the plant.
The software sets the default value from the value of North Direction (on page
92) in the Configuration Editor.
Piping Input menu: Options > Node Numbers

Piping Input Plot Tools toolbar: Node Numbers
Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+N
Turns the display of node numbers on or off.
When node numbers are turned on, the software always displays the number in front of the pipe:
You can also click and select Node Display Options to control the node number display:
Show All
Displays all node numbers or names.
Anchors
Displays anchor node numbers or names.
Hangers
Displays hanger node numbers or names.
Restraints
Displays restraint node numbers or names.

Show Tags
Displays support tags, hanger tags, and element names.
Number Only
Displays node numbers if they are assigned. Node names do not display.
Name Only
Displays node names if they are assigned. Node numbers do not display.
The following formats display node name and node number:
Number (Name)
Name (Number)
Number - Name
Name - Number
You must select a format in combination with the Show All, Anchors, Hangers, or Restraints
filters.
You can customize node number, node name, and tag display by combining options, such as:
All + Show Tags displays all node numbers, names, and tags.
Anchors + Show Tags displays anchor node numbers, names, and tags.
All + Names Only displays all node names. Node numbers and tags do not display.
Hangers + Names Only displays hanger node names. Node numbers and tags do not
display.
All + Show Tags + Names Only displays all node names. Node numbers and tags do not
display.
In cases where a node contains multiple values, a tag overrides a node name, and a
node name overrides a node number.
Piping Input menu: Options > Length
Plot Tools toolbar: Lengths

Shortcut key: ALT+SHIFT+L
Turns the display of element lengths on or off. Alternatively, press L.

Piping Input menu: Options > Tees

Plot Tools toolbar: Tees
Shortcut key: ALT+SHIFT+T
Displays where you have specified tees or SIFs on the model.
Piping Input menu: Options > Expansion Joints & Rigids
Plot Tools toolbar: Expansion Joints & Rigids

Emphasizes the display of elements such as restraints, anchors, displacements, and expansion
joints by changing pipe element display to lines.
Piping Input menu: Options > Diameters
Legends toolbar: Diameters

Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+D
Updates the model to show each diameter in a different color. Use this option to see the
diameter variations throughout the system or to verify that diameter changes have been made.
Alternatively, press D. A color key displays the diameters defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs and update diameter settings.

Piping Input menu: Options > Wall Thicknesses
Legends toolbar: Wall Thicknesses

Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+W
Updates the model to show each wall thickness in a different color. Use this option to see the
wall thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press W. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
Piping Input menu: Options > Corrosion
Legends toolbar: Corrosion

Updates the model to show each corrosion allowance in a different color. Use this option to see
the corrosion variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the corrosion allowances defined in the model. You can change the assigned
Piping Input menu: Options > Piping Codes

Legends toolbar: Piping Codes
Updates the model to show each piping code in a different color. Use this option to see the
piping code variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Piping Input menu: Options > Material

Legends toolbar: Materials
Shortcut key: CTRL+ALT+M
Updates the model to show each material in a different color. Use this option to see the material
variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. Alternatively, press
M. A color key displays the materials defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors
to meet your needs.

Piping Input menu: Options > Pipe Density

Legends toolbar: Pipe Density
Updates the model to show each pipe density in a different color. Use this option to see the pipe
displays the pipe densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet
your needs.
Piping Input menu: Options > Fluid Density
Legends toolbar: Fluid Density

Updates the model to show each fluid density in a different color. Use this option to see the fluid
displays the fluid densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet
your needs.
Piping Input menu: Options > Refractory Thickness

Updates the model to show each refractory thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the refractory thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
Piping Input menu: Options > Refractory Density

Updates the model to show each refractory density in a different color. Use this option to see the
refractory density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the refractory densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned

Piping Input menu: Options > Insulation Thickness

Legends toolbar: Insulation
Shortcut key: ALT+SHIFT+I
Updates the model to show each insulation thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the insulation thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. Alternatively, press I. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
Piping Input menu: Options > Insulation Density
Legends toolbar: Insulation Density

Updates the model to show each insulation density in a different color. Use this option to see the
insulation density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the insulation densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
Piping Input menu: Options > Cladding Thickness

Updates the model to show each cladding thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the cladding thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
Piping Input menu: Options > Cladding Density

Updates the model to show each cladding density in a different color. Use this option to see the
cladding density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the cladding densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned

Piping Input menu: Options > Insul/Cladding Unit Wt

Updates the model to show each insulation or cladding unit weight in a different color. Use this
option to see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the insulation or cladding unit weights defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Piping Input menu: Options > Temperatures > T1 ...T9
Static Output Processor menu: Plot Options > Temperatures > T1 ...T9
Legends toolbar: Show Temps

Shortcut keys:

Displays the temperature parameters that you have defined. You can define up to nine
temperature parameters.
Piping Input menu: Options > Pressures
Legends toolbar: Show Pressures

Displays the pressure parameters that you have defined.

Plot View Menu

Performs actions associated with viewing the model. You must select Options > Graphical
Output before these commands are available.
Topics
Reset.............................................................................................. 686
Front View ...................................................................................... 686
Back View ...................................................................................... 686
Top View ........................................................................................ 687
Bottom View ................................................................................... 687
Left-side View ................................................................................ 687
Right-side View .............................................................................. 687
Southeast ISO View ....................................................................... 687
Southwest ISO View ...................................................................... 688
Northeast ISO View ....................................................................... 688
Northwest ISO View ....................................................................... 688
4 View ............................................................................................ 688
Piping Input menu: View > Reset

Reset and Refresh Tools toolbar: Reset Plot
Resets the view to the default settings. If a list has focus, resets the list to the default size.
Piping Input menu: View > Front View

Standard Views toolbar: Front
Shortcut Key: ALT+Z
Displays the model from the front.
Piping Input menu: View > Back View

Standard Views toolbar: Back
Shortcut key: ALT+SHIFT+Z
Displays the model from the back.

Piping Input menu: View > Top View

Standard Views toolbar: Top
Shortcut key: ALT+SHIFT+Y
Displays the model from the top.
Piping Input menu: View > Bottom View

Standard Views toolbar: Bottom
Shortcut key: ALT+Y
Displays the model from the bottom.
Piping Input menu: View > Left-side View

Standard Views toolbar: Left
Shortcut key: ALT+X
Displays the model from the left side.
Piping Input menu: View > Right-side View

Standard Views toolbar: Right
Shortcut key: ALT+SHIFT+X
Displays the model from the right side.
Piping Input menu: View > Southeast ISO View
Standard Views toolbar: Southeast Isometric View

Shortcut key: F10
Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively, press F10.

Piping Input menu: View > Southwest ISO View
Standard Views toolbar: Southwest Isometric View

Displays the model isometrically from the southwest.
Piping Input menu: View > Northeast ISO View
Standard Views toolbar: Northeast Isometric View

Displays the model isometrically from the northeast.
Piping Input menu: View > Northwest ISO View
Standard Views toolbar: Northwest Isometric View

Displays the model isometrically from the northwest.
Piping Input menu: View > 4 View

Plot Tools toolbar: 4 View
Displays the model in four windows.
This command automatically places the horizontal and vertical dividers, or splitter bars, and
changes the cursor to a four-way arrow. You can change the position of the splitter bars by
moving the mouse. Click to fix the position.
Drag the splitter bars to change the size of the windows. Drag the splitter bars out of the view to
remove those views. You can drag the splitter located at the top or left scroll bar to add views.
You can manipulate the image in any of these panes individually.
Element Viewer Dialog Box

Use options in the Element Viewer dialog box to navigate among the elements, navigate to
various reports within a load case, and view the reports for other load cases. This is done in the
Report Selection pane on the left in the dialog box.
The dialog box has a tree structure similar in operation to Windows Explorer.
Click the + sign for a particular load case expands the tree to show reports.
Select the report to display the data in the grid view to the right.
Select a node or an element in the grid view when Select Elements is enabled to highlight
the corresponding element on the graphics view.

Zoom to the selected element if the corresponding Zoom to Selection is enabled. Similarly,
click an element on the graphics view to highlight the corresponding data row in the report
view. This is a bi-directional connection.
Change the load case within the Element Viewer dialog box to update the graphics view (if
applicable), and the Load Case Selection box on the Load Case toolbar.

SECTION 9
Dynamic Analysis
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Piping > Dynamic Analysis
Main window menu: Analysis > Dynamics

Performs dynamic analysis on a piping model. This section introduces dynamic analysis
concepts and describes data input for each of the options available.
In This Section
Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems ................................................ 690
Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis .................................... 696
Dynamic Analysis Workflow........................................................... 698
The Dynamic Analysis Window ..................................................... 699
Excitation Frequencies Tab ........................................................... 702
Harmonic Forces Tab .................................................................... 704
Harmonic Displacements Tab........................................................ 708
Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab ......................................... 711
Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab ....................................... 716
Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab ................................................ 731
Lumped Masses Tab ..................................................................... 736
Snubbers Tab ................................................................................ 738
Control Parameters Tab ................................................................ 739
Advanced Tab ................................................................................ 771
Directive Builder ............................................................................. 775
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data .............................................................. 776
DLF/Spectrum Generator .............................................................. 777
Relief Load Synthesis .................................................................... 787
Analysis Results ............................................................................ 798
Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems

A piping system can respond far differently to a dynamic load than it would to a static load of the
same magnitude. Static loads are those which are applied slowly enough that the system has
time to react and internally distribute the loads, thus remaining in equilibrium. In equilibrium, all
forces and moments are resolved (that is, the sum of the forces and moments are zero) and the
pipe does not move.
A dynamic load changes quickly with time. The piping system does not have time to internally
distribute the loads. Forces and moments are not always resolved, resulting in unbalanced loads
and pipe movement. Because the sum of forces and moments are not in equilibrium, the
internally-induced loads can be different either higher or lower than the applied loads.
The software provides several methods for analyzing different types of system response under
dynamic loads. Each method provides a trade-off of accuracy versus computing requirements.

Dynamic Analysis
The methods include modal natural frequency calculations, harmonic analysis, response
spectrum analysis, and time history analysis.
Modal natural frequency analysis measures the tendency of a piping system to respond to
dynamic loads. The modal natural frequencies of a system typically should not be too close to
equipment operating frequencies. As a general rule, higher natural frequencies usually cause
less trouble than low natural frequencies. CAESAR II provides calculation of modal natural
frequencies and animated plots of the associated mode shapes.
Harmonic analysis addresses dynamic loads that are cyclic in nature, such as fluid pulsation in
reciprocating pump lines or vibration due to rotating equipment. These loads are modeled as
concentrated forces or displacements at one or more points in the system. To provide the proper
phase relationship between multiple loads, a phase angle can also be used. Any number of
forcing frequencies can be analyzed for equipment start-up and operating modes. Harmonic
responses represent the maximum dynamic amplitude the piping system undergoes and have
the same form as a static analysis: node deflections and rotations, local forces and moments,
restraint loads, and stresses. For example, if the results show an X displacement of 5.8 cm at a
node, then the dynamic motion due to the cyclic excitation is from +5.8 cm. to -5.8 cm. at that
node. The stresses shown are one half of, or one amplitude of, the full cyclic stress range.
Response spectrum analysis allows an impulse-type transient event to be characterized by
response versus frequency spectra. Each mode of vibration of the piping system is related to
one response on the spectrum. These modal responses are summed together to produce the
total system response. The stresses for these analyses, summed with the sustained stresses,
are compared to the occasional stress allowables defined by the piping code. Spectral analysis
can be used in a wide variety of applications. For example, in uniform inertial loading, ground
motion associated with a seismic event is supplied as displacement, velocity, or acceleration
response spectra. The assumption is that all supports move with the defined ground motion and
the system.
The shock spectra, which define the ground motion, can vary between the three global
directions and can even change for different groups of supports (such as independent or uniform
support motion). Another example is based on single point loading. CAESAR II uses this
technique to analyze a wide variety of impulse-type transient loads. Relief valve loads, water
hammer loads, slug flow loads, and rapid valve closure type loads all cause single impulse
dynamic loads at various points in the piping system. The response to these dynamic forces can
be predicted using the force spectrum method.
Time history analysis is one of the most accurate methods, because it uses numeric integration
of the dynamic equation of motion to simulate the system response throughout the load
duration. This method can solve any type of dynamic loading, but due to its exact solution,
requires more resources (such as computer memory, calculation speed and time) than other
methods. Time history analysis is not appropriate when, for example, the spectrum method
offers sufficient accuracy.
Force versus time profiles for piping are usually one of three types: Random (on page 692),
Harmonic (see Newsletter Index -
http://www.coade.com/Mechanical%20Engineering%20News%20Index.shtml), or Impulse (on
page 694). Each profile has a preferred solution method. These profiles and the load types
identified with them are described below.

Dynamic Analysis
Random
With this type of profile, the load unpredictably changes direction or magnitude with time. Even
with the unpredictability, some load characteristics can predominate. Loads with random
force/time profiles are best solved using a spectrum method or a static equivalent.
The major types of loads with random time profiles are wind and earthquake.
Wind velocity causes forces due to the decrease of wind momentum as the air strikes the pipe
creating an equivalent pressure on the pipe. Wind loadings, even though they can have
predominant directions and average velocities over a given time, are subject to gusting, such as
sudden changes in direction and velocity. As the time period lengthens, the number of wind
changes also increases in an unpredictable manner, eventually encompassing nearly all
directions and a wide range of velocities.
Seismic (earthquake) loadings are caused by the introduction of random ground motion, such as
accelerations, velocities, and displacements and corresponding inertia loads (the mass of the
system times the acceleration) into a structure through the structure-to-ground anchorage.
Random ground motion is the sum of an infinite number of individual harmonic (cyclic) ground
motions. Two earthquakes can be similar in terms of predominant direction (for example, along
a fault), predominant harmonic frequencies (if some underlying cyclic motions tend to dominate),
and maximum ground motion, but their exact behavior at any given time can be quite different
and unpredictable.
Harmonic
With this type of profile, the load changes direction and/or magnitude following a harmonic
profile, ranging from its minimum to its maximum over a fixed time period. For example, the load
can be described by a function of the form:
F(t) = A + B cos( t + )
Where:
F(t) = force magnitude as a function of time
A = mean force
B = variation of maximum and minimum force from mean
= angular frequency (radian/sec)
= phase angle (radians)
t = time (sec)
Loads with harmonic force/time profiles are best solved using a harmonic method. The major
types of loads with harmonic time profiles are equipment vibration, acoustic vibration, and
pulsation.

Dynamic Analysis
If rotating equipment attached to a pipe is slightly out-of-tolerance (for example, when a drive
shaft is out-of-round), it can impose a small cyclic displacement onto the pipe at the point of
attachment. This is the location where the displacement cycle most likely corresponds to the
operating cycle of the equipment. The displacement at the pipe connection can be imperceptibly
small, but could cause significant dynamic-loading problems. Loading versus time is easily
predicted after the operating cycle and variation from tolerance is known.
If fluid flow characteristics are changed within a pipe (for example, when flow conditions change
from laminar to turbulent as the fluid passes through an orifice), slight lateral vibrations may be
set up within the pipe. These vibrations often fit harmonic patterns, with predominant
frequencie
equation predicts that the developed frequency (Hz) of vibration caused by flow through an
orifice will be somewhere between 0.2 V/D and 0.3 V/D, where V is the fluid velocity (ft./sec) and
D is the diameter of the orifice (ft). Wind flow around a pipe sets up lateral displacements as well
(a phenomenon known as vortex shedding), with an exciting frequency of approximately 0.18
V/D, where V is the wind velocity and D is the outer diameter of the pipe.
During the operation of a reciprocating pump or a compressor, the fluid is compressed by

pistons driven by a rotating shaft. This causes a cyclic change over time in the fluid pressure at
any specified location in the system. Unequal fluid pressures at opposing elbow pairs or
closures create an unbalanced pressure load in the system. Because the pressure balance
changes with the cycle of the compressor, the unbalanced force also changes. The frequency of
the force cycle is likely to be some multiple of that of the equipment operating cycle, because
multiple pistons cause a corresponding number of force variations during each shaft rotation.
The pressure variations continue to move along through the fluid. In a steady state flow
condition, unbalanced forces may be present simultaneously at any number of elbow pairs in the
system. Load magnitudes can vary. Load cycles may or may not be in phase with each other,
depending upon the pulse velocity, the distance of each elbow pair from the compressor, and
the length of the piping legs between the elbow pairs.
For example, if the pressure at elbow a is Pa(t) and the pressure at elbow b is Pb(t), then the
unbalanced force acting along the pipe between the two elbows is:
F(t) = (Pa(t) - Pb(t)) A
Where:
A = internal area of the pipe
Assuming that the pressure peak hits the elbow "a" at time t = 0, Pa(t) is:
Pa(t) = Pavg + 0.5 (dP) cos t
Where:
Pavg = average pressure in the line
dP = alternating component of the pressure
= driving angular frequency of pulse
If the length of the pipe between the elbows is L, then the pressure pulse reaches elbow bts
after it has passed elbow a:

Dynamic Analysis
ts = L / c
Where:
c = speed of sound in the fluid
Therefore, the expression for the pressure at elbow b is:
Pb(t) = Pavg + 0.5(dP) cos ( t - Q)
Where:
Q = phase shift between the pressure peaks at a and b
= ts
Combining these equations, the unbalanced pressure force acting on an elbow pair is:
F(t) = 0.5(dP)A * [ cos t - cos (t - L/c) ]
Under steady-state conditions, a similar situation exists at all elbow pairs throughout the piping
system.
Impulse
With this type of profile, the load magnitude ramps up from zero to some value, remains
relatively constant for a time, and then ramps down to zero again. For rapid ramping times, this
type of profile resembles a rectangle. Loads with impulse force/time profiles are best solved
using time history or force spectrum methods. Major types of loads with impulse time profiles are
relief valve, fluid hammer, and slug flow.
When system pressure reaches a dangerous level, relief valves are set to open in order to vent
fluid and reduce the internal pressure. Venting through the valve causes a jet force to act on the
piping system. This force ramps up from zero to its full value over the opening time of the valve.
The relief valve remains open (and the jet force remains relatively constant) until sufficient fluid
is vented to relieve the over-pressure condition. The valve then closes, ramping down the jet
force over the closing time of the valve.
When the flow of fluid through a system is suddenly halted through valve closure or a pump trip,
the fluid in the remainder of the system cannot be stopped instantaneously. As fluid continues to
flow into the area of stoppage (upstream of the valve or pump), the fluid compresses causing a
high-pressure situation. On the other side of the restriction, the fluid moves away from the
stoppage point, creating a low pressure (vacuum) situation. Fluid at the next elbow or closure
along the pipeline is still at the original operating pressure, resulting in an unbalanced pressure
force acting on the valve seat or the elbow.
The fluid continues to flow, compressing (or decompressing) fluid further away from the point of
flow stoppage, causing the leading edge of the pressure pulse to move through the line. As the
pulse moves past the first elbow, the pressure is now equalized at each end of the pipe run,
leading to a balanced (that is, zero) pressure load on the first pipe leg. The unbalanced
pressure, by passing the elbow, has now shifted to the second leg. The unbalanced pressure

Dynamic Analysis
load continues to rise and fall in sequential legs as the pressure pulse travels back to the
source, or forward to the sink.
The ramp up time of the profile roughly coincides with the elapsed time from full flow to low flow,
such as the closing time of the valve or trip time of the pump. Because the leading edge of the
pressure pulse is not expected to change as the pulse travels through the system, the
ramp-down time is the same. The duration of the load from initiation through the beginning of the
down ramp is equal to the time required for the pressure pulse to travel the length of the pipe
leg.
Most piping systems are designed to handle single-phase fluids (that is, fluids that are uniformly
liquid or gas). Under certain circumstances, a fluid may have multiple phases and is susceptible
to slug flow. For example, liquid slugs may be entrained in a wet steam line. These slugs of
liquid create an out-of-balance load when the slugs change direction in bends or tees.
In general, fluid changes direction in a piping system through the application of forces at elbows.
This force is equal to the change in momentum with respect to time, or
Fr = dp / dt = v2 A [2(1 - cos )]1/2
Where:
dp = change in momentum
dt = change in time
= liquid density - vapor density
v = fluid velocity
A = internal area of pipe
= inclusion angle at elbow
With constant fluid density, this force is normally constant and is small enough that it can be
easily absorbed through tension in the pipe wall. The force is then passed on to adjacent elbows
with equal and opposite loads, zeroing the net load on the system. Therefore, these types of
momentum loads are usually ignored in analysis. If the fluid velocity or density changes with
time, this momentum load will also change with time, leading to a dynamic load which may not
be canceled by the load at other elbows.

Dynamic Analysis
For example, consider a slug of liquid in a gas system. The steady state momentum load is
insignificant because the fluid density of a gas is effectively zero. The liquid suddenly slug hits
the elbow, increasing the momentum load by orders of magnitude. This load lasts only as long
as it takes for the slug to traverse the elbow, and then suddenly drops to near zero again with
the exact profile of the slug load depending upon the shape of the slug. The time duration of the
load depends upon the length of the slug divided by the velocity of the fluid.
Where:
F1 = v2 A(1 - cos )
Fr = v2 A [2(1 - cos )]½
F2 = v2 A sin
Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis

To perform a dynamic analysis, the static model must first be created and error checked. The
model is also usually run through static analysis before the dynamic analysis begins, but this is
not required unless nonlinear supports or hanger selections are included in the model. If
nonlinear supports are present, the static analysis must be run and the results made available
before the dynamic analysis can be performed.
The dynamic analysis techniques used by CAESAR II require strict linearity in the piping and
structural systems. Dynamic responses associated with nonlinear effects are not addressed. An
example of a nonlinear effect is slapping, such as when a pipe lifts off the rack at one moment
and impacts the rack the next. For the dynamic model, the pipe must be either held down or
allowed to move freely. Nonlinear restraints used in the static analysis must be set to active or
inactive for the dynamic analysis. CAESAR II allows you to set the nonlinear restraints to any
configuration found in the static results by specifying the value of Static Load Case for Nonlinear
Restraint Status (on page 751) on the Control Parameters tab. You usually select the
operating case to set the nonlinear restraint configuration. For example, if a +Y support is active
in the static operating case and the operating case is used to set the status of the nonlinear
supports for dynamics, CAESAR II installs a double-acting Y support at that location for the
dynamic analysis. The pipe does not move up or down at that point regardless of the dynamic
load.
Another nonlinear effect is friction. Friction effects must also be linearized for use in dynamic
analysis. By default, CAESAR II excludes the effects of friction from the dynamic analysis. If
requested, CAESAR II can approximate the friction resistance to movement in the dynamic
model by including spring stiffness normal to the restraint line of action. For a Y restraint with

Dynamic Analysis
friction, the friction stiffness is added in the X and Z directions. You define the stiffness of these
springs as a function of the friction load calculated in the static analysis. CAESAR II calculates
the friction stiffness by multiplying the resultant force on the restraint from the selected static
case results, the friction coefficient, and the Stiffness Factor for Friction defined on the
Control Parameters tab. For example, if a normal force on the restraint from the static analysis
is 1000 lb and the friction coefficient (mu) is 0.3, then the total friction load is 300 lb. If Stiffness
Factor for Friction is 500, then springs having a stiffness of SQRT(1000^2 +
300^2)*0.3*500=156605 lb./in are inserted into the dynamic model in the two directions
perpendicular to the line of action of the friction restraint. Converting friction damping into
stiffness is not mathematically legitimate, but serves as a good engineering approximation for
dynamic friction in a wide variety of situations.

Dynamic Analysis
Dynamic Analysis Workflow

Before starting and error checking a dynamic analysis, develop dynamic analysis data using the
following steps. The steps can occur in any order.
You do not need to specify dynamic loads if only natural frequencies are to be counted or
calculated. Harmonic analysis requires the driving frequencies and forces or displacements to
define and locate the sinusoidally varying point loads.
Creating the dynamic loads for spectra or time history analysis requires the most attention. The
response spectra or time history profile must be defined, built, or selected. Force sets are built
for force response spectra and time history analysis. Response spectra/time history and force
sets are combined with other data to build the load cases to be analyzed. Finally, additional load
cases may be constructed by combining shock results with static results to check code
compliance on occasional stresses. The software provides methods to simplify many of these
tasks.
For dynamic analysis, CAESAR II converts each piping element from a continuous beam
element between two nodes to a stiffness between two masses. Additional stiffness is added at
the node points to model anchors, restraints, hangers, and other supports in the static analysis
model. The masses assigned to each node are one half the sum of all element masses framing
into the node. These masses are used as translational inertias only. Rotational moments of
inertia are ignored in the dynamic mass model. Their inclusion in the analysis would cause a
large increase in solution time without a corresponding improvement in the general accuracy of
the analysis.
In many instances, the mass and stiffness established in the static model is used without
modification in the dynamic analysis. Some situations, however, can be improved by the
deletion of mass points or degrees of freedom. This usually occurs in models with unnecessary
masses far from the area of interest or unnecessary degrees of freedom that do not act in the
direction of interest. Some piping systems have supports that are installed to suppress vibration
and do not affect the static analysis. If these shock absorbers or snubbers were not part of the
static model, they can be added to the dynamic model as additional stiffness.
Options on the Control Parameters tab set the type of analysis to be performed: calculation of
natural frequencies and mode shapes, harmonic analysis, spectral analysis, or time history.
General settings for the analysis are also defined, such as maximum frequency cutoff, mode
summation methods, static configuration for nonlinear restraints, and the friction factor for
including friction in the dynamic analysis. The Advanced tab allows you to change the
parameters governing the eigensolution which does the modal extraction. These parameters
should only be altered under special circumstances.
For more information, see Control Parameters Tab (on page 739) and Advanced Tab (on page
771).

Dynamic Analysis
The Dynamic Analysis Window

After the basic model has been constructed, click Analysis > Dynamics or Dynamic Analysis
to perform a dynamic analysis. The Dynamic Analysis window opens.
Analysis Specifies the type of analysis. Select Modal, Harmonic, Earthquake (spectrum),
Type Relief Loads (spectrum), Water Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum), or Time History.
The window tabs change for each analysis.
Save Input and File > Save Input - Saves entered values to the CAESAR II file.
Check Input and File > Check Input - Opens the Dynamic Syntax Check dialog
box to check entered values for errors.
Run the Analysis and File > Run Analysis - Performs the error check and, if no
errors are found, performs the analysis the dynamic analysis for the selected
Analysis Type and the entered values. Analysis results are then available for
review. For more information, see Analysis Results (on page 798).
Add Entry and Edit > Add Entry - Adds a row to the table.
Delete Entry and Edit > Delete Entry - Deletes a row from the table.
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data and Tools > Spectrum Data Points - Specifies
spectrum data for manually-entered or ASCII-file-based spectrum definitions. For
more information, see Enter/Edit Spectrum Data (on page 776).

Dynamic Analysis
DLF/Spectrum Generator and Tools > DLF Spectrum Generator - Converts

spectrum time waveform excitation data into a frequency domain dynamic load factor
(DLF) curve or other response spectrum. For more information, see DLF/Spectrum
Generator (on page 777).
Relief Load Synthesis and Tools > Relief Load Synthesis - Calculates the
magnitudes of relieving thrust forces. For more information, see Relief Load
Synthesis (on page 787).
Cmt Changes the selected row in the table to a comment line. You can add comment
lines anywhere in the table.
Modal Analysis (on page 700)

Harmonic Analysis (on page 701)
Earthquake Response Spectrum Analysis (on page 701)
Relief Loads and Water Hammer/Slug Flow Spectra Analysis (on page 701)
Time History Analysis (on page 702)
Dynamic analysis uses the units from the piping input file or from the configuration file of a
structural-only analysis. For more information on dynamic load cases, data, and procedures, see
External Interfaces (on page 1142).
If the model contains spring hangers selected by the software or nonlinear boundary
conditions (such as single directional supports, gaps, rods, or friction), then a static analysis
must be performed before the dynamic analysis to determine how the nonlinear supports are
acting.
Modal Analysis
Enter values on the following tabs when Modal is selected for Analysis Type in the Dynamic
Analysis window.
Lumped Masses Tab (on page 736)
Snubbers Tab (on page 738)
Control Parameters Tab (on page 739)
Advanced Tab (on page 771)
Modal analysis extracts natural frequencies and shapes for the modes of vibration of the pipe
system. No loads are specified.

Dynamic Analysis
Harmonic Analysis
Enter values on the following tabs when Harmonic is selected for Analysis Type in the
Dynamic Analysis window.
Excitation Frequencies Tab (on page 702)
Harmonic Forces Tab (on page 704)
Harmonic Displacements Tab (on page 708)
Earthquake Response Spectrum Analysis

Enter values on the following tabs when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type
in the Dynamic Analysis window.
Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab (on page 711)
Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab (on page 716)
Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab (on page 731)
For earthquake loads, you define one or more response spectra and apply them in a specified
direction over part or all of the piping system.
Relief Loads and Water Hammer/Slug Flow Spectra Analysis

Enter values on the following tabs when Relief Loads (spectrum) or Water Hammer/Slug
Flow (spectrum) are selected for Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.
Force Sets Tab (on page 721)
This method solves relief valve loading on a piping system through force spectrum analysis. The
force-time profile is estimated using relief load synthesis and then converted to a force multiplier
(dynamic load factor, or DLF) spectrum. The force is then applied in conjunction with this
spectrum.
This method solves water hammer or slug problems. It is similar to the force spectrum analysis
used for relief valve loadings, except that relief load synthesis is not required. The force-time

Dynamic Analysis
profile is estimated and then converted to a force multiplier spectrum. This is linked to force sets
in the load cases.
Force-time profile estimation methods are shown in the CAESAR II Applications
Guide. Steps proceed as described for relief loads.
Time History Analysis

Enter values on the following tabs when Time History is selected for Analysis Type in the
Force Sets Tab (on page 721)
Time history analysis solves the dynamic equation of motion for extracted nodes of vibration.
The results are then summed to find the system results. Loadings are specified in terms of
force-time profiles and force sets. The force-time profile defines the load timing. The force set
defines the load direction and location. Either the profile or the force set can be used to define
the magnitude.
Excitation Frequencies Tab

This tab is available when Harmonic is selected for Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis
window.
One or more individual frequencies or frequency ranges can be specified, one to a row.
CAESAR II performs a separate analysis for each frequency.
A frequency range has values for Starting Frequency, Ending Frequency, and Increment.
You can enter the number of anticipated load cycles for each frequency range. Load cases are
then calculated with a fatigue stress type. Otherwise, the load cases are calculated with an
occasional stress type.
Harmonic loads may be specified on the Harmonic Forces Tab (on page 704) or the
Harmonic Displacements Tab (on page 708).
Topics
Starting Frequency ........................................................................ 703
Ending Frequency .......................................................................... 703
Increment ....................................................................................... 703
Load Cycles ................................................................................... 704

Dynamic Analysis
Starting Frequency
Specifies the starting frequency for the analysis in Hertz (Hz). This is the frequency at which the
harmonic forces or displacements are applied.
Harmonic displacements and forces have the form:
A*cosine( t+ )
where A is the amplitude of the force or displacement, is the phase angle, and is the
frequency of the loading.
Real and imaginary solutions are developed for each frequency in the defined range, from which
any phased solution can be calculated. There must be a starting frequency for a frequency
range to be valid.
Ending Frequency
Specifies the ending frequency for a range of frequencies. Enter the frequency in Hertz (Hz).
The harmonic forces or displacements are applied at each frequency between the Starting
Frequency (on page 703) and Ending Frequency according to the value specified for
Increment (on page 703). This is an optional value.
Increment
Specifies the frequency increment used to step from Starting Frequency (on page 703) to
Ending Frequency (on page 703). The harmonic forces or displacements are applied at each
frequency along the specified increment. This is an optional value. If no value is entered, the
software uses a default increment of 1.0 Hz.
The frequencies for harmonic excitation are taken from each defined frequency range. Individual
frequencies for excitation are calculated using a "do loop" type of logic to determine the
frequencies in a specified frequency range:
X = STARTING FREQUENCY
5 CONTINUE
COMPUTE SOLUTION FOR FREQUENCY "X"
X = X + INCREMENT
IF( X .LT. ENDING FREQUENCY+0.001) GO TO 5
The sign of the frequency increment may be modified by the software to properly step from the
starting frequency to the ending frequency. The starting frequency, the ending frequency, or the
increment may be given as a fraction.
Find harmonic solutions for the following group of turbine equipment speeds:
Warm up speed: 100 rpm
Speed increments to bring turbine online: 400, 800, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2400, 2800, 3200
rpm. Speeds are passed through very slowly while coming up to operating speed.
Operating speed: 3600 rpm

Dynamic Analysis
Convert rotations per minute to cycles per second (Hertz) by dividing by 60:
Warm up speed: 100/60
Speed increments: 400/60 to 3200/60 by increments of 400/60
Operating speed: 3600/60
A low frequency field vibration exists in the piping system at about 3 Hertz:
Approximate field-observed excitation frequency: 3 Hz
The response of the piping system when the dynamic load is applied at 3 Hz is almost zero. This
is true regardless of the magnitude of the dynamic load. The maximum varying pressure load
was applied, and there were still no appreciable dynamic displacements when the excitation
frequency was 3 Hz. Apply the dynamic load over a range of frequencies around 3 Hertz and
see if any dynamic response can be observed.
Group of field-observed frequencies: "Guessed"
Excitation frequency: 3 Hz
Defined by the input below are:
(2.5, 2.6, 2.7, ..., 3.3, 3.4, 3.5) Hz.
2.5 3.5 0.1
Load Cycles
Specifies the number of load cycles. If the harmonic load case is also subjected to fatigue
loading, enter the number of expected cycles. This is an optional value.
The load cycle value is the anticipated number of applications of the load on the system. This
value is used to determine the allowable stress from the fatigue curve for the material.
For static cases, the full range of calculated stresses is considered. For dynamic
cases, half the range (that is, the amplitude) of calculated stresses is considered.
Harmonic Forces Tab

window.
Values must be entered on either the Harmonic Forces tab or the Harmonic
Displacements tab.
Phasing is important if more than one force or displacement is included. The phase angle
(entered in degrees) relates the timing of one load or displacement to another. For example, if
two harmonic loads act along the same line but at different nodes, the loads can be directed
towards each other (that is, in opposite directions), producing no net dynamic imbalance on the
system. The loads can also act in the same direction (that is, to the right or to the left together),
producing a net dynamic imbalance in the system equal to the sum of the two forces. The phase
angle determines this relationship. For example, the follow load data is entered for in-phase
loading of 1500 lbf in the X direction with a 0º phase at nodes 10 and 105:

Dynamic Analysis
Force Direction Phase Start Node
1500 X 0 10
1500 X 0 105
The follow load data is entered for out-of-phase loading of 1500 lbf in the X direction with the
phase in opposite directions at nodes 10 and 105, pulling the system apart:
1500 X 0 10
1500 X 180 105
The two most common phased loadings are those due to rotating equipment and reciprocating
pumps.
Rotating equipment can have an eccentricity, a speed, and a mass. These items must be
converted into a harmonic load acting on the rotor at the theoretical mass centerline. The
magnitude of the harmonic load is calculated from:
where speed is the angular velocity of the shaft in cycles per second. This load is applied along
both axes perpendicular to the shaft axis and at a 90º phase shift.
In the case of a reciprocating pump, the pump introduces a pressure wave into the line at some
regular interval that is related to the pump valving and speed. This pressure wave moves away
from the pump at the speed of sound in the fluid. These pressure waves cause loads at each
bend in the piping system. The load on each subsequent elbow in the system, starting from the
first elbow, is phase-shifted by an amount that is a function of the distance between the elbows,
from the first elbow to the current elbow. The amount of phase shift between elbow-elbow pairs
produces the net unbalanced dynamic load in the piping. The phase shift, in degrees from the
first elbow, is calculated from:
where frequency is the frequency of wave introduction at the pump, and length is the distance
from the first elbow to the current elbow under study. The magnitude of the pressure load at
each elbow is:
With phasing considerations, all specified loads are considered to act together at
each applied frequency.
Topics
Force .............................................................................................. 706
Direction ......................................................................................... 706
Phase ............................................................................................. 706
Start Node ...................................................................................... 706
Stop Node ...................................................................................... 707
Increment ....................................................................................... 707

Dynamic Analysis
Force
Specifies the magnitude of the harmonic force to be applied.
The form of the harmonic forcing function is:
F(t) = A*cosine( t- )
where "F(t)" is the force as a function of time. "A" is the maximum amplitude of the dynamic
force. " " is the frequency of the excitation (in radians per second), and " " is the phase angle
(in radians).
Direction
Specifies the direction of the force. Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction cosines, or direction
vectors. The format for direction cosines is (cx, cy, cz), such as (0.707,0.0,0.707). The format for
direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).
Phase
Specifies the phase angle of the force in degrees.
Harmonic loading can start with its maximum load at time equal to zero, or the harmonic load
can start with its maximum at any time between zero and 2* / seconds. The phase angle f is
the method used to specify this time shift in the dynamic load waveform. The phase angle is
calculated from the time shift using the equation:
(degrees) = 180t /
where t is given in seconds and is given in radians per second.
The phase angle is usually entered as either zero or 90. Use the phase specification when
defining eccentric loads on rotating equipment.
A value for Phase is required. If the phase angle is zero, you must enter 0.
Start Node
Specifies the starting node number in the model at which the force is applied.
If entered without values for Stop Node and Increment, then the start node must exist in the
piping system. If entered with values for Stop Node and Increment, then the range of nodes
identified in the range must include at least one node in the piping system.

Dynamic Analysis
Stop Node
Specifies the ending node number in the model through which the force is applied. Used as a
part of a "range of nodes" force loading with Start Node and Increment. This value is optional.
Increment
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node. Each node
that is incremented between the start and stop nodes is loaded with the value of Force. This
value is optional.
A pressure pulse traveling in the line causes the line to shake at about 2 hertz. The magnitude
of the pressure loading is estimated to be about 460 lb. The pressure wave travels from 95 to
100. The harmonic force to model this load is shown as follows. The magnitude is divided by 2
because the total variation in the dynamic load is a function of the cosine, which varies from -1
to 1. To find the true response magnitudes from a positive-only harmonic load pulse, a static
solution with 460/2 lb. acting in the +X direction is superimposed on the static 460/2 lb. solution
to provide the constant shifting of the load axis. There is a negative load at node 95 due to the
negative sign on the cosine. The pressure pulse is always positive and a negative load never
exists. The superposition of the 460/2 static solution assures that the dynamic load (and
probably the resulting displacements) is always positive.
460 LB pressure load at 2 Hertz
460/2 X 0 95
A pump is shaking in the X-Y plane. The pump axis is along the global Z axis. The magnitude of
the dynamic load is calculated to be 750 lb. from the manufacturer-provided masses and
eccentricities. Apply this rotating equipment load on the inline pump at node 350. The X and Y
loads are 90 degrees out of phase with one another. When the X load is at its maximum the Y
load is zero, and when the Y load is at its maximum the X load is zero.
Estimated eccentric load on inline pump DOH-V33203001
750 X 0 350
750 Y 90 350

Dynamic Analysis
Harmonic Displacements Tab

window.
Values must be entered on either the Harmonic Forces tab or the Harmonic
Displacements tab.
Phasing is important if more than one force or displacement is included. The phase angle
(entered in degrees) relates the timing of one load or displacement to another. For example, if
two harmonic loads act along the same line but at different nodes, the loads can be directed
towards each other (that is, in opposite directions), producing no net dynamic imbalance on the
system. The loads can also act in the same direction (that is, to the right or to the left together),
producing a net dynamic imbalance in the system equal to the sum of the two forces. The phase
angle determines this relationship. For example, the follow load data is entered for in-phase
loading of 1500 lbf in the X direction with a 0º phase at nodes 10 and 105:
1500 X 0 10
1500 X 0 105
The follow load data is entered for out-of-phase loading of 1500 lbf in the X direction with the
phase in opposite directions at nodes 10 and 105, pulling the system apart:
1500 X 0 10
1500 X 180 105
The two most common phased loadings are those due to rotating equipment and reciprocating
pumps.
Rotating equipment can have an eccentricity, a speed, and a mass. These items must be
converted into a harmonic load acting on the rotor at the theoretical mass centerline. The
magnitude of the harmonic load is calculated from:
where speed is the angular velocity of the shaft in cycles per second. This load is applied along
both axes perpendicular to the shaft axis and at a 90º phase shift.
In the case of a reciprocating pump, the pump introduces a pressure wave into the line at some
regular interval that is related to the pump valving and speed. This pressure wave moves away
from the pump at the speed of sound in the fluid. These pressure waves cause loads at each
bend in the piping system. The load on each subsequent elbow in the system, starting from the
first elbow, is phase-shifted by an amount that is a function of the distance between the elbows,
from the first elbow to the current elbow. The amount of phase shift between elbow-elbow pairs
produces the net unbalanced dynamic load in the piping. The phase shift, in degrees from the
first elbow, is calculated from:

Dynamic Analysis
where frequency is the frequency of wave introduction at the pump, and length is the distance
from the first elbow to the current elbow under study. The magnitude of the pressure load at
each elbow is:
With phasing considerations, all specified loads are considered to act together at
each applied frequency.
Topics
Displacement ................................................................................. 709
Direction ......................................................................................... 709
Phase ............................................................................................. 709
Start Node ...................................................................................... 710
Stop Node ...................................................................................... 710
Increment ....................................................................................... 710
Displacement
Specifies the magnitude of the displacement to be applied.
The form of the harmonic displacement function is:
D(t)=(A)*cosine( t- )
where "D(t)" is the displacement as a function of time, "A" is the maximum amplitude of the
dynamic displacement. " " is the frequency of the excitation (in radians per second), and " " is
the phase angle (in radians).
Direction
Specifies the direction of the displacement. Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction cosines, or
direction vectors. The format for direction cosines is (cx, cy, cz), such as (0.707,0.0,0.707). The
format for direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).
Phase
Specifies the phase angle of the displacement in degrees.
Harmonic displacement can start with its maximum displacement at time equal to zero, or the
harmonic displacements can start with its maximum displacements at any time between zero
and t + 2 / seconds. The phase angle is the method used to specify this time shift in the
dynamic load waveform. The phase angle can be calculated from the time shift using the
equation:
(degrees) = 180t /
where t is given in seconds and is given in radians per second.
A value for Phase is required. If the phase angle is zero, you must enter 0.0.

Dynamic Analysis
Start Node
Specifies the number of the starting node in the model at which the displacement is applied.
If the node is a supported node, then the dynamic displacement is assumed to act at the support
point. If the node is not supported, then the dynamic displacement is assumed to describe the
exact motion of the pipe at that point. This differentiation only becomes important when the node
is supported by a flexible restraint. For example, node 55 is supported in the Y direction by a
restraint having a stiffness of 5,000 lb./in. A harmonic displacement is also specified at node 55
in the Y direction. In this case, the harmonic displacement does not describe the displacement
that is attached to 55. Instead, the displacement creates a load in the Y direction at 55 equal to
the harmonic displacement times 5,000 lb./in.
If Start Node has a value but Stop Node and Increment do not, then the start node must exist
in the piping system. If all three have values, then the range of nodes identified in the range
must include at least one node in the piping system.
Stop Node
Specifies the number of the ending node in the model through which the displacement is
applied. Used as a part of a "range of nodes" displacement loading with Start Node and
Increment. This value is optional.
Increment
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node. Each node
incremented between the start and stop nodes is displaced with the value of Displacement.
This value is optional.
A large ethylene compressor shakes the node exiting the compressor flange a field-measured 8
mils in the Y direction, and 3 mils in the Z direction. The dynamic displacements are assumed to
be simultaneous with no phase shift. This is because the load causing the displacements is
believed to be from the compressor plunger moving in the X, or axial, direction. The
displacements are skewed because the piping configuration entering the compressor is itself
skewed.
Harmonic Displacements at Compressor Flange
0.008 Y 0.0 330
0.003 Z 0.0 330
Applying estimated eccentric forces to the pump described in the Increment (on page 707) did
not produce the displacements witnessed in the field. Field personnel have measured the
dynamic displacements in the vertical (Y) and transverse (Z) directions at the pump piping
connections. The centerline of the pump, at the intersection of the horizontal suction and vertical
discharge is node 15. The magnitude of the Z displacement is measured at 12 mil. The
magnitude of the Y displacement is measured at 3 mils. It is assumed that the vibration is due to

Dynamic Analysis
the rotation of the pump shaft, and so the Z and Y loads will be taken to be 90 degrees out of
phase.
Harmonic displacements modeling pump vibration on the inline pump DOH-V33203001:
Z magnitude of the load - zero deg. phase shift
0.012 Z 0 15
Y magnitude of the load - 90 deg. phase shift
0.003 Y 90 15
Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab

The Spectrum Definitions tab is available when Earthquake (spectrum), Relief Loads
(spectrum) and Water Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum) are selected for Analysis Type in the
The Time History Definitions tab is available when Time History is selected for Analysis
Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.
One analysis may have multiple spectrum types and definitions. Predefined spectra are included
in the spectrum definition list. Any combination of these predefined spectra can be used as is,
deleted, or used with any other defined spectra.
You can include the basic spectrum data definitions in the comments for each ASCII spectrum
file. Select Cmt to create a comment line. For more information, see Enter/Edit Spectrum Data
(on page 776) and Examples (on page 714).
Special force spectrum data files are created by the DLF/Spectrum Generator (on page 777).
The response spectrum table values are entered directly or saved as a file. Data stored in a file
can be used by any analysis.
When using a file created by DLF/Spectrum Generator , you must specify the type of data
which contained in the file, because the file only contains a table of data points. This data is
always frequency versus force-multiplier with linear interpolation. A typical definition is in this
format:

Dynamic Analysis
Range Ordinate Range Ordinate

Name Type Type Interpol Interpol
#TESTFILE FREQ FORCE LIN LIN
The data in this file may also be read in directly using Enter/Edit Spectrum Data .
In this case, omit the "#" from the spectrum declaration. For more information, see Enter/Edit
Spectrum Data (on page 776).
Time history profiles are defined in a way similar to the definition of response spectra. The
profile must be given a name, time versus force data definitions, and interpolation methods.
Response spectra data must also be defined directly or from a file. The profile data may be
entered with actual forces or normalized to 1.0, depending on how the force sets are defined.
One force-time profile should be defined for each independent point load on the piping system.
The load case consists of one or more force profiles. Multiple force profiles can create a
staggered loading on the system.
Topics
Name ............................................................................................. 712
Range Type ................................................................................... 713
Ordinate Type ................................................................................ 714
Range Interpol ............................................................................... 714
Ordinate Interpol ............................................................................ 714
Examples ....................................................................................... 714
Name
Specifies the name of the spectrum. Names should reflect the spectrum and its intended use.
This name is used when defining the load cases. The name can be any 24-character identifier
and is associated with a particular spectrum or load profile.
Do not include spaces in the name.
The following predefined spectra are delivered with the software. No additional definitions are
required when using these spectra.
The El Centro California N-S component, taken from Biggs, "Introduction to Structural
Dynamics," applies to systems with 5-10 percent critical damping.

Dynamic Analysis
1.60H.5 and 1.60V.5

1.60H2 and 1.60V2
1.60H5 and 1.60V5
1.60H7 and 1.60V7
1.60H1.0 and 1.60V10
Each of these spectra defines the horizontal and vertical components for 0.5, 2, 5, 7, and 10
percent critically damped systems. Associated with each of these spectra is a value for ZPA.
(Zero Period Acceleration), the maximum ground acceleration at the site. This value defaults to
0.5 g and can be changed on the Control Parameters Tab (on page 739).
UBCSOIL1
UBCSOIL2
UBCSOIL3
These spectra represent the normalized (horizontal) response spectra for three soil types
provided in Figure 23-3 of the Uniform Building Code, (1991 Edition).
The spectrum name (or load profile) can be preceded by a (#) sign. The (#) sign instructs
CAESAR II to read the spectrum table from a file having the same name as the spectrum
with no extension. Several jobs in the current folder can then access this shock data.
The software uses a flat ASCII text file for the data. Arrange data in two columns separated
by one or more spaces. For information on editing ASCII text, see ASCII Text File Rules (on
page 53).
If data is to be entered manually, click Enter/Edit Spectrum Data , then create new rows
and enter the appropriate Range Type and Ordinate Type values. For more information,
see Enter/Edit Spectrum Data (on page 776).
The complete definition of a shock includes its name, range type, ordinate type, range
interpolation method, ordinate interpolation method, and the shock data point table.
Everything but the shock data point table can be entered on the
Range Type
Specifies the type of values on the abscissa (horizontal) axis of the spectrum/DLF curve. Select
FREQUENCY or PERIOD.
If the value is PERIOD, then the spectrum table data is in seconds. If the value is FREQUENCY,
then the data is in Hertz (cycles per second).
For Time History analysis only, select TIME. The spectrum table data is in milliseconds (ms).
The values can be abbreviated by any part of the word, but only the first letter is
required.

Dynamic Analysis
Ordinate Type
Specifies the type of values on the ordinate (vertical) axis of the spectrum/DLF curve. Select
FREQUENCY, VELOCITY, ACCELERATION, G-ACCELERATION, or FORCE-MULTIPLIER.
If the value is FREQUENCY, then the spectrum table data is in Hertz (cycles per second). If the
value is VELOCITY, then the data is in length per second. If the value is ACCELERATION, then
the data is in length per second squared. If the value is G-ACCELERATION, then the data are
in g's.
For Time History analysis only, select FORCE-MULTIPLIER.
The values can be abbreviated by any part of the word, but only the first letter is
required.
Range Interpol
Specifies how the values on the abscissa (horizontal) axis are interpolated. Select LINEAR or
LOGARITHMIC.
See Examples (on page 714) for additional discussion.
The values can be abbreviated as LIN and LOG.
Ordinate Interpol
Specifies how the values on the ordinate (vertical) axis are interpolated. Select LINEAR or
LOGARITHMIC.
See Examples (on page 714) for additional discussion.
The values can be abbreviated as LIN and LOG.
Examples
The analysis requires that the El Centro shock be applied in the X and Z directions using a
factor of 1.0, and in the Y direction using a factor of 0.667.
No spectrum definition is required for this shock. El Centro is a predefined spectrum. All of its
shock data resides in the CAESAR II shock database.
The analysis requires the use of the Nuclear Regulatory Guide 1.60 shock loads. At a maximum
vertical components of the shock as specified in Reg. Guide 1.60.

There is no spectrum definition required for either of these two shock loads. The Reg. Guide
1.60 shock spectra are predefined. You must only specify the maximum acceleration (ZPA) of
Control Parameters Tab (on page 739), and must use the Reg. Guide spectra
corresponding to the anticipated system damping. Lower damping values mean more
conservative results.

Dynamic Analysis
The analysis requires a shock spectrum that is given by the client and developed for the site. A
plot of the spectrum appears as follows. The horizontal axis is period and the vertical axis is
acceleration. Because of the variation of the numbers along each axis, a logarithmic
interpolation for each axis is used. Because the shock name is not preceded by a (#) sign, the
spectrum is not predefined, and you must manually enter the points for this spectrum. The
spectrum definition input for pointing to this file is:
Name Range Type Ordinate Type Range Interpol Ordinate Interpol
BENCHNO4 PERIOD ACCELERATION LOG LOG
All analysis on a particular project requires the use of the spectrum table shown as follows. The
data points of the spectrum are entered into an ASCII file named BENCH1 in the current folder.
The file can be created using any standard editor. The spectrum definition input for pointing to
this file is:
Name Range Type Ordinate Type Range Interpol Ordinate Interpol
#BENCH1 PERIOD ACCELERATION LOG LOG
Listing of ASCII file "BENCH1":

Dynamic Analysis
Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab

The Spectrum Load Cases tab is available when Earthquake (spectrum), Relief Loads
(spectrum) and Water Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum) are selected for Analysis Type in the
The Time History Load Cases tab is available when Time History is selected for Analysis
Type in the Dynamic Analysis window. A time history analysis has only one load case.
Load cases consist of simultaneously applied spectra. Each spectrum in the case is assigned a
direction and factor.
The following options are only available for the Earthquake (spectrum), Relief Loads
(spectrum) and Water Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum) analysis types.
Editing Load Case
Specifies a load case to edit.
Stress Types
Specifies the stress type for the load case:
OPE - Stress from operating loads.
OCC - Stress from occasional short-term loads.
SUS - Stress from primary sustained loads.
EXP - Stress from secondary thermal expansion loads.
FAT - Stress from fatigue loads.
Fatigue Cycles
Specifies the number of fatigue cycles. This option is only available when FAT is selected
for Stress Types.
Directives
Displays the Directive Builder (on page 775) dialog box.
Add New Load Case
Adds a new load case.
Delete Current Load Case
Deletes the current load case.

Dynamic Analysis
Spectrum load cases for force spectrum analyses are set up differently than spectrum load
cases for earthquake analyses. Force spectrum analyses must link a force multiplier spectrum to
a force set.
A load case definition consists of one or more lines, as shown below. The direction specified on
this line does not need to be the direction of the load (which is specified in the force set). This
direction is used for labeling and designation of independent versus dependent loadings.
Spectrum Factor Dir. Force Set #
TESTFILE 1.0 Y 1
Complexity increases as the number of components in the load case goes beyond
one, and as the time history phenomena being modeled deviates from true impulse type loading.
For more information, see Examples (on page 726).
For earthquakes, the direction defines the orientation of the uniform inertial loading.
Earthquakes typically have X, Y, and Z components. The factor is used to modify the magnitude
of the shock. For example, the seismic evaluation of a piping system includes two load cases:
1.0 times (100% of) the El Centro spectrum in the X direction and 0.67 times (67% of) the
El Centro spectrum in the Y direction
1.0 in Z and 0.67 in Y.
CAESAR II also supports options for independent support motion earthquakes, where parts of
the system are exposed to different shocks. For example, a piping system is supported from
both ground and building supports. Because the building filters the earthquake, supports
attached to the building are not exposed to the same shock as the supports attached to the
ground. Two different shock inputs are required: one for the ground supports and one for the
building supports. To specify an independent support motion shock, the node range that defines
a particular group of supports is required. The maximum displacement (seismic anchor
movements) of the support attachment point must also be specified.
The example below shows a typical uniform support earthquake specification and a typical
independent support motion earthquake:
The uniform support motion earthquake contains only components of the El Centro earthquake
acti
magnitude in the Y direction.

Dynamic Analysis
The independent support motion earthquake above has two different support groups: 1-100 and
101-300. The 1-100 group is exposed to a ground spectrum. The 101-300 group is exposed to a
building spectrum. Different horizontal and vertical components are used for the ground and the
building spectra. The last values specified are the seismic support movements (that is the
Anchor Movement).
Stress Types can be assigned to the spectrum load cases. If FAT is selected, you
must also enter a value for Fatigue Cycles, the number of anticipated load cycles.
Only a single load case is defined for time history analysis. The direction entry (Dir.) is used only
for labeling, not as an analytic input value.
Topics
Spectrum/Time History Profile ....................................................... 718
Factor ............................................................................................. 718
Dir. ................................................................................................. 718
Start Node ...................................................................................... 720
Stop Node ...................................................................................... 720
Increment ....................................................................................... 720
Anchor Movement .......................................................................... 720
Force Set # .................................................................................... 721
Force Sets Tab .............................................................................. 721
Examples ....................................................................................... 726
Spectrum/Time History Profile

Specifies the name of a spectrum or time history pulse/shock definition applied to the load case,
as defined on the Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab (on page 711). More than one
definition can be listed, with one on each row. Each spectrum or time history pulse specified is
applied to the model in this load case.
Factor
Specifies a value for the spectrum shock table multiplier. This value is usually 1.0.
Dir.
Specifies the applied direction of the spectrum/DLF shock load. Select X, Y, or Z. You can also
enter direction cosines, such as (.707, 0, .707), or direction vectors, such as (1,0,1).
This value is used as follows, depending on the analysis type:
For earthquake analysis:
Direction specifies the loading direction.
Direction indicates the dependence or independence of the loads. When modal
combinations precede spatial combinations, loads with the same direction are summed at
the modal level before any spatial combination.
Direction acts as an output label for the maximum contributor, such as 3X(1), where the first
profile in direction X is reported as X(1). 3X(1) indicates that the largest contributor to the

Dynamic Analysis
total response is from the third mode of vibration and due to the first spectrum/shock defined
as X.
For force spectrum analysis, the force vector (direction) is already established:
Direction indicates the dependence or independence of the loads as discussed above.
Direction acts as an output label for the maximum contributor, as discussed above for
earthquake analysis.
For time history analysis, time history combinations are algebraic (in-phase):
Direction acts only as an output label for the maximum contributor, such as 3X(1).
To define an earthquake type of loading, CAESAR II must know what how the earthquake shock
acts from the shock spectrum table. CAESAR II must also know the direction of the shock. A
shock load case is typically comprised of three shock components in the X, Y, and Z directions.
The combination of each of these components shock loads defines the earthquakes dynamic
loading of the piping system.
Skewed directions can be entered by giving a direction cosine or direction vector. Skewed shock
contributions are entered when the piping or structural system appears particularly sensitive to a
shock along a skewed line. This most often occurs when a majority of the piping system does
not lay along the X and Z axes.
Any number of shock components can act in the same direction. For example, there can be two
X direction components. This usually occurs with independent support shock contributions
where one X direction component applies to one support group and another X direction
component applies to a different support group. There can also be two shock components in the
same direction without having independent support contributions, by defining two shock
contributions in the same direction without start, stop, or increment node entries.
In the simplest form of force spectrum loading, there is only a single shock component in the
load case. For that situation, there is only a single line of input on the Load Cases tab. When
there are multiple lines of input on the load case screen, such as in analyzing a traveling
pressure wave that impacts different elbow-elbow pairs, there can be many components to the
shock load case. The combination of responses from each of these shock loading components
can be established in one of two ways. If the value of Direction is the same for each load
component, then the directional combination method is used to combine the responses from
each load component. If the value of Direction is different for each load component, then the
spatial combination method is used to combine the responses from each load component.
Directional combinations are always made before modal combinations, while spatial
combinations can be made before or after modal combinations. The default is to perform the
modal combinations before spatial combinations. Either spatial or directional combinations can
be made using the ABS or SRSS method.

Dynamic Analysis
Start Node
Specifies the number of the starting node of a group of restraints at which the spectrum load is
applied for independent support motion analysis (ISM). The spectrum is applied to all restraint
nodes in the group between Start Node and Stop Node in steps of Increment. The range of
nodes must include at least one node in the piping system.
The component of an independent support shock applies only to a group of support points. For
example, different shock spectra are generated for rack level piping and for ground level piping.
earthquake. The ground level supports are subject to a different shock excitation, not influenced
by the rack. One node range is used to define the rack support shock contributions and another
is used to define the ground support shock contributions.
This option is only available when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type.
Stop Node
Specifies the number of the ending node of a group of restraints at which the spectrum load is
applied for independent support motion analysis (ISM). The spectrum is applied to all restraint
nodes in the group between Start Node and Stop Node in steps of Increment. The range of
nodes must include at least one node in the piping system. If no value is entered, the load is
applied at the start node.
Increment
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node for in a group
of restraints that is loaded by this spectrum for Independent Support Motion analysis (ISM). The
spectrum is applied to all restraint nodes in the group between Start Node and Stop Node in
steps of Increment. The range of nodes must include at least one node in the piping system. If
no value is entered, the load is applied at the start node.
Anchor Movement
Specifies the absolute displacement of the restraints included in this spectrum shock case for
independent support motion analysis (ISM). This displacement is applied to all restrained nodes
in the node group, and is used to calculate the pseudostatic load components representing the
relative displacement of the individual restraint sets. If no value is entered, and if the defined
shock for this row does not encompass the entire system, this value is calculated by the
software. The value is taken from the lowest frequency entry of the response spectrum: the
specified displacement, velocity/frequency (for velocity spectra), or acceleration/frequency 2 (for
acceleration spectra). Frequency is angular frequency.

Dynamic Analysis
Force Set #
Specifies the force set number corresponding to a set entered in the Force Sets tab if the
spectrum/load profile name describes a force-type spectrum (instead of displacement, velocity,
or acceleration). For more information, see Force Sets Tab (on page 721). If no value is entered,
Factor and Dir. must also have no values.
This option is not available when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type.
Force Sets Tab

The Force Sets tab is available when Relief Loads (spectrum), Water Hammer/Slug Flow
(spectrum), and Time History are selected for Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis
window.
Spectrum or time history analysis can have multiple force sets.
Force spectrum analyses, such as a relief valve loading, differ from earthquake analyses
because there is no implicit definition of the load distribution. For example, the loading for
earthquakes is uniform over the entire structure and proportional to the pipe mass. For relief
valves and other point loadings, the load is not uniformly distributed and is not proportional to
the mass. A water hammer load is proportional to the speed of sound and the initial velocity of
the fluid. Its point of application is at subsequent elbow-elbow pairs. Force spectrum analyses
require more information than the more common earthquake simulations: the load magnitude,
direction, and location. Forces that occur together are grouped into like-numbered force sets
and are manipulated in the analysis together. For example, the following shows two different
loading levels of the same type of load:
Force Direction Node Force Set #
-3400 Y 35 1
-1250 Y 35 2
For a skewed load, force components belong to the same force set, because the components
always occur together:
-2134 Y 104 1
-2134 X 104 1

Dynamic Analysis
The general procedure for applying a force spectrum load is as follows:

1. Determine the pulse time history acting at a single node or over a group of nodes. The pulse
waveform must be the same for all nodes in a group, but the maximum pulse amplitude may
vary.
2. To convert a time history to a response spectrum, use the DLF/Spectrum Generator (on
page 777) to build a DLF versus frequency file for the time-pulse waveform. This is a
standard shock table file. This step is not needed for a time history analysis. The data is
automatically added to the dynamic input and can be saved to a separate file.
3. On the Spectrum Definitions tab or Time History Definitions tab, define the DLF versus
frequency file just created as a force spectrum data file with linear interpolation along the
frequency axis and linear interpolation along the ordinate axis. Begin the shock name with a
#. The software then reads the shock table from the data file.
4. Determine the maximum force magnitude that acts on each node subject to the pulse load.
5. On the Force Sets tab, specify the maximum amplitude of the dynamic load, the direction,
and the nodes.
If the force-time profiles are normalized to 1.0, the maximum magnitudes of the
loads are entered here. If the profiles are entered using their actual values, the force set
values are entered as 1.0.
6. On the Spectrum Load Cases tab or Time History Load Cases tab, enter the force
spectrum name (defined in the Spectrum Definitions tab), the table multiplication factor
(usually 1.0), a direction, and the Force Set # (defined on the Force Sets tab). This step
defines the link between the force spectrum and the force loading pattern.
7. Set up any other parameters needed to run the spectrum analysis. Perform error checking,
and after there are no fatal errors, run the analysis.
You can include any number of user comment lines by clicking Cmt. There can be any
number of line entries in the Force spectrum data.
If there are multiple force spectrum components in a single dynamic load case, carefully
select the combination method. The same rules that cover earthquake shocks and
components apply to force spectrum shocks and components
Topics
Force .............................................................................................. 723
Direction ......................................................................................... 723
Node ............................................................................................... 723
Force Set # ..................................................................................... 723
Examples........................................................................................ 723

Dynamic Analysis
Specifies the magnitude of the impulse force (dynamic load) at the node. The sign of this value
is according to the CAESAR II global coordinate system
The total applied force is the product of this value, the selected force value from the
spectrum or load profile, and the factor entered for the load case.
Specifies the direction of the impulse force (dynamic load). Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction
cosines, or direction vectors. The format for direction cosines is (cx, cy, cz), such as
(0.707,0.0,0.707). The format for direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).
Specifies the node at which the impulse force (dynamic load) is applied. The node must exist in
the model.
Specifies the numeric value associated with this row (force set). Force sets are used to
construct the dynamic load cases. Values are arbitrary, but usually start at 1 and increment by
one.
Each impulse can be assigned to a different force set, which provides the most capability when
constructing load cases. Multiple rows with the same value form a single force set.
Nodes 5, 10, and 15 define a cantilever pipe leg that is part of an offshore production platform.
The dynamic load as a function of time is equal to a half sine wave. The waveform is the same
for all three nodes, but the maximum dynamic load on node 5 is 5030 lb., on node 10 is 10,370
lb., and on node 15 is 30,537 lb. Three force sets are built for this problem. One has the
dynamic loads acting in the X direction. The second has the dynamic loads acting in the Z
direction. The third has the dynamic loads acting simultaneously in the X an Z directions. The
force spectrum input data is:
X DIRECTION HALF SINE WAVE/CURRENT LOADING
5030 X 5 1
10370 X 10 1
30537 X 15 1
Z DIRECTION HALF SINE WAVE/CURRENT LOADING

Dynamic Analysis
5030 Z 5 2
10370 Z 10 2
30537 Z 15 2
X AND Z DIRECTION WAVE/CURRENT LOADING
5030 X 5 3
5030 Z 5 3
10370 X 10 3
10370 Z 10 3
30537 X 15 3
30537 Z 15 3
A relief valve at node 565 is being investigated for different reactor decompression conditions.
The maximum load for the first condition is 320 kips in the X direction. The maximum load for
the second decompression condition is 150 kips in the X direction. The third decompression
condition maximum load is 50 kips. Three different maximum force sets are defined:
REACTOR DECOMP CONDITION 1
320000 X 565 1
REACTOR DECOMP CONDITION 2
150000 X 565 2
REACTOR DECOMP CONDITION 3 (MOST FREQUENT)
50000 X 565 3

Dynamic Analysis
A startup shock wave passes through a single elbow system. Nodes in the piping model are 5,
10, and 15 as shown:
As the wave starts off between 5 and 10 there is an initial dynamic axial load on the anchor at 5.
When the shock wave hits the elbow at 10, the axial load in the 5-10 elements balance the initial
imbalance at node 5, and there become an axial imbalance in the 10-15 element. This shock
load is modeled as two completely separate impacts on the piping system. The first is the
dynamic anchor load at 5. If 5 is a flexible anchor then this load may cause dynamic
displacements of the piping system and 5 will just be subject to the dynamic time history pulse
due to the shock. Assume the anchor at 5 is a flexible vessel nozzle. The second shock load is
the unbalanced dynamic pressure load in the 10-15 element that exists until the shock reaches
the node 15. Friction losses in the line reduce the shock magnitude as it travels down the line. In
the time the wave leaves the anchor at 5 until it encounters the bend at 10, there is a 50% drop
in the pulse strength as shown:

Dynamic Analysis
This pressure drop was calculated using a transient fluid simulator. Between nodes 10 and 15
the pulse strength drops even further as shown:
The force spectrum loads are:

X DIRECTION LOAD ON FLEXIBLE ANCHOR AT 5
-5600 X 5 1
Z DIRECTION LOAD ON ELBOW AT 10
2800 Z 10 2
Examples
Define a shock load case that excites the entire piping system with a vibration of one times the
El Centro earthquake in the X direction, one times the El Centro earthquake in the Z, and 0.667
times the El Centro earthquake in the Y direction.
Spectrum Factor Dir.
ELCENTRO 1 X
ELCENTRO 1 Z
ELCENTRO 0.667 Y

Dynamic Analysis
Define a shock load case that excites the piping system with the horizontal and vertical
components of the Reg. Guide 1.60 shock spectra for a 2 percent critically damped system. The
The maximum ground acceleration is set on the Control Parameters tab and has no effect on
the shock load case definitions.
1.60H2 1 X
1.60V2 1 Y
1.60H2 1 Z
Define a shock load case that is comprised of custom shocks BENCH1 and BENCH2. BENCH1
acts in the X and Z directions, and BENCH2 acts in the Y direction. The scale factor for all
shocks is 1.0.
BENCH1 1 X
BENCH2 1 Y
BENCH1 1 Z
One of the shock load cases excites the piping system along a line that is 45 degrees off of the
global axes in the horizontal plane. It is suspected that this direction of excitation yields the
worst possible results. Apply the custom shock BENCH1 in the horizontal direction and
BENCH2 in the vertical direction.
BENCH1 1 (1,0,1)
BENCH1 1 (-1,0,1
)
BENCH2 1 Y
Define a shock load case that excites the piping system with a vibration of two times the El
Centro earthquake in the X, Y, and Z directions. There should be two shock load cases. The first
should use an independent summation and the second a simultaneous summation.
The load cases are defined as shown. Remember that independent summation means MODAL
then SPATIAL, and simultaneous means SPATIAL then MODAL.

Dynamic Analysis
There are several ways to accomplish the same objective using parameters on other
tabs, such as the Control Parameters tab. Only the method using the explicit definition of the
load case combination method is shown in this example.
LOAD CASE 1 SHOCK CONTRIBUTIONS
MODAL(GROUP), SPATIAL(SRSS), MODAL COMBINATIONS FIRST
ELCENTRO 2 X
ELCENTRO 2 Y
ELCENTRO 2 Z
LOAD CASE 2 SHOCK CONTRIBUTIONS

SPATIAL(SRSS), MODAL(GROUP), SPATIAL COMBINATIONS FIRST
ELCENTRO 2 X
ELCENTRO 2 Y
ELCENTRO 2 Z
Define a shock case that has the custom spectrum 1DIR acting only in the Z direction. Set the
stress type for the case to be operating and use modal summations before spatial summations.
Modal or spatial summations are not shown below because modal summation is the CAESAR II
default and is controlled by Spatial or Modal Combination First (on page 762) on the Control
Parameters tab.
Stress Types: OPE
1DIR 1 Z
The support nodes 5, 25, 35, 45, and 56 are pipe shoes sitting on concrete foundations. The
support nodes 140, 145, 157, 160, and 180 are second level rack supports, that is, pipe shoes
sitting on structural steel beams in the second level of the rack. The ground level shock
spectrum name is GROUND04, and the second level rack spectrum name is RACKLEVEL2-04.
Set up the shock load case to define these independent support excitations and omit any
relative support movement.
GROUND LEVEL EXCITATION

Dynamic Analysis
Start Stop Anchor

Spectrum Factor Dir. Node Node Increment Movement
GROUND04 1 X 5 56 1 0
GROUND04 1 Y 5 56 1 0
GROUND04 1 Z 5 56 1 0
RACK LEVEL 2 EXCITATION
Start Stop Anchor

RACKLEVEL2-04 1 X 140 180 1 0
RACKLEVEL2-04 1 Y 140 180 1 0
RACKLEVEL2-04 1 Z 140 180 1 0
Next, set up a shock load case, and define all combinations options explicitly. Use the same
shock components as defined above, except assume that the pseudostatic component is added
using the SRSS combination method. Also change the modal summation method to SRSS. This
is the recommended method. When the modal summation method is SRSS it does not matter
whether modal or spatial combinations are performed first. The order is only a factor when
closely spaced modes are considered in the grouping, 10 percent, and DSRSS methods.
MODAL(SRSS),PSEUDOSTATIC(SRSS),SPATIAL(SRSS)
GROUND LEVEL EXCITATION
Start Stop Anchor

GROUND04 1 X 5 56 1
GROUND04 1 Y 5 56 1
GROUND04 1 Z 5 56 1
RACK LEVEL 2 EXCITATION
Start Stop Anchor

RACKLEVEL2-04 1 X 140 180 1
RACKLEVEL2-04 1 Y 140 180 1
RACKLEVEL2-04 1 Z 140 180 1

Dynamic Analysis
The last elbow in the relief valve piping is at node 295. The spectrum name: BLAST contains the
DLF response spectrum for relief valve firing. SPECTRUM/TIME HISTORY FORCE SET #1
contains the load information and its point of application. Show the load case input that provides
the most conservative combination of modal results. Because there is only a single loading, no
consideration is given to spatial or directional combinations.
Shock Name, Factor, Direction, and Force Set #
ABSOLUTE MODAL SUMMATION, ONLY A SINGLE LOADING
COMPONENT AND SO NO CONSIDERATION GIVEN TO SPATIAL OR
DIRECTIONAL COMBINATIONS.
BLAST, 1, X, 1
MODAL (ABS)
Click Directives to open the Directive Builder dialog box and select these values.
For more information, see Directive Builder (on page 775).
Use the same example above and combine the modes using the grouping method. This will
produce the most realistic solution.
BLAST, 1, X, 1
MODAL (GROUP)
There are two elbow-to-elbow pairs that are of significance in this job. Water hammer loads act
on the elbow at 40 in the X direction and on the elbow at 135 in the Y-direction. In the
SPECTRUM/TIME HISTORY FORCE SET input, force set #1 is defined as the load at 40 and
force set #2 is defined as the load at 135. Add the response quantities from each load
component first, using an ABS summation, and then the resulting modal response quantities,
using the grouping summation method. Two identical methods for achieving the same results
are shown.
Shock Name, Factor, Direction, and Force set #
BECAUSE THE "DIRECTION" INPUT IS THE SAME, THAT IS "X", FOR BOTH,
LOAD CONTRIBUTIONS, THE DIRECTIONAL COMBINATION METHOD
WILL GOVERN HOW THE HAMMER40 AND HAMMER135 RESPONSES
ARE COMBINED.
HAMMER40, 1, X, 1
HAMMER135, 1, X, 2
DIRECTIONAL (ABS), MODAL(GROUP)
or
BECAUSE THE "DIRECTION" INPUT IS DIFFERENT, THAT IS "X" AND "Y,"
THE SPATIAL COMBINATION METHOD WILL GOVERN HOW THE
HAMMER40 AND HAMMER135 RESPONSES ARE COMBINED. NOTE THAT

Dynamic Analysis
ON THE DIRECTIVE LINE THE "SPATIAL" DIRECTIVE COMES BEFORE

THE "MODAL" DIRECTIVE.
HAMMER40, 1, X, 1
HAMMER135, 1, Y, 2
SPATIAL(ABS), MODAL(GROUP)
Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab

The Static/Dynamic Combinations tab is available when Earthquake (spectrum), Relief
Loads (spectrum), Water Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum), and Time History are selected for
Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.
Each analysis can have multiple load case combinations. Multiple static and dynamic cases can
exist:
Each static or dynamic case must be on a separate line.
The order of the load cases is not important, and has no effect on the results.
Comment lines may be included.
Static cases alone can be combined without dynamic cases.
Dynamic cases alone can be combined without static cases.
Most piping codes combine occasional dynamic stresses with sustained static stresses. This
combination is compared to the occasional allowable stress.
Each combination references static load case and dynamic load case numbers to be combined.
Any number of static or dynamic loads can be combined in a single combination load case.
Each combination is on a separate row.
The following options are also available:

Editing Load Case
Select a load case to edit.
Stress Types
Select the stress type for the load case:
OPE - Stress from operating loads.
OCC - Stress from occasional short-term loads.
SUS - Stress from primary sustained loads.
EXP - Stress from secondary thermal expansion loads.
FAT - Stress from fatigue loads.
This option is not available for time history analysis.
Fatigue Cycles
Specifies the number of fatigue cycles. This option is only available when FAT is selected

Dynamic Analysis
for Stress Types and is s not available for time history analysis.
Directives
Opens the Directive Builder (on page 775) dialog box, where you can control the
combination method parameters, using methods such as ABS and SRSS (square root of
the sum of the squares).
Add New Load Case
Adds a new load case.
Delete Current Load Case
Deletes the current load case.
Topics
Load Case ...................................................................................... 732
Factor ............................................................................................. 732
Examples........................................................................................ 732
Load Case
Specifies the static or dynamic load case to be included in the combination case. Select a load
case from the list. Static load cases start with S, and dynamic load cases are start with D. Each
is then followed by a load case number of a static or shock analysis defined on the Load Cases
tab. For more information, see Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab (on page 716).
The following examples are valid values: S1, STATIC1, S3, STATIC3, D1, DYNAMICS1, S#1,
and D#1. Use any length up to 24 characters. For static load case definitions, the static case
.
For dynamic load case definitions, the dynamic load case number refers to the shock load case.
Factor
Specifies a multiplication factor to be applied to the results of the load case. The resulting
product is then used in the combination case. The default is 1.0.
Examples
The static load cases are:

1 = W+P1+D1+T1+H (OPE)
2 = W+P1+H (SUS)
3 = L1 - L2 (EXP)
The dynamic load cases are:
1 = Operating Basis Earthquake
2 = 1/2 the Operating Basis Earthquake
Combine the operating basis earthquake stresses with the sustained static stresses:

Dynamic Analysis
Load Case Factor
STATIC2 1.0
DYNAMIC1 1.0
or
Load Case Factor
S2 1
D1 1

1 = W + P1 (For hanger design)
2 = W + P1 + D1 + T1 (For hanger design)
3 = W + P1 + D1 + T1 + H (OPE)
4 = W + P1 + H (SUS)
5 = L3 - L4 (EXP)
There is one dynamic load case. Create an occasional case that is the sum of the sustained and
the dynamic stresses using the SRSS combination method and the ABS combination method.
Additionally, combine the expansion static case and the dynamic case using the SRSS
combination method. This is a total of three combination load cases. The first two static hanger
design load cases cannot be used in a combination case.
* COMBINATION CASE 1:
* SRSS COMBINATION OF SUSTAINED AND DYNAMIC CASES
STRESSTYPE (OCC), COMBINATION (SRSS)
Load Case Factor
STATIC4 1
DYNAMIC1 1
* ABS COMBINATION OF SUSTAINED AND DYNAMIC CASES
STRESSTYPE (OCC), COMBINATION (ABS)
Load Case Factor
STATIC4 1
DYNAMIC1 1

Dynamic Analysis
* SRSSCOMBINATION OF EXPANSION AND DYNAMIC CASES
STRESSTYPE (OCC), COMBINATION (SRSS)
Load Case Factor
STATIC5 1
DYNAMIC1 1
Stress type and combination are defined on the Directive Builder dialog box. For
more information, see Directive Builder (on page 775).

1 = W+T1+P+D1+H (OPE)
2 = W+P+H (SUS)
3 = U1 (OCC) Static seismic simulation
4 = L1-L2 (EXP)
5 = L2+L3 (OCC) (SCALAR)
Create an SRSS combination of the static seismic case and both the sustained and operating
static cases:
COMBINATION (SRSS), STRESSTYPE (OCC)
Load Case Factor
STATIC2 1
STATIC3 1
* COMBINATION CASES 2:
COMBINATION (SRSS), STRESSTYPE (OCC)
Load Case Factor
STATIC1 1
STATIC3 1

1 = W+P1 (Hanger design restrained weight case)
2 = W+T1+P1+D1 (Hanger design load case #1)

Dynamic Analysis
3 = W+T2+P1+D1 (Hanger design load case #2)

4 = WNC+P1 (Hanger design actual cold loads)
5 = W+T1+H+P1+D1 (OPE)
6 = W+P1+H (SUS)
7 = L5-L6 (EXP)
Combine the static sustained stresses with 1/2 the shock case 1 results, 1/2 the shock case 2
results, and 1.333 times the shock case 3 results. The combination method is SRSS. For a
second combination case, combine the static sustained stresses with 1/2 the shock case 4
results, 1/2 the shock case 5 results, and 1.333 times the shock case 6 results.
COMBINATION (SRSS)
Load Case Factor
STATIC6 1
DYNAMIC1 1/2
DYNAMIC2 1/2
DYNAMIC3 1.333
or
COMBINATION (SRSS)
Load Case Factor
S6 1
D1 0.5
D2 0.5
D3 1.333
COMBINATION (SRSS)
Load Case Factor
STATIC6 1
DYNAMIC4 0.5
DYNAMIC5 0.5

Dynamic Analysis
DYNAMIC6 1.333
Lumped Masses Tab

This tab displays for any selection of Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.
Adds or deletes mass from the model.
You can add extra mass, which is not considered significant in the static model (such as a
flange pair) here. You can also add weights modeled as downward-acting concentrated forces
here, because CAESAR II does not assume that concentrated forces are system weights (that
is, forces due to gravity acting on a mass).
You can also delete masses from the static mass model to economize the analysis, which is the
same as deleting degrees-of-freedom. If the system response to some dynamic load is isolated
to specific sections of the piping system, you can remove other sections of the system from the
dynamic model by removing their mass. Also, you can delete mass selectively for any of the
three global coordinate directions when you want to delete directional degrees-of-freedom.
For example, if a piping system includes a structural frame where the piping rests on the
structure and is connected to the structure only in the Y direction, these two systems are
independent of each other in the X and Z directions. You can remove the X and Z mass of the
structure without affecting the analysis results. With the X and Z masses removed, calculations
proceed much faster.
Topics
Mass .............................................................................................. 736
Direction ......................................................................................... 736
Start Node ...................................................................................... 737
Stop Node ...................................................................................... 737
Increments ..................................................................................... 737
Mass
Specifies the magnitude of the concentrated mass (in current units) to be applied to the
specified node. A positive value is added to the calculated mass assigned to the node, a
negative value is subtracted from the calculated mass, and a zero value eliminates the mass.
Direction
Specifies the direction in which the mass acts. The values for translated mass are X, Y, Z, and
ALL (where ALL represents X, Y, and Z). The values for rotated mass are RX, RY, RZ, and
RALL (where RALL represents RX, RY, and RZ).
Rotational masses only apply when the consistent mass model is used. For more
information, see Mass Model (LUMPED/CONSISTENT) (on page 770) on the Control
Parameters tab.

Dynamic Analysis
Start Node
Specifies the number of the starting node at which this mass is applied.
If entered without values for Stop Node and Increment, then the start node must exist in the
piping system. If entered with values for Stop Node and Increment, then the range of nodes
identified in the range must include at least one node in the piping system.
Stop Node
Specifies the number of the ending node in the model to which the mass is applied. Used as
part of a "range of nodes" lumped mass command with Start Node and Increment. This value
is optional.
Increments
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node. Used as part
of a "range of nodes" lumped mass command. This value is optional and defaults to 1 if no value
is entered.
There can be any number of line entries on the Lumped Masses tab.
The zero-mass capability is particularly useful when you are not interested in the modes for part
of the system. That part of the system is usually modeled only for its stiffness effect.
450 is added to the assigned mass at node 40 in the X, Y, and Z directions.

450 ALL 40
All nodes from 12 to 25 have all assigned mass removed in the X, Y, and Z directions. Some
nodes may not exist in this range but this is acceptable as long as at least one node in the range
exists in the system.
0.0 ALL 12 25 1
375 is added in the X, Y, and Z directions for nodes 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, and 50, if they exist. All
assigned mass is removed for all nodes from 1 and 600 in the X and Y directions.
375 A 25 50 5
0.0 X 1 600 1
0.0 Y 1 600 1

Dynamic Analysis
Snubbers Tab
This tab is available for any selection of Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.
Add snubbers to the model. Snubbers are supports that only resist dynamic loading while
allowing static displacement, such as displacement from thermal growth. Snubbers must have
their stiffness defined. Snubbers are not rigid by default because they are typically not as stiff as
other types of restraints.
Snubbers may also be added in Input > Piping as part of the static model. In either
the static or dynamic analysis, a snubber is idealized as a stiffness rather than damping at a
point.
Topics
Stiffness ......................................................................................... 738
Direction ......................................................................................... 738
Node .............................................................................................. 738
CNode ............................................................................................ 738
Stiffness
Specifies the stiffness of the snubber. The value must be positive. If the snubber is rigid enter a
value of 1.0E12.
Direction
Specifies the direction for the line of action of the snubber. Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction
cosines, or direction vectors. The format for direction cosines is (cx, cy, cz), such as
(0.707,0.0,0.707). The format for direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).
Node
Specifies the node number where the snubber acts.
Connecting nodes for snubbers work in the same way as for restraints.
CNode
Specifies the second node number to which the other end of the snubber is connected. This
value is optional. If the snubber acts between the piping system and a fixed point in space, then
do not enter a value for CNode.
Connecting nodes for snubbers works in the same way as for restraints.
Add a rigid snubber at node 150 in the Z direction.

1E12 Z 150

Dynamic Analysis
Add rigid snubbers at nodes 160, 165, and 170 in the Z direction.
1E12 Z 160
1E12 Z 165
1E12 Z 170
Add a rigid snubber between the structural steel node 1005 and the piping node 405 in the Z
direction.
1E12 Z 405 1005
Add a 5,000 lb./in. snubber in the X and Y directions at the piping node 500. The X snubber
connects to the structural steel node 1050 and the Y snubber connects to the overhead line at
node 743.
* HORIZONTAL SNUBBER BETWEEN STEAM LINE AND STEEL
5000 X 500 1050.
* VERTICAL SNUBBER BETWEEN STEAM LINE AND OVER HEAD COOLING WATER
LINE
5000 Y 500 743
Control Parameters Tab

This tab is available for any selection of Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.

Dynamic Analysis
The type of analysis determines the parameters available on the Control Parameters tab. The
software displays the list of applicable parameters. The control parameters available for each
analysis are shown below:
Table Notes:
X Required.
1 Required if system has nonlinear restraints or hanger design.
2 Used only where friction is defined.
3 Max. No. of Eigenvalues and Frequency Cutoff work as a pair in terminating the eigen extraction.
4 Used if modal combination method is GROUP.
5 Used if modal combination method is DSRSS.
6 Used if USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.60 or Uniform Building Code seismic spectra are specified in the shock
definition.
7 Used if independent support movement (USM) loads are present or if defined shock does not include all
supports in the system.

Dynamic Analysis
8 Used if pseudo-static components are included.
9 Used if missing mass components are included.
10 Used if more than one spectrum load is applied in the same direction.
For modal analysis, set the number of modes of vibration to extract by specifying a
maximum number, a cutoff frequency, or both.
Topics
Analysis Type (Harmonic/Spectrum/Modes/Range/TimeHist) ...... 741
Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint Status ........................... 751
Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated .............................................. 753
Frequency Cutoff (HZ) ................................................................... 755
Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) ........ 756
Load Duration (DSRSS) (sec) ....................................................... 757
Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical) ............................................... 758
ZPA (Reg. Guide 1.60/UBC - g's) <or> # Time History Output Cases
....................................................................................................... 759
Re-use Last Eigensolution (Frequencies and Mode Shapes) ....... 762
Spatial or Modal Combination First ............................................... 762
Spatial Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) .................................... 763
Modal Combination Method (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) .... 763
Include Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Components (Y/N) ...... 766
Include Missing Mass Components ............................................... 767
Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Comb. Method (SRSS/ABS) ... 769
Missing Mass Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) ......................... 769
Directional Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) .............................. 769
Mass Model (LUMPED/CONSISTENT)......................................... 770
Sturm Sequence Check on Computed Eigenvalues ..................... 770
Analysis Type (Harmonic/Spectrum/Modes/Range/TimeHist)

Displays the dynamic analysis type selected for Analysis Type. For more information, see The
Dynamic Analysis Window (on page 699). Displays M (Modal), H (Harmonic), S1 (Earthquake
spectrum), S2 (Relief Loads spectrum), S3 (Water Hammer/Slug Flow spectrum), or T (Time
History).
Harmonic Analysis (on page 742)
Spectrum Analysis (on page 745)
Time History (on page 749)

Dynamic Analysis
The response of a system to a dynamically applied load is generally expressed through the
dynamic equation of motion:
Where:
M = system mass matrix
= acceleration vector, as a function of time
C = system damping matrix
= velocity vector, as a function of time
K = system stiffness matrix
x(t) = displacement vector, as a function of time
F(t) = applied load vector, as a function of time
The harmonic solver is most commonly used to analyze low frequency field vibrations due to
fluid pulsation or out-of-round rotating equipment displacements. This differential equation
cannot be solved explicitly, except in a few specific cases. Harmonic analysis looks at one of
these cases the set of dynamic problems where the forces or displacements (such as
pulsation or vibration) acting on the piping system take sinusoidal forms. When damping is zero
under harmonic loading, the dynamic equation of the system can be reduced to
M (t) + K x(t) = F0 cos (w t + Q)
Where:
F0 = harmonic load vector
w = angular forcing frequency of harmonic load (radian/sec)
t = time
Q = phase angle (radians)
This differential equation is solved directly for the nodal displacements at any time. From there
the system reactions, forces and moments, and stresses are calculated.
The equation has a solution of the form
x (t) = A cos (w t + Q)
Where:
A = vector of maximum harmonic displacements of system
Because acceleration is the second derivative of displacement with respect to time,
(t) = -A w2 cos w t
Inserting these equations for displacement and acceleration back into the basic harmonic
equation of motion yields,
-M A 2 cos ( t + Q) + K A cos ( t + Q) = Fo cos ( t + Q)
Dividing both sides of this equation by cos ( t + Q),

Dynamic Analysis
-M A 2 + K A = Fo
Reordering this equation,
(K - M 2) A = Fo
This is exactly the same form of the equation as is solved for all linear (static) piping problems.
The solution time for each excitation frequency takes only as long as a single static solution,
and, when there is no phase relationship to the loading, the results directly give the maximum
dynamic responses. Due to the speed of the analysis, and because the solutions are so directly
applicable, you should make as much use of this capability as possible. Keep two
considerations in mind:
When damping is not zero, the harmonic equation can only be solved if the damping matrix
is defined as the sum of multiples of the mass and stiffness matrix (Rayleigh damping), that
is
[C] = a [M] + b [K]
On a modal basis, the relationship between the ratio of critical damping Cc and the
constants a and b is
Where:
= Undamped natural frequency of mode (rad/sec)
For practical problems, a is extremely small, and can be ignored. The definition of b reduces
to
= 2 Cc/
CAESAR II uses this implementation of damping for its harmonic analysis, but two problems
exist. First, for multi-degree-of-freedom systems, there is not really a single b, but there
must be only a single b in order to get a solution of the harmonic equation. The second
problem is that the modal frequencies are not known prior to generation of the damping
matrix. Therefore, the w used in the calculation of b is the forcing frequency of the load,
instead of the natural frequency of a mode. When the forcing frequency of the load is in the
vicinity of a modal frequency, this gives a good estimation of the true damping.
If multiple harmonic loads occur simultaneously and are not in phase, system response is
the sum of the responses due to the individual loads
x(t) = S Ai cos ( t + Qi)
Where:
Ai = displacement vector of system under load i
Qi = phase angle of load i
In this case, an absolute maximum solution cannot be found. Solutions for each load, and
the sum of these, must be found at various times in the load cycle. These combinations are
then reviewed in order to determine which one causes the worst load case. Alternatively,
CAESAR II can select the frequency/phase pairs which maximize the system displacement.
Damped harmonics always cause a phased response.

Dynamic Analysis
The biggest use by far of the harmonic solver is in analyzing low frequency field vibrations
resulting from either fluid pulsation or out-of-round rotating equipment displacements. The
approach typically used is described briefly below:
1. A potential dynamic problem is first identified in the field. Large cyclic vibrations or high
stresses (fatigue failure) are present in an existing piping system, raising questions of
whether this represents a dangerous situation. As many symptoms of the problem (such as
quantifiable displacements or overstress points) are identified as possible for future use in
refining the dynamic model.
2. A model of the piping system is built using CAESAR II. This should be done as accurately
as possible, because system and load characteristics affect the magnitude of the developed
response. In the area where the vibration occurs, you should accurately represent valve
operators, flange pairs, orifice plates, and other in-line equipment. You may also want to add
additional nodes in the area of the vibration.
3. Assume the cause of the load, and estimate the frequency, magnitude, point, and direction
of the load. This is difficult because dynamic loads can come from many sources. Dynamic
loads may be due to factors such as internal pressure pulses, external vibration, flow
shedding at intersections, and two-phase flow. In almost all cases, there is some frequency
content of the excitation that corresponds to (and therefore excites) a system mechanical
natural frequency. If the load is caused by equipment, then the forcing frequency is probably
some multiple of the operating frequency. If the load is due to acoustic flow problems, then
dynamics). Use the best assumptions available to estimate the magnitudes and points of
application of the dynamic load.
4. Model the loading using harmonic forces or displacements, normally depending upon
whether the cause is assumed to be pulsation or vibration. Perform several harmonic
analyses, sweeping the frequencies through a range centered about the target frequency to
account for uncertainty. Examine the results of each of the analyses for signs of large
displacements, indicating harmonic resonance. If the resonance is present, compare the
results of the analysis to the known symptoms from the field. If they are not similar, or if
there is no resonance, this indicates that the dynamic model is not a good one. It must then
be improved, either in terms of a more accurate system (static) model, a better estimate of
the load, or a finer sweep through the frequency range. After the model has been refined,
repeat this step until the mathematical model behaves just like the actual piping system in
the field.
5. At this point, the model is a good representation of the piping system, the loads and the
relationship of the load characteristics to the system characteristics.
6. Evaluate the results of this run, in order to determine whether they indicate a problem.
Because harmonic stresses are cyclic, they should be evaluated against the endurance limit
of the piping material. Displacements should be reviewed against interference limits or
esthetic guidelines.
7. If the situation is deemed to be a problem, its cause must be identified. The cause is
normally the excitation of a single mode of vibration. For example, the Dynamic Load Factor
for a single damped mode of vibration, with a harmonic load applied is
Where:

Dynamic Analysis
DLF = dynamic loading factor

Cc = ratio of system damping to "critical damping,"
where "critical damping" =
f = forcing frequency of applied harmonic load
n = natural frequency of mode of vibration
A modal extraction of the system is done; one or more of these modes should have a
natural frequency close to the forcing frequency of the applied load. The problem mode can
be further identified as having a shape very similar to the shape of the total system vibration.
This mode shape has been dynamically magnified far beyond the other modes and
predominates in the final vibrated shape.
8. The problem mode must be eliminated. You typically want to add a restraint at a high point
and in the direction of the mode shape. If this cannot be done, the mode may also be altered
by changing the mass distribution of the system. If no modification of the system is possible,
it may be possible to alter the forcing frequency of the load. If the dynamic load was
assumed to be due to internal acoustics, you should reroute the pipe to change the internal
flow conditions. This may resolve or amplify the problem, but in either case avoids
CAESAR
is re-run using the single forcing frequency determined as a "good model." The stresses and
displacements are then re-evaluated.
9. If the dynamic problem has been adequately solved, the system is now re-analyzed
statically to determine the effects of any modifications on the static loading cases.
Adding restraint normally increases expansion stresses, while adding mass
increases sustained stresses.
Process output from a harmonic analysis in two ways:
Use the output processor to review displacement, restraint, force, or stress data either
graphically or in report form.
Animate the displacement pattern for each of the frequency load cases.
The results of harmonic dynamic loads cannot be combined using the Static/Dynamic
Combination option.
Spectrum analysis attempts to estimate the maximum response developed in a system during a
transient load. The results are a statistical summation of the maximum displacements, forces,
reactions, and stresses. The individual responses do not represent an actual physical loading
case because the maxima may all occur at different times. Spectrum analyses are especially
useful when the loading profile is random, or not exactly known, such as with seismic loads.
CAESAR II provides the ability to perform two types of spectrum analyses which may be
combined: seismic and force spectra. Seismic loadings may be evaluated either uniformly over
the entire system, or applied through individual support groups with corresponding anchor
movements. Force spectra analyses may be used to analyze impulse loadings, such as those
due to relief valve, fluid hammer, or slug flow.

Dynamic Analysis
Seismic loads cannot be solved through time history analyses, because earthquakes cause
random motion which may be different for each earthquake, even those occurring at the same
site. To simplify the analytical definition of the earthquake, it is necessary to get the expected
random waveform of acceleration (or velocity or displacement) versus time into a simple
frequency-content plot. The most predominantly used frequency-content plot is the response
spectrum. A response spectrum for an earthquake load can be developed by placing a series of
single degree-of-freedom oscillators on a mechanical shake table and feeding a typical (for a
specific site) earthquake time history through it, measuring the maximum response
(displacement, velocity, or acceleration) of each oscillator.
The expectation is that even though all earthquakes are different, similar ones should produce
the same maximum responses, even though the time at which they occur differs with each
individual occurrence. Responses are based on the maximum ground displacement and
acceleration, the dynamic load factors determined by the ratios of the predominant harmonic
frequencies of the earthquake to the natural frequencies of the oscillators, and system damping.
Response spectra for a number of damping values can be generated by plotting the maximum
response for each oscillator. A plot of a set of typical response spectra is shown below:
Seismic response spectra resemble harmonic Dynamic Load Factor curves, because seismic
loads indicate strong harmonic tendencies. As the damping value increases, the system
response approaches ground motion. Seismic spectra also usually show strong evidence of
flexible, resonant, and rigid areas. Spectra may have multiple peaks due to filtering by the
building and/or piping system. Multiple peaks are usually enveloped in order to account for
uncertainties in the analysis. Seismic response spectra peaks are typically spread to account for
inaccuracies as well.
The idea behind the generation of the response spectra is that the modes of vibration of a
system respond to the load in the exact same manner as a single degree-of-freedom oscillator.
System response may be plotted in terms of displacement, velocity, or acceleration, because
these terms of the spectra are all related by the frequency:
d=v/ =a/ 2

Dynamic Analysis
Where:
d = displacement from response spectrum at frequency
v = velocity from response spectrum at frequency
= angular frequency at which response spectrum parameters are taken
a = acceleration from response spectrum at frequency
Response Spectrum analysis proceeds according to the following steps:
Modes of vibration are extracted from the system using an Eigensolver algorithm. Each mode
has a characteristic frequency and mode shape.
1. The maximum response of each mode under the applied load is determined from the
spectrum value corresponding to the natural frequency of the mode.
2. The total system response is determined by summing the individual modal responses, using
methods that reflect the time independence of the responses and the portion of system
mass allocated to each mode.
There are four major sources of earthquake spectra available in CAESAR II:
El Centro
the north-south component of the May 18, 1940 El Centro California earthquake. The recorded
maximum acceleration was 0.33 g. The spectrum provided here is intended to apply to elastic
systems having 5 to 10 percent critical damping.
Nuclear Regulatory Guide 1.60
The predefined spectrum names are:
1.60H.5 1.60V.5 - Horizontal/vertical, 0.5% damping
1.60H2 1.60V2 - Horizontal/vertical, 2.0% damping
1.60H7 1.60V7 - Horizontal/vertical ,7.0% damping
These spectra are constructed according to the instructions given in Regulatory Guide 1.60 for
seismic design of nuclear plants. They must also be scaled up or down by the maximum ground
acceleration (ZPA zero period acceleration), specified in the CAESAR II control parameter
spreadsheet.
Uniform Building Code
The pre-defined spectrum names are:
UBCSOIL1 Spectrum for rock and stiff soils
UBCSOIL2 Spectrum for deep cohesionless or stiff clay soils
UBCSOIL3 Spectrum for soft to medium clays and sands
These spectra represent the normalized response spectra shapes for three soil types provided
in Figure 23-3 of the Uniform Building Code (1991 Edition). When used, they must be scaled by
the ZPA, which is the product of Z and I, where Z is the seismic zone coefficient and I is the
earthquake importance factor, from UBC Tables 23-I and 23-L. The ZPA can be specific using
the CAESAR II control parameter spreadsheet.

Dynamic Analysis
User defined spectra

User defined spectra may be entered with period or frequency as the range, and displacement,
velocity, or acceleration as the ordinate. These spectra may be read in from a text file or entered
directly into a spectrum table during dynamic input processing.
Earthquake ground motions are caused by the passing of acoustic shock waves through the
soil. These waves are usually hundreds of feet long. If supports having foundations in the soil
are grouped together within a several hundred-foot radius, they typically see exactly the same
excitation from the earthquake. If all of the supports for a particular piping system are attached
directly to ground type supports, each support is excited by an essentially identical time
waveform. This type of excitation is known as uniform support excitation. Often pipe is
supported from rack, building, or vessel structures as well as from ground type supports. These
intermediate structures sometimes filter or accentuate the effect of the earthquake. In this
situation, the supports attached to the intermediate structure are not exposed to the same
excitation as those that are attached directly to ground foundations. To accurately model these
systems, different shocks must be applied to different parts of the piping system. This type of
excitation is known as independent support motion (ISM) excitation. While the different support
groups are exposed to different shocks, there are also relative movements between support
relative to another is termed pseudostatic displacement, or seismic anchor movements. For

uniform support excitation, there are spatial and modal response components available for
combination. For independent support excitation, there are spatial and modal response
components available for each different support group, plus pseudostatic components of the
earthquake that must also be added into the dynamic response.
The major difference when running ISM type earthquake loads comes while building the shock
load cases. In the uniform excitation case, the shock acts implicitly over all of the supports in the
system. In the ISM case, different shocks act on different groups of supports. The Spectrum
Load Cases tab appears, with the following parameters:
Spectrum (name)
Factor
Dir (direction)
Start Node
Stop Node
Increment
Anchor Movement
Name, Factor, and Dir are all that is required for uniform support excitations. For ISM type
shocks, the group of nodes over which the shock acts must be specified as well, using Start
Node, Stop Node, and Increment. Anchor Movement is used to explicitly define the seismic
displacement of the restraint set. This displacement is used to calculate the pseudostatic load
components. If omitted, the software defaults to the displacement derived from the response
spectrum entry corresponding to the lowest frequency.

Dynamic Analysis
A similar method can be followed for non-random loads, such as an impulse load for which the
force versus time profile is known. A look at the equation for the earthquake problem explains
why the force spectrum solution is very similar to the earthquake solution:
The term on the right-hand side is a dynamic force acting on the piping system, such as F = Ma,
so the analogous equation to be solved for the force spectrum problem is:
Where:
F = the dynamic load (water hammer or relief valve)
Instead of the displacement, velocity, or acceleration spectrum used for the seismic problem, a
Dynamic Load Factor spectrum is used for a force spectrum problem. A DLF spectrum gives the
ratio of the maximum dynamic displacement divided by the maximum static displacement. The
earthquake response spectrum analysis method starts with the time history of an earthquake
excitation. The force spectrum analysis method is done in exactly the same way, except that the
analysis starts with the force versus time profile. Just as for the earthquake, this time history
loading is applied to a shake table of single degree-of-freedom bodies. A response spectrum
(DLF versus natural frequency) is generated by dividing the maximum oscillator displacements
by the static displacements expected under the same load. An alternate means of generating a
response spectrum for an impulse load is to numerically integrate the dynamic equation of
motion for oscillators of various frequencies under the applied load. Use Tools > DLF Spectrum
Generator.
Process output from a spectrum analysis in two ways:
Use the output processor to review the natural frequencies, mode shapes, participation
factors, included mass/force, displacements, restraint loads, forces, or stresses in report
form. Dynamic results also show the largest modal contributor, along with the mode and
shock load responsible for that contribution.
Animate the individual mode shapes extracted for the spectrum analysis.
Time history analysis is a more accurate, more computationally intensive analytical method than
response spectrum analysis. It is best suited to impulse loadings or other transient loadings
where the profile is known. This method of analysis involves the actual solution of the dynamic
equation of motion throughout the duration of the applied load and subsequent system vibration,
providing a true simulation of the system response.
As noted in Harmonic Analysis (on page 742), the dynamic equation of motion for a system is
This differential equation cannot be solved explicitly, but may be integrated using numeric
techniques by slicing the duration of the load into many small time steps. Assuming that the
change in acceleration between time slices is linear, the system accelerations, velocities,
displacements, and corresponding reactions, internal forces, and stresses are calculated at
successive time-steps.

Dynamic Analysis
Because the total response of a system is equivalent to the sum of the responses of its
individual modes of vibration, the above equation can be simplified assuming that the damping
matrix C is orthogonal. Use the transformation x = FX, to be expressed in modal coordinates:
Where:
= acceleration vector (in modal coordinates), as a function of time

C´ = diagonal damping matrix, where entry C´i = wi ci
i = angular frequency of mode i
ci = ratio of damping to critical damping for mode i
(t) = velocity vector (in modal coordinates), as a function of time
x(t) = displacement vector (in modal coordinates), as a function of time
= diagonal stiffness matrix, where entry i = i
2
This transformation represents N uncoupled second order differential equations, where N is the
number of modes of vibration extracted. N can then be integrated and summed, using the
in-phase, algebraic summation method to give the total system response. CAESAR II uses the
Wilson method (an extension of the Newmark method) to integrate the equations of motion,
providing an unconditionally stable algorithm regardless of time step size chosen.
Only one dynamic load can be defined for a time history analysis. This dynamic load case can
be used in as many static/dynamic combination load cases as necessary. The single load case
may consist of multiple force profiles applied to the system simultaneously or sequentially. Each
force versus time profile is entered as a spectrum with an ordinate of Force (in current units) and
a range of Time (in milliseconds). The profiles are defined by entering the time and force
coordinates of the corner points defining the profile.
A time can only be entered once. A time with zero force outside of the defined profile
need not be entered explicitly.
For example, the profiles shown in the following figure are entered as:
Time (MS) Force Time (MS) Force
0.0 0.0 20.0 1000.0
10.0 300.0 60.0 1000.0
20.0 1000.0 30.0 0.0

Dynamic Analysis
The load profiles are linked with force sets (indicating magnitude, direction, and location of the
applied load) in the shock case. The magnitude of the applied load is determined by the product
of the profile force, the force set magnitude, and the scale in the shock case.
You can enter only forces, not moments or restraint displacements, in the time history load
profile. Model moments using force couples, and simulate restraint displacements by entering
forces equal to the displacement multiplied by the restraint stiffness in the direction of the
displacement.
Process output from a Time History analysis in three ways:
Use the output processor to review the natural frequencies, mode shapes, participation
factors, included mass/force, displacements, and restraint loads, forces, or stresses in report
form. CAESAR
One results case contains the maximum individual components (such as axial stress,
X-displacement, and MZ reaction) of the system response, along with the time at which it
occurred. Several results cases represent the actual system response at specific times.
Dynamic results also show the largest modal contributor, along with the mode and transient
load responsible for that contribution.
Animate the shock displacement for the transient load cases. During animation, the
displacements, forces, moments, stresses, and other data associated with individual
elements are displayed at every time step and for the dynamic load alone, or for any of the
static/dynamic combinations.
Animate the individual mode shapes included in the time history response.
Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint Status

(Available for: Modal, Harmonic, Spectrum, Range, and Time History)
Specifies the static load case as described below. Select a load case from the list.
CAESAR II cannot perform a dynamic analysis on nonlinear systems. For dynamic analyses, a
one-directional restraint must be modeled as either seated (active) or lifted off (inactive), and a
gap must be either open (inactive) or closed (active). This process is automated when the static
load case is selected. CAESAR II automatically sets the linear condition at the non-linear
restraints in the system to correspond to their status in the selected load case. Think of this as
being the loading condition of the system (such as operating load) at the time at which the

Dynamic Analysis
dynamic load occurs. This automated linearization does not always provide an appropriate
dynamic model, and you may need to select other static load cases or manually alter the
restraint condition in order to simulate the correct dynamic response.
A static load case must precede the dynamics job whenever:
There are spring hangers to be designed in the job. The static runs must be made in order
to determine the spring rate to be used in the dynamic model.
There are non-linear restraints in the system, such as one-directional restraints,
large-rotation rods, bi-linear restraints, or gaps. The static analysis must be made in order to
determine the active status of each of the restraints for linearization of the dynamic model.
There are frictional restraints in the job, such as any restraints with a nonzero µ (mu) value.
The most common static load cases during a typical CAESAR II analysis are:
1 = W+P1+D1+T1+H (OPE)
2 = W+P1+H (SUS)
3 = L1-L2 (EXP)
If the operating condition is likely to exist throughout the duration of the dynamic transient, use
parameter 1. If the installed condition is more likely to exist during the transient, use parameter
2. It is extremely unlikely that expansion case 3 is correct, because it does not represent the
system status at any given time, but represents the difference between the first two cases.
1 = W+P1(For hanger design)

2 = W+P1+D1+T1(For hanger design)
3 = W+P1+D1+T1+H (OPE)
4 = W+P1+H (SUS)
5 = L3-L4 (EXP)
The correct static load cases to use are those in which the selected spring hangers have been
included. If the operating condition is the correct load case, use parameter 3. For the installed
condition, use parameter 4.
(Available for: Modal, Harmonic, Spectrum, Range, and Time History)

Specifies the friction stiffness factor as described below. Enter a value greater than zero to
consider friction stiffness in the analysis. Enter 0.0 to ignore friction in the analysis.
Dynamic analyses in CAESAR II act only on linear systems, so any non-linearities must be
linearized prior to analysis. Modeling of friction in dynamic models presents a special case,
because friction actually impacts the dynamic response in two ways. Static friction (before
breakaway) affects the stiffness of the system by providing additional restraint. Kinetic friction
(after breakaway) affects the damping component of dynamic response. Due to mathematical
constraints, damping is ignored for all analyses except time history and harmonics, for which it is
only considered on a system-wide basis.

Dynamic Analysis
The software allows friction to be taken into account through the use of this friction stiffness
factor. The software approximates the restraining effect of friction on the pipe by including
stiffnesses transverse to the direction of the restraint at which friction was specified. The
stiffness of these frictional restraints is calculated as:
Kfriction = F * µ * Fact
Where:
Kfriction = Stiffness of frictional restraint inserted by the software.
F = The load at the restraint taken from the selected static solution. This load is the total
resultant load acting on the restraint, including friction:
F = (F x2+Fy2+Fz2)1/2
µ = Friction coefficient at restraint, as defined in the static model.
Fact = Friction stiffness factor. Units are fixed in 1/inch, so you must convert to other units. If
stiffness Kfriction is defined in N/cm and force F is defined in N, then you must convert F act to
1/cm:
Kfriction = F * µ * Fact * (1 in/2.54 cm).
This factor should be adjusted as necessary in order to make the dynamic model simulate the
actual dynamic response of the system. The factor does not correspond to any actual dynamic
parameter, but is actually an adjustment factor to modify system stiffness. Entering a friction
factor greater than zero causes these friction stiffnesses to be inserted into the dynamic
analysis. Increasing this factor correspondingly increases the effect of the friction. Values such
as 1000 are typical. Entering a friction factor equal to zero ignores any frictional effect in the
dynamic analysis.
Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated

(Available for: Modal, Spectrum, and Time History)
Specifies the number of modal responses to be included in the system results through a mode
number cutoff. Enter a value for Setting. Enter 0 to limit modes extracted to the value of
Frequency Cutoff (HZ) (on page 755). Enter higher values as described below.
The first stage of the spectrum and time history analyses (and the only step for modal analysis)
is the use of the Eigensolver algorithm to extract piping system natural frequencies and mode
shapes. For the spectrum and time history analyses, the response under loading is calculated
for each of the modes, with the system response being the sum of the individual modal
responses. The more modes that are extracted, the more the sum of those modal responses
resembles the actual system response. This algorithm uses an iterative method for finding
successive modes, so extraction of a large number of modes usually requires much more time
than does a static solution of the same piping system. The object is to extract sufficient modes
to get a suitable solution, without straining computational resources.
This parameter is used, in combination with Frequency Cutoff (HZ), to limit the maximum
number of modes of vibration to be extracted during the dynamic analysis. If this parameter is
entered as 0, the number of modes extracted is limited only by the frequency cutoff and the
number of degrees-of-freedom in the system model.
A system has the following natural frequencies:

Dynamic Analysis
Mode Number Frequency (Hz)
1 0.6
2 3.0
3 6.1
4 10.7
5 20.3
6 29.0
7 35.4
8 40.7
9 55.6
The modes extracted for different values of Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated and
Frequency Cutoff are:
Max. No. of Number of

Eigenvalues Frequency Modes
Calculated Cutoff extracted
0 33 7
0 50 9
3 33 3
9 60 9
If you are more interested in providing an accurate representation of the system displacements,
request the extraction of a few modes, allowing a rapid calculation time. However, if an accurate
estimate of the forces and stresses in the system is the objective, calculation time grows as it
becomes necessary to extract far more modes. This is particularly true when solving a fluid
hammer problem in the presence of axial restraints. Often modes with natural frequencies of up
to 300 Hz are large contributors to the solution.
To determine how many modes are sufficient, extract a certain number of modes and review the
results. Repeat the analysis by extracting five to ten additional modes and comparing the new
results to the old. If there are significant changes between the results, repeat the analysis again,
adding five to ten more modes. This iterative process continues until the results taper off,
becoming asymptotic.
This procedure has two drawbacks. First is the time involved in making the multiple analyses
and the time involved in extracting the potentially large number of modes. The second
drawback, occurring with spectrum analysis, is less obvious. A degree of conservatism is
introduced when combining the contributions of the higher order modes. Possible spectral mode
summation methods include methods that combine modal results as same-sign (positive)
values: SRSS, ABSOLUTE, and GROUP. Theory states that the rigid modes act in phase with

Dynamic Analysis
each other, and should be combined algebraically, permitting the response of some rigid modes
to cancel the effect of other rigid modes. This is what occurs in a time history analysis. Because
of this conservatism, it is possible to get results which exceed twice the applied load, despite the
fact that the Dynamic Load Factor (DLF) of an impulse load cannot be greater than 2.0.
Frequency Cutoff (HZ)

(Available for: Modal, Spectrum, and Time History)
Specifies a frequency cutoff point in Hertz as described below.
When extracting modes to be used in dynamic analysis, you can specify a value for either Max.
No. of Eigenvalues Calculated (on page 753) or a frequency cutoff. Modal extraction ceases
when the Eigensolver extracts either the number of modes requested, or extracts a mode with a
frequency above the cutoff, whichever comes first.
You can select a frequency cutoff point for modes up to, but not far beyond, a recognized "rigid"
frequency, and then include the missing mass correction. For more information, see Include
Missing Mass Components (on page 767). Choosing a cutoff frequency to the left of the
resonant peak of the response spectrum provides a non-conservative result, because resonant
responses may be missed. During spectrum analysis, using a cutoff frequency to the right of the
peak, but still in the resonant range, yields either over- or under-conservative results, depending
upon the method used to extract the ZPA from the response spectrum. For time history analysis,
selecting a cutoff frequency to the right of the peak, but still in the resonant range, usually yields
non-conservative results. The missing mass force is applied with a dynamic load factor of 1.0.
Extracting a large number of rigid modes for calculation of the dynamic response may be
conservative in the case of spectrum analysis, because all spectral modal combination methods
(such as SRSS, GROUP, and ABS) give conservative results versus the algebraic combination
method used during time history analysis. This gives a more realistic representation of the net
response of the rigid modes. Based upon the response spectrum shown below, an appropriate
cutoff point for the modal extraction is about 33 Hz.
1. Non-conservative cutoff (Misses amplification of any modes in resonant range)
2. Conservative cutoff (Multiplies missing mass contribution by excessive DLF 1.6)
3. Optimal cutoff (Includes all modes in resonant range, uses low DLF 1.05 for missing
mass contribution, minimizes combination of rigid modes)

Dynamic Analysis
4. Conservative Cutoff (Too many rigid modes combined using non-conservative summation
methods)
When the analysis type is SPECTRUM, MODES, or TIMEHIST, either this parameter or Max.
No. of Eigenvalues Calculated (on page 753) must have a value.
Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms)

(Available for: Spectrum/GROUP and Time History)
Specifies a frequency or time-slice spacing as described below. The usage of this parameter
varies with the analysis type.
For a spectrum analysis with the GROUP Modal Combination Method (as defined by USNRC
Regulatory Guide 1.92), this value specifies the frequency spacing defining each modal group,
that is, the percentage of the base frequency between the lowest and highest frequency of the
group. Regulatory Guide 1.92 specifies the group spacing criteria as 10%, or 0.1. This is the
default value in CAESAR II. For more information, see Modal Combination Method
(Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) (on page 763).
For a time history analysis, this value is the length of the time slice, in milliseconds. The
software uses the value during its step-by-step integration of the equations of motion for each of
the extracted modes. CAESAR II uses the unconditionally stable Wilson q integration method
where any size time step provides a solution. A smaller step provides greater accuracy but more
strain on computational resources. The time step should be sufficiently small that it can
accurately map the force versus time load profile (that is, the time step should be smaller than
typical force ramp times). Additionally, the time step must be small enough that the contribution
of the higher order modes is not filtered from the response. For this reason, the time step should
be selected so that time step (in seconds) times maximum modal frequency (in Hz) is less than
0.1. For example, if Frequency Cutoff (HZ) (on page 755) is 50 Hz, this value should be set to a
maximum of 2 milliseconds:
0.002 sec x 50 Hz = 0.1

Dynamic Analysis
Load Duration (DSRSS) (sec)

(Available for: Spectrum/DSRSS and Time History)
Specifies the duration of the applied dynamic load, as described below.
For a time history analysis, this parameter specifies the total length of time over which the
dynamic response is simulated. The load duration divided by the time step size from Closely
Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) (on page 756) gives the total number of
integration steps making up the solution. CAESAR II limits the number of time steps to 5000 or
as permitted by available memory and system size. The duration should be at least equal to the
maximum duration of the applied load plus the period of the first extracted mode. This allows
simulation of the system response throughout the imposition of the external load, plus one full
cycle of the resulting free vibration. After this point, the response dies out according to the
damping value used. For example, if the applied load is expected to last 150 milliseconds and
the lowest extracted frequency is 3 Hz, set the load duration to a minimum of 0.150 plus 1/3, or
0.483 seconds.
For a spectrum analysis using the double sum (DSRSS) modal combination method (as defined
by USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.92), this value specifies the duration of the earthquake. This
duration is used to calculate the modal correlation coefficients based on empirical data. For
more information, see Modal Combination Method (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) (on page
763).

Dynamic Analysis
Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical)

(Available for: Spectrum/DSRSS, Harmonics, and Time History)
Specifies the ratio of critical damping as described below. Typical values for piping systems, as
recommended in USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.61 and ASME Code Case N-411, range from 0.01
to 0.05, based upon pipe size, earthquake severity, and the natural frequencies of the system.
Damping is not generally considered in the mathematical solutions required for spectrum or
harmonic analysis. It is ignored or solved as specialized cases in most analyses, and must be
instead considered through adjustment of the applied loads (by generation of the response
spectrum) and/or system stiffness.
For a time history analysis, damping is used explicitly, because this method uses a numeric
solution to integrate the dynamic equations of motion.
For a spectrum analysis using the double sum (DSRSS) modal combination method (as defined
by USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.92), the damping value is used in the calculation of the modal
correlation coefficients. CAESAR II does not permit the specification of damping values for
individual modes. For more information, see Modal Combination Method
(Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) (on page 763).
For a harmonic analysis, this ratio is converted to Rayleigh Damping, where the damping matrix
can be expressed as multiples of the mass and stiffness matrices:
[C] = a [M] + b [K]
On a modal basis, the relationship between the ratio of critical damping C c and the constants
and are given as:
Where:
= undamped natural frequency of mode (radians/sec)
For many practical problems, is extremely small, and so may be ignored, reducing the
relationships to:
=0
= 2 Cc /
CAESAR II uses this implementation of damping for its harmonic analysis, with the exception
that a single is calculated for the multi-degree-of-freedom system, and the used is that of the
load forcing frequency. When the forcing frequency is in the vicinity of a modal frequency, this
gives an accurate estimate of the true damping value.

Dynamic Analysis
ZPA (Reg. Guide 1.60/UBC - g's) <or> # Time History Output

Cases
(Available for: Spectrum/1.60/UBC and Time History)
Specifies an acceleration factor or distinct times as described below. The usage of this
parameter varies with the analysis type.

Dynamic Analysis
For specific pre-defined normalized response spectra, this value is the acceleration factor (in
g's) by which the spectrum is scaled. For example, when a spectrum analysis uses one of the
pre-defined spectra names beginning with "1.60" (such as 1.60H.5 or 1.60V7), CAESAR II
constructs an earthquake spectrum according to the instructions given in USNRC (formerly
USAEC) Regulatory Guide 1.60. This guide requires that the shape of the response spectrum
be chosen from the curves shown in the following figures, based upon the system damping
value. The last number in the default CAESAR II spectrum name indicates the percent critical
damping. For example, 1.60H.5 indicates 0.5% critical damping, while 1.60V7 indicates 7%. If
the analysis uses one of the pre-defined spectra names beginning with "UBC" (such as
UBCSOIL1), CAESAR II uses the normalized seismic response spectra for the corresponding
soil type from Table 23-3 of the Uniform Building Code (1991 Edition). Reg Guide 1.60 and the
UBC curves are normalized to represent a ground acceleration (ZPA or zero period
acceleration) of 1g. The true value is actually site dependent. Therefore, using the ZPA value
appropriately scales any Regulatory Guide 1.60 or the Uniform Building Code response spectra.

Dynamic Analysis
For a time history analysis, this value is the number of distinct times at which the results of the
load cases (the dynamic load as well as all static/dynamic combinations) are generated. In
addition, CAESAR II generates one set of results for each load case containing the maximum of
each output value (such as displacement, force, or stress) along with the time at which it
occurred. The times for which results are generated are determined by dividing as evenly as
possible the load duration by the number of output times. For example, if the load duration is
one second and five output cases are requested, results are available at 200, 400, 600, 800,
and 1000 milliseconds, in addition to the maximum case. The total number of results cases
generated for an analysis is the product of the number of load cases (one dynamic case plus the
number of static/dynamic combination cases) times the number of results cases per load (one
maxima case plus the requested number of output cases). The total number of results cases is
limited to 999:
(1 + # Static/Dynamic Combinations) x (1 + # Output Cases) 999
At least one output case, in addition to the automatically generated maxima case, must be
requested. More than one is not necessary, because the worst case results are reflected in the

Dynamic Analysis
maxima case and individual results at every time step are available through the ELEMENT
command when animating time history results.
Re-use Last Eigensolution (Frequencies and Mode Shapes)

(Available for: Spectrum and Time History)
Specifies the handling of the previous eignesolution when repeating a dynamic analysis. Select
N (for no) to perform a new eigensolution. Select Y (for yes) to skip the eigensolution and reuse
the results of the earlier analysis, and only perform calculations for displacements, reactions,
forces, and stresses. This option is only valid after an initial eigensolution is performed and is
still available. The mass and stiffness parameters of the model must be unchanged or the
previous eigensolution is invalid.
Spatial or Modal Combination First

(Available for: Spectrum)
Specifies the method for combining load case results as described below. Select Spatial to first
combine spatial components of the load case. Select Modal to first combine modal components
of the load case.
In a spectrum analysis, each of the modal responses must be summed. In addition, if multiple
shocks have been applied to the structure in multiple directions, the results must be combined,
such as spatially combining the X-direction, Y-direction, and Z-direction results. A difference in
the final results (spatial first versus modal first) arises whenever different methods are used for
the spatial and modal combinations. The combination of spatial components first implies that the
shock loads are dependent, while the combination of modal components first implies that the
shock loads are independent.
Dependent and independent refer to the time relationship between the X, Y, and Z components
of the earthquake. With a dependent shock case, the X, Y, and Z components of the earthquake
have a direct relationship. A change in the shock along one direction produces a corresponding
change in the other directions. For example, an earthquake acts along a specific direction,
having components in more than one axis with a fault at a 30° angle between the X- and Z-axes.
The Z-direction load is scaled by a factor of tan 30°, but the identical version of the X-direction
load is used. In this example, spatial combinations should be made first.
An independent shock has X, Y, and Z time histories producing related frequency spectra but
completely unrelated time histories. The Independent type of earthquake is far more common,
so in most cases the modal components should be combined first.
For example, IEEE 344-1975 (IEEE Recommended Practices for Seismic Qualification of Class
1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations) states:
"Earthquakes produce random ground motions which are characterized by simultaneous but
statistically INDEPENDENT horizontal and vertical components."

Dynamic Analysis
This is usually less of an issue for force spectrum combinations. Normally there are no separate
spatial components to combine because X- Y- and Z-shocks are not acting simultaneously.
When there is more than one potential force load, the spatial combination method may be used
to indicate the independence of the loadings. For example, select Modal if two independent
relief valves may or may not fire simultaneously and the two shocks are defined as being in
different directions (such as X and Y). If the two valves are dependent and will definitely open
simultaneously, select Spatial. Otherwise, the direction defined for a force spectrum loading has
no particular meaning.
Nuclear Regulatory Guide 1.92 (published in February, 1976) describes the requirements for
combining spatial components when performing seismic response spectra analysis for
nuclear power plants.
Because all time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase), this option has no
effect on time history results.
Spatial Combination Method (SRSS/ABS)

Specifies the method for combining the spatial contributions of the shocks in a single spectrum
load case. Select SRSS for a square root of the sum of the squares combination method. Select
ABS for an absolute combination method.
This option is only used for spectrum runs with more than a single excitation direction. Because
directional forces are usually combined vectorially, SRSS is usually the best selection. ABS is
provided for additional conservatism.
Because all time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase) this option
has no effect on time history results.
Modal Combination Method (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS)

Specifies the method for combining individual modes into the total system response.
GROUP - Grouping Method (on page 764)
10% - Ten Percent Method (on page 764)
DSRSS - Double Sum Method (on page 765)
SRSS - Square Root of the Sum of the Squares Method (on page 765)
ABS - Absolute Method (on page 766)
The response spectrum yields the maximum response at any time during the course of the
applied load, and each of the modes of vibration usually have different frequencies. As a result,
the peak responses of all modes do not occur simultaneously and an appropriate means of
summing the modal responses must be considered.
Nuclear Regulatory Guide 1.92 (published in February, 1976) defines the requirements for
combining modal responses when performing seismic response spectra analysis for nuclear
power plants. The four options presented there are available, along with one other, for modal
combinations under non-nuclear seismic and force spectrum analyses.

Dynamic Analysis
This method is defined in USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.92. The grouping method attempts to
eliminate the drawbacks of the Absolute and SRSS methods. It assumes that modes are
completely correlated with any modes with similar closely spaced frequencies, and are
completely uncorrelated with those modes with widely different frequencies. The total system
response is calculated as
Where:
R = total system response of the element
N = number of significant modes considered in the modal response combination
Rk = the peak value of the response of the element due to the k th mode
P = number of groups of closely-spaced modes (where modes are considered to be
closely-spaced if their frequencies are within 10% of the base mode in the group), excluding
individual separated modes. No mode can be in more than one group.
i = number of first mode in group q
j = number of last mode in group q
Rlq = response of mode l in group q
Rmq = response of mode m in group q
The responses of any modes which have frequencies within 10% of each other are added
together absolutely, and the results of each of these groups are combined with the remaining
individual modal results using the SRSS method.
The 10% value controlling the definition of closely spaced frequencies can be
changed by using the Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) (on page 756)
parameter.
This method is defined in the USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.92. The ten percent method is similar
to the grouping method. It assumes that modes are completely correlated with any modes with
similar closely spaced frequencies, and are completely uncorrelated with those modes with
widely different frequencies. The grouping method assumes that modes are only correlated with
those that fall within the group (within a 10% band). This method assumes that modes are
correlated with those that fall within 10% of the subject model, effectively creating a 20% band
(10% up and approximately 10% down). The total system response is calculated as
Where:
Ri, Rj = the peak value of the response of the element due to the ith and jth mode,
respectively, where mode i and j are any frequencies within 10% of the each other,

Dynamic Analysis
The 10% value controlling the definition of closely spaced frequencies can be
changed by using the Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) (on page 756)
parameter.
This method is defined in USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.92. This combination method is the most
technically correct for earthquake loads, because it attempts to estimate the actual intermodal
correlation coefficient based upon empirical data. The total system response is calculated as:
Where:
Rs = the peak value of the response of the element due to mode s
eks = intermodal correlation coefficient = [ 1 + {( k' - s') /(ßk' k + ßs' s)}
2 ]-1
k' = k [ 1 - ßk2 ]1/2

s' = s [ 1 - ßs2 ]1/2
ßk' = ßk + 2 / ( td k )
ßs' = ßs + 2 / ( td s )
k = frequency of mode k, rad/sec
s = frequency of mode s, rad/sec
ßk = ratio of damping to critical damping of mode k, dimensionless
ßs = ratio of damping to critical damping of mode s, dimensionless
td = duration of earthquake, sec
The load duration (td) and the damping ratio (ß) can be specified by using the Load
Duration (DSRSS) (sec) (on page 757) and Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical) (on page 758)
parameters.
This method defines the total system response as the square root of the sum of the squares of
the individual modal responses. This is effectively the same as using the double sum method
with all correlation coefficients equal to 0.0, or the grouping method with none of the modes
being closely spaced. The total system response is calculated as:
This method is based upon the statistical assumption that all modal responses are completely
independent, with the maxima following a relatively uniform distribution throughout the duration
of the applied load. This is usually non-conservative, especially if there are any modes with very

Dynamic Analysis
close frequencies, because those modes will usually experience their maximum DLF at
approximately the same time during the load profile.
Because all time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase), this modal
combination method has no effect on time history results.
This method defines the total system response as the sum of the absolute values of the
individual modal responses. This is effectively the same as using the double sum method with
all correlation coefficients equal to 1.0, or the grouping method, with all modes being closely
spaced. The total system response is calculated as:
This method gives the most conservative result, because it assumes that the all maximum
modal responses occur at exactly the same time during the course of the applied load. This is
usually overly-conservative, because modes with different natural frequencies will probably
experience their maximum DLF at different times during the load profile.
Include Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Components (Y/N)

(Available for: Spectrum with ISM included)
Specifies the inclusion of independent support motion (anchor movement) components as part
of a shock load case and independent support spectral loadings, as described below. Select Y
(for yes) to include the components or N (for no) to ignore them.
The excitation of a group of supports produces both a dynamic response and a static response.
The static response is due to the movement of one group of supports or anchors relative to
another group of supports or anchors. These static components of the dynamic shock loads are
called pseudostatic components. USNRC recommendations (August 1985) suggest the
following procedure for pseudostatic components:
1. For each support group, calculate the maximum absolute response for each input direction.
2. Combine same direction responses using the absolute sum method.
3. Combine directional responses using the SRSS method.
4. Obtain the total response by combining the dynamic and pseudostatic responses, using the
SRSS method.

Dynamic Analysis
Include Missing Mass Components

(Available for: Spectrum and Time History)
Specifies the inclusion of a correction representing the contribution of higher order modes not
explicitly extracted for the modal/dynamic response, providing greater accuracy without
additional calculation time. Select Y (for yes) or N (for no).
During spectrum (either seismic or force spectrum) or time history analyses, the response of a
system under a dynamic load is determined by superposition of modal results. One of the
advantages of this type of modal analysis is that only a limited number of modes are excited and
need to be included in the analysis. The drawback to this method is that although displacements
may be obtained with good accuracy using only a few of the lowest frequency modes, the force,
reaction, and stress results may require extraction of far more modes (possibly far into the rigid
range) before acceptable accuracy is attained.
This option automatically calculates the net (in-phase) contribution of all non-extracted modes
and combines it with the modal contributions, avoiding the long calculation time and excessively
conservative summation methods. For more information, see Inclusion of Missing Mass
Correction (on page 1019).
Use Included Missing Mass Components on the Control Parameters tab as an alternative
method of ensuring that sufficient modes are considered in the dynamic model. This report is
compiled for all spectrum and time history shock cases, whether missing mass is to be included
or not. It displays the percentage of system mass along each of the three global axes and the
percentage of total force which has been captured by the extracted modes. For more
information, see Include Missing Mass Components (on page 767).
The percentage of system mass active along each of the three global axes (X-, Y-, and Z-) is
calculated by summing the modal mass (corresponding to the appropriate directional
degree-of-freedom) attributed to the extracted modes and dividing that sum by the sum of the
system mass acting in the same direction:
Summed over i = 1 to n, by 6 (X-direction degrees of freedom):
% Active Massx
Summed over 1 = 2 to n, by 6 (Y-direction degrees of freedom):
% Active MassY
Summed over 1 = 3 to n, by 6(Z-direction degrees of freedom):
% Active Massz
Where:
Me = vector (by degree-of-freedom) of sum (over all extracted modes) of effective modal
masses
M = vector corresponding to main diagonal of system mass matrix

Dynamic Analysis
The maximum possible percentage of active mass that is theoretically possible is 100%, with
90-95% usually indicating that a sufficient number of modes have been extracted to provide a
good dynamic model.
The percentage of active force is calculated by the following factors:
Separately summing the components of the effective force acting along each of the three
directional degrees-of-freedom
Combining them algebraically
Doing the same for the applied load
Taking the ratio of the effective load divided by the applied load
Summed over i = 1 to n, by 6 (X - Direction degrees of freedom):

Fex = Fe[i]
Fx = F[i]
Summed over i = 2 to n, by 6 (Y - Direction degrees of freedom):
Fey = Fe[i]
Fy = F[i]
Summed over i = 3 to n, by 6 (Z - Direction degrees of freedom):
Fez = Fe[i]
Fz = F[i]
Where:
FeX, FeY, FeZ = effective force (allocated to extracted modes) acting along the global X-, Y-,
and Z-axes, respectively
Fr = vector of effective forces (allocated to extracted modes)
FX, FY, FZ = total system forces acting along the global X-, Y-, and Z-axes, respectively
F = vector of total system forces
The maximum possible percentage which is theoretically possible for this value is also 100%. In
practice it may be higher, indicating an uneven distribution of the load and mass in the system
model. There is nothing inherently wrong with an analysis where the included force exceeds
100%. If the missing mass correction is included, the modal loadings are adjusted to
automatically conform to the applied loading. The percentage of included force can often be
brought under 100% by extracting a few more modes. At other times, the situation can be
remedied by improving the dynamic model through a finer element mesh, or, more importantly,
equalizing the mass point spacing in the vicinity of the load.

Dynamic Analysis
Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Comb. Method

(SRSS/ABS)
Specifies the method for combining pseudostatic responses with dynamic (inertial) responses.
Select SRSS for a square root of the sum of the squares combination method. Select ABS for
an absolute combination method.
This option is applicable only when there is at least one independent support motion excitation
component in a shock load case. Pseudostatic combinations are performed after all directional,
spatial, and modal combinations. Select SRSS for pseudostatic combinations, as recommended
by USNRC. ABS gives conservative results. For more information, see Include Pseudostatic
(Anchor Movement) Components (Y/N) (on page 766).
Missing Mass Combination Method (SRSS/ABS)

Specifies the method for combining the missing mass/force correction components with the
modal (dynamic) results. Select SRSS for a square root of the sum of the squares combination
method. Select ABS for an absolute combination method.
Research suggests that the modal and rigid portions of the response are statistically
independent, so SRSS is usually most accurate. ABS provides a more conservative result,
based upon the assumption that the modal maxima occur simultaneously with the maximum
ground acceleration. Missing mass components are combined following the modal combination.
For more information, see Include Missing Mass Components (on page 767).
Even though missing mass components may be included during time history
analyses, all time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase), so this parameter has
no effect on time history results.
Directional Combination Method (SRSS/ABS)

Specifies the method for combining shock components acting in the same direction. Select
SRSS for a square root of the sum of the squares combination method. Select ABS for an
absolute combination method.
This option is typically used with independent support motion load cases, where responses from
different support groups caused by excitation in the same direction are combined. It also
combines the rare case of multiple uniform shock spectra acting in the same direction. Select
ABS for directional combinations of pseudostatic responses, as recommended by USNRC.
Select SRSS for force spectrum loads when several loads are all defined with the same shock
direction. The loads are then modeled as independent loads. ABS always models as dependent
loads. For more information, see Include Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Components (Y/N)
(on page 766).
Because all time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase) this
parameter has no effect on time history results.

Dynamic Analysis
Mass Model (LUMPED/CONSISTENT)

(Available for: Modal, Harmonic, Spectrum, and Time History)
Specifies a mass model type. Select CONSISTENT or LUMPED.
A lumped mass model makes very coarse simplifications that often result in correspondingly
coarse results. The benefit is that it does not require a lot of memory for data storage.
The consistent mass model is well documented. Most texts on the subject, such as Structural
Dynamics - Theory and Computation by Mario Paz, describe how to build the mass matrix. The
consistent mass matrix takes into consideration the effects of bending and other rotational
effects of the beam on its mass distribution, gives a more realistic result, but requires much
more data storage.
If mass is added at a degree of freedom, CAESAR II assumes that it is a concentrated

mass, and puts it on the on-diagonal term, effectively treating it as a lumped mass.
If mass is zeroed at a degree of freedom, CAESAR II assumes that you want to eliminate
consideration of that DOF and zero out all elements on that row/column.
Sturm Sequence Check on Computed Eigenvalues

(Available for: Spectrum, Modal, and Time History)
Specifies usage of the Sturm sequence calculation as described below. Select Y (for yes) or N
(for no). Y is the default value.
In most cases, the eigensolver detects modal frequencies from the lowest to the highest
frequency. When there is a strong directional dependency in the system, the modes may
converge in the wrong order. This could cause a problem if the eigensolver reaches the cutoff
number of modes, but has not found the modes with the lowest frequency.
This procedure determines the number of modes that should have been found between the
highest and lowest frequencies, and compares that against the actual number of modes
extracted. If those numbers are different, a warning appears. For example, if 22 natural
frequencies are extracted for a system, and if the highest natural frequency is 33.5 Hz, the
Sturm sequence checks that there are exactly 22 natural frequencies in the model between zero
and 33.5+p Hz, where p is a numerical tolerance found from:
The Sturm sequence check fails where there are two identical frequencies at the last frequency
extracted. For example, consider a system with the following natural frequencies:
0.6637 1.2355 1.5988 4.5667 4.5667
If you only ask for the first four natural frequencies, a Sturm sequence failure occurs because
there are five frequencies that exist in the range between 0.0 and 4.5667 + p (where p is
0.0041). To correct this problem, you can:
Increase the frequency cutoff by the number of frequencies not found. (This number is
reported by the Sturm sequence check.)

Dynamic Analysis
Increase the value of Frequency Cutoff (HZ) (on page 755) by some small amount, if the
frequency cutoff terminated the eigensolution. This usually allows the lost modes to fall into
the solution frequency range.
Fix the subspace size at 10 and rerun the job. Increasing the number of approximation
vectors improves the possibility that at least one of them contains some component of the
missing modes, allowing the vector to properly converge.
Advanced Tab
This tab is available when Modal, Earthquake (spectrum), Relief Loads (spectrum), Water
Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum), and Time History are selected for Analysis Type in the
The values on this tab rarely need to be changed.
Topics
Estimated Number of Significant Figures in Eigenvalues .............. 771
Jacobi Sweep Tolerance ............................................................... 772
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance ............................................ 772
Subspace Size (0-Not Used) ......................................................... 772
No. to Converge Before Shift Allowed (0 - Not Used) ................... 773
No. of Iterations Per Shift (0 - Pgm computed).............................. 773
% of Iterations Per Shift Before Orthogonalization ........................ 774
Force Orthogonalization After Convergence (Y/N) ........................ 774
Use Out-of-Core Eigensolver (Y/N) ............................................... 774
Frequency Array Spaces ............................................................... 774
Estimated Number of Significant Figures in Eigenvalues

Specifies the approximate number of significant figures in the calculated eigenvalues ( 2, where
is the angular frequency in rad/sec). The default value is 6. For example, if a calculated
eigenvalue is 44032.32383 using the default value of 6, then the first digit to the right of the
decimal is usually the last accurately computed figure.
The eigenvectors, or mode shapes, are calculated to half as many significant figures as are the
eigenvalues. If the eigenvalues have six significant figures of accuracy, then the eigenvectors
have three.
This number should not be decreased. Increases to 8 or 10 are not unusual but result in slower
solutions with little change in response results.

Dynamic Analysis
Jacobi Sweep Tolerance

Specifies the Jacobi sweep tolerance in scientific notation. The default value is 1.0E-12.
Eigen analyses use an NxN subspace to calculate the natural frequencies and mode shapes for
a reduced problem. The first step is to perform a Jacobi denationalization of the subspace.
Iterations are performed until the off-diagonal terms of the matrix are approximately zero.
Off-diagonal terms are considered to be close enough to zero when their ratio to the on-diagonal
term in the row is smaller the Jacobi sweep tolerance.
Do not change the default value unless you understand the IEEE-488 double
precision word (of approximately 14 significant figures) on the IBM PC and the approximate size
of the on-diagonal coefficients in the stiffness matrix for the problem to be solved (which may be
estimated from simple beam expressions).
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance

Specifies the decomposition singularity tolerance for the eigensolver in scientific notation. The
default value is 1E10.
During the decomposition of what may be a shifted stiffness matrix, the eigensolver performs a
singularity check to make sure that the shift is not too close to an eigenvalue that is to be
calculated. If a singular condition is detected, a new shift, not quite as aggressive as the last
one, is calculated and a new decomposition is attempted. If the new composition fails, a fatal
error is reported. Increasing the singularity tolerance may eliminate this fatal error, but do not
enter a value greater than 1E13. Singularity problems may also exist when very light, small
diameter piping is attached to very heavy, large diameter piping, or when very short lengths of
pipe are adjacent to very long lengths of pipe.
Subspace Size (0-Not Used)

Specifies the subspace size as described below. The default value is 0 and usually does not
need to be changed. The software then selects an expected optimal subspace size.
The eigensolution reduces the NDOFxNDOF problem to an NxN problem during each subspace
iteration, where N is the subspace size.
For the default value of 0, CAESAR II uses the square root of the bandwidth as the subspace
size, with a minimum of 4, resulting in sizes of 4 to 8 for typical piping configurations. Increasing
the subspace size slows the eigensolution but increases the numerical stability. Values in the
range between 12 and 15 are appropriate when unusual geometries or dynamic properties are
encountered, or when a job is large (having 100 elements or more, and/or requires that 25 or
more frequencies be extracted).

Dynamic Analysis
No. to Converge Before Shift Allowed (0 - Not Used)

Specifies the shifting strategy for the eigen problem to be solved as described below.
For a value of 0, CAESAR II selects an estimated optimal shifting strategy. Improving the
convergence characteristics increases the speed of the eigensolution. The convergence rate for
the lowest eigenpair in the subspace is inversely proportional to 1/ 2, where 1 is the lowest
eigenvalue in the current subspace and 2 is the next lowest eigenvalue in the current
subspace. A slow convergence rate is represented by an eigenvalue ratio of one, and a fast
convergence rate is represented by an eigenvalue ratio of zero. The shift is employed to get the
convergence rate as close to zero as possible. The cost of each shift is one decomposition of
the system set of equations. The typical shift value is equal to the last computed eigenvalue plus
90 percent of the difference between this value and the lowest estimated nonconverged
eigenvalue in the subspace. As 1 shifts closer to zero, the ratio 1/ 2 becomes increasingly
smaller and the convergence rate increases. When eigenvalues are very closely spaced, shifting
can result in eigenvalues being lost (as checked by the Sturm sequence check).
A large value entered for this parameter effectively disables shifting so that no eigenvalues are
missed, but the solution takes longer to run. When the system to be analyzed is very large,
shifting the set of equations can be very time consuming. In these cases, set the value between
4 and 8.
No. of Iterations Per Shift (0 - Pgm computed)

Specifies the number of subspace iterations per shift as described below.
For a value of 0, CAESAR II calculates an estimated optimal number of iterations. This
parameter and % of Iterations Per Shift Before Orthogonalization (on page 774) control solution
shifting by limiting the number of Gram-Schmidt orthogonalizations. Trying to limit this number is
very dangerous for small subspace problems, but less dangerous when the subspace size is
large, at around 10-20 percent of the total number of eigenpairs required.
Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization is by default performed once during each subspace iteration.
The orthogonalization assures that the eigenvector subspace does not converge to an already
found eigenpair. A large number of repeated eigenpairs calculations can appreciably slow down
the extraction of the highest eigenpairs. Proper setting of these two parameters limits the
orthogonalization in the eigensolution, such as to every second, third, or fourth iteration, and
increases the solution speed. The subspace may still converge to earlier eigenpairs during
subsequent non-orthogonalized subspace iteration passes.
Use caution when setting these parameters. Select Y as the value for Force
Orthogonalization After Convergence (Y/N) (on page 774) if the frequency of orthogonalization
is slowed.

Dynamic Analysis
% of Iterations Per Shift Before Orthogonalization

Specifies the decimal equivalent of the needed percentage, as described below.
For a value of 0, CAESAR II calculates a number of iterations per shift to be performed. A
maximum of N eigenpairs can conceivably converge per subspace pass, where N is the
subspace size (although this is highly unlikely). By default, a Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization is
performed for each subspace pass. This parameter and No. of Iterations Per Shift (0 - Pgm
computed) (on page 773) control solution shifting by limiting the number of Gram-Schmidt
orthogonalizations. For example, if 12 is the number of iterations, and this parameter is 50
percent (entered as 0.50), the Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization is performed every six iterations.
Use caution when setting these parameters. Select Y as the value for Force
Orthogonalization After Convergence (Y/N) (on page 774) if the frequency of orthogonalization
is slowed.
Force Orthogonalization After Convergence (Y/N)

Specifies whether CAESAR II forces orthogonalization after eigenpair convergence. Select Y
(for yes) or N (for no).
Select Y for eigensolutions when % of Iterations Per Shift Before Orthogonalization (on page
774) is set to a non-zero value. When a subspace pass completes and sees at least one
eigenpair convergence, a Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization is performed even if the specified
percentage of iterations has not been completed.
Use Out-of-Core Eigensolver (Y/N)

Specifies use of the out-of-core eigensolver. Select Y (for yes) or N (for no).
This out-of-core eigensolver is used primarily as a benchmarking and debugging aid. Select Y to
automatically run the out-of-core eigensolver on any problem size. Using this solver can take
considerably more time than the in-core solver, but always produce exactly the same results.
A problem may be too big to fit into the in-core solver because the capacity is based
upon the amount of available extended memory. The out-of-core solver then runs automatically.
This parameter does not need to be changed to Y to have this automatic switch occur.
Frequency Array Spaces

Specifies the maximum number of eigenpairs that can be extracted for the problem. The default
value of 100 is arbitrary. Increase the value as needed.

Dynamic Analysis
Directive Builder
Click Directives on the Spectrum Load Cases or Static/Dynamic Combinations tabs to open
the Directive Builder dialog box and select parameters for the current load case. These
parameters are load-case-specific changes to the global parameters set for all dynamic analysis
load cases. For more information, see Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab (on page 716)
and Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab (on page 731).
For most analyses, the global parameters apply and you do not need to specify the
parameters on this dialog box.
Directional Combination Method

Select SRSS or ABS. For more information, see Missing Mass Combination Method
(SRSS/ABS) (on page 769).
Modal Combination Method
Select GROUP, 10%, DSRSS, SRSS, or ABS. For more information, see Modal
Combination Method (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) (on page 763).
Spatial Combination Method
Select SRSS or ABS. For more information, see Spatial Combination Method (SRSS/ABS)
(on page 763).
Spatial or Modal Combination First
Select SPATIAL or MODAL. For more information, see Re-use Last Eigensolution
(Frequencies and Mode Shapes) (on page 762).
Pseudostatic Combination Method
Select SRSS or ABS. For more information, see Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Comb.
Method (SRSS/ABS) (on page 769).
Missing Mass Combination Method

Dynamic Analysis
Select SRSS or ABS. For more information, see Missing Mass Combination Method
(SRSS/ABS) (on page 769).
Static/Dynamic Combination Method
Select SRSS or ABS to define how the load case is combined. The ABS method takes the
absolute value of all displacement, force, and stress data for each load case and adds them.
The SRSS method sums the square of all displacement, force, and stress data for each load
case and then takes the square root of the result. This is the only parameter available on the
Static/Dynamic Combinations tab.
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data

Enter/Edit Spectrum Data and Tools > Spectrum Data Points allow you to view and edit
spectrum data for manually-entered or ASCII-file-based spectrum definitions.
The command is available when entering values on the Spectrum Definitions tab or the Time
History Definitions tab. For more information, see Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab (on
page 711).
Click the command, make a selection in the Select a Spectrum Name dialog box, and click OK.
The spectrum name dialog box appears. You can add, edit, or delete rows, or add ASCII data.
Enter a sufficient number of data points to fully describe the spectrum.
Add Row
Adds a new row after the selected row.
Delete Row
Deletes the selected row.
Read From File
Reads data from an ASCII text file. The text file can have any file extension.
You can edit the text file. For information on editing ASCII text, see ASCII Text
File Rules (on page 53).

Dynamic Analysis
Range
Specifies a spectrum range value. The range/ordinate pairs define the spectrum/DLF curve.
Ordinate
Specifies a spectrum ordinate value. The range/ordinate pairs define the spectrum/DLF curve.
Valid formats are:
Exponents, such as 0.3003E+03, 0.3423E-03, or 0.3003E3.
Explicit multiplication or division, such as 4032.3/386, or 1.0323*12.
DLF/Spectrum Generator
DLF/Spectrum Generator and Tools > DLF Spectrum Generator converts spectrum time
waveform excitation data into a frequency domain dynamic load factor (DLF) curve. DLF data is
automatically referenced in the Spectrum Definitions tab. For more information, see
Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab (on page 711).
The DLF curve can also be saved to a file and later referenced by CAESAR II as a FORCE
response spectrum curve.
Spectrum Name
Displays the name of the selected value of Spectrum Type. You can type a different name.
For UBC, ASCE7, IBC, and CFE Diseno por Sismo:
This is the group name for the pair of seismic shock spectra that is generated here. A suffix
of H and V is added to indicate the horizontal and vertical spectrum, respectively. After it has
been properly entered, these names are listed in the Spectrum Definitions tab and can be
used to build load cases on the Spectrum Load Cases tab.
For B31.1 Relief & User Defined Time History Waveform:
This is the name given to the Force Response Spectrum created from the time history load
defined here. After it has been properly entered, this name is listed in the Spectrum
Definitions tab and can be used to build load cases on the Spectrum Load Cases tab.
Spectrum Type
Specifies the name of the spectrum. The data from this spectrum is used to generate the DLF
curve.
UBC (on page 778)
ASCE7 (on page 779)
IBC (on page 781)
CFE Diseno por Sismo (on page 782)
B31.1 Appendix II (Safety Valve) Force Response Spectrum (on page 783)

Dynamic Analysis
User Defined Time History Waveform (on page 784)
Creates earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the 1997 Uniform Building
Code.
The horizontal design response spectrum is based on UBC Figure 16-3 shown below.
Ts=Cv/2.5Ca & T0=Ts/5

Dynamic Analysis
Specifies the seismic importance factor, I, as defined in Table 16-K. The calculated spectrum
accelerations are multiplied by this value to generate the horizontal shock spectrum. Values
range from 1.0 to 1.25 based on the function of the structure.
For this code, the vertical shock spectrum is also multiplied by the importance factor.
Specifies the zero-period acceleration, Ca, for the site as defined in Table 16-Q. The value is
based on soil profile type and seismic zone factor, and ranges from 0.06 to 0.66.
Specifies the ground acceleration at higher periods (lower frequencies), Cv, for the site as
defined in Table 16-R. The value is based on soil profile type and seismic zone factor, and
ranges from 0.06 to 1.92.
Creates earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the ASCE 7 standard. You
must also select the appropriate ASCE 7 revision from the list.
The horizontal design response spectrum is based on ASCE 7. Figure 9.4.1.2.6 (ASCE 7-2010)
is shown below.
Ts=SD1/SDS & T0=Ts/5.
Above a period of four seconds, the horizontal spectrum acceleration changes.
The vertical spectrum is set to 20% of SDS (from 9.5.2.7.1) across the entire period range.
Neither I nor R affects the vertical spectrum.

Dynamic Analysis
Specifies the occupancy importance factor, based on the function of the structure. The
calculated spectrum accelerations are multiplied by this value to generate the horizontal shock
spectrum.
ASCE 7
The occupancy importance factor is I, as defined in Table 11.5. Values range from 1.0 to 1.5
and applied according to paragraph 12.9.2.
IBC
The occupancy importance factor is IE, as defined in Section 1616.2 and shown in Table
1604.5. Values range from 1.0 to 1.5.
Specifies the acceleration-based site coefficient Fa. This value adjusts the mapped short period
acceleration and is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped short period maximum
considered earthquake acceleration (Ss). Values range from 0.8 to 2.5.
ASCE 7
Fa is listed in Table 11.4-1.
IBC
Fa is listed in Table 16.15.1.2(1).
Specifies the velocity-based site coefficient Fv. This value adjusts the mapped one-second
period acceleration and is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped one-second period
maximum considered earthquake acceleration (S1). Values range from 0.8 to 3.5.
ASCE 7
Fv is listed in Table 11.4-2.
IBC
Fv is listed in Table 1615.1.2(2).
Specifies the mapped maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration at short
periods, Ss. This is the mapped ground acceleration at the system location for a structure
having a period of 0.2 second and 5% critical damping.
ASCE 7
Ss values are mapped in Chapter 22.
IBC
Ss values are mapped in Section 1615.1.

Dynamic Analysis
Specifies the mapped maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration at a

period of one second, S1. This is the mapped ground acceleration at the system location for a
structure having a period of one second and 5% critical damping.
ASCE 7
S1 values are mapped in Chapter 22.
IBC
S1 values are mapped in Section 1615.1.
Specifies the response modification coefficient, R. This coefficient reflects system ductility. The
calculated spectrum accelerations are divided by this value to generate the horizontal shock
spectrum. Values range from 3.0 to 8.0 for most plant structures. A value of 3.5 for piping is
common.
ASCE 7
R is defined in Table 12.2-1 and applied according to paragraph 12.9.2.
IBC
R is defined in Table 1617.6 and used according to equation 16-53.
Specifies the period of time for a longer-period structure when generating an ASCE 7 Spectrum
Type in Dynamic Analysis. TL is determined from maps provided by ASCE, similar to zone
maps, for all 50 states. ASCE 7-2005 and ASCE 7-2010 reference the maps in section 11.4.5.
Creates earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the International Building
Code. You must also select the appropriate IBC revision from the list.
The horizontal design response spectrum is based on IBC 2000, Fig. 1615.1.4 shown below.

Dynamic Analysis
Ts=SD1/SDS & T0=Ts/5
The vertical spectrum is set to 20% of SDS (from 1617.1.2) across the entire period range.
IBC generally uses the same spectrum data parameters as ASCE7 (on page 779).
Creates earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the Mexico's Earthquake
Resistant Design code.
As with every other earthquake loading analysis, the object is to calculate the shear force at the
center of mass of each vessel element. After the shear force at each elevation is known, the
moments are accumulated to the base, leg or lug support.
You should begin the analysis by calculating the weights and centroidal distances of all of the
vessel elements. It is very important to model the structure in sections that are appropriate in
length. For cylinders, this value is about 10 or 12 feet (3 m). This ensures that the software has
enough information to calculate the natural period of vibration with sufficient accuracy.
Using the input data and calculated earthquake weights and natural frequency, CAESAR II
determines the values from table 3.1 of the Mexican Seismic Code.
The values are:
ao Spectral coordinate used in computing a
c Spectral coordinate used in computing a
Ta(s) Period value used in computing a
Tb(s) Period value used in computing a
r Exponent used in computing a
For group A structures, the values of the spectral ordinates a o and c are multiplied by
1.5.

Dynamic Analysis
Specifies the seismic zone. Select A, B, C, or D. The zones are described in Manual de Diseno
por Sismo for Mexico. The map on page 1.3.29 shows the seismic zones.
Specifies the soil type.

I - Hard Soil
Ground deposits formed exclusively by layers with propagation velocity b 0 = 700 m/s or
modulus of rigidity 85000.
II - Medium Soil
Ground deposits with fundamental period of vibration and effective velocity of propagation
which meets the condition Bc Ts + Bs Tc > Bc Tc.
III - Soft Soil
Ground deposits with fundamental period of vibration and effective velocity of propagation
which meets the condition Bc Ts + Bs Tc < Bc Tc.
Specifies the structural group based on the degree of safety. Select A - High Safety, B -
Intermediate Safety, or C - Low Safety.
Towers and tanks are examples of group A structures requiring a high degree of
safety in their design
Specifies a value for the increased factor of safety, as required by some facilities. The default
value is 1.0. This value directly multiplies the spectrum values. This value is traditionally 1.118
and should always be greater than or equal to 1.0.
Creates a normalized force response spectrum for loads from a safety valve discharging into an
open system according to the non-mandatory rules of B31.1, Appendix II - Rules for the Design
of Safety Valve Installations.

Dynamic Analysis
The spectrum is based on B31.1 Appendix II, Fig. II-3-2.
Specifies the opening time of the relief value in milliseconds.
Creates a normalized force response (Dynamic Load Factor or DLF) spectrum based on
manually entered load versus time history.
Specifies the maximum frequency in the table to be used to generate the DLF curve. This value
is usually no more than 100 Hz and is commonly 40 to 60 Hz for relief valves. For other types of
impulse loadings, a larger maximum may be needed.
If piping frequencies greater than this value are found in the system and included in the
spectrum analysis, then the spectrum value at the maximum table frequency is used. You can
decide which frequencies are important and how high the frequency must go by looking at the
solution participation factors and the animated mode shapes. Only the lower frequencies
typically contribute to the system displacements, forces, and stresses.
Specifies the number of points to be generated for the spectrum table. Fifteen to twenty points
are usually sufficient. These points are distributed in a cubic relationship starting at zero hertz.

Dynamic Analysis
Opens the User-defined TIme History Pulse Data dialog box, where you specify time and
force pulse data for the waveform.
Time (on page 785)

Force (on page 786)
You can type up to 15 sets of time and force values. You can also copy values from an Excel file
and paste the values into the dialog box.
Save/Continue
Saves the force spectrum values to an ASCII file and displays the Spectrum Table Values
dialog box. For more information, see Generate Spectrum (on page 786).
If you paste more than 15 rows from an Excel file, all rows paste into the dialog box,
but the software ignores rows greater than 15.
Specifies time waveform values in milliseconds for the points to be modeled.

If you paste more than 15 rows from an Excel file, all rows paste into the dialog box,
but the software ignores rows greater than 15.

Dynamic Analysis
Specifies forces corresponding to the points on the force/time curve.
The absolute magnitude of the force is not important, but the form of the time history loading
is important. The actual maximum value of the dynamic load is taken from the force pattern
defined on the Force Sets Tab (on page 721). There can be any number of line entries in
the excitation frequency data.
If you paste more than 15 rows from an Excel file, all rows paste into the dialog box, but the
software ignores rows greater than 15.
Generate Spectrum
Displays the Spectrum Table Values dialog box with the force spectrum values based on
entered spectrum data.
This command is available for all values of Spectrum Type except User Defined Time History
Waveform.
Save To File
Saves the force spectrum values to an ASCII file. For seismic spectra, two files are saved:
horizontal (with H appended to the file name) and vertical (with V appended to the file
name). Use this command if you want to reuse the spectrum values in other analyses. Click
OK if you only want to use the values in the current analysis.
OK
Loads the spectrum data into the current analysis.
Cancel
Closes the window without loading the spectrum data into the current analysis.

Dynamic Analysis
Relief Load Synthesis

Relief Load Synthesis and Tools > Relief Load Synthesis calculates the magnitudes of
relieving thrust forces. Dynamic forces associated with relieving devices can cause considerable
mechanical damage to equipment and supports. There are two types of destructive dynamic
forces associated with relief devices that must be evaluated:
Thrust at the valve/atmosphere interface.
Acoustic shock due to the sudden change in fluid momentum and the associated traveling
pressure waves.
The first step in performing a relief load analysis is to compute the magnitudes of the relieving
thrust forces. For open-type vent systems, use Relief Load Synthesis . Results are
calculated for liquids and for gases greater than 15 psig.
This command is only available when Relief Loads (spectrum) and Time History are selected
as Analysis Type.
The discussion here concerns only the thrust at the valve/atmosphere interface.
Acoustic traveling pressure waves can be addressed similar to water hammer. For more
information, see Relief Loads and Water Hammer/Slug Flow Spectra Analysis (on page 701).
Relief Load Synthesis for Gases Greater Than 15 psig

Click Gas to enter gas properties. CAESAR II assumes that a successful vent stack/relief
system design maintains the following gas properties:

Dynamic Analysis
Specifies the stagnation condition temperature of the gas to be relieved. This is typically the gas
temperature upstream of the relief valve.
Specifies the stagnation pressure of the gas to be relieved. This is typically the gas pressure
upstream of the relief valve. This value is the absolute pressure.
Stagnation properties can vary considerably from line properties if the gas flow
velocity in the line is high.
Specifies the flow passage inside diameter for the smallest diameter in the relief valve throat.
This information is typically provided by the relief valve manufacturer.
Specifies the flow passage inside diameter of the relief valve piping.
Specifies the inside diameter of the vent stack piping. If CAESAR II is sizing the vent stack, you
must still define a value.
Specifies the length of the vent stack. Add double the lengths of fittings and elbows or calculate
the appropriate equivalent lengths for non-pipe fittings and add the lengths.
Specifies the ratio of gas specific heats, k. The value for air is 1.4.
Typical values are shown below:
Gas Ratio of Gas-Specific Heats (k)
Superheated Steam 1.300
Saturated Steam 1.100
Nitrogen 1.399
Carbon Dioxide 1.288
Acetylene 1.232

Dynamic Analysis
Gas Ratio of Gas-Specific Heats (k)
Ammonia 1.304
n-Butane 1.093
Ethane 1.187
Ethylene 1.240
Methane 1.226
Propane 1.127
Specifies the gas constant, R. The value for air is 53.0.

Typical values are shown below:
Gas Gas Constant (R)

(ft. lbf./lbm./deg.)
Nitrogen 55.16
Carbon Dioxide 35.11
Acetylene 59.35
Ammonia 90.73
n-Butane 26.59
Ethane 51.39
Ethylene 55.09
Methane 96.33
Propane 35.05

Dynamic Analysis
Specifies whether or not the vent pipe has an umbrella fitting. Select Y (for yes) if the vent stack
slips inside of the piping system, or N (for no) if the vent stack is connected to the piping system.
The vent stack pipe is not hard-piped to the relief valve pipe. The relief valve pipe slips inside of
the vent pipe.
The vent stack pipe is hard-piped to the relief valve pipe.
Specifies whether or not the software sizes the vent stack. Select Y (for yes) for CAESAR II to
calculate the length and diameter of the vent stack. The software sizing algorithm searches
through a table of available inside pipe diameters starting at the smallest diameter until a vent
stack ID is found that satisfies the thermodynamic criteria. The calculated inside diameter is
automatically inserted into the input.

Dynamic Analysis
Relief Load Synthesis for Liquids

Click Liquid to enter liquid properties. CAESAR II assumes that a liquid vent system has one of
the following configurations:
Specifies whether a relief valve or rupture disk is used. Select RV for a relief valve. The software
sets the nozzle coefficient, k, to 0.80. Select RD for a rupture disk. The software sets the nozzle
coefficient, k, to 0.67. You can also enter the relieving device nozzle coefficient k if it is known.
Specifies the stagnation, or zero velocity, pressure of the supply line.
Specifies the inside diameter of the contracted opening in the relieving device. This information
is typically provided by the relief valve manufacturer.
For special purpose calculations, this ID may be equal to the ID of the relief exit
piping.
Specifies the inside diameter of the piping connected to the downstream side of the relief valve.

Dynamic Analysis
Specifies the insider diameter of the manifold if the relief exit piping runs into a manifold. Do not
enter a value if there is not a manifold.
Specifies the inside diameter of the supply header.
Specifies the specific gravity of the fluid being relieved.
Specifies the equivalent length of the relief exit piping. Add twice the piping length for fittings and
elbows, or the calculated fitting equivalent length.
Specifies the equivalent length of the manifold piping, if any. Add twice the piping length for
fitting and elbows. Enter 0 or do not enter a value if there is not a manifold system or if the
manifold is not filled by the relieving fluid.
Specifies the bulk modulus of the fluid. If no value is entered, a default valve of 250,000 psi is
used. See Example Output - Liquid Relief Load Synthesis (on page 796) for typical values.
These are the values for an isothermal compression as taken from Marks Standard Handbook
for Engineers, p. 3-35, 8th edition.
Specifies the wall thickness of the supply header.
The error message "NUMERICAL ERROR OR NO FLOW CONDITION DETECTED,"

means that a physically impossible configuration was described.
Flashing of volatile relief liquids is not considered in this analysis. If the relieving liquid
flashes in the exhaust piping as its pressure drops to atmospheric, then use another method
to calculate the resulting gas properties and thrust loads.

Dynamic Analysis
Example Output - Gas Relief Load Synthesis
Topics
Computed Mass Flowrate (Vent Gas) ........................................... 793
Thrust at Valve Pipe/Vent Pipe Interface ....................................... 794
Thrust at the Vent Pipe Exit ........................................................... 794
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Opening .................................. 794
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Closing .................................... 795
Thermodynamic Entropy Limit/Subsonic Vent Exit Limit ............... 795
Valve Orifice Gas Conditions/Vent Pipe Exit Gas Conditions/Subsonic
Velocity Gas Conditions................................................................. 795
The calculated gas mass flow rate, based on choked conditions at the relief orifice. If greater
mass flow rates are expected, then investigate the error in either the approach used by
CAESAR II or in the expected mass flow rate.

Dynamic Analysis
The thrust load acting back on the relief valve piping if there is an umbrella fitting between the
vent stack and the relief valve piping.
If the vent stack is hard piped to the relief valve piping, then this intermediate thrust is balanced
by tensile loads in the pipe and can be ignored.
Thrust load acts directly on valve opening. Only the valve pipe/vent stack
interface thrust acts in this
configuration.
The thrust load acting on the elbow just before the pipe opens into the atmosphere when there
is an elbow in the vent stack piping.
The estimated magnitude of the negative pressure wave that is superimposed on the line
pressure when the relief valve fist opens. This negative pressure wave moves back through the
relief system piping similar to the pressure wave in the downstream piping of a water hammer
type system. The magnitude of this wave is estimated as (Po-Pa)*Ap, where Po is the
stagnation pressure at the source, Pa is atmospheric pressure, and Ap is the area of the header
piping.

Dynamic Analysis
The estimated magnitude of the positive pressure wave that is superimposed on the line
pressure when the relief device slams shut. This positive pressure wave moves back through
the relief system piping similar to the pressure wave in the supply side piping of a water hammer
type system. The magnitude of this wave is estimated from: r*c*dv where r is the fluid density, c
is the speed of sound in the fluid and dv is the change in the velocity of the fluid.
The thermodynamic entropy limit or subsonic vent exit limit. These values should always be
greater than one. If either value falls below 1.0, then the thermodynamic assumptions made
regarding the gas properties are incorrect and the calculated thrust values should be
disregarded.
The thermodynamic properties of the gas at three critical points in the relief system.

Dynamic Analysis
The entire formulation for the thrust gas properties is based on an ideal gas equation of state. If
the pressures and temperatures displayed above for the gas being vented are outside of the
range where the ideal gas laws apply, then some alternate source should be sought for the
calculation of the thrust loads of the system. In addition, all three of these points should be
sufficiently clear of the gas saturation line. When the exit gas conditions become saturated, the
magnitude of the thrust load can be reduced significantly. In this case, consult the manufacturer.
Example Output - Liquid Relief Load Synthesis
The calculated exhaust mass flow rate in U.S. gallons per minute. CAESAR II makes the
necessary pressure drop calculations between the stagnation pressure upstream of the relief
device and atmospheric conditions at the exit of the manifold.
The calculated thrust load at the last cross section in the exit piping. If there is no manifold, then
this is the external thrust load acting on the piping system. If there is a manifold, then this thrust
is opposed by tension in the pipe wall at the junction of the exit piping and manifold. For more
information, see the graphics in Orifice Flow Conditions/Exit Pipe End Flow Conditions/Manifold
Pipe End Flow Conditions (on page 797).
The calculated thrust load at the last cross section in the manifold piping. If there is no manifold
system, then this thrust is equal to the thrust at the end of the exit piping. See the figures that
follow for clarification. For more information, see the graphics in Orifice Flow Conditions/Exit
Pipe End Flow Conditions/Manifold Pipe End Flow Conditions (on page 797).
The estimated magnitude of the negative pressure wave that is superimposed on the line
pressure when the relief valve fist opens. This negative pressure wave moves back through the
relief system piping similar to the pressure wave in the downstream piping of a water hammer
type system. The magnitude of this wave is estimated as (Po-Pa)*Ap, where Po is the
stagnation pressure at the source, Pa is atmospheric pressure, and Ap is the area of the header
piping.
The estimated magnitude of the positive pressure wave that is superimposed on the line
pressure when the relief device slams shut. This positive pressure wave moves back through
the relief system piping similar to the pressure wave in the supply side piping of a water hammer
type system. The magnitude of this wave is estimated from: r*c*dv where r is the fluid density, c
is the speed of sound in the fluid and dv is the change in the velocity of the fluid.

Dynamic Analysis
The calculated fluid properties at the three critical cross-sections in the relief piping. If pressures
or velocities here do not seem reasonable, then some characteristic of the relief model is in
error.
If the L dimensions are significant (by several feet), then unbalanced thrust loads
acting between the elbow-elbow pairs are very similar to a water hammer load. Water hammer
pulses travel at the speed of sound in the fluid, while the fluid/atmosphere interface pulses travel
at the velocity of the flowing fluid. These unbalanced loads can cause significant piping
displacements in much shorter pipe runs. The magnitude of these loads is equivalent to the
calculated thrust and the duration may be found from the calculated fluid velocity and distance
between each elbow-elbow pair.

Dynamic Analysis
Analysis Results
Each type of dynamic analysis has its own procedure for producing results, but all start in the
same way:
1. Save and check the dynamic input.
2. Run the analysis.
3. The account number is requested (if accounting is active).
4. The ESL is accessed (limited run ESLs are decremented).
5. The element and system stiffness matrices are assembled.
6. Load vectors are created where appropriate.
7. The system mass matrix is generated.
From this point the processing progresses according to the type of analysis selected.
After calculations are complete, control is passed to the Dynamic Output Processor. For more
information, see Dynamic Output Processing (on page 801).
Topics
Modal ............................................................................................. 798
Harmonic........................................................................................ 799
Spectrum........................................................................................ 800
Time History ................................................................................... 800
Modal
After dynamic initialization and basic equation assembly are completed, CAESAR II opens the
Dynamic Eigensolver, which calculates natural frequencies and modes of vibration.
Each natural frequency appears as it is calculated, along with the lapsed time of the analysis.
The processor searches for the natural frequencies, starting with the lowest, and continues until

Dynamic Analysis
the frequency cutoff is exceeded or the mode count reaches its limit. Both the frequency cutoff
and mode cutoff are dynamic analysis control parameters. The amount of time to calculate or
find these frequencies is a function of the system size, the grouping of the frequencies and the
cutoff settings.
Eigensolution may be canceled at any time, with the analysis continuing using the mode shapes
calculated up to that point. After the last frequency is calculated, the software uses the Sturm
Sequence Check to confirm that no modes were skipped. If the check fails, you can return to the
dynamic input or continue with the spectral analysis. Sturm Sequence Check failures are usually
satisfied if the frequency cutoff is set to a value greater than the last frequency calculated.
After calculations are complete, control is passed to the Dynamic Output Processor. You can
review natural frequencies and mode shapes in text format. You can also display the node
shapes in and animated format.
Harmonic
For each forcing frequency listed in the dynamic input, CAESAR II performs a separate analysis.
These analyses are similar to static analyses and take the same amount of time to complete. At
the completion of each solution, the forcing frequency, its largest calculated deflection, and the
phase angle associated with it are listed. The root results for each frequency, and the system
deflections, are saved for further processing. Only twenty frequencies may be carried beyond
this point and into the output processor. When all frequencies are analyzed, the software
presents the frequencies. You can then select the frequencies and phase angles needed for
further analysis. This choice can be made after checking deflections at pertinent nodes for those
frequencies.
Phased solutions are generated when damping is considered or when you enter phase angles in
the dynamic input.
For all phased harmonic analyses, you can select separate phase angle solutions, including the
cycle maxima and minima, for each excitation frequency. Each separate phase angle solution
represents a point in time during one complete cycle of the system response. For a solution
without phase angles, you know when the maximum stresses, forces, and displacements occur.
When phase angles are entered, you do not know when the maximum stresses, forces, and
displacements are going to occur during the cycle. For this reason, the displacements and
stresses are often checked for a number of points during the cycle for each excitation frequency.
You must select these points interactively when the harmonic solution ends.
There is a complete displacement, force, moment, and stress solution for each frequency/phase
selected for output. You have the option of letting the software select the frequency/phase pairs
offering the largest displacements on a system basis. The largest displacement solution usually
represents the largest stress solution, but this is not always guaranteed. The displaced shapes
for the remaining frequencies are processed like static cases, with local force, moment, and
stress calculations. Control then shifts to the Dynamic Output Processor, which provides an
animated display of the harmonic results.
All harmonic results are amplitudes. For example, if a harmonic stress is reported as 15,200 psi,
then the stress due to the dynamic load, which is superimposed onto any steady state
component of the stress, can be expected to vary between +15,200 psi and -15,200 psi. The
total stress range due to this particular dynamic loading is 30,400 psi.

Dynamic Analysis
Spectrum
The spectrum analysis procedure can be broken down into:
Pulling the corresponding response amplitudes from the spectrum table and calculating the
system response for each mode of vibration
Combining the modal responses and directional components of the shock.
The first part of the analysis proceeds exactly as in modal analysis.
After natural frequencies are calculated, system displacements, forces, moments, and stresses
are calculated and combined on the modal level. After all the results are collected, the Dynamic
Output Processor appears. You can review spectral results, natural frequencies, and animated
mode shapes.
Time History
Modal time history analysis follows steps similar to a spectrum analysis. The modes of vibration
of the system are calculated. The dynamic equation of motion is solved through numeric
integration techniques for each mode at a number of successive time steps. The modal results
are then summed, yielding system responses at each time step.
The Dynamic Output Processor displays one load case (and optionally, one load combination)
with the maximum loads developed throughout the load application. You can also request
snap-shot cases at different load levels.

SECTION 10
Dynamic Output Processing

In This Section
Dynamic Output Window ............................................................... 801
Dynamic Output Animation Window .............................................. 817
Relief Load Synthesis Results ....................................................... 821
Dynamic Output Window

Shows the load case analysis and results of a dynamic analysis operation. The Dynamic
Output window is accessed directly following completion of the dynamic analysis, or it can be
accessed anytime subsequently from the following commands in the Output menu:
Main window ribbon: Output > Reports > Spectrum/Modal

Main window menu: Analysis > Spectrum/Modal
Displays results from a modal-only solution or from earthquake, water-hammer, and relief valve
solutions. This command is also enabled if a spectrum solution was run.
Main window ribbon: Output > Reports > Harmonic

Main window menu: Analysis > Harmonic
Displays the results from a harmonic analysis.
Main window ribbon: Output > Reports > Time History

Main window menu: Analysis > Time History

Displays time history results.
Open
Opens a different job for output review. You are prompted for the file. Modal/Spectrum
results are stored in *._s files, while Time History results are stored in *._t files.
Save
Writes the selected reports to file, in ASCII format.
Print
Prints the selected reports. To print a hard copy of the reports click File > Print. To send
reports to a file rather than the printer, click File > Save, and then type in or select the name
of the file. To change the file name for a new report, select File > Save As.
View Animation
Allows you to view animated motion. Modem and spectrum results allow animation of the
mode shapes, while time history analysis provides an animated simulation of the system
response to the force-time profile.
Input
Displays the Piping Input window.

View Load Cases

Provides a summary of each dynamic load case including the spectrum name, scale factor,
direction cosines, and node range.
Word
Sends reports to Microsoft Word.
View Reports
Displays the selected reports in the Dynamic Output window.
Load Cases Analyzed

Shows the load cases that were analyzed. For spectrum analysis, the load cases listed
constitute all of the spectrum load cases as well as all of the static/dynamic combinations.
For time history analysis, the listed loads are the results maxima case containing each of the
snap-shot cases for the single time history load case, and each of the static/dynamic
combinations.
Report Options
Shows the reports available for the analyzed load cases.
General Results
Lists reports that are not associated with load cases.
For a description of the options, see Report Types (on page 806).
You can select the reports and the load cases you want to view by Use CTRL+ or SHIFT+ and
select one or more load cases and reports. You can send the reports to a printer, print to a file,
save to a file or set to display.
The General Results Reports that display in the right-hand column do not require that
a Report Option be selected highlight to print.
Open a Job
Opens a different job for output review.
To review an output from a different job, click Open and browse for the output file.
Modal and Spectrum results are stored in *._s files. Time History results are stored
in *._t files.

Enter a Report Title

To include a report title at the top of each page of the report, click Enter Report Titles .
There are two options for report titles: Edit 2-line Report Title and Edit Load Case Labels.
Click Edit 2-line Report Title and the following dialog box appears.
These two lines will be added to the top of each report page. Enter the report title, and click OK.
Now click Edit Load Case Labels and the following dialog box appears.
Here you can change the names of the load cases as they appear in the reports. Click OK to
close, and then click Done.

View Load Cases

To review the dynamic load cases including spectrum name, scale factor, direction cosines, and
node range, click View Load Cases .
Here you can scroll through the various load cases. Click OK to close.
Send Reports to Microsoft Word

This feature is activated when producing a report and enables the use of all of MS Word
formatting, such as font selection and margin control, and printing features. You can append
multiple reports to form a final report.
All reports that are to be saved in the Word output file need not be declared at one time.
Subsequent reports sent to the file during the session are appended to the file started in the
session. (These output files are only closed when a new output device, file or printer is defined.)
After closing the report, a table of contents is added.
1. To send a report to Microsoft Word, select the reports and click View Reports using
Microsoft Word .
Microsoft Word automatically opens, and the report is generated.
Hold down the CTRL key to select multiple report at once.
View Reports
Each report selected is presented, one at a time, for inspection. Scroll through the reports where
necessary. See Report Types (on page 806) for a list of available reports.
The following toolbar displays at the top of the report when you click View Reports.
< Previous
Takes you back to the previous report.
> Next

Takes you to the next report.

Find
Enables you to locate and highlight text in the report such as node numbers.
Print
Prints the selected report(s).
Two types of reports are available from the Dynamic Output window: reports that are
associated with specific load cases (the Report Options shown in the center column), and
reports that are not associated with specific load cases (the General Results in the right
column).
For modal analysis, there are no load cases, so the center column is blank.
Reports associated with load cases are those associated with the spectral or time history
displacement solution. The report options are displacements, reactions, forces, moments, and
stresses.
Provides the magnitude of the displacement for each load case. The summing methodology for
Spectral analysis results in all positive displacements. For time history analysis, the results
include the applicable sign.
The displacement report gives the maximum displacement that is anticipated because the
application of the dynamic shock. For spectral analysis, note that all of the displacement values
are positive. The direction of the displacement is indeterminate. For example, there is a
tendency for the system to oscillate because of the potential energy stored after undergoing
some maximum dynamic movement. The displacements printed are relative to the movement of
the earth.
Provides the magnitude of the reactions for each load case. A typical entry is shown below.
NODE FX
5 716
649
2X(1)
The first line for each node contains the maximum load that occurred at some time during the
dynamic event. The second line for each node contains the maximum modal contribution to the
load. The third line for each node tells the mode and loading that was responsible for the
maximum. This form of the report permits easy identification of the culprit modes.
The mode identification line is broken down as follows:

2 X (1)
mode load direction (load component)
For example, at node 5 the resultant dynamic load due to the shock was 716. The largest modal
component (of the 716) was 649, due to mode 2, and produced by the first X direction
component (either the first support motion set for displacement response spectrum analysis, or
the first force set for force response spectrum analysis). This form of dynamic output report
enables you to know if there is a problem. If there is a problem, it enables you to identify which
mode of vibration and load component is the major contributor to the problem.
If the component shows up as a (P), then it was the pseudo-static (seismic anchor movement)
contribution of the loading that resulted in the major component of the response. If the
component shows up as an (M), it indicates a missing mass contribution. A typical restraint
report is shown below.
Provides elemental forces and moments in the element local a-b-c coordinate system. The a-b-c
coordinate system is defined below.
For straight pipe not connected to an intersection:
a is along the element axis (for example, perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)
b is a XY, unless a is vertical and then b is along the X axis
c is a Xb.
For bends and elbows, and for each segment end:
a is along the element axis (perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)
b is to the plane of the bend
c is a Xb.

For intersections, and for each segment framing into the intersection:
a is along the element axis (perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)
b is to the plane of the intersection
c is a Xb.
The X indicates the vector cross product.
Force, moment, and stress reports are similar to restraint reports in that each has the maximum
response, followed by:
1. Modal maximum
2. Modal maximum load identifier.
All force/moment reports are set up to represent the forces and moments that act on the end of
the element to keep the element in equilibrium.
Contains information identical to information provided for Local Forces (on page 807), except
that it is oriented along the global X, Y, and Z axes. A typical report is shown below.

Contains axial, bending, maximum octahedral, and code stresses, as well as in-plane and
out-of-plane stress intensification factors. These reports contain mode and modal maximum
data. A typical report is shown below.

Summarizes the forces and code stresses for a particular load case. This report contains
maximum responses, the calculated stress, and the calculated stress allowable.

Shows on an element-by-element basis the impact of each load case on the total fatigue
allowable and the cumulative impact of all simultaneously-selected load cases. This report is
available only for one or more fatigue stress types. Only one report is generated, regardless of
the number of selected fatigue load cases. If the total usage factor exceeds 1.0; it implies fatigue
failure under that loading condition.

Provides one number for each mode and load direction for a dynamic load case. This value
provides you with an understanding of the effect that the dynamic loading and the mass had on
the particular mode. The absolute magnitude has no significance; only the relationship between
values for a single load case is important.

Calculated modal natural frequencies are reported in Hertz and radians per second. The period
is reported in seconds.
Scales the largest displacement in the mode shape to the largest mass in the model.
Scales the largest displacement in the mode shape to 1.0, with all other displacements and
rotations scaled accordingly. This mode report is the easiest way to get an understanding of the
mode shape.
The example below shows two mode shapes from a small job. In the first mode, the largest
single component is in the Y direction. In the second mode, the largest single component is in
the Z direction.

Unity normalized means that the largest displacement component in the mode is set
to 1.0, and all other displacement values are scaled accordingly.
Displays the percent of the total system mass/force included in the extracted modes, and the
percent of system mass/force included in the missing mass correction (if any) for each of the
individual shocks of the dynamic load cases. The value gives an indication of the accuracy of
the total system response captured by the dynamic model, with 100% being the ideal.
% Mass Included
Shows the percentage of mass active in each of the X, Y, and Z directions.
% Force Active
Shows the value that is computed by taking the algebraic sum in each of the global
directions, and then applying the SRSS method to each of the three directions. The sums of
the three directions are added vectorally.
% Force Added
Shows the value obtained by subtracting % Force Active from 100.

Lists the input for the piping model or for the dynamic input.
Shows how CAESAR II lumped masses for the dynamic runs. The mass lumping report should
show a fairly uniform distribution of masses. Large or irregular variations in the values must be
investigated. Usually these large values can be reduced by breaking down exceedingly long,
straight runs of pipe.
The mass lumping report, shown below is very uniform in distribution, and should produce a
good dynamic solution. CAESAR II ignores rotational terms.

Shows how CAESAR II deals with the nonlinear restraints in the job. It shows which directional
supports are included, which gaps are assumed closed, and how friction resistance is modeled.
Displays the Input Listing Options dialog box and allows you to select which portions of the
input are reported in this output format. All basic element data (geometry), operating conditions,
material properties, boundary conditions, and report formatting are available:

Offsets Title
Uniform Loads
Wind/Wave
SIF's and TEE's
Bends
Rigids
Expansion Joints
Reducers
Flanges
Equipment Check
Restraints
Displacements
Hanger
Flexible Nozzles
Select the options you want to print or view, and then click OK.

Dynamic Output Animation Window
Main window ribbon: Output > Animations > Mode Shapes

Main window menu: Analysis > Animation > Mode Shapes
Main window ribbon: Output > Animations > Harmonic

Main window menu: Analysis > Animation > Harmonic
Main window ribbon: Output > Animations > Time History

Main window menu: Analysis > Animation > Time History
The Dynamic Output Animation window enables you to review analytic results in graphic
mode. This window has the same general capabilities as the Classic Piping Input dialog box. It
uses the 3D/HOOPS graphic standard toolbar, which provides zoom, orbit, pan, and several
other navigation options. From this window, you can also switch views and modes.
Activate the Dynamic Output Animation window from the Dynamic Output window by
clicking View Animation .
The animation commands enable you to view animated motion of the system for static
displacements or various dynamic movements. The mode and spectrum results, for example,
allow animation of the mode shapes, while time history analysis provides an animated
simulation of the system response to the force-time profile.
A piping model is shown in its default state (volume mode, isometric view, orthographic
projection). If necessary, you can display the model using an isometric view, or by any of the
defined orthographic views: Front/Back, Top/Bottom, or Left/Right by clicking the corresponding
toolbar buttons. You can interactively rotate, zoom, or pan the model. Zoom to Window and
Zoom to Selection options are also available.
You can also set perspective or orthographic projections. Click Nodes to display node
numbers to display node numbers. Select the load case or mode shape you want from the
corresponding drop down list. The frequency of the load case associated with the animation is
shown at the top of the view plot whenever you select Action > Titles.
The Animated Plot menu displays several plot selections. Motion and Volume Motion activate
the animation. The Motion command uses the centerline representation while Volume Motion
produces the volume graphics image. Each of the motion options causes the graphics processor
to animate the current plot. If Node Numbers is clicked, the node number text is moved
together with the corresponding node. When the plot is animated in the window, it may be sped
up, slowed down, or stopped using appropriate the toolbar command. After selecting a different
load case or mode shape from the drop-down list, the motion automatically stops. Select one of
the motion commands again to activate the model movement.

The File > Print Motion command prints all of the vibration positions of the current mode. It is
not available for time history animation. For clarity purposes, we recommend you use the single
line (Motion) option to generate the printouts.
Save Animation to File

The animated graphics can be saved to a file by clicking Create an Animation File.
Alternatively, you can access this command from the Dynamic Plot File > Save as Animation.
After activating this command, the standard MS Windows Save As dialog box displays and
prompts you to enter the file name and directory to save the files. By default, the current file
name and current data directory is used. There are two file types that are created: an HTML file
and an HSF file. To view the saved animation, find the corresponding HTML file and double-click
it. The corresponding HSF file containing the animation routines is displayed. The HTML file
contains buttons to play or pause the animation. The model can also be viewed at different
orthogonal planes, or returned to the isometric view.
The HTML is an interactive file.
The first time a CAESAR II file is created, the HTML file is opened with your default internet
browser. The software displays a message requesting permission to download a control from
Tech Soft 3D. Click Yes to allow the download, after which the image displays. After the model
appears, right-click the model to view the available options such as orbit, pan, zoom, and/or
different render modes. The image can be printed or copied to the clipboard.
Animation of Static Results -Displacements

You can view the piping system as it moves to the displaced position for the basic load cases.
To animate the static results, click Static Output > Options > View Animation.
You can click View Animation to view graphic animation of the displacement
solution.
Static animation graphics has all the standard model projection and motion toolbar commands.
The load case can be selected from the drop-down list. The title consists of the load case name
followed by the file name, and can be toggled on and off from the Action menu.
The Static Animation processor allows viewing of the single line and volume motion, controls
the speed of the movement, and the animation can be saved to a file as described above.
We recommend you use the Deflected Shape command button on the 3D/HOOPS
Graphics view of the Static Output Processor toolbar. For more information refer to
3D/HOOPS Graphics Tutorial for Static Output Processor, Deflected Shape.
Animation of Dynamic Results Modal/Spectrum

You can view the calculated modes of vibration that correspond to particular natural frequencies
of the system. This feature is available from the Dynamic Output Animation window after running
the modal analysis.
After invoking the modal animation type, the system is displayed in its default state. Natural
frequencies can be selected from the drop-down list to animate the corresponding mode shape.
The title shows the natural frequency in Hz followed by the current file name and the date.

Animated graphics for a particular mode shape (frequency) can be viewed in a single line or
volume mode motion with speed control, and/or saved to an HTML file for later presentation.
Animation of Dynamic Results Harmonic

You can calculate the system response to the excitation frequency. This response can be
animated.
The Harmonics animation module can be launched from the animation Harmonic Output
window by clicking View Animation . The system displays in its default isometric state. The
animation screen displays the same toolbar options described earlier that allow single line and
volume motion as well as speed up and slow down options. Occasional cases corresponding to
the excitation frequencies may be selected from the drop-down list. The title shows the currently
selected frequency, file name, and the date. The title may be disabled from the Action menu.
Animated graphics for each analyzed load case can be saved to an HTML file for later
presentation.
Animation of Dynamic Results Time History

The Time History animation window can be launched from the Dynamic Output Animation
window by clicking View Animation . The system displays in the centerline isometric mode.
The model can be rotated, zoomed, or panned and can be set to different orthographic
projections. The current time history time step and the job name are shown in the title on the top
of the graphics view. Due to complexity of the time history calculations and to decrease the
animation time, the animation is only available in centerline mode.
Save Animation to File is not available in the time history animation for the same
reason.
An additional feature of the Time History animation module is the Element Viewer. The Element
Viewer displays specific element information for a given time step. After clicking Element
Viewer, the Element Info dialog box displays the nodal displacements, forces, moments, code
stress, and SIF information provided for the current element at a current time step. Clicking Next
>> or Previous << changes the information to correspond to the next or previous element in the
system for the same time step.
When you click Motion to start the animation, the current time step is displayed in the title
line, and the task bar at the bottom of the window shows the progress.
There are several ways to move the model:
You can increase , decrease , or stop the animation speed.
Click Next >> or Previous << while the Element Info dialog box is active to update the
information for the current element for the next or previous time step. If the animation is
stopped, it advances or moves back one step. Click View Animation again after you stop
the animation to continue the time history motion from the location (the time step) where the
animation was stopped.
Click Plot the First Time Step or Plot the Last Time Step to bring the animation to the
beginning or the end, correspondingly.
Drag the time slider to the appropriate time step. The position of the bar adjusts
automatically as the animation progresses. You can click on the slider and then drag it along
the time-line to find the time step you want, or to see the displaced shape of the model.

If the Element Info dialog box is active, the highlighted element information is updated to
correspond to the current time step.
You can enable the node numbers; however, we recommend node numbering be disabled
when using animation. As the animated elements move, the node numbers are redrawn for
every position in the system. This creates a blinking effect that makes it hard to follow the
animation.

Relief Load Synthesis Results

Relief Load Synthesis and Tools > Relief Load Synthesis calculates the magnitudes of
relieving thrust forces. Results are calculated for liquids and for gases greater than 15 psig. This
command is only available when Relief Loads (spectrum) and Time History are selected as
Analysis Type. For more information, see Relief Load Synthesis (on page 787).
Example Output - Gas Relief Load Synthesis (on page 793)
Example Output - Liquid Relief Load Synthesis (on page 796)

SECTION 11
Generate Stress Isometrics
Main window ribbon: Home > Reports > Generate Stress Isometrics
Main window ribbon: Output > Isogen > Generate Stress Isometrics
Main window menu: Tools > ISOGEN Isometrics

Creates stress isometric drawings and opens the Stress Isometric Annotation dialog box in
the CAESAR II Isogen window. You can include the piping model data created by CAESAR II in
the display area of the Isogen window and then generate a stress isometric drawing. The data
you enter to define a piping model is the input data, and the data generated by CAESAR II after
analyzing a model is the output data.

Add input feature information (on page 823)
Add output feature information (on page 823)
Add custom annotations for nodal features (on page 824)
Add custom annotations for elemental features (on page 825)
Set project information (on page 825)
Configure annotation preferences (on page 826)
Configure isometric drawing split points (on page 826)
Create a drawing using the default style (on page 828)
Create a drawing using an existing style (on page 828)
Create a drawing using a new style (on page 829)
Create and save an annotation template (on page 830)
Apply a template (on page 831)

Add input feature information

The Input tab of the Stress Isometrics Annotations panel lists input features. You can select a
category from the Feature list to view data related to a feature.
1. On the Home ribbon of the main CAESAR II window, select File > Open to open a model.
2. On the Home ribbon, click Reports > Generate Stress Isometrics .

The model displays in the C2Isogen window.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations.
The Stress Isometric Annotations panel displays on the right
4. Select the Input tab.
5. Click the Feature list and select a feature category.
At the appropriate node, the software displays an annotation containing the data associated
with the selected category.
6. Select a row in the Select column to view the feature information on the associated node of
the 3D model in the graphic view. Clear the row to remove the feature information in the
model.
7. If you want to view information from multiple Feature categories, select the categories and
the required rows.
8. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save annotations for the selected input information.
When you select Restraint/Hanger Types in the Feature list, select Tag and GUID to
display Tag and GUID columns at the end of each row. When you select a row, the
annotation in the graphic view includes tag (support ID) and GUID data.
The software displays the model parameters, such as Diameter, Insulation Thickness,
and Wall Thickness, in the drawing only when there is a change in these parameters.
To select multiple nodes in the list, select the first row (in the Select column), press SHIFT,
and then select the last row.
To remove an annotation, right-click the annotation tag in the graphic view, area and click
Delete Note.
Add output feature information

The Output tab defines what post-analysis results of a model that the software includes in the
drawing. Select Load Cases on the Output tab to see the load cases the software uses to
analyze the model. The analysis results are categorized as Displacement, Restraint, and
Stress in the Results box. Select Hanger Data on the Output tab to see generate hanger
information not specific to a load case.
1. Select File > Open to open a model.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the
C2Isogen module.

3. Select StressIso > Annotations to open the Stress Isometric Annotations pane.
The Input tab is active by default.
4. Select the Output tab to view the load cases used to analyze the model. Output
features are available for selection only if you have analyzed the piping model. If you have
not analyzed the model, click Generate Output from the Output tab.
5. Click Load Cases to select a load case.
The results generated for the load case are listed in the Results box.
6. Select the result type you want, and then select the nodes to include the information for
annotation.
7. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save annotations for the selected output
information.
The Node number, Node Name, and Description columns display information entered in
CAESAR II and cannot be edited.
The Load Cases list displays load cases created for static analysis only.
To remove a node or an element from a selection set, click the annotation tag in the display
area, and then press DELETE.
Add custom annotations for nodal features

The Nodal Annotations tab adds your custom notes for each node in the drawing that you
select. The Node # and Node Name columns display the node information you enter all in
CAESAR II and are not editable. You can type your comments for the available nodes in the
User Annotations column.
The comments you add in the User Annotations column can be viewed only in the
drawing, tags for user annotations are not visible in the display area.
C2Isogen module.
4. Select the Nodal Annotations tab to view a list of all the nodes in the model.
5. To add a note for a node, click the associated cell in the User Annotation column and then
type your note.
6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save custom annotations.

Add custom annotations for elemental features

The Elemental Annotations tab of the Stress Isometric Annotation panel lists all model
element. You can add custom remarks for each element in the User Annotation column on this
tab. The From, From Name, To, and To Name columns display the information you enter for
each node in CAESAR II.
1. On the Home ribbon of the main CAESAR II window, select File > Open to open a model.
2. On the Home ribbon, click Reports > Generate Stress Isometrics .

The model displays in the C2Isogen window.
The Stress Isometric Annotations panel displays on the right
4. Select the Elemental Annotations tab to view a list of model elements.
5. To add a comment for an element, type the comment in the User Annotations column.
6. To display the element names at the middle of the elements on the drawing, click Export
element name.
7. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save custom annotations.
The comments you add in the User Annotations column on the Stress Isometric
Annotations panel can be viewed only in the drawing. Tags for user annotations are not
visible in the model.
Values in the Element Name column are read-only.
Set project information

The Project Attributes tab defines general information about your project, such as the project
name, number, client name, and more.
C2Isogen module.
4. Select the Project Attributes tab.
5. Type values for each attribute in the Attribute Value column.
6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save the values.

Configure annotation preferences

The Settings tab on the Stress Isometric Annotations pane lists all the input and output
features available for annotation. You select a text box shape for each feature allowing you to
represent information in different text box shapes on the drawing. The software then displays the
feature information in the drawing according to the shape you select.
C2Isogen module.
4. Select the Settings tab to view the list of features.
5. Click TextBox Shape list associated to a feature, and then select a text box shape for the
feature.
6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save annotation preferences.
The text box shapes you select for different features are visible only in the drawing.
Configure isometric drawing split points

The Split tab defines the split points for new isometric drawings. For example, your model
contains nodes 10 through 250. If you select nodes 90 and 170, the first isometric drawing will
have nodes 10 through 80. The second isometric drawing will have nodes 90 through 160, and
the third isometric drawing will have nodes 170 through 250.
C2Isogen module.
4. Select the Split tab.
5. In the Split column, select the nodes at which to start new isometric drawings.

6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save the values.

Create a drawing using the default style

You can use different drawing styles1 to create a drawing. Using the Isometric Drawing
Generation dialog box, you can select a style or create a new style. Selecting the default style
to create a drawing applies a predefined set of styles and rules to the drawing. Use this option if
you are not familiar with the drawing styles or if you do not want to create a custom drawing
style.
To create a drawing using the default style:
C2Isogen module.
3. Select Create Isometric Drawing in the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Isometric
Drawing Generation dialog box.
4. Select Use Default Style, and then click OK to create drawings.
The Drawings dialog box displays a list of drawings created for the piping model and reports
errors generated during drawing creation.
5. Select the drawings to view, and then click View to open the drawings in your default
viewer.
Select Generate PDF Files to create a .pdf file of the drawings in addition to the .dwg file.
The software saves .dwg drawing files and .pdf files in the same folder as the piping model.
By default, the software uses the pipe model unit system in the drawing.
You cannot make any changes to the default drawing style.
Create a drawing using an existing style

Using this option you can apply an existing drawing style and create a drawing. You must have
an existing style to use this option. You can create a new style using C2Isogen, or some other
application like Alias I-Configure.
To create a drawing using an existing style:
C2Isogen module.
3. Select Create Isometric Drawing on the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Isometric
Select Generate PDF Files to create a .pdf file of the drawings in addition to the
.dwg file.
1A drawing style is a set a parameters that you define to represent your piping system drawing.
These parameters typically include drawing format, drawing size, drawing frame, units, and
options to display other information like materials list, weld list, and so on.

4. Select Use Existing Style, and then click OK to open the Select Existing Style dialog box.
5. To select an isometric directory2 for your project, click Browse, and then select the root
directory.
6. To select an isometric project3, click Browse, and then select a project.
7. To select an isometric style, click Browse, and then select the style you want to apply.
8. Click Create Drawing to open the Drawings dialog box.
9. Select the drawings to view, and then click View to open the drawings in your default
viewer.
You must follow the standard folder structure to save the project file and the styles.
Create a drawing using a new style

Using this feature, you can customize various parameters associated to a drawing such as the
drawing frame, units, drawing size, and so on. To create a new style, you must first create an
isometric directory. The style you create is saved in a project that is created when you create an
isometric directory for a new style. To define and create a new style:
C2Isogen module.
3. Select Create Isometric Drawing in the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Isometric
Select Generate PDF Files to create a .pdf file of the drawings in addition to the
.dwg file.
2 An isometric directory is the root folder for files associated to a style. An isometric directory
can contain many projects.
3 You create isometric projects in an isometric directory. Isometric projects contain different
drawing styles.

4. Select Create New Style, and then click OK to open the Isometric Style Configuration
dialog box.
5. To the right of Create New Isometric Directory, click Browse to select an empty folder, or
create a new folder.
6. Under Create New Isometric Directory, click Create to generate the required folder
structure and files.
7. To select a drawing frame4, click Browse and select a drawing frame in the Open Drawing
Frame Template dialog box.
8. Similarly, to specify a folder to save your drawings in Drawing Path, click Browse and
select a folder.
9. Select Units to select a unit system for your drawing.
10. Select Drawing Size to select a size for the drawing.
11. Click Create Drawing to save the style you created and generate drawing files.
12. On the Drawings dialog box, select the files you want to view, and then click View to open
the drawings in your default viewer.
You must choose an empty folder to create an isometric directory.

If you want to delete an existing style, you must use to delete the style.
Create and save an annotation template

You can create a standard template and apply this template to different piping models. The
software applies the selections that you make while creating a template to the new model. To
include nodes or elements associated to an input feature, you must select all the nodes or
elements of that feature.
You can only select input features to save as a template.
To create and save a template:
4 Drawing frames are the backing sheets used to create your drawing. By default, different types
of drawing frames are generated when you create a new style.

C2Isogen module.
3. Select Edit Stress Annotations in the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Stress
Isometric Annotations pane.
4. Select the Input tab.
5. From the Feature list, select an input feature that you want to include in your template.
6. To select all the nodes or elements, press SHIFT, and then select the first and the last
check box of the list.
7. Similarly, select all the nodes and elements of other input features that you want to include
in your template.
8. To define annotation preferences for your template, click the Settings tab and select text
box shapes for the input features.
9. Select StressIso > Save Template to open the Save Annotation Template dialog box.
10. On the Save Annotation Template dialog box, type a file name and then click Save to save
the template.
Apply a template
You can apply an existing template to a new piping model. All the selections made while
creating a template are applied to the new model along with the annotation preferences. You
can apply a template to a piping model only if a stress Iso file associated to the model does not
already exist. To apply an annotation template to a new model.
C2Isogen module.
3. Select StressIso > Apply Template to open the Open Annotation Template dialog box.
4. Select the template file to use, and then click Open to apply the template.
5. To clear all annotations, select StressIso > Reset Annotation.
6. To save the applied annotations, select StressIso > Save Annotation.

Stress Isometric Tutorials

The tutorials familiarize you with the stress isometric interface and procedures. You should read
the tutorials and follow the instructions if you have not previously created a stress isometric
drawing.

Topics
Tutorial A - Create a stress isometric drawing using the default drawing
style ................................................................................................ 833
Tutorial B - Add annotations for Input and Output features ........... 836
Tutorial C - Add custom annotations and configure annotations preferences
....................................................................................................... 838
Tutorial D - Create and apply a stress ISO template ..................... 841
Tutorial A - Create a stress isometric drawing using the

default drawing style
Using stress isometric annotations, you can annotate the input and output features from
CAESAR II and generate a drawing in different formats. Stress isometric annotations provide
you the flexibility to define different drawing styles to create a drawing. This tutorial shows you
how to open a file and create a drawing using the default drawing style.
Topics
Open an existing CAESAR II file ................................................... 834
Create a drawing using the default style ....................................... 835

1. Open CAESAR II.

2. Select File > Open.
3. On the Open dialog box, click the Examples button on the right side to open the Examples
folder.
4. Select RELIEF.c2 from the file list, and then click Open.
5. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the file in the C2Isogen
module.

To create a drawing using the default drawing style:

1. Select Create Isometric Drawing from the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Isometric
Drawing Generation dialog box. You can select an existing drawing style, create new style,
or use the default drawing style to create a drawing.
2. Select Use Default Style, and then click OK to generate the drawing files.
The drawing files you create using default style are saved in the model folder.
3. Select the drawing from the list, and then click View to open the drawing in your default
viewer or select an application in the Open With dialog box.
The drawing displays without any annotations.

Tutorial B - Add annotations for Input and Output features

This tutorial shows you how to annotate input and output features of a model. The Stress
Isometric Annotations pane lists all the input and output features used in the CAESAR II file.
Topics
Add annotations for input features ................................................. 836
Add annotations for output features .............................................. 837
In Tutorial A - Create a stress isometric drawing using the default drawing style (on page 833),
we learned to open a CAESAR II file and create a drawing without any annotations. The
software saves all information associated to input features in the CAESAR II file when you
define specific inputs for a model. You can make the drawing more detailed by adding this
information to the drawing. In this part of the tutorial, we add annotations for input features to the
RELIEF.C2 file.
2. On the Open dialog box, click the Examples button on the right side.
3. Select RELIEF.C2 from the file list, and then click Open.
C2Isogen module.
5. Select Edit Stress Annotations from the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Stress
Isometric Annotations pane. By default, the pane opens the Input tab.
6. The Feature list displays all the input features available in CAESAR II. Depending on the
feature you select, the software displays a list of nodes associated to the feature.

Click the check boxes in the Select column if you want to include the information associated
to the node or element in your drawing. For example, select Node Numbers in the Feature
list, and then select nodes 110 and 115. Annotations for the selected node numbers are
added to the model and are visible in the display area.
As with the input features, CAESAR II saves the result data after you analyze a model. The
Output tab lists the load cases that the software uses for the stress analysis and classifies them
as Displacement, Restraint, and Stress. You can make the result data available in the drawing
by selecting nodes and elements displayed for the result type.
To add annotations for output features:
1. Select the Output tab to view the load cases used for stress analysis.
2. The Load Cases list displays a list of load cases used in the analysis. The Results box lists
results generated for each load case. You can view a list of nodes or elements for each
result set, and then select nodes and elements that you want to annotate. Let us consider

Load Case 3, and then select elements 75-80 and 110-115 for Stress. You can now view
the annotations for the selected elements in the display area.
Tutorial C - Add custom annotations and configure

annotations preferences
Along with annotating input and output features, you can also add custom notes to the nodes
and elements of a model. The annotations you add can be represented in different formats to
improve drawing readability. In this tutorial, we learn to add custom notes to nodes and
elements and you choose representation formats for the features.
Topics
Adding custom annotations ........................................................... 838
Configuring annotation preferences .............................................. 840
In the earlier tutorial, we learned to add annotations for input and output features. In this tutorial,
we continue adding annotations to Relief.c2 file we opened in Open an existing CAESAR II file
(on page 834).
To add custom annotations:

Select Nodal Annotations tab to view the list of nodes defined in the model. You can now add
your remarks in the User Annotations cell associated to each node. For example, click the cell
associated to node 80 and type .
1. Similarly, select Elemental Annotations tab to view the list of elements in the model and
add your remarks in the User Annotation cell associated to the element you want to
annotate. Here we add a note for element 75-80.
2. Click the User Annotations cell associated to element 75-80 and type
.
The custom annotations you add are not shown in the display area and can be viewed only
in the drawing.

All the information that you annotate in your drawing can be represented in different formats,
selecting different textbox shapes to display different feature can make the drawing easier to
understand. In this part of the tutorial we learn to configure annotation preferences for the
drawing.
It is evident in the drawing illustrated in the first part of this tutorial that all the annotations you
made are displayed in a rectangular box. This makes it difficult to differentiate between the
input, output, and custom annotations added to the drawing. To choose different formats to
represent your annotations:
1. Select the Settings tab to view the list of input, output, and custom annotation features. You
can select different box shapes for the features you annotate.
2. Let us select Circle for Node Numbers, No Box for Output Stress Data, and Filleted
Rectangle for Nodal Annotations and Elemental Annotations.

You cannot view these changes in the display area, the changes you made are updated
when you create a drawing.
Tutorial D - Create and apply a stress ISO template

This tutorial shows you how to create a template for stress ISO annotations .You can apply this
template to your piping models and ensure consistency in representation of the input features in
the drawing. Only input features of a model can be included in a template. Therefore, you should
open a piping model that has all the input features you want to include in your template.
Topics
Create a template .......................................................................... 841
Apply a template ............................................................................ 843
This tutorial shows you how to create and save a stress Iso annotation template. For this
tutorial, open RELIEF.C2 from the CAESAR II Examples folder.
To create a template:
1. Select Edit Stress Annotations on the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Stress
Isometric Annotations pane.
You can only include the input features in a template. Select all the nodes listed
for that feature to include an input feature in a template.

2. Click the Feature list. Select a feature, and then select all the nodes listed for the feature.
For example, select all the nodes listed for the Restraint/Hanger Types feature.
3. Similarly, select all the nodes or elements of other input features that you want to include.
4. Select Settings tab to specify a text box shape for the input feature you selected in the
earlier part of this tutorial. Let us select Filleted Rectangle for the Restraint/hanger types
feature.
5. Select StressIso > Save Template to save your selections as a template. A template file
with the .ist extension is saved in the model folder.

After you create and save a template, you can apply this template to your piping models. When
you select all the nodes of a feature to create a template, that input feature gets selected when
you apply the template to a new piping model. You can clear the selections if you do not want to
display all the nodes or elements of the input feature included in a template.
This part of the tutorial shows you how to apply a saved template to a piping model. You can
apply a template to a piping model only if the model is not already annotated and the stress Iso
file (.iso) associated to the model does not exist.
To apply a template to a new model:
1. Open CAESAR II.
3. In the Open dialog box, click the Examples button on the right side to open the Examples
folder.
4. Select JACKET.C2 from the file list, and then click Open.
C2Isogen module.
6. Select StressIso > Apply Annotation, and then select a template file.
7. Select StressIso > Annotation to view the selections you made while creating the template
in the display area.
The previous figure shows that all the nodes listed under Restraint/Hanger types are selected
in the new model.

SECTION 12
Equipment Component and Compliance

You can use the CAESAR II Equipment and Component Compliance Analysis modules to enter
data and check vessels, flanges, turbines, compressors, pumps and heat exchangers for
excessive piping loads according to appropriate standards. Output reports can be sent to the
printer, the terminal, or saved as a file.
Suction (inlet), discharge (exhaust), and extraction lines are analyzed for forces and moments in
separate runs of pipe stress software. After all of the loadings for a particular piece of equipment
are calculated, you can run an analysis to determine if these loads are acceptable according to
the governing code.
A convenient feature of the analysis modules is the ability to separately analyze the nozzles on
equipment separately. You often only have suction side loads, and the dimensions of the pump
are unknown. In these cases, CAESAR II accepts a zero or a blank entry for the unknown data
and generates a single-nozzle equipment check report. Although overall compliance is not being
evaluated, you can still check individual nozzle limits. This is a valuable tool, especially if you
are more interested in load guidance, rather than some fixed or precise limit on allowables.
The analysis modules are available on the CAESAR II Analysis menu and share the same
interface for easy transition between the modules.
SIFs @ Intersections
Calculates stress intensification factors at intersections. For more information, see
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors (on page 845).
SIFs @ Bends
Calculates stress intensification factors at bends. For more information, see Bend Stress
Intensification Factors (on page 852).
WRC 107/207
Calculates stresses in vessels due to attached piping. For more information, see WRC 107
(537)/297/PD5500 Vessel/Nozzle Stresses (on page 858).
Flanges
Performs flange stress and leakage calculations. For more information, see Flange
Leakage/Stress Calculations (on page 899).
B31.G
Estimates pipeline remaining life. For more information, see Pipeline Remaining Strength
Calculations (B31G) (on page 920).
Expansion Joint Rating
Evaluates expansion joints using EJMA equations. For more information, see Expansion
Joint Rating (on page 925).
AISC
Performs AISC code check on structural steel elements. For more information, see
Structural Steel Checks - AISC (on page 930).

NEMA SM23
Evaluates piping loads on steam turbine nozzles. For more information, NEMA SM23
(Steam Turbines) (on page 953).
API 610
Evaluates piping loads on centrifugal pumps. For more information, see API 610 (Centrifugal
Pumps) (on page 944).
API 617
Evaluates piping loads on compressors. For more information, see API 617 (Centrifugal
Compressors) (on page 948).
API 661
Evaluates piping loads on air-cooled heat exchangers. For more information, see API 661
(Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) (on page 957).
HEI Standard
Evaluates piping loads on feedwater heaters. For more information, see HEI Standard (on
page 965).
API 560
Evaluates piping loads on fired heaters. For more information, see API 560 (Heaters) (on
page 951).
In This Section
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors ..................................... 845
Bend Stress Intensification Factors................................................ 852
WRC 107 (537)/297/PD5500 Vessel/Nozzle Stresses .................. 858
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations.............................................. 899
Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations (B31G) ........................ 920
Expansion Joint Rating .................................................................. 925
Structural Steel Checks - AISC ...................................................... 930
Equipment Manager ....................................................................... 938
HEI Standard .................................................................................. 965
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors

Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > SIFs @ Intersections
Main window menu: Analysis > SIFs @ Intersections
Computes intersection stress intensification factors (SIFs) for any of the three-pipe type
intersections available in CAESAR II. To begin, specify a new job name in the New Job Name
Specification dialog box or click Browse to navigate to an existing job file.
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. After you
create or open a job, you can enter input data and then define, analyze, and review your data.

The software opens the Intersection Stress Intensification Factors window.

Enter the necessary problem-specific data in the input fields, and then click Run Analysis to
run the analysis. After processing is complete, stress intensification factors are reported for a
range of different configuration values on the Output tab, as shown below.
Topics
Intersection Type ........................................................................... 848
Piping Code ID ............................................................................... 848
Header Pipe Outside Diameter ...................................................... 849
Header Pipe Wall Thickness.......................................................... 849
Branch Pipe Outside Diameter ...................................................... 849
Branch Pipe Wall Thickness .......................................................... 849
Branch Largest Diameter at Intersection ....................................... 850
Pad Thickness ............................................................................... 850
Intersection Crotch Radius ............................................................ 851
Intersection Crotch Thickness ....................................................... 851
Extrusion Crotch Radius ................................................................ 851
Weld Type ...................................................................................... 851
Ferritic Material .............................................................................. 852
Design Temperature ...................................................................... 852

Intersection Type
Specifies the intersection type to be reviewed. After you click Run Analysis , the software
generates tables that show the relationship between the SIFs for the entered piping code, WRC
329, ASME III (NC and ND), and Schneider recommendations. You can choose from the
following:
Reinforced Fabricated Tee
Unreinforced Fabricated Tee
Welding Tee
Sweepolet
Weldolet
Extruded Welding Tee
Bonney Forge Sweepolet
Bonney Forge Latrolet
Bonney Forge Insert Weldolet
Piping Code ID
Specifies the piping code ID. The following piping codes are allowed:

1 - B31.1 21 - Stoomwezen
3 - B31.3 22 - RCC-M C
4 - B31.4 23 - RCC-M D
5 - B31.5 24 - CODETI
8 -B31.8 & B31.8, Chapter VIII 25 - Norwegian TBK 5-6
10 - B31.9 26 - FDBR
11 - B31.4 Chapter XI 27 - BS 7159
12 - ASME Sect.III, Class 2 28 - UKOOA
13 - ASME Sect.III, Class 3 29 - IGE/TD/12
14 - Navy 505 (1984) 30 - Det Norske Veritas (DNV) (1996)
15 - CAN/CSA Z662 31 - B31.4, Chapter IX (Offshore)
16 - CAN/CSA Z662, Chapter 11 32 - EN-13480
17 - BS 806 (1993) (Issue 1, 33 - GPTC/Z380
September 1993)
34 - PD-8010, Part 1
18 - Swedish Method 1, 2nd Edition
35 - PD-8010, Part 2
Stockholm (1979)
36 - ISO-14692
Stockholm (1979) 37 - HPGSL
20 - B31.1 (1967) 38 - JPI
For a complete list of current publication dates for piping codes, see the CAESAR II Quick
Reference Guide.
Header Pipe Outside Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the matching pipe.
Do not enter the fitting diameter.
Header Pipe Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the header matching pipe.
Do not enter the fitting thickness.
Branch Pipe Outside Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the matching pipe.
Do not enter the diameter of the fitting.
Branch Pipe Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the matching pipe.

Do not enter the wall thickness of the fitting.
Branch Largest Diameter at Intersection

Specifies the largest diameter for the branch pipe fitting at the intersection. See the figures in the
piping code appendices for a more detailed description of this dimension.
This is the largest diameter of any thickened nozzle neck or transition that exists at the
intersection.
Defaults to the matching pipe diameter if omitted.
Pad Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the pad on the reinforced fabricated tee.
In most piping codes, the beneficial effect of the thickness of a pad is limited to a thickness less
than 1.5 times the nominal thickness of the fitting. This factor does not apply in BS806 or Z6662,
and is 2.5 in the Swedish piping code.
This option displays only for reinforced fabricated tees.

Intersection Crotch Radius

Specifies the intersection weld crotch radius for WRC329. Specifying this value can result in a
50% reduction in the stress intensification at the intersection when WRC 329 intersection
options are selected.
When you specify this value, you are assuring that there no significant stress riser at the
intersection weld.
To be effective in reducing the stress intensification, this value must be bigger than Tb/2 and
Th/2. You must also check the value (Tb'+y)/2 in the code, where y is the largest thickness at
the intersection. The crotch radius must also be larger than this value.
As of the 2001 addendum, B31.3 uses this value to determine if the fitting meets the
geometric criteria of B16.9 (see Note 8 in Appendix D of B31.3 for details). If this value and the
Intersection Crotch Thickness are defined, CAESAR II applies Note 8 to determine how the
flexibility characteristic is to be computed. If these values are left blank, the software uses the
setting in the configuration file to determine how the flexibility characteristic is to be computed.
Intersection Crotch Thickness

Specifies the thickness of the fitting in the crotch.
As of the 2001 addendum, B31.3 uses this value to determine if the fitting meets the geometric
criteria of B16.9 (see Note 8 in Appendix D of B31.3 for details). If this value and the
Intersection Crotch Radius are defined, CAESAR II applies Note 8 to determine how the
flexibility characteristic is to be computed. If these values are left blank, the software uses the
setting in the configuration file to determine how the flexibility characteristic is to be computed.
Extrusion Crotch Radius

Specifies the crotch radius for extruded welding tees. This option displays only for extruded
welding tees.
Weld Type
Specifies the weld type.
As Welded
This is an unfinished weld.
Finished/Ground Flush
The weld is ground flush on the inside and out and the SIF is 1.0.

Ferritic Material
Indicates that the material for this tee is ferrous, which enables the Y value to be computed on
the highest temperature value specified. This option is available for when you select ASME NC
and ASME ND in the Piping Code ID list.
Design Temperature
Specifies the system highest temperature. This value is required for piping codes ASME NC
and ASME ND to calculate material properties.
Bend Stress Intensification Factors

Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > SIFs @ Bends
Main window menu: Analysis > SIFs @ Bends
Opens a scratchpad for calculating stress intensification factors (SIFs) for various bend
configurations under different codes. You can access this scratchpad by selecting Analysis >
SIFs @ Bends or through the Bend SIF Scratchpad option on the Classic Piping input or on
the 3D model.
You can compute bend stress intensification factors for the following:
Pipe bends without any additional attachments. These calculations are done according to
the piping code being used.
Mitered pipe bends. These calculations are done according to the piping code being used.
Hankinson, Budlong and Albano, in the PVP Vol. 129, 1987.

To begin, specify a new job name in the New Job Name Specification dialog box or click
Browse to navigate to an existing job file.

The Bend Stress Intensification Factors window consists of two input tabs: the Bend tab (on
page 853) and the Trunnion tab (on page 857).
In most cases data that does not apply is left blank. For example, to review the SIFs
for a bend that does not have a trunnion, do not enter values for the trunnion-related input fields
on the Trunnion tab.
Bend Tab
Topics
Piping Code ID ............................................................................... 854
Pipe Outside Diameter ................................................................... 854
Wall Thickness of Attached Pipe ................................................... 855
Wall Thickness of Bend ................................................................. 855
Bend Radius .................................................................................. 855
Bend Angle (Degrees) ................................................................... 855
Number of Flanges (Laminate Type for BS7159 & UKOOA) ........ 855
Number of Cuts .............................................................................. 856
Seam Welded ................................................................................ 856
Pressure (Design Strain for BS 7159 & UKOOA) .......................... 856
Elastic Modulus .............................................................................. 856
Pressure Stiffening ........................................................................ 856

Identifies the piping code. The following piping codes are allowed:
1 - B31.1 21 - Stoomwezen
3 - B31.3 22 - RCC-M C
4 - B31.4 23 - RCC-M D
5 - B31.5 24 - CODETI
8 -B31.8 & B31.8, Chapter VIII 25 - Norwegian TBK 5-6
10 - B31.9 26 - FDBR
11 - B31.4 Chapter XI 27 - BS 7159
12 - ASME Sect.III, Class 2 28 - UKOOA
13 - ASME Sect.III, Class 3 29 - IGE/TD/12
14 - Navy 505 (1984) 30 - Det Norske Veritas (DNV) (1996)
15 - CAN/CSA Z662 31 - B31.4, Chapter IX (Offshore)
16 - CAN/CSA Z662, Chapter 11 32 - EN-13480
17 - BS 806 (1993) (Issue 1, 33 - GPTC/Z380
September 1993)
34 - PD-8010, Part 1
35 - PD-8010, Part 2
Stockholm (1979)
36 - ISO-14692
Stockholm (1979) 37 - HPGSL
20 - B31.1 (1967) 38 - JPI
For a complete list of current publication dates for piping codes, see the CAESAR II Quick
Reference Guide.
Defines the pipe outside diameter in the units shown.

Used in the average cross-sectional radius calculation:
r2 = (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter as entered
WT = Wall Thickness of attached pipe
The B31.3 code defines r2 as the "mean radius of matching pipe".

Specifies the matching pipe nominal wall thickness. Do not subtract out any corrosion. All SIF
calculations are made ignoring corrosion.
This wall thickness is used in the (r2), mean radius calculation as defined in the piping codes.
Specifies the thickness of the bend fitting if it is different than the thickness of the matching pipe.
This is the thickness used in the flexibility characteristic equation for (h):
h = (Tn)(R) / (ry)
r = Mean cross sectional radius of matching pipe
Specify the radius of the bend. The distance from the arc center to the centerline of the bend
curvature.
Specifies the angle between the downstream leg of the bend and a straight line extending along
the upstream leg of the bend. If no value is entered, the software uses the default value of 90º.
Sets the number of rigid fittings that are attached to the end of the bend preventing the
ovalization of the bend. Ovalization provides for a large amount of the flexibility of the bend.
BS-806 (the British Power Piping Code) recommends that flanges or valves (or any rigid
cross-sectional fitting) that are within two diameters of the ending weld point of the bend be
considered as attached to the end of the bend for this calculation.
Attachments to the end of the bend are considered to affect about 30º of the arc of the bend. For
the BS 7159 code, this entry refers to the material laminate type and must be of the following
values:
1
All chopped strand mat (CSM) construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
2
3

Laminate type affects the calculation of flexibility factors and stress intensification
factors for the BS 7159 code only.
Specifies the number of cuts in the miter bend.

If only a single cut is entered, then the bend is always considered to be a widely spaced mitered
bend. For multi-cut miters, CASEAR II uses the radius and the number of cuts to determine if
the miter is closely or widely spaced.
Indicates when straight pipes are seam welded and affects the SIF calculations for that pipe
section due to seam welded fabrication. This option is only available when IGE/TD/12 is active.
Specifies the pressure design strain. This is an optional entry, used with the pressure stiffening
calculation.
For the BS 7159 Code, this entry is the material Design Strain, îd.
Identifies the cold modulus of elasticity. Used with the pressure stiffening calculation. This is an
optional entry.
Controls the pressure stiffening effects on elbows. Pressure stiffening has its most significant
effect in larger diameter bends adjacent to sensitive equipment (compressors). Including
pressure stiffening where it is not included by default draws more of the system moment to the
nozzle adjacent to the bend.
This option is controlled using the CAESAR II setup file but is most commonly left to the default
condition. The default is different for each piping code because some codes mention pressure
stiffening explicitly, while others do not. Available options are:
Yes
Include pressure stiffening.
No
Remove pressure stiffening.
Default
Follow the piping code default.

Trunnion Tab
There are limits that must be satisfied before SIFs can be calculated on trunnions. These limits
come directly from the paper by Hankinson, Budlong and Albano.
Where:
t = Wall thickness of the trunnion
T = Wall thickness of the bend
d = Outside diameter of the trunnion
D = Outside diameter of the bend
To review the SIFs for a bend that does not have a trunnion, do not enter
values for the trunnion-related input fields on the Trunnion tab.
Topics
Outside Diameter ........................................................................... 857
Wall Thickness ............................................................................... 857
Stress Concentration Factor .......................................................... 858
Stress Concentrations and Intensification ..................................... 858
Specifies the staunchion outside diameter. This is an optional entry, used only if there is a
staunchion or dummy leg attached to the bend. If you define Staunchion OD, you must also
define Wall Thickness.
The stress intensification factors for dummy legs is from the paper: "Stress Indices for Piping
Elbows with Trunnion attachments for Moment and Axial Loads.", PVP Vol. 129, 1987.
The equation (1.7)i = (C2)(K2 is used to get from the calculated (C2) coefficients to the stress
intensification factor (i). If you do not define a value for the stress concentration factor, it defaults
to 2.0.
Designates the staunchion wall thickness. This is an optional entry, used only if there is a
staunchion or dummy leg attached to the bend.
The stress intensification factors for dummy legs are from the paper: "Stress Indices for Piping
Elbows with Trunnion attachments for Moment and Axial Loads.", PVP Vol. 129, 1987.
The equation (1.7)i = (C2)(K2) is used to get from the calculated (C2) coefficients to the stress
to 2.0.

The equation (1.7)i = (C2)(K2) is used to get from the calculated (C2) coefficients to the stress
to 2.0.
Designates the stress intensification calculation for bends with trunnions. It is based on the
relationship between the ASME NB stress indices C2, K2, and the B31 code i factor or stress
intensification factor. That relationship has long been taken to be
2 2
Where:
m = multiplier, usually either 1.7 or 2.
i = B31 stress intensification factor
C2 = ASME NB secondary stress index
K2 = ASME NB peak stress index
The peak stress index (K2
the ratio of the highest point stress at an intensification (or an elbow) and the nominal local
computed stress at the same point. Peak stresses typically only exist in a very small volume of
material, on the order of fractions of the wall thickness of the part.
Because most piping components are formed without crude notches, gross imperfections or
other anomalies, the peak stress index is kept well in control. Where a smooth transition radius
is provided which is at least t/2, and where (t) is the characteristic thickness of the part, the peak
stress index is typically taken as 1.0. At unfinished welds, sockets, and where no transition
radius is provided, the peak stress index approaches values of 2.0.
If you enter a trunnion (where there will be a weld between the trunnion and the
elbow), and you do not enter a stress concentration factor, CAESAR II assumes a stress
concentration factor of 2.0.
WRC 107 (537)/297/PD5500 Vessel/Nozzle Stresses

Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > WRC 107(537)/297/PD5500
Main window menu: Analysis > WRC 107(537)/297/PD5500

Calculates stresses in vessels due to attached piping. The software opens the WRC 107/297
window.
The module allows multiple analyses to be saved inside the same file. The Job Explorer lists
each analysis contained in the job, sorted by analysis type: WRC-107 (537) or
WRC-297/PD5500. The items in the list are created by combining the item description and the
item number, which can be subsequently changed in the data input window. The Loads pane,
which contains a data input grid, displays the selected analysis type.
The following commands are available on the WRC 107/297 toolbar.
Defines a data set as a WRC-107 (537) analysis.
Defines a data set as a WRC-297/PD5500 analysis.
Starts the analysis and displays the results in the WRC 107/297 window.

Performs the initial WRC 107 calculation and summation and sends the result to
Removes an analysis from the job.
To add a new analysis to the job, click the corresponding analysis type, WRC 107 (537) or WRC
297 (PD5500), on the toolbar. You can remove an analysis from the job by selecting it in the
Job Explorer, and then clicking Delete Selected Items on the toolbar. To display an
analysis in the Loads pane, select it from the list in the Job Explorer.
The analysis results and the graphical representation display on the Analysis and Drawing tabs
on the right side of the Loads pane. The data that displays on both of these tabs automatically
updates after each change in the Loads pane, even if they are hidden.
The following example shows a sample analysis report.
Nozzle curves in WRC Bulletin 107 cover typical applications of nozzles in vessels or
piping. If any of the interpolation parameters fall outside the limits of the available curves,
CAESAR II uses the last curve value in the appropriate WRC table.
Topics
WRC Bulletin 107(537) .................................................................. 861
WRC Bulletin 297 .......................................................................... 883

WRC Bulletin 107(537)

The Welding Research Council Bulletin 107 (WRC 107) has been used extensively since 1965
to estimate local stresses in vessel/attachment junctions. There are three editions of the WRC
107 bulletin available in the software. You can set the default using Tools > Configure/Setup.
For more information about the options available in the editor, see Configuration Editor (on page
55).
In 2010, WRC Bulletin 537 was released. According to the foreword of WRC Bulletin
537, "WRC 537 provides exactly the same content in a more useful and clear format. It is not an
update or a revision of 107." CAESAR II uses the graphs from Bulletin 107. Bulletin 537 simply
provides equations in place of the curves found in Bulletin 107.
WRC Bulletin 107 provides an analytical tool to evaluate the vessel stresses in the immediate
vicinity of a nozzle. You can use this method to compute the stresses at both the inner and outer
surfaces of the vessel wall, and report the stresses in the longitudinal and circumferential axes
of the vessel/nozzle intersection. The convention adopted by WRC 107 to define the applicable
orientations of the applied loads and stresses for both spherical and cylindrical vessels are
shown below.
WRC 107 Module Geometry for a Sphere WRC 107 Axis Convention for a Cylinder
Spherical Shells Cylindrical Shells
Defining WRC Axes: Defining WRC Axes:

P-axis: Along nozzle centerline and positive P-axis: Along nozzle centerline and positive
entering vessel. entering vessel.
M1-axis: Perpendicular to nozzle centerline MC-axis: Along vessel centerline and
along convenient global axis. positive to correspond with any parallel
global axis.
M2-axis: Cross P-axis into M1 axis and the
result is M2-axis. M2-axis: Cross the P-axis with MC axis and
result is ML-axis.

Defining WRC Stress Points: Defining WRC Stress Points:

u: Upper, stress on outside of vessel wall at u: Upper, stress on outside of vessel wall at
junction. junction.
l: Lower, stress on inside of vessel at junction. l: Lower, stress on inside of vessel at
junction.
A: Position on vessel at junction along negative
M1 axis. A: Position on vessel at junction along
negative MC axis.
B: Position on vessel at junction along positive
M2 axis. B: Position on vessel at junction, along
positive MC axis.
C: Position on vessel at junction along positive
M2 axis. C: Position on vessel at junction, along
positive ML axis.
D: Position on vessel at junction along negative
M2 axis. D: Position on vessel at junction, along
negative ML axis.
Shear axis VC is parallel and in
the same direction as the bending axis ML.
Shear axis VL is parallel and in the opposite
direction as the bending axis MC.
The WRC 107/537 convention system has the benefit of being independent of the orientation of
the vessel. All loads and moments are defined locally with respect to the vessel and the nozzle.
The following WRC 107 convention system is used for a cylindrical vessel:
P - Radial load
VC - Circumferential shear load
VL - Longitudinal shear load
MC - Circumferential moment
ML - Longitudinal moment
MT - Torsional moment
The following WRC 107 convention system is used for a spherical vessel:

P - Radial load
V1 - Shear load from points B to A
V2 - Shear load from points D to C
M1 - Moment from points A to B
M2 - Moment from points D to C
WRC 107 is commonly used to conservatively estimate vessel shell stress state at the edge of a
reinforcing pad. The stress state in the vessel wall when the nozzle has a reinforcing pad can be
estimated by considering a solid plug with an outside diameter equal to the O.D. of the
reinforcing pad, subjected to the same nozzle loading.
Before attempting to use WRC 107 to evaluate the stress state of any nozzle-vessel
junction, always verify that the geometric restrictions limiting the application of WRC 107 are not
exceeded. These vary according to the attachment and vessel types. Refer to the WRC 107
bulletin directory for this information.
Using WRC 107 is not recommended when the nozzle is very light or when the parameters in
the WRC 107 data curves are unreasonably exceeded. Output from WRC 107 includes the
figure numbers for the curves accessed, the curve abscissa, and the values retrieved. Check
these outputs against the actual curve in WRC 107 to become familiar with the accuracy of the
stresses calculated. For example, if parameters for a particular problem are always near or past
the end of the figures curve data, then the calculated stresses may not be reliable.
Because the stresses computed by WRC 107 are highly localized, they do not fall immediately
under the B31 code rules as defined by B31.1 or B31.3. However, Appendix 4-1 of ASME
Sectio
approach for dealing with these local stresses. The analysis procedure outlined in the
aforementioned code is used in CAESAR II to perform the stress evaluation. In order to evaluate
the stresses through an elastic analysis, three stress combinations (summations) must be made:
Pm
Pm + Pl + Pb
Pm + Pl + Pb + Q
P is the design pressure of the system. Pm is the general membrane stress due to internal
pressure removed from discontinuities and can be estimated for the vessel wall from the
expression (PD) / (4t) for the longitudinal component and (PD) / (2t) for the hoop component.
The allowable for Pm is kSmh, where Smh is the allowable stress intensity. The value of k can be
taken from Table AD-150.1 of the code, which ranges from 1.0 for sustained loads to 1.2 for
sustained plus wind loads or sustained plus earthquake loads. P l is the local membrane stress at
the junction due to the sustained piping loads. Pb is the local bending stress (and is zero at the
nozzle to vessel connections according to Section VIII, Division 2 of ASME Code). Q is the
secondary stress due to thermal expansion piping loads or the bending stress due to internal

pressure thrust and sustained piping loads. The allowable stress intensity for the second stress
combination is 1.5kSmh, as defined by the Figure 4-130.1 of the Code. Smh is the hot stress
intensity allowable at the given design temperature. Both Pl and Q are calculated by WRC 107.
The third combination defines the range of the stress intensity, and its allowable is limited to
1.5(Smc+Smh).
A summation is provided automatically following the WRC 107 analysis and displays on the
Drawing window within the main WRC 107/297 window. The calculation provides a comparison
of the stress intensities to the entered allowables, along with a corresponding Pass/Fail ruling.
Failed items display in red.

Topics
Item Number .................................................................................. 865
Description ..................................................................................... 865
Analysis Type ................................................................................ 865
Nozzle Node .................................................................................. 865
Attachment Type ............................................................................ 865
Fill Type ......................................................................................... 867
Wall Thickness ............................................................................... 867
Corrosion Allowance ...................................................................... 867
Nozzle Material .............................................................................. 867
Nozzle SCF Option ........................................................................ 868
Reinforcing Pad ............................................................................. 868
Enter the ID number of the item. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that
start at one and increase sequentially.
Enter an alphanumeric description for the nozzle or attachment. The description can be up to 15
characters long. The description is used in results output and in any error displays.
Select WRC 107/537 to indicate the nozzle-vessel junction analysis type.
Enter the operating temperature of the vessel. The temperature is used to determine the
allowable stress of the material from the material database. If the temperature is changed, the
allowable stress of the material at operating temperature changes accordingly.
Enter the nozzle node number used in your piping model. This entry is required to access
calculated loads from the static output.
Select the type of attachment. Select Round for a typical pipe nozzle. Select Square for an
attachment such as square vessel support lug. Select Rectangle for an attachment such as
rectangular vessel support lug. See WRC Bulletin 107 for examples. Each selection displays
additional fields below it that are specific to the attachment type.
If the attachment in question is a pipe nozzle then select Round. WRC 107 also analyzes other
load bearing attachments such as a square or rectangle. An example of a rectangular

attachment is a vessel support lug. Illustrations of these attachments can be seen in WRC
Bulletin 107.
Select the type of diameter to use for the nozzle. Select ID for the inside diameter. Select OD for
the outside diameter.

Enter the diameter of the nozzle, in the displayed units. The diameter should be consistent with
the selection in Diameter Basis (on page 866).
For square or rectangular attachments, enter the value of C1 multiplied by two. WRC 107/537
defines C1 as one-half of the full length of the attachment in the circumferential direction of the
vessel. Therefore, enter the full length of the attachment in the circumferential direction.
For square or rectangular attachments, enter the value of C2 multiplied by two. WRC 107/537
defines C2 as one-half of the full length of the attachment in the longitudinal direction of the
vessel. Therefore, enter the full length of the attachment in the longitudinal direction.
Select Hollow for a hollow attachment and select Solid for a solid attachment. Round-hollow
attachments are converted to round-solid attachments for the cylinder-to-cylinder analysis.
Round-hollow attachments are analyzed on spherical vessels. Rectangular attachments on
spherical shells cannot be analyzed using this method.
Enter the thickness of the nozzle wall at the shell-to-nozzle junction, in the displayed units.
Include any allowances for mill tolerance. For example, for a 12.5% mill tolerance, multiply the
nozzle wall thickness by 0.875 and enter that value. WRC 107/537 analysis uses the wall
thickness.
Enter the corrosion allowance. The software adjusts the actual thickness and the inside
diameter for the corrosion allowance you enter.
Specify the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate code.
1. Click to open the Material Database dialog box.

The software displays the Material Database dialog box, which displays read-only
information about the selected material.
2. Select the material that you want to use from the list.
The software displays the material properties.
3. Click Select to use the material, or click Back to select a different material.
Alternatively, you can type the material name as it appears in the material
specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds in the
material database with a matching name.

Select one of the following methods to calculate the nozzle stress concentration factors.
None
Stress concentration factors are not calculated.
Fillet Radius
The software uses the fillet radius between the nozzle and the vessel shell to calculate the
stress concentration factors Kn and Kb according to Appendix B of the WRC 107 bulletin.
Enter the fillet radius value in Fillet Radius Between Vessel and Nozzle. A value of 0 sets
Kn and Kb to 1.0.
Kn/Kb
The software uses the stress concentration factors K n and Kb in a fatigue analysis. Enter the
Kn and Kb values in Nozzle Kn and Nozzle Kb.
Select True when the nozzle has a pad. Select False if there is no pad.
For WRC 107/537, the software performs two separate analyses:
Using the nozzle OD and the vessel wall thickness plus the reinforcing pad thickness.
Taking the pad into account by making the nozzle OD equal to the reinforcing pad diameter
and assuming a sold attachment.
Enter the thickness of the reinforcing pad. For WRC 107/537 analysis, the vessel thickness
includes the pad thickness.
If the attachment is square or rectangular instead of a nozzle, enter C11P. In WRC 107, C11 is
defined as one-half of the full length of the reinforcing pad in the circumferential direction of the
vessel.
If the attachment is square or rectangular instead of a nozzle, enter C22. In WRC 107, C22 is
defined as one-half of the full length of the reinforcing pad in the longitudinal direction of the
vessel.

Select one of the following methods to calculate the reinforcing pad stress concentration factors.
None
Stress concentration factors are not calculated.
Fillet Radius
The software uses the fillet radius between the reinforcing pad and the vessel shell to
calculate the stress concentration factors Kn and Kb according to Appendix B of the WRC
107 bulletin. Enter the fillet radius value in Fillet Radius Between Vessel and Pad. A value
of 0 sets Kn and Kb to 1.0.
Kn/Kb
The software uses the stress concentration factors K n and Kb in a fatigue analysis. Enter the
Kn and Kb values in Nozzle Kn and Nozzle Kb.
Topics
Vessel Node .................................................................................. 869
Vessel Type ................................................................................... 869
Diameter Basis .............................................................................. 870
Diameter ........................................................................................ 870
Wall Thickness ............................................................................... 870
Vessel Material .............................................................................. 870
Enter the node number that corresponds to the vessel node in your model. Since the vessel(s)
may or may not be modeled in the analysis, this value is optional and is recorded for your
reference only.
Select the type of vessel, either Cylindrical or Spherical.

Select the type of diameter to use for the vessel. Select ID for the inside diameter and OD for
Enter the diameter of the pressure vessel in the displayed units. The diameter should be
consistent with the selection in Diameter Basis (on page 870).
Enter the thickness of the pressure vessel wall, in the displayed units. This thickness is
measured at the intersection of the nozzle and the vessel.
You can type the wall thickness as an equation to account for mill tolerance. For example, if
the mill tolerance is 12.5%, type "<vessel wall thickness value> * 0.875".
The software modifies this value if a value for Corrosion Allowance is defined.


Topics
Internal Pressure ........................................................................... 871
Occasional Pressure ...................................................................... 871
Convention System ........................................................................ 871
Include Pressure Thrust................................................................. 874
Loads ............................................................................................. 874
Z-Axis Vertical ................................................................................ 878
Enter the system internal design pressure (P). WRC 107/537 only analyzes internal pressure
and the value must be positive. The pressure stress equations used are:
2 2 2
For the spherical case, the membrane stress due to internal pressure uses the Lamé equation to
calculate the stress at both the upper and lower surfaces of the vessel at the edge of the
attachment.
Enter the difference between the peak pressure of the system and Internal Pressure (on page
871) (the system design pressure). The value must be positive. The value is added to the
system design pressure to calculate the primary membrane stress due to occasional loads.
Select WRC 107 to define local forces and moments according to WRC 107 conventions. Select
Global to define local forces and moments in global coordinates. The selected convention is
applied to the vessel, the nozzle, and the loads.
For both conventions, enter values for Sustained Loads, Expansion Loads, and Occasional
Loads. The software compares stress intensities to allowable stresses based on the value for
Vessel Material selected on the Vessel tab. When you switch convention systems, the software
converts loads from one system to the other.
WRC 107/537 Load Conventions (on page 872)
Global Load and Direction Conventions (on page 872)

The WRC 107/537 convention system has the benefit of being independent of the orientation of
the vessel. All loads and moments are defined locally with respect to the vessel and the nozzle.
The following WRC 107 convention system is used for a cylindrical vessel:
P - Radial load
VC - Circumferential shear load
VL - Longitudinal shear load
MC - Circumferential moment
ML - Longitudinal moment
The following WRC 107 convention system is used for a spherical vessel:
P - Radial load
V1 - Shear load from points B to A
V2 - Shear load from points D to C
M1 - Moment from points A to B
M2 - Moment from points D to C
The global convention system has the benefit of using the global coordinate system also used
by other analyses, such as pipe stress analysis. As a result, nozzle or attachment loads from
another analysis can be used directly in the WRC 107/537 or FEA analysis.
The following global convention system is used for a cylindrical vessel:

The vessel direction is +Y

direction
The nozzle direction is +X
direction (towards the vessel)
Direction cosines of the vessel
are:
VX - 0
VY - 1
VZ - 0
Direction cosines of the nozzle
are:
NX - 1
NY - 0
NZ - 0
The following global convention system is used for a spherical vessel:
The direction of a spherical

vessel is from points B to A
The software uses these direction vectors to transfer the global forces and moments from the
global convention into the traditional WRC107 convention.
Click to import nozzle or attachment load data from a CAESAR II .C2 or ._P file.

Select to include the pressure thrust force (P*A) in the nozzle radial load. Pressure thrust is
added to Internal Pressure and Occasional Pressure.
This value is only available when WRC 107/537 is selected for Analysis Type on the
Home/Nozzle tab.
For more information on pressure thrust, see the July 2001 COADE Newsletter
http://www.coade.com/Uploads/mechanical-engineering-news/jul01.pdf.
Enter the forces and moments acting on the nozzle or attachment. A stress summation is
performed and stress intensities are checked based on the different load cases.
The type of loads and the available load sets depend on the Convention System selection
(WRC 107 or Global).
When WRC 107 is selected for Analysis Type, you can enter values in the following load sets:
Sustained Loads - (SUS) Primary loads, typically weight + pressure + forces.
Expansion Loads - (EXP) Secondary thermal expansion loads.
Occasional Loads - (OCC) Irregularly occurring loads such as wind loads, seismic loads,
and water hammer.
The software plots one set of loads at a time and only that set can have values. For
example, to calculate Expansion Loads, values for Sustained Loads and Occasional Loads
must be cleared.
When WRC 107 is selected for Convention System, the following forces and moments are
entered:
Radial Load P (on page 875)
Longitudinal Shear VL (on page 875)
Circumferential Shear VC (on page 876)
Torsional Moment MT (on page 877)
Circumferential Moment MC (on page 877)
Longitudinal Moment ML (on page 878)
When Global is selected for Convention System, forces and moments are entered as X, Y,
and Z vector components with respect to the global coordinate system: Global Force Fx,
Global Force Fy, Global Force Fz, Global Moment Mx, Global Moment My, and Global
Moment Mz.

Enter the radial load P on the nozzle or attachment. Positive load tries to "push" the nozzle while
a negative load tries to "pull" the nozzle. The software does not account for the effect of
pressure thrust when loads are entered in the WRC convention, so add the appropriate portion
of thrust load with the radial load. Use the conventions below.
Enter the longitudinal shear load VL. If the vessel is spherical then enter the shear load V1 from
B to A. Use the conventions below.

Enter the circumferential shear load VC. If the vessel is spherical then enter the shear load V2
from D to C. Use the conventions below.

Enter the torsional moment MT. Use the conventions below.
Enter the circumferential moment MC. If the vessel is spherical then enter the moment M1 about
the B-axis. Use the conventions below.

Enter the longitudinal moment ML. If the vessel is spherical then enter the moment M2 about the
C-axis. Use the conventions below.
Select True if the Z-axis is vertical for the Global convention system.
Topics
WRC-107 Version .......................................................................... 879
Include Pressure Stress Indices per Div. 2 .................................... 879
Compute Pressure Stress per WRC-368 (No Ext Loads) ............. 879
Base Hoop Stress On .................................................................... 880

Select a version of the WRC 107/537 bulletin. Select August 1965, March 1979, or March 1979
Use B1 and B2.
March 1979 Use B1 and B2 is likely to be the most accurate option. It typically
produces slightly higher stresses than the other versions. These stresses more closely match
theoretical results. The stress computation method was also adjusted to compute B1 and B2
maximum stresses that do not lie on the stress points A, B, C, or D. This is referred to as
calculation of the off-angle maximums.
Enter True to include the ASME Sec. VIII Div. 2 Table AD-560.7 pressure stress indices in a
fatigue analysis. This option should only be used if you are performing a fatigue analysis. Check
ASME VIII Div.2 paragraph AD-160 to see if the fatigue effect needs to be considered. The
pressure stress indices are used for estimating the peak stress intensity due to internal
pressure.
Peak stress intensity due to external loads is included in the analysis when values are
entered in Nozzle Kn and Nozzle Kb.
For normal (elastic) analysis, do not select this option or enter values in Nozzle Kn and
Nozzle Kb.
The software does not perform the complete fatigue analysis of Section VIII Div.2 Appendix
4 and 5 rules. Instead, the value of peak stress intensity is reported for fatigue effect
comparison. For more information, see the June 2000 COADE newsletter
Enter True to compute pressure stresses in the shell and nozzle according to WRC 368. WRC
368 provides a method for calculating stresses in a cylinder-to-cylinder intersection (such as
cylinder-to-nozzle) due to internal pressure and pressure thrust loading.
Using WRC 368 with WRC 107/297 is not accurate for calculating the combined stress from
pressure and external loads. So, this option is only available when the attachment type is
round and when no external loads are specified.
For more information on WRC 368 and pressure thrust, see Modeling of Internal Pressure
and Thrust Loads on Nozzles Using WRC-368 in the July 2001 COADE Newsletter

Indicates how the value of hoop stress should be calculated.

ID
Compute hoop stress according to Pd/2t, where d is the internal diameter of the pipe.
OD
Compute hoop stress according to Pd/2t, where d is the outer diameter of the pipe.
Mean
Compute hoop stress according to Pd/2t, where d is the average or mean diameter of the
pipe.
Lamé
Compute maximum hoop stress according to Lamé's solution: s = P(Ro2+Ri2)/(Ro2-Ri2).
Displays properties for the selected material. You can modify some properties. Doing so only
changes the properties locally. It does not modify the database.
Properties available in this dialog box vary depending on the command used.
Indicates a unique identification number for the material.
Displays the ASME code material specification for the selected item.
Enter the yield stress for the material at the operating temperature. You can find these values in
the ASME Code, Section 2 Part D; they are not stored in the material database. If the yield
stress at operating temperature is significantly different than the yield stress at ambient
temperature, and if some of the items in the model make use of yield stress, such as vessel
legs, then you should carefully check and enter this value.
When you select a material from the material database, the software looks up the material's
operating yield stress in the yield stress database and automatically fills in this value. If there are
duplicate entries in the yield stress database, then the software displays a message. You can
then select from among the duplicates.

Enter the allowable stress for the element material at operating temperature. The operating
temperature for most vessels is defined to be the same as the design metal temperature for the
internal pressure. You can find this value in the ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B,
and 3.
If you enter a valid material name in Material Input, the software searches its database and
determines the allowable stress for the material at ambient temperature, and populates this field.
The software also determines the allowable stress when you select a material name
from the Material Selection window.
Enter the allowable stress for the element material at ambient temperature. The ambient
temperature for most vessels will be 70° F, 100° F, or 30° C. You can find this value in the
ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3.
The software also determines the allowable stress when you select a material name
from the Material Selection window.
Enter the nominal density of the material. The software uses this value to calculate component
weights for this analysis. The typical density for carbon steel is 0.2830 lbs/in 3.
Enter the thickness for the P number.

Table UCS-57 of the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 lists the maximum thickness above
which full radiography is required for welded seams. This thickness is based on the P number
for the material listed in the allowable stress tables of the Code.
If a seam is partially radiographed and the required thickness exceeds the P number
thickness, CAESAR II automatically changes the joint efficiency to 1.0 as stated in the Code.
Enter the external pressure curve or chart name to calculate the B value for all external pressure
and buckling calculations. It is important that you enter the name correctly. If you enter a valid
material name in the Material Input field, the software searches its database and determines
the allowable stress for the material at ambient temperature.

Select one of the following:

Curve A - D - UCS-66 curves
Not a Carbon Steel
By default, the material database selects the non-normalized curve. Select Is the
Material Normalized? or click Normalized to use the normalized curve for ASME material.
Adjust the curve if you are using normalized material produced to fine grain practice.
The elastic modulus reference number is a value that points to or corresponds to a set of data
set forth in ASME Section II Part D, tables TM-1, 2 and so on. Unfortunately, many materials
have a composition or UNS number that does not match the criteria of what is supplied in the
ASME Code. In these cases, the reference number will be brought in as zero. If this happens,
you will need to enter in an appropriate value.
The thermal expansion reference number is a value that points to or corresponds to a set of
data set forth in ASME Section II Part D, tables TE-1, 2 and so on. Unfortunately, many
materials have a composition or UNS number that does not match the criteria of what is
supplied in the ASME Code. In these cases, the reference number will be brought in as zero. If
this happens, you will need to enter in an appropriate value. Thermal expansion coefficients are
important especially if you are analyzing a heat exchanger.
Opens the Yield Stress Record dialog box, which displays yield stress details of the selected
material.
Click to use the ASME normalized curve for the material. For more information, see UCS-66
Curve.
The following material properties apply when the calculation is performed per PD 5500 Annex G.

Enter the thickness limit for which the stresses apply.
Enter the tensile strength designated as Rm in the material specification.
Enter the minimum yield strength of the material. The minimum yield strength is equal to 0.2% or
1.0% proof stress at operating temperature.
Enter the nominal density of the material. The software uses this value to calculate component
weights for this analysis. The typical density for carbon steel is 0.2830 lbs/in 3.
Enter the S value per PD:5500 to determine whether the material is carbon or stainless steel.
WRC Bulletin 297

Published in August of 1984, Welding Research Council (WRC) 297 attempts to extend the
existing analysis tools for the evaluation of stresses in cylinder-to-cylinder intersections. WRC
297 differs from the widely-used WRC 107 primarily in that WRC 297 is designed for larger d/D
ratios (up to 0.5). WRC 297 also computes stresses in the nozzle and the vessel, whereas WRC
107 only computes stresses in the vessel.
The CAESAR II WRC 297 module provides input tabs for vessel data, nozzle data, and imposed
loads. WRC 297 supports one set of loads. You can enter the loads in either global CAESAR II
convention or in the local WRC 297 coordinate system. If the global CAESAR II convention is
selected, vessel and nozzle direction cosines must be present in order to convert the loads into
the local WRC 297 convention as discussed in the WRC 297 bulletin.
equations, multiplied by the stress intensification factors found in ASME Section VIII, Div. 2,
Table AD-560.7. The pressure stress calculation is not a part of the WRC 297 bulletin but is
added here for your convenience.
CAESAR II also uses, through Input > Piping, the nozzle flexibility calculations
described in WRC 297. For more information, see Piping Input Reference (on page 112).
After you provide the necessary input, CAESAR II calculates the stress components at the four
locations on the vessel around the nozzle and also the corresponding locations on the nozzle.
Stresses are calculated on both the outer and inner surfaces (upper and lower). These stress
components are resolved into stress intensities at these 16 points around the connection. For
more information on the allowable limits for these stresses and output processing, see WRC
Bulletin 107(537) (on page 861).

Topics
Item Number .................................................................................. 884
Description ..................................................................................... 884
PD5500 Annex G ........................................................................... 884
Design Pressure ............................................................................ 886
Enter the ID number of the item. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that
start at one and increase sequentially.
Enter an alphanumeric description for the nozzle or attachment. The description can be up to 15
characters long. The description is used in results output and in any error displays.
Enter True to perform analysis according to British Standard Published Document 5500 Annex
G instead of Welding Research Council Bulletin 297. The software computes stresses in
cylindrical or spherical vessels with or without reinforcing pads. Only round hollow nozzle
geometries are computed.
When PD5500 Annex G is True, the program automatically converts loads into the
coordinate systems used by each method. When PD5500 Annex G is True, you can modify
values such as:
Stress concentration factor at the attachment edge
Stress concentration factor at the pad edge
Nozzle projection
Enter the allowable stress intensity factor for combined membrane and bending stress at the
attachment edge or pad edge. This factor is multiplied by the allowable stress f to obtain a
maximum allowable stress for the membrane stress plus bending stress. These stresses are in
rows 27, 28 and 29 in the printout samples in PD 5500 Annex G.
At the attachment edge (nozzle neck), this factor normally has a maximum value of 2.25.
At the edge of the pad, this factor is normally 2.0.

Enter True to compute membrane stress at the attachment edge and enter the allowable stress
intensity factor for it. Also enter a value for Factor for Membrane.
The example in Annex W does not compute the membrane stress at the attachment edge.
You must check the membrane stress before entering a value for Vessel Wall Thickness.
According to Annex G, the membrane stress at the attachment edge contains intensified
stresses due to the presence of the hole.
Enter the allowable stress intensity factor for the membrane at the attachment edge. This factor
is multiplied by the allowable stress f to obtain maximum allowable stress for the membrane.
These stresses are in rows 32, 33 and 34 in the printout samples in PD 5500 Annex W.
At the attachment edge, this factor normally has a value higher than Factor for Membrane (Pad
Edge).
This value is only available when Print the Membrane Stress (on page 885) is True.
Enter the allowable stress intensity factor for the membrane at the pad edge. This factor is
multiplied by the allowable stress f to obtain maximum allowable stress for the membrane.
These stresses are in rows 32, 33 and 34 in the printout samples in PD 5500 Annex W.
At the edge of the reinforcement pad, this factor normally has a maximum value of 1.2.
If you would like to check the membrane stress at the attachment edge, see Print the
Membrane Stress and Factor for Membrane (Attachment Edge).

If the nozzle has a projection inside of the vessel, enter that length. This value is used to
determine the pressure stress intensification factor from the Cers/eps graphs in Section 3 of the
PD 5500 Code. All of the curves for protruding and flush nozzles are included for analysis.
The software uses the smaller of the inside projection and the thickness limit with no pad to
calculate the area available in the inward nozzle. You can safely enter a large number such as
six or twelve inches if the nozzle continues into the vessel a long distance.
Enter the length of the vessel on which the nozzle lies. For vessels without stiffeners or cones,
use the entire vessel length including the heads. This value is used along with Offset from Left
Tangent Line to compute the equivalent length for off-center loading.
Enter in the distance between the centerline of the nozzles and the left tangent line or
appropriate line of support. This value is used in conjunction with Stiffened Length of Vessel
Section to compute the equivalent length for off-center loading.
Enter True if the nozzle is located within the spherical portion of an elliptical or torispherical
head or is in a spherical head. The software accesses the Annex G curves used to calculate
factors for nozzles connected to spheres.
If you enter this data manually, enter the spherical diameter. This is especially
important for nozzles located in elliptical heads.
Enter the operating temperature of the vessel. The temperature is used to determine the
allowable stress of the material from the material database. If the temperature is changed, the
allowable stress of the material at operating temperature changes accordingly.
Enter the design pressure of the pressure vessel, in the displayed units. Use a design pressure
applicable to the following pressure stress equations:
The design pressure is used to calculate membrane stresses on the nozzle and vessel wall
and axial pressure thrust.
For a spherical vessel, the same longitudinal stress equation is used for membrane stress
due to internal pressure.

Topics
Vessel Diameter Basis (WRC 297) ............................................... 887
Vessel Diameter (WRC 297) ......................................................... 887
Wall Thickness ............................................................................... 887
Vessel Material .............................................................................. 888
Select the type of diameter to use for the pressure vessel. Select ID for the inside diameter and
OD for the outside diameter.
The software uses Vessel Diameter Basis, Wall Thickness, and Corrosion
Allowance to determine the mean radius.
Enter the diameter of the pressure vessel, in the displayed units. The diameter should be
consistent with the selection in Vessel Diameter Basis (WRC 297) (on page 887).
Enter the thickness of the pressure vessel wall, in the displayed units. This thickness is
measured at the intersection of the nozzle and the vessel.
You can type the wall thickness as an equation to account for mill tolerance. For example, if
the mill tolerance is 12.5%, type "<vessel wall thickness value> * 0.875".
The software modifies this value if there is a defined value for Corrosion Allowance.


Topics
Reinforcing Pad ............................................................................. 888
Pad Material ................................................................................... 889
Attachment Type ............................................................................ 889
Wall Thickness (WRC 297 Nozzle) ............................................... 891
Corrosion Allowance (WRC 297 Nozzle) ....................................... 891
Nozzle Material .............................................................................. 891
Enter True if there is a reinforcing pad between the vessel and the nozzle, and then enter the
pad values in Thickness and Diameter.
Enter the thickness of the reinforcing pad. WRC 297 does not directly analyze the reinforcing
pad. Instead, the vessel thickness includes the pad thickness. This is analyzed in a consistent
manner with the WRC 107 pad method.
Enter the reinforcing pad diameter along the surface of the vessel. This value is used when the
software calculates stresses at the edge of the reinforcing pad.

If the attachment is square or rectangular instead of a nozzle, enter Cyp, the full width of the
square or rectangular reinforcing pad in the circumferential direction of the vessel. At the
junction of the attachment with the vessel, the pad is converted to an equivalent round pad with
the following outside radius:
This value is only used when PD5500 Annex G is True on the Home tab.
If the attachment is square or rectangular instead of a nozzle, enter Cxp, the full length of the
square or rectangular reinforcing pad in the longitudinal direction of the vessel. At the junction of
the attachment with the vessel, the pad is converted to an equivalent round pad with the
following outside radius:

Select the type of attachment. For WRC 297 analysis, Round is the only option. For PD 5500
Annex G analysis, select Round, Square, or Rectangular.

Select the type of diameter to use for the nozzle. Select ID for the inside diameter. Select OD for
Enter the diameter of the nozzle, in the displayed units. The diameter should be consistent with
the selection in Diameter Basis for Nozzle.
Select if the attachment makes a hole in the pressure vessel. The software then applies a stress
concentration factor. Not all attachments cut a hole. For example, a nozzle cuts a hole, but a
trunnion does not.
This value is only used for ASME analysis, when PD5500 Annex G (on page 884) is
False on the Home tab.
If the attachment is square or rectangular instead of a nozzle, enter Cx, the full length of the
attachment in the longitudinal direction of the vessel. At the junction of the attachment with the
vessel, the attachment is converted to an equivalent round attachment with the following outside
radius:
If the attachment is square or rectangular instead of a nozzle, enter Cy, the full length of the
attachment in the circumferential direction of the vessel. At the junction of the attachment with
the vessel, the attachment is converted to an equivalent round attachment with the following
outside radius:

Enter the thickness of the nozzle wall at the shell-to-nozzle junction, in the displayed units.
Include any allowances for mill tolerance. For example, for a 12.5% mill tolerance, multiply the
nozzle wall thickness by 0.875 and enter that value.
Enter the corrosion allowance for the nozzle. This value typically ranges from 0 to 1/4"
depending on the service and design specifications.

Topics
Include Pressure Thrust................................................................. 892
Use Pressure Stress Indices (Div. 2 AD 560.7)............................. 892
Radial Load (P) .............................................................................. 892
Circumferential Shear (VC)............................................................ 894
Longitudinal Shear (VL) ................................................................. 895
Torsional Moment (MT) ................................................................. 896
Circumferential Moment (MC)........................................................ 897
Longitudinal Moment (ML) ............................................................. 898

Select to add the force due to pressure times internal pipe area to the Radial Load (P) (on page
892).
This option is only available for ASME material when PD5500 Annex G (on page 884) on
the Home tab is False.
A negative axial pressure thrust is subtracted from P.
For more information on pressure thrust, see the July 2001 COADE Newsletter
Select to multiply the nominal pressure stress by the stress indices of paragraph AD 560.7 of
ASME Code Section VIII, Division 2. This calculates the surface stress intensity.
This option is only available for ASME material when PD5500 Annex G on the Home tab is
False.
The calculation of the pressure stress on the nozzle does not use these indices. The
software multiplies the pressure stress on the nozzle by a factor of 1.2.
Enter the axial load P that is trying to push the nozzle into the vessel or pull the nozzle out of the
vessel. Enter this value according to the WRC 107 and PD 5500 conventions below.
In WRC 107, positive loads try to "push" the nozzle while negative loads try to "pull" the
nozzle.
In PD 5500, positive loads try to "pull" the nozzle while negative loads try to "push" the
nozzle.
Axial force does not include the effect of pressure thrust.


Enter the circumferential shear load VC (for WRC 107) or FC (for PD 5500). Enter this value
according to the WRC 107 and PD 5500 conventions below.

Enter the longitudinal shear load VL (for WRC 107) or FL (for PD 5500). Enter this value
according to the WRC 107 and PD 5500 conventions below.

Enter the torsional moment MT. Enter this value according to the WRC 107 and PD 5500
conventions below.

Enter the circumferential moment MC or M1. Enter this value according to the WRC 107 and PD
5500 conventions below.

Enter the longitudinal moment ML or M2. Enter this value according to the WRC 107 and PD
5500 conventions below.

Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations

Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > Flanges
Main window menu: Analysis > Flanges
Performs flange stress and leakage calculations. There are two generally accepted ways to
calculate stress and one way to estimate leakage for flanges. The stress calculation methods
are from the following sources:
ASME Section VIII
ANSI B16.5 Rating Tables
The leakage calculations are also based on the B16.5 rating table approach. Leakage is a
function of the relative stiffnesses of the flange, gasket and bolting. Using the B16.5 estimated
stress calculations to predict leakage does not consider the gasket type, stiffness of the flange,
or the stiffness of the bolting. Using B16.5 to estimate leakage makes the tendency to leak
proportional to the allowable stress in the flange. A flange with a higher allowable is able to
resist higher moments without leakage. Leakage is very weakly tied to allowable stress, if at all.
Flanges attempts to improve upon the solution of this difficult analysis problem. Equations
model the flexibility of the annular flange plate and its ability to rotate under moment, axial force,
and pressure. The results compare favorably with three-dimensional finite element analysis of
the flange junction. These correlations assume that the distance between the inside diameter of
the flange and the center of the effective gasket loading diameter is smaller than the distance
between the effective gasket loading diameter and the bolt circle diameter. In other words, that
(G-ID) < (BC-G), where, G is the effective gasket loading diameter, ID is the inside diameter of
the flange, and BC is the diameter of the bolt circle.
The following trends apply:
Thinner flanges have a greater the tendency to leak.
Larger diameter flanges have a greater tendency to leak.
Stiffer gaskets have a greater tendency to leak.
Leakage is a function of bolt tightening stress.
To begin working with the flange stress and leakage calculations, specify a new job name in the
New Job Name Specification dialog box or click Browse to navigate to an existing job file.

The software opens the Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations window.
Input for the flange stress and leakage calculations is divided into four input tabs:
Flange Tab (on page 900) - Describes flange geometry.
Bolts and Gasket Tab (on page 904) - Defines data for the bolts and gasket.
Material Data Tab (on page 914) - Defines material and stress-related data.
Loads Tab (on page 916) - Describes the imposed loads.
Flange Tab
The following options are used to describe flange geometry.

Topics
Flange Type ................................................................................... 901
Flange Class .................................................................................. 901
Flange Grade ................................................................................. 901
Flange Outside Diameter (A) ......................................................... 902
Flange Inside Diameter (B) ............................................................ 902
Flange Thickness (t) ...................................................................... 903
Flange Face OD or Lapjt Cnt ......................................................... 903
Flange Face ID or Lapjt Cnt ID ...................................................... 903
Small End Hub Thickness.............................................................. 904
Large End Hub Thickness ............................................................. 904
Hub Length .................................................................................... 904
Specifies the flange type. Selecting a flange type is required only if an ASME stress calculation
for the flange is needed. If you are performing only a leakage check, you can omit this entry.
Identifies the ANSI B16.5 or API 605 flange rating, (class).

B16.5 valid classes are 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500, and 2500
API 605 valid classes are 75, 150, 300, 400, 600, and 900
B16.5 specifications govern up to, and including 24-inch pipe; API 605 specifications govern
nominal pipe sizes 26- though 60-inch.
Use the flange rating entry to access the B16.5 or API pressure/temperature rating table. The
software includes minimum and maximum allowed ratings for all different materials available in
the tables. You can see minimum and maximum computed allowed equivalent pressures and
safety factors in this data. API 605 does not have minimum and maximum data. The minimum
and maximum data is the same when the nominal English pipe size is greater than 24-inches.
Specifies the grade of the attached flange. The grade of the attached flange is a value such as
1.1, 1.2, or 2.1. It can be found in the ANSI Standard B16.5 code for flanges and fittings. The
flange grade is used in conjunction with the flange class and design temperature to look up the
allowable pressure rating for the ANSI flange.
If the grade is 1.10, then type 1.101. If you are designing a custom flange and do not want the
printout for the allowable pressure, then type 0.

Defines the flange outside diameter if an ASME stress calculation for the flange is needed. You
can omit this entry if only a leakage check is to be performed.
This value is required only for ASME stress calculations. It is available in the flange
ANSI B16.5/API dimensional database. You can access the flange database properties by
pressing Ctrl+F from any data input field in the Flange tab.
Specifies the inner diameter of the flange. For integral type flanges, this value will also be the
inner pipe diameter. This value is referred to as "B" in the ASME code.
The flange inside diameter is contained in the flange database. The software looks up
this value whenever you press Ctrl+ F in the Flange tab. The flange database contains
properties of ANSI B16.5 and API 605 flanges.
For inside diameters not specified in B16.5, the matching ID of standard wall pipe is used. Verify
this dimension based on the actual application and use of the flange. The following table shows
pipe inside diameters for various nominal sizes. All sizes are shown in inches.
Nominal Size Matching Inside Pipe Diameter
STD Sch 40 Sch 60 Sch 80
1 1.049 1.049 - 0.957
2 2.067 2.067 - 1.939
3 3.068 3.068 - 2.900
4 4.026 4.046 - 3.826
5 5.047 5.047 - 4.813
6 6.065 6.065 - 5.671
8 7.981 7.981 7.813 7.625
10 10.020 10.020 9.750 9.564
12 12.000 11.938 11.626 11.376
14 13.250 13.126 12.814 12.500
16 15.250 15.000 14.688 14.314
18 17.250 16.876 16.500 16.126

20 19.250 18.814 18.376 17.938
24 23.250 22.626 22.064 21.564
Specifies the thickness of the flange.

The flange thickness is contained in the flange database. The software looks up this value
whenever you press CTRL+F while working in the Flange tab. The flange database contains
properties of ANSI B16.5 and API 605 flanges.
Indicates one of the following:

For all except lap joints
The outer diameter of the flange face. The software uses the minimum of the flange face
outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange contact point
but uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that the bolts
do not interfere with the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID and
the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket. This value is required for
calculating the contact gasket width and the effective gasket diameter, G.
For lap joints
The lap joint contact outer diameter. This is usually the flange face outer diameter. For
additional details, see ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 2, Figure 2-4, Sketches 1
and 1A.
Indicates one of the following:

For all except lap joints
The inner diameter of the flange face. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID
and the gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket. This value is required for
calculating the contact gasket width and the effective gasket diameter, G.
For lap joints
The lap joint contact inner diameter. This is usually the flange inner diameter. For additional
details, see ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 2, Figure 2-4, Sketches 1 and 1A.

Specifies the thickness of the small end of the hub. This value is referred to as g0 in the ASME
code.
For weld neck flange types, this is the thickness of the shell at the end of the flange. For slip on
flange geometries, this is the thickness of the hub at the small end. For flange geometries
without hubs, this thickness can be entered as zero, or omitted.
Specify the thickness of the large end of the hub. This value is referred to as g1 in the ASME
code. It can be the same as Small Hub Thickness.
For flange geometries without hubs, this thickness can be entered as zero, or left blank.
pressing Ctrl+F from any data cell in the Flange tab.
Defines the hub length. This value is referred to as h in the ASME code. For flange geometries
without hubs, this length can be entered as zero, or left blank.
When analyzing an optional type flange that is welded at the hub end, enter the hub length as
the leg of the weld, and include the thickness of the weld in the large end.
When analyzing a flange with no hub, such as a ring flange or a lap joint flange, enter a zero or
leave the field blank for the Hub Length, Small End Hub Thickness, and Large End Hub
Thickness. When designing a loose, ring-type flange that has a fillet weld at the back, enter the
size of a leg of the fillet weld as the large end of the hub.
Bolts and Gasket Tab

The following options are used to define data for the bolts and gasket.

Topics
Bolt Circle Diameter ....................................................................... 905
Number of Bolts ............................................................................. 905
Bolt Diameter ................................................................................. 905
Bolt Initial Tightening Stress .......................................................... 905
Gasket Outer Diameter .................................................................. 906
Gasket Inner Diameter ................................................................... 906
Uncompressed Gasket Thickness ................................................. 907
Effective Gasket Modulus .............................................................. 907
Leak Pressure Ratio ...................................................................... 907
Gasket Seating Stress ................................................................... 909
Nubbin Width or Ring ..................................................................... 911
Facing Sketch ................................................................................ 912
Facing Column ............................................................................... 912
Specifies the bolt circle diameter. This value is the diameter of the circle that passes through the
bolt center.
Specifies the number of bolts.

The number of bolts in standard ANSI B16.5 and API 605 flanges is contained in the
flange database and is accessed by the software whenever you press Ctrl+F.
Specifies the nominal diameter of the bolts. Standard bolt diameters for ANSI B16.5 and API
605 flanges are contained in the flange database and are accessed by the software whenever
you press Ctrl+F.
Specifies the stress induced in the bolt during tightening after the flange has been seated. This
is the stress in the bolt when the system is about to be pressurized and thermally loaded.
If this value is omitted, the software uses the following bolt tightening rule to compute the
tightening stress in the bolt. (In English units: Initial Stress = 45,000/(nominal bolt diameter) 1/2).
This entry is used only in the flexibility model of the flange to estimate the initial compression of
the gasket.

This is a critical item for leakage determination and for computing stresses in the flange. The
ASME Code bases its stress calculations on a predetermined, specified, fixed equation for the
bolt stress. The resulting value is however often not related to the actual tightening stress that
appears in the flange when the bolts are tightened. For this reason, Bolt Initial Tightening
Stress, is used only for the flexibility/leakage determination. The value for the bolt tightening
stress used in the ASME Flange Stress Calculations is as defined by the ASME Code:
If Bolt Initial Tightening Stress is left blank, CAESAR II uses the value
Where 45,000 psi is a constant and d is the nominal diameter of the bolt.
This is a rule of thumb tightening stress that will typically be applied by field personnel tightening
the bolts. This computed value is printed in the output from the Flanges output. Compare this
value to the bolt stress printed in the ASME stress report (also in the output). The
-of-
ASME required stress is entered into the Bolt Initial Tightening Stress field, a comparison of
the leakage safety factors can be made and the sensitivity of the joint to the tightening torque
can be determined. You are strongly encouraged to adjust these numbers to get a feel for the
relationship between all of the factors involved.
Specifies the outer diameter of the gasket. The software uses the minimum of the flange face
outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange contact point, but
uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that the bolts do not
interfere with the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket
ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket.
This value is required for calculating the contact gasket width and the effective gasket diameter,
G.
Specifies the inner diameter of the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID
and the gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket.
G.

Specifies the uncompressed thickness of the gasket. The software uses this value to construct
an elastic compression model of the gasket reaction at the effective gasket diameter.
Specifies the modulus of elasticity of the gasket material that occurs during loading and
unloading of the gasket. Several sources have shown this modulus to be somewhat higher than
the initial tightening modulus for spiral wound metal gaskets. Typical values used for spiral
wound metal gaskets are:
High End: 437500.0
Low End: 347000.0
Typical values are between 300,000 and 400,000 psi for spiral wound gaskets. The
higher the modulus the greater the tendency for the software to predict leakage. Errors on the
high side when estimating this value will lead to a more conservative design.
Specifies the ratio of gasket pressure to internal pressure at the instant when leakage starts
multiplied by a factor of safety. This is termed the "Gasket Factor" in ASME Sect. VIII Div. 1
The following table, extracted from Sect VIII Div. 1 gives gasket factors for some common types
of gaskets.
Gasket Materials and Contact Facings Notes

Table 2-5.1
Gasket Material Gasket Factor Seating Stress

m y (^06)
Self-energizing types (O rings,

metallic elastomer, and other 0. 0.
self-sealing types)
Elastomers without fabric or a

high percent of asbestos fiber:
Below 75A Shore Durometer .50 0.
75A or higher Shore Durometer 1.00 200.
Asbestos with Suitable Binder

1/8" thick 2.00 600.
1/16" thick 2.75 3700.
1/32" thick 3.50 6500.
Elastomers with cotton fabric 1.25 400.


Table 2-5.1

m y (^06)
Elastomers with Asbestos fabric

3 ply 2.25 2200.
2 ply 2.50 2900.
1 ply 2.75 3700.
Vegetable fiber 1.75 1100.
Spiral-wound, asbestos filled:

Carbon 2.50 10000.
Stainless, Monel, Nickel alloys 3.00 10000.
Corrugated Metal, w/ Asbestos

or corrugated metal, jacketed
2.50 2900.
with:
2.75 3700.
soft aluminum 3.00 4500.
soft copper or brass 3.25 5500.
iron or soft steel 3.50 6500.
Monel or 4%-6% chrome
Stainless steels and nickel
alloys
Corrugated Metal:
Monel or 4%-6% chrome 3.50 6500.
Stainless steels and nickel 3.75 7600.
alloys
Flat metal, jacketed asbestos

filled
3.25 5500.
Monel 3.75 9000.
4%-6% chrome 3.75 9000.
alloys


Table 2-5.1

m y (^06)
Grooved Metal
alloys
Solid flat metal

Monel or 4%-6% chrome 6.00 21800.
alloys
Specifies the initial seating stress required for the gasket being used. This entry is required only
if ASME stress calculations are to be performed.
The following table, extracted from Sect VIII Div. 1 gives gasket factors for some common types
of gaskets.

Table 2-5.1

m y (^06)
Self-energizing types (O rings,

metallic elastomer, and other 0. 0.
self-sealing types)
Elastomers without fabric or a

high percent of asbestos fiber:
Below 75A Shore Durometer .50 0.
75A or higher Shore Durometer 1.00 200.


Table 2-5.1

m y (^06)

1/8" thick 2.00 600.
1/16" thick 2.75 3700.
1/32" thick 3.50 6500.
Elastomers with cotton fabric 1.25 400.

3 ply 2.25 2200.
2 ply 2.50 2900.
1 ply 2.75 3700.
Vegetable fiber 1.75 1100.

Carbon 2.50 10000.
Stainless, Monel, Nickel alloys 3.00 10000.
Corrugated Metal, w/ Asbestos

or corrugated metal, jacketed
2.50 2900.
with:
2.75 3700.
Monel or 4%-6% chrome
alloys
Corrugated Metal:
alloys


Table 2-5.1

m y (^06)
Flat metal, jacketed asbestos

filled
3.25 5500.
Monel 3.75 9000.
4%-6% chrome 3.75 9000.
alloys
Grooved Metal
alloys
Solid flat metal

Monel or 4%-6% chrome 6.00 21800.
alloys
Specifies the nubbin width, if applicable. This value is required only for facing sketches 1c, 1d, 2
and 6 (FLANGE) equivalents 3, 4, 5, and 9). For sketch 9, this is not a nubbin width but the
contact width of the metallic ring.

Specifies the facing sketch number according to the following correlations, according to Table
2-5-2 of the ASME code.
Facing Sketch CAESAR II Equivalent Description
1a 1 flat finish faces
1b 2 serrated finish faces
1c 3 raised nubbin-flat finish
1d 4 raised nubbin-serrated finish
2 5 1/64 inch nubbin
3 6 1/64 inch nubbin both sides
4 7 large serrations, one side
5 8 large serrations, both sides
6 9 metallic O-ring type gasket
G.
Specifies the facing column number according to the following correlations:
Gasket Material Facing Column
Self-energizing types (O rings, metallic elastomer, and other

self-sealing types) 2
Elastomers without fabric or a high percent of asbestos fiber:

Below 75A Shore Durometer
75A or higher Shore Durometer 2
2

1/8" thick 2
1/16" thick 2
1/32" thick 2
Elastomers with cotton fabric 2


3 ply 2
2 ply 2
1 ply 2
Vegetable fiber 2

Carbon 2
Stainless, Monel, Nickel alloys 2
Corrugated Metal, w/ Asbestos or corrugated metal, jacketed with:

soft aluminum 2
soft copper or brass 2
iron or soft steel 2
Monel or 4%-6% chrome 2
Stainless steels and nickel alloys 3.50
Corrugated Metal:
soft aluminum 2
Stainless steels and nickel alloys 2
Flat metal, jacketed asbestos filled

soft aluminum 2
Monel 2
4%-6% chrome 2
Grooved Metal
soft aluminum 2
Solid flat metal

soft aluminum 2

Material Data Tab

The following options are used to define material and stress-related data.
Topics
Flange Material .............................................................................. 914
Bolt Material ................................................................................... 914
Flange Allowable @ Design Temperature ..................................... 915
Flange Allowable @ Ambient Temperature ................................... 915
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @ Design ......................................... 915
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @ Ambient ....................................... 915
Bolt Allowable @ Design Temperature.......................................... 915
Bolt Allowable @ Ambient Temperature ........................................ 916
Flange Allowable @ Stress Multiplier ............................................ 916
Bolt Allowable Stress Multiplier...................................................... 916
Displays the material database for flanges, taken from ASME Section VIII, Division 1.
Displays the material database for bolting, taken from ASME Section VIII, Division 1.
Specifies the flange design temperature. This value is required for ASME stress calculations,
and for ANSI B16.5/API rating table look-ups.
The design temperature is not used in the flexibility model of the flange.

Specifies the allowable stress for the flange material at the design temperature. This value is
required only if an ASME stress analysis of the flange is to be performed.
This value is available in the ASME Sect. VIII Div. 1 material database delivered with the
software. You can access the database by typing a material name in the Flange Material box or
by clicking Browse and selecting a material in the Material Selection list.
When you select a material in the database, fill in the spaces for any material values where the
defaults are not sufficient. Press F1 for guidance on the material values.
Specifies the allowable stress for the flange material at the ambient temperature. This value is
only required if an ASME stress analysis of the flange is to be performed.
Defines the value of the modulus of elasticity to be used for the determination of the Flange
Rigidity Factor "J", for the DESIGN case defined in Appendix S of the A93 addendum.
Defines the value of the modulus of elasticity to be used for the determination of the Flange
Rigidity Factor "J", for the SEATING case defined in Appendix S of the A93 addendum.
Indicates the allowable stress for the bolt material at the design temperature. This value is only
required if an ASME stress analysis of the flange is to be performed.

Specify the allowable stress for the bolt material at the ambient temperature. This value is only
required if an ASME stress analysis of the flange is to be performed.
Applies the increased allowable (1.5) for the radial and tangential operating ASME flange
allowables. This increase is implied in B31.1 Appendix II Section 4.2.3 when it states that the
longitudinal hub, tangential and radial stress allowables are equal to the yield stress at design
temperature, which is essentially 1.5(S).
Prior to the 1992 edition of the ASME NC code, NC paragraph 3658.1(d) also stated
that the tangential and radial stress allowables could be increased by 50%. The 1992 edition of
NC eliminated this increase on these allowables.
Designates a factor by which to increase the operating bolt allowables.

Section VIII Division 2, Article 4-141 of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code allows for
operating loads on bolts to equal two times the standard table allowables. In some cases, this
increase can be by as much as three times the table allowables.
Loads Tab
The following options are used to describe the imposed loads.
Topics
Design Pressure ............................................................................ 917
Axial Force ..................................................................................... 917
Bending Moment ............................................................................ 917
Disable Leakage Calculations ....................................................... 917
Disable Stress Calculations ........................................................... 917
Disable ANSI B16.5 Check ............................................................ 917

Indicates the internal line pressure (lbs./sq.in.) in gage. This pressure is used in the flexibility
model of the flange in the ASME stress calculations and is the B16.5/API rating.
Defines the externally applied axial force applied to the flange joint by the attached piping. The
software does not include the effect of shear forces in the flexibility model.
Specifies the external moment applied to the flange joint by the attached piping. If you have two
bending moments, SRSS them and enter the result here.
Turns off the leakage calculations performed by CAESAR II. Use this option if you want a flange
report, which only contains ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 2 results.
Turns off the flange stress calculations performed by CAESAR II. Use this option if you want a
flange report, which only contains leakage calculations and omits ASME Section VIII, Division 1,
Appendix 2 results.
Turns off the report for the ANSI B16.5 Equivalent Pressure check. This check compares the
equivalent pressure to the MAWP (as listed in ANSI B16.5) for the flange class and material.
The ANSI MAWP does not consider bolting or gasket properties, and it is not a good indicator of
the leakage characteristics of the flange.
Flange Rating
This is an optional input. It has been a common practice in the industry to use the ANSI B16.5
and API 605 temperature/pressure rating tables as a gauge for leakage. Because these rating
tables are based on allowable stresses and are not intended for leakage prediction, the leakage
predictions that resulted are a function of the allowable stress for the flange material, not the
flexibility, or modulus of elasticity, of the flange. To give you a comparison to the old practice,
the minimum and maximum rating table values from ANSI and API are stored and are used to
print minimum and maximum leakage safety factors that are predicted from this method. An
example of the output that you get upon entering the flange rating is shown below:

According to the older method, this shows that leakage occurred if a carbon steel flange is used,
and leakage does not occur if an alloy flange is used. Both flanges have essentially the same
flexibility tendency to leak.
The following input parameters are used only for the ASME Section VIII Division 1 stress
calculations:
Flange Type
Flange Outside Diameter
Design Temperature
Small End Hub Thickness
Large End Hub Thickness
Hub Length
Flange Allowables
Bolt Allowables
Gasket Seating Stress
Optional Allowable Multipliers
Flange Face & Gasket Dimensions
Specify the Flange Type (on page 901) on the Flange Tab (on page 900) tab. To acquire
material allowables from the Section VIII, Division 1 material library, use the Flange Material
(on page 914) list on the Material Data Tab (on page 914) tab.
An input listing for a typical flange analysis is shown below:

Flange Dimension Lookup

Topics
Nominal Diameter .......................................................................... 919
Flange Class .................................................................................. 919
Series ............................................................................................. 920
Attached Pipe ID ............................................................................ 920
Attached Pipe Thickness ............................................................... 920
Specifies the nominal diameter of the flange.
Identifies the ANSI B16.5 or API 605 flange rating, (class).

B16.5 valid classes are 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500, and 2500
API 605 valid classes are 75, 150, 300, 400, 600, and 900
B16.5 specifications govern up to, and including 24-inch pipe; API 605 specifications govern
nominal pipe sizes 26- though 60-inch.
Use the flange rating entry to access the B16.5 or API pressure/temperature rating table. The
software includes minimum and maximum allowed ratings for all different materials available in
the tables. You can see minimum and maximum computed allowed equivalent pressures and
safety factors in this data. API 605 does not have minimum and maximum data. The minimum
and maximum data is the same when the nominal English pipe size is greater than 24-inches.

Specifies the ANSI flange series. Select Series A for general-use flanges. Select Series B for
compact flanges.
Specifies the inside diameter of the attached pipe.
Specifies the thickness of the attached pipe.
Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations (B31G)

Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > B31.G
Main window menu: Analysis > B31.G
Evaluates corroded pipelines to determine when specific pipe segments must be replaced. The
original B31G document is conservative. CAESAR II performs additional calculations to modify
the original criteria. This additional work can be found in project report PR-3805, by Battelle, Inc.
The details of the original B31G criteria, as well as the modified methods, are discussed in detail
in this report.
CAESAR II determines the following values according to the original B31G criteria and four
modified methods. The values are
The hoop stress to cause failure
The maximum allowed operating pressure
The maximum allowed flaw length
The four modified methods vary in the manner in which the corroded area is estimated. The
methods are:
.85dL
Approximates the corroded area as 0.85 times the maximum pit depth times the flaw
length.
Exact
Determines the corroded area numerically using the trapezoid method.
Equivalent
Determines the corroded area by multiplying the average pit depth by the flaw length.
Additionally, an equivalent flaw length (flaw length * average pit depth / maximum pit
depth) is used in the computation of the Folias factor.
Effective
Uses a numerical trapezoid summation; however, various sub-lengths of the total flaw
length are used to arrive at a worst case condition. If the sub-length that produces the

worst-case coincides with the total length, the Exact and Effective methods yield the
same result.
The software opens the Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations (B31G) window. The
window consists of two input tabs: Data Tab (on page 922) and Measurements Tab (on page
924).

After the data is entered, click Run Analysis to begin the computations. A typical output
report is shown below:
For additional information or backup on these computations, an intermediate computation

file is generated.
For more information on the analysis methods used by this command, see the B31G
document or the Battelle project report PR-3-805.
Data Tab
Most of the data required by this processor is acquired through actual field
measurements.
Topics
Pipe Nominal Diameter .................................................................. 923
Pipe Wall Thickness ...................................................................... 923
Design Pressure ............................................................................ 923
Material Yield Strength .................................................................. 923
Material Specified Minimum Yield ................................................. 923
Flaw Length ................................................................................... 923
Measurement Increment ................................................................ 923
Factor of Safety (FS) ..................................................................... 923
Design Factor (S) ........................................................................... 924

Specifies the pipe diameter.
Specifies the un-corroded pipe wall thickness.
Specifies the design pressure. This value is the maximum pressure reported in the output
section, although the maximum allowed pressure may be less than the input design pressure.
Defines the material yield strength. If this value is unknown, enter the specified minimum yield
strength in this cell.
Defines the minimum yield strength.
Indicates the length of flaw or anomaly. This value is a measured quantity, usually taken in a
straight line.
Specify the measurement increment in this cell. This value defines how often along the flaw
length depth or thickness measurements are made.
The number of measurements should be calculated by (flaw length / measurement increment) +
1.
Defines the factor of safety. For those pipelines in which the maximum operating stress level
does not exceed 72% of the specified minimum yield strength, the safety factor is 100/72 = 1.39.
The safety factor cannot be less than 1.0.

Specifies the design factor from the applicable piping code.
Measurements Tab
You can enter a maximum of twenty pit measurements on the Measurements input screen.
First, you must define the measurements. Select Pits if the measurements are in pit depths.
Select Thicknesses if the measurements are remaining wall thicknesses.
Pit depths are required for the computations. If remaining thicknesses are specified,
the pit depths are computed from wall thickness - remaining thickness.
In the individual cells, enter the measurement obtained along the flaw length. The values are
based on the selection of Pits or Thicknesses.

Expansion Joint Rating

Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > Expansion Joint Rating
Main window menu: Analysis > Expansion Joint Rating
Computes a limit for the total displacement per corrugation of an expansion joint. According to
EJMA (Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association), the maximum permitted amount of axial
movement per corrugation is defined as erated where
ex + ey + eq < erated
The terms in the above equation are defined as:

ex = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed axial movements.
ey = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed lateral deflections.
eq = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed angular rotation, that is,
bending.
erated = The maximum permitted amount of axial movement per corrugation. You can find
be noted that one side of the bellows attains a larger projected area than the opposite side.
Under the action of the applied pressure, unbalanced forces are set up which tend to distort the
expansion joint further. In order to control the effects of these two factors a second limit is
established by the manufacturer upon the amount of angular rotation and/or lateral deflection
which may be imposed upon the expansion joint. This limit may be less than the rated
movement. Therefore, in the selection of an expansion joint, care must be exercised to avoid
exceeding either of th
This module is intended to assist you in satisfying these limitations. This module computes the
terms defined in the above equation and the movement of the joint ends relative to each other.
These relative movements are reported in both the local joint coordinate system and the global
coordinate system.

The software opens the EJMA Expansion Joint window. The window consists of three input
screens: Geometry (on page 928), Displacements and Rotations (on page 929), and Allowables
(on page 930).
After the necessary data is entered, click Run Analysis to begin the computations. After
processing completes, a report displaying both the input echo and the output calculations are
shown on a new tab called Output.

The units used for the coordinate and displacement values are the length units
defined in the active units file. Rotations are in units of degrees.

In the previous output, the axial displacement total in the report is the total axial displacement
per corrugation due to axial, lateral, and rotational displacement of the expansion joint ends.
This is the value that is compared to the rated axial displacement per corrugation. If e (total) is
greater than the rated axial displacement per corrugation, then there is the possibility of
premature bellows failure. Be sure that the displacement rating from the manufacturer is on a
per corrugation basis. If it is not, multiply the axial displacement total by the number of
manufacturers allowed rating is for some set number of cycles (often 10,000). If the actual
number of cycles is less, then the allowed movement can often be greater. Similarly, if the actual
number of cycles is greater than 10,000, then the allowed movement can be smaller. In special
situations, contact the manufacturers because many factors can affect allowed bellows
movement.
The y in the report is the total relative lateral displacement of one end of the bellows with
respect to the other, and theta is the total relative angular rotation of one end of the bellows with
respect to the other. CAESAR II does not include x in the denominator for the lateral
displacement calculations as outlined in EJMA.
Geometry
Topics
Node Number for "From" End ........................................................ 929
Node Number for "To" End ............................................................ 929
Number of Convolutions ................................................................ 929
Flexible Joint Length ...................................................................... 929
Effective Diameter ......................................................................... 929
Z Axis Up ....................................................................................... 929
Coordinates.................................................................................... 929

Identifies the node number that represents the From end of the expansion joint. This value is
used for labeling purposes.
Identifies the node number that represents the To end of the expansion joint. This value is used
for labeling purposes.
Defines the number of convolutions in the expansion joint.
Specifies the flexible length of the bellows.
Specifies the diameter of the circle whose area is equal to the effective area of the expansion
joint. The effective ID can be estimated using the following equation:
You can find the effective area of the joint in the manufacturer's catalog.
Indicates that the z-axis is upward in your CAESAR II input file.
Defines the spatial coordinate at the appropriate end of the expansion joint
Displacements and Rotations

Defines the displacements and rotations at the appropriate end of the expansion joint. These
values typically come from the displacement report of a CAESAR II run.

Allowables
Specifies the allowed expansion joint movement (translation or rotation) on a per convolution
basis and for the entire bellows. Enter values using the following units of measure:
Axial inches
Lateral inches
Bending inches or degrees
Torsional inches or degrees
You can acquire this data using the vendor catalog.
Structural Steel Checks - AISC

Main window ribbon: Analysis > Components > AISC
Main window menu: Analysis > AISC
Performs AISC code check on structural steel elements. Compliance is evaluated according to
the AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction) code. This code check uses the forces and
moments at the ends of the structural members, computes stresses, and allowables, and
determines a unity check value. If the unity check value is less than 1.0, the member is
acceptable for the given loading conditions. CAESAR II performs the AISC unity check
according to either the 1977 or the 1989 edition of the AISC code.
Member properties are obtained from the AISC database and used to compute the
actual and allowable stress values for the axial and bending terms comprising the unity check
equations. The database must be either AISC77.BIN or AISC89.BIN and is set using Tools >
Configuration/Setup. For more information, see Configuration Editor (on page 55).
There are a few differences between the 1977 and 1989 AISC Code Revisions that affect unity
check computation. The most noticeable difference is that the 1989 code provides a method for
computing the unity check on single angles. This procedure, which was not addressed in the
1977 code, can be found in a special code section following the commentary. The steps
necessary to compute the unity check for single angles can be followed by reviewing the
message file (generated upon request).
The other differences between these two code revisions deal with members in compression.
Several constants for Qs have been altered, and a new factor kc c
compression element restraint coefficient defined in the 1989 edition of the code.
Because of these code differences, CAESAR II stores the name of the active database in the
input file for the AISC module when the data file is first created. Attempting to switch databases
or compute unity checks on angles using the 1977 code generates error messages and
processing terminates. You are urged to consult the applicable AISC Manuals when using this
command.
To begin the unity check calculations, specify a new job name in the New Job Name
Specification dialog box or click Browse to navigate to an existing job file.

The software displays the AISC window, which consists of two input screens: Global Input (on
page 932) and Local Member Data Tab (on page 935).
You can direct the output reports to the screen or to a printer. The output report begins with a
one page summary describing the current global data and units, as shown below.
The remaining pages in the output report show the data for the individual members. The last
column of the report contains the most important data (namely the unity check value) and the

governing AISC equation. A sample member output reports are shown below. The report is
applicable to jobs where side sway is allowed.
Global Input
The following options are used to enter data that applies to all members being evaluated.
Topics
Structural Code .............................................................................. 933
Allowable Stress Increase Factor .................................................. 933
Stress Reduction Factors Cmy and Cmz ...................................... 933
Youn ........................................................................... 933
Bending Coefficient ........................................................................ 934
Form Factor Qa ............................................................................. 934
Allow Sidesway .............................................................................. 934
Resize Members Whose Unity Check Value Is . . . ....................... 934
Minimum Desired Unity Check ...................................................... 935
Maximum Desired Unity Check ..................................................... 935

Identifies the code and year, typically matching the database in use. Slight variations in the
computations depend on which code year is selected. Single angles can only be checked if
AISC 1989 is selected.
Designates the multiplication factor applied to the computed values of the axial and bending
allowable stresses. Typically, this value is 1.0. However, in extreme events, such as
earthquakes and 100-year storms, the AISC code permits the allowable stresses to be
increased by a factor. Usually, a 1/3 increase is applied to the computed allowables, making the
allowable stress increase factor equal to 1.33. For more details see the AISC code, section
1.5.6.
Specifies the interaction formula coefficients (Cmy and Cmz) for the strong and weak axis of the
elements (in-plane and out-of-plane). Values include the following:
0.85 for compression members in frames subject to joint translation (side sway).
For restrained compression members in frames braced against side sway and not subject to
transverse loading between supports in the plane of bending:
but not less than 0.4, where (M1/M2) is the ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the
ends, of that portion of the member un-braced in the plane of bending under consideration.
For compression members in frames braced against joint translation in the plane of loading
and subject to transverse loading between supports, the value of Cmy can be determined by
rational analysis. Alternatively, the following values are suggested per the AISC code:
0.85 for members whose ends are restrained against rotation in the plane of bending.
1.0 for members whose ends are unrestrained against rotation in the plane of bending.
Specifies the slope of the linear portion of the stress-strain diagram. For structural steel, this
value is usually 29,000,000 psi.

Defines the minimum yield stress of the steel being used. The term yield stress denotes the
minimum yield point (for those steels that have a yield point) or the minimum yield strength (for
those that do not have a yield point).
Specifies the bending coefficient (Cb). Use 1.0 in computing the value of Fby and Fbz for use in
Formula 1.6-1a or when the bending moment at any point in an unbraced length is larger than
the moment at either end of the same length. Otherwise, Cb shall be:
but not more than 2.3, where (M1/M2) is the ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the ends.
Defines the allowable axial stress reduction factor equal to the effective area divided by the
actual area.
Consult the latest edition of the AISC code for the current computation methods for
the effective area.
Controls the ability of a frame or structure to experience side sway (joint translation). This affects
the computation of several of the coefficients used in the unity check equations. Additionally, for
frames braced against side sway, moments at each end of the member are required. Side sway
is allowed.
Determines whether the AISC module attempts to resize specific members as a result of the
unity check computations. This option is most often used for an initial pass at optimization.
Selecting this option requires that you specify a minimum unity check and a maximum unity
check. If the computed unity check falls outside this range, the module resizes the member
appropriately. The final member size is shown in the output report.
A resized member overwrites the initial input member size in the input file (input and output
share a common file). If member resizing occurs, check the final member size to ensure the
following:
1. The selected member is commonly available.
2. The selected member is optimal in its group.
3. The selected member does not violate fabrication requirements for flange or web size.

Defines the minimum acceptable unity check allowed. Accepted values are between 0.0 and
1.0. Members whose computed unity check value is less than this minimum are resized to a
smaller shape.
The Minimum Desired Unity Check value must be less than the Maximum Desired
Unity Check value. The recommended value for the minimum desired unity check is 0.7, which
allows lightly loaded members to be reduced in size.
Defines the maximum acceptable unity check allowed. Accepted values are between 0.0 and
1.0. Members whose computed unity check value is greater than this maximum are resized to a
larger shape.
The Maximum Desired Unity Check value must be greater than the Minimum
Desired Unity Check value. The recommended value for the maximum desired unity check is
0.9, which leaves a margin for loading inaccuracies.
Local Member Data Tab

The following options are used to enter local member data for each member being evaluated.
Topics
Member Start Node ....................................................................... 936
Member End Node ......................................................................... 936
Member Type ................................................................................. 936
In-And Out-Of-Plane Fixity Coefficients Ky And Kz ....................... 936
Unsupported Axial Length ............................................................. 937
Unsupported Length (In-Plane Bending) ....................................... 937
Unsupported Length (Out-Of-Plane Bending) ............................... 937
Double Angle Spacing ................................................................... 937
Young's Modulus ........................................................................... 937
Axial Member Force ....................................................................... 937
In-Plane Bending Moment ............................................................. 938
Out-of-Plane Bending Moment ...................................................... 938
In- ................................................. 938
In- ................................................ 938
Out-of- .......................................... 938
Out-of- ......................................... 938

Ident
integer value between 1 and 32,000.
required.
Enter an integer value between 1 and 32,000.
Specifies the AISC shape label found in the AISC manual. The shape label is used to acquire
the member geometric properties from the database. For properties to be obtained, the label
you enter must match exactly the label in the database.
Because many of the angle labels can be found in the single angles, the double angles (long
legs back to back), and the double angles (short legs back to back), require an angle type to tell
them apart. Enter a D double angles with equal legs, and double angles with long legs back to
back. Enter a B for double angles with short legs back to back.
Specifies the coefficients used to compute the strong and weak axis slenderness ratios.
Recommended values are listed in the following table:
End Conditions Theoretical K Recommended Design K
fixed-fixed 0.5 0.65
fixed-pinned 0.7 0.8
fixed-sliding 1.0 1.2
pinned-pinned 1.0 1.0
fixed-free 2.0 2.1
pinned-sliding 2.0 2.0

Defines the length used to determine the buckling strength of the member. Typically, this is the
total length of the member.
Defines the length of the member between braces or supports which prevent bending about the
strong axis of the member.
Defines the length of the member between braces or supports which prevent bending about the
weak axis of the member.
Indicates the gap or space separating the adjacent legs. The spacing, as defined in the AISC
manual, must be 0.0, .375, or .75-inches.
Specifies the slope of the linear portion of the stress-strain diagram. For structural steel, this
value is usually 29,00
(on page 933) value specified on the Global Input tab.
Defines the minimum yield stress of the steel being used. The term yield stress denotes the
minimum yield point (for those steels that have a yield point) or the minimum yield strength (for
those that do not have a yield point). This value of the material yield strength overrides the
Material Yield Strength (on page 934) value specified on the Global Input tab.
Specifies the force (tension or compression) that acts along the axis of the member. The sign of
the number is not significant because a worst-case load condition is assumed, that is, all
positive loads.

Specifies the maximum bending moment in the member (when side sway is permitted) that will
cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the member. The sign of the number is not
significant because a worst case load condition of all positive loads is assumed.
Specifies the maximum bending moment in the member (when side sway is permitted) that will
cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the member. The sign of the number is not significant
because a worst case load condition of all positive loads is assumed.
Specifies the end moments for structures braced against side sway. This value is the smaller of
the two in-plane bending moments that cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the member.
Specifies the end moments for structures braced against side sway. This value is the larger of
the two in-plane bending moments which cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the
member.
Specifies the end moments for structures braced against side sway. This value is the smaller of
the two out-of-plane bending moments that cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the
member.
Specifies the end moments for structures braced against side sway. This value is the larger of
the two out-of-plane bending moments that cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the
member.
Equipment Manager
Provide a common interface for evaluating loads on the following equipment:
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) (on page 944)
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) (on page 948)
API 560 (Heaters) (on page 951)
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) (on page 953)
New

Creates a new .C2eDB equipment file.
Open
Opens an existing .C2eDB equipment file.
You can optionally select one of the most recently used files from the File name
box.
Save
Saves an equipment file. When you save a new file, you can specify a new file name or
select an existing file name to overwrite the file.
When you save a new file, you can optionally select one of the most recently used files
from the File name box and overwrite the file.
Save and Save As are also available from the CAESAR II menu.
Import Legacy
Imports a legacy equipment file.
Add
Adds equipment to the selected equipment type or adds a component to the selected
equipment. For example:
Select API-610 in the Equipment pane to add a pump .
Select <Pump name> in the Equipment pane to add a nozzle .
You can also right-click to access Add commands.
Delete
Deletes the selected pump or nozzle.
You can also right-click to access Delete commands.
Duplicate
Duplicates the selected equipment or component.
You can also right-click to access Duplicate commands.
Refresh Linked Cases
Updates linked load cases (displaying in the Link column) to the latest values in the .c2
model file defined for the CAESAR II Output File (on page 948).
Use this option when you change your CAESAR II file and you want to refresh the linked
equipment load cases.
In the Equipment pane, you can also right-click > Refresh Linked Cases.
Print

Prints the report for the selected item in the Equipment pane.
Select a component to print only the component report.
Select equipment to print the equipment and the components report.
Select an equipment type to print reports for all equipment defined for the type.
If you have analyzed the equipment, the software prints an input and output report. If you
have not analyzed the equipment, the software prints an input report.
Analyze
Analyzes the selected item in the Equipment pane.
Select a component to analyze only the component.
Select equipment to analyze the equipment and the components .
Select a pump type to analyze all pumps defined for the type.
You can also right-click > Analyze.

Any change to input data automatically deletes an existing analysis.
The following commands are also available from the CAESAR II menu in the top left corner of
Equipment Manager:
New
Open
Save
Save As
Print
Recent Files - Displays the ten most recently used files. Select a file to open it.
Exit
The following icons display in the Equipment pane:

API-610 pump.
API-617 compressor.
API-560 heater.
NEMI SM23 steam turbine.
API-661 air-cooled heat exchanger.
- Nozzle. A nozzle is the child of equipment in the hierarchy.
- Nozzle loads. You define load cases for each nozzle.
- Load case sets. You define load case sets from the nozzle loads for each equipment.

All equipment of any type saved in a .C2eDB file display in the Equipment pane.
Tabs display on the right side of the dialog box. Contents of each tab are specific to the selected
item in the Equipment pane.
After you click Analyze , a window displays showing status and warnings for the equipment
input. This information also displays in the output report after analysis completes.
Displays warnings and errors occurring during analysis.

The log clears when you click Clear Events, and each time you close the .C2eDB
file.

Analyze custom piping load cases on equipment (on page 942)
Analyze load cases imported from a model on equipment (on page 943)
Topics
Analyze custom piping load cases on equipment ......................... 942
Analyze load cases imported from a model on equipment ............ 943
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) ......................................................... 944
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) ............................................... 948
API 560 (Heaters) .......................................................................... 951
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) ..................................................... 953
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) ......................................... 957
Load Cases - Input Tab ................................................................. 960
Load Case Sets - Input Tab ........................................................... 963
Output Tab ..................................................................................... 965

Analyze custom piping load cases on equipment

This procedure analyzes a centrifugal pump with a manually-defined load case.
1. In the main window ribbon, click Analysis > Equipment.
The Equipment Manager dialog box displays.
2. Select the type of equipment you want to analyze in the Equipment pane on the left (such
as API-610), and then click Add .

Default equipment (such as for API-610), nozzles , nozzle loads , and load case
sets display in the Equipment pane.
3. Select the equipment (such as Pump1 for API-610) in the Equipment pane, and specify
properties on the Input tab.
4. Select a nozzle in the Equipment pane, and specify properties on the Input tab. Repeat
for each nozzle.
To add a nozzle, select the equipment, and then click Add .

5. Select a set of nozzle loads . On the Load Cases tab, click Add Case > Add
Custom.
A blank row with the default name 1u displays in the grid.
6. On the blank row, specify the required load case name, forces, and moments. Repeat for
each set of nozzle loads.
You can also define all nozzle loads on a single tab when you select Load Case
Sets.
7. Select Load Case Sets.

8. To create a load case set, select one load case from each nozzle.
9. At the bottom of the Load Case Sets tab, click Create a Set from Selected Load Cases
.
A load case set displays in the Load Case Sets grid.
10. Repeat the previous step for each required load case set.
11. Click Save .

12. Select the equipment (such as for API-610) in the Equipment pane, and click Analyze
.
The software analyzes the equipment and nozzles. After analysis completes, the software
displays a report on the Output tab.
Some properties are not required.

The software limits analysis to the selected item in the Equipment pane. For example,
select Pump1 to analyze all pumps or select Suction to analyze only that nozzle for
the pump.
You can use custom and imported load cases in your load case sets. For more information,
see Analyze load cases imported from a model on equipment (on page 943).
Analyze load cases imported from a model on equipment

This procedure analyzes a centrifugal pump that is part of a .c2 model file.
1. In the main window ribbon, click Analysis > Equipment.
The Equipment Manager dialog box displays.
2. Select the type of equipment you want to analyze in the Equipment pane on the left (such
as API-610), and then click Add .

Default equipment (such as for API-610), nozzles , nozzle loads , and load case
sets display in the Equipment pane.
3. Select the equipment (such as Pump1 for API-610) in the Equipment pane, and specify
properties on the Input tab.
4. Select a nozzle in the Equipment pane, and specify properties on the Input tab,
including:
The piping model containing the pump in CAESAR II Output File.
Optionally, the value for CAESAR II Node Number which matches the suction nozzle
node in the .c2 model file.
To add a nozzle, select the equipment, and then click Add .

5. Repeat for each nozzle.
6. Select a set of nozzle loads . On the Load Cases tab, click Add Case > Import
Load Cases.
The Select Load Cases dialog box displays.
7. Select the required load cases, and click Accept.
The load cases display in the grid.
8. Repeat the previous two steps for each set of nozzle loads.
You can also define all nozzle loads on a single tab when you select Load Case
Sets.
9. Select Load Case Sets.

10. To create a load case set, select one load case from each nozzle.
11. At the bottom of the Load Case Sets tab, click Create a Set from Selected Load Cases
.
A load case set displays in the Load Case Sets grid.
12. Repeat the previous step for each required load case set.

13. Click Save .

14. Select the equipment (such as for API-610) in the Equipment pane, and click Analyze
.
The software analyzes the equipment and nozzles. After analysis completes, the software
displays a report on the Output tab.
Some properties are not required.

The software limits analysis to the selected item in the Equipment pane. For example,
select Pump1 to analyze all pumps or select Suction to analyze only that nozzle for
the pump.
You can use custom and imported load cases in your load case sets. For more information,
see Analyze custom piping load cases on equipment (on page 942).
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps)

Opens the Equipment Manager dialog box, in which you define properties and evaluate piping
loads on centrifugal pumps for general refinery service.
The software uses the API-610 load satisfaction criteria defined in clause Section 6.5 and Annex
F.
Clause F.1.2a - The individual component nozzle loads must fall below two times the
allowables listed in the nozzle loadings table (Table 5).
Clause F.1.2b - The resultant applied forces and moments acting on each pump nozzle
flange shall satisfy the equations F.1 and F.2 of the code. You can determine whether
F.1.2b is satisfied by comparing the force and moment resultants. If either resultant exceeds
two, the nozzle status fails.
Clause F.1.2c - Provides equations translating the applied component forces and moments
to the center of the pump. The requirements of these equations, and whether they have
satisfied API-610, are shown on the bottom of the report.
API-610 allows one suction nozzle and one discharge nozzle.

Specifies the pump properties.

You must also define nozzle properties for each nozzle. For more information, see
Pump Nozzle - Input Tab (on page 946).
Displays the equipment type. This is a read-only field.
Defines the name of the equipment. This is an optional property.
Specifies a description for the equipment. This is an optional property.
Defines the global axis used as the vertical axis. Select Y or Z.
When selected, specifies a centrifugal pump with the suction and discharge nozzles in line with
each other.

Defines the factor by which all API-610 Table 5 allowables are multiplied. Specify a value
between 1.0 and 2.0. Values less than 1.0 are replaced by a default factor of 1.0, while values
greater than 2.0 are replaced by a default factor of 2.0. If left blank, a default value of 1.0 is
used.
Typically, you use a value of 1.0 when evaluating individual nozzle loads. When checking
vertical in-line pumps, this value can be 2.0. The value of 2.0 is also valid when suction and
discharge nozzle loads are evaluated together as defined in Appendix F of API-610.
Indicate the direction cosines, depending on the type of pump.

Vertical In-Line Pump (option is selected)
Specifies the orientation of the nozzles as the global coordinate direction cosines in the
horizontal plane for the nozzles. The positive direction is from the discharge nozzle to the
suction nozzle. For example, if the nozzles are along the X-axis:
Centerline Direction Cosine X = 1.0
Centerline Direction Cosine Z = 0.0
Horizontal Pump (Vertical In-Line Pump option is cleared)
Specifies the orientation of the pump shaft centerline as the global coordinate direction
cosines in the horizontal plane for the centerline. For example, if the pump is along the
Z-axis:
Specifies the suction or discharge nozzle properties.

Define nozzle properties for each nozzle on a pump. Each nozzle has a separate
Input tab.
Defines a label for the nozzle. This is an optional property.

Specifies the nozzle type. Select Suction or Discharge.

API-610 allows one suction nozzle and one discharge nozzle.
Specifies the location of the nozzle. Select Top, Side, or End.
For a pump with a centerline along the Y-axis (vertical), select Side.
Each position has different allowables.
Defines the nozzle pipe nominal diameter.
Specifies the distance between the nozzle and base point along the X-axis. Type a positive
value if the nozzle X-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is, if the nozzle is
farther out on the positive X-axis.
API 610 defines the base point as the center of the pump. The center of the pump is defined
as the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a vertical plane passing through the
center of the two pedestals.
When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the software disables DX, DY, and DZ because the
coordinates are not used.
Specifies the distance between the nozzle and base point along the Y-axis. Type a positive
value if the nozzle Y-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is, if the nozzle is
farther out on the positive Y-axis.

Specifies the distance between the nozzle and base point along the Z-axis. Type a positive
value if the nozzle Z-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is, if the nozzle is
farther out on the positive Z-axis.
Specifies the node number assigned to the nozzle flange connection in the piping model defined
for the CAESAR II Output File (on page 948). Type the node number. This value is optional.
Specifies the location of a CAESAR II piping model containing the equipment and load cases
that you want to analyze. Select a file in the Open dialog box.
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors)

Opens the Equipment Manager dialog box, in which you evaluate piping loads on centrifugal
compressors for general refinery service that handles air or gas.
The requirements of the API-617 standard are similar to those of NEMA SM-23 (1991). The
allowable load values for API-617 are approximately 85% higher than the NEMA allowables.

Specifies the compressor properties.

Compressor Nozzle - Input Tab (on page 950).
Defines the factor by which the allowables are multiplied.The default value is 1.0
You typically use the default value. API-617 does not recommend the use of a
multipliers and explicitly states allowable values.
Indicates the direction cosines for the equipment shaft centerline. For example:
When the shaft centerline is along the X-axis:
When the shaft centerline is along the Z-axis:

Specifies the inlet, outlet, or extraction nozzle properties.

Define nozzle properties for each nozzle on a compressor. Each nozzle has a
separate Input tab.
Specifies the nozzle type. Select Inlet, Outlet, or Extraction 1 through Extraction 4.
Indicates the nominal diameter of the nozzle. You must select a Type before selecting a
Nominal Diameter value.
Specifies the X-distance from the largest inlet or outlet nozzle to the current nozzle. Type a
positive value if the nozzle X-coordinate is greater than that of the largest nozzle, that is, if the
nozzle is farther out on the positive X-axis.
If the current nozzle is the largest inlet or outlet nozzle, then the value is 0.
Specifies the Y-distance from the largest inlet or outlet nozzle to the current nozzle. Type a
positive value if the nozzle Y-coordinate is greater than that of the largest nozzle, that is, if the
nozzle is farther out on the positive Y-axis.
Specifies the Z-distance from the largest inlet or outlet nozzle to the current nozzle. Type a
positive value if the nozzle Z-coordinate is greater than that of the largest nozzle, that is, if the
nozzle is farther out on the positive Z-axis.

API 560 (Heaters)

Opens the Equipment Manager dialog box, in which you evaluate piping loads on fired heaters
and burners for general refinery service.
The software compares the input forces and moments to the allowable loads published in API
560.
When you use Add to create a new heater, the software creates one tube for
the heater.
Specifies the heater properties.

You must also define tube properties for each heater. For more information, see
Heater Tube - Input Tab (on page 952).

Specifies the heater tube nozzle properties.
Define tube properties for each heater. Each tube has a separate Input tab.
A tube can also be designated as a manifold.
Specifies the nozzle type. Select Tube or Manifold.
Specifies the nominal diameter of the nozzle. You must select a Type before selecting a

Indicates the direction cosines for the heater tube centerline with respect to the global
coordinate system. For example:
When a horizontal tube centerline is along the global X-axis:
Direction Cosine X = 1.0
Direction Cosine Y = 0.0
Direction Cosine Z = 0.0
When a vertical tube centerline is along the global Y-axis:
Direction Cosine X = 0.0
Direction Cosine Y = 1.0
Direction Cosine Z = 0.0
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines)

Main window ribbon: Analysis > Equipment > NEMA SM23
Main window menu: Analysis > 1 - NEMA SM23
Evaluates piping loads on steam turbine nozzles. There are two types of force/moment
allowables computed during a NEMA run:
Individual nozzle allowables.
Cumulative equipment allowables.
When you use Add to create a new turbine, the software creates one inlet
nozzle and one outlet nozzle for the turbine.
Each individual suction, discharge, and extraction nozzle must satisfy the equation:
Where:
F = resultant force on the particular nozzle.
M = resultant moment on the particular nozzle.

De = effective nominal pipe size of the connection.

For cumulative equipment allowables, NEMA SM23 states that "the combined resultants of the
forces and moments of the inlet, extraction, and exhaust connections resolved at the centerline
of the exhaust connection", be within a certain multiple of Dc, where Dc is the diameter of an
opening whose area is equal to the sum of the areas of all of the individual equipment
connections. A typical turbine cumulative (summation) equipment calculation is shown below:
SFX, SFY, and SFZ are the respective components of the forces from all connections resolved
at the discharge nozzle. FC(RSLT) is the result of these forces. SMX, SMY and SMZ are the
respective components of the moments from all connections resolved at the discharge nozzle.
Dc is the diameter of the equivalent opening as discussed above.
Specifies the turbine properties.

You must also define inlet properties for each turbine. For more information, see
Turbine Inlet Nozzle - Input Tab (see "Turbine Nozzle - Input Tab" on page 955).

Defines the factor by which the allowables are multiplied.The default value is 1.0.
You typically use the default value.
Indicates the direction cosines for the equipment shaft centerline. For example:
When the shaft centerline is along the X-axis:
When the shaft centerline is along the Z-axis:
Specifies the inlet, outlet, or extraction nozzle properties.

Define nozzle properties for each nozzle on a turbine. Each nozzle has a separate
Input tab.

Specifies the nozzle type. Select Inlet, Outlet, or Extraction.
Specifies the nominal diameter of the nozzle. You must select a Type before selecting a
Specifies the X-distance from the largest inlet or outlet nozzle to the current nozzle. NEMA-SM
23 interprets the point of resolution of the combined forces and moments to be the following two
points:
1. The face of the flange at the exhaust nozzle connection.
2. The intersection point of the exhaust nozzle centerline and the equipment shaft centerline.
Type a positive value if the nozzle X-coordinate is greater than that of the largest nozzle, that is,
if the nozzle is farther out on the positive X-axis.
Specifies the Y-distance from the largest inlet or outlet nozzle to the current nozzle. NEMA-SM
points:
Type a positive value if the nozzle Y-coordinate is greater than that of the largest nozzle, that is,
if the nozzle is farther out on the positive Y-axis.
Specifies the Z-distance from the largest inlet or outlet nozzle to the current nozzle. NEMA-SM
points:
Type a positive value if the nozzle Z-coordinate is greater than that of the largest nozzle, that is,
if the nozzle is farther out on the positive Z-axis.

API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers)

Opens the Equipment Manager dialog box, in which you define properties and evaluate loads
on air-cooled heat exchangers.
The API-661 graphic below shows the type of open exchanger body analyzed by this standard.
Calculations cover the allowed loads on the vertical, co-linear nozzles (item 9 in the graphic)
found on most single or multi-bundled air-cooled heat exchangers.
API 661 contains the following compliance requirements:

1. 7.1.10.1 - Each nozzle, in its design corroded condition, must be capable of withstanding the
simultaneous application of the moments and forces defined in the Typical Construction of a
Tube Bundle with Plug Headers figure in the API 661 code.
2. 7.1.10.2 - The design of each fixed or floating header, the design of the connections of fixed
headers to side frames, and the design of other support members should ensure that the
simultaneous application (sum) of all nozzle loadings on a single header does not cause any
damage. The components of the nozzle loadings on a single header should not exceed the
following values:

Mx
My
Mz
Fx 10,010 N (2250 lbf)
Fy 20,020 (4500 lbf)
Fz `6,680 (3750 lbf)
Specifies the heat exchanger properties.

Heat Exchanger Nozzle - Input Tab (on page 959).

Defines the force and moment multiplier as referenced in Figure 6, Nozzle Loads, in API 661.
The software bases the pass or fail status on this value. If you leave this option blank, the
software uses a default value of 1.0.
Defines the resultant force and moment multiplier. The calculated force and moment ratios are
compared to this value. If you leave this option blank, the software uses a default value of 1.0.
Specifies the global axis used for the tube direction. Select X or Z.
If you define X, the software flips the force and moment allowables and the Resultant Force
and Moment Multiplier (on page 959) allowables for the X- and Z-directions.
Specifies the nozzle properties.

Define nozzle properties for each nozzle on a heat exchanger. Each nozzle has a
separate Input tab.
Specifies Nozzle as the nozzle type.
Specifies the nominal diameter of the nozzle.

Specifies the distance between the nozzle and the center of the header box of the air-cooled
heat exchanger along the X-axis. Type a positive value if the nozzle X-coordinate is greater than
that of the exchanger center, that is, if the nozzle is farther out on the positive X-axis.
heat exchanger along the Y-axis. Type a positive value if the nozzle Y-coordinate is greater than
that of the exchanger center, that is, if the nozzle is farther out on the positive Y-axis.
heat exchanger along the Z-axis. Type a positive value if the nozzle Z-coordinate is greater than
that of the exchanger center, that is, if the nozzle is farther out on the positive Z-axis.
Load Cases - Input Tab

Specifies the nozzle load cases.
Load cases work similarly for all equipment types.
Control-click an undisplayed nozzle load cases item in the left pane to display load
cases for both nozzles in one Load Cases tab.
Add Case
Adds a load case. Select one of the following:
Import Load Cases - Displays the Select Load Cases dialog box, where you select one or
more load cases defined in the .c2 model file defined for the CAESAR II Output File (on
page 948) at the node defined for the CAESAR II Node Number (on page 948). Each load
case displays on a row of the grid. The load cases remain linked to the model and display
in the Link column.
Add Custom - Adds a blank row. You then manually add load case values. The default
value for Number is nu. The default value for Name is CASE USER n.
Delete Case
Deletes the load case on the selected row.

Copy
Copies one or more selected rows.
Paste
Pastes one or more copied rows.
A copied imported load case converts to a custom load case when pasted.
Refresh Linked Cases
Updates linked load cases (displaying in the Link column) to the latest values in the .c2
model file defined for the CAESAR II Output File (on page 948).
Use this option when you change your CAESAR II file and you want to refresh the linked
equipment load cases.
In the Equipment pane, you can also right-click > Refresh Linked Cases.
When displays, indicates that the load case is linked to the .c2 model file defined for
CAESAR II Output File (on page 948).
Click Refresh Linked Cases to update a linked load case when the CAESAR II
model file changes.
Displays the sequence number for the load case:

For imported load cases, the value matches the load case number from the CAESAR II
output file (such as 1 for Case 1 and 2 for Case 2).
For custom load cases, the value matches the order of creation, and is appended with "u"
(such as, 1u, 2u).
To change the order of a load case in the grid, click the Number field of a row, and drag the row
to the required location. The value of Number does not change.
This is a read-only field.
Specifies the load case name. When the load case is linked (displaying in the Link column),
displays the name from of the imported load case.

Identifies the X component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle. Use global
orientation to specify the force.
For vertical in-line pumps, the orientation of the nozzle centerline is used to determine if the
nozzle is in tension or compression. Positive direction is from the discharge to suction nozzle.
Identifies the Y component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle. Use global
Identifies the Z component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle. Use global
Identifies the X component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the nozzle. Use
global orientation to specify the moment.
Identifies the Y component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the nozzle. Use
Identifies the Z component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the nozzle. Use

Load Case Sets - Input Tab

Specifies the nozzle load cases and the equipment load case sets.
Load case sets work similarly for all equipment types.
For load case commands and properties, see Load Cases - Input Tab (on page 960).
You can define load cases for each nozzle on this tab without using the individual Load
Cases tabs. Updates you make on the Load Cases tabs automatically appear in the Load
Case Sets tab.
Displaying the load case grids
When the equipment has two nozzles, the load case grids for both nozzles display by default.
When the equipment has three or more nozzles, one load case grid displays on the left, and the
title bars for the remaining load cases stack on the right by default.

Click the title bar of the upper left grid to toggle between displaying all grids and displaying the
stacked view
Click the title bar of a stacked load case to expand it on the left.
Create a Set from Selected Load Cases

Defines a set of load cases to be analyzed. To create a set, select one suction load case
and one discharge load case, and then click . The set displays on a row of the Load
Case Sets grid.
Delete Load Case Set
Deletes the selected load case set.

Output Tab
Displays input and output reports for the equipment, equipment component, load cases, or load
case sets selected in the Equipment pane.
When a load fails a check, the report row displays in red with an asterisk at the end of
the row.
First Page, Previous Page, Current Page, Next Page, Last Page
Controls navigation through the pages of the report.
Print
Displays the Print dialog box, where you can select a printer and printer options.
Print Layout
Reformats the report to display as it would print as a .pdf. Click to toggle this option on and
off.
Page Setup
Displays the Page Setup dialog box, where you can set paper size, orientation, and margin
size.
Export
Creates a file of the report in your selected format. Select Excel, PDF, or Word.
Zoom
Controls the size of the report display. Select Page Width, Whole Page, or a percentage.
Find Text in Report
Searches for every occurrence of a word or phrase. Use the Find and Next options to locate
the word or phrase, and then move to the next instance in the report.
HEI Standard
Main window ribbon: Analysis > Equipment > HEI Standard
Main window menu: Analysis > 5 - HEI Standard
Evaluates the allowable loads on shell type Heat Exchange Institute (HEI) standard nozzles. To
begin, specify a new job name in the New Job Name Specification dialog box or click Browse
to navigate to an existing job file.

The software opens the HEI STD dialog box, in which you can enter the necessary input data.
The following example shows sample input for the HEI module:
Because the pressure is greater than zero, a pressure thrust force is computed and
combined with the radial force.
Section 3.14 of the HEI bulletin discusses the computational methods used to compute these
allowable loads. The method employed by HEI is a simplification of the WRC 107 method,
where the allowable loads have been linearized to show the relationship between the maximum
permitted radial force and the maximum permitted moment vector. If this relationship is plotted
(using the moments as the abscissa and the forces as the ordinate), a straight line can be drawn
between the maximum permitted force and the maximum permitted moment vector, forming a
triangle with the axes. For any set of applied forces and moments, the nozzle passes if the
location of these loads falls inside the triangle. Conversely, the nozzle fails if the location of the
loads falls outside the triangle.
Because the pressure is greater than zero, a pressure thrust force is computed and
combined with the radial force modified to include both the plot of the allowables and the
location of the current load set on this plot. The HEI bulletin states that the effect of internal
pressure has been included in the combined stresses; however, the effect of the pressure on the
nozzle thrust has not. This requires combination with the other radial loads. CAESAR II
automatically computes the pressure thrust and adds it to the radial force if Add Pressure
Thrust is selected on the HEI Nozzle (on page 967) tab.
After you enter all equipment details, click Analyze and the software displays the Equipment
Report tab. If any errors occur in the analysis, the software displays the Error/Warnings tab.

HEI Nozzle
The following options are used to enter input data for shell type heat exchanger nozzles.
Topics
Design Pressure ............................................................................ 967
Nozzle Outside Diameter ............................................................... 967
Shell Outside Diameter .................................................................. 967
Shell Thickness .............................................................................. 967
Material Allowable Stress .............................................................. 968
Maximum Radial Force .................................................................. 968
Maximum Longitudinal Moment ..................................................... 968
Add Pressure Thrust Force............................................................ 968
Sets the design pressure under which the vessel is operating. Enter a non-negative value.
Sets the design pressure under which the vessel is operating. Enter a non-negative value.
Indicates the outside diameter of the pressure vessel.
Defines the shell wall thickness. This software does not take any corrosion allowance into
consideration.
Specifies the yield strength (Sy) of the shell material at the operating temperature. Refer to
ASME Section VIII Division 1 for this information. Enter a positive value. The yield strength is
greater than the allowable stress.

Indicates the allowable stress of the shell material at the operating temperature, according to
ASME Section VIII Division 1. Enter a positive value.
Defines the shell wall thickness. This software does not take any corrosion allowance into
consideration.
Specifies the moment about the transverse axis of the vessel which the piping exerts on the
nozzle. Enter a non-negative value.
Controls whether the thrust force generated by the internal pressure is included or ignored.
Select this option to include the pressure thrust force. To ignore this force, do not select this
option.
All versions prior to CAESAR II 3.21a always included the pressure thrust force in
analysis.

SECTION 13
Technical Discussions
In This Section
Rigid Element Application .............................................................. 969
In-Line Flange Evaluation .............................................................. 971
Cold Spring .................................................................................... 972
Hanger Sizing Algorithm ................................................................ 977
Class 1 Branch Flexibilities ............................................................ 982
Modeling Friction Effects ............................................................... 984
Nonlinear Code Compliance .......................................................... 986
Sustained Stresses and Nonlinear Restraints ............................... 986
Static Seismic Inertial Loads.......................................................... 989
Wind Loads .................................................................................... 990
ASCE 7 Wind and Seismic Load Combinations ............................ 992
Using KHK to Analyze Seismic Conditions.................................... 993
Underground Pipe Loads ............................................................... 997
Hydrodynamic (Wave and Current) Loading ................................. 999
Creep Loading ............................................................................... 1012
Evaluating Vessel Stresses ........................................................... 1014
Inclusion of Missing Mass Correction ............................................ 1019
Fatigue Analysis Using CAESAR II ............................................... 1024
Pipe Stress Analysis of FRP Piping ............................................... 1037
Code Compliance Considerations ................................................. 1057
Local Coordinates .......................................................................... 1098
Rigid Element Application

A piping element that is stiffer or heavier than pipe of the same size (for example, a flanged
valve) can be modeled as a rigid element in CAESAR II. CAESAR II sets the stiffness of a rigid
element based on the inside diameter defined for the pipe but with a wall thickness set to ten
Rigid elements in CAESAR II are rigid relative to the pipe around it. For example, if a 6-inch line
ties into a 72-inch heat exchanger and rigid elements are used to model the heat exchanger,
those exchanger elements are better represented by 72-inch pipe rather than 6-inch pipe.

Rigid Weight
Specifies a value for the weight of the rigid element. The rigid material weight is the weight of
the rigid excluding insulation, refractory, cladding, or fluid. If left blank, then the weight of the
rigid defaults to 0. A rigid element with zero weight is often used as a construction element, used
to move a centerline load to the shell wall, or used to model the effective stiffness and thermal
growth of a piece of equipment.
If left blank or 0, then the software does not add the additional weight due either to
insulation, refractory, cladding, or fluid.
Fluid Weight in Rigid Elements

The fluid weight in a rigid element is assumed to be equal to the fluid weight in an equivalent
straight pipe of similar length and inside diameter.
Insulation Weight on Rigid Elements

The insulation weight for the rigid is assumed to be equal to 1.75 times the insulation for an
equivalent length of straight pipe of the entered outside diameter.
The total weight for rigid elements where the entered weight is zero will be zero.
The total weight for rigid elements where the entered weight is not zero is calculated as follows:
Weight = W u + W f + W r +1.75(W i+W c)
Where:
W u = User-defined rigid weight (the Thermal Expansion/Pipe Weight report will show
user-defined weight divided by entered length)
W f = Calculated fluid weight for equivalent straight pipe (this is reduced by refractory lining)
W r = Calculated refractory weight for equivalent straight pipe
W i = Calculated insulation cladding weight for equivalent straight pipe
W c = Calculated cladding weight for equivalent straight pipe
CAESAR II does not calculate stress on rigid elements. Forces and moments are not normally
printed for rigid elements however, you can select the appropriate check box found in
Environment>Special Execution Parameters from the Piping Input spreadsheet to print
these loads.
Zero-weight rigid elements are useful where modeling non-pipe components where thermal
growth or load transfer is important.
Use zero-weight rigids to model piping hardware such as expansion joint tie rods, base plates,
and trunnions.
You can also use these dummy rigids to provide connectivity between the centerline of an
element and the outside edge of the element. The most common example of this is when you

need to add a dummy rigid that runs from the node at the centerline of the vessel to the outside
wall where you want to connect the nozzle.
You can also model equipment using a series of rigid elements, joining nozzles to a body and
perhaps to a support point. This approach will properly distribute thermal strain through the
component based on this geometry and the entered element temperatures. For more
information on the use of these construction rigids, see the CAESAR II Applications Guide in
various sections as appropriate to a particular modeling technique.
In-Line Flange Evaluation

Allows you to choose the method to use for evaluating flanges under load:
The Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method
The ASME NC-365.8 Calculation for B16.5 Flanged Joints
Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method

Converts piping axial forces and bending moments into an equivalent pressure on the flange.
After the conversion is complete, the software adds this equivalent pressure to the pressure
defined in the load case. It then compares this sum to the allowable pressure rating for the
flange at the appropriate temperature. (The pressure-temperature table is defined in the model
input and the temperature is specified on the Load Cases tab of the Static Analysis - Load
Case Editor.) The formula for the total equivalent pressure displays below:
Peq = 16M/( )G3 + 4F/ ( )G2 + PD
Where:
Peq = total equivalent pressure (for checking against flange rating)
M = calculated bending moment on flange
G = diameter of effective gasket reaction
F = absolute value of the calculated axial force on flange
PD = pressure specified in the load case (for example, P1 for W+T1+P1)
The allowable pressure rating will be multiplied by the occasional load factor specified
on the Load Cases tab.
ASME NC-3658.3 Calculation Method for B16.5 Flanged

Joints with High Strength Bolting
Restricted to joints using flanges, bolting, and gaskets as specified in ANSI B16.5 that use
bolting materials having an S value at 100°F (38°C) greater than or equal to 20,000 psi (138
MPa). CAESAR II uses the analysis method for Service Level A as stated in NC-3658.3(a)(2):
Mfs b
or
Mfd b
Where:

Mfs = Bending or torsional moment, whichever is greater, acting on the flange, and due to
weight, thermal expansion, sustained anchor movements, relief valve steady state thrust,
and other sustained mechanical loads. CAESAR II considers any moments developed
during a non-Occasional Load Case to be Mfs.
Mfd = Bending or torsional moment, whichever is greater, acting on the flange, as defined for
Mfs and but also including any dynamic loadings. CAESAR II considers any moments
developed during an Occasional Load Case to be Mfd, effectively the doubling flange
capacity for Occasional loadings.
Sy = Yield strength of flange material at design temperature. CAESAR II allows evaluation
to be done using as many as 10 different temperatures; Sy/36,000; where Sy, is given in psi,
cannot be greater than 36,000 psi
C = Bolt circle diameter
Ab = Total cross-sectional area of bolts
PD = Design pressure
CAESAR II calculates an Equivalent Stress S in the flange and compares it to Sy (or 2*Sy for
occasional load cases), in the following manner:
S = 36,000* Mfs / (CAb * 3125) (non-Occ)
S = 36,000 * Mfd / (CAb (Occ)
For systems of units that do not express stress in psi, the software converts the 36,000 values in
the above equations to the appropriate set of units.
You can do flange evaluations in Static Analysis only.
Cold Spring
Cold spring is a method where you introduce pipe strain in the installed state to modify the
resulting strain in the operating state. Adding this preload is commonly used to adjust (reduce)
equipment load in the operating state. In CAESAR II, you can indicate a cold spring into your
static load cases by using the CS variable in the load case definition.
A cut short (also called a cold pull) describes an intentional gap in the pipe assembly requiring
an initial tensile load to close the final joint. A cut long (also called a cold push) describes an
intentional overlap in the pipe assembly requiring an initial compressive load to close the final
joint. This initial gap or overlap is modeled as a cut short material or a cut long material,
respectively. CAESAR II reduces the cut short to zero length and doubles the cut long in any
load case that includes the CS load in the load case definition.
This initial cold pull is difficult to implement with any accuracy certainly in systems operating in
the creep range where long term effect is difficult to control or even predict. Due to the difficulty
of properly installing a cold spring system, most piping codes recommend that, when evaluating
equipment loads, you model only two-thirds of the design cold spring for equipment load
calculations. B31.3 also places an upper bound of four-thirds of the design cold spring for
equipment load evaluation.
In simple, linear systems without intermediate restraints, you can calculate the cold spring
element length (ignoring equipment growth) by using the following equation:
Ci = xLi dT
Where:

Ci = length of cold spring in direction i; where i is X, Y, or Z (inches)

Li = total length of pipe subject to expansion in direction i (inches)
= mean thermal expansion coefficient of material between ambient and operating
temperature (in/in/°F)
dT = change in temperature (°F)
x = percent cold spring
When x = 0%, there is no cold spring and there will be no reduction in the thermal strain found in
the operating load. When x = 100%, the operating load will have no thermal strain as all the
expected pipe strain will be realized in the installed state of the piping system. If x = 50%, the
pipe strain will be shared equally by both the installed load and operating load. This percent cold
spring (x) is not the same term as the two-thirds check mentioned above.
No credit can be taken for cold spring in the stress calculations, because the
expansion stress provisions of the piping codes require the evaluation of the stress range, which
is unaffected by cold spring, except perhaps in the presence of non-linear boundary conditions,
as discussed below. The cold spring adjusts installed and operating loads and the stress mean,
but not the stress range used in most expansion stress calculations.
You must consider several factors when using cold spring:

Verify that the cold reactions on equipment nozzles due to cold spring do not exceed nozzle
allowables.
Verify that the expansion stress range does not include the direct effect of the cold spring (in
other words, do not calculate the expansion stress range as the difference between the
operating state with cold spring and the installed state without cold spring).
Verify that the cold spring value/tolerance is much greater than fabrication tolerances. This
is related to the two-third and four-third checks mentioned previously.
For elevated temperature cases, where cold spring is used to reduce operating equipment
load, using the hot modulus of analysis may also have a significant effect on the load
magnitude.
Remember, however, that the software does not consider the hot modulus in the
stress calculations for expansion stress ranges. These additional load cases, which you can
use to evaluate equipment load (not system stress), can include the modulus of elasticity for
the temperature under consideration.
Specify the cold gaps or overlaps as elements defined as cut short or cut long materials
(CAESAR II materials 18 and 19, respectively). There are two approaches for this:
1. Model the whole length of the design cold spring.
a. Reset the material property on the element following the cold spring element.
b. Model the whole length of the design cold spring length for the cold spring element.
c. Analyze the cold spring system by running the following load cases:
Load Case 1 (OPE) W+T1+P1+CS includes all of the design cold spring

Load Case 2 (OPE) W+P1+CS includes all of the design cold spring but not the temperature.
Load Case 3 (SUS) W+P1 standard sustained case for code stress check
Load Case4 (EXP) L1-L2 expansion case for code stress check.
d. To check equipment operating loads considering actual cold spring variation (both
two-thirds and four-thirds checks here), use the following load cases. You can define
additional load cases for installed load variations.
Load Case 1 (OPE) W+T1+P1+CS includes all of the design cold spring
Load Case 2 (OPE) W+P1+CS includes all of the design cold spring but not the temperature.
Load Case4 (EXP) W+T1+P1+0.66 CS (use hot modulus)
Load Case 5 (OPE) W+T1+P1+1.33 CS (use hot modulus)
Load Case 6 (EXP) L1-L2 expansion case for code stress check.
2. Model 2/3 of the design cold spring.

As a change from the previous design, model two-thirds of the design cold spring length, and
use the following load cases:
Load Case 1 (OPE) W+T1+P1+1.5 CS includes all of the design cold spring
W+P1+1.5 CS includes all of the design cold spring, but not the
Load Case 2 (OPE)
temperature.
Load Case4 (OPE) W+T1+P1+CS (use hot modulus)
Load Case 5 (OPE) W+T1+P1+2 CS (use hot modulus)
Load Case 6 (EXP) L1-L2 expansion case for code stress check.

While often used to reduce the magnitude of loads on equipment and restraints (see above),
you can also use cold spring to accelerate the thermal shakedown of the system in fewer
operating cycles.
Expansion Joints
Checking the expansion joint box on the element enables definition of an expansion joint for that
element. Expansion joints can be modeled as a single element across the flexible length of the
joint or as a zero length element at the midpoint of the expansion joint. Expansion joints
elements have a zero-length if the Delta fields on the Pipe Element spreadsheet are left blank or
zero.
When an expansion joint has a defined length, CAESAR II builds the expansion joint as a beam
element using the element length with the entered expansion joint stiffnesses.
Four stiffness values define the expansion joint:
Axial
Transverse
Torsion
Bending

For expansion joints where flexible length is defined, the bending stiffness is defined by the
entered, flexible, length and the transverse stiffness of the joint. Some expansion joint catalogs
list what would be called bending flexibility rather than the required bending stiffness used in
CAESAR II. This bending flexibility is adequate for an expansion joint modeled by two rigid
elements that are pinned at the joint midpoint (a zero-length expansion joint) but it is the wrong
value for a flexible beam element. To address this ambiguity, CAESAR II calculates and applies
a bending stiffness based on the entered expansion joint length and transverse stiffness. We
suggest that you only enter the bending term from manufacturers' catalogs when using the
zero-length expansion joint model or for rubber joint which do not follow beam bending
definitions.
Typically, expansion joint manufacturers do not supply torsional stiffness data. If the
manufacturer does not supply the data, enter a large torsional stiffness value, and verify that the
resulting load on the bellows is not excessive. When the piping system is tight, and the diameter
large, the magnitude of the large torsional stiffness can significantly affect the magnitude of the
torsion carried by the joints. For example, a stiffness of 100,000 in.lb./deg. and 1E12 in.lb./deg.
can produce considerably different torsional load results. Conservatively speaking, the tendency
is to use the larger stiffness except that the torsional stiffness value is probably closer to the
100,000 in.lb./deg. In instances where a large torsional stiffness value is important, you can get
a stiffness estimate from the manufacturer, or use the equation below to derive an estimate. Use
this equation to conservatively estimate torsional loads on the bellows and surrounding
equipment.
Where
= 3.14159
Re = Expansion joint effective radius
t = Bellows thickness

E = Elastic Modulus
L = Flexible bellows length

When the expansion joint has a zero length, none of the expansion joint stiffnesses
are related. You must be sure that you enter a value in all of the Stiffness fields.
CAESAR II calculates the pressure thrust on the expansion joint if you type a value for the
bellows Effective ID on the Expansion Joint auxiliary dialog box. If there is no Effective ID
specified, then there is no pressure thrust calculated.
The mathematical model for pressure thrust indicates to apply a force equal to the pressure
multiplied by the effective area of the bellows at the two nodes that define the expansion joint.
The force can open the bellows if the pressure is positive, and close the bellows if the pressure
is negative.
This model does not correctly locate pressure load components in the vicinity of the
expansion joint. In most cases, the misapplied load does not affect the solution.
There are two components of the pressure thrust to apply in practice rather than the one
component applied in the model. The first component is equal to the pressure times the inside
area of the pipe and acts at the first change in direction of the pipe on either side of the
expansion joint. This load will tend to put the pipe wall between the change in direction and the
expansion joint in tension. The second component is equal to the pressure times the difference
between the bellows effective area and inside pipe area. This load acts at the end of the
expansion joint and tends to open the bellows up putting the pipe between the expansion joint
and the change in direction in compression.
In the mathematical model, the full component of the pressure thrust force is placed on the ends
of the bellows instead of having a portion shifted out on either side of the expansion joint.
Effective ID
The pressure area used to set the pressure thrust force on an expansion joint is provided by the
expansion joint manufacturer either as an effective area or effective inside diameter (ID). If the
pressure thrust load is to be included in the analysis, the Effective ID must be provided in the
expansion joint model definition. Any load case that includes a pressure term (for example,
ID.
Hanger Sizing Algorithm

At locations that you define, CAESAR II will select a rigid, variable or constant effort support
using the automated procedure defined here. Attention here is focused on selecting a variable
(spring) support from a manufacture
by CAESAR II.

Spring Design Requirements

A rigid rod is selected if the vertical thermal growth at the location is less than the value entered
Otherwise, CAESAR II selects the smallest single spring that satisfies all design requirements
provided in the hanger design data.
The spring design requirements are:
1. Both the operating (typically hot) and the installed (typically cold) loads must be within the
allowed working range of the spring.
2. The absolute value of the change in the load (the product of the travel and the selected
spring rate) divided by the design load must be less than the specified "Allowable Load
Variation" value. The default variation is 25%.
MSS SP-69 defines load variation as the ratio of the change in load and the
operating load. CAESAR II, in using the design load, will use the theoretical cold load
(discussed below), instead of the operating load, if the user selects "Cold Load" design.
3. If you specify "Available Space", then this space must be greater than the basic height of the
spring selected. Positive values are compared with hanger height and negative values are
compared with spring can height.
If the software cannot find a single spring that satisfies the design requirements, it
searches for two identical springs that will each carry half the load. If the software cannot find
any springs that satisfies the design requirements, it recommends a constant effort support for
the location.
Pre-Selection Load Case 1 Setting the Design Load
If you need to design a hanger, the first analysis case that you must run is the restrained weight
case. This case usually includes weight, pressure, and concentrated loads. Hanger hot loads
are calculated in the restrained weight case.
1. Place rigid Y-restraints at each hanger location.

2. Determine any anchors you want to designate as freed.
3. Verify the freed anchors are properly released.
Loads on the Y-restraints at hangers, calculated from the restrained weight case, are
designated as the hanger hot design loads.

Pre-Selection Load Case 2 Setting Hanger Deflection

through the Operating Case
After the restrained weight case, you must run an operating analysis. The operating case must
always be the second load case in the set of defined analysis cases. You can define the
operating load cases for hanger design any way you see fit. CAESAR II recommends the load
cases it thinks you should run whenever it detects the first attempt to analyze a particular
system. You can accept or reject the recommendations. If you define your own hanger design
load cases, you must understand exactly what is done in the "restrained weight" and operating
passes of the hanger design algorithm.
1. Remove the Y-restraints.

2. Insert the hot loads calculated from the hanger locations in the restrained weight analysis.
3. Change any freed anchors from the restrained weight analysis to fixed.
The vertical displacement of the operating case at each hanger location defines the travel of that
particular hanger. If there are single directional restraints or gaps in the system and a changed
status in the operating case, then the hanger loads are redistributed.
When CAESAR II detects a nonlinear status change, it reruns the restrained weight
case with the restraints left as they were at the end of the operating case. To determine the
updated travel, you must calculate the new restraint loads and run another operating case.
Post-Selection Load Case (Optional) Setting the Actual

Installed (Cold) Load
If you need to calculate the actual hanger installed loads, the third analysis level combination
case must define the weight configuration that exists in the field when a spring is installed.
Typically, this case includes weight without fluid contents and other live loads. The theoretical
cold, or installed load, is the load on the spring when the "unbalanced" installed load is applied
and the pipe is not allowed to displace vertically (the load will be "balanced" when the pipe is in
the operating or design position). The actual installed load may differ from the theoretical
installed load by (K)(d), where (K) is the spring stiffness and (d) is the displacement of the pipe
in the installed condition.
1. Install the hangers.

2. Apply the theoretical cold load and all other loads (for example, empty weight) that will be
present when the springs are set.
3. Calculate the position of all springs (d).
4. Set the actual installed spring load based on this installed position (installed load =
Theoretical Cold Load - (K)(d)).

Create Spring Load Cases

Up to three load cases are needed for spring sizing:
"Restrained" Weight (required)
Operating (required)
Installed Weight (optional)
After the Hanger Algorithm runs the hanger load cases, the software selects the hangers. The
software inserts the newly-selected springs into the piping system and includes them and their
preload (the Theoretical Cold Load) in the analysis of all remaining load cases.
Hanger installed loads are concentrated forces and are only included in subsequent load cases
that contain the hanger preload force set (+H).
You can specify any number of user-defined load cases after setting up the required spring load
cases.
Spring hanger design does not affect the ability of CAESAR II to check code compliance. In load
cases recommended by CAESAR II, the normal code compliance cases always follow the set of
load cases required for hanger design.
Multiple operating case spring hanger design implies that hanger loads and travels from more
than one operating case are included in the spring hanger selection algorithm.
Each spring in a multiple operating case hanger design has a Multiple Load Case Design
option. This design option tells CAESAR II how multiple loads and travels for a single hanger
are combined to get a single design load and travel. The set-up of the analysis cases is slightly
different for multiple operating case hanger design in that now there is more than one operating
case. You can use the Hanger Design Control dialog to specify the actual number of operating
cases.
The load cases that you analyze for multiple load case hanger design operating cases are:
Restrained Weight (this does not change)
Operating case #1
Operating case #9
Installed Weight (if requested)

Constant Effort Support

Enables you to specify the support load for a constant effort hanger and define the hanger
location. This value is also included in all hanger design runs and all analysis cases following
the hanger cases that include the hanger preload force set in their formulation.
Including the Spring Hanger Stiffness in the Design

Algorithm
The operating cases for hanger travel are normally analyzed with no stiffness included at the
hanger locations. This is why these cases are traditionally referred to as "free thermal" cases.
However, when the piping system is very flexible, or the selected springs are very stiff, the
actual resulting spring loads in the installed condition can vary significantly from the theoretically
calculated results. With such a load change, perhaps this shorter, more accurate spring
deflection may allow a smaller spring selection. In that case, CAESAR II enables you to include,
using an iterative process, the stiffness of the selected springs in the operating cases for hanger
travel.
You can activate this trait for all new models through the Configure\Setup by setting the option
to Include Travel to As Designed. You can also activate this option for individual models on the
Load Cases Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 587) tab by changing
the Hanger Stiffness option to As Designed.
Selecting this option could lead to convergence problems. If you use this option, be sure to
check the hanger load in the cold case in the field so that it matches the reported hanger Cold
Load.
You must always include the hanger preload force set H (the Theoretical Cold Load) in
subsequent load cases.
Applying thermal and displacement effects to the live loaded system should make an
installed hanger move to the hot, or balanced, load in this operating case.
Other Notes on Hanger Sizing

constant effort supports at these locations. Typically, zero load constant effort supports indicate
poor hanger locations. It is important to not simply ignore these selections as and other hangers
Unless you specifically designate your hanger design load cases with a KEEP status, they
display in the output reports as NOT ACTIVE.

Class 1 Branch Flexibilities

This analytical option was added to CAESAR II for the following reasons:
Automatic local flexibilities at intersections help you bound the true solution. Because the
computer time to do an analysis is less expensive, more frequently you can run several
solutions of the same model using slightly different input techniques to determine the effect
of the modeling difference on the results. This gives you a degree of confidence in the
numbers you get. For example, structural steel supporting structures can be modeled to see
the effect of their stiffnesses, nozzle flexibilities can be added at vessel connections to see
how these features redistribute load throughout the model, friction is added to watch its
effect on displacements and equipment loads, and with CAESAR II you can include Class 1
intersection flexibilities. The characteristic that makes this option convenient to use is that
you can enable or disable the Class 1 flexibilities using a single option in the setup file. No
other modification to the input required.
In WRC 329, there are a number of suggestions made to improve the stress calculations at
intersections. These suggestions are fairly substantial and are given in order of importance.
The most important item, as felt by E. Rodabaugh, in improving the stress calculations at
intersections is given, in part, as follows:
"In piping system analyses, it may be assumed that the flexibility is represented by a rigid
joint at the branch-to-run centerlines juncture. However, you should be aware that this
assumption can be inaccurate and should consider the use of a more appropriate flexibility
representation."
Use of the Class 1 Branch Flexibility feature may be summarized as follows: Include the
Class 1 Branch Flex option in the setup file.
Where reduced branch geometry requirements are satisfied, CAESAR II constructs a rigid
offset from the centerline of the header pipe to its surface, and then adds the local flexibility
of the header pipe, between the end of the offset, at the header, and the start of the branch.
Stresses computed for the branch are for the point at its connection with the header.
Where reduced branch geometry requirements are not satisfied, CAESAR II constructs a
rigid offset from the centerline of the header pipe to its surface. The branch piping starts at
the end of this rigid offset. There is NO local flexibility due to the header added. (It is
deemed to be insignificant.) Stresses computed for the branch are for the point at its
connection with the header.
The reduced branch geometry requirements that CAESAR II checks are
d/D 0.5 and D/T 100.0
Where:
d = Diameter of Branch
D = Diameter of Header
T = Wall thickness of Header
If you use the Class 1 branch flexibilities, intersection models in the analysis become stiffer
when the reduced geometry requirements do not apply, and become more flexible when the
reduced geometry requirements do apply. Stiffer intersections typically carry more loads and
thus have higher stresses lowering the stress in other parts of the system that have been

unloaded. More flexible intersections typically carry less load and thus have lower stresses. This
causes higher stresses in other parts of the system that have "picked up" the extra load.
The branch flexibility rules used in CAESAR II are taken from ASME III, Subsection NB, (Class
1), 1992 Edition, Issued December 31, 1992, from Code Sections NB-3686.4 and NB-3686.5.
When the reduced branch rules apply, use the following equations for the local stiffnesses:
TRANSLATIONAL:
AXIAL = RIGID
CIRCUMFERENTIAL = RIGID
LONGITUDINAL = RIGID
ROTATIONAL:
AXIAL = RIGID
CIRCUMFERENTIAL = (kx)d/EI
LONGITUDINAL = (kz)d/EI
Where:
RIGID = 1.0E12 lb./in. or 1.0E12 in.lb./deg.
d = Branch Diameter
E =
I = Cross Section Moment of Inertia
D = Header Diameter
T = Header Thickness
Tb = Branch Fitting Thickness
kx = 0.1(D/T)1.5[(T/t)(d/D)]0.5(Tb/T)
kz = 0.2(D/T)[(T/t)(d/D)]0.5(Tb/T)
For more information, see WRC 329 Section 4.9 Flexibility Factors. A brief quote from this
section follows:
"The significance of "k" depends upon the specifics of the piping system. Qualitatively, if "k" is
small compared to the length of the piping system, including the effect of elbows and their
k-factors, then the inclusion of "k" for branch connections will have only minor effects on the
calculated moments. Conversely, if "k" is large compared to the piping system length, then the
inclusion of "k" for branch connections will have major effects. The largest effect will be to
greatly reduce the magnitude of the calculated moments acting on the branch connection. To
to calculate "k" for a branch connection with D=30 in., d=12.75 in., and T=t=0.375 in.:
k = 0.1(80)1.5(0.425)0.5 * (1.0) = 46.6
This compares to the more typical rigid-joint interpretation that k=1, rather than k=46.6 !".
Further discussion in section 4.9 illustrates additional problems that can arise by overestimating
the stiffness at branch connections. Problems arise by believing "mistakenly" that the stress at
the intersection is too high. Further reference should be made to this section in WRC 329.

Branch automatic flexibility generation can be used where the user has only defined the branch
element in the model, that is has left the header piping out of the analysis. In this case there will
be no "offset" equal to one-half of the header diameter applied to the branch end. A "partial
intersection" is one where either the header pipe is not modeled, is modeled with a single
element, or is part of a geometric intersection where the header pipes are not colinear. In the
case where there is no header pipe going to the intersection, there will be no modification to the
model for the class 1 branch flexibilities. When at least a single header pipe is recognized, the
local flexibility directions are defined by the branch alone and in accordance with the CAESAR II
defaults for circumferential and longitudinal directions for the branch and header. You must build
full intersection models at all times, not only when employing the class 1 branch flexibility. In
most cases, building full intersection models eliminates problems caused by the assumptions
necessary when a partial intersection is described.
In the equations in NB-3686.5 for tn, the thickness of the branch pipe is used in all cases.
When branches are skewed with respect to the header pipe, and where the two header pipes
are colinear, the local Class 1 flexibilities are still taken to be the longitudinal and circumferential
directions that are tangent to the header surface at its intersection with the branch.
Class 1 branch flexibilities can be formed at both ends of a single pipe element.
The offsets necessary to form the class 1 intersections are automatically generated
by CAESAR II. There is no extra input required by you to have CAESAR II build these
intersections.
If there are already user-defined offsets at an intersection end, the computed offset to get from
the header centerline to its surface along the centerline of the branch is added to the already
entered user offset.
Automatic offsets are generated providing that the distance from the header centerline to the
header surface along the branch centerline is less than or equal to 98% of the total pipe straight
length.
When an element with a bend designation is part of an intersection model, the offset and
flexibility calculations are not performed.
Modeling Friction Effects

There are two methods to solving friction problems:
Insert a force at the node which must be overcome for motion to occur.
Insert a stiffness which applies an increasing force up to the value of Mu * Normal Force.
CAESAR II uses the stiffness method.

If there is motion at the node under evaluation then the friction force is equal to Mu * Normal
force. However, because there is a non-rigid stiffness placed at that location to resist the initial
motion; the node could experience some displacement. The force at the node is the product of
the displacement and the stiffness. If the resultant force is less than the maximum friction force
(Mu * Normal Force) the node is assumed to be not sliding. As a result, you might see
displacements at nodes that have not achieved the "sliding" friction force in the output report.
The maximum value of the force at the node is the friction force (Mu * Normal force). After the
system reaches this value, the reaction at the node stops increasing. This constant force value
is then applied to the global load vector during the next iteration to determine the nodal
displacements. The example below explains what happens in a "friction" problem.
1. The default friction stiffness is 1,000,000 lb./in. To solve convergence problems, consider
decreasing this value.
2. Until the calculated load at the node equals (Mu * Normal force), the restraint load is the
product of the displacement multiplied by the friction stiffness.
3. Should the calculated load exceed the maximum value of the friction force, the friction force
stops increasing because a constant effort force opposite the sliding direction is inserted in
the model in place of the friction stiffness.
If you increase the friction stiffness in the setup file, the displacements at the node may
decrease slightly. Usually, this causes a re-distribution of the loads throughout the system that
could have an adverse effect on the solution convergence.
If problems arise during the solution of a job with friction at supports, reducing the friction
stiffness typically improves convergence. You must do several runs with varying values of the
friction stiffness to ensure the behavior of the system is consistent.
For more information on this subject, see "Inclusion of a Support Friction into a Computerized
Solution of a Self-Compensating Pipeline" by J. Sobieszczanski, published in the Transactions
of the ASME, Journal of Engineering for Industry, August 1972. A summary of the major points
of this paper is below.
For dry friction, the friction force magnitude is a step function of displacement. This
discontinuity means the problem as intrinsically nonlinear and eliminates the possibility of
using the superposition principle.
The friction loading on the pipe can be represented by an ordinary differential equation of
the fourth order with a variable coefficient that is a nonlinear function of both dependent and
independent variables. No solution in closed form is known for an equation of this
type. The solution has to be sought by means of numerical integration to be carried out
specifically for a particular pipeline configuration.
Dry friction can be idealized by a fictitious elastic foundation, discretized to a set of elastic
spring supports.
A well-known property of an elastic system with dry friction constraints is that it may attain
several static equilibrium positions within limits determined by the friction forces.
The whole problem then has clearly not a deterministic, but a stochastic character.

Nonlinear Code Compliance

You can adhere to nonlinear piping code compliance requirements by doing the following:
1. Performing an operating and sustained analysis of the system and including with each case
the effect of nonlinear restraints.
2. Subtracting the sustained case displacements from the operating case displacements to find
the displacement range.
3. Calculating the expansion stresses from the displacement range solved for in step 2.
CAESAR II uses this method for calculating the expansion stress range. In addition, CAESAR II
scans your input and recommends load cases and combinations for performing the operating,
sustained, and expansion stress calculations. This recommendation is useful when performing
spring hanger analysis of a multiple operating case system.
Sustained Stresses and Nonlinear Restraints

The proper computation of sustained stresses has been an issue since the late 1970s, when
pipe stress analysis software first attempted to address the problem of non-linear restraints. The
existing piping codes offered little guidance on the subject, because their criteria were
developed during the era when all analyses were simplified to behave in a strictly linear fashion.
Problems arose because the codes require that a piping system be analyzed separately for
sustained loadings. You must determine which loadings are causing which stresses. Sustained
loads are force loadings that are assumed not to change, while expansion loadings are
displacement loadings that vary with the system operating conditions. Determination of the
sustained loads is the simple part most everybody agrees that those forces consist of weight,
pressure, and spring pre-loads. These forces remain relatively constant as the piping system
goes through its thermal growth.
However, confusion occurs when the status of nonlinear restraints changes (pipe lift-off of
supports, gaps close, and so forth) as the pipe goes from installed to operating state. In this
case, you must determine which boundary conditions to use when evaluating the applied forces.
In other words, what portion of the stress in the operating case is caused by weight loads, and
what portion is caused by expansion effects?
There is no corresponding confusion on the question of calculating expansion
stresses, because the codes are explicit in their instructions that the expansion stress range is
the difference between the operating and cold stress positions (both of which are known).
The obvious answer to this question by the developers of some pipe stress software was that
the sustained stress calculation should be done using the operating, or hot boundary condition.
This compounded the problem in that the laws of superposition no longer held. In other words,
the results of sustained (W+P) and thermal (T) cases, when added together, did not equal the
results of the operating (W+P+T) case. One industry pioneer, DYNAFLEX, attempted to resolve
this by introducing the concept of the "thermal component of weight," which was an oxymoron,
in our opinion.
Other software, notably those applications which came from the mainframe/linear analysis
world, had to approximate the behavior of these non-linear restraints. Their approach to the
problem is to run an operating case, obtain the restraint status, and modify the model according
to these results. All subsequent load cases analyzed use this restraint configuration. The fact
that the laws of static superposition did not hold was hopefully not noticed by the user. CAESAR

II, on the other hand, represents technology developed expressly for operation on the personal
computer, and therefore incorporates directly the effects of non-linear restraints. This is done by
considering each load case independently. The restraint configuration is determined for each
load case by the program as it runs, based upon the actual loads that are considered present.
Some users have asserted that there are actually two sustained load cases. In fact, there has
been a B31.3 code interpretation that indicates that the sustained stress may also be checked
with the operating restraint configuration. Calculating the sustained stresses using the operating
restraint status raises several other issues; what modulus of elasticity should be used, and
which sustained stresses should be used for occasional cases.
It is our assertion that there is only one sustained case (otherwise, it is not "sustained"). There
can be, however, multiple sustained stress distributions. The two most obvious are those
associated with the cold (installed) and hot (operating) configurations. However, there are also
numerous in-betweens, as the piping system load steps from cold to hot. Whether the "true"
sustained load case occurs during the installed or operating case is a matter of the frame of
reference. If an engineer first sees a system in its cold condition, and watches it expand to its
operating condition, it appears that the first case (because weight and pressure primary loads
are present) is the sustained case, and the changes he viewed are thermal effects (due to
heat up) secondary loads due to displacements. If a second engineer first sees the same
system in the operating case and watches it cool down to the cold case, he may believe that the
first case he saw (the operating case) is the sustained case, and changes experienced from hot
to cold are the thermal expansion effects (the thermal stress ranges are the same in both
cases). Consider the further implications of cryogenic systems where changes from installed to
operating are the same as those experienced by hot systems when going from operating to
installed. After elastic shakedown has occurred, the question becomes clouded even further due
to the presence of thermally induced pre-stresses in the pipe during both the cold and hot
conditions. We feel either the operating or installed case (or some other one in-between) could
justifiably be selected for analysis as the sustained case, as long as the program is consistent.
We selected the installed case (less the effect of cold spring) as our reference sustained case,
because thermal effects can be completely omitted from the solution (as intended by the code).
This best represents the support configuration when the sustained loads are initially applied. If
the pipe lifts off of a support when going from installed to operating, we view this as a thermal
effect
distribution as the piping system goes from cold to hot, and is explicitly corroborated by one
code, an earlier edition of the French petrochemical code, which states that weight stress
distributions due to thermal growth of the pipe should be considered as expansion stresses). For
example, we feel that a change in a rigid support load from 2,000 lbs to zero should be treated
no differently than would be a variable spring load changing from 6,000 lbs to 4,000 lbs (or
another rigid support load going 2,000 lbs to 1 lb). In the former case, if the pipe became
"overstressed", it would yield, and sag back to the support, relieving the stress. This process is
identical to the way that all other expansion stresses are relieved in a piping system.
We are confident that our interpretation is correct. However, we understand that our users may
not always agree with us that is why CAESAR II provides the greatest ability to custom tailor
the analysis to your individual specifications. If you want, you can analyze a hot sustained case
by adding two load cases to those normally recommended by CAESAR II. This is done by
assuming that the pipe expands first, and then the sustained loads are applied (this is of course
an idealized concept, but the stresses can only be segregated by segregating the applied loads,
so the sustained loads can only be applied either before, or after, the expansion loads).
Following are the default load cases, as well as those required for a "hot sustained."

Default New
L1: W+P1+T1(OPE) L1: W+P1+T1(OPE)
L2: W+P1(SUS) L2: W+P1(SUS)
L3: L1-L2(EXP) L3: T1(EXP)
L4: L1-L2(EXP)
L5: L1-L3(SUS)
In the new load case list, the second case still represents the cold sustained, while the fourth
case represents the expansion case (note that L1-L2, or W+P1+T1-W-P1, equals T1, with
non-linear effects taken into account). The third case represents the thermal growth of the
weightless, non-pressurized pipe, against the non-linear restraints.
The fifth case (L1-L3, or W+P1+T1-T1, equals W+P1) represents the application of weight and
pressure to that expanded case, or the "hot sustained" case. Note that when the piping system
is analyzed as above, the actual effects of the non-linear restraints are considered (they are not
arbitrarily removed from the model), and the laws of superposition still hold.
An alternative school of thought believes that a "hot sustained" is only valid if: (1) the sustained,
primary loads are applied, (2) all springs are showing their Hot Load settings, and (3) any
supports that lift off (or otherwise become non-active) have been removed from the model. An
analysis such as this is achievable by setting the Keep/Discard status of the Restrained Weight
case (the first hanger design load case) to Keep, thus permitting the results of that case to be
viewable as for any other load case. The Restrained Weight case automatically removes
restraints that become non-active during the designated operating case, and apply the Hot Load
at each of the hanger locations.
Notes on Occasional Load Cases

Several piping codes require that you add the stresses from occasional loads (such as wind or
earthquake) to the sustained stresses (due to weight, pressure, and other constant loads) before
comparing them to their allowables. You can recreate this combination in CAESAR II using the
following load cases:
CASE #
1 W+P+H (SUS): Sustained stresses
2 WIND (OCC): Wind load set
3 U1 (OCC): Uniform g load set for earthquake
4 L1+L2 (OCC): Code stresses for wind
5 L1+L3 (OCC): Code stresses for earthquake*
* Scalar Summation Method required

If you must model nonlinear effects in the system, the load case combinations are not so straight
forward. Friction, one-direction restraints, and double-acting restraints with gaps are the
nonlinear items which complicate modeling. For this example, we will use wind loading on a long
vertical run of pipe with a guide. Assume there is a 1-inch gap between the pipe and guide.
Under normal operation, the pipe moves ¾-inch towards the stop leaving a gap of 1-¾-inch on
either side of the pipe and a ¼-inch gap on the other side. If you analyze the wind loads alone,
the pipe is allowed to move 1-inch from its center point in the guide to the guide stop. Because
occasional loads are usually analyzed with the system in operation, the pipe may be limited to a
¼-inch motion as the gap is closed in one direction, and 1-¾-inch if the gap is closed in the
opposite direction. With nonlinear effects modeled in the system, the occasional deflections (and
stresses) are influenced by the operating position of the piping.
The following list of CAESAR II load cases takes this point into consideration. The load cases
displayed below are only for wind acting in one direction, that is, +X. Depending on the system,
the most critical loads could occur in any direction +/-X, +/-Z, or skewed in XZ. The intention of
the load case construction is to find the effect of the occasional load on the piping system in the
operating condition. The stress due to the moment change from the operating to the operating
plus wind case is added to the stress from the sustained case.
CASE #
1 W+T1+P1 (OPE): Operation analysis
2 W+P1 (SUS): Sustained stresses
3 W+T1+P1+WIN (OPE): Operating analysis with wind

D1
4 L1-L2 (EXP): Expansion stresses (Algebraic summation)
5 L3-L1 (OCC): Net deflection of wind (Algebraic summation)
6 L2+L5 (OCC): Code stresses for wind (Scalar summation)
Case 5 computes the isolated wind effect on the piping system in the operating condition. Case
6 adds the stresses from Case 5 to the sustained stresses from Case 2.
Static Seismic Inertial Loads

Static earthquake loads are applied in a manner very similar to static wind loads. The static
loading magnitude is considered to be in direct proportion to the weight of the element. Express
earthquake load magnitudes in terms of the gravitational acceleration constant g. If you model
an earthquake with a 0.5-g load in the X direction, then half of the systems weight is turned into
a uniform load and applied in the X direction.
You create earthquake static load cases the same way you create wind occasional load cases.
Use the same load case, nonlinearity, and directional sensitivity logic. In some cases, the client
specifies the magnitude of the earthquake loading in g's and the direction(s). In other cases,
analysis is left to the discretion of the analyst. It is not unusual to see only X-Y or Z-Y
components of an earthquake. It is also not uncommon to see X, Y, and Z simultaneous
components.

Dynamic (response spectrum) evaluation of earthquake loads are discussed later in this section,
in the dynamic analysis and output sections, and in the screen reference section.
The ASCE #7 method for determining earthquake coefficients is described below. After you
calculate the earthquake coefficients, enter the g-factors as uniform loads on the piping
spreadsheet.
Calculate the horizontal seismic design force using equation 13.3-1 from ASCE 7 (10):
Fp = [(0.4 ap SDS W p) / (Rp / Ip)] (1 + 2 z / h)
But, because W p is "component operating weight", Fp/W p = calculated (horizontal)
acceleration, aH, so;
aH = [(0.4 ap SDS) / ( Rp / Ip )] (1 + 2 z / h),
additionally;
aH 1.6 SDS Ip
and:
aH 0.3 SDS Ip
Where:
ap = Component amplification factor, from Table 13.6-1
= 2.5 for "Piping"
SDS = Design elastic response acceleration at short period (0.2 sec), from Section 11.4.4
Rp = Component response modification factor, from Table 13.6-1
= 12.0 for "Piping in accordance with ASME B31... with joints made by welding or
brazing"; values range as low as 3.0 for other joints and for less ductile materials.
Ip = Component importance factor, from Section 13.1.3
= 1.5 for life-safety components, components containing hazardous material, or
components that are required for continuous operation; 1.0 for all others
z = Height in structure at point of attachment
h = Average roof height of structure
Wind Loads
You can define your own wind pressure profile (Wind Pressure vs Elevation) or wind speed
(Wind Velocity vs Elevation) profile, or you can access wind load data from the following wind
codes:
ASCE 7 IBC
AS/NZS 1170 IS 875
Brazil NBR 6123 Mexico
BS 6399-2 NBC
China GB 50009 UBC

EN 1991-1-4
By defining a wind shape factor in the model input, CAESAR II allows you to define up to four
wind vectors in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor. Multiply the pipe exposed area by the
equivalent wind pressure and the pipe shape factor.
CAESAR II includes insulation thickness in the cladding. You must also consider the
angle to the wind with your calculations.
There are three ways to determine the equivalent wind pressure:

Selecting a regional wind specification (by building code)
Use the Wind Pressure vs Elevation user-defined method
Use the Wind Velocity vs Elevation user-defined method
Calculate the total wind force on the element by using the following equation:
F = PeqSA
Where:
F = the total wind force on the element

Apply the wind force in the three
global directions as a function of the element
direction cosines.
Peq = the equivalent wind pressure (dynamic

pressure)
Calculate Peq for each end of the element and
then take the average.
The average applies uniformly over the whole
length of the element.
S = the pipe element wind shape factor
A = the pipe element exposed area as shown

in the figure to the right.
If you enter velocity versus elevation table data, then the program converts the velocity to a
dynamic pressure using the following equation:
P = 1/2 V2
Where V is the wind velocity and is the air density.
Enter the Wind Shape Factor on the piping input. For cylindrical elements, a value between 0.5
and 0.7 is used. A value of 0.65 is typical. The wind shape factor as entered is distributive. This

means that the shape factor entered in piping input is carried forward and applies for all
following elements until zeroed or changed.
There is no need to enter the same shape factor on each piping input segment. Zero or
disable the wind shape factor if the piping system runs inside of a building or similarly protective
structure.
Enter wind load parameters on the tab Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor
Dialog Box) (on page 600) of the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor. You can enter up to four
different wind loads per analysis. These typically might be setup to model wind loads in the +X,
-X, +Z, and -Z directions.
Elevation
It is important to set the proper elevation of the piping system (height above ground) when
running a wind analysis. When a wind shape factor is specified in the input, CAESAR II prompts
you for the elevation (and horizontal coordinates) of this first node. By default, CAESAR II
assigns the "From" node of the first element an elevation of 0.0. You can also use the procedure
below to set the reference wind elevation of the piping system.
1. Click EDIT > GLOBAL.

A dialog appears.
2. Enter the global coordinates of the first node in the system.
3. Repeat step 2 for each (if any) disconnected section until you are finished.
You can specify and save the coordinates for up to 100 node points from the model.
ASCE 7 Wind and Seismic Load Combinations

The ASCE 7 standard provides two design methods:
Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) compares required strength to actual
strengths. LRFD provides the actual response of the system, including deflections and loads
on supports and structure, when the actual wind or seismic load is applied.
Allowable Stress Design (ASD) compares actual and allowable stresses. ASD uses load
reduction factors (0.7 for seismic events and 0.6 for wind events) when calculating stresses.
CAESAR II uses ASD to evaluate a piping system under wind and seismic loads. To comply
with ASCE 7 requirements, you must include the load reduction factors in your load cases for
stress compliance.
The following table provides example load combinations showing the use of ASCE 7 load
reduction factors (in bold).
Load Stress
Case Definition Name Type
L1 W+P+T+0.7U1 Operating case with seismic load (using the reduction OPE
factor) for computing stresses

L2 W+P+T+U1 Operating case with seismic load for computing loads OPE
on supports and deflections
L3 W+P+T+0.6W Operating case with wind load (using the reduction OPE
factor) for computing stresses
L4 W+P+T+W Operating case with wind load for computing loads on OPE
supports and deflections
L5 W+T+P Operating case OPE
L6 W+P Sustained case SUS
L7 L1-L5 Preparatory case for stress evaluation due to seismic OCC

load
L8 L3-L5 Preparatory case for stress evaluation due to wind OCC

load
L9 L6+L7 Seismic sustained + occasional SUS+OCC
L10 L6+L8 Wind sustained + occasional SUS+OCC
In CAESAR II 2019 (version 11) and later, the Seismic Wizard no longer
includes the 0.7 reduction factor for consistency with wind loads, which never included the 0.6
reduction factor.
Using KHK to Analyze Seismic Conditions

KHK is the High Pressure Gas Safety Institute of Japan, an independent organization. KHK
creates and issues technical standards for designing plant infrastructure against seismic
loading.
CAESAR II addresses KHK standards within the Seismic Wizard (on page 293) in the piping
input. You can use the Seismic Wizard to calculate a seismic load, which is expressed in units
of acceleration due to gravity (g).
When analyzing seismic conditions, you should calculate the support movement and ground
liquefaction according to KHK seismic standards and the support configuration, and enter those
values into the software.
Level 1 assesses conditions in the likelihood of a probable strong earthquake during the life of
equipment. The goal is for the plant or facilities to remain safe without plastic deformation and
without leakage.
KHK Level 1 evaluation requires the following stress types
K1P

The K1P stress type defines the primary longitudinal stress for the HPGSL and JPI piping
codes. The longitudinal stress is due to pressure, weight, and design seismic force (g-load on
piping).
For the equations and allowables for K1P, see International Code Stresses in the CAESAR II
Quick Reference Guide.
CAESAR II treats the K1P stress type as an occasional (OCC) stress type for other
piping codes.
K1SR
The K1SR stress type defines the secondary cyclic stress range for the HPGSL and JPI piping
codes. The cyclic stress range is due to the design seismic force (g-load on piping) and support
movement.
For the equations and allowables for K1SR, see International Code Stresses in the CAESAR II
CAESAR II treats the K1SR stress type as an expansion (EXP) stress type for other
piping codes.
Load Case Stress Combination Condition

Type Method
L1 W+T1+P1 OPE NA Typical operating load case
L2 W+P1 SUS NA Sustained load case
L3 W+T1+P1+U1 OPE NA Operating condition with inertial

seismic force (g)
L4 W+T1+P1+U1+D1 OPE NA Operating condition with inertial

seismic force (g) + relative support
movement
L5 L3-L1 OCC Algebraic Inertial seismic force (g)
L6 L4-L1 OCC Algebraic Inertial seismic force (g) + relative

support displacement
L7 L2+L5 K1P Scalar Sustained condition + inertial seismic

force (g)
L8 2L6 K1SR Algebraic Stress range including inertial seismic

force(g) + relative support movement
Different loading directions may require more elaborate load cases.
Level 2 assesses the strongest possible earthquake during the life of that equipment. This
earthquake has an extremely low probability of occurrence. The goal is for the plant or facilities

to remain safe without any leakage, but with plastic deformation of piping allowed. KHK Level 2
requires consideration of ground distortion by possible soil liquefaction, in addition to ground
acceleration and support displacement.
In a piping system under extreme earthquake conditions (such as defined by KHK Level 2), the
pipe bends go into the plastic range before the straight pipe becomes plastic. Level 2
incorporates the bend plasticity in the solution process by applying equivalent elastic flexibilities.
This solution is performed in an iterative way, with the opening or closing of each bend
evaluated at the end of each iteration. If the bend angle changes more than the prescribed limit,
the analysis modifies the bend stiffness to simulate plasticity and reanalyzes for that particular
iteration. This process continues until the solution converges for that load case. The converged
bend angle is then compared to the allowable bend angle to check failure criteria. The software
reports this data in a special bend report.
Due to the iterative solution required to address bend plasticization, the software
limits the KHK 2 load cases to basic load combinations.
KHK Level 2 evaluation requires the following stress types. You may need to construct multiple
load cases to implement these conditions.
K2P
The K2P stress type defines the primary longitudinal stress for the HPGSL and JPI piping
codes. The longitudinal stress is due to internal pressure, weight, and seismic force (g-load on
piping).
For the equations and allowables for K2P, see International Code Stresses in the CAESAR II
CAESAR II treats the K2P stress type as an occasional (OCC) stress type for other
piping codes. The software sets the allowable to 0 for other piping codes due to the extreme
nature of the loading.
K2SA
The K2SA stress type defines secondary cyclic stress amplitude for the HPGSL and JPI piping
codes. The stress amplitude is due to seismic force (g-load on piping) and support movement.
You should use K2SA for secondary amplitude load cases.
For the equations and allowables for K2SA, see International Code Stresses in the CAESAR II
CAESAR II treats the K2SA stress type as an expansion (EXP) stress type for other
K2SR
The K2SR stress type defines the secondary cyclic stress range for the HPGSL and JPI piping
codes. The cyclic stress range is due to seismic force (g-load on piping) and response
displacement. You should use K2SR for secondary range load cases.
For the equations and allowables for K2SR, see International Code Stresses in the CAESAR II
CAESAR II treats the K2SR stress type as an expansion (EXP) stress type for other
K2L

The K2L stress type defines liquefaction for the HPGSL and JPI piping codes. Liquefaction
causes the angular displacement corresponding to a maximum equivalent plastic strain of 5%
(in degrees).
For the equations and allowables for K2L, see International Code Stresses in the CAESAR II
CAESAR II treats the K2L stress type as an expansion (EXP) stress type for other
Stress Type OPE Earthquake Allowable
P W T U D
K2P Bend: a=1.14/h

0.46
(Inertia)
Others: 2S
K2SA Amplitude: Plasticity-2%

(Inertia) (Support Structure)
Bend: a=1.14/h
0.46
Others: 2Sy
K2SR Range: Plasticity-4%

(Inertia) (Support Structure)
Bend: a= 2x1.14/h0.46
Others: 2x2Sy
K2L Range: Plasticity-5%

(Ground Displacement/
Liquefaction) Bend: a=2.43/h0.46
Others: 4Sy
Load Case Stress Condition

Type
L1 W+T1+P1 OPE Typical operating load case
L2 W+P1 SUS Sustained load case
L3 W+T1+P1+U1 K2P Operating condition with inertial seismic force (g)
L4 U1+D1 K2SA Stress amplitude including inertial seismic force (g) +

& relative support displacement
L5 D2 K2L Ground displacement (liquefaction)

You can also construct a range case to use the K2SR stress type, as shown in following
example. In this example, the range is twice the load amplitude. You can add this load case to
the load case set in the previous example.
Load Case Stress Condition

Type
L6 2U1+2D1 K2SR Secondary stress range including inertial seismic force

(g) + & relative support displacement
Different loading directions may require more elaborate load cases.
Underground Pipe Loads

Typical buried pipe displacements are considerably different than similar above-ground
displacements. Buried pipe deforms laterally in areas immediately adjacent to changes in
directions, such as those found in bends and tees. In areas far removed from bends and tees,
the deformation is primarily axial. The optimal size of an element, that is, the distance between a
single FROM and a TO node, is dependent upon which of these deformation patterns is to be
modeled. Because there is no continuous support model, the software must locate additional
point supports along a line to simulate this continuous support. These additional point supports
can also be user-defined. For a given stiffness per unit length, one of the following must be
added:
Several closely spaced, low stiffness supports
A limited number of distant and high stiffness supports
Where the deformation is lateral, smaller elements are needed to properly distribute the forces
from the pipe to the soil. The length over which the pipe deflects laterally is called the "lateral
bearing length" and can be calculated using the following equation:
Lb = 0.75( tr]
0.25
Where:
E = Pipe modulus of elasticity
l = Pipe moment of inertia
Ktr = Transverse soil stiffness on a per length basis

CAESAR II places three elements in the vicinity of this bearing span to properly model the local
load distribution. The bearing span lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 1 lengths. The
intermediate lengths in a piping system are called Zone 2 lengths, and the axial displacement
lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 3 lengths. To properly transmit axial loads, Zone
3 element lengths are computed using 100 x Do, where Do is the outside diameter of the piping.
The Zone 2 mesh consists of four elements of increasing length; starting at 1.5 times the length
of a Zone 1 element at its Zone 1 end, and progressing in equal increments to the last which is
50 x Do long at the Zone 3 end. CAESAR II views a typical piping system element breakdown or
mesh distribution as shown below. All pipe density is set to zero for all pipe identified as buried
so that deadweight causes no bending around these point supports.
CAESAR II automatically puts a Zone 1 mesh gradient at each side of the pipe
framing into an elbow. You must tell CAESAR II where the other Zone 1 areas are located in the
piping system.
A critical part of the modeling of an underground piping system is the proper definition of Zone
1or lateral bearing regions. These bearing regions primarily occur:
On either side of a change in direction.
For all pipes framing into an intersection.
At points where the pipe enters or leaves the soil.
Using any user-defined node within or near Zone 1.
CAESAR II converts the original job into the buried job by meshing the existing elements and
adding soil restraints. The conversion process creates all of the necessary elements to satisfy
the Zone 1, Zone 2, and Zone 3 requirements, and places restraints on the elements in these
zones. All elbows are broken down into at least two curved sections, and very long radius
elbows are broken down into segments whose lengths are not longer than the elements in the

unique in the model. All densities on buried pipe elements are zeroed to simulate the continuous
support of the pipe weight. A conversion log is also generated, which details the process in full.
Hydrodynamic (Wave and Current) Loading

Ocean waves are generated by wind and propagate out of the generating area. Ocean wave
generation is dependent on the wind speed, the duration of the wind, the water depth, and the
distance over which the wind blows the fetch length. There are several two-dimensional wave
theories, but the three most widely used are the Airy (linear) wave theory, Stokes 5th Order
wave theory, and Dean's Stream Function wave theory. The latter two theories are non-linear
wave theories and provide a better description of the near surface effects of the wave.
Of course, wave motion is a three-dimensional action but it can be adequately
represented by two dimensions. One dimension is the direction the wave travels, and the other
dimension is vertical through the water column. Two dimensional waves are not found in the
marine environment, but are somewhat easy to define and determine properties for. In actuality,
waves undergo spreading, in the third dimension. To understand this concept, think about a
stone dropped in a pond. As the wave spreads, the diameter of the circle increases. In addition
to wave spreading, a real sea state includes waves of various periods, heights, and lengths. To
address these actual conditions, you must use a sea spectrum that includes a spreading
function.
Airy (linear) wave theory assumes the free surface is symmetric about the mean water level.
Additionally, water particle motion is in a closed circular orbit, the diameter of which decays with
depth. You should take the term circular loosely because, the orbit varies from circular to
elliptical based on whether the wave is in shallow or deep water.
Additionally, for shallow water waves, the wave height to depth ratio (H/D) is limited to 0.78 to
avoid breaking.
None of the wave theories address breaking waves.
The figure below shows a typical wave and associated hydrodynamic parameters.
SWL
The still water level.
L
The wave length or horizontal distance between successive crests or troughs.
H
The wave height or vertical distance between the crest and trough.

D
The water depth or vertical distance from the bottom to the still water level.
The surface elevation measured from the still water level.
Ocean Wave Particulars

The Airy Wave Theory Implementation (on page 1003) theory provides a good first
approximation to the water particle behavior. The nonlinear theories provide a better description
of particle motion, over a wider range depths and wave heights. Stokes 5 tH Wave theory is
based on a power series. This wave theory does not apply the symmetric free surface
restriction. Additionally, the particle paths are no longer closed orbits, which mean there is a
gradual drift of the fluid particles, that is, a mass transport.
Stokes 5tH Order Wave theory however, does not adequately address steeper waves over a
s Stream Function wave theory attempts to address this
deficiency. This wave theory employs an iterative numerical technique to solve the stream
function equation. The stream function describes not only the geometry of a two-dimensional
flow, but also the components of the velocity vector at any point, and the flow rate between any
two streamlines.

The most suitable wave theory is dependent on the wave height, the wave period, and the water
depth. Based on these parameters, the applicable wave theory can be determined from the
figure below (from API-RP2A, American Petroleum Institute - Recommended Practice 2A).
Applicable Wave Theory Determination

The limiting wave steepness for most deep-water waves is usually determined by the Miche
Limit:
H / L = 0.142 tanh( kd )
Where:
H is the wave height
L is the wave length
k is the wave number (2 )/L
d is the water depth
Pseudo-Static Hydrodynamic Loading

You can model individual pipe elements that experience loading due to hydrodynamic effects.

Fluid effects can impose a substantial load on the piping elements in a manner similar
to, but more complex than wind loading.
Use wave theories and profiles to compute the water particle velocities and accelerations at the
* Cd * D * U * |U| + /4 * * Cm * D2* A to
compute the force on the element.
Where:
- is the fluid density
Cd- is the drag coefficient
D - is the pipe diameter
U - is the particle velocity
Cm - is the inertial coefficient
A - is the particle acceleration
The particle velocities and accelerations are vector quantities that include the effects of any
elements are also subjected to a lift force and a buoyancy force. The lift force is defined as the
force acting normal to the plane formed by the velocity vector and the axis of the element. The
lift force is defined as:
Fl = ½ * * Cl * D * U2
Where:
- is the fluid density
Cl - is the lift coefficient
D - is the pipe diameter
U - is the particle velocity
The buoyancy force acts upward and is equal to the weight of the fluid volume displaced by the
element.
A piping system can be described by using the standard finite element equation:
[K] {x} = {f}
Where:
[K] - is the global stiffness matrix for the entire system
{x} - is the displacement / rotation vector to solve for
{f} - is global load vector
1. Place the element loads generated by the hydrodynamic effects in their proper locations in
{f}, similar to weight, pressure, and temperature.
2. Perform a standard finite element solution on the system of equations to finalize [K] and {f}.
3. Use the resulting displacement vector {x} to compute element forces.
4. Use the computed element forces to compute the element stresses.

Except for the buoyancy force, all other hydrodynamic forces acting on the element
are a function of the particle velocities and accelerations.
Airy Wave Theory Implementation

Airy Wave theory is also known as Linear Wave theory due to the assumption that the wave
profile is symmetric about the mean water level. Standard Airy Wave theory allows for the
computation of the water particle velocities and accelerations between the mean surface
elevation and the bottom. The Modified Airy Wave theory allows for the consideration of the
actual free surface elevation in the computation of the particle data. CAESAR II includes both
the standard and modified forms of the Airy wave theory.
To apply the Airy Wave theory, you must enter several descriptive parameters about the wave.
The software uses these parameters along with the Newton-Raphston iteration to determine the
wave length. Each wave has its own unique wave length that the software determines solving
the dispersion relation, shown below:
L = (gT2 / 2 ) * tanh(2 D / L)
Where:
g - is the acceleration of gravity
T - is the wave period
D - is the mean water depth
L - is the wave length to solve for
After determining the wave length (L), you can determine any other wave parameters you want.
The parameters determined and used by CAESAR II are: the horizontal and vertical particle
velocities (UX and UY), the horizontal and vertical particle acceleration (AX and AY), and the
surface elevation above (or below) the mean water level (ETA). For more information on the
equations for these parameters, refer to any text which discusses ocean wave theories.
STOKES 5th Order Wave Theory Implementation

The Stokes Wave is a 5th order gravity non-linear wave. CAESAR II uses the solution technique
described in a paper published in 1960 by Skjelbreia and Hendrickson of the National
Engineering Science Company. The standard formulation as well as a modified formulation, to
the free surface, is available in CAESAR II Stokes 5th Order Wave Theory.
The solution follows a procedure very similar to that used in the Airy Wave Theory
Implementation (on page 1003). You can determine the characteristic parameters of the wave
by using Newton-Raphston iteration, after finding the water particle values of interest.
The Newton-Raphston iteration procedure solves two non-linear equations for constants beta
and lambda. After you determine these values, you can compute the other constants. After
computing all of the constants, use CAESAR II to compute: the horizontal and vertical particle
velocities (UX and UY), the horizontal and vertical particle acceleration (AX and AY), and the
surface elevation above the mean water level (ETA).
Stream Function Wave Theory Implementation

The solution to Dean's Stream Function Wave Theory used by CAESAR II is described in the
text by Sarpkaya and Issacson. As previously mentioned, this is a numerical technique to solve

the stream function. The solution subsequently obtained, provides the horizontal and vertical
particle velocities (UX and UY), the horizontal and vertical particle acceleration (AX and AY),
and the surface elevation above the mean water level (ETA).
Ocean Currents
In addition to the forces imposed by ocean waves, piping elements can also be subjected to
forces imposed by ocean currents. There are three different ocean current models in
CAESAR II: linear current, piece-wise, and power law profile.
The linear current profile assumes that the current velocity through the water column varies
linearly from the specified surface velocity (at the surface) to zero (at the bottom).
The piece-wise linear profile employs linear interpolation between specific user-defined
depth/velocity points.
The power law profile decays the surface velocity to the 1/7 power.
While waves produce unsteady flow where the particle velocities and accelerations at a point
constantly change, currents produce a steady, non-varying flow.

Technical Notes on CAESAR II Hydrodynamic Loading

The input parameters necessary to define the fluid loading are described in detail in the next
section. The basic parameters describe the wave height and period, and the current velocity.
The most difficult to obtain, and also the most important parameters, are the drag, inertia, and lift
coefficients: Cd, Cm, and Cl. Based on the recommendations of API RP2A and DNV (Det Norske
Veritas), values for Cd range from 0.6 to 1.2, values for Cm range from 1.5 to 2.0. Values for Cl
show a wide range of scatter, but the approximate mean value is 0.7.
The inertia coefficient Cm is equal to one plus the added mass coefficient Ca. This added mass
value accounts for the mass of the fluid assumed to be entrained with the piping element.
In actuality, these coefficients are a function of the fluid particle velocity, which varies over the
water column. In general practice, two dimensionless parameters are computed that are used to
obtain the Cd, Cm, and Cl values from published charts. The first dimensionless parameter is the
Keulegan-Carpenter Number, K. K is defined as:
K = Um * T / D
Where:
Um = Maximum Fluid Particle Velocity
T = Wave Period
D = Characteristic Diameter of the Element
The second dimensionless parameter is the Reynolds number, R e. Re is defined as
Re = U m * D /
Where:
Um = Maximum Fluid Particle Velocity
D = Characteristic Diameter of the Element
= Kinematic Viscosity of the Fluid 1.26e-5 ft2/sec for Sea Water

After you calculate K and Re use the charts to obtain Cd, Cm, and Cl. For more information, see
Mechanics of Wave Forces on Offshore Structures by T. Sarpkaya. Figures 3.21, 3.22, and 3.25
are example charts, which display below.

In order to determine these coefficients, the fluid particle velocity (at the location of interest)
must be determined. The appropriate wave theory is solved, and these particle velocities are
readily obtained.
Of the wave theories discussed, the modified Airy and Stokes 5th theories include a modification
of the depth-decay function. The standard theories use a depth-decay function equal to cosh(kz)
/ sinh(kd),
Where:
k - is the wave number, 2 /L
L - is the wave length
d - is the water depth
z - is the elevation in the water column where the data is to be determined
The modified theories include an additional term in the numerator of this depth-decay function.
The modified depth-decay function is equal to cosh(d ) / sinh(kd),
Where:
- is equal to z / (d + h)
The term d represents the effective height of the point at which the particle velocity and
acceleration are to be computed. The use of this term keeps the effective height below the still
water level. This means that the velocity and acceleration computed are convergent for actual
heights above the still water level.
As previously stated, the drag, inertia, and lift coefficients are a function of the fluid velocity and
the diameter of the element in question. Note that the fluid particle velocities vary with both
depth and position in the wave train (as determined by the applied wave theory). Therefore,
these coefficients are in fact not constants. However, from a practical engineering point of view,
varying these coefficients as a function of location in the Fluid field is usually not implemented.
This practice can be justified when one considers the inaccuracies involved in specifying the
instantaneous wave height and period. According to Sarpkaya, these values are insufficient to
accurately predict wave forces, a consideration of the previous fluid particle history is necessary.
In light of these uncertainties, constant values for Cd, Cm, and Cl are recommended by API and
many other references.

The effects of marine growth must also be considered. Marine growth has the following effects
on the system loading: the increased pipe diameters increase the hydrodynamic loading; the
increased roughness causes an increase in Cd, and therefore the hydrodynamic loading; the
increase in mass and added mass cause reduced natural frequencies and increase the dynamic
amplification factor; it causes an increase in the structural weight; and possibly causes
hydrodynamic instabilities, such as vortex shedding.
to the "diameter to wave length" ratio. If this ratio exceeds 0.2, the inertial force is no longer in
phase with the acceleration of the fluid particles and diffraction effects must be considered. In
such cases, the fluid loading as typically implemented by CAESAR II is no longer applicable.
Additional discussions on hydrodynamic loads and wave theories can be found in the references
at the end of this article.
Input: Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters in CAESAR II

The hydrodynamic load analysis requires the specification of several measurable parameters
that quantify the physical aspects of the environmental phenomenon in question.
You can enter four different wave loads here. Use the Editing Load Case buttons to
move up or down between the Wave Load Input Spreadsheets.
The necessary hydrodynamic parameters are discussed in the following paragraphs and a
CAESAR II hydrodynamic loading dialog is shown in the figure below.

Current Data
Profile Type
Defines the interpolation method you want CAESAR II to use to determine the current
velocity as a function of depth. Available options for this entry are:
Power Law Profile
Determines the current velocity at depth D according to the equation:
Vd = Vs * [di / D]p
Where:
Vd - is the velocity at depth di
Vs - is the specified velocity at the surface
D - is the water depth
p - is the power, set to 1/7
Piece-wise Linear Profile
Performs a linear interpolation of a velocity verse depth table that you must provide, to
determine the current velocity at depth di. The table should start at the surface (a depth
of zero) and progress in increasing depth to the sea bed.
Linear Profile
Performs a linear interpolation to determine the current velocity at depth d i. However,
this method assumes the current velocity varies linearly from the specified surface
velocity to zero at the sea bed.
Current Speed
Defines the current speed at the surface. The units for this entry are (length/time) as
defined by the active units file at the time of input. This value should always be a
positive entry.
Current Direction Cosines
Defines the direction of fluid transport due to the current. These fields are unit-less and
follow the standard software global axis convention.
Wave Data
Wave Theory Indicator
Specifies which wave theory to use to compute the water particle velocities and
accelerations. The wave theories available are:
Standard Airy Wave
This is also known as linear wave theory. Discussion of this theory can be found in the
previously mentioned references.
Modified Airy Wave
This is a modification of the standard Airy theory which includes the free surface effects due
to the wave. The modification consists of determining a depth scaling factor equal to the
depth divided by the depth plus the surface elevation. Note that this scale factor varies as a

function of the location in the wave train.

Standard Stokes 5th Wave
This is a 5th order wave theory, also discussed in the previously mentioned references.
Modified Stokes 5th Wave
This is a modification of the standard Stokes 5th theory. The modification is the same as
applied to the Airy theory.
Stream Function Wave
references.
Modified Stream Function Wave
modified to directly consider current in the wave
solution.
Stream Function Order
When the Stream Function theory is activated, the solution order must be defined. Typical
values for the stream function order range from 3 to 13, and must be an odd value (see
API-RP2A figure).
Water Depth
Defines the vertical distance (in units of length) from the still water level the surface to the
sea bed.
Wave Height
Defines the height of the incident wave. The height is the vertical distance in units of length
from the wave crest to the wave trough.
Wave Period
Defines the time span (in seconds) for two successive wave crests to pass a fixed point.
Wave Kinematic Factor
Because the two-dimensional wave theories do not account for spreading, a reduction factor
is often used for the horizontal particle velocity and acceleration. Wave kinematic
measurements support values in the range of 0.85 to 0.95. Refer to the applicable offshore
codes before using this item.
Wave Direction Cosines
Define the direction of wave travel. These fields are unit-less and follow the standard
software global axis convention.
Wave Phase Angle
Defines the position of the wave relative to the starting node of the piping system. The
phase angle is a measure (in degrees) of position in the wave train, where 0 is the wave
crest, 180 is the wave trough, and 360 is the following crest. Because the wave propagates
over the piping structure, each point in the structure experiences all possible wave phase
angles. One analysis technique specifies the wave phase at the system origin, and then the
phase at each node point in the model is determined. From these exact phase locations, the
water particle data is computed from the wave theory.
Alternatively, a conservative engineering approach is to use the same phase angle usually

zero for all points in the model. This technique produces higher loads; however, the extra
conservatism is warranted when given the unknowns in specifying environmental data.
Seawater Data
Free Surface Elevation
Defines the height of the free surface from the global system origin. If the system origin is at
the free surface, this entry should be specified as zero. If the system origin is at the sea
bottom, this entry is equal to the water depth. By default, the first node in a CAESAR II
model is at an elevation of zero. You can change the elevation by pressing [Alt-+G].
Kinematic Viscosity
Defines the kinematic viscosity of water. This value is used to determine the Reynolds
number, which is subsequently used to determine the hydrodynamic coefficients Cd, Cm, and
Cl. Typical values of kinematic viscosity for sea water display below.
Temp Deg (F) n(ft2/sec) Temp (C) n(m2/sec)
60 1.26e-5 15.556 1.17058e-6
50 1.46e-5 10.000 1.35639e-6
40 1.55e-5 4.444 1.44000e-6
30 2.00e-5 -1.111 1.85807e-6
Fluid Weight Density

Defines the weight density of the fluid. For sea water, this value is approximately .037037
pounds per cubic inch (.001025 kg/cm3, 1.0256SG).
Piping Element Data

Element Exposure
In implementing hydrodynamic loading in your software, you must be able to indicate that
elements are either exposed to the fluid or not exposed to the fluid. In CAESAR II, this is
accomplished by a set of options, which indicate that the particular element is exposed to
hydrodynamic loads, wind loads, or not exposed. This specification carries forward for all
subsequent elements until changed.
Hydrodynamic Coefficients
Piping elements that are subjected to hydrodynamic loading must have drag (C d), inertia
(Cm), and a lift (Cl) coefficient defined. The specification of these items is optional.
Alternatively, you can specify these values as constants to be applied to all subsequent
exposed elements, regardless of depth or phase position in the wave. Alternatively, you can
leave these values blank, which causes CAESAR II to interpolate their values from the
charts previously discussed.
Marine Growth
Defines the amount of marine growth on the piping elements. This value is used to increase
the diameter of the piping elements. The units for this field are the units of the current

diameter. The diameter used in the computation of the hydrodynamic forces is equal to the
pipe diameter plus twice the marine growth entry.
References
1. Mechanics of Wave Forces On Offshore Structures, Turgut Sarpkaya and Michael Isaacson,
Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., 1982, ISBN 0-442-25402-4.
2. Handbook of Ocean and Underwater Engineering, Myers, Holm, and McAllister,
McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1969, ISBN 07-044245 -2.
3. Fifth Order Gravity Wave Theory, Lars Skjelbreia and James Hendrickson, National
Engineering Science Co., Pasadena, California, 1960.
4. Planning and Design of Fixed Offshore Platforms, McClelland and Reifel, Van Nostrand
Reinhold Co., 1986, ISBN 0-442-25223-4.
5. Intercomparison of Near-Bottom Kinematics by Several Wave Theories and Field and
Laboratory Data, R. G. Dean and M. Perlin, Coastal Engineering, #9 (1986), p399-437.
6. A Finite Amplitude Wave on a Linear Shear Current, R. A. Dalrymple, Journal of
Geophysical Research, Vol 79, No 30, 1974.
7. Application of Stream Function Wave Theory to Offshore Design Problems, R. G. Dean,
OTC #1613, 1972.
8. Stream Function Representation of Nonlinear Ocean Waves, R. G. Dean, Journal of
Geophysical Research, Vol 70, No 18, 1965.
9. American Petroleum Institute - Recommended Practice 2A (API-RP2A), American
Petroleum Institute, July 1993.
10. Improved Algorithm for Stream Function Wave Theory, Min-Chih Huang, Journal of
Waterway, Port, Coastal, and Ocean Engineering, January 1989.
11. Stream Function Wave Theory with Profile Constraints, Min-Chih Huang, Journal of
Waterway, Port, Coastal, and Ocean Engineering, January/February 1993.
Creep Loading
Creep is the slow, permanent deformation of a solid material under mechanical stresses. Creep
occurs at elevated temperatures during long-term exposure to high levels of constant stress
below the yield strength of the material. Power boiler piping is an example of the type of piping
subjected to creep loading.
At elevated temperatures, creep governs the allowable stress properties for a material.
Allowable values controlled by creep, also called time-dependent allowables, are a function of
duration of loads.
Default material allowables for ASME B31.3 and ASME B31.1 are based on 100,000 hours.
Creep life varies for EN-13480 materials, as shown in the following examples. CAESAR II
includes creep life in the material name.
For material 1.0345S-16-100 (material number 406 in CAESAR II):

16 - Indicates a maximum thickness of 16 mm.

100 - Indicates the allowable is for a load duration of 100,000 hours, which is the default
value for CAESAR II.
For material 1.0345S-16-200 (material number 468 in CAESAR II):
16 - Indicates a maximum thickness of 16 mm.
The allowable is for a load duration of 200,000 hours.
If the material allowable corresponding to the load duration you need is not
available, then you can create a new custom material with the required data.
The software calculates creep stresses according to EN-13480 equation 12.3.5-1:

5 = Pcdo/4en + 0.75iMA/Z + 0.75iMC/3Z fCR
where:
Pc = Calculation pressure (SUS)
MA = Resultant moment from weight and other sustained mechanical loadings (SUS)
MC = Resultant moment from thermal expansion and alternating loadings (EXP)
fCR = Hot allowable stress
In CAESAR II, creep stress (CRP) is a scalar combination of one sustained case (SUS) and one
expansion case (EXP). The first two terms of the equation are the sustained stress components
and the third term is the expansion stress component.
You do not need to specify additional load multipliers to implement creep according to the
equation, as shown in the following Load Case Editor example. If you specify additional load
multipliers, the software applies these as additional scale factors.
The software implements EN-13480 creep methodology for many of the other
supported piping codes.
CAESAR II considers the single-SIF and double-SIF methodologies for EN-13480 creep. For the
double-SIF method:
SbA = [(iiMi)2+(ioMo)2]1/2/Z. (due to primary loads from the sustained load case)
SbC is defined as SbA, except that it uses the range of resultant moments from the thermal
expansion load case.
5 = Pcdo/4en + SbA + SbC/3 < fCR
CAESAR II does not recommend creep load cases, so you must manually create a creep load
case using the CRP stress type. You can define a creep stress range for each strain range as
needed.
The following load set example contains two pressures (P1 and P2) and two temperatures (T1
and T2). T2 is in the creep range.

Two creep load cases (L9 and L10) correspond to P1 and P2 operating conditions at T2.
The final load case (L11) is the maximum combination case from all the CRP cases to
obtain maximum stress or loads in all the creep cases.
Load Stress Combination

Case Definition Name Type Method
L1 W+T1+P1 OPERATING CASE CONDITION 1 OPE UNDEFINED
L4 W+P1 SUSTAINED CASE CONDITION 1 SUS UNDEFINED
L5 W+P2 SUSTAINED CASE CONDITION 2 SUS UNDEFINED
L6 L1-L4 EXPANSION CASE CONDITION 1 EXP Algebraic
L9 L5+L7 Creep case between SUS L5, EXP CRP Scalar

range from L5 to L2
L10 L4+L8 Creep case between SUS L4, EXP CRP Scalar
range from L4 to L3
L11 L9, L10 Max creep case CRP Max
Evaluating Vessel Stresses

ASME Section VIII Division 2 CAESAR II applies rules prior to the 2007 Edition provides a
procedure to analyze the local stresses in vessels and nozzles. For this example, we will only
discuss the nozzle analysis approach.
Always refer to the applicable design code if any of the limits described in this section
are approached, or if any unusual material, weld, or stress situation exists, or there are
non-linear concerns such as the operation of material within creep range.
The first step is to determine if the elastic approach is satisfactory. To summarize, Section
AD-160 states that if the model meets all of the following conditions, then a fatigue analysis is
not required:
1. The expected design number of full-range pressure cycles does not exceed the number of
allowed cycles corresponding to a Sa value of 3Sm (4Sm for non-integral attachments) on the
material fatigue curve. Sm is the allowable stress intensity for the material at the operating
temperature.

2. The expected design range of pressure cycles other than startup or shutdown must be less
-integral attachments) the design pressure times (Sa/Sm), where Sa is the
value from the material fatigue curve for the specified number of significant pressure
fluctuations.
3. The vessel does not experience localized high stress due to heating.
4. The full range of stress intensities due to mechanical loads including piping reactions does
not exceed Sa, from the fatigue curve, for the expected number of load fluctuations.
After deciding if an elastic analysis is satisfactory, you must determine whether to take either a
simplified or a comprehensive approach to do the vessel stress analysis. For more information
on the simplified or the comprehensive approach, see ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic
Nozzle Simplified Analysis pre-2007 (on page 1018) or ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic
Nozzle Comprehensive Analysis (pre-2007) (on page 1015). For more information on Section
VIII Division 2 requirements, refer to the latest version of the ASME code.
ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Comprehensive

Analysis (pre-2007)
To address the local allowable stress problem, you should have the endurance curve for the
material of construction and complete design pressure/temperature loading information.
Carefully consult the code before performing the local stress analysis if:
any elastic limit is approached
there is anything unusual in the nozzle/vessel connection design
The material Sm table and the endurance curve for carbon steels used in this
section are for illustration purposes. You should only use values taken directly from the code in
your design.
There are three criteria you must satisfy before considering stresses in the vessel wall due to
nozzle loads within the allowables. The three criteria are summarized as:
Pm < kSmh
Pm + Pl + Pb< 1.5kSmh
Pm + Pl + Pb + Q < 3Smavg
Where Pm, Pl, Pb, and Q are the general primary membrane stress, the local primary membrane
stress, the local primary bending stress, and the total secondary stresses (membrane plus
bending), respectively; and k, Smh, and Smavg are the occasional stress factor, the hot material
allowable stress intensity, and the average material stress intensity (S mh + Smc) / 2.
The stress classification defined by the Section VIII Division 2 code in the vicinity of nozzles,
classifies the bending stress terms caused by any external load moments or internal pressure in
the vessel wall near a nozzle or other opening, as secondary stress Q, regardless of whether
they were caused by sustained or expansion loads. This definition causes Pb to disappear and
leads to a more detailed classification:
Pm - General primary membrane stress (primarily due to internal pressure)
Pl - Local primary membrane stress, which may include the following:
Membrane stress due to internal pressure
Local membrane stress due to applied sustained forces and moments

Q - Secondary stresses, which may include the following:

Bending stress due to internal pressure
Bending stress due to applied sustained loads
Membrane stress due to applied expansion loads
Bending stress due to applied expansion loads
Each of the stress terms defined in the above classifications contains three parts: two stress
components in normal directions and one shear stress component. To combine these stresses,
the following rules apply:
1. Compute the normal and shear components for each of the three stress types, that is, Pm,
Pl, and Q.
2. Compute the stress intensity due to the Pm and compare it against kSmh.
3. Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pm and Pl; compute the
resultant stress intensity and compare its value against 1.5kS mh.
4. Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pm, Pl, and Q, compute the
resultant stress intensity, and compare its value to against 3S mavg.
5. Determine if there is an occasional load as well as a sustained load, these types can be
repeated using a value of 1.2 for k.
These criteria can be readily found from Figure 4-130.1 of Appendix 4 of ASME Section VIII,
Division 2 2004 and the surrounding text. Note that the primary bending stress term, P b, is not
applicable to the shell stress evaluation, and therefore disappears from the Section VIII, Division
2 requirements. Using the same analogy, write the peak stress limit as:
Pl + Pb + Q + F < Sa
The preceding equation need not be satisfied, provided the elastic limit criteria of AD-160 is met
based on the statement explicitly given in Section 5-100, which is cited below:
"If the specified operation of the vessel meets all of the conditions of AD-160, no analysis for
cyclic operation is required and it can be assumed that the peak stress limit discussed in 4-135
has been satisfied by compliance with the applicable requirements for materials, design,
fabrication, testing and inspection of this division."
Elastic Analyses of Shells near Nozzles Using WRC 107
1. Check the geometric limitation to see whether WRC 107 is applicable.

2. If yes, determine whether the elastic approach as outlined in Section VIII Division 2 AD-160
is applicable.
3. Compute the sustained, expansion, and occasional loads in the vessel shell due to the
applied nozzle loads.
4. Consider the local restraint configuration to determine whether some or all the axial
pressure thrust load P * Ain should be added to the sustained and occasional loads. If you
choose, the software can automatically calculate the thrust load and add it to the applied
loads.

5. Calculate the pressure stresses, Pm, on the vessel shell wall in both the longitudinal and
circumferential hoop directions for both sustained and occasional load cases.
Notice that two different pressure terms are required in carrying out the pressure
stress calculations. P is the design pressure of the system (sustained), while P var is the
difference between the peak pressure and the design pressure of the system, which is used
to qualify the vessel membrane stress under the occasional load case.
If you enter the pressure value, the software automatically calculates the P m
stresses.
6. The processor will calculate the Pl, and Q stresses as defined earlier.
If needed, you can simultaneously compute the local stresses due to sustained,
expansion, and occasional loads.
7. Obtain the various stress components by combining the stress intensities computed from
applying the sustained, expansion, and occasional loads, if applicable.
8. Then use stress intensities to carry out the stress summations.
If needed, use the results to determine the acceptability of the local stresses in the
vessel shell. Notice how CAESAR II provides the WRC 107 Stress Summation module in
line with the stress calculation routines.
The equations used in CAESAR II to qualify the various stress components can be summarized
as follows:
Pm(SUS) < Smh
Pm(SUS + OCC) < 1.2Smh
Pm(SUS) + Pl(SUS) < 1.5Smh
Pm(SUS + OCC) + Pl(SUS + OCC) < 1.5(1.2)Smh
Pm(SUS + OCC) + Pl(SUS + OCC) + Q(SUS + EXP + OCC) < 1.5(S mc + Smh)
Description of Alternate Simplified ASME Section VIII

Division 2 Elastic Nozzle Analysis pre-2007
The most difficult problem associated with the comprehensive ASME Section VIII Division 2
nozzle/vessel analysis involves the pressure calculation. Hoop and longitudinal pressure hand
calculations are not considered reliable, and axial pressure loading on the junction is often
miscalculated or omitted. Another issue with the comprehensive calculation is the amount of
time it takes to organize and manipulate the stress data. For these reasons, an alternate
simplified approach was developed using three checks.
The first check, Pm due to pressure, must be 1.0 Smh. To eliminate the concern for pressure,
both the loading pressure term on the left side of the inequality and the allowable pressure term
on the right side of the inequality cancel out.
This assumes that the area of reinforcement around the nozzle satisfies the pressure
requirements. Also, let Pm equal the maximum value.
The second check, Pm + Pl + Pb, must be 1.5 Smh. Subtract the stress due to pressure, Pm, from
both sides of the inequality and assuming Pm equals Smh. This reduces the check to: Pl + Pb
0.5 Smh (due to external sustained forces without pressure).

The third check, Pm + Pl + Q, is the root of the application controversy. There are three schools
of thought:
Pm+Pl+Q is an operating loading condition, and as such, includes the loads due to pressure
and weight.
Pm+Pl+Q is the range of loads or the expansion loading condition, and as such, excludes the
effects of sustained, or primary loads. Also, exclude the primary sustained loads like weight
and pressure.
Pm+Pl+Q is the range of loads and excludes the primary load weight, but includes the
varying pressure load at least in those thermal load cases where the system goes from a
startup ambient temperature and pressure condition to operating condition.
To simplify the calculation, assume that Pm, due to pressure, is included on both sides of the
Pm+Pl+Pb+Q < 3Sm inequality. Also, assume that the area reinforcement requirements are
exactly satisfied. Again, let Pm = Sm and subtract this term from the expansion allowable (Pm + Pl
+ Q < 3Sm) to provide a simplified allowable limit.
The expansion, operating, or both loads from the Restraints Report (on page 634)
must satisfy the computed stress requirement:
Pl + Pb + Q (operating or expansion excluding pressure) < 2Sm.
To summarize:
1. Ensure proper nozzle reinforcement for pressure and assume pressure stresses are at their
maximum.
2. Compare primary stresses without pressure to ½Smh.
3. Compare stresses due to the sum of primary and secondary loads to 2Sm(avg); where Sm(avg)
is the average of the hot and cold allowable stress intensities S mh and Smc.
ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Simplified

Analysis pre-2007
1. Perform a CAESAR II analysis of the piping loads on the vessel/nozzle junction. Use WRC
297 flexibilities to compute loads more accurately, but less conservatively or do two
analyses, one with flexibilities and one without.
From this analysis you should have sustained, operating, and expansion loads on the
vessel/nozzle junction.
2. Find Smh and Smc from the Sect. VIII allowable stress tables.
Smh is the vessel material hot allowable, and Smc is the vessel material cold
allowable.
3. Run WRC 107 with the sustained loads on the vessel/nozzle junction from CAESAR II, and
verify that the computed stress intensities are < 0.5 Smh.
This operation helps in conservatively considering bending stresses from internal
pressure and sustained moments and also lets you categorize the stresses and moment as
a primary classification. If the operation fails, review the stresses in more detail.
4. Run WRC 107 with the operating loads on the vessel/nozzle junction from CAESAR II, and
verify that the computed stress intensities are < Smh + Smc.

5. Run WRC 107 with the expansion loads on the vessel/nozzle junction from CAESAR II, and
verify that the computed stress intensities are < Smh + Smc.
Should any of the checks described fail, then perform the more comprehensive analysis of the
junction described earlier. For more information, see ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic
Nozzle Comprehensive Analysis (pre-2007) (on page 1015).
Inclusion of Missing Mass Correction

The response of a system under a dynamic load is often determined by superposition of modal
results, with CAESAR II specifically providing the Spectral Analysis method for use. One of the
advantages of modal analysis is that usually only a limited number of modes are excited and
need be included in the analysis. The drawback to this method is that although displacements
may be obtained with good accuracy using only a few of the lowest frequency modes, the force,
reaction, and stress results may require extraction of far more modes, possibly far into the rigid
range, before acceptable accuracy is attained. The Missing Mass option offers the ability to
include a correction which represents the quasi-static contribution of the higher order modes not
explicitly extracted for the modal/dynamic response, thus providing greater accuracy with
reduced calculation time.
The dynamic response of a linear multi-degree-of-freedom system is described by the following
equation:
Ma(t) + Cv(t) + Kx(t) = F(t)
Where:
M = n x n mass matrix of system
C = n x n damping matrix of system
K = n x n stiffness matrix of system
a(t) = n x 1, time-dependent acceleration vector
v(t) = n x 1, time-dependent velocity vector
x(t) = n x 1, time-dependent displacement vector
F(t) = n x 1, time-dependent applied force vector
Assuming harmonic motion and neglecting damping, the free vibration eigenvalue problem for
this system is
K -M 2 =0
Where:
= n x n mode shape matrix
2 = n x n matrix where each diagonal entry is the angular frequency squared of the
corresponding mode
The modal matrix can be normalized such that TM = I (where I is the n x n identity matrix)
and T = 2.
Partition the modal matrix into two sub-matrices:
=[ e r]
Where:

e= mode shapes extracted for dynamic analysis (that is., lowest frequency modes)
r = residual (non-extracted) mode shapes (corresponding to rigid response, or the "missing
mass" contribution)
The extracted mode shapes are orthogonal to the residual mode shapes, or:
e
T x r= 0
The displacement components can be expressed as linear combinations of the mode shapes:
x= Y= e Ye + r Yr = xe + xr
Where:
x = Total System Displacements
xe = System Displacements Due to Extracted Modes
xr = System Displacements Due to Residual Modes
Y = Generalized Modal Coordinates
Ye = partition of Y Matrix Corresponding to Extracted Modes
Yr = Partition of Y Matrix Corresponding to Residual Modes
The dynamic load vector can be expressed in similar terms:
F=K Y=K e Ye + K r Yr = Fe + Fr
Where:
F = Total System Load Vector
Fe = Load Vector Due to Extracted Modes
Fr = Load Vector Due to Residual Modes
Y = Generalized Modal Coordinates
Ye = Partition of Y Matrix Corresponding to Extracted Modes
Yr = Partition of Y Matrix Corresponding to Residual Modes
Normally, modal superposition analyses completely neglect the rigid response the displacement
Xr caused by the load Fr. This response, of the non-extracted modes, can be obtained from the
system displacement under a static loading Fr. Based upon the relation\-ships stated above, you
can estimate Fr as follows:
F=K e Ye + K r Yr
Multiplying both sides by e
T and considering that e
T
r= 0:
e
T F= e
T K e Ye + e
T K r Yr = e
T K e Ye
Substituting e
2 for e
T K e and solving for Ye:
e
T F= e
2 Ye
Ye = e
T
e
-2 F
The residual force can now be stated as

Fr = F - K e Ye = F - e
T K e e
-2 F
As seen earlier

TM 2 =I 2= T K
Substituting e
T M e e
2 for e
T K e:
Fr = F - e M
T
e e
2
e
-2 F=F- e
T M e F
Therefore, CAESAR II calculates the residual response (and includes it as the missing mass
contribution) according to the following procedure:
1. The missing mass load is calculated for each individual shock load as:
Fr = F - e
T M eF
The load vector F represents the product of:

the force set vector and the rigid DLF for force spectrum loading;
the product of the mass matrix, ZPA, and directional vector for non-ISM seismic loads;
and the product of the mass matrix, ZPA, and displacement matrix (under unit ISM
support displacement) for seismic anchor movement loads.
Note that the missing mass load will vary, depending upon the number of modes
extracted by the user and the cutoff frequency selected (or more specifically, the DLF or
acceleration corresponding to the cutoff frequency). "Rigid," for the purposes of
determining the rigid DLF, or the ZPA, may be designated by the user, through a setup
parameter, to be either the DLF/acceleration associated with the frequency of the last
extracted mode, or the true spectral DLF/ ZPA that corresponding to the largest entered
frequency of the input spectrum.
2. The missing mass load is applied to the structure as a static load. The static structural
response is then combined (according to the user-specified combination method) with the
dynamically amplified modal responses as if it was a modal response. This static response
is the algebraic sum of the responses of all non-extracted modes representing in-phase
response, as would be expected from rigid modes.
3. The Missing Mass Data report is compiled for all shock cases, whether missing mass is to
be included or not. The percent of mass active is calculated according to:
% Active Mass = 1 - ( Fr[i] / F [i])
summed over i = 1 to n, where n is the number of modes included
The maximum possible percent that is theoretically possible for this value is of course 100%;
however numerical inaccuracies may occasionally cause the value to be slightly higher. If the
missing mass correction factor is included, the percent of mass included in the correction is
shown in the report as well.

Because the CAESAR II procedure assumes that the missing mass correction represents the
contribution of rigid modes, and that the ZPA is based upon the spectral ordinate value at the
frequency of the last extracted mode, we recommend that you extract modes up to, but not far
resonant peak [point (1) below] provides a non-conservative result, because resonant responses
may be missed. Using a cutoff frequency higher than the peak (2), but still in the resonant range,
will yield conservative results, because the ZPA/rigid DLF will be overestimated. Extracting a
large number of rigid modes for calculation of the dynamic response may be conservative (4),
because all available modal combination methods (SRSS, GROUP, ABS, and so forth) give
conservative results versus the algebraic combination method which gives a more realistic
representation of the net response of the rigid modes. Based upon the response spectrum
shown below, an appropriate cutoff point for the modal extraction would be about 33 Hz (3).

Maximum Stress Versus Extracted Loads
CAESAR II provides two options for combining the missing mass correction with modal dynamic
results SRSS and Absolute. The Absolute Combination method provides the more
conservative result and is based upon the assumption that dynamic amplification is going to
occur simultaneously with the maximum ground acceleration or force load. Literature
(References 1, 2) states that the modal and the rigid portions of the response to typical dynamic
loads are actually statistically independent, so that the SRSS Combination method is a more
accurate representation of reality. Because the SRSS Combination method is most closely
aligned to reality, CAESAR II defaults to this missing mass combination method.
1. A. K. Gupta, Response Spectrum Method in Seismic Analysis and Design of Structures,

CRC Press, 1990
2. K. M. Vashi, "Computation of Seismic Response from Higher Frequency Modes," ASME
80-C2/PVP-50, 1980
3. O. E. Hansteen and K. Bell, "On the Accuracy of Mode Superposition Analysis in Structural
Dynamics," Earthquake Engineering and Structural Dynamics, Volume 7, John Wiley &
Sons, Ltd., 1979

Fatigue Analysis Using CAESAR II

For most piping codes supported by CAESAR II, performing a fatigue analysis is an extension
to, rather than an explicit part of, the code requirements. However, it is an explicit part of the
IGE/TD/12 Pipework Stress Analysis for Gas Industry Plant code.
Fatigue Basics
Piping and vessels have been known to suffer from sudden failure following years of successful
"Piping Flexibility Analysis," published in 1955, provided an explanation for this phenomenon, as
well as design criteria aimed at avoiding failures of this type. The explanation was that materials
were failing due to fatigue, a process leading to the propagation of cracks, and subsequent
fracture, following repeated cyclic loading.
Steels and other metals are made up of organized patterns of molecules, known as crystal
structures. However, these patterns are not maintained throughout the steel producing an ideal
homogeneous material, but are found in microscopic isolated island-like areas called grains.
Inside each grain a pattern of molecules is preserved. From one grain boundary to the next the
molecular pattern is the same, but the orientations differ. As a result, grain boundaries are high
energy borders. Plastic deformation begins within a grain that is subject to both a high stress
and oriented such that the stress causes a slippage between adjacent layers in the same
pattern. The incremental slippages, called dislocations, cause local cold-working. On the first
application of the stress, dislocations can move through many of the grains that are in the local
area of high stress. As the stress is repeated, more dislocations move through their respective
grains. Dislocation movement is impeded by the grain boundaries. After multiple stress
applications, the dislocations tend to accumulate at grain boundaries. Eventually they become
so dense that the grains "lock up" causing a loss of ductility and thus preventing further
dislocation movement. Subsequent applications of the stress cause the grain to tear, forming
cracks. Repeated stress applications cause the cracks to grow. Unless abated, the cracks
propagate with additional stress applications until sufficient cross sectional strength is lost to
cause a catastrophic failure of the material.

You can estimate the fatigue capacity of a material through the application of cyclic
tensile/compressive displacement loads with a uniaxial test machine. A plot of the cyclic stress
capacity of a material is called a fatigue or endurance curve. These curves are generated
through multiple cyclic tests at different stress levels. The number of cycles to failure usually
increases as the applied cyclic stress decreases, often until a threshold stress, known as the
endurance limit, is reached below which no fatigue failure occurs, regardless of the number of
applied cycles. An endurance curve for carbon and low alloy steels, taken from the ASME
Section VIII Division 2 Pressure Vessel Code displays below:
Fatigue Analysis of Piping Systems

IGE/TD/12 does present specific requirements for true fatigue evaluation of systems subject to a
cyclic loading threshold. Furthermore, ASME Section III, Subsection NB and ASME Section VIII
Division 2 provide guidelines by which fatigue evaluation rules can be applied to piping and
other pressure retaining equipment. These procedures have been adapted, where possible, to
the methodology used by CAESAR II.
1. From the Allowable auxiliary dialog box, enter fatigue data or import it in from a text file.
You can also define your own fatigue curves as discussed later in this section. By doing this,
you assign the fatigue curve data to the piping material.
To help with your fatigue analysis, CAESAR II provides a number of commonly
used curves.

2. From either the Static or Dynamic Load Case Builders you must define, for every fatigue
load case, the number of anticipated cycles.
A FAT stress type is also available
3. Unless explicitly defined in the applicable code, CAESAR II calculates the fatigue stress the
same way it calculates the stress intensity.
IGE/TD/12 is the only piping code supported by CAESAR II that has
explicit instructions for calculating fatigue stresses. For more information on IGE/TD/12,
refer to IGE/TD/12 (on page 1094).
4. Allowable fatigue stresses are interpolated logarithmically from the fatigue curve based upon
the number of cycles designated for the load case. For static load cases, the calculated
stress is assumed to be a peak-to-peak cyclic value (for example, thermal expansion,
settlement, pressure, and so forth), so the allowable stress is extracted directly from the
fatigue curve. For harmonic and dynamic load cases, the calculated stress is assumed to be
a zero-to-peak cyclic value (for example, vibration, earthquake, and so forth), so the
extracted allowable is divided by two prior to use in the comparison.
5. The flip side of calculating the allowable fatigue stress for the designated number of cycles
is the calculation of the allowable number of cycles for the calculated stress level. You can
do this by logarithmically interpolating the "Cycles" axis of the fatigue curve based upon the
calculated stress value. Because static stresses are assumed to be peak-to-peak cyclic
values, the allowable number of cycles is interpolated directly from the fatigue curve.
Because harmonic and dynamic stresses are assumed to be zero-to-peak cyclic values, the
allowable number of cycles is interpolated using twice the calculated stress value.
6. CAESAR II provides two reports for viewing the results of load cases for the FAT stress
type. The first of these is the standard Stress report that shows the calculated fatigue stress
and fatigue allowable at each node.
You can generate individual stress reports for each load case to show whether any of
the individual load cases in isolation fail the system.
However, in those instances where there is more than one cyclic load case potentially
contributing to a fatigue failure, the Cumulative Usage report is appropriate. To generate this
report, select all the FAT load cases that contribute to the overall system degradation. The
Cumulative Usage report lists for each node point the usage ratio actual cycle divided by
allowable cycles, and then sums these to obtain the total cumulative usage. A total greater than
1.0 indicates a potential fatigue failure.
Static Analysis Fatigue Example

Consider a sample job that potentially has several different cyclic load variations:
Operating cycle from ambient 70°F to 500°F, 12,000 cycles anticipated
Shut down external temperature variation from ambient 70°F to -20°F, 200 cycles
anticipated
Pressurization to 1800 psig, 12,000 cycles anticipated
Pressure fluctuations of +/- 30 psi from the 1800 psig, 200,000 cycles anticipated
To do a proper fatigue analysis, you must group the load pairs that represent the worst-case
combination of stress ranges between extreme states. These load variations can be laid out in
graphical form. The figure below shows a sketch of the various operating ranges this system

experiences. Each horizontal line represents an operating range. At the end of each horizontal
line, the temperatures and pressures defining the range are noted. At the center of each
horizontal line, the number of cycles for each range is defined.
Using this sketch of the operating ranges, the four fatigue load cases can be determined. Case
1: Cover the absolute extreme, from -20°F and 0 psi to 500°F and 1830 psi. This occurs 200
times. As a result of this case, the cycles for the ranges defined must be reduced by 200. The
first range (-20, 0 to 70, 0) is reduced to zero, and has no contribution to additional load cases.
The second range (70, 0 to 500, 1800) is reduced to 11,800 cycles. The third and fourth ranges
are similarly reduced to 199,800 cycles.
These same steps can be used to arrive at cases 2 through 4, reducing the number of
considered cycles at each step. This procedure is summarized in the table below.
Segment -20, 0 to 70, 0 70, 0 to 500, 1800 500, 1700 to 500, 500, 1800 to 500, 1830
1800
Case
Initial 200 12,000 200,000 200,000
After 1 0 11,800 200,000 199,800
After 2 0 0 200,000 188,000
After 3 0 0 12,000 0
After 4 0 0 0 0
This table is then used to set the load cases as cycles between the following load values:
Between -20°F, 0 psig and 500°F, 1830 psig (200 cycles)
Between 70°F, 0 psig and 500°F, 1830 psig (11,800 cycles)

These temperatures and pressures are entered as operating conditions accordingly:
Next enter the fatigue curve data for the material. This is done by clicking Fatigue Curves to
activate the Material Fatigue Curve dialog box. This dialog box can be used to enter the fatigue
curve for the materials.
For IGE/ TD/12, you only need to enter five sets of fatigue curves for fatigue
classes D, E, F, G, and W.
1. Enter up to eight Cycle versus Stress data points to define the curve. Interpolations are
made logarithmically.
2. Enter Cycle/Stress pairs in ascending cycle order.

3. Enter stress values as the allowable stress range, rather than the allowable Stress
Amplitude.
You can enter fatigue curve data from a text file, by clicking Read from file. This
displays a list of all \CAESAR\SYSTEM\*.FAT files.
The following fatigue curve files are delivered with CAESAR II. You can also construct additional
fatigue curve files. For more information on fatigue curve files, see Appendix A below:
5-110-1A.FAT ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.1, UTS < 80 ksi
5-110-1B.FAT ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.1, UTS = 115-130 ksi
5-110-2A.FAT ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.2, Curve A
5-110-2B.FAT ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.2, Curve B
5-110-2C.FAT ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.2, Curve C

In this case for A106B low carbon steel operating at 500°F, 5-110-1A.FAT is the appropriate
selection. This populates the fatigue curve data boxes in the dialog box:
Error check the job, and set up your load cases.

The static load case builder offers a new stress type, FAT (fatigue). Selecting this stress type
does the following:
1. Enables you to define the number of cycles for the load case. Dragging the FAT stress type
into the load case or clicking the Load Cycles button opens the Load Cycles field.
2. Calculates the stress range as per the Fatigue Stress method of the applicable code. This
is the stress intensity for all codes except IGE/TD/12.
3. Compares the calculated stress range to the full value extracted from the fatigue curve.
Indicates that the load case may be included in the Cumulative Usage report.

The last four load cases represent the load set pairs defined earlier.
After you run the job the presence of a FAT stress type adds the Cumulative Usage
report to the list of available reports.

You can check the fatigue stress range against the fatigue curve allowable for each load case
by selecting it along with the Stresses report. A review of each load case confirms that all stress
levels passed.

However, this is not a true evaluation of the situation because it is not a case of either-or. The
piping system is subjected to all of these load cases throughout its expected design life, not just
one of them. Therefore, we must also review the Cumulative Usage Report (on page 646)
report, which shows the total effect of all fatigue load cases, or any user-selected combination,
on the design life of the system. This report lists for each load case the expected number of
cycles, the allowable number of cycles (based upon the calculated stress), and the Usage Ratio
(actual cycles divided by allowable cycles). The Usage Ratios are then summed for all selected
load cases. If this sum exceeds 1.0, the system has exceeded its fatigue capabilities. In this
case, it is apparent that with the maximum cumulative usage ratio of 0.87 at node 115, this
system is not predicted to fail due to fatigue:
Fatigue Capabilities in Dynamic Analysis

Fatigue analysis capability is also available for harmonic and dynamic analyses. Harmonic load
cases are entered as they always have been. They can be designated as being stress type FAT
by entering the number of expected load cycles on the harmonic input dialog box:

This produces the same types of reports as are available for the static analysis. They can be
processed as discussed earlier.
The only difference between the harmonic and static fatigue analyses is that for harmonic jobs
the calculated stresses are assumed to be zero-to-peak calculations so that they are compared
to only half of the stress value extracted from the fatigue curve. Likewise, when creating the
Cumulative Usage report, the number of allowable cycles is based upon twice the calculated
stress.
For other dynamic applications (response spectrum and time history), the stress type can be
identified as fatigue by selecting the stress type from the drop list for the Load Case or
Static/Dynamic Combination, and by entering the number of expected cycles in the provided
field.
Note that as with the harmonic analyses, the calculated stresses are assumed to be
zero-to-peak calculations so that they are compared to only half of the stress value extracted
from the fatigue curve. Likewise, when creating the Cumulative Usage report, the number of
allowable cycles is based upon twice the calculated stress.
Creating a .fat File

The .fat file is an ASCII text file containing the data points necessary to describe the fatigue
curve for the material, for both butt-welded and fillet-welded fittings. A sample.fat file is shown
below.

You can create this text file by using any text editor. Lines beginning with an * are treated as
comment lines. It is good practice to use comment lines so that the data can be tied to a specific
material curve.
The first data line in the file the stress multiplier. This value is used to adjust the data values
from "zero to peak" to "peak to peak" or to convert the stress levels to psi. The entered values
are divided by this number. For example, if the stress values in the file represent the stress
amplitude, in psi, rather than a range, this "stress multiplier" should be 0.5. Following the stress
multiplier is the Fatigue Curve Data table. This table consists of eight lines, of two columns.
The first column is the Cycle column, and the second is the Stress column. For each value in
the cycle column, a corresponding stress value from the material fatigue curve is listed in the
stress column.
Fatigue curves intended for use with IGE/TD/12 are built slightly different. The first data line
contains three values: the stress multiplier, a modulus of elasticity correction, and a modulus of
elasticity multiplier (the correction factor is divided by this to convert to psi). After the files are
read in, the modulus of elasticity correction is inserted into the appropriate field on the Fatigue
Curve dialog. IGE/TD/12 fatigue files also include five sequential fatigue curves, Fatigue Class
D, E, F, G, and W, rather than one. You can use optional comment lines to separate the tables.
The comments help with the readability of the data file. You can best determine the format of the
IGE/TD/12 fatigue files by reviewing the contents of the TD12ST.fat file.
In all tables, the number of cycles increases as you work down the table. If you do not have
enough data to use all eight lines, fill the unused lines with zeros.
Calculation of Fatigue Stresses

For IGE/TD/12 the computation of fatigue stresses is detailed in Section 5.4.4 of that code. This
section of the code states: "The principal stress in any plane can be calculated for any set of
conditions from the following formula:"
Where:
Sh = Hoop stress
Sa = Axial stress
Sq = Shear stress
"This should be used for establishing the range of stress, due regard being paid to the direction
and sign." For all other piping codes in CAESAR II, the fatigue stress is computed as the stress
intensity, as follows:
3D Maximum Shear Stress Intensity (Default)
SI = Maximum of:

S1OT - S3OT
S1OB - S3OB
Max(S1IT,RPS) - Min(S3IT,RPS)
Max(S1IB,RPS) - Min(S3IB,RPS)
Where:
S1OT=Maximum Principal Stress, Outside Top
= (SLOT+HPSO)/2.0+(((SLOT-HPSO)/2.0)2+TSO2)1/2
S3OT=Minimum Principal Stress, Outside Top

=(SLOT+HPSO)/2.0-(((SLOT-HPSO)/2.0)2+TSO2) 1/2
S1IT=Maximum Principal Stress, Inside Top

=(SLIT+HPSI)/2.0+(((SLIT-HPSI)/2.0)2+TSI2) 1/2
S3IT=Minimum Principal Stress, Inside Top

=(SLIT+HPSI)/2.0-(((SLIT-HPSI)/2.0)2+TSI2) 1/2
S1OB=Maximum Principal Stress, Outside Top

=(SLOB+HPSO)/2.0+ (((SLOB-HPSO)/2.0)2+TSO2) 1/2
S3OB=Minimum Principal Stress, Outside Bottom

=(SLOB+HPSO)/2.0- (((SLOB-HPSO)/2.0)2+TSO2) 1/2
S1IB=Maximum Principal Stress, Inside Bottom

=(SLIB+HPSI)/2.0+ (((SLIB-HPSI)/2.0)2+TSI2) 1/2
S3IB=Minimum Principal Stress, Inside Bottom

=(SLIB+HPSI)/2.0- (((SLIB-HPSI)/2.0)2+TSI2) 1/2
RPS=Radial Pressure Stress, Inside

HPSI=Hoop Pressure Stress (Inside, from Lame's Equation)
HPSO=Hoop Pressure Stress (Outside, from Lame's Equation)
SLOT=Longitudinal Stress, Outside Top
SLIT=Longitudinal Stress, Inside Top
SLOB=Longitudinal Stress, Outside Bottom

SLIB=Longitudinal Stress, Inside Bottom

TSI=Torsional Stress, Inside
TSO=Torsional Stress, Outside
Pipe Stress Analysis of FRP Piping

Underlying Theory
The behavior of steel and other homogeneous materials has been long understood, permitting
their widespread use as construction materials. The development of the piping and pressure
vessel codes (Reference 1) in the early part of this century led to the confidence in their use in
of piping
codes on an industry by industry basis. The advent of the digital computer, and with it the
appearance of the first pipe stress analysis software (Reference 2), further increased the
confidence with which steel pipe could be used in critical app
spread proliferation of the microcomputer, with associated pipe stress analysis software, which
in conjunction with training, technical support, and available literature, has brought stress
analysis capability to almost all engineers. In short, an accumulated experience of close to 100
years, in conjunction with ever improving technology has led to the utmost confidence on the
pipe.
For fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) and other composite piping materials, the situation is not
not come into wide spread use until a decade later (Reference 3). There is not a large base of
stress analysis experience, although not from a lack of commitment on the part of FRP vendors.
Most vendors conduct extensive stress testing on their components, including hydrostatic and
cyclic pressure, uni-axial tensile and compressive, bending, and combined loading tests. The
problem is due to the traditional difficulty associated with, and lack of understanding of, stress
analysis of heterogeneous materials. First, the behavior and failure modes of these materials
are highly complex and not fully understood, leading to inexact analytical methods and a general
lack of agreement on the best course of action to follow. This lack of agreement has slowed the
simplification and standardization of the analytical methods into universally recognized codes
BS 7159 Code Design and Construction of Glass Reinforced Plastics Piping (GRP) Systems for
Individual Plants or Sites and UKOOA Specification and Recommended Practice for the Use of
GRP Piping Offshore being notable exceptions. Second, the heterogeneous, orthotropic
behavior of FRP and other composite materials has hindered the use of the pipe stress analysis
algorithms developed for homogeneous, isotropic materials associated with crystalline
structures. A lack of generally accepted analytical procedures has contributed to a general
reluctance to use FRP piping for critical applications.
Stress analysis of FRP components must be viewed on many levels. These levels, or scales,
have been called Micro-Mini-Macro levels, with analysis proceeding along the levels according
to the "MMM" principle (Reference 4).

Stress analysis on the "Micro" level refers to the detailed evaluation of the individual materials
and boundary mechanisms comprising the composite material. In general, FRP pipe is
manufactured from laminates, which are constructed from elongated fibers of a commercial
grade of glass, E-glass, which are coated with a coupling agent or sizing prior to being
embedded in a thermosetting plastic material, typically epoxy or polyester resin.
This means, on the micro scale, that an analytical model must be created which simulates the
interface between these elements. Because the number and orientation of fibers is unknown at
any given location in a FRP sample, the simplest representation of the micro-model is that of a
single fiber, extending the length of the sample, embedded in a square profile of matrix.
Micro Level GRP Sample -- Single Fiber Embedded in Square Profile of Matrix
Evaluation of this model requires use of the material parameters of:

1. the glass fiber
2. the coupling agent or sizing layer normally of such microscopic proportion that it may be
ignored
3. the plastic matrix
It must be considered that these material parameters might vary for an individual material based
upon tensile, compressive, or shear applications of the imposed stresses, and typical values
vary significantly between the fiber and matrix (Reference 5):
Young's Modulus Ultimate Strength Coefficient of Thermal Expansion
Material tensile (MPa) tensile (MPa) m/m/ºC
Glass Fiber 72.5 x103 1.5 x 103 5.0 x 10-6
Plastic
2.75 x 103 .07 x 103 7.0 x 10-6
Matrix
The following failure modes of the composite must be similarly evaluated to:
failure of the fiber
failure of the coupling agent layer
failure of the matrix

failure of the fiber-coupling agent bond

failure of the coupling agent-matrix bond
Because of uncertainties about the degree to which the fiber has been coated with the coupling
agent and about the nature of some of these failure modes, this evaluation is typically reduced
to:
failure of the fiber
failure of the matrix
failure of the fiber-matrix interface
You can evaluate stresses in the individual components through finite element analysis of the
strain continuity and equilibrium equations, based upon the assumption that there is a good
bond between the fiber and matrix, resulting in compatible strains between the two. For normal
stresses applied parallel to the glass fiber:
f= m= af / Ef = am / Em
af = am Ef / Em
Where:
f = Strain in the Fiber
= Strain in the Matrix
af = Normal Stress Parallel to Fiber, in the Fiber
Ef = Modulus of Elasticity of the Fiber
am = Axial Normal Stress Parallel to Fiber, in the Matrix
Em = Modulus of Elasticity of the Matrix
Due to the large ratio of the modulus of elasticity of the fiber to that of the matrix, it is apparent
that nearly all of the axial normal stress in the fiber-matrix composite is carried by the fiber.
Exact values are (Reference 6):
af = L / [ + (1- )Em/Ef]
am = L / [ Ef/Em + (1- )]
Where:
L = nominal longitudinal stress across composite
= glass content by volume

The continuity equations for the glass-matrix composite seem less complex for normal stresses
perpendicular to the fibers, because the weak point of the material seems to be limited by the
glass-free cross-section, shown below:
Stress Intensification in Matrix Cross-Section
For this reason, it would appear that the strength of the composite would be equal to that of the
matrix for stresses in this direction. In fact, its strength is less than that of the matrix due to
stress intensification in the matrix caused by the irregular stress distribution in the vicinity of the
stiffer glass. Because the elongation over distance D1 must be equal to that over the longer
distance D2, the strain, and thus the stress at location D1 must exceed that at D2 by the ratio
D2/D1. Maximum intensified transverse normal stresses in the composite are:
Where:
b = intensified normal stress transverse to the fiber, in the composite
= nominal transverse normal stress across composite
m = Poisson's ratio of the matrix
Because of the Poisson effect, this stress produces an additional 'am equal to the
following:
'am = Vm b
Shear stress can be allocated to the individual components again through the use of continuity
equations. It would appear that the stiffer glass would resist the bulk of the shear stresses.
However, unless the fibers are infinitely long, all shears must eventually pass through the matrix
in order to get from fiber to fiber. Shear stress between fiber and matrix can be estimated as
Where:

ab = intensified shear stress in composite

T = nominal shear stress across composite
Gm = shear modulus of elasticity in matrix
Gf = shear modulus of elasticity in fiber
Determination of the stresses in the fiber-matrix interface is more complex. The bonding agent
has an inappreciable thickness, and thus has an indeterminate stiffness for consideration in the
continuity equations. Also, the interface behaves significantly differently in shear, tension, and
compression, showing virtually no effects from the latter. The state of the stress in the interface
is best solved by omitting its contribution from the continuity equations, and simply considering
that it carries all stresses that must be transferred from fiber to matrix.
After the stresses have been apportioned, they must be evaluated against appropriate failure
criteria. The behavior of homogeneous, isotropic materials such as glass and plastic resin,
under a state of multiple stresses is better understood. Failure criterion for isotropic material
reduces the combined normal and shear stresses ( a, b, c, ab, ac, bc) to a single stress, an
equivalent stress, that can be compared to the tensile stress present at failure in a material
under uniaxial loading, that is, the ultimate tensile stress, S ult.
Different theories, and different equivalent stress functions f( a, b, c, ab, ac, bc) have been
proposed, with possibly the most widely accepted being the Huber-von Mises-Hencky criterion,
which states that failure will occur when the equivalent stress reaches a critical value the
ultimate strength of the material:
eq = {1/2 [( a - b)
2+ ( b- c)
2+ ( c- a)
2 + 6( ab +
2
ac +
2
bc )}
2 Sult
This theory does not fully cover all failure modes of the fiber in that it omits reference to direction
of stress, that is, tensile versus compressive. The fibers, being relatively long and thin,
predominantly demonstrate buckling as their failure mode when loaded in compression.

The equivalent stress failure criterion has been corroborated, with slightly non-conservative
results, by testing. Little is known about the failure mode of the adhesive interface, although
empirical evidence points to a failure criterion which is more of a linear relationship between the
normal and the square of the shear stresses. Failure testing of a composite material loaded only
in transverse normal and shear stresses are shown in the following figure. The kink in the curve
shows the transition from the matrix to the interface as the failure point.
Mini-Level Analysis Fiber Distribution Models

Although feasible in concept, micro level analysis is not feasible in practice. This is due to the
uncertainty of the arrangement of the glass in the composite the thousands of fibers that might
be randomly distributed, semi-randomly oriented, although primarily in a parallel pattern, and of
randomly varying lengths. This condition indicates that a sample can truly be evaluated only on
a statistical basis, thus rendering detailed finite element analysis inappropriate.
For mini-level analysis, a laminate layer is considered to act as a continuous hence the common
reference to this method as the "continuum" method, material, with material properties and
failure modes estimated by integrating them over the assumed cross-sectional distribution,
which is, averaging. The assumption regarding the distribution of the fibers can have a marked
effect on the determination of the material parameters. Two of the most commonly postulated

distributions are the square and the hexagonal, with the latter generally considered as being a
better representation of randomly distributed fibers.
The stress-strain relationships, for those sections evaluated as continua, can be written as:
aa = aa/EL - (VL/EL) bb - (VL/EL) cc
bb = -(VL/EL) aa + bb/ET - (VT/ET) cc
cc = -(VL/EL) aa - (VT/ET) bb + cc/ET
ab = ab / 2 GL
bc = bc / 2 GT
ac = ac / 2 GL
Where:
ij = strain along direction i on face j
ij, ab = stress (normal, shear) along direction i on face j
EL = modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in longitudinal direction
VL
ET = modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in transverse direction
VT inate layer in transverse direction
GL = shear modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in longitudinal direction
GT = shear modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in transverse direction
These relationships require that four modules of elasticity, E L, ET, GL, and GT,
ratios, VL and V, be evaluated for the continuum. Extensive research (References 4 - 10) has
been done to estimate these parameters. There is general consensus that the longitudinal terms
can be explicitly calculated; for cases where the fibers are significantly stiffer than the matrix,
they are:
EL = EF + EM(1 - )
GL = GM + / [ 1 / (GF - GM) + (1 - ) / (2GM)]
VL = VF + VM(1 - )
You cannot calculate parameters in the transverse direction. You can only calculate the upper
and lower bounds. Correlations with empirical results have yielded approximations (Reference 5
and 6):
ET = [EM(1+0.85f2) / {(1-VM2)[(1-f)1.25 + f(EM/EF)/(1-VM2)]}
GT = GM (1 + 0.6 ) / [(1 - )1.25 + (GM/GF)]
VT = VL (EL / ET)
Use of these parameters permits the development of the homogeneous material models that
facilitate the calculation of longitudinal and transverse stresses acting on a laminate layer. The
resulting stresses can be allocated to the individual fibers and matrix using relationships
developed during the micro analysis.

Where Mini-level analysis provides the means of evaluation of individual laminate layers,
Macro-level analysis provides the means of evaluating components made up of multiple
laminate layers. It is based upon the assumption that not only the composite behaves as a
continuum, but that the series of laminate layers acts as a homogeneous material with
properties estimated based on the properties of the layer and the winding angle, and that finally,
failure criteria are functions of the level of equivalent stress.
Laminate properties may be estimated by summing the layer properties (adjusted for winding
angle) over all layers. For example
Where:
ExLAM = Longitudinal modulus of elasticity of laminate
tLAM = thickness of laminate
E k = Longitudinal modulus of elasticity of laminate layer k
Cik = transformation matrix orienting axes of layer k to longitudinal laminate axis
Cjk = transformation matrix orienting axes of layer k to transverse laminate axis
tk = thickness of laminate layer k
After composite properties are determined, the component stiffness parameters can be
determined as though it were made of homogeneous material that is, based on component
cross-sectional and composite material properties.
Normal and shear stresses can be determined from 1) forces and moments acting on the
cross-sections, and 2) the cross-sectional properties themselves. These relationships can be
written as:
aa = Faa / Aaa ± Mba / Sba ± Mca / Sca
bb = Fbb / Abb ± Mab / Sab ± Mcb / Scb
cc = Fcc / Acc ± Mac / Sac ± Mbc / Sbc
ab = Fab / Aab ± Mbb / Rab
ac = Fac / Aac ± Mcc / Rac

ba = Fba / Aba ± Maa / Rba

bc = Fbc / Abc ± Mcc / Rbc
ca = Fca / Aca ± Maa / Rca
cb = Fcb / Acb ± Mbb / Rcb
Where:
ij = normal stress along axis i on face j
Fij = force acting along axis i on face j
Aij = area resisting force along axis i on face j
Mij = moment acting about axis i on face j
Sij = section modulus about axis i on face j
ij = shear stress along axis i on face j
Rij = torsional resistivity about axis i on face j
Using the relationships developed under macro, mini, and micro analysis, these stresses can be
resolved back into local stresses within the laminate layer, and from there, back into stresses
within the fiber and the matrix. From these, the failure criteria of those microscopic components,
and hence, the component as a whole, can be checked.
The macro-level analysis described above is the basis for the preeminent FRP piping codes in
use today, including Code BS 7159 (Design and Construction of Glass Reinforced Plastics
Piping Systems for Individual Plants or Sites) and the UKOOA Specification and Recommended
Practice for the Use of GRP Piping Offshore.
BS 7159 uses methods and formulas familiar to the world of steel piping stress analysis in order
to calculate stresses on the cross-section, with the assumption that FRP components have
material parameters based on continuum evaluation or test. All coincident loads, such as
thermal, weight, pressure, and axial extension due to pressure need be evaluated
simultaneously. Failure is based on the equivalent stress calculation method. Because one
normal stress (radial stress) is traditionally considered to be negligible in typical piping
configurations, this calculation reduces to the greater of (except when axial stresses are
compressive):
(when axial stress is greater than hoop)
(when hoop stress is greater than axial)

A slight difficulty arises when evaluating the calculated stress against an allowable, due to the
orthotropic nature of the FRP piping normally the laminate is designed in such a way to make
the pipe much stronger in the hoop, than in the longitudinal, direction, providing more than one
allowable stress. This difficulty is resolved by defining the allowable in terms of a design
strained, rather than stress, in effect adjusting the stress allowable in proportion to the strength
in each direction. In other words, the allowable stresses for the two equivalent stresses above
would be (ed ELAMX) and (ed ELAMH) respectively. In lieu of test data, system design strain is

selected from Tables 4.3 and 4.4 of the Code, based on expected chemical and temperature
conditions.
Actual stress equations as enumerated by BS 7159 display below:
1. Combined stress straights and bends:
C =( f
2+ 4 S
2)0.5
d ELAM
or
C =( X
2+ 4 S
2)0.5
d ELAM
Where:
ELAM = modulus of elasticity of the laminate; in CAESAR II, the first equation uses the
modulus for the hoop direction and in the second equation, the modulus for the longitudinal
direction is used.
C = combined stress
= circumferential stress
= +
S = torsional stress
= MS(Di + 2td) / 4I
X = longitudinal stress
= XP + XB
= circumferential pressure stress

= mP(Di + td) / 2 td
= circumferential bending stress
= [(Di + 2td) / 2I] [(Mi SIF )2 + Mo SIF )2] 0.5 for bends, = 0 for straights
MS = torsional moment on cross-section
Di = internal pipe diameter
td = design thickness of reference laminate
I = moment of inertia of pipe
m = pressure stress multiplier of component
P = internal pressure
Mi = in-plane bending moment on cross-section
SIF = circumferential stress intensification factor for in-plane moment
M = out-plane bending moment on cross-section
SIF = circumferential stress intensification factor for out-plane moment
XP = longitudinal pressure stress
= P(Di + td) / 4 td
XB = longitudinal bending stress

= [(Di + 2td) / 2I] [(Mi SIFxi)2 + Mo SIFxo)2]0.5

SIFxi = longitudinal stress intensification factor for in-plane moment
SIFxo = longitudinal stress intensification factor for out-plane moment
2. Combined stress branch connections:
CB = (( + bB)
2 +4 SB )
2 0.5
d ELAM
Where:
CB = branch combined stress
= circumferential pressure stress
= mP(Di + tM) / 2 tM
bB = non-directional bending stress
= [(Di + 2td) / 2I] [(Mi SIFBi)2 + Mo SIFBo)2]0.5
SB = branch torsional stress
= MS(Di + 2td) / 4I
tM = thickness of the reference laminate at the main run
SIFBi = branch stress intensification factor for in-plane moment
SIFBo = branch stress intensification factor for out-plane moment
3. When longitudinal stress is negative (net compressive):
-V x E
Where:
V
direction
= design strain in circumferential direction
ELAM = modulus of elasticity in circumferential direction

BS 7159 also dictates the means of calculating flexibility and stress intensification (k- and i-)
factors for bend and tee components, for use during the flexibility analysis.

BS 7159 imposes a number of limitations on its use, the most notable being: the limitation of a
system to a design pressure of 10 bar, the restriction to the use of designated design laminates,
and the limited applicability of the k- and i- factor calculations to pipe bends (that is, mean wall
thickness around the intrados must be 1.75 times the nominal thickness or less).
This code appears to be more sophisticated, yet easy to use. We recommend that its calculation
techniques be applied even to FRP systems outside its explicit scope, with the following
recommendations:
Pressure stiffening of bends should be based on actual design pressure, rather than
allowable design strain.
possible (with consideration for expected operating conditions).

Fitting k- and i- facto
The UKOOA Specification is similar in many respects to the BS 7159 Code, except that it
simplifies the calculation requirements in exchange for imposing more limitations and more
conservatism on the piping operating conditions.

Rather than explicitly calculating a combined stress, the specification defines an idealized
envelope of combinations of axial and hoop stresses that cause the equivalent stress to reach
failure. This curve represents the plot of:
( x / x-all)
2 +( hoop / hoop-all)
2 -[ x hoop /( x-all hoop-all)] 1.0
Where:
x-all = allowable stress, axial
hoop-all = allowable stress, hoop
The specification conservatively limits you to that part of the curve falling under the line between
x-all (also known as sa(0:1)) and the intersection point on the curve where hoop is twice s x-(a
natural condition for a pipe loaded only with pressure), as shown in the following figure.
An implicit modification to this requirement is the fact that pressure stresses are given a factor of
safety (typically equal to 2/3) while other loads are not. This gives an explicit requirement of:
Pdes f1 f2 f3 LTHP
Where:
Pdes = allowable design pressure
f1 = factor of safety for 97.5% lower confidence limit, usually 0.85
f2 = system factor of safety, usually 0.67
f3 = ratio of residual allowable, after mechanical loads
= 1 - (2 a )
b / (r f1 LTHS)
a
b = axial bending stress due to mechanical loads
r= a(0:1)/ a(2:1)
a(0:1) = long term axial tensile strength in absence of pressure load

a(2:1) = long term axial tensile strength under only pressure loading
LTHS = long term hydrostatic strength (hoop stress allowable)
LTHP = long term hydrostatic pressure allowable
This has been implemented in the CAESAR II pipe stress analysis software as:
Code Stress Code Allowable
a
b (f2 /r) + PDm / (4t) (f1 f2 LTHS) / 2.0
Where:

P = design pressure
D = pipe mean diameter
t = pipe wall thickness
K and i-factors for bends are to be taken from the BS 7159 Code, while no such factors are to
be used for tees.
The UKOOA Specification is limited in that shear stresses are ignored in the evaluation process;
no consideration is given to conditions where axial stresses are compressive; and most required
calculations are not explicitly detailed.
FRP Analysis Using CAESAR II
CAESAR II has had the ability to model orthotropic materials such as FRP almost from its
inception. It also can specifically handle the requirements of the BS 7159 Code, the UKOOA
Specification, and more recently ISO 14692. FRP material parameters corresponding to those of
CAESAR II. You can pre-select these parameters to be
the default values whenever FRP piping is used. Other options, as to whether the BS 7159
pressure stiffening requirements should be carried out using design strain or actual strain can be
set in CAESAR II

Selecting material (20) FRP (FIBER REIN PLASTIC) activates the CAESAR II orthotropic
material model and brings in the appropriate material parameters from the pre-selected
materials.
When the software uses the orthotropic material model, it changes two fields from their previous
isotropic values: Elastic Modulus (C) changes to Elastic Modulus/axial and Poisson's Ratio
changes to Ea/Eh*Vh/a, as shown below.
These changes are necessary because orthotropic models require more material parameters
than isotropic models. For example, there is no longer a single modulus of elasticity for the
Vh/a -induced strain in the hoop

direction) and Va/h -induced

strain in the axial direction). Also, unlike isotropic materials, the shear modulus does not follow
the relationship G = 1 / E (1-V), so that value must be explicitly input.
To minimize input, a few of these parameters can be combined due to their use in the software.
ratios is used during flexibility analysis is when calculating piping elongation due to pressure
(note that the modulus of elasticity in the hoop direction is used when determining certain stress
allowables for the BS 7159 code):
dx = ( x / Ea - Va/h * hoop / Eh) L
Where:
dx = extension of piping element due to pressure
x = longitudinal pressure stress in the piping element
E = modulus of elasticity in the axial direction
Va/h = due to stress-induced

strain in the hoop direction
hoop = hoop pressure stress in the piping element
Eh = modulus of elasticity in the hoop direction
L = length of piping element
This equation can be rearranged, to require only a single new parameter, as:
dx = ( x - Va/h hoop * (Ea / Eh )) * L / Ea
In theory, that single parameter, Vh/a is identical to (Ea / Eh * Va/h) giving: dx = ( x -
Vh/a hoop) * L / Ea
The shear modulus of the material is required in ordered to develop the stiffness matrix. In
CAESAR II, this value, expressed as a ratio of the axial modulus of elasticity, is brought in from
the pre-selected material, or can be changed on a problem-wise basis using the Special
Execution Parameters (on page 331) dialog box accessed by the Environment menu from the
piping spreadsheet (see figure). This dialog box also shows the coefficient of thermal expansion
(extracted from the vendor file or user entered) for the material, as well as the default laminate
type, as defined by the BS 7159 Code:
Type 1
All chopped strand mat (CSM) construction with an internal and an external surface
Type 2
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with an internal and an
external surface tissue reinforced layer.
Type 3
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with an internal and
an external surface tissue reinforced layer.

The latter is used during the calculation of flexibility and stress intensification factors for piping
bends.
You can enter bend and tee information by using the auxiliary spreadsheets.
You can also change bend radius and laminate type data on a bend by bend basis, as
shown in the corresponding figure.
Specify BS 7159 fabricated and molded tee types by defining CAESAR II tee types 1 and 3
respectively at intersection points. CAESAR II automatically calculates the appropriate flexibility
and stress intensification factors for these fittings as per code requirements.
Enter the required code data on the Allowables auxiliary spreadsheet. The software provides
fields for both codes, number 27 BS 7159 and number 28 UKOOA. After selecting BS 7159,
CAESAR II provides fields for entry of the following code parameters:
SH1 through SH9 = Longitudinal Design Stress = d ELAMX
Kn1 through Kn9 = Cyclic Reduction Factor (as per BS 7159 paragraph 4.3.4)
Eh/Ea = Ratio of Hoop Modulus of Elasticity to Axial Modulus of Elasticity

K = Temperature Differential Multiplier (as per BS 7159 paragraph 7.2.1)
After selecting UKOOA, CAESAR II provides fields for entry of the following code parameters:
SH1 through SH9 = hoop design stress = f 1 * LTHS
R1 through R9 = ratio r = ( a(0:1) / a(2:1))
f2 = system factor of safety (defaults to 0.67 if omitted)

K = temperature differential multiplier (same as BS 7159)
These parameters need only be entered a single time, unless they change at some point in the
system.
Performing the analysis is simpler than the system modeling. <Product> evaluates the operating
parameters and automatically builds the appropriate load cases. In this case, three are built:

Operating includes pipe and fluid weight, temperature, equipment displacements, and
pressure. This case is used to determine maximum code stress/strain, operational
equipment nozzle and restraint loads, hot displacements, and so forth.
Cold (same as above, except excluding temperature and equipment movements). This case
is used to determine cold equipment nozzle and restraint loads.
Expansion (cyclic stress range between the cold and hot case). This case may be used to
evaluate fatigue criteria as per paragraph 4.3.4 of the BS 7159 Code.
After analyzing the response of the system under these loads, CAESAR II displays a menu of
possible output reports. Reports may be designated by selecting a combination of load case and
results type (displacements, restraint loads, element forces and moments, and stresses). From
the stress report, you can determine at a glance whether the system passed or failed the stress
criteria.
For UKOOA, the piping is considered to be within allowable limits when the operating stress falls
within the idealized stress envelope this is illustrated by the shaded area in the following figure.
Pipe stress analysis software with worldwide acceptance is now available for evaluation of FRP
piping systems as per the requirements of the most sophisticated FRP piping codes. This
means that access to the same analytical methods and tools enjoyed by engineers using steel
pipe is available to users of FRP piping design.
1. Cross, Wilbur, An Authorized History of the ASME Boiler an Pressure Vessel Code, ASME,
1990
2. Olson, J. and Cramer, R., "Pipe Flexibility Analysis Using IBM 705 Computer Pro\-gram
MEC 21, Mare Island Report 277-59," 1959
3. Fiberglass Pipe Handbook, Composites Institute of the Society of the Plastics Indus\-try,
1989
4. Hashin, Z., "Analysis of Composite Materials a Survey," Journal of Applied Mechanics, Sept.
1983
5. Greaves, G., "Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Pipe Design," Ciba-Geigy Pipe Systems
6. Puck, A. and Schneider, W., "On Failure Mechanisms and Failure Criteria of
Filament-Wound Glass-Fibre/Resin Composites," Plastics and Polymers, Feb. 1969
7. Hashin, Z., "The Elastic Moduli of Heterogeneous Materials," Journal of Applied Mechanics,
March 1962

8. Hashin, Z. and Rosen, B. Walter, "The Elastic Moduli of Fibre Reinforced Materials," Journal
of Applied Mechanics, June 1964
9. Whitney, J. M. and Riley, M. B., "Elastic Properties of Fiber Reinforced Composite
Materials," AIAA Journal, Sept. 1966
10. Walpole, L. J., "Elastic Behavior of Composite Materials: Theoretical Foundations,"
Advances in Applied Mechanics, Volume 21, Academic Press, 1989
11. BS 7159: 1989 British Standard Code of Practice for Design and Construction of Glass
Reinforced Plastics GRP Piping Systems for Individual Plants or Sites.
12. UK Offshore Operators Association Specification and Recommended Practice for the Use of
GRP Piping Offshore., 1994
Code Compliance Considerations

This section comprises general notes that cover code compliance. The first several pages
contain information that applies to all of the codes. The last pages contain code-specific
discussions. Review the general notes, highlighting those that apply to your problem. Also,
review the notes for the piping code that you need.
Configuration Editor (on page 55) gives details about the various parameters that you can use in
the CAESAR II setup file. Many of these parameters are discussed from an "application
point-of-view" in the text that follows. For more information on the CAESAR II setup file, see
Configuration Editor (on page 55).
General Comments on Configuration Settings' Effect on

Piping Code Calculations
Use the table below to determine which SIF value you need.
If you have... then use an SIF Value of ...
threaded joints 2.3
double welded slip-on flanges 1.2
lap joint flanges with B16.9 stub 1.6

ends
Use the Weld ID on the SIF & TEE Auxiliary dialog box to calculate the sweepolet and insert
weldolet fittings.
If you can verify that the welds for these fittings are finished or dressed, then specifying
the weld ID lowers the SIF.

User-defined bend SIF overrides affect the entire cross section of the bend, and as such you
cannot use them to specify a single point on the bend curvature. You must specify the SIFs for
the bend TO node. CAESAR II will apply this SIF, in place of the code SIF, over the entire bend
curvature, from weldline to weldline.
The default value for Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) bend and intersection SIFs is 2.3. Use
this value for all user-modified bends and intersections. The default flexibility factor value for
FRP bends is 1.0. If you modify these values, and generate the SIFs using the steel fatigue tests
you might not be able to use them as a basis for SIFs with FRP fittings.
CAESAR II does not permit the use of SIF values less than 1.0.
The only piping codes that cannot take advantage of the WRC 329 options, or the option to use
the ASME NC and ND rules for reduced intersections, are BS806 and the Swedish Power
Method 1. These codes do not use the effective section modulus, and any extrapolation of the
ASME methods into these codes is unwarranted.
There is a small difference between Use WRC329 and Reduced Intersection = WRC329. Use
Use WRC329 for all full and reduced intersections that are not welding tees or reinforced tees.
Use Reduced Intersection =WRC329 for reduced fittings that are not welding tees or
reinforced fabricated tees. A fitting is reduced when d/D is less than 0.975.
1. Include torsional stresses in all stress calculations (sustained and occasional).

2. Use a torsional SIF of (r/R) io.
3. Compute i(ib) use 0.6(R/T)2/3 [1+0.5(r/R)3](r/rp).
4. For i(ob) use 1.5(R/T)2/3 (r/R)1/2 (r/rp) and i(ob)(t/T)>1.5
when (r/R) < 0.9 use 0.9(R/T)2/3 (r/rp) and i(ob)(t/T)>1.0
when (r/R) = 1.0 and use interpolation when 1.0 > (r/R) > 0.9
5. For ir use 0.8 (R/T)2/3 (r/R), and ir > 2.1
6. If the radius at the junction provided is greater than the larger of t/2 or T/2, then divide the
calculated SIFs by 2.0, but with ib>1.5 and ir>1.5.
1. For ib use 1.5(R/T)2/3 (r/R)1/2 (r/rp), and ib(t/T)>1.5

when (r/R) < 0.9
use 0.9(R/T)2/3 (r/rp), and ib(t/T)>1.0
when (r/R) = 1.0 and
use interpolation when 1.0 > (r/R) > 0.9
2. For ir use 0.8 (R/T)2/3 (r/R), and ir > 2.1

3. If a radius at the provided junction is greater than the larger of t/2 or T/2, then divide the
calculated SIFs by 2.0, but with ib>1.5 and ir>1.5.
Bonney Forge Sweepolets tend to be a little more conservative because they are used for
fittings in the nuclear industry. Bonney Forge Sweepolet equations can generate SIFs less than
one because they are stronger than the girth butt weld used as the unity basis for the code fitting
SIFs. CAESAR II does not permit SIFs of less than 1.0. If you generate a Bonney Forge
Sweepolet SIF that is less than 1.0, the default value 1.0 is used.
The Bonney Forge SIF Data came from the technical flyer: "Bonney Forge Stress Intensification
Factors" Bulletin 789/Sl-1, Copyright 1976.
Although CAESAR II allows the specification of two element intersections, you cannot specify
two SIFs at a single node and get an increased SIF. For example, you cannot specify a socket
weld SIF and an intersection SIF at the same point.
For two element joints use the largest diameter and the smallest wall thickness, when
discrepancies exist between the two adjoining pipes. For two element fittings modeled as socket
welds use the largest wall thickness. Both of these selections generate the largest SIFs and the
most conservative stress calculations for under-specified fittings.
The mismatch given for girth butt welds is the average mismatch and not the
maximum mismatch. You must verify that any maximum mismatch requirements are satisfied.
If a fillet leg is given in conjunction with a socket weld SIF definition, then both socket weld types
result in the same SIF.
The B31.3 Sustained case SIF factor in the setup file affects the B31.3, B31.3 Chapter IX,
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter XI, B31.5, NAVY 505, CAN Z662, B31.1 (1967), GPTC, HPGSL, and JPI
codes.
For B31.3, B31.3 Chapter IX, B31.4 and B31.4 Chapter XI, the software defaults this
configuration setting to 0.75.
For B31.8, the software sets the SIF Multiplier for Sustained Stress Index configuration setting to
0.75.
Calculate the corroded effective section modulus by using (r2)te

Where:
r is the average cross-sectional radius of the non-corroded pipe
(te) is the corroded thickness.
Select the thickness (te) based on the non-corroded thicknesses of the branch and
header, in other words, the lesser of Th and iTb. The resulting value has the corrosion
subtracted from it before the effective section modulus calculation is made.
The All Cases Corroded configuration setting applies to all piping codes, with the following
exceptions:

The software always sets the primary load stress types SUS, OCC, K1P, and K2P to
corroded for B31.3, B31.3 Chapter IX, HPGSL, and JPI. The software also sets the same
primary load stress types for EN-13480 and CODETI codes, which use the
In-Plane/Out-Plane SIF.
For B31.5, the software sets HYD to corroded in addition to the primary load stress types.
For Stoomwezen, IGE/TD/12, and DNV, All Cases Corroded applies only to HYD. For all
other load case stress types with these code standards, corrosion is used.
All Cases Corroded is ignored for BS 7159, UKOOA, and ISO 14692. For these codes, the
software uses corrosion for all load case stress types.
If you use different piping codes in one job, the code that displays at the top of the Output
Stress report is the last code used during model input. SIFs, allowables, and code equations
are all computed in accordance with the code that varies with the input.
When there are multiple piping codes in the same piping job, and a piping code change occurs
at an intersection, if the intersection is completely defined with three pipes framing into the
intersection then the piping code used to generate the SIF equations will be that one associated
with the first header pipe framing into the intersection. If the intersection is only partially defined,
then the piping code will be selected from the first pipe framing into the intersection point.
The ASME piping codes primarily combine moments for thermal expansion stresses. When
there is any tendency for large axial forces to exist in the pipe these code equations are not
adequate. An example of this is for buried or partially buried pipe. Here the axial stresses can be
very high.
The piping codes that do not, by default, include torsion in the sustained or occasional stress
calculations display below:
B31.3 Navy 505
B31.5 CAN Z662
B31.8 B31.1 (1967)
PD 8010-1 GPTC/Z380
HPGSL JPI
EN 13480 CODETI
(In-Plane/ (In-Plane/
Out-Plane SIF) Out-Plane SIF)
These codes tell you to add the longitudinal stresses due to weight, pressure, and other
sustained loadings so torsion is not added. Torsional shear stresses are not longitudinal
stresses. You can request that torsion is added into the sustained and occasional stress
equations by including the Add Torsion in SL Stress option in the setup file. The torsion stress

is still not intensified as it is in the power piping codes. This lack of intensification is considered
an oversight and is corrected in WRC 329. You can include this fix by running any of the above
codes and including the Use WRC330 option in the setup file.
The radius given in CAESAR II is always the equivalent closely spaced miter radius. Only use
the radius calculation for widely spaced miters in the piping codes after breaking the widely
spaced miter bend down into individual single cut miters as recommended.
Use reduced intersection calculations when d/D < 0.975.

Where:
d = Outside Diameter of the Branch
D = Outside Diameter of the Header
B31.1 and the ASME Section III piping codes provide stress intensification factors for reduced
branch ends. None of the other piping codes provide these SIFs. The Reduced Intersection
option in the setup file enables other piping code users to access improved SIFs for reduced
fittings. You should review the notes associated with the B31.1 and the ASME Section III codes
that follow to verify that any other parameters or input associated with the reduced intersection
calculations are set as necessary.
If you request pressure stiffening for those codes that do not normally provide it, CAESAR II
applies pressure stiffening for all bends and for both miter types.
The defaults occasional load factor from the setup file used in the evaluation of the allowable
stress, display the text that follows for each of the piping codes.
B31.1: The occasional load factor is 1.15.
B31.3 and B31.3 Chapter IX: The occasional load factor is 1.33.
B31.4: OCC load factor does not affect a B31.4 analysis in CAESAR II.
B31.4 Chapter XI: OCC load factor does not affect a B31.4 Chapter XI analysis in CAESAR
II.
B31.5: The occasional load factor is 1.33.
B31.8: Occasional cases are not specifically defined. If you enter an OCC load case the
allowable defaults to 1.0 times the sustained allowable stress in other words OCC=1.0.
B31.9: OCC load factor is 1.15.
ASME Section III NC and ND: The default value of OCC is 1.2, the occasional stress
allowable is 1.8 (1.2 X 1.5)Sh but not greater than 1.5Sy. If OCC is 1.5 or 2.0, the allowable
is set to the minimum of 2.25Sh/1.8Sy (Level C) or 3.0Sh/2.0Sy (Level D). Note in the latter
two cases, enter Sm for Sh.
Navy 505: Occasional cases are not addressed but defaults to the method used in B31.1,
and an OCC value of 1.15 is the default.

Z662: The occasional case is not defined, but if you make an entry the allowable for the
case defaults to 1.0 times the sustained allowable.
BS806: The occasional load case is not defined, but if you make an entry the allowable
stress for the OCC load case is KSh. This is the occasional load factor times the sustained
allow\-able. The default value for k is 1.0.
Swedish Method 1: OCC is not used. The load cases are not differentiated. The same
allowable Sigma(ber)/1.5 is used for all load cases.
Swedish Method 2: Uses an OCC default of 1.2 as recommended in the Swedish Piping
Code.
B31.1(1967): OCC default is 1.15.
Stoomwezen: OCC default is 1.2.
RCC-M C&D: OCC default is 1.2.
CODETI: OCC default is 1.15.
NORWEGIAN: OCC default is 1.2.
FBDR: OCC default is 1.15
BS 7159: The occasional load case is not defined.
UKOOA: The occasional load case is not defined.
IGE/TD/12: Table 4 of the code addresses occasional stress increases. The occasional
factor in the setup file has no bearing on this code.
EN-13480: The occasional load factor varies from 1.0 to 1.8, depending on the loading.
Refer to Section 12.3.3 for details.
GPTC/Z380: Occasional cases are not specifically defined. If you enter an OCC load case
the allowable defaults to 1.0 times the sustained allowable stress in other words OCC=1.0.
HPGSL: The occasional load factor is 1.33.
JPI: The occasional load factor is 1.33.
You can change the occasional load factor from the software defaults by using the setup file.
Enter the value as a percent.
Code-Specific Notes
Pressure stiffening is defined by default in the code. You can exclude pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening=No option in the setup file.
Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code providing the bend is not a
widely spaced miter. CAESAR II does not verify the B31.1 criteria "B" length for closely spaced
miters.

B31.1 does not by default add F/A into the stress calculation. F/A and the pressure stresses are
added to the bending stress, whether the tensile or compressive component of bending, to
produce the largest longitudinal stress component. This is true for all codes where the addition
of axial and pressure terms are concerned. You can include the axial force terms into the code
stress by inserting the Add F/A In Stress=Yes option in the setup file.
The F/A forces are structural forces developed in the pipe independent of the
pressure PD/4t forces.
In 1980, B31.1 added a reduced branch SIF equation to Appendix D. This equation came from
ASME Section III. However, B31.1 continued to use the effective section modulus calculation for
the branch. The ASME Section III rules clearly stated that the branch section modulus, not the
effective section modulus should be used with the new SIF. B31.1 continued use of the effective
section modulus produced unnecessarily high calculated stresses. This error was corrected in
the 1989 version of B31.1. Prior to CAESAR II version 3.0, you had two options:
Use the pre-1980 version of the B31.1 SIF rules
Use the very conservative post-1980 B31.1 SIF rules
These options also exist in version 3.0 and later except that the section modulus problem is
corrected. If you need to run version 3.0 and later without the section modulus correction, then
include the B31.1 Reduced Z Fix=No option in the setup file.
Reduced intersection branch SIFs were not intended for reinforced or welding tees.
Conservative results are produced, but the original researchers did not intend for SIFs to be
used for these fittings. You can disable the reduced branch fitting calculations for reinforced or
welded tees by including the No Reduced SIF for RFT and WLT option in the setup file. This
produces less conservative results, but can in some cases be justified.
B31.1 102.3.2 (c) says to divide the allowable stresses coming from the stress tables in
Appendix A by the applicable weld joint factors listed in Paragraph 102.4.3.
Use the equations below to calculate the stress allowables.

Expansion Allowable = f [ (1.25/Eff)(Sc+Sh) - Sl ]
Sustained Allowable = Sh/Eff
Occasional Allowable = Sh/Eff * (Occ)
Where:
f = Cyclic Reduction Factor
Eff = Longitudinal Weld Joint Efficiency
Sc = Cold Allowable Stress
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress
Sl = Sustained Stress
Occ = Occasional Load Factor Default is 1.15

Inplane and outplane SIFs for intersections are the same.
The default flexibility factor value is 1.0. Use the following equation to determine the SIF value:
maximum of 2.0 or 0.5 + .01*Alpha* SQRT(D2/t2).
Where:
D1- Diameter of the Large End
t1- Thickness of the Large End
D2 - Diameter of the Small End
t2 - Thickness of the Small End
Alpha - the Reducer Cone Angle in Degrees.
Where:
Alpha = atan[ (D1-D2) / (2*length of the sloped portion of the reducer*0.6) ]
Alpha is the slope of the (concentric) reducer transition in degrees. If unspecified,
CAESAR II calculates alpha using 60 percent of the entered reducer length.
Alpha cannot exceed 60° and the larger of D1/t1 and D2/t2 cannot exceed 100.
widely-spaced miter.
In-plane and out-plane SIFs for intersections are separate and unique.
B31.3 piping code gives the equation for the expansion stress. Because that equation does not
include the longitudinal stress due to axial loads in the pipe, CAESAR II does not include the F/A
component of the stress in the expansion stress equation. The code also says that you can add
the F/A component where it is significant. Change this by including the Add F/A In Stress
option in the setup file. The F/A longitudinal stress components are added by default to the code
stress component for all other stress categories.
The default SIF value for a girth butt weld is 1.0.
B31.3 makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds without
undercut. Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of 1.3 for all
B31.3 socket welds.

B31.3 2014 uses 1.3 for socket welds with no undercut. The software provides 2.1 as
a legacy value for calculations based on earlier versions.

Expansion Allowable = f [ (1.25)(Sc+Sh) - Sl ]
Sustained Allowable = Sh
Occasional Allowable = Sh * (Occ)
Where:
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress (as selected)
By default, B31.3 applies corrosion to section modulus calculations for sustained and occasional
stress calculation. Specifying All Stress Cases Corroded in the setup file performs the
corroded stress calculations for all stress calculations.
Pressure effects on miters are allowed in the B31.3 piping code.
The default SIF value is 1.0. The default flexibility factor value is 1.0.
widely-spaced miter.
B31.3 Chapter IX adds the F/A longitudinal stress components and torsion to the code stress
component for all stress categories.
The default SIF value for a girth butt weld is 1.0. This is

B31.3 Chapter IX makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds
without undercut. Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of
1.3 for all B31.3 Chapter IX socket welds.
B31.3 2014 uses 1.3 for socket welds with no undercut. The software provides 2.1 as
a legacy value for calculations based on earlier versions.

Expansion Allowable = 1.25Sc+0.25Sh
Occasional Allowable = Sh * (Occ)
Where:
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress (as selected)
By default, B31.3 Chapter IX applies corrosion to section modulus calculations for sustained and
occasional stress calculation. Specifying All Stress Cases Corroded in the setup file performs
the corroded stress calculations for all stress calculations.
Pressure stiffening is defined by default in the code. You can exclude pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening on Bends in the setup file.
widely spaced miter.

B31.4 uses EFF, (found in the Allowable Stress auxiliary field). B31.4 uses EFF in the Hoop
allowable. For more information, see US Code Stresses in the CAESAR II Quick Reference
Guide.
B31.4 has no provision for using an effective section modulus calculation at intersections.
The default SIF value is 1.0. The default Flexibility Factor value is 1.0.
The B31.4 code standard defines allowable values provided in the table Allowable Values for
Pipeline System Stresses. The table also indicates that the code classifies stresses as
restrained, unrestrained and inland riser and platform. CAESAR II (version 9.0 and beyond)
uses this table and the allowable stresses with the exceptions explained below.
Offshore liquid pipeline, discussed in Chapter IX of the code, has its own stresses and allowable
values. For more information, see B31.4 Chapter IX (on page 1070).
Chapter XI of the code covers slurry pipeline systems and follows the stress calculations of the
main body with some differences in the allowable values. For more information, see B31.4
Chapter XI.
You can select the following options through the Allowable Stress Indicator (on page 237) field
for B31.4 and B31.4 Chapter XI jobs:
Restrained Pipeline
The software calculates the stress in that particular element as fully restrained.
The software calculates the included elements as unrestrained.
The software selects a stress equation based on the calculated axial load in the piping
system. The software applies the fully restrained stress calculation when the axial pipe lo ad
is within 2.5% of the limiting load or otherwise applies the unrestrained stress calculations.
The limiting load is the load to fully constrain the pipe axially against the linear superposition
of thermal expansion and pressure elongation (when the Bourdon pressure effect is
selected in the Configuration Editor or in Special Execution Parameters). The
restrained/unrestrained status can change from element to element.
The software uses the following loads:
Local axial force
Thermal force: E* *AREA1
where AREA1 = (Ro2-Ri2)
Bourdon force: (1-2* )*P*AREA2
where AREA2 = Ri2

and determines the stress equation based on:

Limiting Force = Thermal Force + Bourdon Force
Delta = Limiting Force + Local Axial Force
When |Delta| / |Limiting Force| 0.025, then use the fully restrained stress calculations.
Otherwise, use the unrestrained stress calculations.
This option is most suitable with the Underground Pipe Modeler or when modeling
soil/pipe interaction using restraints.
Inland/Riser Platform
The software calculates the included elements as unrestrained. This option is not available
for B31.4 XI.
Allowable Stress Indicator defines the calculated stresses and the allowable values. For more
information, see US Code Stresses in the Quick Reference Guide. The B31.4 code standard
also provides examples of restrained versus unrestrained conditions.
The software treats the elements as unrestrained if the indicator field is set to Inland/Riser
Platform.
When the pipe element is buried in the Underground Pipe Modeler (on page 536) the
software sets Allowable Stress Indicator to CAESAR II Determines.
For the primary load case types (SUS, OCC, OPE and HYD), the software calculates hoop
stress, longitudinal stress, and equivalent combined stress and their respective allowable limits.
CAESAR II reports the stress and allowable limit for the largest (stress/allowable) ratio. If the
code standard does not specify a stress or an allowable, or the allowable is zero, then the
software excludes that stress from the code stress determination. When all allowables are zero,
the software sets the code stress to the largest stress.
The software reports zero equivalent combined stress for unrestrained
elements. It also treats the HYD stress type as unrestrained for any Allowable Stress Indicator
selection.
In accordance with the piping code, the software calculates the longitudinal stress by
considering both positive and negative values of the bending stress in the analysis for both
restrained and unrestrained pipe. CAESAR II uses the largest longitudinal stress in the code
stress determination.
When calculating equivalent stresses or strains, the software considers the most critical
combination of sustained, occasional, construction, and transient loads that can be expected.
The software calculates hoop stress according to the code standard, which indicates it should
be based on the D/t ratio.
The Base Hoop Stress On (ID/OD/Mean/Lamé) (on page 104) configuration setting
is not applicable in this situation.
For slurry pipelines (B31.4, Chapter XI), see the C403.2 section of B31.4 2016 for the hoop
stress allowable, which is used for both restrained and unrestrained pipe. For other stresses, the
allowable is according to the table in the design section of the standard.
The code provides the following exceptions to the allowable values:

For B31.4, CAESAR II calculates the hoop allowable (0.9Sy) for the HYD stress type
according to section 437.4.1 of the B31.4 2016.
For B31.4 XI, CAESAR II calculates the longitudinal allowable for the OCC stress type
(0.88Sy) according to section C403.3.1 of B31.4 2016 and calculates the Hoop allowable
(0.9Sy) for the HYD stress type according to section C437.4.1 of B31.4 2016.
For more information, see US Code Stresses in the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide.
The software calculates code stress for the EXP stress type according to section 402.5.1 of
B31.4 2016 for restrained pipe and per section 402.5.2 for unrestrained pipe. The software
computes the allowable expansion stress for unrestrained pipe according to section 403.3.2of
B31.4 2016 (Criteria for Allowable Stress Due to Periodic or Cyclic Loading). In this situation, SL
(stress due to sustained loads) used in the allowable calculation is the minimum between the
maximum of sustained stress and the additive longitudinal allowable stress for unrestrained pipe
(0.75Sy). Sy is the minimum yield strength.
The New Job Liberal Expansion Stress Allowable (on page 105) configuration
setting is not applicable in this situation.

Chapter IX presents the offshore requirements of B31.4. For more information, see B31.4 and
B31.4 Chapter XI (on page 1066).
Calculate all SIFs, flexibility factors, and section moduli exactly as stated in the standard B31.4
code.
Use the uncorroded wall thickness to make stress calculations.
There is no provision for a code check for the expansion load case, so no expansion cases are
generated under this code. Operating, sustained, or occasional load cases are treated
identically. Do three stress calculations for these load cases, each with a different allowable
limit. The Stress Report displays the calculation causing the highest percent of allowable along
with its specific allowable. These three stress checks are:
Hoop Stress: Sh F1 Sy
Longitudinal Stress: |SL| 0.8 Sy
Equivalent Stress: Se 0.9 Sy
Where:
Sh = (Pi Pe) D / 2t, when D/t >= 20
Sh = (Pi Pe) (D-t) / 2t, when D/t < 20
Pi = Internal Pressure
Pe = External Pressure
D = Outer Diameter
t = Wall Thickness
F1 = Hoop Stress Design Factor 0.60 or 0.72, see Table A402.3.5(a) of the B31.4 Code
Sy = Specified Minimum Yield Strength
SL = Sa + Sb or Sa - Sb, whichever results in greater stress value
Sa = Axial Stress Positive Tensile and Negative Compressive
Sb = Bending Stress
Se = 2[((SL - Sh)/2)2 + St2]1/2
St = Torsional Stress

For Straight Pipe:

Both SL and SC < 0.9ST (OPE)
Both SL, and SC < 0.9ST (SUS)
SL < 0.9ST and Sc < ST (OCC)
and
* The Stress Report displays the calculation causing the highest percent of allowable along
with its specific allowable.
For All Other Components
SL < 0.9ST (OPE, SUS, OCC)
SL < 0.75ST (SUS, OCC)

SE < f[1.25(SC + SH) SL] (EXP)
Where:
SL = SP + SX + SB
SP = 0.3SHoop (for restrained pipe); 0.5SHoop (for unrestrained pipe)
SX = R/A
SB = MB/Z (for straight pipe/bends with SIF = 1.0); MR/Z (for other components)
SC = Max (|SHoop SL|, sqrt[SL2 SLSHoop + SHoop2])
MR = sqrt[(0.75iiMi)2 + (0.75ioMo)2 + Mt2]
SE = ME/Z
ME = sqrt[(0.75iiMi)2 + (0.75ioMo)2 + Mt2]
S = Specified Minimum Yield Stress
T = Temperature Derating Factor
SH = 0.33SUT
SC = 0.33SU
SU = Specified Minimum Ultimate Tensile Stress
You can also let the software determine the appropriate stress. The software selects a

stress equation based on the calculated axial load in the piping system. The software
applies the fully restrained stress calculation when the axial pipe lo ad is within 2.5% of the
limiting load or otherwise applies the unrestrained stress calculations. The limiting load is
the load to fully constrain the pipe axially against the linear superposition of thermal
expansion and pressure elongation (when the Bourdon pressure effect is selected in the
Configuration Editor or in Special Execution Parameters). The restrained/unrestrained
status can change from element to element.
The software uses the following loads:
Local axial force
Thermal force: E* *AREA1
where AREA1 = (Ro2-Ri2)
Bourdon force: (1-2* )*P*AREA2
where AREA2 = Ri2
and determines the stress equation based on:
Limiting Force = Thermal Force + Bourdon Force
Delta = Limiting Force + Local Axial Force
When |Delta| / |Limiting Force| 0.025, then use the fully restrained stress calculations.
Otherwise, use the unrestrained stress calculations.
This option is most suitable with the Underground Pipe Modeler or when modeling
soil/pipe interaction using restraints.
B31.8 distinguishes between restrained and unrestrained piping for the purposes of stress
computations. To implement B31.8 you must define which sections of the piping system are
restrained, as per Code Section 833.1. In general, restrained piping is piping in which the soil or
supports prevent axial displacement of flexure at bends. Conversely, unrestrained piping is
piping that is free to displace axially or flex at bends. For more information, see Section 833.1.
Processing a B31.8 model through the Underground Pipe Modeler designates the buried
sections as restrained.
For restrained pipe, B31.8 specifies that the operating case stresses should include the thermal
axial stress component, a constant stress due to linear thermal expansion, but exclude thermal
bending stresses from the SB component. Because CAESAR II cannot go back and segregate
internal thermal forces and moments from those of other loads, the thermal axial stresses are
calculated and included as part of SX (as opposed to added as a constant), and thermal bending
stresses are conservatively included in SB.
Bending stress SB is defined differently for straight pipe or "large-radius" bends than it is for
other components. CAESAR II resolves the ambiguity of exactly what constitutes a
"large-radius" bend by considering any bend having an SIF of 1.0 as being a "large-radius"
bend.
The occasional load default value for B31.8 is 1.111 (1/0.9) and is only applied to the allowable
for SC combined stress calculated only in straight pipes. The allowable in this case is ST as
opposed to 0.9ST. There is no provision for increasing or decreasing this allowable.

In the case of occasional stresses in straight pipes, there are potentially two stresses (SL and
SC) to be compared against two different allowable limits. CAESAR II only prints the one that
provides the greater ratio of calculated stress versus allowable stress. You can visually
determine which stress prints by examining the magnitude of the allowable.
Pressure stiffening is included by default in the code. You can exclude pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by setting the Use Pressure Stiffening switch in the setup file.
Modifications to the flexibility factor and SIF of bends resulting from flanged ends are permitted
by the code.
B31.8 makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds without
undercut. Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of 2.1 for all
B31.8 socket welds.
Use of reducers is subject to the following limitations:

Alpha the reducer cone angle is limited to 60°
The larger of D1/SQRT(t1) and D2/SQRT(t2) cannot exceed 100 where D1/t1 and D2/t2 are
the diameters and thicknesses of the large and small ends, respectively.
Chapter VIII discusses the offshore requirements of B31.8. For more information, see B31.8 (on
page 1071)
Calculate all SIFs, flexibility factors, and section moduli exactly as in the standard B31.8 Code.
Make all stress calculations using the non-corroded wall thickness for the hoop and longitudinal
stresses. Use the corroded thickness for the combined stress.
generated under this code.
Operating, sustained, or occasional load cases are treated identically. For these load cases, you
must perform three stress calculations, each with specific allowable limits. The stress calculation
causing the highest percent of allowable displays in the stress report along with its specific
allowable. The stress checks are:
Hoop Stress: Sh F1ST

Longitudinal Stress: |SL| 0.8S

Equivalent Stress: Se 0.9S
Where:
Sh = (Pi Pe) D / 2t
D = Outer Diameter
t = Wall Thickness
F1 = Hoop Stress Design Factor 0.50 or 0.72 see Table A842.22 of B31.8
S = Specified Minimum Yield Strength
T = Temperature Derating Factor see Table 841.116A of B31.8
The product of S and T, the yield stress at operating temperature, is required
in the SH field of the CAESAR II Input:
SL = Maximum Longitudinal Stress Positive Tensile and Negative Compressive
Se = 2[((SL - Sh)/2)2 + Ss2]1/2
Ss = Torsional Stress
Paragraph 919.4.1.b states that for analysis methods follow B31.1. For more information, refer
to B31.1.
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in this code. You can include pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening=Yes option in the setup file.
Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in this code providing the bend is not a
The minimum SIF for reinforced and unreinforced fabricated tees is 2.1.
Calculate B1 and B2 according to the equations in ASME NC and ND.

Liberal Allowable is ignored and the (Sh-Sl) term is removed from the allowed limit (see
below). This is a programming decision rather than an interpretation of the piping code or a
recommendation for doing dynamic analysis.
For all intersections that are not welding tees or reinforced fabricated tees use the equation
*r2*t to calculate the approximate section modulus for the stress calculations.
This includes all reduced intersections and all d/D ratios.
If you do not want to use the branch SIF of the Code for welding and reinforced reducing tees,
include the No Reduced SIF for RFT and WLT flag in the setup file.

Expansion Allowable = f(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh) + (Sh-Sl)
Sustained Allowable = 1.5Sh If not at an intersection
Occasional Allowable = 1.8Sh not greater than 1.5Sy, if OCC=1.2;
2.25Sh not greater than 1.8Sy, if OCC=1.5;
3.0Sh not greater than 2.0Sy, if OCC=2.0
Where:
Sc = Cold Allowable
Sh = Hot Allowable
Sl = Sustained Stress from PD/4t+0.75iMb
Sy = Material Yield Stress
OCC = Occasional Factor from the CAESAR II configuration file
For two pipe intersections, for example butt welds or socket welds, B1 and B2 factors are 1.0. If
the ratio of the average branch to average run radius is less than 0.5, then apply the reduced
intersection rules to the B1 and B2 calculations regardless of the intersection type. If the
reduced intersection rules do not apply then use the following rules for butt welded fittings:
B2b = 0.4 * (R/T)**2/3 but not < 1.0
B2r = 0.5 * (R/T)**2/3 but not < 1.0

You can modify the values for B1 and B2 for any node in the SIF&TEE auxiliary field. Any
changes you make to B1 and B2 on an auxiliary field only apply for that element, regardless of
whether the node is an intersection or not.
When r/R < 0.5 use the following equations for B1 and B2:
B2b = 0.50 C2b but not < 1.0
B2r = 0.75 C2r but not < 1.0
C2b = 3(R/T)2/3 (r/R)1/2 (t/T)(r/rp), but not < 1.5
C2r = 1.15(r/t)1/4 but not < 1.5
WRC 329 produces smaller branch SIFs than ASME NC and ND, and the same run SIFs. The
branch SIFs are smaller by a factor of 2. This is when d/D<0.5 and WRC 329 corrects the Mob
(out of plane bending) inconsistency when d/D is between 0.5 and 1. In the lower ranges of d/D
ratios WRC 329 is less conservative than the present codes and in the higher ranges WRC 329
is more conservative than the present codes.
Pvar represents the difference between the operating pressure and Pmax, which is used in eq
11. CAESAR II forms occasional stresses by adding the sustained stress including pressure,
and the occasional stress including the stress difference between the operating pressure and
the peak pressure.
To satisfy equations 10 or 11, the expansion stress, iMc/Z, must remain below the maximum of
either f(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh) or f(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh) + (Sh-Sl) where Sl is the sustained stress as
defined by equation 11: Sl= PDo/4tn+0.75iMa/Z.
The approach taken by CAESAR II for moment summations at inter\-sections to satisfy

equations 8 and 9 is to use the SRSS of the moments at each end of the pipe framing into the
intersection. You do not have to adhere to the cumulative moment summation rules for a single
intersection as per NB 3683.1. In addition, use the effective section modulus rules of NC and ND
for all intersection stress calculations like equations 8 and 9. Use subsection NB to get the
values for B1 and B2 only, and to compute the local flexibility if requested. Because of the use of
this approach in CAESAR II, there is no allowable calculated for intersection points and
sustained or occasional loads.
Do not use the SIF in the ASME class 2 or 3 sustained stress calculations.
The default flexibility factor value is 1.0. Use the following equation to determine the SIF value:
2.0 max or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2).

Where:
D1- Diameter of the Large End
t1- Thickness of the Large End
Alpha - the reducer cone angle in degrees
Where:
CAESAR II calculates alpha using 60 percent of the entered reducer length. If left blank, the
value is set from an estimated slope equal to the arc tangent times 1/2 the change in diameters
times sixty percent of the entered reducer length.
Alpha cannot exceed 60º. The larger of D1/t1 and D2/t2 cannot exceed 100.
B1=.5 if alpha 30º, 1.0 if 30º < alpha 60º; B2 = 1.0.
There is an error in the code, the code states note 12 however, they meant note 14.
Alpha cannot exceed 60º.
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in the code. You can include pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening=Yes option in the setup file.
There is no limit in Z662 for the beneficial effect of the pad on an intersection. Most codes limit
the pad thickness to 1.5 times the header thickness. For Z662, CAESAR II does not limit the
pad thickness.

In-plane and out-plane stress intensification factors for intersections are the same.
Z662 makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds without
undercut. Codes that do differentiate use 1.3 for socket welds with no undercut, and 2.1 for all
others. Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of 1.3.

Z662 has no provision for using an effective section modulus calculation at intersections.

Expansion Allowable = (0.72)(T)(Sy)
Sustained Allowable = (Fac)(T)(L)(Sy)
Occasional Allowable = (Occ)(Fac)(T)(L)(Sy)
Operating Allowable = 0.9(T)(Sy), if pipe is buried and axial stress is compressive
Operating Allowable = (T)(Sy), if pipe is not buried and axial stress is compressive
Where:
Sy = Specified Minimum Yield Stress
Fac = Construction Design Factor
T = Temperature De-rating Factor
Occ = Occasional Load Factor (Default is 1.0)
L = Location Factor
CAESAR II assumes that Section 4.6.2 of the Z662 code establishes a requirement for the
allowable operating stress of 0.9 x S x T whenever the net axial stress is compressive in the
absence of bending stress, and an allowable operating stress of S x T when the net axial stress
is compressive in the presence of bending stress.
Section 4.6.2 requires the following:
1.
pressure hoop stress.
2. The addition of the hoop stress to the axial stress.
The latter represents the calculation of stress intensity when the axial stress is compressive,
implying that there is no longitudinal pressure stress in buried pipe (the longitudinal pressure
thrust loads are transmitted directly to the soil). CAESAR II handles these requirements, in the
operating load case, in the following manner:
1. If FAC is 1.0, the piping system is fully restrained in the axial direction as described in
Section 4.6.2.1, and the operating stress is calculated as:
Sh + E a (T2 - T1) - v Sh < 0.9 S x T
2. If FAC is 0.001, the piping system is buried, but the soil supports are modeled (rather than
just assumed to be fully rigid). This setting removes the longitudinal pressure stress from the
equation (as described above), and takes bending stresses into consideration, as required
by Section 4.6.2.2.1. In this case, the operating stress is calculated as:
Sh +Fax/A + Sb - v Sh < S x T
3. If FAC is 0.0, the piping system is either not restrained, or is a freely spanning or above
ground portion of a restrained line, as described in Section 4.6.2.2.1. In this case, the
longitudinal pressure stress is restored, so this formula only comes into effect if the net axial

stress including pressure is compressive, in which case the operating stress is calculated
as:
Sh +Slp + Fax/A + Sb < S x T
4. CAESAR II does not do an operating code stress check for those elements for which the net
axial stress is longitudinal.
5. CAESAR II does not check for buckling, as required by Section 4.6.2.2.2.
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in the Code. You can include pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the parameter Use Pressure Stiffening in the setup file.
Navy 505 has no provision for using an effective section modulus calculation at intersections.
In-plane and out-plane SIFs for intersections are the same.
Navy 505 has no provision for a liberal allowable, that is, adding the difference between Sh and
Sl to the allowed expansion stress range. This feature from the control parameter spreadsheet
has no effect on 505 runs.
Navy 505 uses longitudinal weld joint efficiency (Eff) to compute the cold and the hot allowable
stress. The use of this parameter is subject to some speculation however.
Navy 505 has no specific allowable for occasional loads. An occasional load factor (k), similar to
the B31.1 code is used, and the occasional allowable calculated from kSh.


Expansion Allowable = [f(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh)]/Eff
Occasional Allowable = k*Sh/Eff
Where:
Eff = Joint Efficiency (Not explicitly in the Code)
k = Occasional Load Factor, Defaults to 1.15
Use the B31.3 SUS Case SIF Factor option to multiply the SIFs for sustained and
occasional loads to be more in line with the current B31.1 practice.
For BS806, the maximum hot stress case is considered to be the operating load case. Operating
load case allowables are only given as per BS806 when the creep rupture strength governs the
stress range allowable. See BS806 sect 4.11.2.
BS806 SIFs printed are labeled fti and fto for bends, and Bi and Bo for intersections.
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening option in the setup file.
There is no limit in BS806 for the beneficial effect of the pad on an intersection. Most codes limit
the pad thickness to 1.5 times the header thickness. For BS806, CAESAR II does not limit the
pad thickness.
The code permits modifications due to flanged ends for all bend types. This includes closely and
widely spaced mitered bends.
The default SIF value for a girth butt weld is 1.0. original basis for SIFs.

Expansion Allowable = lesser of (H)(Sc)+(H)(Sh) <or> (H)(Sc)+F

Sustained Allowable = Sy
Occasional Allowable = (Sy)(Occ)
Operating Allowable = S avg rupture at design temperature
Where:
H = Multiplication Factor 0.9 or 1.0 from CAESAR II
Sc = 0.2% Proof Stress at Room Temperature
Sh = 0.2% Proof Stress at Design Temperature
F = Mean Stress to Failure in Design Life at Design Temperature
The pressure calculation at the intersections is made as required in BS806 4.8.5.1 Eq. (17). The
pressure stress as per Eq. (17) is computed and then combined with the bending and torsional
moment at each of the intersection ends 1, 2 and 3 respectively. The m factor is computed as
required with a value of n=1, in other words, for non-interacting intersections. BS806 does not
address reducers for SIF calculations.
When there is more than one thermal case to evaluate, read the following note carefully
concerning CAESAR II and the application of BS806.
Regarding BS806 4.11.3.1 paragraph 2, for sectionalized systems: CAESAR II only
makes the moment summation on a load case by load case basis, and does not take the largest
moments for an axis for any combination of load cases. The CAESAR II method is designed to
enable you to set up and combine the effects of each of the load transients that the piping
system undergoes. This method, for the most part is used in the B31/ASME piping codes. The
BS806 method is conservative in that it uses what is basically a shakedown approach and
computes a single worst-case moment difference. The CAESAR II method satisfies the
shakedown theory but, also computes the moment range for each different load traversed. The
BS806 method of combining the maximum moment range is more conservative. The BS806
method also eliminates the need to know where on the pipe the stress is the highest. Use the
moment tables in Appendix F, to get the moment difference between any two load cases.
However, you cannot use the moment tables to get the maximum moment difference for any of
the three moment axes as requested by the sectionalized piping rules. To satisfying 4.11.3.1(a)
CAESAR II uses the moment difference between the cold and the hot case to compute the
stress.
You can only enter a single modulus of elasticity for a single element in each job. Different
elements can have different moduli of elasticity, but you cannot vary that modulus between load
cases in the same run. Also, you cannot use a cold and a hot moduli of elasticity in the same
run.
For BS806 in 4.11.5.2 the value of n is 1.0.for all branches of the non-interacting type. See the
fourth paragraph 4.11.4.2 for the definition of n for interacting branches.

The CAESAR II equation modeling of the BS806 SIF curves for bends displays in the following
plots.
bends in the analysis by including the parameter Use Pressure Stiffening in the setup file.
Swedish Method 1 cannot take advantage of the WRC 329 recommendations. WRC 329, if
requested, is ignored.
Swedish Method 1 has no provision for using an effective section modulus calculation at
intersections.

Swedish Code item 9 is dealt with as a US tapered transition. Also, items 10 and 11 in the
Swedish table 9:2 correspond to items 8 and 9 in the CAESAR II nomenclature.

Sber = lesser of Sh or F
Allowable = (Fac)(Sber) / 1.5
Where:
Sh = Yield Stress at Temperature
F = Creep Rupture Stress at Temperature
Fac = Usually 1.5 for Pre-stressed Pipe Use 1.35.
Expansion Allowable = f ( 1.17S1 + 0.17S2 )

Occasional Allowable = Occ * Sh
Where:
S1 = Lesser of Sc or 0.267Sy
S2 = Lesser of Sh or 0.367Sy
Sc = Allowable Stress at Room Temperature (Stn2)
Sh = Allowable Stress at Design Temperature (Stn1)
Sy = Ultimate Tensile Strength at Room Temperature
If the weld is ground flush inside and out then the default SIF value for a girth butt weld is 1.0.
Swedish methods 1 and 2 Beta in the code is entered in the Pvar field on the Allowable Stress
Auxiliary dialog box. Enter the value for Pvar in percent, for example 10.0 for ten percent. If left
blank, the default is 10.0 percent.
Limits on the reasonable Betas that you may enter for the Swedish piping code is 10% to 25%.
Anything less than 0.1 is taken to be 10% and anything entered greater than 0.25 is taken to be
25%.
Include the Use PD/4t option in the setup file to tell CAESAR II to use the thin walled equations
for stress calculations for Swedish Method 1 code compliance.

The default value for the occasional load factor for Swedish Method 2 is 1.2.
The pad thickness on an intersection reduces stresses up to pad thickness of 2.5 times the
header wall thickness.
The default value for the flexibility factor is 1.0 and the equation to calculate reducer SIFs is:
2.0 max or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2)
Where D1 and t1 are the diameter and thickness of the large end and D2 and t2 are the
diameter and thickness of the small end.
Alpha is the reducer cone angle in degrees.
Where:
CAESAR II calculates alpha using 60 percent of the entered reducer length.
If you are using Swedish Method 1 to calculate the CAESAR II allowable, assume that the
SIGMA(tn) multiplier is 1.5 for piping that is not pre-stressed. If you use pre-stressed or cold
sprung pipe change Fac on the Allowable Stress Auxiliary field to 1.35 as per the Swedish
code.
Use the corroded section modulus for all stress calculations as per the definition of Di in the
Swedish code.
B31.1 (1967) uses ii = io for full-sized intersections for both the header and the branch, and for
reduced intersections uses ii = 0.75io + 0.25 for both the header and the branch.
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in this code. You can include pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening option in the setup file.

B31.1 (1967) makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds
without undercut. Codes that do differentiate use 1.3 for socket welds with no undercut, and 2.1
for all others. Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of 1.3.

Occasional Allowable = Sh/Eff * Occ
Where:
Eff = Longitudinal Weld Joint Efficiency
Occ = Occasional Load Factor (Default is 1.15)
Sc = The yield stress at room temperature is referred to as Re in the code.
Sh1 = The yield stress at design temperature is referred to as Re (um) in the

code.
Sh2 = not used
Sh3 = not used
FN = The average creep stress to produce one percent set is referred to as

Rrg in the code. F2 is the average creep tensile stress to produce
rupture and is referred to as Rmg in the code. F3 is the minimum creep
tensile stress to produce rupture and is referred to as Rmmin in the
code.
Eff = The cyclic reduction factor is referred to as Cf in the code.
Sy = The tensile strength at room temperature is referred to as Rm in the

code.
Fac = A constant whose value is either 0.44 or 0.5. For more information, refer
to Stoomwezen Section 5.2.
Pvar = The Cm coefficient in the code whose value is usually 1.0.

Stoomwezen does not mention reducers for Stress Intensification Factor (SIF) calculations.
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in the code. You can enable pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening option in the configuration file.
Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted providing the bend is not a widely
spaced miter.
Inplane and outplane SIFs for intersections are the same for these piping codes.
If you do not want to use the SIF for branch connections, found in Figure C3680.1 of the code
for welding and reinforced reduced tees, include the No Reduced SIF For RFT and WLT option
in the configuration file.
Expansion Allowable = F (1.25Sc + 0.25Sh)+(Sh -

SSL)
Occasional Allowable = OCC * Sh

OCC defaults to 1.2 for Level
B
C
D
Where:
F = Cyclic Reduction Factor
Sc = Cold Allowable
Sh = Hot Allowable
SSL = Sustained Stress (PD/4t + 0.75i Mb/Z)
OCC = Occasional Factor from the CAESAR II configuration file

Pvar represents the difference between the operating pressure and Pmax, which is used in eq
10. To satisfy equations 7 or 8 use iMc/Z stress as the maximum of either F(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh) or
F(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh) + (Sh - Ssl) where Ssl is the sustained stress as defined by equation 6.
For reducers RCC-M states that the flexibility factor is 1.0. The code also states that the SIF is:
The minimum of 2.0 or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2)
Where:
D2 = Diameter of the Small End
t2 = Thickness of the Small End
Alpha is the reducer cone angle in degrees.
If not specified:
Alpha = atan[ 0.5 * (D1-D2) / (0.60 * length of the reducer element) ]
Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code for all bends, including
widely spaced miters.
CODETI provides two separate equations to calculate the in-plane and out-plane SIFs for
intersections.
CODETI provides an equation to calculate the expansion stress. This equation does not include
calculations for the longitudinal stress due to axial loads in the pipe. CAESAR II does not include
the F/A longitudinal stress component for stress in the expansion stress equation. You can
change this by setting Add F/A In Stress to the configuration file. The software adds the F/A
longitudinal stress component, by default, to the code stress component for all other stress
categories.

Expansion Allowable = F [1.25 (Sc + Sh)] - Sl
Occasional Allowable = OCC * Sh
Where:
F = Cyclic Reduction Factor


OCC = Occasional Load Factor from Configuration - Defaults to 1.15
Pressure stiffening of bends is automatically included as directed by the code. You can disable
pressure stiffening on bends in the analysis by excluding the Use Pressure Stiffening option in
the configuration file.
Flexibility coefficients and SIFs are phased in for bends with an included angle between 15° and
45°. The default value for bends smaller than 15° is 1.0.
To determine the SIF of a fabricated tee having an angle of incidence other than 90°divide it by
(sin a)3/2
Recommended occasional load factor values are 1.15, 1.2, and 1.3, as per Code Table C3.3.
CODETI requires that when "the design temperature is such that the creep
characteristics are determinant, and if a section of the piping presents locally weaker
characteristics," the sum of the primary and secondary stresses must not exceed the value
flexibility factor (from Section C1.4.3). CAESAR II does not implement this requirement and is
left for you to verify.
Pressure stiffening of bends is required for flexibility factors only and is done by default. You can
disable pressure stiffening by excluding the Use Pressure Stiffening option in the setup file.
You can enable pressure stiffening for stress intensification factors (SIF)s as well by including
the Use Pressure Stiffening option.
Summing the longitudinal component F/A into the stress calculation is not defined by default in
the code. You can enable the axial force term in the code stress by including the Add F/A In
Stress option in the configuration file.
The code uses a circumferential weld strength factor (Z) when calculating longitudinal
pressure stress. Enter this value as Eff.

You can calculate the cyclic reduction factor using the following equation: F = (7000/Ne)0.2
Where
Ne = Number of Anticipated Cycles
F may be as high as 2.34 but not greater than 1.0 when Rm governs the expansion
stress allowable.
In-plane and out-of-plane SIFs for bends and intersections use the same stress equation.

Expansion Allowable = Sr + F2 - SSUS
Sustained Allowable = F2
Occasional Allowable = Occ * F2
Where:
Sr = Minimum of 1.25F1 + 0.25F2; Fr * Rs - F2; or Fr (1.25 R1 + 0.25 R2) The latter for higher
temperatures; above 425°C for austenitic stainless steel, or above 370°C for other
materials.
F2 = Hot Allowable Stress (entered in Sh)
OCC Occasional Load Factor from the configuration file (defaults to 1.2)
SSUS = Sustained Stress
F1 = Allowable Stress at Ambient (entered in Sc)
Fr = Cyclic Reduction Factor
RS = Permissible Extent of Stress for 7000 Cycles (from Code Table 10.2)
R1 = Lesser of F1 and 0.267 RM
R2 = Lesser of F2 and 0.367 RM
Rm = Ultimate Tensile Strength at room temperature
SIFs for fitting types 6 (branch with raised edge radius), 7 (branch on locally thickened pipe), 13
(conical reducer with knuckles), and 14 (reducer without knuckles) have not been implemented
in CAESAR II so you must enter them manually. The Norwegian code offers an alternative
stress analysis method in Appendix D. However, CAESAR II does not implement this method.

Calculate the SIFs by using the following equation: 2.0 max or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2).
Where:
alpha - the slope of the reducer
The default flexibility factor value is 1.0.
FDBR is similar to Code-Specific Settings in most requirements. For more information, see
Code-Specific Settings.
FDBR limits the pad thickness to a maximum equal to the header thickness. If you enter a pad
thickness that is greater than the header thickness, the software overrides it with the header
thickness.
Treat intersections similar to ASME NC. For more information, see ASME NC.
Use either 1.0 or 1.8 depending on the thickness.
You must use the Hot Modulus of Elasticity in your flexibility analysis.
Wen computing the expansion case allowable stress,you must include the ratio of Ehot to Ecold.
You can override the software-computed ratio by manually entering a value for Fac.
The value for the flexibility factor is 1.0 and the equation to calculate reducer SIFs is:
2.0 max or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2)
Where:
D1 - Diameter of the Large End
t1 - Thickness of the Large End

Alpha - Reducer Cone Angle in Degrees

When not entered:
Alpha = atan[ 0.5 * (D1-D2) / (0.60 * length of the reducer element) ]
BS 7159 for Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe requires that you evaluate the operating
load case only. You must verify the following operating load case combined stress requirements
are met:
If Sx is tensile:
(OPE)
and
(OPE)
or
if Sx is compressive:
If Fx/A > P(Dm)/(4t) and it is compressive
(OPE)
and
(OPE)
Circumferential Stress
for straight pipes
for bends

for tees
Dm and t are always for the Run Pipe
BS 7159 allowables are based on material design strain d. Alowable stresses differ in the axial
and hoop directions by the ratio of the axial and hoop moduli of elasticity:
Sh = dEx SHOOP = ( dEx) (Eh/Ex)
Enter the ratio Eh/Ex in the allowable stress Eff field. If left blank, the value defaults to 1.0 for
isotropic materials.
Pressure stiffening of bends is done assuming the bends are fully pressurized up to the design
strain of the components. You can exclude pressure stiffening on bends by including the Use
Pressure Stiffening option in the configuration file.
BS 7159 does not by default add F/A into the stress calculation (unless this puts an element into
compression as described above). Use the Add F/A in Stress option to tell CAESAR II to
include the axial force term into the code stress.
The fatigue factor Kn is used inversely relative to the cyclic reduction factor in most codes, so its
value should be greater than or equal to 1.0 (allowable stress is divided by this number). Kn is
calculated as:
Kn = 1.0 + 0.25 (As/ n) (Log10(n) - 3.0)
Where:
As = Stress Range During Fatigue Cycle
n = Maximum Stress During Fatigue Cycle
n = Number of Cycles During Design Life
Enter Kn in the Cyclic Reduction Factor fields.
BS 7159 requires that you consider the thermal strain of the pipe material as being from 80% -
85% below the true material strain due to insulation effects of the pipe wall. Enter this reduction
factor K in the allowable stress FAC field. If left blank, this value defaults to 1.0.
The stress intensity and flexibility factors of bends vary based on laminate type:
All chopped strand mat (CSM) construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
CSM and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.

CSM and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
You can enter the laminate type in the Bend Type field, or set the type default on the
Special Execution Parameter dialog box.
BS 7159 does not mention reducers for SIF calculations.
The United Kingdom Offshore Operators Association (UKOOA) Specification and

Recommended Practice for the Use of GRP Piping Offshore is similar in many respects to the
BS 7159, except that it simplifies the calculation requirements in exchange for imposing more
conservatism on the piping operating conditions. Rather than explicitly calculating a combined
stress, the specification defines an idealized envelope of combinations of axial and hoop
stresses which cause the equivalent stress to reach failure. This curve represents the plot of:
( x/ -all)
2+
hoop / hoop-all)
2 -[ x hoop /( x-all hoop-all)] 1.0
Where:
= Allowable Stress Axial
x-all
hoop-all = Allowable Stress Hoop
The specification conservatively limits you to that part of the curve falling under the line between
x-all also known as a(0:1) and the intersection point on the curve where hoop is twice x a
natural condition for a pipe loaded only with pressure. An implicit modification to this
requirement is the fact that pressure stresses are given a factor of safety typically equal to 2/3
while other stresses are not. This gives an explicit requirement of:
Pdes f1 f2 f3 LTHP
Where:
Pdes = Allowable Design Pressure
f1 = Factor of Safety for 97.5% Lower Confidence Limit Usually 0.85
f2 = System Factor of Safety Usually 0.67
f3 = Ratio of Residual Allowable After Mechanical Loads
= 1 - (2 sab) / (r f1 LTHS)
sab = Axial Bending Stress Due to Mechanical Loads
r= a(0:1) / a(2:1)
a(0:1) = Long Term Axial Tensile Strength In Absence Of Pressure Load

a(2:1) = Long Term Axial Tensile Strength Under Pressure Loading Only
LTHS = Long Term Hydrostatic Strength Hoop Stress Allowable
LTHP = Long Term Hydrostatic Pressure Allowable
This is implemented in the CAESAR II using the following equations:
Code Stress Code Allowable

a (f2
b /r) + PDm / (4t) (f1 f2 LTHS) / 2.0
Where:
P = Design Pressure
Dm = Pipe Mean Diameter
t = Pipe Wall Thickness
On the Allowable auxiliary dialog box, the product of f1 and LTHS is entered in the SH1, SH2,
SH3 fields; r is entered in the F1, F2, F3 fields; f2 is entered in the Eff field; and the temperature
reduction factor K (described for BS 7159 above) is entered in the Fac field if omitted, it defaults
to 1.0. K- and i-factors for bends and tees, and bending and pressure stresses are calculated
as described for the BS 7159.
UKOOA refers to BS 7159 for SIF calculations.
CAESAR II performs calculations as per the IGE/TD/12 Edition 2 code requirements. The
complexity of these requirements far exceeds what can be described here. We recommend that
you acquire a copy of this code from the International Institution of Gas Engineers & Managers.
This code is entitled "Rules for Submarine Pipeline Systems." The Allowable Stress Design
(ASD) provisions of the code are implemented here, rather than the limit state requirements.
DNV does not provide any guidance on calculating SIFs, flexibility factors, or section moduli. An
informal poll of DNV experts and users was taken and the decision was made to use the B31.1
Power Code. Make all stress calculations using the corroded wall thickness.
generated under this code.
Treat the operating, sustained, or occasional load cases identically. For these load cases, you
must perform three stress calculations with different allowable limits. The stress calculation
causing the highest percent of allowable is reported in the stress report, along with its specific
allowable. These stress checks are:
Hoop Stress: Sh ns SMYS
Hoop Stress: Sh nu SMTS

Longitudinal Stress: SL n SMYS
Equivalent Stress: Se n SMYS
Where:
Sh = (Pi Pe) (D t) / 2t
D = Outer Diameter
t = Wall Thickness
ns = Hoop Stress Yielding Usage Factor; see Tables C1 and C2 of the DNV Code
SMYS = Specified Minimum Yield Strength at Operating Temperature
nu = Hoop Stress Bursting Usage Factor; see Tables C1 and C2 of the DNV Code
SMTS = Specified Minimum Tensile Strength at Operating Temperature
SL = Maximum Longitudinal Stress
n = Equivalent Stress Usage Factor; see Table C4 of the DNV Code
Se = [Sh2 + SL2 - ShSL + 3t2]1/2
t = Torsional Stress
DNV does not mention reducers for SIF calculations.
EN-13480 uses the hot modulus of elasticity in the flexibility calculations (Sect 12.1.7.2). The
expansion allowable stress is subsequently modified by the ratio of Eh/Ec.
EN-13480 provides two methods of determining the flexibility stresses. The CAESAR II default
implementation is to use Sections 12.3.2 through 12.3.6, which perform an SRSS of the bending
moments with a single SIF. As an alternative, the flexibility stresses can be determined by
distinguishing between in and out of plane bending, using distinct SIFs, as discussed in Section
12.3.1. The option to implement this alternative can be found on the "SIF & Stress" tab of the
configuration module.
EN-13480 does not consider pressure stiffening effects on bends.
For more information, see Creep Loading (on page 1012)

The recommendations of this code apply only to above ground steel piping through 450°F.
GPTC/Z380 and B31.8, prior to 2004, recommendations are similar in many ways. The
differences between GPTC/Z380 and B31.8 display below:
The longitudinal joint factors vary slightly between B31.8 Table 841.115a and GPTC/Z380
Table 192.113.
The design factor in B31.8 Table 841.114b provides more detail than GPTC/Z380 Table
192.11.
The allowable for the combined stress calculation in GPTC/Z380 Section 192.159-1.5e
includes a "0.75" factor, while B31.8 Section 833.4 does not.
GPTC/Z380 uses a single stress intensification factor (SIF) for both in-plane and
out-of-plane loads, while B31.8 distinguishes between in-plane and out-of-plane SIFs.
ISO-14692 addresses the analysis of Fiber Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe. Qualification is based
on the comparison of actual stresses, hoop and axial, to a failure envelope. See BS 7159 (on
page 1091) for the CAESAR II approach for FRP pipe analysis.
HPGSL provides two separate equations to calculate the in-plane and out-plane stress
intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections.
HPGSL provides an equation to calculate the expansion stress. This equation does not include
calculations for the longitudinal stress due to axial loads in the pipe. CAESAR II does not include
the F/A longitudinal stress component for stress in the expansion stress equation. You can
change this by including the Add F/A In Stress option in the configuration file. The program
adds the F/A longitudinal stress component, by default, to the code stress component for all
other stress categories.
HPGSL makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds without
undercut. Codes that do differentiate use 1.3 for socket welds with no undercut, and 2.1 for all
others. Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of 1.3.

Occasional Allowable = (Occ)*Sh/Eff
Where:
Eff = Weld Joint Efficiency Minimum Wall Thickness Only
Sc = Ambient (cold) Allowable Stress, the minimum of 0.66Syc or 0.33Suc
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress, the minimum of 0.66Sy or 0.33Su
SI = Sustained Stress
When specifying a corrosion allowance, do not use a corrosion value in the sustained
and occasional stress calculations.
Pressure effects on miters are allowed in this piping code.
HPGSL uses load cases defined by Using KHK to Analyze Seismic Conditions (on page 993).
JPI provides two separate equations to calculate the in-plane and out-plane SIFs for
intersections.
JPI provides an equation to calculate the expansion stress. However, this equation does not
include calculations for the longitudinal stress due to axial loads in the pipe. CAESAR II does
not include the F/A longitudinal stress component for stress in the expansion stress equation.
The program adds the F/A longitudinal stress component, by default, to the code stress
component for all other stress categories.

JPI makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds without
undercut. Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of 1.3.
Occasional Allowable = (Occ)*Sh/Eff
Where:
Eff = Weld Joint Efficiency minimum wall thickness only
Sc = Ambient (cold) Allowable Stress, the minimum of 0.66Syc or 0.33Suc
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress, the minimum of 0.66Sy or 0.33Su
SI = Sustained Stress
Occ = Occasional Load Factor Default - 1.33
When specifying a corrosion allowance, do not use a corrosion value in the sustained
and occasional stress calculations.
Pressure effects on miters are allowed in this piping code.
JPI uses load cases defined by Using KHK to Analyze Seismic Conditions (on page 993).
Local Coordinates
Many analytical models in engineering are based upon being able to define a real physical
object mathematically. This is accomplished by mapping the dimensions of the physical object
into a similar mathematical space. Mathematical space is usually assumed to be either
two-dimensional or three-dimensional. For piping analysis, the three-imensional space is
necessary, because almost all piping systems are three dimensional in nature.

Two typical three-dimensional mathematical systems are shown below in Figure 1. Both of these
systems are "Cartesian Coordinate Systems". Each axis in these systems is perpendicular to all
other axes.
Figure 1 Typical Cartesian Coordinate Systems

In addition, for these Cartesian coordinate systems the "right hand rule" is used to define
positive rotation about each axis and the relationship, or ordering, between the axes. Before
illustrating the "right hand rule", there are several traits of the systems in Figure 1 that should be
noted.
Each axis can be thought of as a "number line", where the zero point is the point where all of
the axes intersect. While only the positive side of each axis is shown in Figure 1, each axis
has a negative side as well.
The direction of the arrow heads indicates the positive direction of each axis.
In Figure 1, the X-axis has one arrowhead, the Y-axis has two arrowheads, and the Z-axis
has three arrowheads. The circular arcs labeled RX, RY, and RZ define the direction of
positive rotation about each axis. (This point will be dis\-cussed later.)
Any point in space can be mapped to these coordinate systems by using its position along
the number lines. For example, a point 5 units down the X-axis would have a coordinate of
(5.0, 0.0, 0.0). A point 5 units down the X-axis and 6 units down the Y-axis would have a
coordinate of (5.0, 6.0, 0.0).
Notice that if the system on the right side of Figure 1 is rotated a positive 90-degrees about
the X-axis, the result is the system on the left side of Figure 1.
The coordinate system on the left side of Figure 1 is the default CAESAR II global coordinate
system. In this system, the X and Z axes define the horizontal plane, and the Y-axis is vertical.
The other coordinate system in Figure 1 can be obtained in CAESAR II by selecting
the Z-axis Vertical option, discussed later in this section.
All further discussion in this section targets this default coordinate system, unless other\-wise
noted.

Other Global Coordinate Systems

There are other types of coordinate systems that can be used to mathematically map a physical
object.
A Polar coordinate system maps points in a two-dimensional space using a radius and a
rotation angle (r, theta).
A Cylindrical coordinate system maps points using a radius, a rotation angle, and an
elevation (r, theta, z). The origin in this system could be considered the center of the bottom
of a cylinder. Cylindrical coordinates are convenient to use when there is an axis of
symmetry in the model.
A Spherical coordinate system maps points using a radius and two rotation angles (r, theta,
phi). The origin in this system could be considered the center of a sphere. Spherical
coordinates are convenient to use when there is a point which is the center of symmetry in
the model.
Typically, none of these coordinate systems are easily used to map piping systems. Most piping
software deals exclusively with the Cartesian coordinate system.
The Right Hand Rule

In the Cartesian coordinate system, each axis has a positive and a negative side, as previously
mentioned. Translations, straight-line movement, can be defined as movement along these
axes. Rotation can also occur around these axes, as illustrated by the arcs in Figure 1.
A standard rule must be applied in order to define the direction of positive rotation about these
axes. The right-hand rule is used as the standard. Put the thumb of your right hand along the
axis, in the positive direction of the axis. The direction your fingers curl is positive rotation about
that axis. This is best illustrated in Figure 2.
Figure 2 The Right-Hand Rule

The right-hand rule can also be used to describe the relationship between the three axes.
Mathematically, the relationship between the axes can be defined as:
X cross Y = Z (EQ 1)
Y cross Z = X (EQ 2)
Z cross X = Y (EQ 3)
Where cross indicates the vector cross product.

Physically, using your right hand, what do the above equations mean? This question is best
answered by Figure 3.
Figure 3 The Right-Hand Rule - Continued

The left pane of Figure 3 corresponds to vector equation 3 above. Similarly, the center pane in
Figure 3 also corresponds to vector equation 3 above. The right pane in Figure 3 corresponds to
vector equation 2 above. All panes of Figure 3 refer to the left-hand image of Figure 1.
Straight-line movement along any axis can be therefore described as positive or negative,
depending on the direction of motion. This straight-line movement accounts for three of the six
degrees of freedom associated with a given node point in a model.
Analysis of a model requires the discretization of the model into a set of nodes and
elements. Depending on the analysis and the element used, the associated nodes have certain
degrees of freedom. For pipe stress analysis, using 3D Beam Elements, each node in the model
has six degrees of freedom.
The other three degrees of freedom are the rotations about each of the axes. In accordance with
the right-hand rule, positive rotation about each axis is defined as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
When modeling a system mathematically, there are two coordinate systems to deal with, a
global or model coordinate system and a local (or elemental) coordinate system. The global or
model coordinate system is fixed, and can be considered a constant characteristic of the
analysis at hand. The local coordinate system is defined on an elemental basis. Each element
defines its own local coordinate system. The orientation of these local systems varies with the
orientation of the elements.
An important concept here is the fact that local coordinate systems are defined by,
and therefore associated with, elements. Local coordinate systems are not defined for, or
associated with, nodes.

Pipe Stress Analysis Coordinate Systems

As noted previously, most pipe stress analysis computer programs use the 3D Beam Element.
This element can be described as an infinitely thin stick, spanning between two nodes. Each of
these nodes has six degrees of freedom three translations and three rotations. Piping systems
models are constructed by defining a series of elements, connected by nodes. These pipe
elements are typically defined as vectors, in terms of delta dimensions referenced to a global
coordinate system. Several example pipe elements are shown below in Figure 4.
Figure 4 - Example Pipe Elements

For most pipe stress applications, there are two dominant global coordinate systems to choose
from, either Y-axis or Z-axis up. These two systems are depicted in Figure 1. As previously
noted, the global coordinate system is fixed. All nodal coordinates and element delta dimensions
are referenced to this global coordinate system. For example, in Figure 4 above, the pipe
element spanning from node 10 to node 20 is defined with a DX (delta X) dimension of 5 ft.
Additionally, node 20 has a global X coordinate 5 ft. greater that the global X coordinate of node
10. Similar statements could be made about the other two elements in Figure 4, only these
elements are aligned with the global Y and global Z axes.
In CAESAR II, you can choose between the two global coordinate systems shown in Figure 1.
By default, the CAESAR II global coordinate system puts the global Y-axis vertical, as shown
in the left half of Figure 1, and in Figure 4. There are two ways to change the CAESAR II global
coordinate system so that the global Z-axis is vertical.

The first method is to modify the configuration file in the current data directory. This can be
accomplished from the Main Menu, by selecting Tools>Configure Setup. After the
configuration dialog appears, select the Geometry tab, as shown in Figure 5. On this tab, click
the Z-axis Vertical check box, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 5 - Geometry Configuration

After the Z axis Vertical check box is selected, the CAESAR II global coordinate system is in
accordance with the right half of Figure 1. This configuration affects all new jobs created in this
data directory. Existing jobs with the Y-axis vertical are not affected by this configuration
change.
The second method to obtain a global coordinate system with the Z-axis vertical is to switch
coordinate systems from within the input for the specific job at hand. This can be accomplished
from the Special Execution Parameters dialog box of the piping input processor. This dialog
box is shown below in Figure 6.

Figure 6 - Special Execution Parameters Dialog

Checking the Z Axis Vertical check box immediately changes the orientation of the global
coordinate system axis, with corresponding updates to the element delta dimensions. However,
the relative positions and lengths of the elements are not affected by this switch.
Defining a Model
Using the CAESAR II default coordinate system (Y-axis vertical), and assuming the system
shown below in Figure 7, the corresponding element definitions are given in Figure 8.
Figure 7 - Sample Piping Model
Figure 8 - Sample Piping Model Element Definitions

For this sample model, most of the element definitions are very simple:
The first element, 10-20, is defined as 5 ft. in the positive global X direction. This element
starts at the model origin.
The second element, 20-30, is defined as 5 ft. in the positive global Y direction. This
element begins at the end of the first element, because both elements share node 20.
The third element, 30-40, is defined as 5 ft. in the negative global Z direction. Note in Figure
8 that the delta dimension for this element is a negative number. This is necessary to define
the element in a negative direction.
The fourth element, 40-50, runs in both the positive global X and negative global Y
directions. This element slopes to the right and down, and is defined with delta dimensions
in both the DX and DY fields. These delta dimensions are equal in magnitude; therefore, this
element slopes at 45 degrees.
Continuing the model, from node 50, along the same 45-degree slope can be rather tedious,
because most often only the overall element length is known, not its components in the global
directions. In CAESAR II this can be best accomplished by activating the Edit Deltas dialog
box, shown below in Figure 9. The Edit Deltas dialog box can be activated by clicking the

Browse button next to the DX field. Using this dialog box, you can enter the element length, and
CAESAR II determines the appropriate components in the global directions, based on the
current direction cosines, which default to those of the preceding element.
Figure 9 - Edit Deltas Dialog Box

CAESAR II provides an additional coding tool, for longer runs of pipe with uniform node spacing.
Element Break enables you to break an element into equal length segments, given a node
number increment.
In the preceding example, the model is defined solely using delta dimensions. By constructing
the model in this fashion, it is assumed that the world coordinates of node 10 the first node in
the model are at (0., 0., 0.). This assumption is acceptable in all but one instance, when
environmental loads are applied to the model. In this instance, the elevation of the model is
critical to the determination of the environmental loads, and therefore must be specified. In
CAESAR II, the specification of the starting node of the model can be accomplished using the
Alt+G key combination, and all nodal coordinates are displayed as absolute coordinates.
Regardless of whether or not the global coordinates of the starting node are specified, the
relative geometry of the model will plot the same.
After a model has been defined, there are a number of operations that can be performed on the
entire system, or on any section of the system. These operations include:
Translating the model: translation can be accomplished by specifying the global coordinates
of the starting node of the model. If the model consists of disconnected segments,
CAESAR II requests the coordinates of the starting node of each segment.
Rotating the model: by using the List processor or by clicking List Input . The List
processor presents the model in a spreadsheet, format, as shown in Figure 8. Options in
this processor allow you to rotate the model about any of the three global axes, or a
specified amount. For example, if the model shown in Figures 7 and 8 is rotated a negative
-90 degrees about the global Y-axis, the result is as shown in Figure 10.

Figure 10 - Example of Model Rotation

Duplicating the model: duplication can also be accomplished by using the List processor.
The entire model, or any sub-section of the model, can be duplicated.
Using Local Coordinates

When analyzing a piping system, there are a number of items that must be checked and
verified. These items include:
Operating Loads on Restraints & Terminal Points Maximum Operating Displacements
Hanger design results Code stresses for code cases
Equipment Evaluations Vessel Nozzle Evaluation
Expansion joint evaluation
Restraint loads and displacements are checked in the global coordinate system. This is
necessary because restraint loads and displacements are nodal quantities. Element loads and
stresses are most often evaluated in their local coordinate system. A good example illustrating
the use of a local (element) coordinate system is the free body diagram, of forces and moments.
The forces and moments in this free body diagram remain the same, regardless of the position
of the element in the global coordinate system. Note however, that each element has its own
local coordinate system. Furthermore, the local coordinate system of one element may be
different from the local coordinate system of a different element.
While the global coordinate system is typically referred to using the capital letters X, Y, and Z,
local coordinate systems use a variety of nomenclature. In almost all cases, local coordinate
systems use lower case letters. Typical local coordinate system axes are: xyz, abc, and uvw.
CAESAR II uses xyz to denote the local element coordinate system.
The local coordinate system for an element is related to the global coordinate system through a
rule. There may be a number of such rules, depending on the type of element. In CAESAR II,
the following rules are used to define the local coordinate systems of the piping elements in a
model.
CAESAR II Local Coordinate Definitions

In many cases, CAESAR II shows global coordinates in upper case (e.g., global force in X is
listed as FX) and local coordinates in lower case (e.g., local force in x is listed as fx). For the
following examples the local terms a, b, c are used in place of x, y, z. In other words, global
coordinates are referenced by X, Y, Z and local coordinates are referenced by a, b, c.
Straight Pipe
a-axis: always points from the From Node to the To Node
b-axis: b = a x Y (This is a cross-product operation, except when a is Y, and then b is
defined as X.)
c-axis: c = a x b

The straight elements of the model and their local coordinate systems in Figure 7 are
reproduced below in Figure 11. Notice that each straight element has its own local coordinate
system, and each element is aligned differently in this model.
Figure 11 - Local Coordinate Systems for Straight Elements (1)

In Figure 11, the positive direction of the a-axis (i.e., the local X-axis) for each element is defined
according to the From - To Node definition of the element. For example, the a-axis of element
10-20 is aligned with the positive global X-axis because that is the direction defined in moving
from node 10 to node 20. The a-axis of element 30-40 is aligned with the negative global Z-axis
because that is the direction defined in moving from node 30 to node 40. Review Figure 11
closely, as this figure clearly shows how the local element coordinate system can be defined
based on the definition of the element, especially with regard to the skewed element 40-50.
Bend Elements
Think of the bend as a centerline arc bounded by a near and a far node. The near node is the
tangent point joining the bend with the straight pipe entering the bend (as defined by the
sequence of pipe elements). The far node is the tangent point joining the bend with the straight
pipe exiting the bend. CAESAR II does not require a near node, but creates one by default. Any
additional nodes along the bend arc reference the orientation of the tangent line at the node.
This tangent is a vector pointing toward the far end of the arc.
a-axis: defined by the tangent vector, where positive is toward the far end of the bend.
This is considered the torsion term.
b-axis: b is perpendicular to the plane that contains the bend arc. Its direction is set by
b = c x a. Where defined by the piping code, this is the in-plane bending term.
c-axis: c points to the center of the bend arc (c = a x b). Where defined by the piping
code, this is the out-plane bending term.

The local coordinate systems for the bend end points in Figure 11 are displayed below in Figure
12.
Figure 12 Local Coordinate Systems for Bend Elements

Tee Elements
Local coordinates are also significant for the three straight pipes that join at a tee or for any
other straight pipe end where a stress intensification factor (SIF) is defined. See Figure 13.
a-axis: always points from the From Node to the To Node. This is the torsion term.
b-axis: b is perpendicular to the plane that contains the three elements that form the
tee. Its direction is set by b = a(branch) x a(run). Where no plane is evident (e.g., a SIF
specified at a node where no run or branch exists), b is defined for straight pipe. In
those cases where the two run elements have opposite a-axes, CAESAR II uses the
orientation of the first run pipe entered to set a(run) in the definition of b. Where defined
by the piping code, this is the in-plane bending term.
c-axis: c = a x b. Where defined by the piping code, this is the out-plane bending term.
Examples of local coordinates for elements framing a branch connection are depicted below in
Figure 14.

Figure 5 - Tees Added
Figure 14 - Local Coordinate Systems for Tee Elements
Applications Using Global and Local Coordinates

Global coordinates are used most often when dealing with piping models. Global coordinates
are used to define the model and review nodal results. Even though element stresses are
defined in terms of axial and bending directions, which are local coordinate system terms, local
coordinates are rarely used. A typical piping analysis scenario is:
A decision is made as to how the global coordinate system for the piping model will align
with the plant coordinate system. Usually, one of the two horizontal axes is selected to
correspond to the North direction. However, if this results in a majority of the system being
skewed with respect to the global axes, you should consider realigning the model. It is best
to have most of the system aligned with one of the global coordinate axes.
The piping system is then assigned node points at locations where: there is a change in
direction, a support, a terminal point, a point of cross section change, a point of load
application, or any other point of interest.
After you assign the nodes, define the piping model using the delta dimensions as dictated by
the orientation of the global coordinate system. Use Break, List, Rotate, Duplicate, and the
Direction Cosines to construct the model.
After verifying the input, confirming the load cases, and analyzing the model, output review
commences.

Output review involves checking various output reports to ensure the system responds within
certain limits. These checks include:
Checking that operating displacements make sense and are within any operational limits to
avoid ponding. Displacements, being nodal quantities, are reviewed in the global coordinate
system. There is no local coordinate system associated with nodes. For the model defined
in Figures 7 and 8, the operating displacements are shown in Figure 15 below.
Figure 15 - Operating Displacements

This report shows the movements of all of the nodes in the model, in each of the six degrees
of freedom, in the global coordinate system.

Checking that the restraint loads for the structural load cases are reasonable. This includes
ensuring that the restraints can be designed to carry the computed load. Restraints being
nodal quantities are reviewed in the global coordinate system. There is no local coordinate
system associated with restraints. For the model defined in Figures 7 and 8, the operating /
sustained restraint summary is shown in Figure 16 below.
Figure 16 - Operating / Sustained Restraint Summary

This report shows the loads on the anchor at 10 and the nozzle at 50, for all six degrees of
freedom, for the two selected structural load cases, in the global coordinate system.

Checking the code cases for codes stress compliance. Typically, the code stress is
compared to the allowable stress for each node on each element. Occasionally, when there
is an overstress condition, a review of axial, bending, and torsion stresses are necessary.
These stresses axial, bending, and torsion are local coordinate system terms, and therefore
portion of the sustained stress report is shown in Figure 17 below.
Figure 17 - Sustained Stress Report

These reports provide sufficient information to evaluate the pipe elements in the model, to
and stress must still be evaluated at terminal points, where the piping system connects to
equipment or vessel nozzles. Depending on the type of equipment or nozzle, various
procedures and codes are applied. These include API-610 for pumps and WRC-107 for vessel
nozzles, as well as others. In the case of API-610 and WRC-107, a local coordinate system
specific to these codes is employed. These local coordinate systems are defined in terms of the
pump or nozzle/vessel geometry.

When the equipment coordinate system aligns with the global coordinate system of the piping
model, the nozzle loads from the restraint report (node 50 in Figure 14) can be used in the
nozzle evaluation. However, when the equipment nozzle is skewed as it is in the case of node
50 in Figure 14, the application of the loads is more difficult. In this case, it is best to use the
loads
here is to flip the signs on all of the forces and moments, because the element force/moment
report shows the loads on the pipe element, not on the nozzle. For the element FROM node 40
to node 50, the local element force/moment report is shown in Figure 18 below.
Figure 18 - Local Element Force/Moment Report
codes API and WRC are often times tedious and error prone, CAESAR II provides an option in
its equipment modules to acquire the loads on the nozzle directly from the static output. Select
the node and the load case; CAESAR II acquires the loads and rotates them into the proper
coordinate system as defined by the applicable equipment code. You really do not have to be
concerned with the transformation from global to local coordinates, even for skewed
components. This is illustrated below, in Figure 19. In this figure, the API-610 nozzle loads at
node 50 have been acquired by clicking Select Loads by Job/Load Case.

Notice that the loads shown in Figure 19 are in the CAESAR II global coordinate system. This
can be easily verified by comparing these values to those in the restraint summary for the
operating load case as shown previously in Figure 16.
Figure 19 - API-610 Nozzle Load Acquisition

In the corresponding output report for this API-610 analysis, both the global and API local loads
are reported. This is shown below in Figure 20.

Figure 20 - API-610 Nozzle Output Report Segments

Notice in Figure 20, that each report segment indicates which values are related to the global
coordinate system and which are related to the local API coordinate system.
Restraint Data in Local Element Coordinates

A new report Restraint Report - In Local Element Coordinates (on page 635), is available to
assist in dealing with restraint loads on skewed nozzles. This report uses the local coordinate
system of the "defining" element (because restraints do not have a local coordinate system). If
the restraint is defined on the straight element to which the restraint is attached, then the proper
orientation of local loads is reported in the Local Restraint Loads report. However, if the
restraint was defined on some other element, or on the mid-side node of a bend, then the loads
reported in the Local Restraint Loads report are associated with the local coordinate system of
that defining element.
Transforming from Global to Local

Converting or transforming values from the CAESAR II Global Coordinate System to a local
coordinate system involves applying a number of rotation matrices to the global values. Matrix
mathematics is not a trivial task, and you must exercise the utmost care to arrive at the correct
result. To complete this task, visit the CAESAR II Downloads page at
http://www.intergraph.com/products/ppm/caesarii/downloads.aspx and click CAESAR II "Global
to Local" to download the GlbtoLocal utility, glbtoLoca. zip. For more information, see the
July 2001 issue of our Mechanical Engineering News. For an example on how to use the
GlbtoLocal utility using the nozzle at node 50 see below.
The element 40-50 is defined with the delta coordinates of:
DX = 3 ft. (6.426 in)
DY = -3 ft. (6.426 in)
DZ = 0.0
The global restraint forces at node 50, in global coordinates, for the operating case are:
FX = 323 MX = -953
FY = 4 MY = -9

FZ = -271 MZ = -548
Using this data as input to GlbtoLocal, the utility yields the forces on the restraint in the
Example Global to Local Transformation
Compare the set of values labeled Rotated Displacements / Load Vector with the Local
Element Force / Moment report, as shown above. A change in sign is necessary because the
Restraint report shows loads acting on the restraint, while the Element report shows loads
acting on the element.
Frequently Asked Questions

What are global coordinates?
Global coordinates define the mapping of a physical system into a mathematical system. For a
given model, the global coordinate system is fixed for the entire model. In CAESAR II, there are
two alternative global coordinate systems that you can apply to a model. Both coordinate
systems follow the Right Hand Rule and use X, Y, and Z as mutually perpendicular axes. The
first uses the Y-axis vertical, while the second uses the Z-axis as vertical.
What are local coordinates?
Local coordinates represent the mapping for a single element. Use Local coordinate systems to
define positive and negative directions and loads on elements. Typically, Local Coordinate
systems are aligned with the elements, therefore vary throughout the model.
What coordinates are used to plot and view the model?
Use the global coordinate system of the model to generate plots of the model. This is necessary
because each element has its own local coordinate system, and these local systems vary from
element to element. Local coordinate systems are an element property, not a system property.
How do you obtain nodal displacements in local coordinates?
In general, you do not. Displacements are a nodal property. Nodes do not have local coordinate
systems, elements do. For more information, see Restraint Data in Local Element Coordinates.
What do you do with local coordinates?

In most instances, nothing. The local coordinates are only useful in CAESAR II is when dealing
with a skewed nozzle. This coordinate system is used in the Local Restraint Report.

SECTION 14
Miscellaneous Processors
This section discusses the processors that are available in CAESAR II.
In This Section
Material Database .......................................................................... 1118
Accounting ..................................................................................... 1128
Units File Operations ..................................................................... 1134
Batch Stream Processing .............................................................. 1139
CAESAR II Error Processing ......................................................... 1140
Material Database
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Materials
Main window menu: Tools > Materials
Defines the physical properties and code-dependent allowable stresses for more than 500
materials. You can edit and manage the delivered materials data, as well as create new
materials, using the Material Database Editor. To open the editor, click Tools > Materials or
click Materials on the toolbar.

The Material Database Editor toolbar displays icons for commonly-used commands.
Print
Prints the materials data for every material in the entire material database.
Cut
Removes the selected data from its current location and places a copy on the clipboard.
Copy
Creates a copy of the selected data and places it on the clipboard.
Clear Screen to Add
Saves the current editor window contents, and then clears the screen so you can add a new
material. For more information, see Add a new material to the database (on page 1120).
Edit a Material
Allows you to edit a material item in the database. For more information, see Edit a material
in the database (on page 1121)
Delete a Material
Deletes the material from the database. For more information, see Delete a material from
the database (on page 1121).
Save Material
Saves the changes made to the current material item.
Print the Current Material
Prints only the materials data for the current material item.
You must check material allowables and other physical property data for the particular code
being used. While Hexagon PPM makes every attempt to keep the material database
up-to-date, the codes are subject to change frequently, and the accuracy of the database is
not guaranteed.
The Material Database Editor does not modify the data in the material database delivered
with CAESAR II. Any changes that you make are saved to a secondary database, which, by
default, is named umat1.umd and is located in the \System directory. You can specify a
different secondary database using User Material Database Filename (on page 67) in the
Configuration Editor. This setup permits multiple user-supplied database files to be used
on a single system.

Add a new material to the database (on page 1120)
Delete a material from the database (on page 1121)
Edit a material in the database (on page 1121)

Add a new material to the database

When adding a new material to the database, you must add at least two records in the Material
Database Editor. The first record saves the new material for the All Codes option. CAESAR II
uses the All Codes option to populate the Material list in the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Enter all the material information except for the allowable stresses. You can add subsequent
records for the same material to address additional piping codes and identify the allowable
stresses for each piping code.
1. In the Material Database Editor, click Clear Screen to Add .
The software saves any data currently shown in the editor window, and then clears the
window contents.
2. Enter the required data for the new material, except for the allowable stresses. At a
minimum, you must specify the Number and select All Codes in the Applicable Piping
Code list.
You must enter a number that is less than 1000. If you enter a number that
currently exists in the database, the software prompts you to enter a different number.
3. Click Save Material to save the new material.
4. After you save the new material, you can add subsequent new material records to modify
the piping code and define the allowable stresses. Select the Applicable Piping Code for
the new material. Then, specify the allowable stresses.
5. Click Save Material to save the new material in the Piping Input processor. Repeat
steps 4 and 5 to add new material records for each piping code that you need.
6. Close the Material Database Editor dialog box, and open the Classic Piping Input dialog
box for the current job.

CAESAR II displays the new material as an option in the Material list on the Classic Piping
Input dialog box.
Delete a material from the database

1. In the Material Database Editor, click Delete a Material .
2. Select the material item you want to delete, and then click OK.
The software deletes the material from the database.
You can only delete user-defined materials. Materials that are delivered with the
CAESAR II material database cannot be deleted. If no user-defined materials exist in the
database, the software displays an informational message.
Edit a material in the database

1. In the Material Database Editor, click Edit a Material .
2. In the Material Selection dialog box, do one of the following to select the material item you
want to modify:
Scroll through the list and double-click the material name.
Type all or part of a material name or number in the text box and click Search. The
software searches the database and displays matching materials for selection.
3. Edit the material item as needed, and then click Save Material to save your changes to
the material database.
The Piping Code ID list corresponds to the piping code ID on the Piping Input dialog box.
To exit the dialog box without selecting a material press Esc or click Cancel.

Material Number
Enter a number for the material in the CAESAR II Material Database Editor. The Piping Input
module uses this number to reference the material. The number must be between 101 and 1000
inclusive and must not have been used for another material previously.
Material Name
Enter the material name as listed in the applicable code.

Applicable Piping Code

Select the CAESAR II piping code number for which this material applies. The software supports
the following piping codes:
All Codes B31.8 BS 806 CODETI DNV
B31.1 JPI Swedish 1 Norwegian TBK-6 EN 13480
B31.3 B31.9 Swedish 2 FDBR GPTC/Z380
B31.3 ASME NC Stoomwezen BS 7159 PD 8010-1

Chapter IX
B31.4 ASME ND RCC-M C UKOOA ISO-14692
B31.4 Ch 11 NAVY 505 RCC-M D IGE/TD/12 HPGSL
B31.5 CAN Z662
Composition/Type
Specifies the material composition of the pipe.
Aluminum
Aluminum alloy or alloy steel containing 9% nickel. For use at temperatures lower than room
temperature.
Austenite
Austenite stainless steel and high nickel contained allows. For use at temperatures higher
than room temperature.
Others
Any material other than aluminum or austenite.
Unspecified
This is the default option.

Material Density
Enter the density of the material.
Minimum Temperature Curve (A-D)

Specify the curve used to check the material. As defined by B31.3 (Section 323.2.2), some
carbon steels a
B31.3 section). If this code section is applicable, select A, B, C, or D. If this code section is not
applicable, leave this box blank.
CAESAR II does not currently use this information.
Eff, Cf, z
Enter the appropriate factor. This factor is required by the following piping codes:
Stoomwezen
Enter the cyclic reduction factor. This is referred to in the code as Cf.
Norwegian TBK-6
Enter the circumferential weld strength factor. This is referred to in the code as z.
BS 7159
Enter the ratio of the design stress ( d) in the circumferential (hoop) direction to the design
stress in the longitudinal direction. Because design stress is defined in Sec. 4.3 of the code
as:
dÆ = d* EIamÆ, sdx = d * EIamx
and design strain should be the same for both directions, this entry is also the ratio of the
moduli of elasticity:
EIamÆ (hoop) to EIamÆ (longitudinal)
For Norwegian TBK-6 and BS 7159 piping codes, if the Eff, Cf, z field is left blank, the
software uses a default value of 1.0.
Cold Elastic Modulus

Enter the value of the elastic modulus to be used in code compliance stress cases. The software
uses this value only if no Elastic Modulus (on page 1126) is given for the ambient (70° F)
temperature. This value is used for metal materials only.

Poisson's Ratio
FAC
Enter the applicable factor as determined by the following piping codes.
Stoomwezen
Enter 0.44 or 0.5. This value is used to compute the equilibrium stresses as discussed in
Section 5.2 of the code. You can use 0.5 for steel if the design and fabrication are such that
stress peaks are avoided.
Norwegian
Enter the material ultimate tensile strength at room temperature R m. If you do not define a
value, this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
Laminate Type
Enter the laminate type (as defined in the BS 7159 code) of the fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe
used. Valid laminate types are:
CSM
layer.
Eh / Ea
Displays the ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of elasticity. If omitted, the software
uses a default value of 2.0.

Temperature
Enter the temperature that corresponds to the database values you will add in the remaining
cells (shown below).
In the database delivered with the software, all temperatures are in 100°F increments.
Some codes list physical property values in 50°F increments; therefore, small
discrepancies may occur between CAESAR II and a given code because of the interpolation of
data.
Exp. Coeff.
Specifies the thermal expansion coefficient at the reference Temperature in the indicated units.
Type the value without the implied exponent of 10-6 (E-6). For example, for carbon steel at
400-deg F, B 31.3 Table C-3 specifies an expansion coefficient of 6.82 E-6 in/in/deg.F (12.28
E-6 mm./mm./deg.C). You then type 6.82 for English units, or 12.28 for metric units.
Allowable Stress
Enter the code allowable stress corresponding to the reference Temperature. These values
generally correspond to the SC and SH values on the allowable auxiliary screens.
Elastic Modulus
Enter the modulus of elasticity to the reference Temperature. If no entry is given for ambient
(70° F), the software uses the value defined for Cold Elastic Modulus (on page 1124).
Yield Stress
Enter the yield stress that corresponds to the reference Temperature.

Ult Tensile Stress

Enter the temperature dependent stress value (lbs./sq.in.). This value varies by piping code.
Valid entries based on the current piping code are:
BS 806
Mean stress to failure for design life at temperature.
Swedish Method 1
Creep rupture stress at temperature.
Stoomwezen
Rrg average creep stress to produce 1% permanent set after 100,000 hours at temperature
(vm).
IGE/TD/12
Ultimate tensile strength.
Norwegian
The material ultimate tensile strength at room temperature is Rm (lbs./sq. in.). If no value is
entered, this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
Weld Strength Reduction Factor (W)

The Weld Strength Reduction Factor, W, is a temperature dependent value from B31.3/B31.1.
CAESAR II uses this value as:
Wl
A longitudinal reduction factor used in the determination of the pipe's minimum wall
thickness.
Wc
A circumferential reduction factor used in the determination of the allowable stress.
The use of W is optional, and is controlled through a configuration setting in the SIF and
Stresses section of the Configuration Editor.
Temperature Dependent Stress Value

Provides stress value information that is dependent upon the temperature and varies based on
the piping code selected. Currently, the software supports the following values:
Rmmin
The minimum creep tensile stress to produce rupture after 100,000 hours at the temperature
(vm) when using the Stoomwezen piping code.

Material Selection Dialog Box

Allows you to search and select a material in the database for viewing or editing.
Scroll through individual materials by using the arrow keys or the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN
keys. Press HOME or END to go to the beginning or end of the materials list.
You can also type all or part of a material name or number and click Search, and the software
searches the database and displays all materials that include your entry.
Press ENTER or double-click on a material to select it. The software returns you to the
CAESAR II Material Database Editor dialog box and populates the fields with the selected
material values.
Database Status (Consistency Check) Dialog Box

Scans the material database for any numeric inconsistencies. The Consistency Check Results
list any material values that are numerically out of sequence. You can then use the Material
Database Editor to look up and review or modify these reported values for the materials.
Accounting
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Accounting
Main window menu: Tools > Accounting
Allows you to control all pricing factors for jobs. The total price of any job is computed from:
You can enter C1, C2, C3, C4, and C5 one time, and change them only when necessary.
Any of the constants may be zero, but at least one constant must be greater than zero.
CAESAR II Accounting is an optional module. If you do not need to keep
accounting records of your jobs, you can disregard this module.
You can generate accounting reports on a per-run basis and the software summarizes them on
a per-account basis. This module also lets you:
Generate reports for any requested combination of account numbers.
Define account numbers, which may contain up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Control account and software access using the optional password protection feature
(accessed by selecting the Type 2 accounting method).
Identify account numbers for each job using either of the following two methods:
Select the account number from a table of allowed account numbers. Otherwise, the
system defaults to the last valid account number input. The account manager sets up
and maintains the account number table.

Enter an account number, which can be any non-blank string, in a text box. There is no
default, but your entry must match one of the allowed account numbers previously input
by the account manager.
Access to the available account number list is password protected.

If you do not have a valid account number, the run is not permitted.
For more information on setting up the software to use accounting, see Activating the
Accounting System (on page 1130).
The CAESAR II accounting file (ACCTG.DAT) contains all of the information used by CAESAR II
to produce accounting reports. The file format allows you to create a program to access or
manipulate the file. You can open the accounting file (in FORTRAN) with the following:
The following information is stored on each record:
Variable Type Definition
JOBNAME CHARACTER*8 Name of the job being run
ICPUTIME INTEGER*4 Analysis CPU time used (Seconds)
NODES INTEGER*2 Number of nodes in the job
NELEMS INTEGER*2 Number of elements in the job
NLOADS INTEGER*2 Number of load cases in the job
MYEAR INTEGER*2 Year the job was run
MMONTH INTEGER*2 Month the job was run
MDAY INTEGER*2 Day of the month the job was run
MHOUR INTEGER*2 Hour of the day the job was run
MMINUTE INTEGER*2 Minutes of the hour when the job was run
MSECOND INTEGER*2 Seconds of the minute when the job was run
ACCOUNTNO CHARACTER*25 Account number to be billed for job
The first record contains only a single integer value (ILAST), giving the last valid record number
in the accounting file. The number of job entries is equal to (ILAST-1). This first record may be
read:

Activating the Accounting System

The CAESAR II Accounting module must be activated before you can begin collecting billing
and account information on jobs.
To access the accounting system, click Tools > Accounting on the Main Menu. The CAESAR
II Accounting dialog box displays. You can use the options in this dialog box to specify the
accounting method, set pricing, define account numbers, and generate reports.
For information about the options available on a specific dialog box tab, see:
Activate Accounting Tab (on page 1131)
Pricing Factors Tab (on page 1132)
Account Numbers Tab (on page 1132)
Reports Tab (on page 1133)
Status Tab (on page 1134)
After the accounting system is initialized, the pricing factors are set, and account numbers
entered, you can initiate jobs with account tracking. The prompt for the account number appears
during analysis immediately after you initiate the accounting process.
The prompt for accounting information requires user-account identification.

If you selected Type 2 on the Activate Accounting tab (on page 1131), enter a valid
account number, or click OK for the default (last used) account number.

If you selected Type 1, select the appropriate account number from the list and click OK to
continue.
Select the applicable accounting method (Type 1 or Type 2), and then click Activate
Accounting. After the accounting system is activated, click OK in the message box.
If the accounting system becomes unnecessary, deactivate it by clicking Deactivate
Accounting.
Select the Type 1 accounting method for the software to accept valid account numbers, up to 25
characters in length. With this method, the software displays a list of the currently valid accounts
from which to choose.
Select an account number, and then click OK. Click Activate Accounting to enable the
CAESAR II Accounting module. You can then enter other accounting details for the selected
account.
Select the Type 2 accounting method for the software to accept valid account numbers, up to 25
characters in length. With this method, you must enter a valid account number. The software
does not display a list of current account numbers.
This method also requires you to set a password to prevent account corruption. Select Type 2,
enter a password, and then click OK. Click Activate Accounting to enable the CAESAR II
Accounting module. You can then enter other accounting details for the selected account.

Enter any costs as appropriate; blanks are allowed. Each rate is multiplied by the respective job
quantity, and the sum of these products is equivalent to the job cost. Job costs are calculated on
an integer dollar basis, and are never be less than one dollar. Any of the five rate constants can
be zero, but not all; none of the constants may be negative.
Click Submit to save the pricing factors.
Specifies the cost per second of computer processing time.
Specifies the cost per node in the input file.
Specifies the cost per element in the input file.
Specifies the cost per load case evaluated during the analysis.
This information also displays on the Status tab in the CAESAR II Accounting module.
Specifies the cost on a per-job basis.

This information also displays on the Status tab in the CAESAR II Accounting module.
Specifies the monetary label. For example, type $ for US dollars.
Enter the required account numbers, and then click Save. These are the numbers that the
software uses to prompt you for an account number during software execution.

Generate accounting reports on a per-run basis and the software summarizes them on a
per-account basis. From the Reports tab, you can specify the accounts for which you're
generating reports, the date range of the reports, and whether you're generating a detailed or a
summary report.
All generated reports contain the following items:
Account number
Job name
Time and date of run
Number of nodes, elements, and load cases
Calculated job cost
Specifies the accounts for which you are generating reports.

Select Specific Accounts to generate a report for a specific account or set of accounts.
Click Select Accounts, select the accounts from the list, and then click OK.
Select Entire Data File to generate a report that includes all accounts.
After you select the account information, you can specify a date range and the type of report you
want to generate, then select Generate Report.
Controls the range of dates for the report you are generating.
Select Specific Date Range to specify a range of dates for which to generate a report.
Select Entire Data File to generate a report that includes all dates.
After you select the account information and the date range, you can specify the type of report
you want to generate, then select Generate Report.
Controls the length of the report.

Select Summary to generate a shorter report. Accounting summary reports include
subtotals on a per-account basis, the number of jobs run for the account, and the time
period in which the account has been active.
Select Detailed to generate a full report.

The example below shows a sample detailed report.
Summarizes the number of accounts and pricing factors specified for the current accounting
system. The software displays the current accounting method, Type 1 (accounting without a
password required) or Type 2 (accounting with a password required) at the top.
The Status tab displays the total Number of defined account numbers, as well as the number
of account records run (i.e., how many times you've analyzed all of the defined accounts).
Units File Operations

The active units file as specified in the configuration file is used with all new input files and all
existing output files in the given data directory. The units file specified in the configuration file
does not modify the units in an existing CAESAR II input file
Create/Review Units
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Create/Review Units
Main window menu: Tools > Create/Review Units

Creates a custom units file. Click Tools > Create/Review Units to display the CAESAR II -
Units Maintenance dialog box, which you can use to create a new units file or to review data in
an existing units file.
Select an existing units file in the list. In CAESAR II, you can review an existing units file to
determine if it is the file you want to use. Select the existing file and click View/Edit File. After
reviewing, if you see changes you need to make to the units file, you can Create a New Units
File (on page 1137) based upon the existing file and give the revised file a New Units File
Name (on page 1137).

Enables the Existing Files to Review list, which contains all existing units files located in both
the data folder and the program folder. Select the units file you want to review, and then click
View/Edit File. The software displays the Units File Review window, which contains all
CAESAR II dimensional items, their internal units, the conversion factor between the internal
units and the user-specified units, and the user-defined units.

Creates a new units file and activates the Existing File to Start From list and New Units File
Name box. After you have completed both items, click View > Edit File. The software displays
the Units File Maintenance dialog box, in which you can edit your units and conversion factor
entries.
If the user-defined units for a given item exist in the list, then it is not necessary to
specify a conversion factor, as it is updated automatically. If a new set of units is required, such
as, for example, feet (instead of inches) in the Length category, either select the new unit name
(ft.) in the User Units list and select the new conversion factor in the Constant list or type a
new factor in the text box.
Select an existing units file in the list. In CAESAR II, you create a new units file by using an
existing units file as a template. For ease and simplicity, we recommend that the units contained
within the existing file closely mirror the units contained within the new file to be created.
Enter a unique file name without the extension.

Displays one of the following windows, depending on whether you are reviewing an existing
units file or creating a new one.
User File Review
Displays only when you click View/Edit File in conjunction with Review Existing Units File
(on page 1136). The contents of this window are read-only.
User File Maintenance
Displays only when you click View/Edit File in conjunction with Create a New Units File (on
page 1137). The contents of this window are editable.
Change Model Units
Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Change Model Units
Main window menu: Tools > Change Model Units

Converts an existing input file to a new set of units. Click Tools > Change Model Units. The
software opens the CAESAR II Input File Units Conversion dialog box.
Type the full path name followed by the input file name, including the .c2a extension, to be
converted. Alternatively, you can click Browse and use Windows Explorer to navigate to the
appropriate file.

Select the name of the appropriate units file from the list.
Type the full path name followed by the input file name that corresponds to the new input file.
If you select an existing ._a file using Browse, the converted file overwrites the
existing ._a file chosen from the list.
Batch Stream Processing

Main window ribbon: Utilities > Tools > Multi-job Analysis
Main window menu: Tools > Multi-job Analysis

Opens the Batch Stream Processor, which you can use to analyze multiple jobs in batch
mode.
You can run up to twelve different jobs completely unattended. Before initiating the batch stream
process, verify that the batch jobs meet the following criteria:
All jobs are located in the same data folder, and the default data folder is set to this folder.
All jobs have successfully passed error checking and must have dynamic load cases
defined. If the static load cases have not been defined, CAESAR II uses the standard
recommended cases.
Accounting is turned off or is set so that a default account number can be assumed by the
software.
The Batch Stream Processor creates a log file, named BATCH.LOG, and saves it in the same
folder as the batch jobs. You can use the log file to review processing times and to help
diagnose any failures in the batch process. The log file is a standard ASCII text file, which can
be edited or printed using a standard text editor, such as Notepad.
Define Jobs to Run

Opens the Batch Stream Data Definition dialog box in which you can define the names and
job types to be executed by the stream. The job names are the usual CAESAR II job names that
have been prepared for analysis.

Analyze Specified Jobs

Analyzes all previously defined jobs. You do not have to analyze the jobs immediately. Job
names and analysis types are stored in a data file, BATCH.STM, which can be invoked at any
time.
CAESAR II Error Processing

CAESAR II makes every effort to alert you when it encounters data that is inconsistent or
unusual for the type of analysis that it is performing. Even so, the potential still exists for
user-modeling techniques or hardware/operating system problems that can generate an error
condition within the CAESAR II computation routines. Recognizing this potential, the software
performs internal self-checks to trap abnormal conditions such as full hard disks, invalid or
expired ESLs, file corruption, and insufficient free memory.
Whenever a fatal error condition arises, CAESAR II aborts the current process and uses a
multi-stage approach to provide you with an explanation regarding why the process was
aborted.
First, each error trap/condition is assigned a unique number. When an abort condition occurs,
this error number and a short description of the fatal error are displayed in a Help Facility
window similar to the one shown below.
When you click OK, the software closes the Help Facility window and opens the Additional
Error Information dialog box. You can use this dialog box to reference another error number,
which can be useful when one error definition references another. Clicking OK on the
Additional Error Information dialog box returns the software to the main CAESAR II window.
At any time, you can review fatal error information by clicking Diagnostics > Error
Review, entering the appropriate error number, and then clicking OK. The Help Facility window
opens and displays the corresponding fatal error description.


SECTION 15
External Interfaces
Main window ribbon: Interfaces
Main window menu: Tools > External Interfaces
External interfaces allow data transfer between CAESAR II and other software applications. In
most cases, data transfer is from a drawing or analysis package to CAESAR II. However:
®, the CAESAR II Data Matrix, and the CAESAR II

Neutral File.
CAD interfaces (CADPIPE, Intergraph Smart 3D PCF, Intergraph PDS, and PCF) are
intended to transfer piping geometry into CAESAR II. The resulting CAESAR II input must
be thoroughly checked, with loads, restraints, and other specifics added.
CAESAR II Neutral File transfers both to and from CAESAR II.
Intergraph CADWorx Plant is the Intergraph CAS piping design and drafting software for the
AutoCAD environment. It provides a seamless, bi-directional interface between CADWorx
and CAESAR II without a translation procedure. Data may be completely and seamlessly
transferred between CAESAR II and Intergraph CADWorx Plant, without creating any
neutral files or going through any intermediate steps.
The CAESAR II Neutral File and the Intergraph CADWorx Plant interfaces are capable of
transferring 100% of the data that comprises the _A (input) file.
LIQT, AFT IMPULSE, PIPENET, PipePlus, and FlowMaster are transient analysis packages
for liquids in piping networks that calculate pressure imbalances as a function of time. The
CAESAR II interface converts this LIQT output from these packages to create force
response spectra for CAESAR II dynamic input.
The interfaces typically prompt you for a file name, transfer the data, and then prompt for
another file name. This cycle continues either until a blank file name is encountered or you
cancel the process.
Before beginning an interface to CAESAR II, follow the requirements of the CAESAR II
Neutral File interface. This enables all of the spreadsheet data to be transferred.

External Interfaces
CAESAR II Neutral File

The CAESAR II neutral file, an ASCII text file with the .cii extension, enables access to any
particular data item from an _A input file, to enable a complete _A file to be built from a CAD
application. The .ciil file can be used to send data either to or from the _A file. The name of the
file used or generated by this interface is the CAESAR II jobname. Iinput data to be used for
other analysis purposes.
The content and format described in this section is subject to change as a function of
the enhancements made to CAESAR II. Every effort is being made to keep "drastic" changes to
a minimum.
Several third-party CAD applications, such as AVEVA s PDMS
also support this neutral file. If you prefer, instead of launching this interface from Tools >
External Interface, the processor can be run in "batch mode" from either a batch file or the
command line as shown below.
where:
and must be changed as appropriate.
The .CII file, is divided into sections which organize the piping data in logical groupings. Section
2. The token following the #$ character sequence is a section identifier that is used by CAESAR
II for data sequencing purposes, and to aid you in reading the neutral file. For each item listed
on the following pages, the necessary FORTRAN format for the input/output is provided. The
variables listed below are used in dimensioning arrays.
N1 Base memory allocation quantity used to set array sizes. For example, if N1=2,000,
your neutral file can handle up to 2,000 elements.
N2 1/2 N1
N3 1/3 N1
N4 1/4 N1
N5 1/5 N1
N6 N1/13.33

External Interfaces
Basic Element Data

#$ ELEMENTS - Contains integer and real data for each element in the input file. The data is
organized as shown below.
1. Real values for element "i"
2. Integer values for element "i"
3. Real values for element "i+1"
4. Integer values for element "i+1"
These real and integer values are stored in arrays that are described below.
A 98-member array (REL) contains the real basic-element data. The REL array is dimensioned
(N1,98).
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 53 items on the
appropriate nine lines of the neutral file.
1. FROM node number
2. TO node number
3. Delta X
4. Delta Y
5. Delta Z
6. Diameter (value stored here is actual OD)
7. Wall Thickness (actual)
8. Insulation Thickness
9. Corrosion Allowance
10. Thermal Expansion Coefficient #1 (or Temperature #1)
19. Pressure #1
20. Pressure #2
21. Pressure #3
22. Pressure #4
23. Pressure #5

External Interfaces
24. Pressure #6
25. Pressure #7
26. Pressure #8
27. Pressure #9
28. Elastic Modulus (cold)
29.
30. Pipe Density
31. Insulation Density
32. Fluid Density
33. Minus Mill Tolerance
34. Plus Mill Tolerance
35. Seam Weld (1=Yes, 0=No)
36. Hydro Pressure
37. Elastic Modulus (Hot #1)
46. "wL" Factor
47. Element Orientation Angle (To End), FEATools Data Only
48. Element Orientation Angle (From End), FEATools Data Only
49. Cladding Thickness
50. Cladding Density
51. Insulation + Cladding Weight/length
52. Refractory Thickness
53. Refractory Density
Non-specified real values are assigned a value of 0.0 by this interface.
If the delta coordinates are not specified, they default to zero. If the To/From fields are not
specified, it is considered an error.
Use the FORTRAN format (7X, I5, 1X, A500) to write the values of the following item on the next
line.

External Interfaces
1. Element Name
The value before the string indicates the length of the string.
An 18-member array (IEL) contains the pointers to the auxiliary data arrays. The IEL array is
dimensioned (N1,18).
At this time, only 15 of the members of this array are used.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13) to write the values of the following 15 items on the next
three lines of the neutral file.
1. Pointer to Bend Auxiliary field. This indicates where in the bend auxiliary array the bend
data for the current element can be found.
2. Pointer to Rigid Element Auxiliary field.
3. Pointer to Expansion Joint Auxiliary field.
4. Pointer to Restraint Auxiliary field.
5. Pointer to Displacement Auxiliary field.
6. Pointer to Force/Moment Auxiliary field.
7. Pointer to Uniform Load Auxiliary field.
8. Pointer to Wind Load Auxiliary field.
9. Pointer to Element Offset Auxiliary field.
10. Pointer to Allowable Stress Auxiliary field.
11. Pointer to Intersection Auxiliary field.
12. Pointer to Node Name Auxiliary field.
13. Pointer to Reducer Auxiliary field.
14. Pointer to Flange Auxiliary field.
15. Pointer to Nozzle/Equipment Check Auxiliary field.
When there is no auxiliary data of a particular type associated with the current
element use a pointer value of zero.
Auxiliary Element Data

#$ AUX_DATA
Contains the auxiliary data corresponding to the elements. This data is arranged in the
same order as the IAUXAU array described previously. For example, if IAUXAU(1) contains
a 3, then there are three bends in the model, and their data is found next in the neutral file.
Likewise, if IAUXAU(2) contains a 5, then there are five rigid elements in the model and their
data follows the bend data.
Each set of auxiliary data is separated by a sub-section header. If a particular value in
IAUXAU is zero, then only the subsection header is written to the neutral file.
The data storage for these arrays is allocated at runtime based on the available free system
memory. These arrays are allocated proportionally as a percentage of the n-number of
elements allowed. Four proportions are used: 1/2, 1/3, 1/4, and 1/5. These proportions
correspond to the variables: N2, N3, N4, and N5. Maintain these proportions to ensure that

External Interfaces
the neutral file reader can accept the file.

#$ NODENAME
Defines the Node Name data. To maintain downward compatibility, this section is optional.
The data for each element set of node names in the input file is listed here.
A two-member array (NAM) defines each set of node names. The NAM array is
dimensioned (N6, 2). Use the FORTRAN format (2X, A10, 16X, A10) to read the character
name of the FROM node and then that of the TO node.
#$ BEND
Defines the bend data. The data for each bend in the input file is listed here.
A 15-member array (BND) defines each bend. The BND array is dimensioned (N3,15).
Only 13 items are currently used. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the
values of the following 13 items on the next three lines of the neutral file.
1. Bend radius
2. Type: 1 - single flange; 2 - double flange; 0 or blank - welded
3. Angle to node position #1
4. Node number at position #1
9. Number of miter cuts
10. Fitting thickness of bend if different from the pipe
11. Seam Weld (1=Yes, 0=No)
12. Bend flexibility (K) factor
13. Weld strength reduction factor WL
#$ RIGID
Defines the rigid data. The data for each rigid in the input file is listed here.
A single-element array (RIG) is used for each rigid. The RIG array is dimensioned (N3,1).
The single element of the array represents the rigid weight.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the value.
#$ EXPJT
Defines the expansion joint data. The data for each expansion joint in the input file is listed
here. The EXP array is dimensioned (N5,5).
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following five items on the
next line of the neutral file.
1. Axial stiffness
2. Transverse stiffness
3. Bending stiffness

External Interfaces
4. Torsional stiffness
5. Effective inside bellows diameter
#$ RESTRANT
Defines the restraint data.
The data for each restraint auxiliary data block in the input file is listed here. The RES array
is dimensioned (N2,36).
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following nine items on the
next two lines of the neutral file. These nine items are repeated six times for the six possible
restraints defined in the auxiliary data block.
This requires two lines in the neutral file for each restraint specification. This means twelve
lines total for each restraint auxiliary.
1. Restraint node number
2. Restraint type (see additional notes to follow)
3. Restraint stiffness
4. Restraint gap
5. Restraint friction coefficient
6. Restraint connecting node
7. X direction cosine
8. Y direction cosine
Z direction cosine
The restraint type is an integer value whose valid range is from 1 to 62. The 62 possible
restraint types include:
Use the FORTRAN format (7X, I5, 1X, A100) to write the values of the following two items
on the next two lines of the neutral file. These two items follow the restraint specifications
above and the neutral file repeats the lines six times for the six possible restraint degrees of
freedom defined in the Restraints Auxiliary data in the piping input.
1. Support Tag
2. Support GUID

External Interfaces
The value at the beginning of each string indicates the length of the string. If the
string is blank, the value is 0.
#$ DISPLMNT
Defines the displacement data. The data for each displacement auxiliary data block in the
input file is listed here.
next lines of the neutral file. The DIS array is dimensioned (N3,110).
This requires 10 lines in the neutral file for each displacement specification. This means 20
lines total for each displacement auxiliary.
These 55 items are repeated twice for the two possible displacements defined on the
auxiliary.
Unspecified displacement values (free-displacement degrees of freedom, for
example) are designated by using a value of 9999.99.
#$ FORCMNT
Defines the start of the force/moment data. The data for each force/moment auxiliary data
block in the input file is listed here.
next ten lines of the neutral file. The FOR array is dimensioned (N3,38).
This requires ten lines in the neutral file for each force/moment specification. This means 20
lines total for each force/moment auxiliary data block.

External Interfaces
#$ UNIFORM
Defines the start of the uniform load data. The data for each uniform load in the input file is
listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 12 items on the next
two lines of the neutral file. The UNI array is dimensioned (N5,36). Currently three vectors of
four values each (three directions and a G-load flag) are used.
This requires two lines in the neutral file for each uniform load auxiliary data block.
G-flag is 1 for the input values in G's and 0 for input values in force-per-length notation.
{vector 1 & 2} UX1 UY1 UZ1 G-fla UX2 UY2

g1
{vector 2 & 3} UZ2 G-flag UX3 UY3 UZ3 G-flag

2 3
#$ WIND
Defines the start of the wind/wave data. The data for each wind/wave specification in the
input file is listed here. The WIND array is dimensioned (N5,6).
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the set of values on the next line of the
neutral file. This requires a single line in the neutral file for each wind auxiliary.
The data items on each line are as follows:
1. Entry type (0.0 for Wind, 1.0 for Wave, 2.0 for Off)
2. Wind shape factor or wave drag coefficient
3. Wave added mass coefficient
4. Wave lift coefficient
5. Wave marine growth

External Interfaces
6. Marine growth density

#$ OFFSETS
Defines the start of the element offset data. The data for each offset pipe in the input file is
listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following six items on the next
line of the neutral file. The OFF array is dimensioned (N5,6).
This requires a single line in the neutral file for each offset auxiliary.
1. Element FROM node offset in X direction
2. Element FROM node offset in Y direction
3. Element FROM node offset in Z direction
4. Element TO node offset in X direction
5. Element TO node offset in Y direction
6. Element TO node offset in Z direction
#$ ALLOWBLS
Defines the start of the allowable stress data. The data for each allowable spec in the input
file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 153 items on the
next 26 lines of the neutral file. The ALL array is dimensioned (N5,153).
1. Cold allowable stress
2. Hot allowable for thermal case #1
5. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #1
8. Eff.
9. Sy
10. Fac
11. Pmax
12. Piping code id

External Interfaces

Items 25 through 32 represent Cycles, and items 33 through 40 represent Stresses for eight
BW (butt-weld)/Class D Fatigue pairs.
FW (fillet-weld)/Class E Fatigue pairs.
Class F Fatigue pairs used with TD/12 piping code.
Class G Fatigue pairs used with TD/12 piping code.
Items 89 through 96 represent Cycles, and items 97 through 104 represent Stresses for
eight Class W Fatigue pairs used with TD/12 piping code.
Item 105 Elastic Modulus correction
Item 106 has different meanings based on the active piping code: Allowed Cycles
Maximum (per B31.3); Restrained Piping (per B31.8); Material Composition/Type (per
HPGSL and JPI).
Item 107 UTS ambient
Item 108 Allowable Sy/St value
Items 109 through 117 represent nine SY values at temperature.
Items 118 through 126 represent nine UTS values at temperature.
Items 127 through 153 are currently unused. Write the value of 0.000000.
Some of these items (notably 8-24) may have various meanings based on the active
piping code.
Piping code ISO-14692 has special mapping for the first 24 items.
#$ SIF&TEES
Defines the start of the SIF/TEE data. The data for each SIF/TEE specification in the input
file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 30 items, for each of
the two tees that can be specified on the dialog box. The SIF array is dimensioned (N4,60).
The software requires five lines in the neutral file for each SIF/TEE specified. This means
you must specify 10 lines total for each auxiliary element.
The information in parenthesis below gives information about each input value.
1. Node (the intersection node number)
2. Type (the intersection type code, if not specified this auxiliary this is only used to specify
SIFs)

External Interfaces
3. In-Plane SIF (ii)*

4. Out-Plane SIF (io)*
5. Weld (d) (circumferential weld mismatch, used for butt welds and tapered transitions
6. Fillet (fillet leg length)
7. Pad Thk (thickness of the reinforcing pad)
8. Ftg Ro (fitting outside radius for branch connections)
9. Crotch R (crotch radius of the formed lip on an extruded welding tee)
10. Weld ID (weld ID value)
11. B1 (code-specific value)
12. B2 (code-specific value)
13. In-Plane Index (Ii)*
14. Out-Plane Index (Io)*
15. Torsion SIF (it)*
16. Axial SIF (ia)*
17. Pressure SIF (ip)*
18. Pressure Index (Ip)*
19. 19-22*
23.(code-related "Note" options)
24. (code-related "Note" options)
25. Axial Index (Ia)
26. Torsion Index (It)
* Values 3, 4, 11, and 13-22 are for the IGE/TD/12 piping code.
Some of these values may have different meanings based on the piping code you have
selected. For more information on piping input specifics, see SIFs & Tees (on page
138).
#$ REDUCERS
This subsection header defines the start of the REDUCER data. The data for each
REDUCER spec in the input file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following five items on the
next line of the neutral file. The RED array is dimensioned (N6,5).
This requires one line in the neutral file for each REDUCER specified.
1. Second diameter of the reducer
2. Second thickness of the reducer
3. Alpha angle of the reducer
4. R1 value of the reducer for the TD/12 piping code

External Interfaces
5. R2 value of the reducer for the TD/12 piping code

These values are repeated for the second intersection specification.
#$ FLANGES
Defines the FLANGE data. The data for each FLANGE spec in the input file is listed here.
There are 72 data values used to describe a flange.
1. FROM/TO (0 = FROM, 1 = TO, 2= BOTH)
2. METHOD (0 = PEQ, 1 = ASME NC)
3. GASKET OR BOLT CIRCLE DIAMETER, DEPENDING ON METHOD
4. BOLT AREA (ASME METHOD ONLY)
5. SYC (ASME METHOD ONLY)
6. SY1 (ASME METHOD ONLY)
15. 15-24 CLASS NAME, (40 CHAR MAX)
16. 25-48 24 TEMPERATURES OF THE TEMP/PRESS RATING CURVE (PEQ METHOD
ONLY)
17. 49-72 24 PRESSURES OF THE TEMP/PRESS RATING CURVE (PEQ METHOD
ONLY)
These values are arranged in the neutral file on 12 lines using a format of (2X, 6G13.6)
unless otherwise specified:
Line 1: Flange items 1-5
Line 4: Class Name, using a format of (2X, A40)

External Interfaces

All 12 lines must be written to the neutral file for each flange. Unused fields/values can be
represented by 0.00.
#$ EQUIPMNT
Defines the Equipment/Nozzle Check data. The data for each EQUIPMNT spec in the input
file is listed here. There are two sets of 17 data values that use a format of (2X, 6G13.6) as
shown below:
1. Node Number
2. Limiting load value FX
3. Limiting load value FY
4. Limiting load value FZ
5. Limiting load value MX
6. Limiting load value MY
7. Limiting load value MZ
8. Reference axis direction cosine CosX
9. Reference axis direction cosine CosY
10. Reference axis direction cosine CosZ
11. Flange rating
12. Interaction method: 0=absolute; 1=SRSS; 2=Unity Check;
Items 13-17 are spares represented by 0.00. These values are arranged in the neutral file
on six lines. All six lines must be written to the neutral file for each Nozzle/Equipment
check. Unused fields/values can be represented by 0.00.
Miscellaneous Data Group #1

#$ MISCEL_1
Contains the material ID (RRMAT) for each element in the input file, the nozzle data
(VFLEX), the hanger data, and the execution options.
Material ID
Contains the material ID number in the first array for each element in the input file. Use the
FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6).
The RRMAT array is dimensioned (N1). The material IDs range from 1 to 699 (See the
The number of lines required to write the RRMAT array in the neutral file is determined by the
following FORTRAN routine:
Nozzles

External Interfaces
Describes the flexible WRC-297, PD-5500, API 650, and Custom nozzles in the input file.
The value 9999.99 represents infinity or an undefined term.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6). The nozzle (VFLEX) contains 22 values for each
nozzle in the input. This requires four lines in the neutral file.
For WRC-297 nozzles, the items are:
1. Nozzle node number
2. Vessel node number (optional)
3. Nozzle type indicator (0 = WRC-297)
4. Nozzle outside diameter (in.)
5. Nozzle wall thickness (in.)
6. Vessel outside diameter (in.)
7. Vessel wall thickness (in.)
8. Vessel reinforcing pad thickness (in.)
9. Spare (not used)
10. Dist. to stiffeners or head (in.)
11. Dist. to opposite side stiffeners or head (in.)
12. Vessel centerline direction vector X
13. Vessel centerline direction vector Y
14. Vessel centerline direction vector Z
15. Vessel temperature (optional) (°F)
16. Vessel material # (optional)
17. Spare (not used)
For API 650 nozzles, the items are:
2. Tank node number (optional)
3. Nozzle type indicator (1.0 = API-650)
6. Tank outer diameter (in.)
7. Tank wall thickness (in.)

External Interfaces
8. Spare (not used)

9. Reinforcing on shell (1) or nozzle (2)
10. Nozzle height (in.)
11. Fluid height (in.)
12. Displacement vector (integer value between 1 and 9, 0 if unused)
13. Specific gravity of fluid
14. Tank thermal expansion coefficient (in/in/deg)
15. Delta temperature (°F)
16. Elastic modulus (psi)
For PD-5500 nozzles, the items are:
3. Nozzle type indicator (.0 = PD-5500)
5. Vessel type (0-cylinder, 1-sphere)
9. Spare (not used)
10. Dist. to stiffeners or head (in.)
11. Dist. to opposite side stiffeners or head (in.)
15. Vessel Temperature (optional) (°F)
16. Vessel Material # (optional)

External Interfaces

For Custom nozzles, the items are:
3. Nozzle type indicator (3.0 = Custom)
9. Spare (not used)
16. Vessel material # (optional)
19. Axial stiffness (lb.\in.)
20. In-plane stiffness (in.-lb./deg.)
21. Out-of-plane stiffness (in.-lb./deg.)
22. Torsional stiffness (in.-lb./deg.)
Hangers
Describes the spring hangers in the input file. Some of the hanger data listed below
represents uninitialized data. In the instances where this uninitialized data represent infinite
values (such as maximum travel limit and available space), it is reported here as 9999.99.
The next line contains values for the following parameters in FORTRAN format (2X, I13,
5G13.6):
IDFTABLE is the default hanger table.
DEFVAR is the default for allowed load variation.
DEFRIG is the default for rigid support displacement criteria.
DEFMXTRAVEL is the default for maximum allowed travel.

External Interfaces
DEFSHTSPR is the default for allowing short range springs (0=no 1=yes).
DEFMUL is the default multi-load case design option.
The next line contains values for the following parameters in the FORTRAN format (2X, 5I13):
IDFOPER is the default number of hanger design operating cases (always 1).
IACTCLD is the default cold load calculation switch (0=no, 1=yes).
IHGRLDS is the number of hanger operating loads (0 -3).
IACTUAL is the load case defining actual cold loads.
IMULTIOPTS is the multi-load case design option (1-7).
An array of hanger node numbers (IHGRNODE) is read and written for each hanger in the input
file and is dimensioned (N5). There are seven lines in the neutral file for this data if all N5
hangers are specified. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
The neutral file reads and writes an 11-element array (HGRDAT) for each hanger in the input
file. The HGRDAT array is dimensioned (11,N5). Each hanger in the model requires two lines in
the neutral file. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6).
1. Hanger stiffness
2. Allowable load variation
3. Rigid support displacement criteria
4. Allowed space for hanger
5. Cold load #1 (theoretical)
6. Hot load #1 (initialize to 0.0)
7. User defined operating load f/ variable springs (init to 0.0)
8. Maximum allowed travel limit
9. Multiple load case design option
10. Hanger hardware weight
11. Constant effort support load (CEFF)
Use the FORTRAN format (7X, I5, 1X, A100) to write the values of the following two items on
the next two lines of the neutral file. These two items follow the hanger specifications above and
the neutral file repeats the lines for each hanger defined in the Hangers Auxiliary data in the
piping input.
1. Hanger Tag
2. Hanger GUID
The value at the beginning of each string indicates the length of the string. If the string
is blank, the value is 0.
A four-element array (IHGRFREE) is read/written for each hanger in the input file. The
IHGRFREE array is dimensioned ( 4,N5). Each hanger in the file requires one line in the neutral
file.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
1. Anchor node to be freed (#1)

External Interfaces
2. Anchor node to be freed (#2)

3. d.o.f. type for #1 (1-free Y, 2-free XY, 3-free ZY, 4-free X, Y, Z, 5-free all)
4. d.o.f. type for #2
An array (IHGRNUM) lists the number of hangers at this location for each hanger in the input
file. There is one entry here for every hanger in the file. The IHGRNUM array is dimensioned
(N5). There are seven lines in the neutral file for this data if all N5 hangers are specified. Use
the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
An array (IHGRTABLE) lists the hanger table numbers for each hanger in the input file. There is
one entry here for every hanger in the file. The IHGRTABLE is dimensioned (N5). There are
seven lines in the neutral file for this data if all N5 hangers are specified. Use the FORTRAN
format (2X, 6I13).
An array of flags (IHGRSHORT) indicates if short range springs can be used at each hanger
location. The IHGRSHORT array is dimensioned (N5). There are seven lines in the neutral file
for this data. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
0 = cannot use short range springs
1 = can use short range springs
An array of connecting node numbers (IHGRCN) is available for each hanger. The IHGRCN
array is dimensioned (N5). There are seven lines in the neutral file for this data if all N5 hangers
are specified. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
Execution Options
Defines the execution options used by CAESAR II. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 4I13,
G13.6, I13). This requires three lines in the neutral file. These values are:
Print forces on rigids and expansion joints 0=no, 1=yes
Print alphas & pipe props. during error checking 0=no, 1=yes
Activate Bourdon Pressure Effects 0, 1, or 2
Activate Branch Error and Coordinate Prompts 0=no, 1=yes
Thermal Bowing Delta Temperature degrees
Use Liberal Stress Allowable 0=no, 1=yes
For the following data, use the FORTRAN format: (2X, I13, 2G13.6, 3I13):
Stress Stiffening due to Pressure 0, 1, 2

Ambient Temperature (If not 70.00 deg F ) degrees
FRP Expansion * 1,000,000 len/len/deg
Optimizer 0-Both, 1-CuthillMcKee, 2-Collins
Next Node Selection 0-Decreasing, 1-Increasing
For the following data, use the FORTRAN format (2X, 4I13, G13.6, I13):
Final Ordering 0-Reversed, 1-Not Reversed
Collins Ordering 0-Band, 1-No. of Coefficients
Degree Determination 0-Connections, 1-Band

External Interfaces
User Control 0-None, 1-Allow User Re-Looping

FRP Shear ratio
Laminate type
Units Conversion Data

#$ UNITS
Defines both the conversion constants and the conversion labels. The conversion constants
are all REAL*4 values in FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6). This requires four lines in the
neutral file. The character definitions for the labels are listed below.
CNVLEN
Defines the length conversion
CNVFOR
Defines the force conversion
CNVMAS
Defines the mass conversion
CNVMIN
Defines the moment (input) conversion
CNVMOU
Defines the moment (output) conversion
CNVSTR
Defines the stress conversion
CNVTSC
Defines the temperature conversion
CNVTOF
Defines the temperature offset
CNVPRE
Defines the Pressure conversion
CNVYM
modulus conversion
CNVPDN
Defines the pipe density conversion
CNVIDN
Defines the insulation density conversion
CNVFDN
Defines the fluid density conversion
CNVTSF

External Interfaces
Defines the translational stiffness conversion

CNVUNI
Defines the uniform load conversion
CNVWND
Defines the wind load conversion
CNVELE
Defines the elevation conversion
CNVCLN
Defines the compound length conversion
CNVDIA
Defines the diameter conversion
CNVTHK
Wall thickness conversion
Next, enter the following labels for units, one per line, in the format given in the label
descriptions. This requires 24 lines in the neutral file.
CCVNAME
Defines the name of the units used, such as English (CHARACTER*15)
CCVNOM
Sets On or Off, and tells PREPIP whether or not nominal diameters are allowed
(CHARACTER* 3)
CCVLEN
Defines the length label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVFOR
Defines the force label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVMAS
Defines the mass label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVMIN
Defines the moment (input) label (CHARACTER* 6)
CCVMOU
Defines the moment (output) label (CHARACTER* 6)
CCVSTR
Defines the stress label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVTSC
Defines the temperature label (CHARACTER* 1)
CCVTOF

External Interfaces
Defines the temperature offset/label (CHARACTER* 1)

CCVPRE
Defines the pressure label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVYM
RACTER*10)
CCVPDN
Defines the pipe density label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVIDN
Defines the insulation density label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVFDN
Defines the fluid density label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVTSF
Defines the translational stiffness label (CHARACTER* 7)
CCVRSF
Defines the rotational stiffness label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVUNI
Defines the uniform load label (CHARACTER* 7)
CCVGLD
Defines the gravitational load label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVWND
Defines the wind load label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVELE
Defines the elevation label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVCLN
Defines the compound length label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVDIA
Defines the diameter label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVTHK
Defines the wall thickness label (CHARACTER* 3)
Nodal Coordinate Data

#$ COORDS
Specifies the X, Y, Z global coordinates of the starting node point of each discontinuous
piping segment. The data in this section of the neutral file is optional; it may not exist. The
existence of this data depends on user preference and the particular job. The data is defined
below.

External Interfaces
NXYZ
Defines how many sets of coordinates follow. Use FORTRAN format (2X, I13).
INODE, XCORD, YCORD, ZCORD
Consists of four values in a line and is repeated NXYZ times.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, I13, 3F13.4) to define a node number and the X, Y, Z global
coordinates.
This section only exists in Versions 3.22 and later.
Version and Job Title Information

#$ VERSION - Provides section header information.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 2G13.6, I8) to write the values of the following variables on the
first line of the neutral file:
GVERSION is the version of the neutral file interface being used. This corresponds to the
major version number of CAESAR II (4 for 4.x., for example).
RVERSION is the specific CAESAR II version generating this file, for example 4.50.
ICODEPAGE is the Windows (ANSI) code page identifier, for example 1252.
The next 60 lines of 75 characters each are reserved for the CAESAR II title-page text. Use
FORTRAN format (2X, A75).
The last line of the job title array, if blank, is set by this transfer interface. The text that is set
here indicates that the file was created by the CAESAR II interface.
Control Information
#$ CONTROL
Provides the section division header. The #$ and space are required, and the word
CONTROL is in all uppercase.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13) to write the values of the following variables on the next
line of the neutral file:
NUMELT
Defines the number of piping elements (spreadsheets) in the input file.
NUMNOZ
Defines the number of nozzles in the input file.
NOHGRS
Defines the number of spring hangers in the input file.
NONAM
Defines the number of Node Name data blocks in the input file.
NORED
Defines the number of reducers in the input file.

External Interfaces
NUMFLG
Defines the number of flanges in the input file.
Write 13 items that contain the number of auxiliary data types used in the input file followed by
the vertical axis indicator. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13). These 13 values are:
The number of bend auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of rigid-element auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of expansion-joint auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of restraint auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of displacement auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of force/moment auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of uniform-load auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of wind-load auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of element-offset auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of allowable-stress auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of intersection auxiliary data blocks in the input file. IZUP flag. Equal to zero (0)
for the global -Y axis vertical; equal to 1 for the global -Z axis vertical.
The number of (nozzle) equipment limits data blocks in the input file.
Neutral File Generator

Generates the CAESAR II neutral file (.cii), which you use to send data to or from the standard
CAESAR II input file to another interface or a third-party application.
Select the type of file you want to convert using the Neutral File Generator. You can convert a
neutral file (.cii) to an CAESAR II input file (._a) or vice-versa.
Next, browse and select or type the name of the neutral file to be converted and click Convert.
The software prompts you when the conversion completes. Click OK and indicate whether you
want to perform another file conversion. When you are done converting files, click No and the
software exits from the dialog box.
Browse and select or type the name of the file to be converted, based on the Conversion Type
you selected.
CAESAR II indicates the name of the file and the directory. The software defaults this path to the
same location as the file you selected for conversion.
Next, browse and select or type the name of the converted file and click Convert. The software
prompts you when the conversion completes. Click OK and indicate whether you want to
perform another file conversion. When you are done converting files, click No and the software
exits from the dialog box.

External Interfaces
Indicates the name of the file the generator creates, which is the same name as the selected file
for conversion, but with an extension that reflects the Conversion Type selected (i.e., ._a for an
CAESAR II input file and .cii for a neutral file).
CAESAR II Data Matrix

The generic CAESAR II data matrix input routine creates a CAESAR II file from a simple neutral
file. The Data Matrix Interface transfers only the piping geometry. This requires you to add other
data to complete the stress model. It expects to read an ASCII text file containing a single line of
data for each pipe in the model. Each line of data contains 12 parameters as listed below.
ELMT
Defines the element number sequential from 1.
N1
Defines the From node number.
N2
Defines the To node number.
DX
Defines the delta dimension in the global "X" direction.
DY
Defines the delta dimension in the global "Y" direction (the "Y" axis is vertical in CAESAR II).
DZ
Defines the delta dimension in the global "Z" direction.
DIAM
Defines the actual pipe diameter.
THK
Defines the actual pipe wall thickness.
ANCH
Provides a restraint flag. A value of 1 sets the From node to be restrained. A zero (0) value
is otherwise and is currently ignored.
BEND
Defines the bend indicator. A value of 1 sets a bend at the To node. A zero (0) value is no
bend.
BRAD
Defines the bend radius if not a long radius bend.
RIGID
Defines a rigid element flag. A value of 1 sets the element to rigid. A value of zero (0) value

External Interfaces
sets the element to nonrigid.

All values in the matrix should be real floating point numbers. The format for each line of data
must be (12E13.6). This generic interface prompts for an arbitrary conversion constant for the
delta dimensions, and the diameter /thickness values to overcome any differences between the
assumed units of the neutral file and the CAESAR II defaults.
The data matrix text file can have any file extension.
If you are developing a completely new interface, use the CAESAR II Neutral File (on page
1143).
BOSfluids
Interfaces tab: Hydraulic > BOSfluids
Menu: Tools > External Interfaces > BOSfluids

Imports a BOSfluids .frc ASCII text file and creates a CAESAR II dynamic load factor (.dlf) file.
BOSfluids analyzes fluid transients, such as waterhammer and surge.
AFT IMPULSE
Reads a AFT IMPULSE .frc ASCII text file, and generates CAESAR II dynamic input data files
containing response spectra.
Response spectra input files contain dynamic pipe forces. These time history loads are
determined from pressure transient loading by the AFT Impulse software. CAESAR II reads the
output file generated by AFT Impulse, extracts the information needed, and generates the
response spectra. The generated response spectrum files can then be used for the dynamic
analysis in CAESAR II.
How to Use the AFT IMPULSE Interface

1. Click Tools > External Interfaces > AFT IMPULSE from the Main menu.
The AFT IMPULSE dialog box displays.
2. Enter the following inputs to process the AFT IMPULSE data:
AFT IMPULSE output file name. (This file is generated by AFT IMPULSE with extension
.FRC.)
Names of AFT IMPULSE pipes for which response spectra are to be generated
Corresponding CAESAR II node numbers for the AFT IMPULSE pipes
Maximum number of points on each generated response spectrum curve

External Interfaces
Frequency cut-off value

The data transfer begins. During the computation, you can monitor the process status.
3. Click Cancel at any time to stop the computation.
The resulting force spectrum files (DLF curves) are written to the CAESAR II data directory
during the computation phase of the transfer.
The names of generated force spectrum files have the following format:
P*.DLF where "*" is your CAESAR II node number in the piping model that corresponds to
the equivalent AFT IMPULSE pipe name.
The AFT IMPULSE interface creates a complete CAESAR II Dynamic Input file including
spectrum definition, force sets, load cases, and combination load cases. The resulting input
file is ready to be run, or you can further modify it.
When all computations have completed, the CAESAR II Main menu displays.
Filename
Specifies the name of the .frc file for which you want to generate a dynamic load factor (.dlf) file.
These .frc files contain the force data required to do a CAESAR II dynamic analysis (Spectrum).
Browse and select or type the full path and file name.
For more information, refer to your specific external interface.
BOSfluids (on page 1167)
AFT IMPULSE (on page 1167)
PIPENET (on page 1169)
LIQT (on page 1171)
Pipeplus (on page 1177)
FlowMaster (on page 1181)
Component List
The software creates this list from the .frc file and it contains all the components (such as bends,
tees, reducers, closed valves, etc.) for a given model. Click on each component to select it.
When you select a component, the software displays on the left, along with an empty edit field
where you can type the CAESAR II node number that corresponds to the component.
Click a second time on the component in the list to unselect it.
If you specify one or more components and corresponding node numbers, when you click OK
the software generates DLF tables (in text file format). These DLF files have a naming
convention, such as: P####.DLF, where P signifies PipeNet and #### are the node number
specified by the user.
After the software creates the appropriate DLF files, you can generate the CAESAR II Dynamic
Input file (._7) automatically. Browse for the appropriate static input file and click OK to generate
the Dynamic Input file.

External Interfaces
Maximum Points on Each DLF Curve

Indicates the number of data points used on each Dynamic Load Factor (DLF) curve for each
component and corresponding node number specified. The software generates the DLF file,
which consists of frequency values and the associated Dynamic Load Factor. The software
defaults this point value to 20.
Frequency Cut-Off
Indicates the maximum frequency that the software considers in dynamic analysis (and DLF
generation). The software defaults this value to 100 Hz.
PIPENET
Reads a PIPENET .frc ASCII text file, and generates CAESAR II dynamic input data files
determined from pressure transient loading by the Sunrise System's PIPENET package. The
PIPENET interface reads the output file generated by PIPENET, extracts the information
needed, and generates the response spectra. The generated response spectrum files can then
be used for the dynamic analysis in CAESAR II.
Technical Discussion of the PIPENET Interface

Normal piping system operating procedures such as pump start-up and shutdown, valve
closure, and unexpected events such as power failure, may produce unsteady pressure-flow
conditions. A piping system with rapid pressure-flow variations must be carefully designed to
prevent devastating results.
PIPENET performs the analysis and simulation of the unsteady flow situations for a particular
liquid piping system, and generates the piping load time histories for the pressure transient of
this particular liquid piping system.
In the dynamic analysis module of CAESAR II, a response spectrum can be generated from the
input of time history pulse. However, there are typically too many data points from a time history
analysis to manually input the data into CAESAR II. The CAESAR II PIPENET Transfer
Interface bridges the gap between PIPENET and the CAESAR II dynamic analysis module.
After the time history loads have been generated by PIPENET, the CAESAR II PIPENET
Interface extracts the dynamic pipe forces from the PIPENET generated file, and computes the
response spectrum. Afterward, the response spectrum can be used as the DLF curve for the
dynamic analysis in CAESAR II.
The response spectrum is a plot giving the maximum response of all possible linear, one-degree
of freedom systems because of a given input, which is a force. The abscissa of the spectrum is
the frequency axis, and the ordinate is the maximum response, such as dynamic load factor
(DLF). The DLF is the ratio of the dynamic deflection at any time to the deflection that would
have resulted from the static application of the load. In cases where the applied load is not
constant, the maximum load, which occurs at any time during the period of interest, is taken.

External Interfaces
The dynamic load factor is non-dimensional and independent of the magnitude of load.
How to Use the CAESAR II / PIPENET Interface

1. Click Tools > External Interfaces > PIPENET from the Main menu.
The PIPENET dialog box displays.
2. Enter the following inputs to process the PIPENET data:
PIPENET output file name. (This file is generated by Sunrise System's PIPENET
package with extension .FRC.)
Names of PIPENET pipes for which response spectra are to be generated
Corresponding CAESAR II node numbers for the PIPENET pipes
the equivalent PIPENET pipe name.
The PIPENET interface creates a complete CAESAR II Dynamic Input file including
Filename
LIQT (on page 1171)

External Interfaces
Component List

Frequency Cut-Off
LIQT
Reads the output .frc ASCII text file generated by LIQT, extracts the information needed, and
generates the response spectra. The LIQT interface generates CAESAR II dynamic input data
files containing response spectra for input files. The spectra input files contain the dynamic pipe
forces. These time history loads are determined by the Stoner Associates, Inc. (SAI) LIQT
package from pressure transient loading. The generated response spectrum files can be used
for the dynamic analysis in CAESAR II.

External Interfaces
Technical Discussion of LIQT Interface

Normal piping system operating procedures such as pump start-up and shutdown, valve
closure, and unexpected events such as power failure, may produce unsteady pressure-flow
conditions. A piping system with rapid pressure-flow variations must be carefully designed to
prevent devastating results.
The SAI LIQT package performs the analysis and simulation of the unsteady flow situations for a
particular liquid piping system, and generates the piping load time histories for the pressure
transient of this particular liquid piping system.
In the dynamic analysis module of CAESAR II, a response spectrum can be generated from the
input of time history pulse. However, there are typically too many data points from a time history
analysis for you to manually input the data into CAESAR II. The LIQT interface bridges the gap
between the SAI LIQT package and the CAESAR II dynamic analysis module.
After the time history loads have been generated by the SAI LIQT package, the CAESAR II
LIQT Interface extracts the dynamic pipe forces from the LIQT generated file, and computes the
response spectrum. Afterward, the response spectrum can be used as the DLF curve for the
dynamic analysis in CAESAR II.
The response spectrum is a plot giving the maximum response of all possible linear one-degree
of freedom systems because of a given input, which is a force. The abscissa of the spectrum is
the frequency axis, and the ordinate is the maximum response such as the dynamic load factor
(DLF). The DLF is the ratio of the dynamic deflection at any time to the deflection which would
have resulted from the static application of the load. In cases where the applied load is not
constant, the maximum load that occurs at any time during the period of interest is taken.
The dynamic load factor is non-dimensional and independent of the magnitude of load. The
following examples illustrate the characteristics of the DLF curve in terms of the magnitude and
the duration of the load.
How to Use the LIQT Interface

When you reach the LIQT interface, enter the following input to process the LIQT data:
Names of LIQT nodes identifying pipes for which response spectra are to be generated.
Corresponding CAESAR II node numbers for the LIQT pipes.
Maximum number of points on each generated response spectrum curve.
Frequency cut-off value.
After the proper input data is acquired, the LIQT interface module starts the data transfer. During
the computation, you can monitor the process status. Click Cancel at any time to stop the
computation.
during the computation phase of the software. The names of generated force spectrum files
have the following format:
L*.DLF where "*" is the user CAESAR II node number in the piping model that corresponds to
the equivalent LIQT pipe name.
When all computations have completed, you are returned to the CAESAR II Main menu.

External Interfaces
Example 1
Find the DLF response spectrum of the trapezoidal pulse loads shown in the following figure.
Solution: The response spectra generated from all four pulse loads are identical, as displayed
below.
The result shows that the DLF curve is independent of the magnitude of the pulse load.

External Interfaces
Example 2
Find the response spectrum of the following trapezoidal pulse loads.

External Interfaces

External Interfaces
Solution: The plotted results displayed below shows that the longer the duration of the force,
the higher the DLF. The triangular pulse, which has a duration of zero, generates the lowest
DLF curve.
Filename
LIQT (on page 1171)

External Interfaces
Component List

Frequency Cut-Off
Pipeplus
Reads a Pipeplus ASCII text neutral file with a .pnf extension, and translates it into a CAESAR II
model.
How to Use the Pipeplus Interface

1. Click Tools > Eternal Interfaces > Pipeplus.

External Interfaces
The Pipeplus Interface dialog box displays.
2. Enter the name of the target neutral file.

If needed, use the Browse button to locate the neutral file on your hard disk.
3. Enter the CAESAR II Starting Node Number.
The default value is 10.
4. Enter the CAESAR II Node Number Increment.
The default value is 10.
5. Select the Model Orientation by clicking either the Y axis or Z axis radio button.
CAESAR II assumes the units of the data in the neutral file match the units
designated in the CAESAR II configuration file.
The CAESAR II input file is created in the same directory as the Pipeplus neutral file.
6. Click OK to begin translation of the data.
The CAESAR II input file is created in the same directory as the Pipeplus neutral file.
7. Review the Pipeplus Interface dialog box with the updated information:
Log File Warnings: Number of warnings/problems encountered.
Current Units File: Units file that was used for translation and stored in the CAESAR II
input file.

External Interfaces
The name and location of the CAESAR II input file.
The log file name is the name of the neutral file with .LOG suffix. This file contains general
information about the translation process, including:
The number of lines in the neutral file
The number of CAESAR II elements that were created
Any warning or error messages
Node Association table that relates the Pipeplus node names to the corresponding
CAESAR II node numbers.
8. Compare the CAESAR II input model with the Pipeplus model.

External Interfaces
a. View the CAESAR II model in the Classic Piping Input dialog box or in the 3D Graphics
pane.
b. View the Pipeplus view of this same model in the Pipeplus software.

External Interfaces
An example of the Pipeplus model is shown below.
FlowMaster
Reads a FlowMaster .frc ASCII text file, and generates CAESAR II dynamic input data files
determined from pressure transient loading by the FlowMaster package. The FlowMaster
interface reads the output file generated by FlowMaster, extracts the information needed, and
generates the response spectra. The generated response spectrum files can then be used for
the dynamic analysis in CAESAR II.

External Interfaces
How to Use the Flowmaster Interface

1. Click Tools > External Interfaces > Flowmaster from the Main menu.
The Flowmaster dialog box displays.
2. Enter the following inputs to process the Flowmaster data:
Flowmaster output file name. (This file is generated by Flowmaster with extension
.FRC.)
Names of Flowmaster pipes for which response spectra are to be generated
Corresponding CAESAR II node numbers for the Flowmaster pipes
the equivalent Flowmaster pipe name.
The Flowmaster interface creates a complete CAESAR II Dynamic Input file including
Filename
LIQT (on page 1171)

External Interfaces
Component List
Intergraph Smart 3D PCF

Processes a Piping Component File (PCF) or multiple PCFs generated from Intergraph
SmartPlant® 3D, and then generates a CAESAR II piping input model file from the conversion
information.
Both the Intergraph Smart 3D PCF and the PCF menu options in the External
Interfaces menu operate the same.
See Import PCF (on page 1219) for detailed information about how this command works.

Frequency Cut-Off

External Interfaces
Intergraph CADWorx Plant

Provides a bi-directional data transfer link to CAESAR II. Intergraph CADWorx Plant is an
AutoCAD-based design/drafting product that allows you to create models in ortho, iso, 2D, or 3D
modes. You can transfer these models into CAESAR II; likewise, models built in CAESAR II can
be sent into Intergraph CADWorx Plant. Modifications made in either product are retained for
future transfers.
Intergraph CADWorx Plant also allows CAESAR II output data to be imported and placed on the
drawing. This provides the ability to generate stress and restraint isometrics.
Because the external interface operates seamlessly, no action is required in
CAESAR II. Intergraph CADWorx Plant reads CAESAR II _A (input) and _P (output) files without
modification, and creates CAESAR II _A files directly. The Intergraph CADWorx Plant
command that appears on the Tools menu serves only as a reminder that the external interface
exists. For more information about importing and exporting data between these two products,
refer to documentation delivered with lntergraph CADWorx Plant.
Intergraph PDS
Transfers piping system geometry from an Intergraph neutral file to a standard CAESAR II _A
binary input file. The geometry data consists of pipe lengths, diameters, thicknesses,
connectivities, and node numbers. All nodal specific quantities, such as loads, displacements,
and so forth, must be manually added to the CAESAR II input file.
There are three basic steps necessary to generate a CAESAR II input file from an Intergraph
neutral file:

External Interfaces
1. Click Tools > External Interfaces > Intergraph PDS to create an Intergraph neutral file.
2. Transfer this ASCII file to the CAESAR folder.

You can create and transfer as many Intergraph neutral files as necessary.
During data transfer, the interface continues to prompt you for neutral file names until you
cancel the session.
3. Verify the proper units file is active in the folder in which the neutral file is located. This is
necessary for the proper conversion of the data.
File Name
Specifies the full path and filename of the neutral file. When you open the software, this field
displays the current data path. You can manually add a file name to the end of this string, or
click Browse to search for a neutral file.

External Interfaces
Browse
Opens a standard file selection dialog box from which you can search for the appropriate neutral
file. You can use the options at the bottom of the dialog box to switch between the neutral file
suffix types, such as .N or .NEU.
Minimum Anchor Node

Identifies the node number interpreted as the minimum node number for a terminal point in the
model. Only change the default value if your Intergraph system has been set up with a different
anchor node range.
Maximum Anchor Node

Identifies the node number interpreted as the maximum node number for a terminal point in the
model. Only change the default value if your Intergraph system has been set up with a different
anchor node range.
Start Node
Indicates the starting node number in the resulting CAESAR II model. By default, the entire
model is renumbered using this value as the starting point. To disable renumbering, you must
set this option and Increment (on page 359) to zero.
Increment
Defines the value used as a node number increment. This value is used during the renumbering
of the model. To disable renumbering, you must set this option and Start Node (on page 359) to
zero.
Filter Out Elements Whose Diameter is Less Than

Defines the minimum allowed pipe size. Any elements less than this minimum diameter are
ignored. This option is used to keep drain lines and taps out of the stress model.
Remove HA Elements
Controls whether HA elements are removed. Typically, HA (hanger-support direction) elements
should be removed. The support is placed on the pipe where the HA element joins it. Clear this
check box to keep HA elements in the stress model.

External Interfaces
Force Consistent Bend Materials

Allows the interface to ensure that all bend elements, incoming and outgoing, have the same
material name and properties. Often, bends are given a material specification that is different
from that of the attached piping, even though the properties are the same. Select this option to
change the material information on the bend elements to that of the attached piping.
Include Additional Bend Nodes

Allows the interface to add a mid-point node and a near-point node on bends. Clear this box to
cause bends to have only the far-point node.
Enable Advanced Element Sort

Allows a second, more thorough sorting of the elements. This sort considers the length of the
runs, the diameter, and the elevation in determining where to begin the node numbering
sequence. By default, this option is turned on. Turning off this option uses only the first sort
where the elements are sorted starting with the largest (diameter) anchor nodes and proceeds
to the smallest.
Model TEES as 3 Elements

Instructs the software to treat tees as three elements, instead of condensing them down to a
point. In either case, the SIF is applied at the tee node. Using three elements allows pipe
properties of the tee to differ from those of the attached piping.
Initialize Global Coordinates

Initializes the coordinates of the first node in the model to (0, 0, 0).
Condenses Flanges/Valves
Allows you to turn on or off the condensation of flange-valve-flange elements. By default, the
software condenses the sequence of elements into a single rigid element. If you deselect this
check box, the software does not condense the sequence of elements when using the standard
sort. If you specify to use the advanced sort, the software always condenses the elements.
Model Rotation
The rotation of the +X-axis of the CAESAR II model should be rotated about the vertical axis
away from the PCF's East compass point. The default setting is zero, which imposes no rotation.
Select +90 to rotate the model a positive 90-degrees. Select -90 to rotate the model a negative
90-degrees.
Z can also be vertical based on special execution setting.
Alternatively, you can rotate the model after importing it to CAESAR II. Use the Rotate
command on the Block Operations toolbar.

External Interfaces
Neutral File Weight Units

Defines the value for the neutral file weight units. This value allows the software to properly
interpret the weight values contained in the neutral file. This is necessary because the neutral
file does not indicate the units for the weight values. The value you select should match the
corresponding value in the active CAESAR II units file.
Neutral File Insulation Units

Specifies the value for the neutral file insulation units. This value allows the software to properly
interpret the insulation thickness values contained in the neutral file. This is necessary because
the neutral file does not indicate the units for insulation thickness values. The value you select
should match the corresponding value in the active CAESAR II units file.
Data Modification and Details

After the Intergraph PDS data transfer is complete, you can open the CAESAR II input files. You
must make the following modifications and additions:
Specification of material properties. Material 1 is assumed, unless a material mapping file is
provided.
Specification of temperatures and pressures. The temperature/pressure pairs are assigned
to T1, T2, T3 and P1, and P2 in order.
Specification of intersection types. Unreinforced is assumed.
Specification of restraints details. By default, only anchors and double acting supports are
detected by the interface. If the exact type of restraint is to be transferred, PDS must be
configured to generate the CAESAR II restraint type indicators. These restraint type
indicators are shown in the Additional Notes section of the complete Neutral File interface,
discussed later in this chapter. These restraint type values must be placed in HA Field 7 of
the neutral file.
The fluid density can be transferred into CAESAR II also. Place this density value in Field 7
of the neutral file. The density value should be defined according to the density unit used in
the CAESAR II units file, not in terms of specific gravity.
Specification of other loads. The weight of rigid elements can be transferred into CAESAR II
for 3W, 4W, AV, RB, and VA type elements. For the weight of these elements to transfer,
the weight value must be placed in Field 8.
Insulation thickness and density can also be transferred into CAESAR II. The thickness and
density values should be placed in Fields 9 and 10, respectively.
In addition, review the log file generated by the interface for any anomalies. The interface sorts
the elements and then ensures that diameters and wall thicknesses are defined for each
element. Depending on how disorganized the Intergraph neutral file is, some assumptions made
by the interface may not be correct and may require you to modify the resulting CAESAR II input
file.
If the interface encounters any major problems, the process aborts and no CAESAR II input is
generated. In these instances, contact Intergraph CAS Support for assistance.
If necessary, you can define a material mapping file to relate the material designations in the
Intergraph neutral file to the standard CAESAR II materials. You must name this file

External Interfaces
PDS_MAT.MAP, and place it beneath the application's \SYSTEM subfolder. This mapping file
contains two fields of data per line. Field 1 is 5 characters wide, and contains the CAESAR II
material number that corresponds to the PDS material name. Field 2 is held in columns 7
through 21 and contains the PDS material name as it appears in the neutral file. Neither of these
values should contain a decimal point.
Example Neutral File from PDS

The following is an example neutral file from PDS.

External Interfaces

External Interfaces

External Interfaces

External Interfaces

External Interfaces

External Interfaces

External Interfaces
Intergraph Data After Element Sort

External Interfaces
Intergraph Data After TEE/Cross Modifications
(End nodes replaced with center point, and TEE/CROSS element removed. Modifications also
performed on 3 & 4 way valves.)

External Interfaces
Intergraph Data After Valve Modifications
(Flange lengths added to valve lengths.)

External Interfaces

External Interfaces

External Interfaces
Intergraph Data After Bend Modifications

External Interfaces
(Far Weld Line Nodal coordinates changed to Tangent Intersection Point coordinates)
DATA FOR PROPERTY ARRAY WITH # ENTRIES = 5
LOCATIONS 1-11
LOCATIONS 1, 12-20
*** CAESAR II INTERPRETED GEOMETRY DATA ***
*** CAESAR II INTERPRETED PROPERTY DATA *** Part 1
*** CAESAR II INTERPRETED PROPERTY DATA *** Part 2

External Interfaces

External Interfaces

External Interfaces

External Interfaces
The CAESAR II job file name is P-1002_A Y

Starting generation of CAESAR II input file for:
28 elements
9 Bends
2 Rigids
2 Restraints
Conversion of data to CAESAR II completed.

External Interfaces
CADPIPE
Provides a one-way transfer of the geometry data from CADPIPE to CAESAR II. The geometry
data consists of pipe lengths, diameters, thicknesses, connectivities, and node numbers. All
nodal specific quantities, such as restraints, loads, and displacements, must be manually added
to the CAESAR II input file.
The CADPIPE external interface is set up so that several models can be transferred in a single
session. During data transfer, the interface first prompts you for the name of the CADPIPE
connectivity (.UDE ) neutral file. After you specify the file name, the data transfer process
begins. When that transfer is complete, the interface prompts you for another neutral file name.
This cycle continues until you cancel the data transfer process.
The neutral file read by the interface must be generated by the CADPIPE software. For
more information, refer to the CADPIPE product documentation.
The CADPIPE neutral file must be transferred to the current CAESAR II folder so that it is
available to the external interface.
The interface reads the CADPIPE neutral file, and generates the CAESAR II input file and a log
file of the data transfer process. Check the data in both the CAESAR II input file and the log file
for consistency and any assumptions made by the interface.
The following paragraphs describe the layout of the data extracted from the CADPIPE neutral
file and how it is arranged for storage in the interface. The data storage is maintained in two
arrays. The first array contains geometry data for each pipe element; the second array contains
additional load and specification data.
In the first array, an entry is required for each piece of pipe in the system. "Pipe" refers to an
entity between two nodes, which can be a pipe or a rigid element. There are 12 values per entry,
and all values must be specified.
Field 1- ELMT Enter the pipe element number, which can correspond to an entry in the
second array. This is also the pipe or element number in the model.
Values must be sequential from 1.
Field 2 - N1 Enter the From node number, which is the starting node for the element.
Values must be greater than zero and less than 32000.
Field 3 - N2 Enter the To node number, which is the ending node for the element.
Values must be greater than zero and less than 32000.
Field 4 - DX Enter the delta X dimension for the element. This is the distance
between N1 and N2 in the X direction.
Field 5 - DY Enter the delta Y dimension for the element. This is the distance
between N1 and N2 in the Y direction. In CAESAR II, Y is vertical.
Field 6 - DZ Enter the delta Z dimension for the element. This is the distance
between N1 and N2 in the Z direction.
Field 7 - DIAM Enter the pipe outer diameter.

External Interfaces
Field 8 - THK Enter the pipe wall thickness.
Field 9 - ANCH Specify the location of the restraint (support). If there is a restraint on
N1, ANCH is 1. If there is a restraint on N2, then ANCH is 2. The type of
restraint can be obtained from the second array.
Field 10 - BND Specify whether there is a bend at the N2 end of the element. If BND is
1, there is a bend at N2. If BND is 0, this is a straight pipe.
Field 11 - BRAD Specify the bend radius if the bend is not a long radius bend. This value
is the required bend radius.
Field 12 - RIGD Indicate whether the current element is a rigid element.
Records in the second array are only necessary when additional data is required. This means
there is always a record in the first array for pipe element #1, which could be the only entry in
the array. Any additional entries contain some type of change to data normally duplicated
forward by CAESAR II.
Field 1 - ELMT Enter the pipe element number, which corresponds to an entry in the first
array. This is also a pipe or element number in the model. Values are
sequential from 1.
Field 2 - TEMP1 Enter the operating temperature for load case 1. You can find this value
by scanning the CADPIPE data for the maximum temperature.
Field 3 - PRESS1 Enter the operating pressure for load case 1. You can find this value by
scanning the CADPIPE data for the maximum pressure.
Field 4 - RGDWGT Enter the weight of rigid elements. This entry is only required if you set
the RIGID flag in the first array.
Field 5 - TEEFLG Specify the TEE type. Acceptable values are:

1 - reinforced
2 - unreinforced
3 - welding tee
4 - sweepolet
5 - weldolet
6 - extruded welding tee

External Interfaces
Field 6 - RESTYP Specify the restraint (support) type indicator. Acceptable values are:
0 - anchor
1 - double acting X
2 - double acting Y
3 - double acting Z
4 - double acting RX
5 - double acting RY
6 - double acting RZ
Field 7 - RINFO1 Enter the restraint stiffness for the support.
Field 8 - RINFO2 Enter the restraint gap for the support.
Field 9 - RINFO3 Enter the restraint friction coefficient for the support.
Field 10 - MATID Enter the CAESAR II material ID value.

If the coefficient of expansion is to be changed, it should be
entered in the Temperature field above (Field 2).
Field 11 - EMOD
Field 12 - POIS Enter the val
Field 13 - GAMMA Enter the weight density of the material.
Field 14 - INSTHK Enter the insulation thickness.
Field 15 - INSWGT Enter the weight density of the insulation material.
Field 16 - Enter the weight density of the pipe contents (fluid).

FLDWGT
Field 17 - TEENOD Enter the element node number where there is a tee.
Field 18 Placeholder for future development.

External Interfaces
CADPIPE Example Transfer

The following is an example connectivity file produced by the CADPIPE interface. Examination
of this file reveals two distinct regions. The first region defines the entities which make up the
piping system; the second region connects the entities. Both regions are required for the
interface to work properly. The first line of each entity definition contains various codes that
define: the element type, the element diameter, and the element thickness.

External Interfaces

External Interfaces

External Interfaces
As the interface runs, status messages display for information purposes. After the transfer is
complete, review the log file to ensure that there are no unexplained errors or warnings.
The log file generated for the above .UDE file is listed as follows.
CADPIPE data as read in for NEUTRAL file: NRGTST1.UDE
General Notes
This file contains the status of the data conversion from the CADPIPE ISO system to the
CAESAR II stress analysis package. The data contained in this file is grouped into three
sections:
1. Entity information
2. Segment connectivity information
3. Final interpreted CAESAR II data.
Anomalies with final CAESAR II model geometry should be traced through this file, possibly
back to the CADPIPE connectivity file. Notes and warning messages are shown below as
necessary.
Because all required CAESAR II data is not available in the CADPIPE environment, CAESAR II
must make certain modeling assumptions. As such, it is important that you verify the following
assumptions:
1. Thicknesses of .05 are generated by the software because no match could be found in the
standard CAESAR II diameter/thickness tables. This value must be corrected after it is in
CAESAR II.
2. Rigid elements are assumed to have a weight of 1.0. This value should be corrected after it
is in CAESAR II.

External Interfaces
3. Temperatures, pressures, and other loading items are not available for transfer by the
interface.
4. Restraint information is not available for transfer by the interface.
5. Material #1 (low carbon steel) is assumed by the interface.
Error Code Statements

1. The item code for this entity indicates that it is a custom bend. The interface makes the
transfer assuming it is a long radius elbow. The correction to the proper radius must take
place in CAESAR II.
2. The item code for this entity indicates that it is a mitered bend. The interface makes the
transfer assuming it is a long radius elbow. The correction to the proper radius and number
of cuts must take place in CAESAR II.
3. The item code for this entity indicates that it is some type of OLET fitting. Because there is
only a single reference to this entity in the CADPIPE neutral file, this segment is not
contiguous with the rest of the model in CAESAR II. The interface attempts to connect the
OLET as it sees fit. The final geometry should be checked.
4. The item code for this entity is unknown to the current version of the interface. The entity is
set to a 2 node, zero length rigid element. You must modify the CAESAR II data to correct
this anomaly.
5. The segment being processed referenced an ENTITY that was not defined in the ENTITY
Information section of the .UDE file. This indicates some type of error during the generation
of the neutral file. Regenerate the neutral file before using the interface again.
CADPIPE LOG File Discussion

The log file is useful in identifying problems that may have been encountered by the interface
during the data transfer. The log file is divided into the following sections:
Introduction
Lists general notes about the interface and defines the error code. Typically, this is a
one-page summary.
Section 1
Lists the entity information as read from the CADPIPE connectivity file. Each entity is
grouped into one of four possible element types, node numbers are assigned, and the
coordinate system is rotated to conform to the standard pipe stress coordinate system
(Y vertical).
Section 2
Details the interpretation and model building process.
Section 3
Lists the final transformed data which the interface system wrote as the CAESAR II
input file.
The following is a sample log file:

External Interfaces
Section 1 - Entity Information

External Interfaces
Section 2-Segment Information

External Interfaces
Section 3-Final CAESAR II Data

*** C A E S A R I I INTERPRETED GEOMETRY DATA ***
*** C A E S A R I I INTERPRETED PROPERTY DATA *** Part 1
*** C A E S A R I I INTERPRETED PROPERTY DATA *** Part 2
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Data transferred to CAESAR II array structures.
The CAESAR II job file name is: NRGTST._A
Starting generation of CAESAR II input file for:
13 Elements
4 Bends
0 Rigids
0 Restraints
Conversion of data to CAESAR II completed.

External Interfaces
Checking the CADPIPE/CAESAR II Data Transfer

It is important to verify the resulting CAESAR II input file. Begin by reviewing the log file to see if
any errors or warnings were generated.
The log file is a standard ASCII text file that can be output to a printer or viewed with
a text editor, such Notepad.
Next, enter the input mode of CAESAR II and plot the model. The CAESAR II plot for the
CADPIPE data transfer example is shown in the following figure.
If the resulting CAESAR II geometry is inconsistent with the CADPIPE drawing, use the log file
to identify the problem:
1. Identify the problem area and locate the relevant elements in Section 3 of the log file.
2. Find the appropriate segment in Section 2 of the log file and verify that it contains the same
entities as shown in the CADPIPE connectivity file.
3. Verify that the information in Section 1 of the log file matches the interpreted data in Section
3.
Anomalies with the resulting CAESAR II geometry can usually be attributed to one of the
following causes:
An unexpected geometry condition was handed to the CAESAR II interface. The solution is
to update the interface for the current condition. Forward the .UDE file to Intergraph CAS
Support for analysis and subsequent interface modification.
An unknown item code was encountered during the data transfer, indicating that the
CADPIPE software has been updated and new item codes added. Because the interface
does not recognize the new items, it must be modified. Contact Intergraph CAS Support for
assistance.
OLET entities in the CADPIPE connectivity file do not contain a reference to the piping
element they intersect. As a result, the interface attempts to determine the associated pipe
using coordinate computation and 3D intersection calculations. Potentially, the procedure

External Interfaces
can pass over the intersection point, and the branch containing the OLET plots at the origin
of the CAESAR II model. You can correct this in the CAESAR II input by breaking the
intersected pipe and assigning the OLET node number to the break point.
Some CADPIPE connectivity files that have been submitted to Intergraph CAS for analysis
have been found to contain errors consisting of either pipe doubling back on itself or piping
elements indicated as bends where there was no change in direction. Errors such as these
can be detected by the CAESAR II error checker when it is run prior to attempting the data
transfer.
Import PCF
Processes one or more piping component (.pcf) files and then generates a CAESAR II piping
input model file from the converted data.
The goal of the conversion process is:
To create a CAESAR II model that is complete, ready to run, and contains no errors.
To provide a method for stress engineers to quickly and accurately collect data.
The .pcf file format is a standard drawing exchange format developed by Alias Ltd. A .pcf is a
flat ASCII text file containing detailed information about the piping system components extracted
from a CAD system. For more information on the format of the .pcf and its capabilities, contact
Alias. For information on editing ASCII text, see ASCII Text File Rules (on page 53).
You can use Import PCF to add files multiple times. You can also use Advanced PCF
Import (APCF) in Classic Piping Input. For more information, see Advanced PCF
Import (APCF) (on page 337).
The Intergraph Smart3D PCF and the PCF menu options in the External Interfaces menu
operate the same.
PCF Interface Custom Mapping Attributes

PCFs contain custom attributes in the form of component-attribute<n>. Intergraph Smart 3D can
generate PCFs with ISO_STRESS PCF configuration. This configuration assures that a number
of various data fields are passed in specific PCF data fields.
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 = Design pressure
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE2 = Maximum temperature
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 = Material name
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE4 = Wall thickness (reducing thickness in the case of reducing
components)
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE5 = Insulation thickness
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE6 = Insulation density
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE7 = Corrosion allowance
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE8 = Component weight
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE9 = Fluid density

External Interfaces
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10 = Hydro test pressure

The units associated with the values of these attributes are defined by including a descriptive
unit label after the value. For example, the pressure attribute, COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1, can
be specified as COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 15.3 barg. If the unit label chosen (barg) is not
one of the labels recognized by CAESAR II as defined through Tools > Create/Review Units
on the CAESAR II Main menu, then you must include that label in the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT
file in the CAESAR II System folder.
The only PCF SUPPORT attribute that is not ignored is the SUPPORT-DIRECTION
attribute. It must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or SOUTH.
One note on the Material Number setting is that the selected material is applied to a piping
element as the default only if the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 for that element is not
specified or recognized.
You can achieve the best results by preparing customized mapping files before beginning the
conversion process.
You may use default mapping files if the values fit our model. There are a number of mapping
files that define various values. Locate these files in the CAESAR II System folder.
Topics
PCF Unit Mapping ......................................................................... 1220
PCF Material Mapping ................................................................... 1221
PCF Restraint Mapping ................................................................. 1222
PCF Stress Intensification Factor Mapping ................................... 1232
The PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file maps the PCF Units name to the conversion factor used to
convert it to the CAESAR II internal units (English).
This file defines three columns:
CAESAR II Unit - Displays the internal unit used by the software
PCF Unit - Displays the user-supplied unit label
Conversion from CAESAR II -> PCF - Displays the conversion factor used to convert the
user-supplied unit to a CAESAR II internal unit
Comments can be added at the end of each line separated from the last column value by
spaces and preceded by the "*" character.
All PCF component attributes can be specified inside the PCF with their associated units. Any
unit specified by the PCF component attributes which is not a standard internal CAESAR II unit
as defined by the Tools > Create/Review Units dialog box on the CAESAR II Main menu needs
to be mapped inside the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file.
CAESAR II divides the user-supplied value by this constant to calculate the value for
the attribute that is displayed by the software according to the units specified in the configuration
options (except that temperature from C° to F° will also add the 32 °).

External Interfaces
Locate this file in the CAESAR II System folder.

1. Open the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
An example of the CAESAR II default file is shown below.
2. Modify any of the units definitions or add another unit definition as needed.
The PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file maps PCF material names to a corresponding CAESAR II

material number. Note that the first line is currently reserved to the CAESAR II version number.
The match in this file must be an exact match. If no match is found, then the software searches
the CAESAR II material database to find the "best match" (where the "best match" tries to do an
intelligent match, adjusting for dashes, spaces, "GR", "SA" versus "A", and so forth) for the
material name.
PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 is used by the software to set the material attribute for each
component. If the COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 value is not defined or recognized, the software
applies the default material as specified by the Material Number value in the dialog box.
Any material specified by the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 which is not a standard
CAESAR II material as defined in the Tools > Materials dialog under the
menu must be mapped inside the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file.
This file is located in the CAESAR II System folder.

1. Open the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file in any text viewer, such as Notepad.

External Interfaces
The CAESAR II default file looks like this.
2. Modify any of the materials definitions.

3. Save and close the file.
The PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II restraint types corresponding to PCF
support/restraint names.
CAESAR II uses the SUPPORT mapping component to apply supports at the specified
coordinates. If the software is unable to match a SUPPORT with a <SUPPORT_NAME>
keyword in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file, only the SUPPORT-DIRECTION attribute is
interpreted by the software. The SUPPORT-DIRECTION attribute must have a value of UP,
DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or SOUTH.
Support configurations can vary from project-to-project. In order to fine-tune the configuration
CAESAR II uses with an imported model for a given SUPPORT component, you need to map an
attribute to the <SUPPORT_NAME> keyword in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file.
The following example displays a typical SUPPORT component. The attribute definition (VG100)
for the NAME attribute is highlighted and should be used to define CAESAR II support mapping.
Remember that, as your support configuration changes, you can customize this mapping file to
ensure proper import into the software.

External Interfaces
Locate the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file in the CAESAR II system folder.

This file defines the CAESAR II function corresponding to PCF support/restraint names.
1. Open the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
2. Modify any of the attribute customization options or restraint definitions.
In the Keyword Mapping Section, define an attribute from your PCF file to associate with the
following CAESAR II keywords:
<SUPPORT_NAME>
<SUPPORT_TAG>
<SUPPORT_GUID>
The CAESAR II keywords located within "<>" are used in the PCF import process. The
<SUPPORT_NAME> keyword is used by CAESAR II to map the supports. The
<SUPPORT_TAG> and <SUPPORT_GUID> keywords are support properties that are imported
into CAESAR II.
In the Support Mapping Section, define the support mapping.

In the following example file, VG100 corresponds functionally to two CAESAR II supports:
+Vertical support (weight support)
Guide, each with friction coefficients equal to 0.3
This file supports a wide range of support functions, plus the key words MU= (for friction) and
GAP= (to define gaps in the restraint).

External Interfaces
The syntax for each support type is:
<Support Name>
CAESAR II attempts to match the <Support Name> with the attribute definition from your
PCF mapping file. Any attribute definition in the PCF file that contains the <Support Name>
is considered a match (it does not have to be an exact match). For example, if the <Support
Name> is VG1, an attribute definition such as VG100 would be considered a match.
For optimal results, list the <Support Names> in the order from longest name to
shortest name. Otherwise, if you have both VG1 and VG100 as <Support Names>, the
software reads VG1 as a match before VG100 is processed.
<N>
Specifies the number of CAESAR II restraints to be placed in the corresponding Restraint
auxiliary panel in the Piping Input. CAESAR II allows up to six restraints on any element.
<Restraint Function>
Specifies the purpose/type of restraint (GUI, LIM, VHGR, and so forth.), Global Axes (VERT,
NS, EW, and so forth), or Local Axes (a, b, c, and so forth):
ANC, GUI, LIM, VHGR, CHGR
Creates a CAESAR II Anchor, Guide, Axial Restraint, Variable Hanger, or Constant
Hanger, respectively. The variable and constant attributes create to-be-designed
hangers, which may end up as either variable or constant hangers.
VERT, EW, NS
Indicates a translational restraint that corresponds to the compass points of the global
axes (Y, X, Z respectively for the Y-up setting, and Z, X, Y respectively for the Z-up
setting). See the figure below. Create one-way restraints by prefixing the attribute with
"+" or "-".
A, B, C
Indicates a translational restraint that corresponds to the local axes of the support/pipe
installation. The A corresponds to the centerline of the pipe, B corresponds to the

External Interfaces
"direction" attributed to the support, and C corresponds to the cross-product of the A

and B axes. As with the global restraints, one-way restraints may be created by
prefixing with + or -. See the figure below.
<MU=>
Optional keyword followed by a value for adding a friction coefficient to the restraint. (This
<GAP=>
Optional keyword followed by a value and set of units for adding a gap to the restraint (This
The software also processes equipment nozzles designated by the
END-CONNECTION-EQUIPMENT keyword as imposed thermal displacements in all degrees of
freedom, all with values of 0.0. This creates an initial behavior of an anchor, but allows you to
easily impose actual thermal displacements when known.
The examples below illustrate typical restraint configurations, along with suggested mapping
entries.

External Interfaces
Variable Spring Hanger
These represent variable spring hangers, and are mapped onto a single CAESAR II support (=
VHGR). This is interpreted as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.
Constant Effort Spring Hanger

This represents a constant effort spring hanger, and thus is mapped onto a single CAESAR II
support (= CHGR). This is treated as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.

External Interfaces
Note that it is identical to the VHGR shown in the figure above.
These hanger rod assemblies only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward
movement. In CAESAR II, they are typically modeled as +Y (or +Z, depending on how the
vertical axis is set).

External Interfaces
These sliding supports only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward movement. They
are represented as a single +VERT support. However, because they slide against a base, most
stress analysts prefer to add a friction coefficient (MU=x.xx).
YRIGID 1
VERT MU=0.3
or
YRIGID 1
B MU=0.3
These restraints resist load/movement in both directions (so the "+" of the previous two supports
is eliminated). If the restraint is always installed vertically, then use the first definition (VERT). If
the restraint is installed in any direction (for example, vertically or horizontally), use the second
definition B, indicating that it acts along the installed support direction. This assumes that the
installed direction of the restraint is always defined as the direction from the main steel towards
the pipe. Because sliding is involved, a friction coefficient is included as well.
UGUIDE 1
GUI MU=0.3
or
UGUIDE 1
C MU=0.3

External Interfaces
If this restraint is always installed vertically on horizontal lines (as shown in the figure above),
then the support function can always be modeled as a Guide (with sliding friction). If the restraint
may be installed in any direction at all (with restraint direction corresponding to the direction of
the attachment point toward the pipe), then use the second definition (C) as it represents the
direction lateral to the pipe and the restraint.
TEESUPPORT 2
+VERT MU=0.3
GUI MU=0.3
+VERTical
GUIde
Because sliding is involved in both functions, friction coefficients are provided for both.
VERTLATERAL 2
VERT MU=0.3
GUI MU=0.3
or
VERTLATERAL 2
B MU=0.3
C MU=0.3
up/down restraint
side-to-side restraint

External Interfaces
If it is always installed vertically, then it is defined as a VERTical and a GUIde. If it is possible

that the restraint may be rotated about the pipe to be installed in any direction, then use the
second definition, which represents restraint along the direction of the support as well as lateral
to the support and pipe.
VERTAXIAL 2
+VERT MU=0.3
LIM MU=0.3
or
VERTAXIAL 2
+VERT MU=0.3
A MU=0.3
+VERT support
An axial restraint. The axial restraint can be defined equally as LIM or A (as A corresponds
to restraint along the direction of the pipe centerline).
SWAYSTRUT 1
B

External Interfaces
These represent sway struts, which may be installed in any direction, and provide restraint along
the line of action of the sway strut. Assuming that the restraint direction corresponds to the
direction of the sway strut, then the best way to define these restraints is B (restraint along the
support direction).
ANCHOR 1
ANC
These restraints all restrict movement of the pipe in all six degrees-of-freedom, so they can be
defined as Anchors ("ANC").
PENETRATION 4
+C GAP=aMM
-C GAP=bMM

External Interfaces
-VERT GAP=cMM
+VERT GAP=dMM
In the example above, the pipe (and the local A-axis) is running into the page. With B up, +C is
to the right.
Some of these can get quite complex, especially if restraints have different gaps in different
directions. It may require trial and error to determine exactly how the +/- restraint directions
correspond to the support direction passed in the PCF. In some cases, you may want to model
the restraint behavior in CAESAR II rather than in the mapping file.
The PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II SIF data to be applied at the intersection of
tees and olets. The file also provides support for some SIF keywords.
Stress Intensification Factors (SIF) are not assigned a separate PCF
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE or defined in any other way inside PCFs. In order to tune Stress
Intensification Factor settings of imported PCF components, CAESAR II provides the
PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT mapping file.
The file defines five columns:
SKEYS - PCF components use SKEYS to indicate how their subtype is used within the
general component group.
CAESAR II SIF TYPE - Should be set to the SIF type number used by CAESAR II as shown
in the CAESAR II SIF TYPE figure below.
PAD=X.X UNITS - (optional) Should be set to the SIF pad thickness, including the
applicable unit (for example, PAD=10 MM)
Ii=X.XX - (optional) Should be set to the in-plane SIF of the component. This is a multiplier,
and therefore unit-less (for example, Ii=1.23)

External Interfaces
Io=X.XX - (optional) Should be set to the out-plane SIF of the component. This is
Applying the above example values to set the TERF SKEY to the associated reinforced type
requires the following mapping entry to be specified inside the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file:
Each PCF component defines an SKEY. For an example, see the SUPPORT component
identifier listed in the figure in PCF Restraint Mapping (on page 345) (SKEY 01HG). In this case,
these are typically four-character words indicating tee type (CROSS, OLET) and end type. The
PCF menu command matches the SKEYS to the entries in this mapping file. If an SKEY is not
found in this file, you should add it.
Locate this file in the CAESAR II system folder.

This step is strongly recommended in order to take advantage of the capabilities of the
PCF menu command.

External Interfaces
1. Open the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
2. Modify any of the SIF definitions.

How to Use the PCF Interface

1. Click Tools > External Interfaces > PCF or Tools > External Interfaces > Intergraph
Smart3D PCF from the Main menu.
The Intergraph Smart3D PCF and the PCF options are identical.

External Interfaces
The PCF Interface dialog box displays.
2. Click Add PCF Files to Conversion List on the toolbar.
A PCF must have a file extension of .pcf.

You can add one or multiple files to be converted.
You can remove PCF(s) from the list by clicking Remove PCF Files from the
Conversion List .
The selected file(s) displays in the PCF Files section of the dialog box.
The default corresponding CAESAR II input file that will be built from the conversion process
displays in the CAESAR II Files section of the dialog box. You can change the path by
clicking the "..." ellipsis button and selecting another path.
3. Change any of the options listed under Conversion Options, as needed.
Condense Rigids (on page 359)
Condense Tees (on page 359)
Condense Elbows (on page 359)
Use Pipe Materials Only (on page 359)
Model Rotation (on page 1187)

External Interfaces
Combine PCF Files (on page 360)

Diameter Limit (on page 360)
Length for Nodal Increment (on page 360)
Material Number (on page 362)
Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness (on page 362)
4. Click Convert selected PCF files into CAESAR II to initiate the conversion process.
During the conversion process, status messages display in the Message Area, which is
located in the lower right of the PCF Interface dialog box.
These messages are also written to a LOG file with the name XXXX.LOG, where XXXX
represents the name (less the extension) of the combined CAESAR II file. The log file is
placed in the selected CAESAR II output file folder.
5. View your new CAESAR II input model.

External Interfaces
For example, this CAESAR II model was created from the sample file 1001-P-Input.PCF:
Elements are ordered and nodes are numbered in a logical manner.

The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_UNITS_ MAP_TXT file.
Materials
Diameter and Wall Thickness
Corrosion Allowance and Fluid Density
Operating Conditions (Temperature and Pressures) also are translated.
The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file.
Restraints
The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file.
Tees convert with the correct SIFs in this case a Welding Tee and a Weldolet.
Besides supports/restraints, boundary conditions such as equipment connections are also
transferred. (In this example, at all three nozzle connections are set). You can easily change
these to thermal displacements.
Weights of in-line components, insulation thickness and density, all material properties, and
Allowable Stress information transfer correctly.
Line numbers are assigned according to the name of the PCF file.
In this example, the output displays the applicable CAESAR II warnings, which are informational
only.
Phantom components (PCF items marked as CONTINUATION or STATUS DOTTED or
MATERIAL LIST EXCLUDE) are ignored during the conversion process.

External Interfaces
Tee components are modeled using the thickness of the matching pipe.
Node Numbering preferences (start node and increment) are based on the Node
Numbering Increment set in the active CAESAR II Configuration file.
Select one or more .pcf files for conversion. You can also select a text file (.txt) that contains
a list of .pcf files.
You can use Import PCF to add files multiple times. You can also use Advanced PCF Import
(APCF) in Classic Piping Input. For more information, see Advanced PCF Import (APCF)
(on page 337).
Remove selected PCF(s) from the Conversion List pane.
Initiates the conversion process to convert a PCF(s) to a standard CAESAR II piping input
file.
Instructs the software to combine rigids that connect to each other into a single element.
This indicates whether these items should be condensed/merged into adjacent elements. For
example, a valve with adjacent gaskets and flanges would be combined into a single rigid
element.
If activated, then elements are condensed/merged unless there is a valid reason not to (change
of cross section, change of operating conditions, restraint at the location, and so forth).
When set to TRUE, this directive instructs the software NOT to treat tees as three elements but
instead condense them to a single node. The SIF is applied at the tee node. The use of the
three elements allows pipe properties of the tee to differ from the attached piping.

External Interfaces
Controls whether the software treats elbows as two designated elements. When set to TRUE,
this directive instructs the software NOT to treat elbows as two designated elements. Rather, it
is condensed into its adjacent elements for each direction in which the elbow travels.
Instructs the software to apply pipe materials only as defined by the PCF
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 identifiers.
Activating this option replaces the material of various components (elbows, valves, flanges,
reducers, tees, and so forth) with the appropriate piping material, where possible, leading to a
much more homogenous CAESAR II model. Matching components to their corresponding piping
material is done by assembling a matrix of Pipe Spec/diameter combinations, based the
available data transmitted in the PCF. Where an exact match is available, the material
substitution is made. Where piping materials are available for the Pipe Spec but not the
diameter, a match is made to the closest diameter. Where no piping material is available for the
Pipe Spec, the component material is retained. For example, A106 Grade B would be applied
but A234 Grade WPB would be ignored.
If you choose to condense Rigids, Tees, or Elbows, set Use Pipe Materials Only to
TRUE.
The rotation of the +X-axis of the CAESAR II model should be rotated about the vertical axis
away from the PCF's East compass point. The default setting is zero, which imposes no rotation.
Select +90 to rotate the model a positive 90-degrees. Select -90 to rotate the model a negative
90-degrees.
Z can also be vertical based on special execution setting.
Alternatively, you can rotate the model after importing it to CAESAR II. Use the Rotate
command on the Block Operations toolbar.
Converts and combines PCFs in the dialog box into a single CAESAR II model. You are
prompted for the name of the combined CAESAR II file.
When you merge multiple PCFs into a single CAESAR II model using Combine PCF
Files, line numbers are assigned based on the originating PCF name.

External Interfaces
Use this to exclude the processing of small pipes, such as vents and drains, by specifying the
size (nominal diameter) below which pipes will be ignored. Enter a diameter limit of -1.000 to
include all pipe sizes that you want to import into CAESAR II.
Increases node increments for pipe lengths greater than the specified value. This option allows
you to set the nodal increment for imported PCF files based on pipe length, which means you
can specify a larger buffer of node numbers for longer pipe lengths. This feature is helpful when
creating intermediate nodes and elements to place supports.
Enter a value to activate this option. The software divides the length of each piping element by
the value entered in Length for Nodal Increment (The answer is rounded to the next whole
number). The software multiplies that quotient by the value in the Increment field for the
specified PCF file. The result is the node increment for that element.
For example, if you do not enter a value in Length for Nodal Increment the software numbers
all the nodes according to the value in the Increment column.

External Interfaces
If you enter a value in Length for Nodal Increment, the software performs the procedure listed
above to determine the nodal increment for each element. In the following example, if you enter
15 in Length for Nodal Increment and a piping element is 7.875 feet (94.5 inches), the
software divides 94.5 by 15 and gets 6.3. Because the software rounds the quotient to the next
whole number, 6.3 is rounded to 7. So, if the value in the Increment column is 10, the software
multiplies 10 by 7, which results in a nodal increment of 70, as shown below.
Select the CAESAR II material to be assigned to components which do not have the material
attribute explicitly set otherwise.
The default is low carbon steel (material number 1).
Select the default schedule of the pipe to be used in case the wall thickness of the pipe cannot
be determined from the PCF.
Data Export to ODBC Compliant Databases

CAESAR II permits the export of the analysis results to ODBC-compliant databases. ODBC is a
programming interface that enables applications to access data in database management
systems that use Structured Query Language (SQL) as a data access standard. CAESAR II
uses two drivers supplied by Microsoft to communicate with the Access database or Excel
spreadsheet. These drivers are installed by default when either of the two products is set up on
a system.

External Interfaces
DSN Setup
To use the CAESAR II data export facility, you need to set up a Data Source Name (DSN) on
the system. DSNs contain information regarding where the database resides on the computer
and how to communicate with it (for example, what driver to use). CAESAR II has capabilities to
export data to either an Access database or an Excel spreadsheet, though you only need to set
up a DSN for an Access database to allow use of this feature. The name of a DSN is fixed
(read-only) by ICAS.
The CAESAR II installation program is designed to set up DSNs automatically. However, in the
event that the DSNs are not set up, follow the procedure below.
1. From the Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel.

2. Double-click ODBC Data Sources, and click User DSN.
3. Click Add.
The system displays a dialog box similar to the figure below.
Follow steps 4 through 7 for Microsoft Access DSN Setup ONLY.

4. Select the Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb, *.accdb), and click Finish.

External Interfaces
The system displays a dialog box similar to the one below. You are prompted to select your
database.
The data source name must be the C2_OUT_ACCESS. The description is an

optional field, and can hold any description information.
5. Enter the Data Source Name and the Description. Click Select to select the CAESAR II
template database.
CAESAR II is supplied with a template database that contains the structure to
hold data exported from the software. This file is named caesarII.mdb and is present in the
system directory of your CAESAR II installation directory.
6. Select the file, and click OK.

External Interfaces
The system returns you to the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box.
7. Click OK.
The C2_OUT_ACCESS has been added to list of available user DSNs.
You have now successfully completed the Access DSN setup.

This above process needs to be performed only once per computer.
Controlling the Data Export

The CAESAR II data export is controlled using the Setup/Configuration module. By default,
data export is disabled. You must run Configure/Setup to enable ODBC data export.
1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup.

The CAESAR II Configuration Editor window displays.
2. Click Database Definitions.

External Interfaces
3. Set Enable Data Export to ODBC Compliant Databases to True.

4. On ODBC Database File Name, click Browse and then type the name of your database.
CAESAR II copies the template database to the specified directory and names the database
as specified.
5. The Append re-runs to existing data configuration setting is optional. If set as False (the
default setting), re-runs of the same job overwrite any existing data for the same job in the
database/spreadsheet. If you set this option to True, then re-runs add or append data from
the new runs to the database/spreadsheet.
Click Save and Exit to save changes to the configuration.
As in previous versions of CAESAR II, the configuration file applies to all CAESAR II
jobs present in that directory. Similarly, the external database/spreadsheet specified in one
configuration file applies to all jobs present in that directory.

SECTION 16
CAESAR II Operational (Job) Data

During the input/analysis/output phases of operation, CAESAR II creates a number of
job-specific data files. Some of these data files are used solely by CAESAR II, while others
contain either input or output data. This section defines the files that you will most likely
encounter, their purpose, and whether they are important for archiving purposes. In most cases,
the job files listed below are only exposed, or visible, on the machine when a job is active. When
a job is not active, all of its files are compressed into either a .C2 archive (for piping) or a .C2S
archive (for structural).
In the following list, an asterisk (*) after the file extension indicates that it should be saved to
archive input data. A double asterisk (**) indicates the file should be saved to archive output
data.
Not every file listed may be present for a given job. The presence of a file is dependent upon
what analysis has been run.
._A * User-defined spreadsheet input data.
._J * Load case data.
.C2DB * Contains additional user-defined input data.
._7 * User-defined dynamic input data.
.STR * User-defined structural input data.
.SOI * User-defined soil property data.
._B - Nodal boundary condition file created by the piping error checker and used by the
analysis modules.

._C Element properties file created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.
._E Element connectivity file created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.
._N Nodal coordinate file created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.
._R Job control information created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.
.BND Bend control information created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.
._G Structural geometry file used with piping preprocessor.
._1 Scratch file.
._2 Scratch file.
._5 Scratch file with intermediate hanger data.
._6 Scratch file.
.HAR Harmonic components for animation.
.FRQ Harmonic solution frequency and phase data.
.XYT Animation output data file from time history analysis.
._M ** Intermediate output file that contains data generated by the piping error checker and
load case setup modules.
._P ** Static output data file.
._Q ** Actual harmonic displacement data.
._S ** Dynamic output data file.
._T ** Time history output data file.
.VAL Intermediate eigenvalue output file.
.VEC Intermediate eigenvector output file.
.OTL ** Input/Output QA sequencing data file.

.WRN Model warning messages from the error checker.
.XML Plot control data.
.NTXT Text input data for user verification.
.MIM Intermediate calculation file generated by the software's FEA translator.
.OUT User-generated text output data file.
.CFG Configuration options file. Applies to all jobs in the same directory as the .CFG file.
.FIL User-generated custom units file.

APPENDIX A
Update History
The lists on the following pages detail the functional updates made to CAESAR II by version
number. These lists correspond to the major releases of the software and do not reflect items
such as minor releases (such as Service Packs or Hot Fixes); re-publication of the User Guide,
or additional new modules released to aid customers between updates.
In This Appendix
CAESAR II Initial Capabilities (12/84) ........................................... 1250
CAESAR II Version 1.1S Features (2/86) ...................................... 1250
CAESAR II Version 2.0A Features (10/86) .................................... 1251
CAESAR II Version 2.1C Features (6/87) ..................................... 1252
CAESAR II Version 2.2B Features (9/88) ...................................... 1252
CAESAR II Version 3.0 Features (4/90) ........................................ 1253
CAESAR II Version 3.1 Features (11/90) ...................................... 1254
CAESAR II Version 3.16 Features (12/91) .................................... 1256
CAESAR II Version 3.20 Features (10/93) .................................... 1259
CAESAR II Version 3.21 Changes and Enhancements (7/94)...... 1260
CAESAR II Version 3.22 Changes & Enhancements (4/95) ......... 1262
CAESAR II Version 3.23 Changes (3/96) ...................................... 1263
CAESAR II Version 3.24 Changes & Enhancements (3/97) ......... 1264
CAESAR II Version 4.50 Changes and Enhancements (11/03).... 1269
CAESAR II Version 5.10 Changes and Enhancements ( 9/07)..... 1270

Update History
CAESAR II Initial Capabilities (12/84)

Input data spreadsheets featuring data duplication to the next pipe element
Vessel local Flexibility Calculations
Multiple load case spring hanger design
Algebraic load case combinations
Nonlinear restraints with gaps, friction, 2-node, and skewed options
-bars
Built-in database of pipe materials and properties
B31 code compliance reports
Static and dynamic capabilities, including animated mode shape plots
Extensive input/output graphics
Pressure effects on bends, including consideration of circular or slightly oval cross-sections
CAESAR II Version 1.1S Features (2/86)

Help Windows
AutoCAD Interface
HP Plotter Interface
Batch Execution Opinion
Accounting System
File Handler
Spooled Input Listings
Liberal Code Stress Allowable

Cursor Pad and Function Key Implementation in Input Spreadsheets
Plot Menu Single Keystroke Access
Stainless Steel Pipe Schedules
Direct Input of Specific Gravity
Bourdon Pressure Options
Hanger Control Spreadsheet Updates

Update History
CAESAR II Version 2.0A Features (10/86)

AISC Structural Steel Database with over 800 different structural steel cross-sections.
Keyword/Batch Structural Steel Preprocessor - Provides the same quality CAESAR II
graphics with structural steel volume plots, interactive error checking, extensive interactive
help, and is fully compatible with CAESAR II piping models.
High Resolution Graphics - EGA support for monochrome and 640x350, 16 color mode.
Tecmar Graphics Master support for monochrome and 640x200, 16 color mode. Hercules
support for monochrome 720x348 mode.
Graphics - Added Pan and Range options. Improved zooming, stresses and displaced
shapes in color, hidden lines removed from volume plots, and pipe and structure plotted
together.
3D-Graph - Added an option to plot stresses for all nodes for all load cases on the same
plot.
Simultaneous Use Of Two Screens - Supports one monochrome screen and another for
graphics.
WRC 107 Stress Calculations.
Units - Use English and SI standard options, or define your own set of unit constants and
labels. Output may be generated in multiple unit sets, and input files may be converted from
one unit set to another.
Wind Load Calculations - According to ANSI A58.1-1982, or you can input your own velocity
or pressure versus elevation tables.
- Piping input from one file may be included in another with a
given node and rotational offset.
Quick Natural Frequency Range Calculations - Computes the number of natural frequencies
in any user given range in the amount of time needed to do a single static solution.
High Resolution Hardcopy Printer Plots.
Setup file options - You can set the following CAESAR II execution parameters:
Graphics hardware configurations.
Colors for over 27 different plotted items.
B3.1 reduced intersection options.
Plot/Geometry connection through CNodes options.
Corroded cross section stress calculation options.
Minimum and Maximum allowed bend angle options.
Occasional load factors.
Loop closure tolerance.

Update History
CAESAR II Version 2.1C Features (6/87)

Uniform and Independent support shock spectrum capability.
Force Spectrum Dynamic Analysis of Fluid Waterhammer.
Force Spectrum Dynamic Analysis of Relief Loads.
Force Spectrum Dynamic Analysis of Wind Gust Loads.
Fluid Mechanics Analysis of Gas or Liquid open vent relief system. Includes vent stack
sizing, thrust, and pressure rise computations.
NRC Dynamics Benchmarks for: NUREG/CR-1677, BNL-NUREG-51267, Vol. I, 1980; and
NUREG/CR-1677, BNL-NUREG-51267, Vol. II, 1985.
Dynamic Friction modeling based on static load case results.
Eleven pre-defined shock spectra including all Reg. Guide 1.60 spectra and the El Centro
North-South component spectra.
Improved Harmonic Analysis including the effect of phased loading relationships. This
analysis allows the modeling of eccentrically loaded rotating equipment.
Improved dynamic output processor, includes user-defined headings and comments.
Animated static and dynamic solutions with structural members and hidden line volume
plots.
Improved EIGENSOLVER many times faster than earlier algorithms, with automatic
out-of-core solution mode.
Updated Static Analysis Load Case Processor.
New Friction Algorithm with interactive control during solution of nonlinear restraints.
Improved Output file handling of various solution methods.
Ability to abort any function at any time during a session using the <ESC> key.
New keydisk memory protection scheme.
Hardware/Software QA capability for analysis verification.
CAESAR II Version 2.2B Features (9/88)

Large Rotation Supports - Allows large rotation supports to be handled properly, by
computing the support forces in all three global directions. Rod and Chain hanger supports
can now be modeled.
Nonlinear Out-of-Core Solver - This new solver increases the range of problems CAESAR II
can solve by allowing nonlinear solutions to be performed on the hard disk. This capability is
necessary when a job is too large to be solved in memory.
Friction Report - Friction is a non-conservative force, and CAESAR II treats it as such. The
restraint reports now show restraint loads due to friction for each load case.
New External Interface Hooks - A new interface module allows smooth interface to data
conversion modules between CAESAR II and other programs such as AutoCAD. A new

Update History
AutoCAD DXF interface is provided, and two thirds of the part vendors have completed
interfaces from their AutoCAD ISO packages to CAESAR II.
ASCII Editor - Due to an overwhelming need and subsequent lack of easy to use system
editors, a stand alone ASCII editor is provided. This editor easily modifies files such as
AUTOEXE.BAT, CONFIG.SYS, and SETUP.CII.
2D XY Engineering Plotting Program - Stand alone plotting software that allows you to plot
engineering data such as CAESAR II spectrum files. This software plots any real data
arranged in columns.
Valve & Flange Database - The addition of a valve and flange database enables you to
define or select the specific rigid element to insert into the piping system. The database is
constructed to allow you to add or modify entries.
Dynamic Restart - The most time consuming part of a dynamic analysis is the Eigensolution.
This feature allows a job to be restarted and use a previous Eigensolution.
WRC Updates - The latest edition (1979) of the WRC107 bulletin has been incorporated.
Input Title Page - An optional title page has been added to the input module. You can now
define a title page of up to 19 lines which is stored with the input.
Expansion Joint Rating Program - This stand alone software allows you to compute the
compression of each expansion joint corrugation and the compression of the joint as a
acceptance.
CAESAR II Version 3.0 Features (4/90)

VGA Graphics support on input.
Interactive (immediate) rotation of the input graphics image.
Updated graphics user interface.
Optional WRC 329 implementation of new stress intensification factors for intersections.
Optional ASME Class 1 flexibility calculations for reduced intersections.
Optional WRC 329 fixed to B31.1 and B31.3 piping code equations.
Piping codes - B31.4, B31.8, ASME Sect III Class NC and ND, CAN Z184 and Z183,
Swedish Power Methods 1 and 2, BS806.
Updated SIF library to include welded joints and Bonney Forge fittings.
New scrolling help screens.
Editing list features, including rotate and duplicate of total or partial models
Updated WRC 107 table limit check.
AISC member check.
Wind load calculations on structural members.
Additional stress equation control using the SETUP file.
Numerical sensitivity checks in both the in-core and out-of-core solvers.
Automatic expansion joint modeler using manufacturers database.

Update History
Additional restraint types including bottomed-out spring hangers and bi-linear soil springs.
Instantaneous center-of-rotation calculation.

Element Highlight.
Element Range.
API 610 7th Edition Addition.

SI/User Units.
HEI Additions.
Simplified input.
WRC 297 stress calculations.
Screen data presentation changes.

Direct control jumping between executables.
Increased number of allowed software designed hangers.
Additional spring hanger design options.
Database updates include additional spring hanger tables.
Soil Modeler for Buried Pipe.

The installation software uses the file compression routines from PKWARE. This significantly
reduces the number of diskettes distributed and the time needed to install the CAESAR II
package.

Update History
Flange Leakage and Stress Calculations

Elastic models of the annular plate, gasket and bolts predict the relative degrees of gasket
deformation leading to a leaking joint. Stress calculations in accordance with ASME Sect. VIII
Div. 1 are also provided for comparison.
WRC 297 Local Stress Calculations

This bulletin supplements WRC 107, addition to computing stresses in the nozzle as well as the
vessel.
Stress Intensification Factor Scratchpad

The new module shows the effects of the various code options available in CAESAR II, and
illustrates the relationship between the various interpretations. WRC 329 SIF options are
included. SIFs for stanchions on elbows are also computed.
Miscellaneous
A pen plotting program (PENPLT) plots up to 2500 element models (LARGE Includes) on
the screen or on an HPGL compatible hardware device.
The static output processor has been updated to support VGA graphics and to provide
screen dumps to HP Laser Jet Series II compatible printers.
Updated SYSCHK program now checks that SHARE is loaded when necessary. Missing
coprocessor is also immediately reported.
Updated PLTS now allow you to save labels, scaling information, and file names during
plotting sessions.
Updated ROT (rotating equipment program) provides additional code interpretations for the
HEI bulletin.
The BIGPRT (large job printing program) has been expanded to handle even larger jobs and
to provide a local element report.
As of Version 3.15, CAESAR II uses ESL devices to authorize access to the software. The
ESLs are more stable than the previously used keydisk and provide additional client
information to the software. Additional information on the ESLs can be found in the update
pages for the User Manual.
The first access of Version 3.15 will cause the ESL activation code to prompt for
the keydisks (both unlimited and limited). Both keydisks must be available to properly
activate the ESL.
A printer setup program (PRSET) is provided to adjust the number of lines per logical page
for dot matrix printers, useful for page lengths longer than 11 inches.

Update History

The internal file maintenance utility has been completely rewritten. The new file handler
provides the same capabilities as the previous file handler but with faster response times.
Additionally, the new file handler is compatible with disk partitions larger than 32 Mbytes,
and manipulates the data files created by Versions 3.xx of CAESAR II.
A configuration program has been added to CAESAR II to allow you to modify the
SETUP.CII file from spreadsheets. The configuration program also includes the standard
COADE help interface to facilitate setting the directives.
The structural programs (C2S and AISC) have been revised to access either the 1977 AISC
database or the 1989 AISC database. Additionally, the AISC program has been updated to
perform the unity checks (code compliance) using the 1989 code which includes the
methodology for checking single angles.
The equipment module (ROT) has been enhanced to handle vertical in-line pumps for
API-610, 7th Edition.
The Stoomwezen 1989 (Dutch) piping code has been added.
Three additional spring hanger tables have been added (Basic Engineering, Capitol Pipe
Supports, Piping Services Company).
The editors found in the structural preprocessor, the ASCII file editor, and the piping
preprocessor title page have been modified to allow the insertion and deletion of single
characters. Appropriate screen instructions are provided where necessary.
An automatic loop closure command has been added to the piping preprocessor.
A jacketed pipe example has been included in the documentation. The input file for this
example is included in the EXAMPLES set on the distribution diskettes.
Updated moduli of elasticity for default CAESAR II materials based on 1990 code revisions.

Support of DOS environments now available in CAESAR II. This allows you to run the
software from various subdirectories on the hard disk other than the installation directory.
Facilities have been provided to enable you to modify the default colors used throughout
CAESAR II. Four predefined sets of text colors are provided as well as the ability to modify
whichever set is currently selected.
The Utilities menu has been expanded to include all of the secondary CAESAR II
processors.
Help has been added for the Input graphics, the Pen Plot graphics, and WRC 107.
A new online error processor has been incorporated. This enables the software to provide
an explanation of the cause of many fatal error messages, as opposed to the display of only
the error number.
The file handler has been modified to allow the manual entry of a new job name.
The input piping preprocessor now includes a material number (21) for User Defined
Materials.

Update History
The Static and Dynamic Output menus have been modified to allow you to return directly to
the input, or in the case of the dynamics output, to invoke the animation module directly.
Graphics for flange selection and output have been added to the ASME Flange modules.
Input and output file sequencing are checked to aid in Quality Assurance, insuring that the
current input file produced the current output file. Input Echo reports are also possible from
the static output processor.
The Canadian codes Z183 and Z184 have been revised according to the 1990/1992
publications.
The Italian spring hanger manufacturer INOFLEX has been added.
The Database option of the configuration program now allows you to set the Valve and
Flange database. Additionally a database excluding flanges (NOFLANGE) is included.
The Material Database used for the Flange Stress/Leakage module has been updated. The
new database includes all changes from the ASME Sect VIII, Division 1, A91 Addenda, the
materials are listed in code order, and the number of materials has increased from 450 to
1100.
The structural modules C2S and AISC have been updated to work with the German
structural steel library.
A new neutral file interface is provided which allows a two way transfer of data between the
CAESAR II input file and an ASCII text file.
CAESAR II. This interface enables dynamic pipe forces from a time domain analysis to be
used in the generation of a force spectrum.
The static stress summary report has been modified so that the maximum code stress
percent is reported, not the maximum code stress.
A miscellaneous option has been added to the configuration program. This option allows
various options, including the specification of the ANSI, JIS, or DIN piping specifications.
Other options available from the Miscellaneous menu are:
Intro/Exit Screens (On/Off) - This option can be used to disable the display of the initial entry
screen and the final exit screen.
Yes/No Prompts (On/Off) - This option can be used to disable the yes/no/are_you_sure
prompts.
Output Reports by Load Case (Yes/No) - By default, CAESAR II produces static output
reports by load case. This option can be used to generate the same reports by subject.

Update History
Displacement Report Node Sort (Yes/No) - This option can be used to disable the nodal
sorting of the static displacement report.
The file handler has been modified to enable directory and disk drive selection and logging.
You also have control of the initial display of the file names. This allows you to set the sort
order as well as the single/multi-column display presentation.
A file verification routine has been added to check the installation of CAESAR II. This aids in
detecting software corruption due to hard disk defects and viruses.
A 32 bit version of the dynamic summation module is provided for large dynamic analysis.
This module requires at least a 386 processor.
The animation module has been modified to provide hard copy output of the mode shapes.

Batch Stream Processor - A new processor has been included which allows multiple jobs
(up to 12) to be run in series, without intervention. The jobs can be static analysis, dynamic
analysis, or both.
Expansion Joint Database - The Pathway Bellows expansion joint database has been
updated. The new database includes two additional pressure classes and diameters out to
144 inches.
A new expansion joint database from RM Engineered Products has been added for this
release.
Input Echo - The input echo processor has been modified so that the input echo precedes
the output data. Additionally, the intermediate data generated by the error checker now
appears in this listing.
B31G - The B31G criteria for the remaining strength of corroded pipelines has been
incorporated. This module includes the original B31G criteria as well as several of the
modified methods discussed in the Battelle project.
Output Processor - A new report has been added to the output processor which generates a
Restraint Summary report. This summary details all the loads for all selected load cases for
each restraint in the model.
Thermal Bowing - The effects of thermal bowing on horizontal pipes can be analyzed. By
specifying the thermal gradient between the bottom and the top of the pipe, CAESAR II
computes the loads induced and include them with the thermal loads.
32 Bit Modules - All of the dynamic modules have been moved from the 16 bit mode to the
32 bit mode. Additionally, the animation program now supports EGA and VGA display
modes.
Title Page Template - A user-configurable ASCII text file can now be used as a title page
template.
Interface Updates - The CAESAR II data matrix interface and the Autoplant interface have
both been updated to use the currently active units file. The ComputerVision interface has
been updated to

Update History
Expansion Joint Rating - The expansion joint rating module, ERATE, has been moved into
Refractory Lining - The computation modules of CAESAR II have been modified to accept a
negative value of insulation thickness. If a negative thickness is encountered, the software
assumes the insulation is refractory lining (inside the pipe).
Minimum Required Thickness - imum required
in the listing of intermediate data (See item 3 above).

Spring Hanger Tables - The E. Myatt & Co. spring hanger table has been added.
ESL Updates - All of the code used to access the ESLs has been updated to allow access to
the 50 and 66 Mhz CPUs.
Missing Mass - The dynamics modules can consider missing mass effects in the spectrum
solutions.
Seismic Anchor Movements - The dynamics modules allows the specification of seismic
anchor movements for independent support motion analysis.
RCC-M - The French piping code RCC-M, Section C has been incorporated.
Languages - The input and dynamic output supports English, French, and Spanish language
headings. Language dependent files can be activated with the appropriate command line
switch on the INSTALL directive. For example, INSTALL /S installs any Spanish specific
files.
PCX Files - All of the graphics modules have been modified to allow the images to be saved
to disk files in PCX format. This enables these images to be brought into word processing
and desktop publishing systems.

A completely new documentation set accompanies this release. This documentation
consists of: a User Guide, an Applications Guide, and a Technical Reference Guide.
The static in-core and out-of-core solvers have been converted to run in 32 bit protect mode
utilizing extended memory. Solution times for large jobs have been cut by an order of
magnitude.
The Static Output processor has been converted to run in 32 bit protect mode utilizing
extended memory.
Both the Static and Dynamic Output processors now have the capability to generate ASCII
disk files on any drive or directory (using the COADE file manager) on the computer.
Additionally, a table of contents summarizing the output is generated for printer and disk
devices.
The Dynamic Output processor now includes titles and page numbers (similar to statics),
and provides input echo (both system and dynamic) abilities.
Modal time history analysis has been added. This includes output report review and
animated response review.
Standard spectrum analysis now includes modal components for displacements.
Additionally displacement information is now available for static-dynamic combinations.

Update History
The Included Mass Report has been clarified and modified to include the active mass in
each of the global directions. The percent of the force included/added is now based on a
vector sum rather than an absolute sum.
The ZPA used in the missing force correction can now be controlled via the configuration
file. You can specify that the ZPA be based on the last extracted mode or the last spectrum
value.
The static load case array space has been increased by a factor of 5, allowing more
flexibility in static load case setup.
API 650 nozzle flexibilities, according to the ninth edition, July 1993.
Checks for allowable loads on Fired Heater Tubes according to API-560 have been added.
As an option, you can consider the effects of pressure stiffening on straight pipes.
Three additional spring hanger tables: Sinopec (China), BHEL (India), and Flexider (Italy).
The Australian structural steel shape database has been added.
The ASME material database has been updated to reflect the 1992 Code addendum.
The printer testing routines have been completely rewritten. Additionally, output can be
directed to any LPT port.
The ability to configure the printer, either dot matrix or laser jet. This is implemented through
a text file containing the printer formatting codes which you can modify.
Password protection for input data files, to prevent modification of completed projects.
All of the screens in the piping preprocessor (except for the main spreadsheet) are now
supported in Spanish and French.
Input/Output file time/date sequencing checks have been added to the dynamics modules.
The Break command in the piping input processor has been modified to accept input in
feet-inch units instead of only feet. This should allow compound entries in any units system.
CAESAR II Version 3.21 Changes and Enhancements

(7/94)
Most of the CAESAR II executable modules have been converted from Microsoft 16 bit
FORTRAN to WATCOM 32 bit FORTRAN. This has reduced the low DOS RAM requirements of
the software from 577k to 475k.
The modules converted to 32 bit operation for Version 3.21 are summarized below:
Static Stress Computation Module (1)
Piping, Buried & Structural Steel Input Modules (3)
Piping Error Checker (1)
Load Case & Dynamic Input Module (1)
All CAD interfaces (8)
Neutral File interfaces (2)

Update History
The software now supports an ESL from a new vendor. This provides CAESAR II with full
networking abilities. The software first checks for a local ESL (from either vendor), then for a
network ESL.
Toward the support for network operations, the data files which are not job specific are now
assumed to be located in a SYSTEM subdirectory underneath the CAESAR II installation
directory. These data files include: the input listing formatting files (*.INP), the accounting data
files, the printer formatting file, the file handler template file, and the various header files.
The common factor among all of these files is that they are specific to a company installation,
not a particular data directory. Up until Version 3.21, these data files were manipulated by the
software (or sometimes directly by you) in the installation directory. However, many network
impossible. These files are placed in a SYSTEM subdirectory to which you should be given
complete access.
CAESAR II Version 3.21 is capable of running on a local machine (with either
enable the same version to be run under these various configurations.

Added additional spring hanger manufacturer has been added, Carpenter & Paterson, UK.
The UBC (Uniform Building Code) earthquake spectra have been added.
The B31.5 piping code has been added.
The piping code addenda have been reviewed and any necessary changes made to the
software. The addenda include revisions for: ASCE #7, B31.1, B31.8, ASME NC, and ASME
ND.
The SIF scratch-pad from the Miscellaneous processor (Option C of the Main Menu) has
been incorporated into the piping preprocessor. This processor includes all of the supported
piping codes (not just B31.1 and B31.3 as before) and all of the fittings. Additionally, any
changes made to the scratch-pad data can optionally be transferred directly to the main
CAESAR II data spreadsheets.
Additional changes to the input piping preprocessor include the following:
problem size is now dependent on the amount of free extended memory - the old limit of 400
elements is now upwards of 8,000 elements
graphics menus automatically turned off for hard copies
optional node number display for supports, anchors, hangers, and nozzles
function key map shown on main spreadsheet
auxiliary input spreadsheets support help
The accounting system has been completely rewritten. This provides a more streamlined
interface. Additionally, accounting statistics are now recorded from the stress computation
modules (previous versions only recorded the actual matrix decomposition times).
The API-617 and NEMA-SM23 reports have been overhauled so that the code compliance
when using non-English units systems is consistent.
The new Flange Rigidity factor from ASME Section VIII has been added.
A new loader (C2.EXE) has replaced the original one (C2.COM). This new loader performs
initial startup checks, with diagnostic reporting if necessary, and enables error processing
from the Main Menu.

Update History
The configuration program has been modified to track changes. If you attempt to [Esc] out
after making changes, you are warned that the changes will not be saved.
A graphics viewer has been added to the file manager. This enables rapid model plotting
directly from the file manager of the Main Menu.
Additional directives are available to disable the generation of the Table of Contents page,
and disable the display of the spreadsheet function key mapping.
CAESAR II Version 3.22 Changes & Enhancements

(4/95)
The Harmonic solver has been updated to provide damping. Harmonic analysis can now
include or exclude damping as you deem necessary.
The following codes have been reviewed (and any necessary changes made) for
compliance to the latest editions: B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, B31.5, B31.8, NC, ND, and BS-806.
The following additional piping codes have been added: RCCM-D, CODETI, and TBK 5-6.
Center of Gravity calculations have been added with results displayed in the error checker.
A Bill of Materials report has been added.
Yield criterion stresses can be computed as either Von Mises or as 3D Maximum Shear
Stress intensity.
Hoop Stress can be computed based on Outer Diameter, Inner Diameter, Mean Diameter,
The spring hanger design spreadsheet has been modified to default to a 25% load variation.
In addition, the actual hanger load variation now appears in the hanger output reports.
A new command (WIND) has been added to the structural steel preprocessor. This allows
selective wind loading on an element by element basis.
A new key-combination Alt-D is available in the input processor to compute the distance
between two nodes.
User-specified coordinates for up to 30 nodes are saved in the input file.
The input title page has been expanded from 19 to 60 lines.
Automatic node numbering abilities have been added to the spreadsheets of the main piping
input module
Expansion Joint databases from IWK (Germany) are provided.
Expansion Joint database from Senior Flexonics is provided.
MISC converted to 32 bit operations. This module provides the SIF, Flange, WRC297,
B31G, and expansion joint rating computations.
ROT converted to 32 bit operations. This module provides the equipment calculations for
NEMA, API, and HEI. General revisions made for more consistent input screens and help
messages.
A new report option (in static output) is available to review the miscellaneous computations
made by the error checker. This report includes: SIFs and flexibility factors, pipe properties,
nozzle flexibility data, wind data, CG data, and the bill of materials report.

Update History
The Intergraph Interface has been improved. The interface now transfers the
temperature/pressure pairs. Additionally, if a material mapping file is present, material data
can be set correctly by CAESAR II.
The CADPIPE Interface has been updated in accordance with CADPIPE Version 4.0.
The Restraint Summary in the static output processor has been modified to include the
translational displacements of the restrained nodes.
The output processors (static and dynamic) have been modified to allow you to change the
name of the disk output file if necessary. Additionally, modifications have been made so that
only a single output device can be enabled.
All language files have been translated into German.
German files.
A new control F8 at the output menu level allows switching jobs without returning to the
Main menu.
CAESAR II Version 3.23 Changes (3/96)

The following items have been completed for the 3.23 release:
Mouse support has been added to most modules.
The German piping code, FBDR, has been added.
Major improvements to FRP (fiber reinforced plastic) stress calculations. This includes the
BS 7159 code and guidelines set forth by FRP manufacturers.
A bi-directional link to CADWorx/Plant (COADE
The WRC107 module has been redesigned to incorporate multiple load cases and perform
the ASME Division 2 Stress Intensity Summation, all in one step.
The South African structural steel tables are being added.
Witzenmann (Germany).
Two new commands have been added to the structural preprocessor: UNIT, and GLOAD.
The CADPIPE interface has been updated to comply with the new release (Version 4.1) of
CADPIPE.
Additional modifications have been made to the Intergraph interface.
The low DOS RAM requirement has been reduced to 420 Kbytes.
The equipment module has been updated to reflect the 1995 edition of API-617.
The following U.S. piping codes have been updated according to recent editions: B31.3
(1995)

Update History
CAESAR II Version 3.24 Changes & Enhancements

(3/97)
Multiple (3) displacement/force/uniform load vectors have been added. These load cases,
called D1/D2/D3 and F1/F2/F3, may be toggled on the input plot by continuing to press F3
and F5 (displacements cycle through D1, D2, D3, and then off). The naming of these load
cases has also required the renaming of the CAESAR II load combination terms D1, F1,
S1, etc. must now be called DS1, FR1, and ST1. All hanger loads and cold spring forces
(from materials 18 and 19) are still combined into load case F1 for consistency with previous
versions of CAESAR II.
A material database for piping properties and allowable stresses for many of the piping
codes supported by CAESAR II has been implemented. This is invoked by pressing [ALT M]
on the main CAESAR II input spreadsheet (also at the list option and on the WRC 297
nozzle flexibility spreadsheet). After bringing up the list of materials, a material name can be
typed in; matching records are then displayed for selection. Allowable stresses are updated
automatically whenever temperatures, materials, and/or piping codes change.
Database management is provided from the Utilities option of the main menu. You can edit
COADE provided materials or add your own. Material parameters can be provided for code
0 (represents generic values for any non-specified code) or for specific codes. It is
recommended, due to future implementation plans, that metals be assigned identification
numbers between 100 and 699. FRP materials receive numbers between 700 and 999.
Selection of FRP materials from the material database does not currently activate the
orthotropic material model in CAESAR II. This must still be done through the use of material
20 (see item 6 concerning this below).
Eight-character job names are now supported. Input files are identified by extension ._A,
output files by extension ._P, ._S, and so on. Existing files are automatically recognized and
converted to their new format. (See related item 16 below.)
Modifications have been made to allow multiple users working from the same network data
directory through the environment variable COADE_USER. This environment variable
should be set to a unique 3 character combination, such as the initials, for each user
working in the common directory. Implementation can be done by adding to your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file a line such as: SET COADE_USER=TVL
Valve and Flange database now incorporates data files from
CADWorx/Plant. This change provides four advantages:
Component weights and lengths are more accurate, as well as traceable to specific
catalogs, standards, and so on.
Weights and lengths are provided for more components than were previously available
in the CRANE or GENERIC databases.
Because CADWorx/Plant data files are text files, you can easily edit or add
components.
If you also have CADWorx/Plant on your computer, the two programs share the same
data files and project specs, enhancing the performance of the bi-directional interface.
Gaskets are included for flanged items, so a better fit is provided between the
CADWorx/Plant and CAESAR II models.

Update History
You can now set default values for FRP (material 20) parameters through the
configuration/setup. These default parameters can be read automatically from
manufacturers data files by toggling through the list of available files, and then pressing
[ALT-U] (for Update) on the selected vendor file. Vendor files are recognized by their .FRP
extensions; because these are text files, you can create them easily yourself, or vendors
may distribute them to their customers.
The UKOOA (United Kingdom Offshore Operators Association) piping code for FRP piping
has been added.
The Z183 and Z184 piping codes have been replaced with the Z662 code, which has been
expanded to consider calculation of stresses in restrained piping.
The ASCE #7 wind code has been updated to the 1995 edition.
The API-610 code in the equipment module has been updated to the 8th edition.
ASME Section VIII Division 2 stress indices and WRC-107 SIF (kn, kb) values have been
incorporated into the WRC-107 module.
The Relief Load Synthesis dynamics module now supports metric (or custom) units.
A number of configuration file default values have been revised in order to improve
calculational results or software performance:
Changed From To
BEND_LENGTH_ATTACHMENT= 5.0 1.0
BEND_AXIAL_SHAPE = NO YES
FRICT_STIFF = 50000 1.0E6
FRICT_NORM_FORCE_VAR = 25 15
FRICT_ANGLE_VAR = 30 15
VALVE_&_FLANGE = GENERIC CADWORX
Four new directives added to the configuration file.

SYSTEM_DIRECTORY_NAME User defined, defaults to SYSTEM. You vsn now maintain
multiple system directories for different projects)
UNITS_FILE_NAME User-selected from list. Current units are now set through the
configuration/setup, not through the units option of the main menu.
BS_7159_PRESSURE_STIFFENING Design strain or Actual Pressure.
FRP_PROPERTY_DATA_FILE User-selected from list.
The configuration file can also be password protected in the Installation Directory. This
prevents modification of all Computation and Stress Control directives. Subsequent use of
the configuration module prevents modification of these directives, unless the password is
known. Colors, printer settings, and so on can still be changed without the password.
CAESAR II has been modified to accept an optional job name (including full drive and path
data) as an argument. The software switches to the appropriate drive and directory, opens
the specified job, and goes into input bypassing the Main Menu. This allows the definition of

Update History
._A files as CAESAR II input files under Windows 95 and subsequent double clicking on the
file name in a Windows/95 explorer window to start the input processor on the picked job
file. This also allows CAESAR II to be spawned from other programs, right into a job.
Modifications to CAD interfaces: Intergraph and CADPIPE.
All necessary routines have been checked and modified where appropriate to address the
Year 2000 issue.
A Korean structural steel shape library has been added.
A new spring hanger table has been added (SARAFTHI).
PD-5500 nozzle flexibilities have been incorporated to complement the WRC-297 and API
650 nozzle connections.

(1/98)
The CAESAR II Version 4.00 release is a major program rewrite making it compatible with
Windows 95/NT (version 4.0) operating systems. Minimal functionality enhancements were
included in order to make CAESAR II input files interchangeable between Version 4.00 and
CAESAR II Version 3.24, the last DOS-based version. Specific new features include:
Simultaneous review of graphics and spreadsheet.
Addition of rendering and wireframe graphics in plot mode.
The ability to turn off subsequent occurrences of an error type in the piping error checker.
The ability to extract loads directly from a piping output file for inclusion in the WRC 107 and
rotating equipment modules.
Addition of bend mid-
mid-point of the bend without knowing the included angle.
Ability to review 132-column reports on screen.

(1/99)
9 temperatures, 9 pressures, 9 displacement sets, and 9 force/moment sets.
Finalization of TD/12 piping code.
Fatigue capabilities including cumulative damage.
Increase in number of load cases to 99.
Reactivation of the input LIST facilities.
Printing capabilities for graphical renderings.
Saving graphics images to BMP files.
Online User and Quick Reference Guide in PDF format.
Update of piping codes (CODETI, NC, ND, B31.1, B31.3).

Update History
Addition of results filters to output reports.

Update of the Technical Reference Manual to reflect Windows version of CAESAR II.
Variability of mill tolerance on an element-by-element basis.

(2/00)
New Input Graphics - utilizes a true 3D library, enabling graphic element selection.
New local coordinate element input and specification.
Completely revised material database, including Code updates.
Optional static output in ODBC compliant database format.
Hydrodynamic loading for offshore applications. This includes the Airy, Stokes 5th, and
Stream Function wave theories, as well as Linear and Power Law current profiles.
Wind analysis expanded to handle up to 4 wind load cases.
New piping codes: B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.8 Chapter VIII, and DNV (ASD).
A wave scratchpad - see the recommended theory graphically, or plot the particle data for
the specified wave.
Updated piping codes: B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, ASME NC, and ASME ND.
Automatic Dynamic DLF Plotting.
Witzenmann expansion joint databases.
As a result of the merger between Senior Flexonics and Pathway Bellows, a new expansion
joint database replaces the two previous individual databases.
A new spring hanger vendor (Myricks) is provided.
PCF Interface.

(3/01)
New Static Load Case Builder / Editor. Allows multiplication factors on load components
plus additional combination methods (SRSS, Algebraic, ABS, Min, Max, Signed Min, Signed
Max, and Scalar).
Z-Up - Build or review models with Z as the vertical axis instead of Y. Switch between Y and
Z up automatically.
New undo/redo ability in the piping input module.
Piping input can be sent to ODBC database.
A new data export wizard is provided to selectively target input or output data for ODBC
export.
All modules support optional output directly to MS-Word.

Update History
Updated piping codes: B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, ASME NC, and ASME ND.
User control over the auto-save feature implemented.
Improvements to the 3D graphics (job specific configuration, additional data display).
Added graphics to the WRC 107 Module to show loads and orientation.
Added a new Code Compliance report to the static output processor.
Spring hanger design expanded from 3 to 9 operating cases.

(5/02)
Revised piping codes: B31.3, B31.4, B31.5, B31.8, ASME NC, ASME ND.
Added the B31.11 piping code.
Added an alpha-numeric node label option to the piping input module.
Expanded Static Load case options: (1) added load components H, CS, HP, and WW
(hanger loads, cold spring, hydro pressure, and weight filled with water, respectively), (2)
added HYDRO stress type, (3) added option to set snubber and hanger status on a load
case basis, (4) provided ability to scale friction factor on a load case basis.
Added automatic generation of a hydrotest load case (WW+HP, HYD stress type, and
spring hangers locked), triggered by the presence of a non-zero HP.
Updated the 3D input graphics as well as partial implementation in the static output
processor, including the Element Viewer.
Updated the spring hanger design algorithm to provide the option to iterate the Operating for
Hanger Travel load case to include the stiffness of the selected hanger.
Added new configuration options for the following:
Ambient temperature.
Default friction coefficient. If this value is nonzero, it automatically gets applied to new
translational restraints.
Liberal stress allowable.
Stress stiffening.
Bourdon settings.
How to handle B16.9 welding tee and sweepolet SIFs in B31.3.
Added two new spring manufacturers' tables Pipe Supports USA and Quality Pipe Supports.
Added the ability to define the flexibility factor on bends.
Piping and structural files now support long file names. These files may be located in any
directory path. The number of included structural files has been expanded from 10 to 20.
Results of the Hanger Design Cases are now optionally viewable in the Static Output
Processor. To use this option, set status to KEEP in the Load Case Options.
Added the ability to filter static Restraint reports by CNODE status.

Update History
Added a new warning report to the static output.

Added a dirty flag to the piping input preprocessor and the configuration modules.
Attempting to exit these processors without saving changes produces a warning message.
Added the ability to detect the differences between material data in the input file and that in
the material database (including missing user-materials). This feature offers you the
opportunity to use the original data.
Reviewed/updated the minimum wall computation for all piping codes for straight pipe.
Added a field for specifying Marine Growth Density to the Wind/Wave dialog box.
Updated API-661 to 4th Edition.
Added the ability to save static load case data without running the job.

(11/03)
Revised material database for B31.1 A2001 changes.
Added Reducer element.
Improved interaction and error reporting in static load case editor.
Improved graphics changes include:
A walk-through option is available.
The static output processor can now produce colored stress plots of the piping system.
A graphical find (zoom to) option has been added.
Instant use of graphics, even before drawing is completed.
Recitable restraint/hanger symbols.
Added Spectrum wizard for the generation of earthquake and relief valve spectra.
Revised codes: B31.1, B31.4, ASME NC, ASME ND, IGE/TD/12, API-610.
Included additional FRP data files.
The static output processor remembers all user settings, such as filters, labels, and report
size.
Added dynamic help system for piping & structural input and configuration.
Added automatic acquisition of website software updates.
Combined WRC-107/297 module for local stress calculations.
Redesigned the structural steel interface for easier operation.
Implemented a new job wizard for the creation of structural steel input models.
Modified to allow multiple instances of CAESAR II to run.
Implemented Load Case Template for recommending static load cases.
Modified to allow access to the output for expired date or run limited ESL.

Update History

(11/05)
Added the following new piping codes: EN-13480, GPTC/192, Z662 Ch 11.
Revised, due to code changes, the following piping codes: B31.1, B31.3, B31.5, B31.8,
B31.11, ASME NC, ASME ND, CODETI, TBK 5-6.
Updated API-610 codes and standards.
Added Ameron Bondstrand, and Conely FRP Pipe Specification files.
Added Binder (UK) and PiHASA (Spain) Spring Hanger tables.
Added Structural Steel databases from India and Japan.
Added the capability to perform dynamic analysis optionally using a consistent mass matrix.
This obviates the need to re-mesh the model for better mass distribution.
Added the capability to perform an analysis using the hot material elastic modulus.
Enhanced the static output processor to provide you with the ability to create custom,
reusable reports.
Revised the piping input processor to provide a combined view showing both the graphics
and the spreadsheet. The new piping input processor has integrated the Piping Error
Checker, and access to the configuration module has been provided. For debugging and
problem solving, relevant sections of the spreadsheet can be torn off and placed on the
graphics pane, allowing the spreadsheet to be hidden for larger graphics display.
Additionally, sections of the model can be graphically selected and then modified.
Updated the Intergraph and PCF interfaces.
Added an Isogen export facility allowing the creation of Isogen stress isometrics.

( 9/07)
Added flange rating evaluation per B16.5 and NC-3658.
Graphics Improvements:
Improved graphics rendering speed proved by 20% to 50% depending on the job.
Added additional controls to view corrosion and densities.
Added the ability to import an Autocad (CADWorx) model directly into the piping input,
to provide visualization of supporting steel, vessels and other equipment.
Static Output Processor Improvements:
Reduced report generation times by 70% or better.
Added Presentation in tabbed window to allow viewing multiple reports, and immediate
switching between reports.

Update History
Added ability to select Individual items from the Miscellaneous Report.

Added ability to zoom reports and individually direct to an output device using a context
menu.
Added ability to import and export custom report templates.
Static Load Case Editor Enhancements
Added In-Line Flange Evaluation at the load case level.
Added the ability to alter the occasional load multiplier on a per load case basis.
Added the ability to import static load case data from different jobs.
Added the ability to copy wind and wave vectors.
Added user control over whether or not insulation should be considered in hydro test cases.
Added PD-8010 Part 1 and Part 2 piping code.
Revised the following piping codes due to code changes: B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, Z662,
EN-13480.
Added support for B31.3 Section 319.2.3(c), allowing axial stress to be included in the
Expansion Code Stress.
Revised API-661 to 6th Edition.
Revised Wind and Seismic load calculations to ASCE #7 2005.
Added a number of European materials to the material database.
Updated stainless steel pipe specification data per B36.19M.
Updated DIN pipe size specification to comply with EN-10220 (seamless) instead of
DIN-2458 (welded).
Added Chinese structural steel and expansion joint databases.
Added spring hanger data from Gradior Power, (Czech Republic).
Updated the flange material database per ASME Sect VIII Div 1, 2007 Edition.
Updated the Inoflex Spring Hanger data.

(4/09)
Added ISO-14692 Code for FRP systems.
Added a Loop Optimization Wizard to assist in expansion loop design.
Added the American LifeLines Alliance as a second soil stiffness method to the Buried Pipe
Modeler.
Added the Mexican Seismic Code to the Dynamic Input module for the automatic generation
of response spectra.
Added a static seismic wizard to assist in computing G factors for ASCE, NBC, and CFE.
Added additional wind codes (10)to the Static Load setup.

Update History
Raised the permitted number of static load cases from 99 to 999.

Modified the valve/flange insertion routine to cut back the straight pipe length if necessary.
Added a number of lists to the Piping Input Spreadsheet to assist with input specification.
These lists appear on the bend radius and insulation density fields.
Streamlined Spring Hanger Table definition through the addition of three checkboxes for
cold load design, extended range springs, and centered hot load.
Flange Symbols are now drawn on the piping elements if flange ratings have been
requested.
Revised the following piping codes have been revised due to code changes: B31.1, B31.8,
GPTC/Z380, ASME NC, ASME ND.
Moved user-writeable subdirectories from below \
Added automatic e-mail generation for technical support issues.
Improved the File Open dialog box to permit the roll-back to earlier revisions of the (piping)
input.
Added a new exportto MS Excel option for Static Output data. This is raw data only to
improve export speed.

(11/10)
Added the B31.9 piping.
Updated the following piping codes: RCCM-C, RCCM-D, ASME-NC, ASME-ND,
GPTC/Z380, Z662, B31.1, B31.3, EN-13480 (2010 Draft).
Added the ability to visually show on the Static Output menu which load cases have passed
or failed.
Added the spring hanger databases for PSS (Germany) and Seonghwa (Korea).
Added structural tubing shapes to the AISC Structural database.
Added a new restraint report showing reactions in local element coordinates.
Added additional flexibility with user material databases through user named files.
Added the ability to have user configurable nozzle limits.
Added insulation, cladding & refractory specifications
Improved the displacement import/export facility.

Improved the PCF interface.
Improved the WRC module.
Added graphics/modeling/Interfacing improvements:
Improved the Valve/Flange database option to keep 3 elements

Update History
Added the ability to automatically included API-650 nozzle displacement values in the
model.
Added the ability to plot Spectra and Time Histories in dynamics.
Added line number specification and manipulation.
Added the ability to add or reassign key strokes.
Improved the CAESAR II documentation search capabilities by adding a combined PDF
Search.

(5/12)
Enhanced and improved the Smart 3D to CAESAR II interface (PCF).
Introduced a faster, interactive, on-demand and flexible PCF interface, called Advanced
PCF (APCF) Import, into the Piping Input processor.
Enhanced the CAESAR II Data Export Wizard to support ODBC Microsoft Access format,
which facilitates round-trip results to S3D and SPR.
Added new element order commands for block operations: Invert and Change Sequence.
Added usability improvements to reduce user input and editing time, including the use of line
numbers to block select elements.
Improved many Isogen-related issues.

(10/13)
Updated piping code information for ASME B31.1, B31.3, B31.8, B31.9, and Z662 codes.
Enhanced and improved the Smart 3D to CAESAR II interface (PCF). (This is also available
in Version 5.31.)
Introduced a faster, interactive, on-demand and flexible PCF interface, called Advanced
PCF (APCF) Import, into the Piping Input processor. From the APCF Import dialog box,
you can quickly import the model from design software, such as Intergraph's SmartPlant 3D,
saving time while reducing errors. (APCF Import is also available in Version 5.31.)
Added the import of the SmartPlant 3D (S3D)/SmartPlant Review (SPR) graphic

environment (VUE file), along with filtering capabilities within CAESAR II input to provide
context to the pipe stress analyst. You can also generate this VUE file from SmartPlant
Review.

Update History
Updated the CAESAR II Data Export Wizard to support ODBC Microsoft Access format,
which facilitates round-trip results to S3D and SPR.
Added an option to store a revision number and line numbers.
Added a new Restraint Summary output report.
Included new functionality so you can send a user Load Case name, if specified.
Implemented other enhancements to simplify the process for generating the database.
Added new element order commands for block operations: invert and change sequence.
Invert _ reverses the order of one or more elements in a selected group, as well as the
node numbering.
Change Sequence _ moves (or rearranges) the sequence of one or more blocks of
elements to another location in the CAESAR II model.
Added usability improvements to reduce the input and editing time.

Enhanced line numbers with a Renumber _ operation that lets you select a group of
nodes on which to perform block operations.
Added functionality that lets you renumber when you select elements on the graphical
model.
Added functionality that lets you renumber boundary nodes after using the Renumber
operation.
Enhanced the graphical model with an option to retain the colors for line numbers
across user sessions on a per-job basis.
Included the ability to clear a window by using the SHIFT + CLICK window selection.
Added ability to edit or delete annotations on the input and output graphics.
Increased performance and functionality with enhancements.

Updated the personal Isogen module to Personal ISOGEN 2012 R1 (8.1).
Updated the CAESAR II 3D Graphics engine.
Continued standardization for development using ASME NQA-1.
Implemented Japanese localization in the following areas:

Translated the user interface (Static Analysis module) and selected documentation in
Japanese.
Added Japanese seismic code, KHK Level 1.
Added spring hanger databases for Mitsubishi, Yamashita, Sanwa Tekki, and Techno.
Updated and enhanced documentation to include more context-sensitive (F1) help and
additional task-oriented information.

Update History
Updated the CAESAR II main menu to use the Office 2010 ribbon interface.
Rewrote the methodology used by the Piping Error checker (PIERCK.EXE) in determining
duplicated allowable stress data for the elements. (Distributed in CAESAR II 2011 R1
Version 5.30.02, 110830 build.)
Corrected the calculation of the bending stress at the From end of elements for PD 8010-2
(to use the SIF for the From end instead of the To end). (Distributed in CAESAR II 2011 R1
Version 5.30.02, 110830 build.)
Corrected the usage of the in-plane/out-of-plane SIF configuration setting for CODETI
bends. (Distributed in CAESAR II 2011 R1 Version 5.30.04, 120525 build.)
Corrected the PD 8010-2 equivalent stress calculation to consider both positive and
negative bending effects. (Distributed in CAESAR II 2011 R1 Version 5.30.04, 120525
build.)
Implemented additional changes to how the software duplicates the Wc and Sy material
values to succeeding elements.
Corrected the calculation of the NC/ND branch stress index for reduced intersections of
reinforced tees.
Corrected the calculation of the (dynamic) mass matrix for elements with refractory lining.
Added corrosion consideration in the SIF computation for the CODETI piping code.
Implemented the piping code updates for B31.9 2011 Edition.
Implemented the piping code updates for B31.8 2010 Edition, including the hoops stress
change for Chapter VIII.
Implemented the piping code updates for B31.3 2010 Edition, including the following
revisions:
Modified the calculation of longitudinal stress for Sustained loads (SUS). This previously
optional calculation was referred to as ASME Code Case 178.
Added input values for two new stress indexes (It, Ia). The software uses the index
values in the new computation of Sustained and Occasional stresses.
Added the ability to calculate the allowable stress for Sustained and Occasional cases
at the temperature of the corresponding operating case. The software defaults the value
to the minimum Sh value; however, you can select a corresponding Sh.

Update History
Revised the allowable that CAESAR II uses for Appendix P Operating range cases to
include a new reduction option based on the ratio of yield versus tensile strength
(Sy/St).
Updated the material properties in accordance with Appendix A.
Updated the SIF determination of Fillet or Socket welds.
Modified how the software determines the Sc value to use with range load cases.

(10/14)
CAESAR II 2014, Version 7.00
Updated to support the following piping code and material database updates:
ASME B31.1 code, 2012 Edition. This work included material property updates.
ASME B31.3 code, 2012 Edition. This work included a new equation for calculating
expansion stress cases with new SIF and index values. Extended the content for the
ASME B31.3 code update and B163 to 1400F.
ASME B31.8 code, 2012 Edition. Updated the code interpretation to use either of the
two combined biaxial stress equations for restrained pipe, as referred to in Paragraph
833.4, instead of using the maximum of the two. You can specify this using the Yield
Stress Criterion configuration setting in the SIFs and Stresses section of the
Configuration Editor.
ASME B31.5 code, 2013 Edition.
EN 13480 code, 2012 Edition. This work included addressing bend pressure stiffening
and changes to the longitudinal pressure stress equation, among other revisions.
ASME Section VIII, Div. 2, 2013 Edition. Added fatigue curves as per this edition.
Updated the Material database, as required for piping code updates.
Updated the flange rating for in-line flange checks per EN 1092-1:2013 and ANSI B16.5
2009.
Added support for ANSI 16.5 2009 metric flange ratings.
Addressed modeling and user interface issues, including:
Enabled quick global property changes (such as for temperature and pressure) from the
Legend dialog box in the 3D model.
Enhanced the Distance command to measure between two points in the 3D model
without requiring the input of node numbers.
Added a new Global menu in piping input, which includes the Block commands. These
commands are also accessible through the Block Operations toolbar and the right-click
context menu from the List>Elements dialog box.
Addressed graphics issues and other minor usability enhancements based on customer
feedback.

Update History
Enhanced the Structural Steel Wizard to display units for various input fields, added
more tool bar icons and enhanced input grid usability.
Improved static and dynamic analysis in the following areas:
Revised the Static Analysis (Load Case Editor) to automatically recommend
Expansion (EXP) stress range load cases for better coverage of multiple operating
conditions.
Provided an option for users to select the allowable corresponding to temperature for
that particular Occasional (OCC) load case for B31.3 jobs.
Added support for in-line flange check evaluations for MAX and ABS load case
combinations.
Added improvements to functions that work with other interfaces, including:
Added the ability to import multiple supports at the same location from the Import PCF
or Intergraph Smart 3D PCF interfaces.
Enhanc
Data Export Wizard (Export to MS Access)
Improved several areas in output/post-processing, including:
Added output filters for flanges so that you can identify the most overstressed flanges.
Updated the software to show the actual Stress Indices (I) that are used for sustained
and occasional static load cases for ASME B31.3 code.
Updated the Generate Stress Isometrics (CAESAR II Isogen module) with
I-Configure 2014 (5.0).
Updated the user documentation in the following areas:
Updated the Quick Reference Guide with dates and information for all piping code
updates made in CAESAR II 2014.
Updated the F1 help in the Static Output Processor.

(10/15)
CAESAR II 2016, Version 8.00.00
Added Support for the Latest Code Standards
ASME B31.1, 2014 Edition
ASME B31.3 2014 Edition, including:
Addressed the code standard requirement to consider sustained (and occasional)
stress in all support conditions. New static load cases, called alternate sustained or
alternate occasional cases, depend upon the support configuration of a converged
operating condition. This condition addresses systems where non-linear supports
are active in some operating conditions and inactive in others. The alternate support
condition is indicated using the new Alternate SUS/OCC check box in the Static
Analysis - Load Case Editor

Update History
Added two new load case templates (.tpl files) for use when recommending load
cases, which include support for the alternate SUS/OCC load cases
Updated materials to support the latest code edition
Moved the B31.3 Implement Appendix P configuration setting to SIFs and Stresses
> Legacy Settings as the B31.3 code standard no longer refers to Appendix P
Added appropriate warnings and notes to the error checking module and the output
reports to account for the code updates
ASME B31.8, 2014 Edition, including a small revision to the biaxial state of stress
formula (Sc), according to code Paragraph 833.4. You can find this formula in the
CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide.
ASME B31.9, 2014 Edition
Wind and Seismic Codes
National Building Code of Canada (NBC) Seismic and Wind Codes, 2010 Edition
ASCE 7 2010 Edition and IBC 2012 Edition wind code standards, including a change in
the wind load reduction factor
Equipment Codes
API 560, 4th Edition
Streamlined Load Case Editing/Creation
Redesigned the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor to improve the user's experience
and add more robust functionality when creating and revising load cases for analysis.
Includes the following improvements:
Group Edit view - select and change values on multiple load cases all at once.
Enhanced List view Easier scrolling and viewing options, as well as filtering on
columns, drag-and-drop capabilities, and easier manipulation of load cases
Updated user documentation
Expedited Access to Finite Element Analysis Tools
Added easier access to third-party tools for better modeling and evaluation from the
CAESAR II main menu, to generate more accurate SIFs and K factors. Compare
multiple file results, assess the sensitivity of your model elements, and evaluate
nozzle/branch connections with NozzlePRO.
Expanded Hanger Data
Added hanger data for the following hanger manufacturers: Hesterberg, Unison, Spring
Supports Mfg. Co., Senior, and Wookwang
Revised the listing of the manufacturer, Flexider, to its new name, CASTIM 2000
Enhanced Piping Input Usability

Update History
Improved the Classic Piping Input to display a Pressure 3 value on the interface. This
allows you to input three sets of temperature and pressure values without having to
open a separate dialog box.
New single and multiple element-level right-click graphics menus containing many
frequently-used element commands and block (group) operations
Improved Distance Measuring
Minimize mode for measuring lets you perform multiple measurements without the
Distance dialog box blocking any of the model
Measure multiple distances (using CTRL+click) and see all of your measurements at
once.
Redesigned and more user-friendly dialog box
Better snapping in the Line Drawing (single line) mode and ability to snap from piping
elements to imported DWG pipe objects
Larger default font size setting on distance measurements for ease of reading
Enhanced S3D/SPR (VUE) Model Imports
Improved rotation capabilities for imports with a more user-friendly interface
Added functionality to include zipped VUE (ZVF) or stitched VUE (SVF) files in a
CAESAR II model
Added Filter/View Capabilities on 3D Models
Filter by Line Numbers in the Static Output Processor 3D model
View only node names on the 3D model by selecting a new Names Only option in
Piping Input, C2Isogen, and the Static Output Processor modules
Upgraded User Documentation
Added edition dates and information for piping, equipment, and wind/seismic code
editions supported (Quick Reference Guide)
More white space and indentation for field property formats
Updated the software to display the .chm-based help when you press F1 in the Material
Database Editor, Accounting, Change Model Units, and Create/Review Units modules.
Previously, these modules displayed in a text-based help dialog box
Moved the help for the Stress Isometrics module into the main help file for CAESAR II

(10/16)
Disabled the Search tab in the Online Help, due to an issue when your CAESAR II installation
uses OpenGL drivers. You can change the Graphics Settings > Miscellaneous Options >
Video Driver to Direct 3D in the CAESAR II Configuration Editor. If you use Direct 3D drivers,
you can download a copy of the Help with the Search tab enabled from Smart Support.

Update History
1. Updated the software to the latest ASME B31.4 code standards, which included the ASME
B31.4 2009, B31.4 2012, and B31.4 2016 code. The update included the following changes
and improvements:
Updated materials applicable to the B31.4 code in the Material Database Editor.
Updated the Allowable Stress tab in the Piping Input module by including an Allowable
Stress Indicator option for B31.4 and B31.4 Ch XI, and Design Factor and Hoop Stress
options for B31.4 Ch IX.
Deprecated the B31.11 piping code, which is now included in the B31.4 main code
standard.
Provided options for CAESAR II to automatically determine the restrained/unrestrained
state of the pipe elements, or for the user to specify the state. The software defaults to
automatically determining the state.
2. Added the evaluation of the creep condition using EN-13480 creep code standards. The
update included the following improvements:
Expanded the Material Database Editor to support EN-13480 creep by adding material
properties for 200k hours, in addition to existing properties for 100k hours. Refer to the
Technical Discussion on evaluating creep condi
information.
Added a new Creep (CRP) stress type in the Static Analysis Load Case Editor. The
software does not include the CRP stress type when it recommends load cases.
3. Updated the software to support the June 2015 edition of Canadian Z662 and Z662 Chapter
11, the Canadian code for oil and gas pipelines.
4. Enhanced the software to support the 5th Edition of API-560, February 2016, the equipment
code for fired heaters.
1. Added an option to select a new user-defined Custom type for nozzle flexibilities, in addition
to the existing Nozzle Flex types of WRC 297, API 650, and PD 5500. The Custom nozzle
type includes user-defined nozzle stiffness values for Axial (radial force), In-Plane
Bending, Out-of-Plane Bending, and Torsional (moment). Many improvements have also
been made to the Nozzles auxiliary panel layouts to improve usability.
2. Enhanced the existing right-click context menu options for restraints from within the graphics
view. The Restraint > Insert Restraint option lets you right-click an element to break and
insert restraints in one action, or you can insert restraints at existing nodes. From the new
Insert Restraint dialog you can also define restraint options, such as distance from nodes.
3. Improved the Break at Element dialog box (accessed by selecting Model > Break or
right-clicking and selecting Element > Break Element). The software now automatically
populates the Insert Single Node option to the halfway-point node number and distance. If
there is not an available halfway-point node number, the software defaults to the next
available node number.
4. The Displacements grid displays free and fixed designations to eliminate confusion. The
Fix DOFs option applies the fixed value of 0.0 to any undefined (free) degree of freedom.

Update History
5. Enhanced the Distance dialog box for better usability. When you choose Origin and
Selected Element as your Measure Method, the Distance dialog box retains the selected
Measure Method option for the duration of your use of the Distance dialog box.
1. Updated the Static Analysis Load Case Editor by adding the ability to copy and paste
complete load cases.
2. Enhanced the editor to allow the selection of multiple load cases in the List view and retain
the selection when you switch to Group Edit view.
3. Added a new Creep (CRP) stress type in the Static Analysis Load Case Editor.
1. Node numbers display in front of piping elements when you use Options > Node Numbers
and rotate the graphics. Previously, the node numbers rotated with the elements and were
sometimes obscured by piping elements.
2. Symbols for LIM restraints (axial limit stops) display on the outside of the pipe and remain
visible when you use Options > Restraints.
3. Added a symbol for zero-length expansion joints on the model.
4. Displacements, rotations, forces, and moments display graphically as arrows (vectors) when
you select Options > Displacements or Options > Forces. You can also change the
default colors and arrow sizes in the Graphics Settings of the Configuration Editor or by
using Plot Properties.
5. Displacements on CNodes display graphically as arrows with Options > Displacements.
Added a news channel on the CAESAR II main window, where you can find out product version
information, upcoming events, product training opportunities, and future webinars.
1. Combined the individual flexible nozzle input export options into a single Flexible Nozzles
option on the Data Export Wizard to improve usability.
2. Improved integration with Smart 3D by adding a new LCASE_NAME column to files
exported to Microsoft Access through the Data Export Wizard (ODBC). When you export to
.mdb format, you can now see the Load Case Name (LCASE_NAME column) in applicable
exported files for quick identification of your load cases.
1. Updated Restraints in the Piping Input Reference section of the CAESAR II User's Guide.
Each restraint type includes a graphic example to assist identification.
2. Improved the Global Coordinates section of the CAESAR II User's Guide. The user's guide
now references local coordinates as a, b, c to reduce confusion between local and global
coordinates.
3. Added navigation information, such as the location on ribbons and menus, to command
topics to aid discovery when browsing the help.

Update History
4. Updated the Hinged Joint section of the CAESAR II Application Guide. Updated the Hinged
Joint Model graphic to include all of the necessary components to model a hinged joint.
5. Updated portions of the user documentation to the latest Intergraph PP&M standards for
formats, which included adding more white space and indentation for field property formats.
6. Converted the CAESAR II 2017 readme document to .pdf format to comply with the latest
Intergraph PP&M standards.
7. Updated the software to call the main CAESAR II Help file (C2ug.chm) when you press F1
in Equipment and Auxiliary modules. Previously, these modules displayed in a text-based
help dialog box.

Glossary
A stationary support used to restrict the movement of a pipe, sometimes caused by vibration,
expansion, or other external forces.
A 90-degree bend or elbow with a radius that is equal to one and one-half times the nominal
size of the pipe.
A 90-degree bend or elbow having a radius that is equal to the nominal size of the pipe.
A connection for the same or a smaller pipe size.
A weld made when two beveled ends are butted together end-to-end and welded.
A collection of regulations and guidelines for the design, construction, or operation of a facility or
a piping model. Code standards in CAESAR II include piping based on the region or the type of
piping, wind and seismic guidelines, and nozzle and flexibility standards.
The numeric factor of expansion or contraction of a substance, due to a change in temperature.
Intersecting north-south or east-west lines used to position foundations, equipment, supports,

buildings, models and so forth on a piping or structural model.
A dissolving of a surface material made by a chemical reaction within a pipe.
The amount of surface material allowed to be eroded by the chemical reactions within a pipe,
while still permitting the pipe to be in service.
A fitting used to join two lengths of screwed pipe together. Couplings are also used as branch
connections on pipes or a nozzle connections on equipment.
The circumference measured around the interior wall of a pipe.

Glossary
A name given to represent a particular size of pipe.
The circumference measured around the outer wall of a pipe.
A generic term describing components that are used to make turns, branches, or reductions in a
run of pipe.
A ring-shaped piece that is welded or screwed on to the end of a pipe, which permits the pipe to
attach to other piping components.
A material that is put between two meeting surfaces to prevent leaks.
A valve designed for the on or off control of a substance flowing through a pipe.
A pipe support used on horizontal piping that suspends the piping using a stationary object from
above.
An exterior covering on pipe or equipment that maintains a constant temperature.
A connecting point of the piping system to a vessel or equipment. Nozzles are used in locations
where fluids are introduced or removed from a vessel or a piece of equipment.
A drawing depicting the location of nozzles around the perimeter of vessels or a piping system.
A nozzle orientation plan shows angular measurements from 0 degrees.
Any of several fittings used to make branch connections for piping. O-let connections can
include weldolets (for welds), sockolet (for socket-welds), sweepolet (for contoured connections
with low SIFs) and latrolets (for lateral connections).
A structural framework that consists of a series of vertical columns that connect with horizontal
components. Pipe racks are generally used to support pipes traveling in a process facility or
plant.
A descriptive name given to a pipe with reference to its size in diameter.

Glossary
A structural component that carries the weight of a piping system configuration.
A mechanical devise used to move fluids under pressure from one location to another.
A pipe fitting with one end larger than the other that reduces the diameter of a run of pipe.
A plate contoured to the shape of a the element it lines that is positioned around a nozzle to
provide additional strength in the connection area.
A manufactured pipe made without any welding connections.
A flange with a low hub where a pipe can be inserted prior to welding.
A pipe hanger that uses a coil spring to absorb pipe movement.
A three-way fitting used for branch connections on a run of pipe. Tee types include welded and
extruded (or drawn).
A tee fitting designed with a smoothly contoured intersection that does not include welds. This
tee design reduces fabrication stress, withstands greater external loading, and eliminates the
need for external reinforcement.
An increase in pipe dimension due to the application of heat.
A device used to control the flow of a fluid through a pipe.
A flange with a tapered neck that you can butt-weld to another beveled-ended piping
component.

Glossary

Index
%
% of Iterations Per Shift Before
AISC
1 al(0
1, 2, ... 9 for Partial Factor for Temperature
al(1
al(2
3
A
Allowabl
Allowable Stress, Design <or> Allowable
Acti
ALPHA -
Alternate CAESAR II Distributed Data Path

Add custom annotations for elemental
Add custom annotations Always Use System Colors

824
Analysis Type
Added Mass Coefficient, Ca (Harmonic/Spectrum/Modes/Range/Time
Analyze custom piping load cases on
Analyze load cases imported from a model

Index
Att
Animation of Dynamic Results

819
Animation of Dynamic Results Time
Animation of Dynamic Results Auxiliary Element Data
Animation of Static Results -Displacements Available Expansion Joint End-
API 610 (Centri
70
957
Axial Strain
Appendix P -
237
Applicable Wave Theory Determin

1001 B
Applications Using Global and Local
B31.1 Appendix II (Safety Valve) Force
ASCE 7 Wind and Seismic Load B31.1/B31.3 Verified Welding and Contour
601
B31.3 Use SL Formulation Para 320 (2010)
ASME NC/ND 3673.2(b)-

ASME NC-3658.3 Calculation Method for
B16.5 Flanged Joints with High Strength
Bolting B31
ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle

Comprehensive Analysis (pre-
1015
ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle
Simplified Analysis pre-

Index
Base Hoop Stress On (ID/OD/Mean/Lamé)

Branch Pipe Wall
28
Break at Element <node> - <node> Dialog
BS-6399-
Build
butt-
C
C-
CADPIPE LOG File Discussion
916
915
1250
1106
CAESAR II Neut
957, 960
957, 960
Bounding Volume - Depth 1250

Bounding Volume -
Bounding Volume - 1251
1252
1252
1253
850

Index
1254
Centerline Direction Cosine X & Centerline
1254
1256
1256
1257
1258
CAESAR II Version 3.20 Fe Checking the CADPIPE/CAESAR II Data
1259
CAESAR II Version 3.21 Changes and
CAESAR II Version 3.22 Changes &
1263
CAESAR II Version 3.24 Changes &
CAESAR II Version 4.20 Changes and Close Loo

Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History

Code-
CAESAR II Version 5.10 Changes and Code-
CAESAR II Version 5.31 Changes and Color -

Color -
CAESAR II Version 6.10 Changes and Color -
Color -
CAESAR II Version 7.00 Changes and Color - 80

Index
Copy Environmental Loading Data Dialog

400
Component Amplification Factor [Rp] (NBC)
Component Amplification Factor ap (ASCE)
891
305
294
306 828
71, 1177, 1183 828, 835

Create a model using the Structural Steel
Compressor -
Compressor Nozzle - 445
Compute Pressure Stress per WRC-368
830
Configure isometric
826
Cut
Control Param
Convert selected files into CAESAR II

Data Export to ODBC Compliant Databases

Index
Database Status (Consistency Check) Direction Cosine X, Direction Cosine Y, &
Directional Combination Method
772
Disabl
60
Displacement Reports So
Define a cross- 95
Definition
Displaying Displacements, Forces, Uniform
Distance From Largest Inlet/Outlet Nozzle,
958 Distance From Largest Inlet/Outlet Nozzle,

Description of Alternate Simplified ASME
Section VIII Division 2 Elastic Nozzle Distance From Largest Inlet/Outlet Nozzle,
Analysis pre-
Does the Vent Pipe have an Umbrella

Det Norske Veritas (DNV)
Double Angle Spac
dP - YIELD DISP FACTOR, LAT, MAX
dQd - YIELD DISP FACTOR, DOWN,
dQu - YIELD DISP FACTOR, UP, MAX
dQu - YIELD DISP FACTOR, UPWARD,
Di Drag Coeffic

Index
Element/Node/Stress/Restraint Load
dT -
EN-
EN-13480/CODETI Use In-Plane/Out-Plane
Enable Data Export to ODBC-Compliant
Enter the Name of the Input File to Convert
Enter the Name of the Output File

E
1139
701
1121
844
Errors and Warnings Dia

E Estimated Number of Significant Figures in
Example Output - Gas Relief Load

Elastic Analyses of Shells near Nozzles
Example Output - Liquid Relief Load
Elastic Modulus Example Problem
Multiple Load - Case Spring - Hanger
510, 512, 714, 723, 726, 732
Exclude F2 fro
306 72

Index
Fixed Forma
915
915
F
F
F-
885 Flange Leakage and Stress Calculati

1255
Factor of Safety (
915
915
1033 Flange NC-
Flange Rati
Ferritic Material
Flange Yield Strength, SYC, SY1-
Filter Out Elements Whose Diameter is

Index
Full Length in Circumferential Direction
Force Orthogonalization After Convergence Full Length in Circumferential Direction,

774 C11
Full Length in Circumferential Direction,
Forces - Full Length in Longitudinal Direction
Full Length of Pad in Longitudinal Direction
Free End Connections -

Free Restrai
G
Frequency Cut-
1183
GAMMA -
GAMMA PRIME - EFFECTIVE SOIL
Gasket Seati
492, 494, 495, 497, 503
General Comments on Configuration
Settings' Effect on Piping Code
FRP Alpha (xE-
FRP Coef. of Thermal Expansion (x Generate S
FRP
334
890
Full Length in Circumferential Direction

Index
hl(2
872
Home Tab
959 Horizontal Response Magnification Factor
1167
How to Use the CAESAR II / PIPENET
Grow To
1182
H
H-
554 Hydrodynamic (Wave and Current) Loading
Hanger Hardware Weig

ID Manifold Pipi
648
791
IGE\TD\12
IGE\TD\
Heat Exchanger -
Heat Exchanger Nozzle -
Heater - Implementation of Macro-Level Analysis for
Heater Tube -
Import a piping model from a PCF using
5
Import Custom Report
407
hl(1 407

Index
Impor
Inpu
In-And Out-Of-Plane Fixity Coefficients Ky
Include Additiona
109
Insul/Cladding Unit Wt
879
2
Include Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement)
1201
Include Spring Stiffness in Hanger OPE 1196
Intergraph Data After TEE/Cross
Including the Spring Hanger Stiffness in the 1198
Int
845
1186
4, 497, 503
Is the Material Normalized? <or> Obtain
In-
In- ISO-
In-
In-
In- J
In-
Input
Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters in
008
K
Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF
139 K-
Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF

Index
Load Cases Tab (Static Analysis - Load
KO - COEFFICIENT OF PRESSURE AT
Korean 1990 Datab

580
Load Cases with Thermal Displacements
L
Load Cycles
503
Left- Local Membe

Leg
960
960
960
Location from Pump Center, DZ
Long-
Li M
Macro-
781
Load Case Sets - Mapped MCESRA at Short Periods (Ss)
780
Load Cases -

Index
Mini-
Minimum Temperature Curve (A-
770 Mi
Mini-
Material Al
93
Missing Mass Combination Method
Modal Combination Method
Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calcu Model an underground piping system
696
1169, 1171, 1177, 1183
Modes Unity Normali

1023
Measure between the first (origin) node and
Measurement Incremen
mx my
Micro-
- Natural Freq
-

Index
Navigating the Classic Piping Input Dialog Norwegian (TBK 5-
nozzle
209
Ne
New Job Liberal Expansion Stress
253
New Job Z- Nozzle/Attachment Tab
No RFT/WLT in Redu
Number of Flanges (Laminate Type for
No. of Hanger - Design Operating Load
No. of Iterations Per Shift (0 - Pgm
No. to Converge Before Shift Allowed (0 - O

OCC Load Fact
Node
213, 474, 723, 738
o-
956, 959 On Element
Nominal Material Density
Nominal Thickness for this P Number <or>

Index
354, 1232
Optimal
PD
PD 5500
Peq/NC-
Performing Single-
418
O
Orifice Flow Conditions/Exit Pipe End Flow
Conditions/Manifold Pipe End Flow
Out-of-
Out-of-
Out-of-Plane Bending Mome
Out- 1102
Out-
Pipe Wall Thicknes

Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations
OVERBURDEN COMPACTION
Post-Selection Load Case (Optional)
979
506, 509, 511
434 Pre-Selection Load Case 1 Setting the
Pre-Selection Load Case 2 Setting

342, 1219 Hanger Deflection through the Operating

Index
Pressure (Design Strain for BS 7159 &
Pressure Curve Name External Pressure

Curve Name <or> External Pressure
Ratio Shear Modulus
RCC-
R
Pricing Factors Ta
Print Forces on Rigids and Expansion
590
Recommended Load Cases for Hanger
Reduced Intersecti
Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Comb.
Pseudo-
1001
Pump - Re-
Pump Nozzle - Reinforcing
Q
Relief Load Synthesis for Gases Greater
Relief Loads and Water Hammer/Slug Flow

R
1238

Index
663 RX (cosx, cosy, cosz) or RX (vecx, vecy,
Resetting Loads on Existing Spring
Resize Members Whose Unity Check Value
436
Sa(0
Restraint Data in Local Element
Restraint Report - In Local Element

429
Restraints
Seam-
959
Re-use Last Eigensolution (Frequencies

Section 1 -
Section 2-
Review Section 3-
Seismic Coefficient Distribution Factor (mu)
Right-
Rigid Support
289
Sele

Index
763
Set North Direction 7
711
716
Should CAESAR II Size the Vent Stack

Square Root of the Sum of the Squares
109
Silhouette
Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog
Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint

slip- St
Snubbers Tab
Stiffness Fa
STOKES 5th Order Wave Theory
South African 1
Stream Function Wave Theory

Index
Tank
194
858
1255
Stress Intensification Factors and Stress
Stress Reduction Factors Cmy Technical Discussion of LIQT Interface

933 1172
Technical Discussion of the PIPENET
Technical Notes on CAESAR II
Structural Steel Checks - TEMPERATUR
1127
Temperature-
Sturm Sequence Check on Computed Theoretical Cold (Installation) L
Subspace Size (0-
555
Thermal Expansion Coefficient ID <or>
Sustained Stresses and Nonlinear

Thermodynamic Entropy Limit/Subsonic
796
T 794

Index
494, 495, 497, 503

Underly
Understanding Alternate Sustained (SUS)
Toggle Graphics U
877
Unsupported Length (In-
937
Unsupported Length (Out-Of-Plane
795, 796
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Opening
Updates and License
T- 422
Turbine -
Turbine Nozzle -
Tutorial A - Create a stress isometric
833
Tutorial B - Add annotations for Input and
Tutorial C - Add custom annotations and Use Out-of-C

configu
Tutorial D - Create and apply a stress ISO
Use Pressure Stress Indices (Div. 2 AD

956, 959
UCS- User-
535 User-
User-
User-

Index
User-Defined SIFs Anywhere in the Piping
User-
993
Wall Thickness
887
U-U
Valve and Flange Database
Valve Orifice Gas Conditions/Vent Pipe Exit

Gas Conditions/Subsonic Velocity Gas Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load
Valve/Flange Files Location
Vertical In-
Vertical Response Magnification Factor Weld Strength
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX, VY,
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosines VX,
869
Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load
Wind Pressure/Velocity vs. Elevation

(User-
Video Driver
Work with Report

Index
WRC 107 (537)/297/PD5500 Vessel/Nozzle

/
WRC Bulletin 2
WRC-
WRC-
WRC-
X (cosx, cosy, cosz) or X (vecx, vecy, vecz)
268
x, y, z
XROD (COSX, COSY, COSZ) or XROD
XSPR YSPR
Yield Stress Criterion

Yield Stress, Design <or> Yield Stress,
Z-
ZPA (Reg. Guide 1.60/UBC - g's) <or> #

Manual Caesar II 2019

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Caesar II 2019

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CAESAR II

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

CAESAR II User's Guide 2

CAESAR II User's Guide 3

Getting Started ........................................................................................................................................... 26

Configuration Editor .................................................................................................................................. 55

CAESAR II User's Guide 4

Geometry Directives ............................................................................................................................. 73

Piping Input Reference ........................................................................................................................... 112

CAESAR II User's Guide 5

Options Menu ............................................................................................................................... 369

Structural Steel Modeler ......................................................................................................................... 438

CAESAR II User's Guide 6

Underground Pipe Modeler .................................................................................................................... 536

Static Analysis ......................................................................................................................................... 563

CAESAR II User's Guide 7

Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box ................................................................................... 586

Static Output Processor ......................................................................................................................... 623

Dynamic Analysis .................................................................................................................................... 690

CAESAR II User's Guide 8

Modal Analysis ............................................................................................................................. 700

CAESAR II User's Guide 9

Increments .................................................................................................................................... 737

CAESAR II User's Guide 10

Modal ............................................................................................................................................ 798

Dynamic Output Processing .................................................................................................................. 801

Generate Stress Isometrics .................................................................................................................... 822

Equipment Component and Compliance .............................................................................................. 844

CAESAR II User's Guide 11

Intersection Crotch Radius ........................................................................................................... 851

Technical Discussions ............................................................................................................................ 969

CAESAR II User's Guide 12

CAESAR II User's Guide 13

Fatigue Analysis Using CAESAR II................................................................................................... 1024

Miscellaneous Processors ................................................................................................................... 1118

CAESAR II User's Guide 14

Material Selection Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 1128

External Interfaces ................................................................................................................................ 1142

CAESAR II User's Guide 15

Filename ..................................................................................................................................... 1182

CAESAR II Operational (Job) Data ....................................................................................................... 1246

Update History ....................................................................................................................................... 1249

CAESAR II User's Guide 16

CAESAR II Version 1.1S Features (2/86) ......................................................................................... 1250

Glossary ................................................................................................................................................. 1283

Index ....................................................................................................................................................... 1287

CAESAR II User's Guide 17

CAESAR II User's Guide 18

CAESAR II User's Guide 19

CAESAR II User's Guide 20

CAESAR II User's Guide 21

CAESAR II is a field-proven engineering analysis application. It is a widely recognized product

About the CAESAR II Documentation

Software Support/User Assistance

CAESAR II User's Guide 22

Software Revision Procedures

CAESAR II User's Guide 23

CAESAR II User's Guide 24

Updates and License Types

CAESAR II User's Guide 25

CAESAR II User's Guide 26

The main CAESAR II window displays.

CAESAR II User's Guide 27

Create a new job